GIFT  OF 

L.    A.    Williams 


IMM 


LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 


BY 

BENJAMIN  L.  D'OOGE,  Ph.D. 

PROFESSOR    IN    THE    MICHIGAN   STATE   NORMAL   COLLEGE 


GINN  AND  COMPANY 

BOSTON     •     NEW  YORK    •    CHICAGO    •    LONDON 

\ll  AVI    V      .      DAM   AS      .     COLUMBUS      •      SW    KKANCISCO 


COPYRIGHT,  1909,  1911,  BY  BENJAMIN   L.  D'OOGE 

ENTERED   AT   STATIONERS'  HALL 

ALL   RIGHTS   RESERVED 


611;. lO 


EDUCATION  DEPTr 


GINN  AND  COMPANY  •  PRO- 
PRIETORS •  BOSTON  •  U.S.A. 


FILIOLO  •  MEO 

QUI  •  ME  •  NON  •  SOLUM  •  DICENDA 

SED  •  ETIAM  •  TACENDA  •  DOCUIT 

HOC  .  OPUSCULUM  •  EST 

DEDICATUM 


7()<>942 


PREFACE 

To  make  the  course  preparatory  to  Caesar  at  the  same  time  sy& 
tematic,  thorough,  clear,  and  interesting  is  the  purpose  of  this  series 
of  lessons. 

The  first  pages  are  devoted  to  a  brief  discussion  of  the  Latin  lan- 
guage, its  history,  and  its  educational  value.  The  body  of  the  book, 
consisting  of  seventy-nine  lessons,  is  divided  into  three  parts. 

Part  I  is  devoted  to  pronunciation,  quantity,  accent,  and  kindred 
introductory  essentials. 

Part  II  carries  the  work  through  the  first  sbcty  lessons,  and  is 
devoted  to  the  study  of  forms  and  vocabulary,  together  with  some 
elementary  constructions,  a  knowledge  of  which  is  necessary  for  the 
translation  of  the  exercises  and  reading  matter.  The  first  few  lessons 
have  been  made  unusually  simple,  to  meet  the  wants  of  pupils  not 
well  grounded  in  English  grammar. 

Part  III  contains  nineteen  lessons,  and  is  concerned  primarily  with 
the  study  of  syntax  and  of  subjunctive  and  irregular  verb  forms.  The 
last  three  of  these  lessons  constitute  a  review  of  all  the  constructions 
presented  in  the  book.  There  is  abundant  easy  reading  matter ;  and, 
in  order  to  secure  proper  concentration  of  effort  upon  syntax  and 
translation,  no  new  vocabularies  are  introduced,  but  the  vocabularies 
in  Part  II  are  reviewed. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  following  features  will  commend  themselves  to 
teachers : 

The  forms  are  presented  in  their  natural  sequence,  and  are  given, 
for  the  most  part,  in  the  body  of  the  book  as  well  as  in  a  grammatical 
appendix.  The  work  on  the  verb  is  intensive  in  character,  work  in 
other  directions  being  reduced  to  a  minimum  while  this  is  going  on. 
The  forms  of  the  subjunctive  are  studied  in  correlation  with  the 
subjunctive  constructions. 


VI  PREFACE 

The  vocabulary  has  been  selected  with  the  greatest  care,  using 
Lodge's  "  Dictionary  of  Secondary  Latin "  and  Browne's  "  Latin 
Word  List "  as  a  basis.  There  are  about  six  hundred  words,  exclu- 
sive of  proper  names,  in  the  special  vocabularies,  and  these  are 
among  the  simplest  and  commonest  words  in  the  language.  More 
than  ninety-five  per  cent  of  those  chosen  are  Caesarian,  and  of  these 
more  than  ninety  per  cent  are  used  in  Caesar  five  or  more  times. 
The  few  words  not  Caesarian  are  of  such  frequent  occurrence  in 
Cicero,  Vergil,  and  other  authors  as  to  justify  their  appearance  here. 
But  teachers  desiring  to  confine  word  study  to  Caesar  can  easily  do  so, 
as  the  Caesarian  words  are  printed  in  the  vocabularies  in  distinctive 
type.  Concrete  nouns  have  been  preferred  to  abstract,  root  words  to 
compounds  and  derivatives,  even  when  the  latter  were  of  more  frequent 
occurrence  in  Caesar.  To  assist  the  memory,  related  English  words 
are  added  in  each  special  vocabulary.  To  insure  more  careful  prep- 
aration, the  special  vocabularies  have  been  removed  from  their 
respective  lessons  and  placed  by  themselves.  The  general  vocabulary 
contains  about  twelve  hundred  words,  and  of  these  above  eighty-five 
per  cent  are  found  in  Caesar. 

The  syntax  has  been  limited  to  those  essentials  which  recent  investi- 
gations, such  as  those  of  Dr.  Lee  Byrne  and  his  collaborators,  have 
shown  to  belong  properly  to  the  work  of  the  first  year.  The  construc- 
tions are  presented,  as  far  as  possible,  from  the  standpoint  of  English, 
the  English  usage  being  given  first  and  the  I^atin  compared  or  con- 
trasted with  it.  Special  attention  has  been  given  to  the  constructions 
of  participles,  the  gerund  and  gerundive,  and  the  infinitive  in  indirect 
statements.  Constructions  having  a  logical  connection  are  not  sepa- 
rated but  are  treated  together. 

Exercises  for  translation  occur  throughout,  those  for  translation 
into  Latin  being,  as  a  rule,  only  half  as  long  as  those  for  transla- 
tion into  English.  In  Part  III  a  few  of  the  commoner  idioms  in 
Caesar  are  introduced  and  the  sentences  are  drawn  mainly  from  that 
author.  From  first  to  last  a  consistent  effort  is  made  to  instill  a 
proper  regard  for  Latin  word  order,  the  first  principles  of  which  are 
laid  down  early  in  the  course. 


PREFACE  Vll 

Selections  for  reading  are  unusually  abundant  and  are  introduced 
from  the  earliest  possible  moment.  These  increase  in  number  and 
length  as  the  book  progresses,  and,  for  the  most  part,  are  made  an 
integral  part  of  the  lessons  instead  of  being  massed  at  the  end  of  the 
book.  This  arrangement  insures  a  more  constant  and  thorough  drill  in 
forms  and  vocabulary,  promotes  reading  power,  and  affords  a  breathing 
spell  between  succeeding  subjects.  The  material  is  drawn  from  his- 
torical and  mythological  sources,  and  the  vocabulary  employed  includes 
but  few  words  not  already  learned.  The  book  closes  with  a  continued 
story  which  recounts  the  chief  incidents  in  the  life  of  a  Roman  boy.  The 
last  chapters  record  his  experiences  in  Caesar's  army,  and  contain  much 
information  that  will  facilitate  the  interpretation  of  the  Commentaries. 
The  early  emphasis  placed  on  word  order  and  sentence  structure,  the 
simplicity  of  the  syntax,  and  the  familiarity  of  the  vocabulary,  make 
the  reading  selections  especially  useful  for  work  in  sight  translation. 

Reviews  are  called  for  at  frequent  intervals,  and  to  facilitate  this 
branch  of  the  work  an  Appendix  of  Reviews  has  been  prepared,  cov- 
ering both  the  vocabulary  and  the  grammar. 

The  illustrations  are  numerous,  and  will,  it  is  hoped,  do  much  to 
stimulate  interest  in  the  ancient  world  and  to  create  true  and  lasting 
impressions  of  Roman  life  and  times. 

A  consistent  effort  has  been  made  to  use  simple  language  and  clear 
explanation  throughout. 

As  an  aid  to  teachers  using  this  book  a  "  Teacher's  Manual "  has 
been  prepared,  which  contains,  in  addition  to  general  suggestions, 
notes  on  each  lesson. 

The  author  wishes  to  express  his  gratitude  to  the  numerous  teachers 
who  tested  the  advance  pages  in  their  classes,  and,  as  a  result  of  their 
experience,  have  given  much  valuable  aid  by  criticism  and  suggestion. 
Particular  acknowledgments  are  due  to  Miss  A.  Susan  Jones  of  the 
Central  High  School,  Grand  Rapids,  Michigan;  to  Miss  Clara  Allison 
of  the  High  School  at  Hastings,  Michigan ;  and  to  Miss  Helen  B.  Muir 
and  Mr.  Orland  O.  Norris,  teachers  of  Latin  in  this  institution. 

BENJAMIN  L.  D'OOGE 
Michigan  State  Normal  Collbok 


CONTENTS 


LESSON  PAGE 

To  THE  Student  —  By  way  of  Introduction o    .    .       1-4 

PART  I.  THE  PRONUNCIATION  OF  LATIN 

Alphabet,  Sounds  of  the  Letters,  Syllables,  Quantity,  Accent, 
How  TO  Read  Latin 5-11 

PART  II.  WORDS  AND   FORMS 

I-VI.  First  Principles  —  Subject  and  Predicate,  Inflection,  Num- 
ber, Nominative  Subject,  Possessive  Genitive,  Agreement  of 
Verb,  Direct  Object,  Indirect  Object,  etc.  —  Dialogue  .    .    .  12-24 
VTI-VIII.  First  or  ^-Declension  —  Gender,  Agreement  of  Adjectives, 

Word  Order   . 25-30 

IX-X.  Second  or  (9-Declension  —  General  Rules  for  De- 
clension—  Predicate  Noun,  Apposition  —  Dialogue  .    .  31-35 
XL  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions    .  36-37 

XII.  Nouns  in  -ius  and  -ium — Germania 38-39 

XIIL  Second  Declension  {Continued)  —  Nouns  in  -er  and  -ir  — 

Italia  —  Dialogue 39-4i 

XIV.  Possessive  Adjective  Pronouns 42-43 

XV.  Ablative  denoting  With  —  Cause,   Means,  Accompani- 
ment, Manner —  The  Romans  Prepare  for  War  .    .  44-46 

XVI.  The  Nine  Irregular  Adjectives 46-47 

,        XVII.  The  Demonstrative  is,  ea,  id  — Dialogue 48-50 

XVIII.  Conjugation  —  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  of  sum  — 

Dialogue 5^-53 

XIX.  Present  Active  Indicative  of  amo  and  mone5  .    .    .  54-56 
XX.  Imperfect  Active  Indicative  of  amo  and  moneo  — 

Meaning  of  the  Imperfect— ^lo^Y.  AND  her  Children.  56-57 
XXI.  Future  Active  Indicative  of  am5  and  moneo  —  Niobe 

AND  HER  Children  {Concluded) 5^-59 

XXII.  Review  of  Verbs—  The  Dative  with  Adjectives — Cornelia     ' 

AND  HER  Jewels 59~6i 

viii 


CONTENTS  ix 

LESSON  PAGE 

XXIII.  Present  Activk  Indicative  of  wg6  and  andiS  — 

Cornelia  and  her  Jewels  (Concluded)   ....      61-63 

XXIV.  Imperfect  Active  Indicative  of  reg6  and  audiO  — 

ne  Dative  with  Special  Intransitive  Verbs   ....       63-65 
XXV.  Future  Active  Indicative  of  reg6  and  audid  .    .      65-66 
XXVI.  Verbs  in  -15  —  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Active 

Indicative  of  capid  —  The  Imperative 66-68 

XXVII.  Passive  Voice — Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future 
Indicative  of  am5  and  moneo  —  Perseus  and  An- 
dromeda           68-72 

XX VIII.  Present,    Imperfect,    and    Future    Indicative 
Passive    of    regS    and    audi5  —  Perseus    and 

Andromeda  {Continued) 72-73 

XXIX.  Present,  Imperfect,  and  Future  Indicative 
Passive  of -16  Verbs  —  Present  Passive  Infini- 
tive and  Imperative    73-75 

XXX.  Synopses  in  the  Four  Conjugations — The  Abla- 
tive denoting  From  —  Place  from  Which,  Sepa- 
ration,  Personal  Agent      75-78 

XXXI.  Perfect,  Pluperfect,  and  Future  Perfect  of 

sum  —  Dialogue 79-81 

XXXII.  Perfect  Active  Indicative  of  the  Four  Regular 
Conjugations  — il/^-aw/w^j  0/  the  Perfect — Per- 
seus AND  Andromeda  {Continued) 81-83 

XXXIII.  Pluperfect  and  Future  Perfect  Active  Indica- 
tive—  Perfect  Active  Infinitive 84-85 

XWIV.  Review   of  the   Active  Voice  —  Perseus   and 

Andromeda  {Concluded) 86-87 

V .  Passive  Perfects  of  the  Indicative  —  Perfect 

Passive  and  Future  Active  Infinitive     .    .    .      88-90 
XXXVI.  Review  OF  Principal  Parts  —  Prepositions,  Yes-or- 

I  No  Questions 9^-93 

XXXVII.  Conjugation  of  possum —  The  Infinitive  used  as  in 
English  —  Accusative    Subject  of  an    Infinitive  — 

The  Faithless  Tarpeia 93-96 

XXXVIII.  The  Relative  Pronoun  and  the  Interrogative 
Pronoun — Agreement  of  the  PeUUive  —  The  Faith- 
less Tarpeia  {Concluded) 97-101 

XXXIX-XLI.  The  Third  Declension  — Consonant  Stems  .    .    .  101-106 

XLII.  Review  Lesson  —  Terror  Cimbrk  107 

XLIII.  Third  Declension  —  /-Stems.    .  loS-iio 


X  •  CONTENTS 

LESSON  PAGE 

XLIV.  Irregular  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  —  Gender 
IN  THE  Third  Declension— The  First  Bridge  over  . 

THE  Rhine 111-112 

XLV.  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension— The  Romans 

Invade  the  Enemy's  Country 113-115 

XLVI.  The  Fourth  OR  ^-Declension 116-117 

XLVII.  Expressions  of  Place  —  Place  to  Which,  Place  from  Which, 
Place  at  or  in  Which,  the  Locative  —  Declension  of  domus 

—  D^DALUS  and  Icarus 117-121 

XLVIII.  The    Fifth    or   ^-Declension  —  Ablative    of    Time  — 

DAEDALUS  AND  Icarus  (C^;?^/««^^) 121-123 

XLIX.  Pronouns  —  Personal  and  Reflexive  Pronouns  —  D.^da- 

\M%  K^n  \(ZKm5^  {Concluded) 123-126 

L.  The  Intensive  Pronoun  ipse  and  the  Demonstrative 

idem  —  How  Horatius  Held  the  Bridge  .....  126-127 
LI.  The  Demonstratives  hie,  iste,  ille  —  A  German  Chief- 
tain  Addresses   his   Followers — How   Horatius 

Held  the  Bridge  [Continued) 128-130 

LII.  The  Indefinite  Pronouns  —  How  Horatius  Held  the 

Bridge  {Concluded) 130-132 

LI II.  Regular  Comparison  of  Adjectives ^33-i35 

LIV.  Irregular  Comparison  of  Adjectives  —  Ablative  with 

Comparatives 135-136 

LV.  Irregular   Comparison   of  Adjectives  {Continued)  — 

Declension  of  pliis 137-138 

LVI.  Irregular  Comparison   of  Adjectives  {Concluded)  — 

Ablative  of  the  Measure  of  Difference .   138-139 

LVII.  Formation  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs 140-142 

LVIII.  Numerals  —  Partitive  Genitive 142-144 

LIX.  Numerals  {Contijiued)  —  Accusative  of  Extent  —  Caesar  in 

Gaul 144-146 

LX.  Deponent  Verbs  —  Prepositions  with  the  Accusative  .    .    .  146-147 

PART  III.    CONSTRUCTIONS 

LXI.  The  Subjunctive  Mood  —  Inflection  of  the  Present  — 

Indicative  and  Subjunctive  Compared 1 48-1 51 

LXII.  The  Subjunctive  OF  Purpose 151-153 

LXIII.  Inflection  of  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  —  Sequence 

of  Tenses 1 53-^55 

LXIV.  Inflection  of  the  Perfect  and  Pluperfect  Subjunc- 
tive—  Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose 156-159 


CONTENTS  xi 

LRSSON  fM.H 

LXV.  Subjunctive  OF  possum— />r*j  <»//i'<in>ix' 160-161 

LXVL  The  Participles  —  Tenses  and  Declension 161-164 

I. WIT.  The   Irregular  Verbs   vo15,    n616,    malS—  /M/Z/V/^r 

Absolute 164-166 

I  XV 1 1 1.   1  HE  Irregular  Verb  fi6  —  Subjunctive  of  /Vj»..  .    .    .  167-168 
LXIX.  Subjunctive  OF  Characteristic — Predicate  Accusative  169-171 
LXX.  Constructions  WITH  cum  —  Ablative  of  Specification     .  1 71-173 
LXXI.  Vocabulary  Review  —  Gerund  and  Gerundive  —  Predi- 
cate Genitive *73-i77 

LXXII.  The  Irregular  Verb  e6  —  Indirect  Statements  ....  177-180 
I.XXIII.  Vocabulary  Review  — The  Irregular  Verb  fero  — 

Dative  with  Compounds 1 81-183 

LXXIV.  Vocabulary  ^v.wv.w  — Subjunctive  in  Indirect  Questions  183-185 
LXXV.  Vocabulary  Review  —  Dative  of  Purpose  or  End  for 

Which 185-186 

LXXVI.  Vocabulary  Review  —  Genitive  and  Ablative  of  Quality 

or  Description 186-188 

LXXVII.  Review  op  Agreement — Rcoiew  of  the  Genitive,  Dative, 

and  Accusative 189-190 

LXXVIII.  Review  of  THE  Ablative  .    . 191-192 

LXXIX.  Review  ok  the  Syntax  of  Verbs '92-193 

READING  MATTER 

Introductory  Suggestions 194-195 

The  Labors  of  Hercules 196-203 

P.  Cornelius  Lentulus:  The  Story  of  a  Roman  Boy  ....  204-225 

APPENDIXES  AND  VOCABULARIES 

Appendix  I.  Tables  of  Declensions,  Conjugations, 

Numerals,  etc 226-260 

Appendix  II.   Rules  of  Syntw 261-264 

Appendix  III.   Reviews 265-282 

Special  Vocabularies * 283-298 

Latin-English  Vocabulary  .    .  299-331 

English-Latin  Vocabulary  .    .  332-343 

'NDEX 3^.348 


ILLUSTRATIONS   IN  COLOR 


Plate  I 


PAGE 


«LENTULUS  AD  VILLAM  SUAM  PROPERAVIT"      .      .       .   Frontispiece 

By  E.  Forti,  Rome.    From  a  facsimile  colored  under  the 
direction  of  the  artist. 


Plate  II 


"STABIANA  PORTA  URBEM  INGRESSI  SUNT" 52 

By  E.  Forti,  Rome.    From  a  facsimile  colored  under  the 
direction  of  the  artist. 


Plate  III 

CAPTIVI   INTERROGANTUR 1 48 

By  Edmund  H.  Garrett,  Boston.   From  an  original  painting 
in  oil. 

Plate  IV 

"ECCE  CAESAR  NUNC  TRIUMPHAT" 2I_' 

By  Edmund  H.  Garrett,  Boston.    From  an  original  painting 
in  oil. 

Map 

italia  antiqua  0     .       i 


LATIN   FOR   BEGINNERS 


TO  THE  STUDENT  — BY  WAY  OF 
INTRODUCTION 

What  is  Latin  ?  If  you  will  look  at  the  map  of  Italy  on  the  oppo- 
site f)age,  you  will  find  near  the  middle  of  the  peninsula  and  facing  the 
west  coast  a  district  called  Latium,^  and  Rome  its  capital.  The  Latin 
language,  meaning  the  language  of  Latium,  was  spoken  by  the  ancient 
Romans  and  other  inhabitants  of  Latium,  and  Latin  was  the  name 
applied  to  it  after  the  armies  of  Rome  had  carried  the  knowledge  of 
her  language  far  beyond  its  original  boundaries.  As  the  English  of 
to-day  is  not  quite  the  same  as  that  spoken  two  or  three  hundred 
years  ago,  so  Latin  was  not  always  the  same  at  all  times,  but  changed 
more  or  less  in  the  course  of  centuries.  The  sort  of  Latin  you  are 
going  to  learn  was  in  use  about  two  thousand  years  ago.  And  that 
period  has  been  selected  because  the  language  was  then  at  its  best 
and  the  greatest  works  of  Roman  literature  were  being  produced. 
This  period,  because  of  its  supreme  excellence,  is  called  the  Golden 
Age  of  Roman  letters. 

The  Spread  of  Latin.  For  some  centuries  after  Rome  was  founded, 
the  Romans  were  a  feeble  and  insignificant  people,  their  territory  was 
limited  to  Latium,  and  their  existence  constandy  threatened  by  warlike 
neighbors.  But  after  the  third  century  before  Christ,  Rome's  power 
grew  rapidly.  She  conquered  all  Italy,  then  reached  out  for  the  lands 
across  the  sea  and  beyond  the  Alps,  and  finally  ruled  over  the  whole 
ancient  world    The  empire  thus  established  lasted  for  more  than  four 

*  Pronounce  Ld^ ski-Am. 
I 


2  TO  THE  STUDENT 

hundred  years.  The  importance  of  latin  increased  with  the  growth  of 
Roman  power,  ind  what  h^d  been  a  dialect  spoken  by  a  single  tribe 
became  the,  univj^rs^  langitag^.  Gradually  the  language  changed 
somewhat,  iieyTe].op5i;ig;  diffefentlydti  different  countries.  In  Italy  it  has 
become  Italian,  in  Spain  Spanish,  and  in  France  French.  All  these 
nations,  therefore,  are  speaking  a  modernized  form  of  Latin. 

The  Romans  and  the  Greeks.  In  their  career  of  conquest  the 
Romans  came  into  conflict  with  the  Greeks.  The  Greeks  were  in- 
ferior to  the  Romans  in  military  power,  but  far  superior  to  them  in 
culture.  They  excelled  in  art,  literature,  music,  science,  and  philosophy. 
Of  all  these  pursuits  the  Romans  were  ignorant  until  contact  with 
Greece  revealed  to  them  the  value  of  education  and  filled  them  with 
the  thirst  for  knowledge.  And  so  it  came  about  that  while  Rome 
conquered  Greece  by  force  of  arms,  Greece  conquered  Rome  by  force 
of  her  intellectual  superiority  and  became  her  schoolmaster.  It  was 
soon  the  established  custom  for  young  Romans  to  go  to  Athens 
and  to  other  centers  of  Greek  learning  to  finish  their  training,  and  the 
knowledge  of  the  Greek  language  among  the  educated  classes  became 
universal.  At  the  same  time  many  cultured  Greeks  —  poets,  artists, 
orators,  and  philosophers  —  flocked  to  Rome,  opened  schools,  and 
taught  their  arts.  Indeed,  the  preeminence  of  Greek  culture  became 
so  great  that  Rome  almost  lost  her  ambition  to  be  original,  and  her 
writers  vied  with  each  other  in  their  efforts  to  reproduce  in  Latin 
what  was  choicest  in  Greek  literature.  As  a  consequence  of  all  this, 
the  civilization  and  national  life  of  Rome  became  largely  Grecian,  and 
to  Greece  she  owed  her  literature  and  her  art. 

Rome  and  the  Modern  World.  After  conquering  the  world,  Rome 
impressed  her  language,  laws,  customs  of  living,  and  modes  of 
thinking  upon  the  subject  nations,  and  they  became  Roman;  and 
the  world  has  remained  largely  Roman  ever  since.  Latin  continued 
to  live,  and  the  knowledge  of  Latin  was  the  only  light  of  learning  that 
burned  steadily  through  the  dark  ages  that  followed  the  downfall  of 
the  Roman  Empire.  Latin  was  the  common  language  of  scholars  and 
remained  so  even  down  to  the  days  of  Shakespeare.    Even  yet  it  is 


1()    IHE  STUDENT  3 

more  nearly  than  any  other  tongue  the  universal  language  of  the 
learned.  The  life  of  to-day  is  much  nearer  the  life  of  ancient  Rome 
than  the  lapse  of  centuries  would  lead  one  to  suppose.  You  and  I  are 
Romans  still  in  many  ways,  and  if  Caesar  and  Cicero  should  appear 
among  us,  we  should  not  find  them,  except  for  dress  and  language, 
much  unlike  men  of  to<iay. 

Latin  and  English.  Do  you  know  that  more  than  half  of  the  words 
in  the  English  dictionary  are  Latin,  and  that  you  are  speaking  more 
or  less  Latin  every  day  ?  How  has  this  come  about  ?  In  the  year 
1 066  William  the  Conqueror  invaded  England  with  an  army  of  Nor- 
mans. The  Normans  spoke  French  —  which,  you  remember,  is 
descended  from  Latin  —  and  spread  their  language  to  a  considerable 
extent  over  England,  and  so  Norman-French  played  an  important 
part  in  the  formation  of  English  and  forms  a  large  proportion  of  our 
vocabulary.  Furthermore,  great  numbers  of  almost  pure  Latin  words 
have  been  brought  into  English  through  the  writings  of  scholars,  and 
every  new  scientific  discovery  is  marked  by  the  addition  of  new  terms 
of  Latin  derivation.  Hence,  while  the  simpler  and  commoner  words 
of  our  mother  tongue  are  Anglo-Saxon,  and  Anglo-Saxon  forms  the 
staple  of  our  colloquial  language,  yet  in  the  realms  of  literature,  and 
especially  in  poetry,  words  of  Latin  derivation  are  very  abundant 
Also  in  the  learned  professions,  as  in  law,  medicine,  and  engineering, 
a  knowledge  of  Latin  is  necessary  for  the  successful  interpretation  of 
technical  and  scientific  terms. 

Why  study  Latin  ?  The  foregoing  paragraphs  make  it  clear  why 
Latin  forms  so  important  a  part  of  modem  education.  We  have  seen 
that  our  civilization  rests  upon  that  of  Greece  and  Rome,  and  that 
we  must  look  to  the  past  if  we  would  understand  the  present.  It  is 
obvious,  too,  that  the  knowledge  of  Latin  not  only  leads  to  a  more 
exact  and  effective  use  of  our  own  language,  but  that  it  is  of  vital 
importance  and  of  great  practical  value  to  any  one  preparing  for  a 
literary  or  professional  career.  To  this  it  may  be  added  that  the 
study  of  Latin  throws  a  flood  of  light  upon  the  structure  of  language 
in  general  and  lays  an  excellent  foundation  for  all  grammatical  study. 


4  TO  THE  STUDENT 

Finally,  it  has  been  abundantly  proved  that  there  is  no  more  effective 
means  of  strengthening  the  mind  than  by  the  earnest  pursuit  of  this 
branch  of  learning. 

Review  Questions.  Whence  does  Latin  get  its  name  ?  Where  is  Latium  ? 
Where  is  Rome  ?  Was  Latin  always  the  same  ?  What  sort  of  Latin  are  we 
to  study  ?  Describe  the  growth  of  Rome's  power  and  the  spread  of  Latin. 
What  can  you  say  of  the  origin  of  Italian,  French,  and  Spanish  ?  How  did 
the  ancient  Greeks  and  Romans  compare  ?  How  did  Greece  influence  Rome? 
How  did  Rome  influence  the  world  ?  In  what  sense  are  we  Romans  still? 
What  did  Latin  have  to  do  with  the  formation  of  English  ?  What  propor- 
tion of  English  words  are  of  Latin  origin,  and  what  kind  of  words  are  they? 
Why  should  we  study  Latin? 


PART  I 
THE  PRONUNCIATION  OF  LATIN 


THE  ALPHABET 

1.  The  Latin  alphabet  contains  the  same  letters  as  the  English 
cept  that  it  has  no  w  and  no/ 

2.  The  vowels,  as  in  English,  are  dr,  ^,  /,  o,  «,  y.   The  other  letters 
c  consonants. 

3.  /  is  used  both  as  a  vowel  and  as  a  consonant.  Before  a  vowel 
in  the  same  syllable  it  has  the  value  of  a  consonant  and  is  called  / 

>i  sonant. 
Thus  in  lu-li-us  the  first  /  is  a  consonant,  the  second  a  vowel. 

SOUNDS  OF  THE  LETTERS » 

4.  Latin  was  not  pronounced  like  English.  The  Romans  at  the 
beginning  of  the  Christian  era  pronounced  their  language  substantially 

described  below. 

5.  The  vowels  have  the  following  sounds : 

Vowels*  Latin  Examples 

a  as  \n  father  hac,  stas 

&  like  the  first  a  in  a/ia\  never  as  in  hat  4'-mit,  ci'-naa 

8  as  in  they  te'-lS,  me'-ti 

*  as  in  met  tfe'-nSt,  mir'-ces 

i  as  in  machiiu  sftr'-ti,  pra'-ti 

1  N.B.  The  sounds  of  the  letters  are  best  learned  by  hearing  them  correctly 
pronounced.  The  matter  in  this  section  is,  therefore,  intended  for  reference 
rather  than  for  assignment  as  a  lesson.  As  a  first  step  it  is  suggested  that  the 
teacher  pronounce  the  examples  in  class,  the  pupils  following. 

*  Long  vowels  are  marked  -,  short  ones  ^. 

5 


_L. 


6  PRONUNCIATION 

Vowels  Latin  Examples 

1  as  in  bit  si'-tis,  bi'-bi 

0  as  in  holy               '  Ro'-mK,  5'-ris 

8  as  in  wholly^  never  as  in  hot  mS'-dQ,  b6'-nos 

u  as  in  rude^  or  as  oo  in  boot  u'-m6r,  tti'-ber 

ii  as  infull^  or  as  oo  mfoot  lit,  tu'-tiis 

Note.    It  is  to  be  observed  that  there  is  a  decided  difference  in  sound, 

except  in  the  case  of  a,  between  the  long  and  the  short  vowels.   It  is  not 
merely  a  matter  of  quantity  but  also  of  quality. 

6.  In  diphthongs  (two-vowel  sounds)  both  vowels  are  heard  in  a 
single  syllable. 

Diphthongs  Latin  Examples 

ae  as  ai  in  aisle  tae'-dae 

au  as  ou  in  out  gau'-dSt 

ei  as  ei  in  eight  hei 
eu  as  ^'oo  (a  short  e  followed  by  a  short  u 

in  one  syllable)  seu 

oe  like  oi  in  toil  foe'-diis 
ui  like  do' I  (a  short  u  followed  by  a  short  / 

in  one  syllable.    Cf.  English  we)  cui,  huic 

Note.   Give  all  the  vowels  and  diphthongs  their  proper  sounds  and  do  not 

slur  over  them  in  unaccented  syllables,  as  is  done  in  English. 

7.  Consonants  are  pronounced  as  in  English,  except  that 

Consonants  Latin  Examples 
c  is  always  like  c  in  cat,  never  as  in  cent  cS'-do,  ci'-biis,  ce'-nS 
g  is  always  like  g  in  get,  never  as  in  gem  g6'-m6,  gig'-no 
i  consonant  is  always  like  y  in  yes  iam,  ifi'-ciis 
n  before  c,  qu,  or g  is  like  ng  in  sing  (com- 
pare the  sound  of  n  in  anchor)  Sn'-cd-ri  (ang'-ko-ra) 
qu,  gu,  and  sometimes  su  before  a  vowel 
have  the  sound  of  qw,  gw,  and  sw. 

Here  u  has  the  value  of  consonant  v  in'-quit,  qui,  lln'-guS, 

and  is  not  counted  a  vowel  sSn'-guIs,  sua'-d6-6 

s  is  like  s  in  sea,  never  as  in  ease  r5'-sS,  !s 
t  is  always  like  /  in  native,  never  as  in 

nation  ra'-ti-6,  na'-ti-6 


SYLLABLES  7 

Consonants  Latin  Examplks 

T  is  like  w  in  wine^  never  as  in  vine  vi'-nfim,  vlr 

z  has  the  value  of  two  consonants  (^j  or  ^j) 

and  is  like  x  in  extract,  not  as  in  exact        6x'-tra,  6x-ac'-tfia 
bs  is  like  ps  and  bt  like  pt  iirbs,  0b-tI'-n&-5 

ch,  ph,  and  th  are  like  c,p,  t  pfir-ch6r,  Phoe'-be,th6^'-triim 

a.  In  combinations  of  consonants  give  each  its  distinct  sound.  Doubled 
consonants  should  be  pronounced  with  a  slight  pause  between  the  two 
sounds.  Thus  pronounce  //  as  in  rat-trap,  not  as  in  rattle;  pp  as  in 
hop-pole,  not  as  in  upper.    Examples,  mlt'-t6,  Ap'pl-tta,  bir-lfim. 

SYLLABLES 

8.  A  Latin  word  has  as  many  syllables  as  it  has  vowels  and  diph- 
thongs.  Thus  aes-ta'-tg  has  three  syllables,  au-di-gn'-dtts  has  four. 

a.  Two  vowels  with  a  consonant  between  them  never  make  one  syllable, 
as  is  so  often  the  case  in  English.  Compare  English  inside  with  Latin 
in-ai'-^i. 

9.  Words  are  divided  into  syllables  as  follows : 

1.  A  single  consonant  between  two  vowels  goes  with  the  second. 
Thus  a-mi'-bi-Us,  m6-m6'-ri-a,  iii-t6'-r6-ft,  i'-bgst,  p6-r6'-git.^ 

2.  Combinations  of  two  or  more  consonants : 

a.  A  consonant  followed  by  /  or  r  goes  with  the  /or  r.  Thus  p&'-bU-cfis, 

Exception.  Prepositional  compounds  of  this  nature,  as  also  //  and  rr, 
foUow  rule  d.   Thus  ib'-lfi-e,  Xb-riim'-p5,  UMd,  f6r'-rttm. 

d.  In  all  other  conibinations  of  consonants  the  first  consonant  goes  with 
the  preceding  vowel.*  Thus  mig'-niis,  e-g6s'-tas,  vic-t6'-ri-a,  htts'-pds, 
in'-nfia,  sfi-b&c'-tiis. 

3.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  called  the  ul'-ti-ma;  the  one  next 
to  the  last,  the  pe-nult' ;  the  one  before  the  penult,  the  an -te-pe-nulf . 

^  In  writing  and  printing  it  is  customary  to  divide  the  parts  of  a  compound, 
as  inter-eA,  ab-est,  sub-Actus,  per-figit,  contrary  to  the  correct  phonetic  rule. 
'  The  combination  net  is  divided  nc-t,  as  fOnc-tfls,  sJLnc-tfia. 


8  QUANTITY 

10.  EXERCISE 

Divide  the  words  in  the  following  passage  into  syllables  and  pronounce 
them,  placing  the  accent  as  indicated : 

Vade  ad  formicam,  O  piger,  et  considera  vias  eiiis  et  disce  sapien- 
tiam :  quae  cum  non  habeat  diicem  nee  praeceptorem  nee  principem, 
parat  in  aestate  cibum  sibi  et  congregat  in  messe  quod  comedat. 

[Go  to  the  ant,  thou  sluggard ;  consider  her  ways,  and  be  wise : 
which,  having  no  guide,  overseer,  or  ruler,  provideth  her  meat  in  the 
summer  and  gathereth  her  food  in  the  harvest.] 

QUANTITY 

11.  The  quantity  of  a  vowel  or  a  syllable  is  the  time  it  takes  to 
pronounce  it.  Correct  pronunciation  and  accent  depend  upon  the 
proper  observance  of  quantity. 

12.  Quantity  of  Vowels.  Vowels  are  either  long  (-)  or  short  (-). 
In  this  book  the  long  vowels  are  marked.  Unmarked  vowels  are  to 
be  considered  short. 

1.  A  vowel  is  short  before  another  vowel  or  h ;  as  p6-e'-ta,  trS'-ho. 

2.  A  vowel  is  short  before  7it  and  nd,  before  final  m  or  /,  and, 
except  in  words  of  one  syllable,  before  final  /  or  r.  Thus  a'-m5nt, 
a-man'-dus,  a-ma'-bSm,  a-ma'-bSt,  a'-ni-mSl,  a'-m6r. 

3.  A  vowel  is  long  before  nf^  ns,  nx,  and  nd.  Thus  in^-fe-ro, 
re^-gens,  san'-xi,  sanc'-tus. 

4.  Diphthongs  are  always  long,  and  are  not  marked. 

13.  Quantity  of  Syllables.  Syllables  are  either  long  or  short,  and 
their  quantity  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  that  of  vowels. 

I.  A  syllable  is  short, 

a.  If  it  ends  in  a  short  vowel;  as  S'-mS,  pi'-gri. 

Note.  In  final  syllables  the  short  vowel  may  be  followed  by  a  final  conso- 
nant. Thus  the  word  m6-m6'-ri-im  contains  four  short  syllables.  In  the  first 
three  a  short  vowel  ends  the  syllable,  in  the  last  the  short  vowel  is  followed 
by  a  final  consonant. 


ACCENT  9 

2.  A  syllable  is  long, 

a.  If  it  contains  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong,  as  cfl'-rO,  poe'-nae, 
aes-ti'-te. 

/'.  If  it  ends  in  a  consonant  which  is  followed  by  another  consonant, 
as  cor'-pus,  mag'-nus. 

Note.  The  vowel  in  a  long  syllable  may  be  either  long  or  short,  and  should 
be  pronounced  accordingly.  Thus  in  ter'-ra,  in'-ter,  the  first  syllable  is  long, 
but  the  vowel  in  each  case  is  short  and  should  be  given  the  short  sound.  In 
words  like  saxum  the  first  syllable  is  long  because  x  has  the  value  of  two 
consonants  (cs  or  gs). 

3.  In  determining  quantity  h  is  not  counted  a  consonant. 

Note.  Give  about  twice  as  much  time  to  the  long  syllables  as  to  the  short 
ones.  It  takes  about  as  long  to  pronounce  a  short  vowel  plus  a  consonant  as 
it  does  to  pronounce  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong,  and  so  these  quantities  are 
considered  equally  long.  For  example,  it  takes  about  as  long  to  say  cflr'-ro  as 
it  does  cu'-r5,  and  so  each  of  these  first  syllables  is  long.  Compare  mdr-lis  and 
mo'-lis,  a-mis'-si  and  a-mi'-si. 

ACCENT 

14.  Words  of  two  syllables  are  accented  on  the  first,  as  mCn'-sa, 
Cae'-sar. 

15.  Words  of  more  than  two  syllables  are  accented  on  the  penult 
if  the  penult  is  long.  If  the  penult  is  short,  accent  the  antepenult. 
Thus  mo-n6'-mus,  re'-gi-tur,  a-gri'-co-la,  a-man'-4u8. 

Note.  Observe  that  the  position  of  the  accent  is  determined  by  the  length 
of  the  syllable  and  not  by  the  length  of  the  vowel  in  the  syllable.    (Cf.  §  13.  2, 

Note.) 

16.  Certain  little  words  called  enclit'ics^  which  have  no  separate 
existence,  are  added  to  and  pronounced  with  a  preceding  word.  The 
most  common  are  -que,  and ;  -vc,  or;  and  -ne,  the  question  sign. 
The  syllable  before  an  enclitic  takes  the  accent,  regardless  of  its 
quantity.   Thus  populus'que,  dea'que,  rfigna've,  audit 'ne. 

^  Enclitic  means  leaning  baek^  and  that  is,  as  you  see,  just  what  these  little 
words  do.  They  cannot  stand  alone  and  so  they  lean  back  for  support  upon 
the  preceding  word. 


lO 


EXERCISE  IN  PRONUNCIATION 


HOW  TO   READ   LATIN 

'■  17.  To  read  Latin  well  is  not  so  difficult,  if  you  begin  right.  Cor- 
rect habits  of  reading  should  be  formed  now.  Notice  the  quantities 
carefully,  especially  the  quantity  of  the  penult,  to  insure  your  getting 
the  accent  on  the  right  syllable.  (Cf.  §  15.)  Give  every  vowel  its 
proper  sound  and  every  syllable  its  proper  length.  Then  bear  in 
mind  that  we  should  read  Latin  as  we  read  English,  in  phrases  rather 
than  in  separate  words.  Group  together  words  that  are  closely  con- 
nected in  thoughts    No  good  reader  halts  at  the  end  of  each  word. 

18.  Read  the  stanzas  of  the  following  poem  by  Longfellow,  one  at  a 
time,  first  the  English  and  then  the  Latin  version.  The  syllables  inclosed 
in  parentheses  are  to  be  slurred  or  omitted  to  secure  smoothness  of  meter. 


EXCELSIOR  [HIGHER]  !  1 


The  shades  of  night  were  falling  fast, 
As  through  an  Alpine  village  passed 
A  youth,  who  bore,  'mid  snow  and  ice, 
A  banner  with  the  strange  device. 
Excelsior ! 


-Cadebant  noctis  umbrae,  dum 
I  bat  per  vicum  Alpicum 
Gelu  nivequ(e)  adolescens, 
Vexillum  cum  sign5  ferens, 
Excelsior ! 


His  brow  was  sad ;  his  eye  beneath, 
Flashed  like  a  falchion  from  its  sheath, 
And  like  a  silver  clarion  rung 
The  accents  of  that  unknown  tongue. 
Excelsior ! 


Frons  tristis,  micat  oculus 
Velut  e  vagina  gladius ; 
Sonantque  similes  tubae 
Accentus  lingu(ae)  incognitae. 
Excelsior ! 


In  happy  homes  he  saw  the  light 
Of  household  fires  gleam  warm  and  bright ; 
Above,  the  spectral  glaciers  shone. 
And  from  his  lips  escaped  a  groan. 
Excelsior ! 


In  domibus  videt  claras 
Foc5rum  luces  calidas ; 
Relucet  glades  acris, 
Et  rumpit  gemitus  labris, 
Excelsior ! 


"  Try  not  the  Pass  !  "  the  old  man  said 
"  Dark  lowers  the  tempest  overhead, 


Dicit  senex,  "  Ne  transeas ! 
Supra  nigrescit  tempestas ; 


1  Translation  by  C.  W.  Goodchild  in  Praeco  Laiinus,  October,  1898. 


EXERCISE  IN  PRONUNCIATION 


II 


The  roaring  torrent  is  deep  and  wide ! 
And  loud  that  clarion  voice  replied, 
Excelsior ! 


Latus  et  altus  est  torrgns." 
Clara  venit  vox  respond€ns, 
Excelsior ! 


At  break  of  day,  as  heavenward 
The  pious  monks  of  Saint  Bernard 
Uttered  the  oft-repeated  prayer, 
A  voice  cried  through  the  starded  air, 
Excelsior ! 


lam  Kicescebat,  et  fratr€s 
SanctI  Bernard!  vigiles 
Orabant  preces  solitas, 
Cum  vox  clamavit  per  auras. 
Excelsior ! 


A  traveler,  by  the  faithful  hound. 
Half-buried  in  the  snow  was  found. 
Still  grasping  in  his  hand  of  ice 
That  banner  with  the  strange  device, 
Excelsior ! 


Semi-sepultus  viator 
Can(e)  a  fido  reperltur, 
Comprendens  pugno  gelido 
Illud  vexillum  cum  signo. 
Excelsior ! 


There  in  the  twilight  cold  and  gray, 
Lifeless,  but  beautiful,  he  lay, 
And  from  the  sky,  serene  and  far, 
A  voice  fell,  like  a  falling  star, 
Excelsior ! 


lacet  corpus  exanimum 
Sed  luce  frigida  pulchrum  ; 
Et  caelo  procul  exiens 
Cadit  vox,  ut  Stella  cadens. 
Excelsior ! 


PART  II 
WORDS  AND  FORMS 

LESSON  I 

FIRST  PRINCIPLES 

19.  Subject  and  Predicate,  i.  Latin,  like  English,  expresses  thoughts 
by  means  of  sentences.  A  sentence  is  a  combination  of  words  that 
expresses  a  thought,  and  in  its  simplest  form  is  the  statement  of  a 
single  fact.    Thus, 

Galba  is  a  farmer  The  sailor  fights 

Galba  est  agricola  Nauta  pugnat 


In  each  of  these  sentences  there  are  two  parts : 


Subject 


is  a  farmer 
est  agricola 


Galba 

Galba 

Predicate- 

The  sailor  I  fights 

Nauta  I  pugnat 


2.  The  subject  is  that  person,  place,  or  thing  about  which  some- 
thing is  said,  and  is  therefore  a  noun  or  some  word  which  can  serve 
the  same  purpose. 

a.  Pronouns,  as  their  name  implies  (/n?,  "  instead  of,"  and  noun\  often 
take  the  place  of  nouns,  usually  to  save  repeating  the  same  noun,  as, 
Galba  is  a  farmer  j  he  is  a  sturdy  fellow. 

3.  The  predicate  is  that  which  is  said  about  the  subject,  and  con- 
sists of  a  verb  with  or  without  modifiers. 

a.  A  verb  is  a  word  which  asserts  something  (usually  an  act)  concerning 
a  person,  place,  or  thing. 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  1 3 

20.  The  Object.  In  the  two  sentences,  Tfie  boy  hit  the  ball  and 
The  ball  hit  the  boy,  the  same  words  are  used,  but  the  meaning  is 
different,  and  depends  upon  the  order  of  the  words.  The  doer  of  the 
act,  that  about  which  something  is  said,  is,  as  we  have  seen  above, 
the  subject.  That  to  which  something  is  done  is  the  direct  object  of 
the  verb.    The  boy  hit  the  ball  is  therefore  analyzed  as  follows : 

Subject  Predicate 

The  boy  hit  the  ball 

(verb)  (direct  object) 

n.  A  verb  whose  action  passes  over  to  the  object  directly,  as  in  the  sen- 
tence above,  is  called  a  transitive  verb.  A  verb  which  does  not  admit  of  a 
direct  object  is  called  intransitive,  as,  /  walk,  he  conies. 

21.  The  Copula.  The  verb  to  be  in  its  different  forms  —  are,  is, 
was,  etc.  —  does  not  tell  us  anything  about  the  subject ;  neither  does 
it  govern  an  object.  It  simply  connects  the  subject  with  the  word  or 
words  in  the  predicate  that  possess  a  distinct  meaning.  Hence  it  is 
called  the  copula,  that  is,  the  joiner  or  link. 

22.  In  the  following  sentences  pronounce  the  Latin  and  name  the 
nouns,  verbs,  subjects,  objects,  predicates,  copulas  : 

I.  America  est  patria  mea  2.  Agricola  fQiam  amat 

.  /  merica  is  fatherland  my  ( The)  farmer  {his)  daughter  loves 

3.  Filia  est  liilia  4.  liilia  et  agricola  sunt  in  insula 

{His)  daughter  is  Julia  Julia  and  {the) farmer  are  on  {the)island 

5.  liilia  aqnam  portat  6.  Rosam  in  comis  habet 

Julia  water  carries  {A)  rose  in  {her)  hair  {she)  has 

7.  liilia  est  puella  pulchra  8.  Domina  filiam  pulchram  habet 

Julia  is  {a)  girl  pretty  {^he)  lady  {a)  daughter  beautiful  has 

a.  The  sentences  above  show  that  Ladn  does  not  express  some  words 
which  are  necessary  in  English.  First  of  all,  Latin  has  no  article  the  or  a; 
thus  agrkoia  may  mean  the  farmer,  a  farmer,  or  sirnp\y  farmer.  Then,  too, 
the  personal  pronouns,  /,  you,  he,  she,  etc.,  and  the  possessive  pronouns, 
my,  your,  his,  her,  etc.,  are  not  expressed  if  the  meaning  of  the  sentence 
is  clear  without  them. 


14  FIRST  PRINCIPLES 

LESSON   II 
FIRST  PRINCIPLES  (Continued) 

23.  Inflection.  Words  may  change  their 'forms  to  indicate  some 
change  in  sense  or  use,  as,  is,  are ;  was,  were ;  who,  whose,  whom ; 
farmer,  farmer' s ;  woman,  women.  This  is  called  inflection.  The  in- 
flection of  a  noun,  adjective,  or  pronoun  is  called  its  declension,  that 
of  a  verb  its  conjugation. 

24.  Number.  Latin,  like  English,  has  two  numbers,  singular  and 
plural.  In  English  we  usually  form  the  plural  by  adding  -s  or  -es  to 
the  singular.  So  Latin  changes  the  singular  to  the  plural  by  changing 
the  ending  of  the  word.    Compare 

Naut-&  pugnat  The  sailor  fights 

Naut-ae  pugnant  The  sailors  fight 

25.  Rule.  Nouns  that  end  in  -a  in  the  singular  end  i7t  -ae 
itt  the  plural. 

26.  Learn  the  following  nouns  so  that  you  can  give  the  English  for  the 
Latin  or  the  Latin  for  the  English.    Write  the  plural  of  each. 

agri'cola,  j^rw^r  (agriculture)  ^  f uga,  flight  (fugitive) 

aqua,  water  (aquarium)  iniu'ria,  wrong,  injury 

causa,  cause,  reason  luna,  7noon  (lunar) 

do'mina,  lady  of  the  house,  nauta,  j-«//<?r  (nautical) 

jnistress  (dominate)  puel'la,  girl 

filia,  daughter  (filial)  silva,  _/i?r^j/ (silvan) 

fortn'na.,  fortune  terra,  land  (terrace) 

27.  Compare  again  the  sentences 

Nauta  pugna-t  The  sailor  fights 

Nautae  pugna-nt  The  sailors  fight 

In  the  first  sentence  the  verb  pugna-t  is  in  the  third  person  singular,  in 
the  second  sentence  pugna-nt  is  in  the  third  person  plural. 

1  The  words  in  parentheses  are  English  words  related  to  the  Latin.  When 
the  words  are  practically  identical,  as  causa,  cause,  no  comparison  is  needed. 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  1 5 

28.  Rule.  Agreement  of  Verb.  A  finite  verb  miist  always  be 
in  the  same  person  and  number  as  its  subject. 

29.  Rule.  ///  the  conjugation  of  the  Latin  verb  the  third  per- • 
son  singular  active  ends  in  -f ,  the  third  person  plural  in  -nt. 
The  endings  which  show  the  person  and  number  of  the  verb 
are  called  personal  endings. 

30.  Learn  the  following  verbs  and  write  the  plural  of  each.  The  per- 
sonal pronouns  he,  she,  it^  etc.,  which  are  necessary  in  the  inflection  of  the 
English  verb,  are  not  needed  in  the  Latin,  because  the  personal  endings 
take  their  place.  Of  course,  if  the  verb's  subject  is  expressed  we  do  not 
translate  the  personal  ending  by  a  pronoun ;  thus  nauta  pugnat  is  translated 
the  sailor  fights^  not  the  sailor  he  fights. 

ama-t      he  {she^  if)  loves^  is  loving^  does  love  (amity,  amiable) 
lab5'ra-t    "     "     "    labors^  is  laboring^  does  labor 
nuntia-t  ^  "     "     "   announces,  is  announcing,  does  announce 
porta-t     "     "     "    carries,  is  carrying,  does  carry  (porter) 
pugna-t    "     "     "  fights,  is  fighting,  does  fight  (pugnacious) 

31.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  The  daughter  loves,  the  daughters  love.  2.  The  sailor  is 
carrying,  the  sailors  carry.  3.  The  farmer  does  labor,  the  farmers 
labor.  4.  The  girl  is*  announcing,  the  girls  do  announce.  5.  The 
ladies  are  carrying,  the  lady  carries. 

II.  1.  Nauta  pugnat,  nautae  pugnant.  2.  Puella  amat,  puellae 
amant.  3.  Agricola  portat,  agricolae  portant.  4.  Filia  laborat,  filiae 
labCrant.  5.  Nauta  nuntiat,  nautae  nuntiant.  6.  Dominae  amant, 
domina  amat. 

*  The  u  in  nflntid  is  long  by  exception.   (Cf.  §  12. 2.) 


DOMINA 


1 6  FIRST  PRINCIPLES 


LESSON   III 
FIRST  PRINCIPLES  (Continued) 

32.  Declension  of  Nouns.  We  learned  above  (§§19,  20)  the  differ- 
ence between  the  subject  and  object,  and  that  in  English  they  may 
be  distinguished  by  the  order  of  the  words.  Sometimes,  however,  the 
order  is  such  that  we  are  left  in  doubt.  For  example,  the  sentence 
TAe  lady  her  daughter  loves  might  mean  either  that  the  lady  loves  her 
daughter,  or  that  the  daughter  loves  the  lady. 

I .  If  the  sentence  were  in  Latin,  no  doubt  could  arise,  because  the 
subject  and  the  object  are  distinguished,  not  by  the  order  of  the  words, 
but  by  the  endings  of  the  words  themselves.  Compare  the  following 
sentences : 

Domina  filiam  amat  1 

Filiam  domina  amat   I        ^,     /  .    ,         , 

,  j^.        ,      .        )■      The  lady  loves  her  daughter 
Amat  filiam  domina    1  -^  ^ 

Domina  amat  filiam 


Filia  dominam  amat  1 
Dominam  filia  amat 
Amat  dominam  filia 
Filia  amat  dominam 


The  daughter  loves  the  lady 


a.  Observe  that  in  each  case  the  subject  of  the  sentence  ends  in  -a 
and  the  object  in  -am.  The  form  of  the  noun  shows  how  it  is  used  in 
the  sentence,  and  the  order  of  the  words  has  no  effect  on  the  essential 
meaning. 

2.  As  stated  above  (§  23),  this  change  of  ending  is  called  declen- 
sion, and  each  different  ending  produces  what  is  called  a  case.  When 
we  decline  a  noun,  we  give  all  its  different  cases,  or  changes  of  endings. 
In  English  we  have  three  cases,  —  nominative,  possessive,  and  objec- 
tive ;  but,  in  nouns,  the  nominative  and  objective  have  the  same  form, 
and  only  the  possessive  case  shows  a  change  of  ending,  by  adding  'j 
or  the  apostrophe.  The  interrogative  pronoun,  however,  has  the  fuller 
declension,  who  ?  whose  ?  whom  ? 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES 


17 


33.  The  following  table  shows  a  comparison  between  English  and 
Latin  declension  forms,  and  should  be  thoroughly  memorized : 


Engush  Casbs 

Latin  Cases 

Declension 
olmk*t 

Name  of  case  and  oae 

Declension  of  domina 
and  translation 

Name  of  case  and  use 

\Vho.> 

Nominative  — 

do^min-« 

Nominative  — 

case  of  the 

/Ag  /ady 

case  of  the 

subject 

subject 

Whose? 

Possessive  — 

domin-ae 

Genitive  — 

73 

5 

case  of  the 

tAe  lady's 

case  of  the 

% 

possessor 

of  the  lady 

possessor 

\ 

Whom? 

Objective  — 

domin-am 

Accusative  — 

case  of  the 

the  lady 

case  of  the 

object 

direct  object 

Who? 

Nominative  — 

domin-ae 

Nominative  — 

case  of  the 

the  ladies 

case  of  the 

subject 

subject 

Whose? 

Possessive  — 

domin-a'rum 

Qenitive  — 

►T3 

case  of  the 

the  ladies^ 

case  of  the 

r 

possessor 

of  the  ladies 

possessor 

Whom? 

Objective  — 

domin-is 

Accusative  — 

case  of  the 

the  ladies 

case  of  the 

object 

direct  object 

VVTien  the  nominative  singular  of  a  noun  ends  in  -a,  observe  that 

a.  The  nominative  plural  ends  in  -ae. 

b.  The  genitive  singular  ends  in  -ae  and  the  genitive  plural  in  -arum. 

c.  The  accusative  singular  ends  in  ^am  and  the  accusative  plural  in  -as. 
(f.  The  genitive  sinj;ular  and  the  nominative  plural  have  the  same  ending. 

34.  EXERQSE 

Tronouncc  the  following  words  and  give  their  general  meaning.  Then 
give  the  number  and  case,  and  the  use  of  each  form.  Where  tke  same 
form  stands  for  more  than  one  case,  give  all  the  possible  cases  and  uses. 

I.  Silva,  silvas,  silvam.  2.  Fugam,  fugae,  fuga.  3.  TerrSrum, 
terrae,  terrSs.  4.  Aquas,  causam,  lunas.  5.  Filiae,  fortunae,  iQnae. 
6.  Iniurias,  agricolSrum,  aquarum.  7.  Iniuriarum,  agricolae,  puellas 
8.  Nautam,  agricol^,  nautas.    9.  Agricolam,  puellam,  silvSrum. 


l8  FIRST  PRINCIPLES 

LESSON  IV 
FIRST  PRINCIPLES  (Continued) 

35.  We  learned  from  the  table  (§  33)  that  the  Latin  nominative, 
genitive,  and  accusative  correspond,  in  general,  to  the  nominative,  pos- 
sessive, and  objective  in  English,  and  that  they  are  used  in  the  same 
way.    This  will  be  made  even  clearer  by  the  following  sentence : 

Fnia  agricolae  nautam  amat,  t/ie  farmer'' s  daughter  (or  the 
daughter  of  the  farmer)  loves  the  sailor 

What  is  the  subject.''  the  direct  object?  What  case  is  used  for  the  sub- 
ject? foi  the  direct  object?   What  word  denotes  the  possessor?    In  what 

case  is  it  ? 

36.  Rule.  Nominative  Subject.  The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is 
in  the  Nominative  and  answers  the  question  Who  ?  or  What  ? 

37.  Rule.  Accusative  Object.  The  direct  object  of  a  transitive 
verb  is  in  the  Accusative  and  answers  the  question  Whom  ? 
or  What? 

38.  Rule.  Genitive  of  the  Possessor.  The  word  denoting  the 
owner  or  possesi^or  of  something  is  in  the  Genitive  and  answers 
the  qitestion  Whose  ? 


DIANA  SAGITTAS  PORT  AT  ET  FERAS  NECAT 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  1 9 

39.  EXERCISES 

First  leam  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  283. 

I.  I.  Diana  est  dea.  2.  L§t6na  est  dea.  3.  Diana  et  Latona  sunt 
deae.  4.  Diana  est  dea  lunae.  5.  Diana  est  filia  Latonae.  6.  Latona 
Dianam  amat.  7.  Diana  est  dea  silvarum.  8.  Diana  silvam  amat. 
9.  Diana  sagittas  portat.  10.  DiSna  feras  silvae  necat.  11.  Ferae 
terrarum  pugnanL 

For  the  order  of  words  imitate  the  Latin  above. 

II.  I.  The  daughter  of  Latona  does  love  the  forests.  2.  Latona's 
daughter  carries  arrows.  3.  The  farmers'  daughters  do  labor.  4.  The 
farmer's  daughter  loves  the  waters  of  the  forest.  5.  The  sailor  is 
announcing  the  girls'  flight.  6.  The  girls  announce  the  sailors'  wrongs. 
7.  The  farmer's  daughter  labors.  8.  Diana's  arrows  are  killing  the 
wild  beasts  of  the  land. 

40.  CONVERSATION 

Translate  the  questions  and  answer  them  in  Latin.  The  answers  may  be 
found  in  the  exercises  preceding. 

1.  Quis  est  Diana ?  4.  Quis  silvam  amat  ? 

2.  Cuius  filia  est  Diana  >  5.  Quis  sagittas  portat  ? 

3.  Quis  Dianam  amat?  6.  Cuius  filiae  laborant? 


LESSON  V 
FIRST  PRINCIPLES  (Continued) 

41.  The  Dative  Case.  In  addition  to  the  relationships  between 
words  expressed  by  the  nominative,  genitive  (possessive),  and  accusa- 
tive (objective)  cases,  there  are  other  relationships,  to  express  which 
in  English  we  use  such  words  as  from,  withy  by\  to,  for,  in,  at} 

Latin,  too,  makes  frequent  use  of  such  prepositions ;  but  often  it 
expresses  these  relations  without  them  by  means  of  case  forms  which 

*  Words  like  to,  for,  by,  from,  in.  etc.,  which  define  the  relationship  between 
words,  are  called  prepositions. 


20  FIRST  PRINCIPLES 

English  does  not  possess.   One  of  the  cases  found  in  the  Latin  declen- 
sion and  lacking  in  English  is  called  the  dative. 

42.  When  the  nominative  singular  ends  in  -a,  the  dative  singular 
ends  in  -ae  and  the  dative  plural  in  -is. 

Note.  Observe  that  the  genitive  singular,  the  dative  singular,  and  the 
nominative  plural  all  have  the  same  ending,  -ae ;  but  the  uses  of  the  three 
cases  are  entirely  different.  The  general  meaning  of  the  sentence  usually 
makes  clear  which  case  is  intended. 

a.  Form  the  dative  singular  and  plural  of  the  following  nouns:  fuga, 
causa,  fortuna,  terra,  aqua,  puella,  agricola,  nauta,  domina. 

43.  The  Dative  Relation.  The  dative  case  is  used  to  express  the 
relations  conveyed  in  English  by  the  prepositions/^,  towards^  for. 

These  prepositions  are  often  used  in  English  in  expressions  of  motion, 
such  as  She  went  to  towtt,  He  ran  towards  the  horse,  Columbus  sailed  for 
America.  In  such  cases  the  dative  is  not  used  in  Latin,  as  motion  through 
space  is  foreign  to  the  dative  relation.  But  the  dative  is  used  to  denote 
that  to  or  towards  which  a  benefit,  injury,  purpose,  feeling,  or  quality  is 
directed,  or  that  j^r  which  something  serves  or  exists. 

a.  What  dative  relations  do  you  discover  in  the  following  ? 

The  teacher  gave  a  prize  to  John  because  he  replied  so  promptly  to  all 
her  questions  —  a  good  example  for  the  rest  of  us.  It  is  a  pleasure  to  us  to 
hear  him  recite.  Latin  is  easy  for  him,  but  it  is  very  hard  for  me.  Some 
are  fitted  for  one  thing  and  others  for  another. 

44.  The  Indirect  Object.    Examine  the  sentence 

Nauta  fugam  nuntiat,  the  sailor  announces  the  flight 

Here  the  verb,  nuntiat,  governs  the  direct  object,  fugam,  in  the 
accusative  case.  If,  however,  we  wish  to  mention  the  persons  to  whom 
the  sailor  announces  the  flight,  as,  The  sailor  announces  the  flight  to 
the  farmers,  the  verb  will  have  two  objects: 

1.  Its  direct  oh]Qct,  flight  (fugam) 

2.  Its  indirect  oh]ect,  farmers 

According  to  the  preceding  section,  to  the  farmers  is  a  relation  cov- 
ered by  the  dative  case,  and  we  are  prepared  for  the  following  rule : 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  21 

45.  Rule.  Datiye  Indirect  Object.  The  indirect  object  of  a 
verb  is  in  the  Dative, 

a.  The  indirect  object  usually  stands  before  the  direct  object 

46.  We  may  now  complete  the  translation  of  the  sentence  The 
sailor  announces  the  flight  to  the  farmers,  and  we  have 

Nauta  agricolis  fugam  nuntiat 

47.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  283. 

Point  out  the  direct  and  indirect  objects  and  the  genitive  of  the 
possessor. 

I.  I.  Quis  nautis  pecuniam  dat?  2.  Filiae  agricolae  nautis  pecu- 
niam  dant.  3.  Quis  fortunam  pugnae  nuntiat?  4.  Galba  agricolis 
fortunam  pugnae  nuntiat.  5.  Cui  domina  fabulam  narrat?  6.  Filiae 
agricolae  domina  fabulam  narrat.  7.  Quis  Dianae  coronam  dat? 
8.  Puella  Dianae  coronam  dat  quia  Dianam  amat.  9.  Dea  lunae 
sagittas  portat  et  feras  silvarum  necat.  10.  Cuius  victoriam  Galba 
nuntiat  ?    11.  Nautae  victoriam  Galba  nuntiat. 

Imitate  the  word  order  of  the  preceding  exercise. 

II.  I.  To  whom  do  the  girls  give  a  wreath?  2.  The  girls  give  a 
wreath  to  Julia,  because  Julia  loves  wreaths.  3.  The  sailors  tell  the 
ladies*  a  story,  because  the  ladies  love  stories.  4.  The  farmer  gives 
his  (§  22.  <i)  daughter  water.  5.  Galba  announces  the  cause  of  the 
battle  to  the  sailor.  6.  The  goddess  of  the  moon  loves  the  waters  of 
the  forest.    7.  Whose  wreath  is  Latona  carrying?   Diana's. 

1  Observe  that  in  English  the  indirect  object  often  stands  without  a  prepo- 
sition to  to  mark  it,  especially  when  it  precedes  the  direct  object 


2  2  FIRST  PRINCIPLES 

LESSON  VI 
FIRST  PRINCIPLES  (Continued) 

48.  The  Ablative  Case.  Another  case,  lacking  in  English  but  found 
in  the  fuller  Latin  declension,  is  the  ab^la-tive. 

49.  When  the  nominative  singular  ends  in  -a,  the  ablative  singular 
ends  in  -a  and  the  ablative  plural  in  -is. 

a.  Observe  that  the  final  -S  of  the  nominative  is  short,  while  the  final  -a 
of  the  ablative  is  long,  as, 

Nom.  fnia  AbL  filia 

b.  Observe  that  the  ablative  plural  is  like  the  dative  plural. 

c.  Form  the  ablative  singular  and  plural  of  the  following  nouns :  fuga, 
causa,  fortuna,  terra,  aqua,  puella,  agricola,  nauta,  domina. 

50.  The  Ablative  Relation.  The  ablative  case  is  used  to  express 
the  relations  conveyed  in  English  by  the  prepositions  ^^v/w,  with,  by, 
at,  in.    It  denotes 

1.  That  from  which  something  is  separated,  from  which  it  starts, 
or  of  which  it  is  deprived  —  generally  translated  hy  from. 

2.  That  with  which  something  is  associated  or  by  means  of  which 
it  is  done  —  translated  by  with  or  by. 

'  3.  The  place  where  or  the  time  when  something  happens  —  trans- 
lated by  in  or  at. 

a.  What  ablative  relations  do  you  discover  in  the  following  ? 

In  our  class  there  are  twenty  boys  and  girls.  Daily  at  eight  o'clock  they 
come  from  home  with  their  books,  and  while  they  are  at  school  they  study 
Latin  with  great  zeal.  In  a  short  time  they  will  be  able  to  read  with  ease 
the  books  written  by  the  Romans.  By  patience  and  perseverance  all  things 
in  this  world  can  be  overcome. 

51.  Prepositions.  While,  as  stated  above  (§41),  many  relations 
expressed  in  English  by  prepositions  are  in  Latin  expressed  by  case 
forms,  still  prepositions  are  of  frequent  occurrence,  but  only  with  the 
accusative  or  ablative. 


FIRST  PRINCIPLES  23 

52.  Rule.  Object  of  a  Preposition.  A  noun  governed  by  a 
preposition  must  be  in  the  Accusative  or  Ablative  case. 

53.  Prepositions  denoting  the  ablative  relations //ww,  with^  in,  on, 
are  naturally  followed  by  the  ablative  case.   Among  these  are 

&  ^  or  ab,  from,  away  from  cum,  with 

^<kyfrom,  down  from  in,  in,  on 

8  ^  or  ex,  from,  out  from,  out  of 

I.  Translate  into  Latin,  using  prepositions.  In  the  water,  on  the 
land,  down  from  the  forest,  with  the  fortune,  out  of  the  forests,  from 
the  victory,  out  of  the  waters,  with  the  sailors,  down  from  the  moon. 

54.  Adjectives.    Examine  the  sentence 

Puella  parva  bonam  deam  amat,  the  little  girl  loves  the  good  goddess 

In  this  sentence  parva  {little)  and  bonam  {good)  are  not  nouns,  but 
are  descriptive  words  expressing  quality.  Such  words  are  called  adjec- 
tives,^ and  they  are  said  to  belong  to  the  noun  which  they  describe. 

You  can  tell  by  its  ending  to  which  noun  an  adjective  belongs.  The 
ending  of  parva  shows  that  it  belongs  to  puella,  and  the  ending  of  bonam 
that  it  belongs  to  deam.  Words  that  belong  together  are  said  to  agree,  and 
the  belonging-together  is  called  agreement.  Observe  that  the  adjective  and 
its  noun  agree  in  number  and  case, 

55.  Examine  the  sentences 

Puella  est  parva,  the  girl  is  little 

Puella  parva  bonam  deam  amat,  the  little  girl  loves  the  good  goddess 

In  the  first  sentence  the  adjective  parva  is  separated  from  its  noun 
by  the  verb  and  stands  in  the  predicate.  It  is  therefore  called  a 
predicate  adjective.    In  the  second  sentence  the  adjectives  parva  and 

^  a  and  h  are  used  only  before  words  beginning  with  a  consonant ;  ab  and  ex 
are  used  before  either  vowels  or  consonants. 

^  Pick  out  the  aJjfctives  in  the  following :  "When  I  was  a  little  boy,  I 
remember  that  one  cold  winter's  morning  I  was  accosted  by  a  smiling  man 
with  an  ax  on  his  shoulder.  '  My  pretty  boy,'  said  he,  '  has  your  father  a 
grindstone?'  — 'Yes,  sir,'  said  I. — 'You  arc  a  fine  little  fellow,'  said  he. 
'  Will  you  let  me  grind  my  ax  on  it  ?  *  ** 


24  FIRST  PRINCIPLES 

bonam  are  closely  attached  to  the  nouns  puella  and  deam  respectively, 
and  are  called  attributive  adjectives. 

a.  Pick  out  the  attributive  and  the  predicate  adjectives  in  the  following : 

Do  you  think  Latin  is  hard?  Hard  studies  make  strong  brains.  Lazy 
students  dislike  hard  studies.    We  are  not  lazy. 

56.  DIALOGUE 

Julia  and  Galea 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  283. 

I.  Quis,  Galba,  est  Diana  ? 

G.  Diana,  lulia,  est  pulchra  dea  Itinae  et  silvarum. 

I.  Cuius  filia,  Galba,  est  Diana  ? 

G.  Latonae  filia,  lulia,  est  Diana. 

I.  Quid  Diana  portat  ? 

G.  Sagittas  Diana  portat. 

I.  Cur  Diana  sagittas  portat  ? 

G.  Diana  sagittas  portat,  lulia, quod  malas feras  silvaemagnae  necat 

I.  Amatne  Latona  fiUam } 

G.  Amat,  et  filia  Latonam  amat. 

I.  Quid  filia  tua  parva  portat  ? 

G.  Coronas  pulchras  fiha  mea  parva  portat. 

I.  Cui  filia  tua  coronas  pulchras  dat  ? 

G.  Dianae  coronas  dat. 

I.  Quis  est  cum  fiha  tua  ?    Estne  sola  ? 

G.  Sola  non  est ;  filia  mea  parva  est  cum  ancilla  mea. 

a.  When  a  person  is  called  or  addressed,  the  case  used  is  called  the 
voc'ative  (Latin  vocare,  "  to  call  ").  In  form  the  vocative  is  regularly  like 
the  ?wminative.  In  English  the  name  of  the  person  addressed  usually 
stands  first  in  the  sentence.  The  Latin  vocative  rarely  stands  first.  Point 
out  five  examples  of  the  vocative  in  this  dialogue. 

b.  Observe  that  questions  answered  by  yes  or  no  in  English  are  answered 
in  Latin  by  repeating  the  verb.  Thus,  if  you  wished  to  answer  in  Latin 
the  question  Is  the  sailor  fighting  f  Pugnatne  nauta  ?  you  would  say  Pug- 
nat,  he  is  fighting,  or  Non  pugnat,  he  is  not  fighting. 


THE  FIRST  DECLENSION 


25 


LESSON   VII 


THE  FIRST  OR  il-DECLENSION 


57.  In  the  preceding  lessons  we  have  now  gone  over  all  the  cases, 
singular  and  plural,  of  nouns  whose  nominative  singular  ends  in  -a. 
All  Latin  nouns  whose  nominative  singular  ends  in  -a  belong  to  the 
First  Declension.  It  is  also  called  the  ^-Declension  because  of  the 
prominent  part  which  the  vowel  a  plays  in  the  formation  of  the  cases. 
We  have  also  learned  what  relations  are  expressed  by  each  case. 
These  results  are  summarized  in  the  following  table : 


Cask 

Noun 

Translation 

UsB  AND  General  Meaning  op 
Each  Case 

Singular 

Nom. 
Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 
Abl. 

do'min-a 
domin-ae 

domin-ae 

domin-am 
domin-& 

the  lady 

of  the  lady,  or  the 

lady's 
to  or  for  the  lady 

the  lady 

from,  with,  by,  in, 
the  lady 

The  subject 

The  possessor  of  something 

Expressing  the  relation  to  or  for, 
especially  the  indirect  object 

The  direct  object 

Separation  (from),  association  or 
means  (with,  by),  place  where 
or  time  when  (in,  at) 

Plural 

Nom. 
Gen. 

Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

domin-ae 
domin-t'mm 

domin-is 
domin-is 
domin-is 

the  ladies 

of  the  ladies,  ox  the 

ladies' 
to  ox  for  the  ladies 
the  ladies 
from,  with,  by,  in, 

the  ladies 

The  same  as  the 
singular 

58.  The  Base.    That  part  of  a  word  which  remains  unchanged  in 
inflection  and  to  which  the  terminations  are  added  is  called  the  base. 

Thus,  in  the  declension  above,  domin-  is  the  base  and  -a  is  the  termination 
of  the  nominative  singular. 


26  GENDER 

59.  Write  the  declension  of  the  following  nouns,  separating  the 
base  from  the  termination  by  a  hyphen.    Also  give  them  orally. 

pugna,  terra,  luna,  ancilla,  coro'na,  in'sula,  silva 

60.  Gender.  In  English,  names  of  living  beings  are  either  masculine 
or  feminine,  and  names  of  things  without  life  are  neuter.  This  is  called 
natural  gender.  Yet  in  English  there  are  some  names  of  things  to 
which  we  refer  as  if  they  were  feminine ;  as,  "  Have  you  seen  my 
yacht  ?  She  is  a  beauty."  And  there  are  some  names  of  living  beings 
to  which  we  refer  as  if  they  were  neuter ;  as,  '^  Is  the  baby  here  ?  No, 
the  nurse  has  taken  it  home."  Some  words,  then,  have  a  gender  quite 
apart  from  sex  or  real  gender,  and  this  is  called  grammatical  gender. 

Latin,  like  English,  has  three  genders.  Names  of  males  are  usually 
masculine  and  of  females  feminine,  but  names  of  things  have  gram- 
matical gender  and  may  be  either  masculine^  feminine^  or  neuter.  Thus 
we  have  in  Latin  the  three  words,  lapis,  a  stone ;  rupes,  a  cliff;  and 
saxum,  a  rock.  Lapis  is  masculine^  rupes  feminine^  and  saxum  neuter. 
The  gender  can  usually  be  determined  by  the  ending  of  the  word,  and 
must  always  be  learned^  for  without  knowing  the  gender  it  is  impos- 
sible to  write  correct  Latin. 

61.  Gender  of  First-Declension  Nouns.  Nouns  of  the  first  declen- 
sion are  feminine  unless  they  denote  males.  Thus  silva  is  feminine, 
but  nauta,  sailor^  and  agricola,  farmer^  are  masculine. 

62.  EXERCISES 

.  First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  284. 

I.  I.  Agricola  cum  filia  in  casa  habitat.  2.  Bona  filia  agricolae 
cenam  parat.  3.  Cena  est  grata  agricolae^  et  agricola  bonam  filiam 
laudat.  4.  Deinde  filia  agricolae  galllnas  ad  cenam  vocat.  5.  Galllnae 
filiam  agricolae  amant.  6.  Malae  filiae  bonas  cenas  non  parant. 
7.  FilTa  agricolae  est  grata  dominae.  8.  Domina  in  insula  magna 
habitat.    9.  Domina  bonae  puellae  parvae  pecuniam  dat. 

1  Note  that  the  relation  expressed  by  the  dative  case  covers  that  to  which  a 
feeling  is  directed.    (Cf.  §  43.) 


EXERCISES 


27 


II.  I .  Where  does  the  farmer  live  ?  2.  The  farmer  lives  in  the 
small  cottage.  3.  Who  lives  with  the  farmer  ?  4.  (His)  little  daughter 
lives  with  the  farmer.  5.  (His)  daughter  is  getting  (parat)  a  good 
dinner  for  the  farmer.  6.  The  farmer  praises  the  good  dinner. 
7.  The  daughter's  good  dinner  is  pleasing  to  the  farmer. 


What  Latin  words  are  suggested  by  this  picture  ? 


63.  CONVERSATION 

Answer  the  questions  in  Latin. 

1 .  Quis  cum  agricola  in  casa  habitat  ? 

2.  Quid  bona  filia  agricolae  parat .? 

3.  Quem  agricola  laudat  ? 

4.  Vocatne  filia  agricolae  gallinas  ad  cenam  ? 

5.  Cuius  filia  est  grSta  dominae? 

6.  Cui  domina  pecuniam  dat  ? 


28 


NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 


LESSON  VIII 
FIRST  DECLENSION  (Continued) 

64.  We  have  for  some  time  now  been  using  adjectives  and  nouns 
together,  and  you  have  noticed  an  agreement  between  them  in  case 
and  in  number  (§  54).  They  agree  also  in  gender.  In  the  phrase 
silva  magna,  we  have  a  feminine  adjective  in  -a  agreeing  with  a  fem- 
inine noun  in  -a. 

65.  Rule.  Agreement  of  Adjectives.  Adjectives  agree  with 
their  nouns  in  gender^  7iumber,  and  case. 

66.  Feminine  adjectives  in  -a  are  declined  like  feminine  nouns  in 
-a,  and  you  should  learn  to  decline  them  together  as  follows : 

Noun  Adjective 

domina  (base  domin-),  f.,  lady        bona  (base  \iOVi-)^  good 

Singular 


Nom. 

do'mina 

Gen. 

dominae 

Dat. 

dominae 

Ace. 

dominam 

Abl. 

domina 

Nom. 

dominae 

Gen. 

domina'rum 

Dat. 

dominis 

Ace. 

dominas 

Abl 

dominis 

Plural 


TERMINATIONS 

bona 

-a 

bonae 

-ae 

bonae 

-ae 

bonam 

^m 

bona 

-a 

bonae 

-ae 

bona'nim 

-arum 

bonis 

-is 

bonas 

•nas 

bonis 

-is 

a.  In  the  same  way  decline  together  puella  mala,  the  bad  girl, 
parva,  the  little  maid;  fortu'na  magna,  great  fortune. 


ancilla 


67.  The  words  dea,  goddess^  and  filia,  daughter,  take  the  ending 
-abus  instead  of  -is  in  the  dative  afid  ablative  plural.  Note  the  dative 
and  ablative  plural  in  the  following  declension : 


ORDER  OF  WORDS  IN  LATIN  29 

dea  bona  (bases  de-  bon-) 
Singular  Plural 

Nom.     dea  bona  deae  bonae 

Gen.      deae  bonae  dea'nim  bona'rum 

Dat.       deae  bonae  dea'bus  bonis 

Ace.       deam  bonam  deas  bonas 

Abl.      dei  bona  de&1i>ii8  bonis 

a.  In  the  same  way  decline  together  filia  panra. 

68.  Latin  Word  Order.  The  order  of  words  in  English  and  in  Latin 
sentences  is  not  the  same. 

In  English  we  arrange  words  in  a  fairly  fixed  order.  Thus,  in  the 
sentence  My  daughter  is  getting  dinner  for  the  farmers^  we  cannot 
alter  the  order  of  the  words  without  spoiling  the  sentence.  We  can, 
however,  throw  emphasis  on  different  words  by  speaking  them  with 
more  force.  Try  the  effect  of  reading  the  sentence  by  putting  special 
force  on  my^  daughter.,  dinner.,  farmers. 

In  Latin,  where  the  office  of  the  word  in  the  sentence  i3  shown  by 
its  ending  (ci.  §  32.  i),  and  not  by  its  position,  the  order  of  words  is 
more  free,  and  position  is  used  to  secure  the  same  effect  that  in 
English  is  secured  by  emphasis  of  voice.  To  a  limited  extent  we 
can  alter  the  order  of  words  in  English,  too,  for  the  same  purpose. 
Compare  the  sentences 

/  sa7if  a  game  of  football  at  Chicago  last  November  (normal  order) 
Last  November  I  saw  a  game  of  football  at  Chicago 
At  Chicago y  last  November,  I  saw  a  game  offootbaU 

I.  In  a  Latin  sentence  the  most  emphatic  place  is  the  frsty  next  in 
imp>ortance  is  the  lasty  the  weakest  point  is  the  middle.  Generally  the 
subject  is  the  most  important  word,  and  is  placed  yfrj/y  usually  the  verb  is 
the  next  in  importance,  and  is  placed  last.  The  other  words  of  the  sentence 
stand  between  these  two  in  the  order  of  their  imp)ortance.  Hence  the 
normal  order  of  words  —  that  is,  where  no  unusual  emphasis  is  e^^ressed 
—  is  as  follows : 

siOifect  —  modifiers  of  the  subject  —  indirect  object  —  direct  object — adverb  —  verb 

Changes  from  the  normal  order  are  frequent,  and  are  due  to  the  desire  for 
throwing  emphasis  upon  some  word  or  phrase.   Notice  the  order  of  the 


30  ORDER  OF  WORDS  IN  LATIN 

Latin  words  when  you  are  translating^  and  imitate  it  when  you  are 
turning  English  into  Latin. 

2.  Possessive  pronouns  and  modifying  genitives  normally  stand  after 
their  nouns.  When  placed  before  their  nouns  they  are  emphatic,  as  filia 
mea,  my  daughter j  mea  filia,  my  daughter;  casa  Galbae,  Galba's  cottage  ; 
Galbae  casa,  Galba^s  cottage. 

Notice  the  vaiiety  of  emphasis  produced  by  writing  the  following 
sentence  in  different  ways : 

Filia  mea  agricolis  cenam  parat  (normal  order) 

Mea  filia  agricolis  parat  cenam  (mea  and  cenam  emphatic) 

Agricolis  filia  mea  cenam  parat  (agricolis  emphatic) 

3.  An  adjective  placed  before  its  noun  is  more  emphatic  than  when  it 
follows.  When  great  emphasis  is  desired,  the  adjective  is  separated  from 
its  noun  by  other  words. 

Filia  mea  casam  parvam  non  amat  (parvam  not  emphatic) 
Filia  mea  parvam  casam  non  amat  (parvam  more  emphatic) 
Parvam  filia  mea  casam  non  amat  (parvam  very  emphatic) 

4.  Interrogative  words  usually  stand  first,  the  same  as  in  English. 

5.  The  copula  (as  est,  sunt)  is  of  so  little  importance  that  it  frequently 
does  not  stand  last,  but  may  be  placed  wherever  it  sounds  well. 


69.  EXERCISE 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  284. 

Note  the  order  of  the  words  in  these  sentences  and  pick  out  those  that 
are  not  normal  in  position  and  hence  are  unusually  emphatic. 

I.  Longae  non  sunt  tuae  viae.  2.  Suntne  tubae  novae  in  mea 
casa?  Non  sunt.  3.  Quis  lata  in  silva  habitat?  Diana,  lunae  clarae 
pulchra  dea,  lata  in  silva  habitat.  4.  Nautae  altas  et  latas  amant  aquas. 
5.  Quid  ancilla  tua  portat  ?  Ancilla  mea  tubam  novam  portat.  6.  Ubi 
sunt  Lesbia  et  lulia?  In  tua  casa  est  Lesbia  et  lulia  est  in  mea. 
7.  Estne  Italia  lata  terra?  Tonga  est  Italia,  non  lata.  8,  Cui  Galba 
agricola  fabulam  novam  narrat?  Filiabus  dominae  clarae  fabul^m 
novam  narrat.  9.  Clara  est  insula  Sicilia.  10.  Quem  laudat  Latona? 
Latona  laudat  filiam. 


THE  SECOND  DECLENSION 


First  Review  of  Vocabulary  and  Grammar,  §§  502-505 


LESSON   IX 
THE  SECOND  OR  0-DECLENSION 

70.  Latin  nouns  are  divided  into  five  declensions. 

The  declension  to  which  a  noun  belongs  is  shown  by  the  ending  of  the 
genitive  singular.  This  should  always  be  learned  along  Math  the  nominative 
and  the  gender. 

71.  rhe  nominative  singidar  of  nouns  of  the  Second  or  <9-Declen- 
sion  ends  in  -us,  -er,  -ir,  or  -um.    The  genitive  singular  ends  in  -i. 

72.  Gender.  Nouns  in  -um  are  neuter.  The  others  are  regularly 
masculine. 

73.  Declension  of  nouns  in  -us  and  -um.  Masculines  in  -us  and 
neuters  in  -um  are  declined  as  follows : 

dominus  (base  domin-),  m.,  master       pilum  (base  pil-),  n.,  spear 


Singular 

TERMINATIONS 

TERMINATIONS 

Norn. 

do'minua  ^ 

-US 

pTlum 

-am 

Gen. 

domini 

-i 

pill 

-i 

Dat. 

dominS 

-5 

pTl6 

-6 

Ace. 

dominom 

-um 

pTlum 

-um 

Abl. 

dominO 

-5 

pHS 

-« 

Voc. 

domine 

-e  . 

Plural 

plltun 

-um 

Norn. 

domini 

-i 

pila 

-a 

Gen. 

domin5'niin 

-drum 

pTlS'nim 

-drum 

Dat. 

dominis 

-is 

pilis 

-is 

Ace. 

dominOs 

-«8 

pIU 

-a 

Abl. 

dominis 

-is 

pHis 

-4S 

Compare  the  declension  of  domina  and  of  dominus. 


32  THE  PREDICATE  NOUN 

a.  Observe  that  the  masculines  and  the  neuters  have  the  same  termina- 
tions excepting  in  the  nominative  singular  and  the  nominative  and  accusa- 
tive plural, 

b.  The  vocative  singular  of  words  of  the  second  declension  in  -us  ends 
in  -e,  as  domine,  O  master;  serve,  O  slave.  This  is  the  most  important  ex- 
ception to  the  rule  in  §  ^6.  a. 

74.  Write  side  by  side  the  declension  of  domina,  dominus,  and 
pilum.  A  comparison  of  the  forms  will  lead  to  the  following 
rules,  which  are  of  great  importance  because  they  apply  to  all  five 
declensions : 

a.  The  vocative,  with  a  single  exception  (see  §  73-  <^),  is  like  the  nomi- 
native. That  is,  the  vocative  singular  is  like  the  nominative  singular,  and 
the  vocative  plural  is  like  the  nominative  plural. 

b.  The  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  of  neuter  nouns  are  alike, 
and  in  the  plural  end  in  -a. 

c.  The  accusative  singular  of  masculines  and  feminines  ends  in  -m  and 
the  accusative  plural  in  -s. 

d.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  are  always  alike. 

e.  Final  -i  and  -o  are  always  longj  final  -a  is  short,  except  in  the  abla- 
tive singular  of  the  first  declension. 

75.  Observe  the  sentences 

Lesbia  est  bona,  Lesbia  is  good 

Lesbia  est  ancilla,  Lesbia  is  a  maidservant 

We  have  learned  (§  55)  that  bona,  when  used,  as  here,  in  the  predi- 
cate to  describe  the  subject,  is  called  a  predicate  adjective.  Similarly  a 
noun,  as  ancilla,  used  in  the  predicate  to  define  the  subject  is  called 
a  predicate  noun. 

76.  Rule.  Predicate  Noun.  A  predicate  noun  agrees  in  case 
with  the  subject  of  the  verb. 


PILA 


THE  SECOND  DECLENSION 


33 


77. 


DIALOGUE 

Galea  and  Marcus 


First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  285. 

G.  Quis,  Marce,  est 
Iggatus  gerens  (bearing) 
pllum  et  tubam  ? 

M.  Legatus,  Galba, 
est  Sextus. 

G.  Ubi  Sextus  habitat?^ 

M.  In  oppido  Sextus 
cum  filiabus  habitat. 

G.  Amantne  oppidani 
Sextum  ? 

M.  Amant  oppidani 
Sextum  et  laudant,  quod 
magna  cum  cOnstantia 
pugnat. 

G.  Ubi,  Marce,  est 
ancilla  tua?  Cur  non 
cenam  parat? 

M.  Ancilla  mea,  Galba, 
equo  legati  aquam  et 
fnimentum  dat. 

(i.  Cur  non  servus  Sexti  equum  domini  curat  ? 

M.  Sextus  et  servus  ad  murum  oppidi  properant.  Oppidani  belhim 
parant.^ 

1  habiUt  is  here  translated  does  live.    Note  the  three  possible  translations 
of  the  I^tin  present  tense 


LEGATUS  GERENS   PILUM   ET  TUBAM 


habitat 


Ae  lives 
is  living 
does  live 


I  he 


Always  choose  the  translation  which  makes  the  best  sense. 

«  Observe  that  the  verb  parft  means  not  only  to  prepare  but  also  to  prepare 
/or^  and  governs  the  accusative  case. 


34 


NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 


78.  CONVERSATION 

Translate  the  questions  and  answer  them  in  Latin. 
I .  Ubi  filiae  Sexti  habitant  ?  4.  Cuius  equum  ancilla  curat  ? 


2.  Quern  oppidani  amant  et  lau- 

dant  ? 

3.  Quid  ancilla  equo  legati  dat  ? 


5.  Quis   ad   murum    cum    Sexto 

properat  ? 

6.  Quid  oppidani  parant  ? 


LESSON   X 

SECOND  DECLENSION  (Continued) 

.  79.  We  have  been  freely  using  feminine  adjectives,  like  bona,  in 
agreement  with  feminine  nouns  of  the  first  declension  and  declined 
like  them.  Masculine  adjectives  of  this  class  are  declined  like  dominus, 
and  neuters  like  pflum.  The  adjective  and  noun,  masculine  and  neuter, 
are  therefore  declined  as  follows : 


Masculine  Noun  and  Adjective 

dominus  bonus,  the  good  master 

Bases  domin-  bon- 


Neuter  Noun  and  Adjective 

pilum  bonum,  the  good  spear 

Bases  pil-  bon- 


Singular 

TERMINATIONS 

TERMINATIONS 

Nom. 

do'minus  bonus 

-us 

pllum  bonum 

-um 

Gen. 

domini  boni 

-i 

pili  boni 

-i 

Dat. 

domino  bono 

-0 

pllo  bono 

-6 

Ace. 

dominum  bonum 

-um 

pTlum  bonum 

-um 

AM. 

domino  bono 

-0 

pilo  bon5 

-6 

Voc. 

domine  bone 

-e 

Plural 

pTlum  bonum 

-um 

Nom. 

domini  boni 

-i 

pTla  bona 

-a 

Gen. 

domino'rum  bono' 

'rum  -orum 

pllo'rum  bono' 

rum  -orum 

Dat. 

dominis  bonis 

-is 

pllis  bonis 

-is 

Ace. 

dominos  bonos 

-OS 

plla  bona 

-a 

Abl. 

dominis  bonis 

-is 

pllis  bonis 

-is 

APPOSITION  35 

Decline  together  bellum  longom,  equus  parvus,  Miyus  malus,  m&nu 
altua,  frumentxim  noyum. 

80.  Observe  the  sentences 

Lesbia  ancilla  est  bona,  Lesbia,  the  maidservant^  is  good 

Fflia  Lesbiae  ancillae  est  bona,  the  daughter  of  Lesbia^  the  maid- 

senuint,  is  good 
Seryus  Lesbiam  ancillam  amat,  the  slave  loves  Lesbia,  the  maid- 
servant 

In  these  sentences  ancilla,  ancillae,  and  ancillam  denote  the  class  of 
persons  to  which  Lesbia  belongs  and  explain  who  she  is.  Nouns  so  related 
that  the  second  is  only  another  name  for  the  first  and  explains  it  are  said 
to  be  in  apf)osition,  and  are  always  in  the  same  case. 

81.  Rule.  Apposition.  An  appositive  agrees  in  case  with  the 
noun  which  it  explains. 

82.  EXERCISES 
First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  285. 

I.  I.  Patria  servi  boni,  vTcus  servorum  bonSrum,  bone  popule. 

2.  Populus   oppidi    magni,  in  oppido    magno,    in    oppidis    magnls. 

3.  Cum  pilis  longis,  ad  pila  longa,  ad  murSs  latos.  4.  Legate  male, 
amid  legati  mali,  cena  grata  domino  bono.  5.  Friimentum  equorum 
parvorum,  domine  bone,  ad  legates  claros.  6.  Rhenus  est  in  Ger- 
mania,  patria  mea.  7.  Sextus  legatus  pilum  longum  portat.  8.  Oppi- 
dani  boni  Sexto  ISgatO  clar5  pecuniam  dant.  9.  Mall  servi  equum 
bonum  Marci  domini  necant  10.  Galba  agricola  et  lulia  filia  bona 
labdrant    11.  Marcus  nauta  in  insula  Sidlia  habitat. 

II.  I.  Wicked  slave,  who  is  your  friend?  Why  does  he  not  praise 
Galba,  your  master  ?  2.  My  friend  is  from  (ex)  a  village  of  Germany, 
my   fatherland.     3.  My  friend  does  not  love  the  people  of  Italy. 

4.  Who  is  caring  for  *  the  good  horse  of  Galba,  the  farmer  ?  5.  Mark, 
where  is  Lesbia,  the  maidservant?  6.  She  is  hastening*  to  the  little 
cottage  *  of  Julia,  the  farmer's  daughter. 

1  See  footnote  i,  p.  33.  Remember  that  cfirat  is  transitive  and  governs  a 
direct  object  «  Not  the  dative.   (Cf.  %  43.) 


36 


ADJECTIVES 


LESSON  XI 

ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  FIRST  AND  SECOND  DECLENSIONS 

83.  Adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  are  declined  in 
the  three  genders  as  follows : 


Singular 

MASCULINE 

FEMININE 

NEUTER 

Nom. 

bonus 

bona 

bonum 

Gen. 

boni 

bonae 

boni 

Dat. 

bon5 

bonae 

bono 

Ace. 

bonum 

bonam 

bonum 

Abl. 

bon5 

bona 

bono 

Voc. 

bone 

bona 

Plural 

bonimi 

Nom. 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Gen. 

bonorum 

bonarum 

bon5rum 

Dat. 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

Ace. 

bonos 

bonas 

bona 

Abl. 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

a.  Write  the  declension  and  give  it  orally  across  the  page,  thus  giving 
the  three  genders  for  each  case. 

b.  Decline  gratus,  -a,  -urn;  malus,  -a,  -um;  altus,  -a,  -um ;  parvus,  -a, 
-um. 

84.  Thus  far  the  adjectives  have  had  the  same  terminations  as  the 
nouns.  However,  the  agreement  between  the  adjective  and  its  noun 
does  7iot  mean  that  they  must  have  the  same  termination.  If  the 
adjective  and  the  noun  belong  to  different  declensions,  the  terminations 
will,  in  many  cases,  not  be  the  same.  For  example,  nauta,  sailor,  is 
masculine  and  belongs  to  the  first  declension.  The  masculine  form  of 
the  adjective  bonus  is  of  the  second  declension.  Consequently,  a  good 
sailor  is  nauta  bonus.  So,  the  wicked  farmer  is  agricola  malus.  Learn 
the  following  declensions : 


EXERCISES 


37 


85. 


nauta  bonus  (bases  naut-  bon-),  m.,  the  good  sailor 


Singular 

Nom.  nauta  bonus 

Gen.  nautae  boni 

Dat.  nautae  bon6 

Ace.  nautam  bonum 

A  hi.  nauta  bono 

/  \u .  nauta  bone 


Plural 

nautae  boni 

nautarum  bonSrum 

nautis  bonis 

nautas  bonds 

nautis  bonis 

nautae  boni 


86. 


EXERCISES 


First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  285. 

I.  I.  Est*  in  vico  nauta  bonus.    2.  Sextus  est  amicus  nautae  boni. 

3.  Sextus  nautae  bono  galeam  dat.  4.  Populus  Romanus  nautam 
bonum  laudat.  5.  Sextus  cum  nauta  bono  praedam  portat.  6.  Ubi, 
nauta  bone,  sunt  arma  et  tela  legati  RomanI?  7.  Nautae  boni  ad  bel- 
lum  properant.  8.  Fama  nautarum  bonorum  est  clara.  9.  Pugnae  sunt 
L^ratae  nautis  bonis.  10.  OppidanI  nautas  bonos  curant.  11.  Cur, 
nautae  boni,  mali  agricolae  ad  Rhenum  properant?  12.  Mali  agricolae 
cum  bonis  nautis  pugnant. 

II.  I.  The  wicked  farmer  is  hastening  to  the  village  with  (his) 
booty.  2.  The  reputation  of  the  wicked  farmer  is  not  good.  3.  Why 
does  Galba's  daughter  give  arms  and  weapons  to  the  wicked  farmer  ? 

4.  Lesbia  invites  the  good  sailor  to  dinner.  5.  Why  is  Lesbia  with 
the  good  sailor  hastening  from  the  cottage?  6.  Sextus,  where  is  my 
helmet?  7.  The  good  sailors  are  hastening  to  the  toilsome  batde. 
8.  The  horses  of  the  wicked  farmers  are  small.  9.  The  Roman  people 
give  money  to  the  good  sailors.  10.  Friends  care  for  the  good  sailors. 
1 1.  Whose  friends  are  fighting  with  the  wicked  farmers  ? 

1  Est,  beginning  a  declarative  sentence,  there  is. 


I 


GALEAE 


38  NOUNS  IN  -lUS  AND  -lUM 

LESSON  XII 
NOUNS  IN  -lUS  AND  -lUM 

87.  Nouns  of  the  second  declension  in  -ius  and  -ium  end  in  -i  in 
the  genitive  singular,  not  in  -ii,  and  the  accent  rests  on  the  penult ; 
as,  fill  from  filius  (son),  praesi'di  from  praesi'dium  (^garrison). 

88.  Proper  names  of  persons  in  -ius,  and  filius,  end  in  -i  in  the 
vocative  singular,  not  in  -€,  and  the  accent  rests  on  the  penult;  as, 
Vergi'li,  O  Vergil ;  fili,  O  son. 

a.  Observe  that  in  these  words  the  vocative  and  the  genitive  are  alike. 

89.  praesidium  (base  praesidi-),  n.,  garrison     filius  (base  fili-),  m.,  son 


Singular 

Nom. 

praesidium 

filius 

Gen. 

praesi'di 

fni 

Dat. 

praesidio 

fiUo 

Ace. 

praesidium 

filium 

Abl. 

praesidio 

fiUo 

Voc. 

praesidium 

fni 

The  plural  is  regular.  Note  that  the  -i-  of  the  base  is  lost  only 
in  the  genitive  singular,  and  in  the  vocative  of  words  like  filius. 

Decline  together  praesidium  parvum ;  filius  bonus ;  fluvius  longus,  the 
long  river;  proelium  clarum,  the  famous  battle. 

90.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  285. 

I.  I .  Frumentum  bonae  terrae,  gladi  mall,  belli  long!.  2.  Constantia 
magna,  praesidia  magna,  clare  Vergili.  3.  Male  serve,  O  clarum 
oppidum,  male  fili,  filii  mali,  fili  mali.  4.  Fluvi  long!,  fluvii  longi,  fluvi- 
orum  longorum,  fama  praesi'dl  magnl.  5.  Cum  gladiis  parvis,  cum 
deabus  clans,  ad  nautas  claros.  6.  Multorum  proeliorum,  praedae 
magnae,  ad  proelia  dura. 


NOUNS  IN  -ER  AND  -IR 


39 


Germania 

II.  Germania,  patria  GermanSrum,  est  clSra  terra.  In  Germania 
sunt  fluvii  multi.  Rhenus  magnus  et  latus  fluvius  Germaniae  est  In 
silvis  latis  Germaniae  sunt  ferae  multae.  Multi  Germani  in  oppidis 
magnis  et  in  vicis  parvis  habitant  et  multi  sunt  agricolae  boni.  Bella 
Germanorum  sunt  magna  et  clara.  Populus  Germaniae  helium  et  5 
proelia  amat  et  saepe  cum  finitimis  pugnat.  Fluvius  Rhenus  est 
finitimus  oppidis^  multis  et  Claris. 


LESSON  XIII 

SECOND  DECLENSION  (Continued) 

91.  Declension  of  Nouns  in  -er  and  -ir.  In  early  Latin  all  the 
masculine  nouns  of  the  second  declension  ended  in  -os.  This  -os  later 
became  -us  in  words  like  servus,  and  was  dropped  entirely  in  words 
with  bases  ending  in  -r,  like  puer,  doy ;  ager,  ^Id;  and  vir,  man. 
These  words  are  therefore  declined  as  follows : 

92.  puer,  m.,  boy  ager,  vc\.,  field        vir,  m.,  man 
Base  puer-                  Base  «gr-  Base  vir- 


Nom.  puer 

Gen.  pueri 

Dat.  puerO 

Ace.  puenun 

Abl.  puer5 


Nom.  pueri 

Gen.  puerdrum 

Dat.  pueiis 

Ace.  puerOfl 

Abl.  pueris 


Singular 
ager 
agri 
agrt 
ag^m 
agr5 

Plural 
agri 

agrdrum 
agris 
agrfts 
agris 


TERMINATIONS 


Vir 



viri 

-i 

vir6 

^ 

virum 

-um 

vir6 

-« 

viri 

-i 

virSrum 

-orum 

viris 

-is 

virOs 

-&8 

viris 

-is 

1  Dadve  with  finitimus.    (See  §  43.) 


40  ADJECTIVES  IN  -ER 

a.  The  vocative  case  of  these  words  is  like  the  nominative,  following  the 
general  rule  (§  74.  a). 

b.  The  declension  differs  from  that  of  servus  only  in  the  nominative  and 
vocative  singular. 

c.  Note  that  in  puer  the  e  remains  all  the  way  through,  while  in  ager  it  is 
present  only  in  the  nominative.  In  puer  the  e  belongs  to  the  base,  but  in 
ager  (base  agr-)  it  does  not,  and  was  inserted  in  the  nominative  to  make  it 
easier  to  pronounce.  Most  words  in  -er  are  declined  like  ager.  The  genitive 
shows  whether  you  are  to  follow  puer  or  ager. 

93.  Masculine  adjectives  in  -er  of  the  second  declension  are  de- 
clined like  nouns  in  -er.  A  few  of  them  are  declined  like  puer,  but 
most  of  them  like  ager.  The  feminine  and  neuter  nominatives  show 
which  form  to  follow,  thus, 


Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

* 

liber 

libera 

liberum 

{free) 

is  like  puer 

pulcher 

pulchra 

pulchrum 

{pretty) 

is  like  ager 

For  the  full  declension  in  the  three  genders,  see  §  469.  b.  c. 

94.   Decline  together  the  words  vir  liber,  terra  libera,  frumentum  liberum, 
puer  pulcher,  puella  pulchra,  oppidum  pulchrum. 


95.  Italia  ^ 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  286. 

Magna  est  Italiae  fama,  patriae  Romanorum,  et  clara  est  Roma, 
domina  orbis  terrarum.^  Tiberim,*  fluvium  Romanum,  quis  non  laudat 
et  pulchros  fluvio  flnitimos  agros  ?  Altos  muros,  longa  et  dura  bella, 
Claras  victorias  quis  non  laudat  ?  Pulchra  est  terra  Italia.  Agri  bom 
5  agricohs  praemia  dant  magna,  et  equi  agricolarum  copiam  frumenti 
ad  oppida  et  vicos  portant.  In  agris  populi  Roman!  laborant  multi 
servi.  Viae  Itahae  sunt  longae  et  latae.  Finitima  Italiae  est  insula 
Sicilia. 

1  In  this  selection  note  especially  the  emphasis  as  shown  by  the  order  of 
the  words.  2  Qx\m  terrarum,  of  the  world.  ^  Tiberim,  the  Tiber,  accusative 
case. 


ADJECTIVES  IN  -ER 


41 


96. 


DIALOGUE 

Marcus  and  Cornelius 


Estne  in  pulchra  terra  Italia  ? 

Ad  fluvium  Rhenum  properat  cum 


C.  Ubi  est,  MSlrce,  filius  tuus  ? 

M.  Non  est,  Cornell,  in  Italia, 
copiis  Romanis  quia  est*  fama 
novi  belli  cum  Germanls.  Liber 
Germaniae   populus   Romanos 
non  amat. 

C.  Estne  filius  tuus  c5piarum 
Romanarum  legatus  ? 

M.  Legatus  non  est,  sed  est 
apud  legionarios. 

C.  Quae  *  arma  portat  •  ? 

M.  Scutum  magnum  et  ion- 
cam  duram  et  galeam  pulchram 
portat. 

C.  Quae  tela  portat  ? 

M.  Gladium  et  pilum  longum 
portat 

C.  Amatne  legatus  filium 
tuuni  ? 

M.  Amat,  et  saepe  filio  meo 
praemia  pulchra  et  praedam 
multam  dat. 

C.  Ubi  est  terra  Germanorum  ? 

M.  Terra  Germanorum,  Cornell,  est  finitima  RhenQ,  fluviS  magno 
et  alto. 

*  c«t,  before  its  subject,  there  is ;  so  sunt,  tAere  are.  ^  Quae,  what  kind  of, 
an  interrogative  adjective  pronoun.  *  What  are  the  three  possible  trans- 
lations of  the  present  tense  ? 


LEGIONARIUS 


42  POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS 

LESSON   XIV 
THE  POSSESSIVE  ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS 

97.  Observe  the  sentences 

This  is  ?}iy  shield 
This  shield  is  mine 

In  the  first  sentence  my  is  a  possessive  adjective  ;  in  the  second  mine 
is  a  possessive  pronoun,  for  it  takes  the  place  of  a  noun,  this  shield  is 
mine  being  equivalent  to  this  shield  is  my  shield.  Similarly,  in  Latin  the 
possessives  are  sometimes  adjectives  and  sometimes  pronouns. 

98.  The  possessives  my,  mine,  your,  yours,  etc.  are  declined  like 
adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declensions. 

Singular 
jst  Pers.  meus,  mea,  meum  my,  mine 

2d  Pers.  tuus,  tua,  tuum  your,  yours 

jd  Pers.   suus,  sua,  suum  his  {own),  her  {own),  its  {own) 

Plural 
1st  Pe?'s.  noster,  nostra,  nostrum  our,  ours 

2d  Pers.   vester,  vestra,  vestrum  your,  yours 

jd  Pers.  suus,  sua,  suum  their  {own),  theirs 

Note.  Meus  has  the  irregular  vocative  singular  masculine  mi,  as  mi  fill, 
O  my  son. 

a.  The  possessives  agree  with  the  name  of  the  thing  possessed  in  gender, 
number,  and  case.    Compare  the  English  and  Latin  in 

Sextus  is  calling  his  boy     Sextus  "1 
r  7-     '       „.      ,      ,  ,-,.        ^  suum  puerum  vocat 

Juha  zs  calling  her  boy       lulia     J 

Observe  that  suum  agrees  with  puenim,  and  is  unaffected  by  the  gender 
of  Sextus  or  Julia. 

b.  When  your,  yours,  refers  to  one  person,  use  tuus ;  when  to  more 
than  one,  vester ;  as, 

Lesbia,  your  wreaths  are  pretty      Coronae  tuae,  Lesbia,  sunt  pulchrae 
Girls,  your  wreaths  are  pretty        Coronae  vestrae,  puellae,  sunt  pulchrae 


EXERCISES  43 

c.  Sana  is  a  reflexive  possessive,  that  is,  it  usually  stands  in  the  predicate 
and  regularly  refers  back  to  the  subject.  Thus,  Vir  8u6s  servOs  vocat  means 
The  man  calls  his  {own)  slaves.  Here  his  (suds)  refers  to  mapi  (vir),  and 
could  not  refer  to  any  one  else. 

d.  Possessives  are  used  much  less  frequently  than  in  English,  being 
omitted  whenever  the  meaning  is  clear  without  them.  (Cf.  §  22.  a.)  This 
is  especially  true  of  suus,  -a,  -um,  which,  when  inserted,  is  more  or  less 
emphatic,  like  our  his  oivn^  her  own^  etc. 

99.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  286. 

I  I  Marcus  amico  Sexto  consilium  suum  nuntiat.  2.  Est  cOpia 
frumcnti  in  agris  nostris.  3.  Amici  mei  bonam  cenam  ancillae  vestrae 
laudant.  4.  Tua  l5rica,  mi  fill,  est  dura.  5.  Scuta  nostra  et  tela,  mi 
amice,  in  castris  RomSnis  sunt.  6.  Suntne  viri  patriae  tuae  liberi.'' 
Sunt.  7.  Ubi,  Comeli,  est  tua  galea  pulchra?  8.  Mea  galea,  Sexte, 
est  in  casa  mea.  9.  Pilum  longum  est  tuum,  sed  gladius  est  meus. 
ID.  lulia  galllnas  suas  pulchras  amat  et  galllnae  dominam  suam  amant. 
II,  Nostra  castra  sunt  vestra.  12.  Est  copia  praedae  in  castris  vestris. 
13.  Amici  tui  miseris  et  aegris  cibum  et  pecuniam  saepe  dant. 

II.  I.  Our  teacher  praises  Mark's  industry.  2.  My  son  Sextus  is 
carrying  his  booty  to  the  Roman  camp.^  3.  Your  good  girls  are  giving 
aid  to  the  sick  and  wretched.*  4.  There  are  •  frequent  battles  in  our 
villages.  5.  My  son,  where  is  the  lieutenant's  food?  6.  The  camp  is 
mine,  but  the  weapons  are  yours. 

^  Not  the  dative.  Why  ?  «  Here  the  adjectives  sick  and  xoretched  arc  used 
like  nouns.        *  Where  should  sunt  stand .'   Cf.  I.  2  above. 


ACRICOLA  A  RAT 


44  THE  ABLATIVE  DENOTING  WITH 

LESSON   XV 
THE  ABLATIVE  DENOTING  WITH 

100.  Of  the  various  relations  denoted  by  the  ablative  case  (§  50) 
there  is  none  more  important  than  that  expressed  in  English  by  the 
preposition  with.  This  little  word  is  not  so  simple  as  it  looks.  It  does 
not  always  convey  the  same  meaning,  nor  is  it  always  to  be  translated 
by  cum.    This  will  become  clear  from  the  following  sentences : 

a.  Mark  is  feeble  with  {for  or  because  of)  want  of  food 

b.  Diana  kills  the  beasts  with  (or  by)  her  arrows 

c.  Julia  is  with  Sextus 

d.  The  men  fight  with  great  steadiness 

a.  In  sentence  <2,  with  want  {of  fqpd)  gives  the  cause  of  Mark's  feeble- 
ness. This  idea  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition, 
and  the  construction  is  called  the  ablative  of  cause : 

Marcus  est  infirmus  inopia  cibi 

b.  In  sentence  ^,  with  (or  by)  her  arrows  tells  by  means  of  what  Diana 
kills  the  beasts.  This  idea  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition,  and  the  construction  is  called  the  ablative  of  means : 

Diana  sagittis  suis  feras  necat 

c.  In  sentence  c  we  are  told  that  Julia  is  not  alone,  but  in  company  with 
Sextus.  This  idea  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  ablative  with  the  preposi- 
tion cum,  and  the  construction  is  called  the  ablative  of  accompaniment : 

liilia  est  cum  Sexto 

</.  In  sentence  d  we  are  told  how  the  men  fight.  The  idea  is  one  of 
manner.  This  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  ablative  with  cum,  unless  there 
is  a  modifying  adjective  present,  in  which  case  cum  may  be  omitted.  This 
construction  is  called  the  ablative  of  manner : 

Viri  (cum)  constantia  magna  pugnant 

101.  You  are  now  able  to  form  four  important  rules  for  the  ablative 
denoting  with : 


THE  ABLATIVE  DENOTING  WITH  45 

102.  RuLK.  Ablative  of  Cause.  Cause  is  denoted  by  the  abla- 
tive without  a  preposition.  This  answers  the  question  Because 
of  7vhat  ? 

103.  Rule.  Ablative  of  Means.  Means  is  denoted  by  the  abla- 
tive without  a  preposition.  This  answers  the  question  By  means 
of  what?   With  what? 

N.B.  Ciiin  must  never  be  used  with  the  ablative  expressing  cause  or 
means. 

104.  Rule.  Ablative  of  Accompaniment.  Accompaniment  is 
denoted  by  the  ablative  with  cum.  This  answers  the  question 
With  whom  ? 

105.  Rule.  Ablative  of  Manner.  The  ablative  with  cum  is  used 
to  denote  the  manner  of  an  action.  Cum  may  be  omit  ted ^  if  an 
adjective  is  used  with  the  ablative.  This  answers  the  question 
Hoiv  ?  In  what  manner  ? 

106.  What  uses  of  the  ablative  do  you  discover  in  the  following 
passage,  and  what  question  does  each  answer  "i 

The  soldiers  marched  to  the  fort  with  great  speed  and  broke  down  the 
gate  with  blows  of  their  muskets.  The  inhabitants,  terrified  by  the  din, 
attempted  to  cross  the  river  with  their  wives  and  children,  but  the  stream 
was  swollen  with  {or  by)  the  rain.  Because  of  this  many  were  swept  away 
by  the  waters  and  only  a  few,  almost  overcome  with  fatigue,  with  great 
difficulty  succeeded  in  gaining  the  farther  shore. 

107.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  286. 

I.  The  Romans  prepare  for  War.  Roman!,  clams  Italiae  populus, 
helium  parant.  Ex  agris  suis,  vicis,  oppidisque  magno  studio  viri  valid! 
ad  arma  properant.  lam  legati  cum  legionariis  ex  Italia  ad  Rhenum, 
fluvium  Germaniae  altum  et  latum,  properant,  et  servi  equis  et  earns 
cibum  frumentumque  ad  castra  Romana  portant.  Inopia  bonorum 
telorum  infirm!  sunt  GermSni,  sed  Roman!  arm3ti  galeis,  loricis, 
scQtis,  gladiis,  pllisque  sunt  valid!. 


46 


THE  NINE  IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES 


II.  I.  The  sturdy  farmers  of  Italy  labor  in  the  fields  with  great 
diligence.  2.  Sextus,  the  lieutenant,  and  (his)  son  Mark  are  fighting 
with  the  Germans.  3.  The  Roman  legionaries  are  armed  with  long 
spears.  4.  Where  is  Lesbia,  your  maid,  Sextus  ?  Lesbia  is  with  my 
friends  in  Galba's  cottage.  5.  Many  are  sick  because  of  bad  water 
and  for  lack  of  food.  6.  The  Germans,  with  (their)  sons  and  daughters, 
are  hastening  with  horses  and  wagons. 


LESSON  XVI 

THE  NINE  IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES 

108.  There  are  nine  irregular  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second 
declensions  which  have  a  peculiar  termination  in  the  genitive  and 
dative  singular  of  all  genders : 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

Gen.     -ius  -ius  -ius 

Dat.     -i  -i  -i 

Otherwise  they  are  declined  like  bonus,  -a,  -um.  Learn  the  list 
and  the  meaning  of  each : 


alius,  alia,  aliud,  other^  another  {pi 

several) 
alter,  altera,  alterum,  the  one^  the 

other  (of  two) 
iinus,  -a,  -um,  one^  alone j  (in  the 

plural)  only 
uUus,  -a,  -um,  any 


nuUus,  -a,  -um,  none.,  no 
solus,  -a,  -um,  alone 
lotus,  -a,  -um,  all.,  whole,  entire 
uter,  utra,  utrum,  which? 

{pi  two) 
neuter,  neutra,  neutrum,  neither 

{pi  two) 


109 

1. 

PARADIGMS 

Singular 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

masc. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

nullus 

nulla 

nullum 

alius 

alia 

aliud 

Gen. 

nulli'us 

nulli'us 

nulli'us 

ali'us 

alfus 

airus 

Dat. 

null! 

nulli 

nulli 

alii 

alii 

alii 

Ace. 

nullum 

nOllam 

nullum 

alium 

aliam 

aliud 

AK 

nulls 

nulla 

nulls 

aliS 

m 

m 

TWE  Plural  is  Regular 


THE  NINE  IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES  47 

a.  Note  the  peculiar  neuter  singular  ending  in  -d  of  alins.  The  genitive 
alius  is  rare.    Instead  of  it  use  alterius,  the  genitive  of  alter. 

d.  These  peculiar  case  endings  are  found  also  in  the  declension  of  pro- 
nouns (see  §  114).  For  this  reason  these  adjectives  arc  sometimes  called 
the  pronominal  adjectives. 

110.  Learn  the  following  idioms  : 

alter, -era, -erum  .  .  .  alter, -era, -erum,  M^  t?«^  .  .  .  the  other  {pi  tvio) 
alius,  -a,  -ud  .  .  .  alius,  -a,  -ud,  one  .  .  .  another  {pi  any  number) 
alii,  -ae,  -a.    .  .  .  alii,  -ae,  -a,  some  .  .  .  others 

EXAMPLES 

1.  Alterum  oppidum  est  magnum,  alterum  parviun,  the  one  town  is 
large,  the  other  small  (of  two  towns). 

2.  Aliud  oppidum  est  validum,  aliud  infirmum,  one  town  is  strong, 
another  weak  (of  towns  in  general). 

3.  Alii  gladids,  alii  scuta  portant,  some  carry  swords,  others  shields. 

111.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  In  utra  casa  est  lulia?  lulia  est  in  neutra  casa.  2.  Null! 
malo  puero  praemium  dat  magister.  3.  Alter  puer  est  nauta,  alter 
agricola.  4.  Alii  viri  aquam,  alii  terram  amant.  5.  Galba  Gnus  (or 
solus)  cum  studio  laborat.  6.  Estne  uUus  carrus  in  agro  meo? 
7.  Lesbia  est  ancilla  alterius  dominl,  Tullia  alterius.  8.  Lesbia  sola 
cenam  parat.  9.  Cena  nullius  alterius  ancillae  est  bona.  10.  Lesbia 
null!  alii  viro  cenam  dat. 

Note.  The  pronominal  adjectives,  as  you  observe,  regularly  stand  before 
and  not  after  their  nouns. 

II.  I.  The  men  of  all  Germany  are  preparing  for  war.  2.  Some 
towns  are  great  and  others  are  small.  3.  One  boy  likes  chickens, 
another  horses.    4.  Already  the  booty  of  one  town  is  in  our  fort. 

5.  Our  whole  village  is  suffering  for  (i.e.  weak  because  of)  lack  of  food. 

6.  The  people  are  already  hastening  to  the  other  town.    7.  Among 
the  Romans  (there)  is  no  lack  of  grain. 


43 


THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  IS,  £A,  ID 


LESSON   XVII 
THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  /S,  EA,  ID 

112.  A  demonstrative  is  a  word  that  points  out  an  object  definitely, 
as  this^  that,  these,  those.  Sometimes  these  words  are  pronouns,  as, 
Do  you  hear  these  ?  and  sometimes  adjectives,  as.  Do  you  hear  these 
men?  In  the  former  case  they  are  called  demonstrative  pronouns, 
in  the  latter  demonstrative  adjectives. 

113.  Demonstratives  are  similarly  used  in  Latin  both  2^^  pronouns 
and  as  adjectives.    The  one  used  most  is 

is,  masculine ;  ea,  feminine  ;  id,  neuter 


Singular 


r  this 
\that 


Plural 


these 
those 


114.  Is  is  declined  as  follows.    Compare  its  declension  with  that 
of  alius,  §  109. 

Bask  e- 


S 

INGULAR 

Plural 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

No7n. 

is 

ea 

id 

61  {or  ii) 

eae 

ea 

Ge?i. 

eius 

eius 

eius 

eorum 

earum 

eorum 

Dat. 

ei 

ei 

el 

els  {or  iis) 

■  eis  {or  iis) 

els  {or  iis) 

Ace. 

eum 

earn 

id 

e5s 

eas 

ea 

AM. 

eo 

ea 

eo 

eis  {or  iis) 

els  {or  iis) 

eis  {or  iis) 

Note  that  the  base  e-  changes  to  i-  in  a  few  cases.  The  genitive  singular 
eius  is  pronounced  eh'yus.  In  the  plural  the  forms  with  two  i's  are  preferred 
and  the  two  i's  are  pronounced  as  one.    Hence,  pronounce  ii  as  i  and  iis 


115.  Besides  being  used  as  demonstrative  pronouns  and  adjectives 
the  Latin  demonstratives  are  regularly  used  for  the  personal  pronoun 
he,  she,  it.  As  a  personal  pronoun,  then,  is  would  have  the  following 
meanings: 


Norn. 

Gftt. 

Sing,  h 

Vat, 

Ace. 

Abl. 

'Norn. 

Gen. 

Plur.  . 

Dai. 

Ace. 

Abi. 

COMPARISON  BETWEEN  SUUS  AND  IS  49 

ia,  he;  ea,  she;  id,  // 

eius,  of  him  or  his  ;  eius,  of  her ^  her^  or  /f^rrj/  eius,  0/  it 

( 'I  //; 
ci,  to  ox  for  him  ;  ei,  /<?  ox  for  her ;  el,  /<?  ox  for  it 
eum,  ///wy  earn,  ^<rr/  id,  // 
efl,  withy  from ^  etc.,  ^/wy  e&,  wit h^  from ^  etc.,  ^^ry  eC, 

w////,  from^  etc.,  // 

el  or  ii,  eae,  ea,  they 

edrum,  earum,  eSnim,  of  them,  their 

eis  or  iis,  eis  or  lis,  eis  or  lis,  to  ox  for  them 

e5s,  eas,  ea,  them 

eis  or  iis,  eis  or  iis,  eis  or  iis,  with^  from^  etc.,  them 

116.  Comparison  between  suus  and  is.  We  learned  above  (§  98.  c) 
that  8UU8  is  a  reflexive  possessive.  When  his,  her  (poss.),  its,  their,  do 
not  refer  to  the  subject  of  the  sentence,  we  express  his,  her,  its  by 
eius,  the  genitive  singular  of  is,  ea,  id ;  and  their  by  the  genitive 
plural,  using  eOnim  to  refer  to  a  masculine  or  neuter  antecedent  noun 
and  e&rum  to  refer  to  a  feminine  one. 

EXAMPLES 

Galba  calls  his  (own)  son,  Galba  suum  filium  vocal 

Galba  calls  his  son  (not  his  own,  but  another's),  Galba  eius  filium  vocat 

fulia  calls  her  (own)  children,  lulia  suds  liberos  vocat 

fulia  calls  her  children  (not  her  own,  but  another's),  lulia  eius  llberds 

vocat 
The  men  praise  their  (own)  boys,  viri  su6s  puerSs  laudant 
The  men  praise  their  boys  (not  their  own,  but  others'),  viri  eorum  puerds 

laudant 

117.  EXERCISES 
First  leam  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  287. 

I.  He  praises  her,  him,  it,  them.  2.  This  cart,  that  report,  these 
teachers,  those  women,  that  abode,  these  abodes.  3.  That  strong 
garrison,  among  those  weak  and  sick  women,  that  want  of  firmness, 
those  frequent  plans. 

4.  The  other  woman  is  calling  her  chickens  (A^  <?w«).  5.  Another 
woman  is  calling  her  chickens  {not  her  own).    6.  The  Gaul  praises 


50 


EXERCISES 


his  arms  (his  own).  7.  The  Gaul  praises  his  arms  (not  his  own). 
8.  This  farmer  often  plows  their  fields.  9.  Those  wretched  slaves 
long  for  their  master  {thdr  own).  10.  Those  wretched  slaves  long 
for  their  master  {not  their  own).  1 1 .  Free  men  love  their  own  father- 
land.    12.  They  love  its  villages  and  towns. 

118.  DIALOGUE 1 

Cornelius  and  Marcus 

M.  Quis  est  vir,  Cornell,  cum  puero  parvo  ?  Estne  R5manus  et  liber  ? 

C.  Romanus  non  est,  Marce.  Is  vir  est  servus  et  eius  domicilium 
est  in  silvis  Galliae. 

M.  Estne  puer  filius  eius  servl  an  alterius  ? 

C.  Neutrius  filius  est  puer.    Is  est  filius  legatl  Sexti. 

M.  Quo  puer  cum  eo  servo  properat  ? 

C.  Is  cum  servo  properat  ad  latos  Sexti  agros.^  Totum  frumentum 
est  iam  maturum  et  magnus  servorum  numerus  in  Italiae  ^  agris  laborat. 

M.  Agricolaene  sunt  Gall!  et  patriae  suae  agros  arant  ? 

C.  Non  agricolae  sunt.  Bellum.  amant  Galll,  non  agri  culturam. 
Apud  eos  viri  pugnant  et  feminae  auxilio  liberorum  agros  arant 
parantque  cibum. 

M.  Magister  noster  pueris  puellisque  gratas  Gallorum  fabulas  saepe 
narrat  et  laudat  eos  saepe. 

C.  Mala  est  fortuna  eorum  et  saepe  miseri  servi  multis  cum  lacri- 
mls  patriam  suam  desiderant. 

1  There  are  a  number  of  departures  from  the  normal  order  in  this  dialogue. 
Find  them,  and  give  the  reason.  2  When  a  noun  is  modified  by  both  a 
genitive  and  an  adjective,  a  favorite  order  of  words  is  adjective,  genitive,  noun 
8  A  modifying  genitive  often  stands  between  a  preposition  and  its  object 


Second  Review,  Lessons  IX-XVII,  §§  506-509 


CONJUGATION  5 1 

LESSON  XVIII 

CONJUGATION 

THE  PRESENT,  IMPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  TENSES  OF  SUM 

119.  The  inflection  of  a  verb  is  called  its  conjugation  (cf.  §  23).  In 
English  the  verb  has  but  few  changes  in  form,  the  different  meanings 
being  expressed  by  the  use  of  personal  pronouns  and  auxiliaries,  as, 
/  am  carried^  we  have  carried^  they  shall  have  carried,  etc  In  Latin, 
on  the  other  hand,  instead  of  using  personal  pronouns  and  auxiliary 
verbs,  the  form  changes  with  the  meaning.  In  this  way  the  Romans 
expressed  differences  in  tense,  mood,  voice,  person,  and  number. 

120.  The  Tenses.  The  different  forms  of  a  verb  referring  to  differ- 
ent times  are  called  its  tenses.  The  chief  distinctions  of  time  arc 
present,  past,  and  future : 

1 .  The   present,  that  is,  what  is  happening  1 

now,  or   what  usually  happens,  is  ex-  I  the  Puksknt  Tbnsk 
pressed  by  J 

2.  The  past,  that  is,  what  was  happening,  '\ 

used  to  happen,  happened,  has  happened,   \  "^"^  Imperfect,  Perfect, 
r    ^  ,    f f     *,  .  ,  ,  I     AND  Pluperfect  Tenses 

or  had  happened,  is  expressed  by  j 

3.  The  future,  that  is,  what  is  going  to  hap-  \  x„k  future  and  Future 

pen,  is  expressed  by  /  Perfect  Tenses 

121.  The  Moods.  Verbs  have  inflection  of  mood  to  indicate  the 
manner  in  which  they  express  action.  The  moods  of  the  Latin  verb 
ai-e  the  indicative,  subjunctive,  imperative,  and  infinitive. 

a.  A  verb  is  in  the  indicative  mood  when  it  makes  a  statement  or  asks 
a  question  about  something  assumed  as  a  fact.  All  the  verbs  we  have  used 
thus  far  are  in  the  present  indicative. 

122.  The  Persons.  There  are  three  persons,  as  in  English.  The 
first  person  is  the  person  speaking  (/  sing) ;  the  second  person  the 
person  spoken  to  (^you  sing) ;  the  third  person  the  person  spoken  of 


52  CONJUGATION 

{he  sings).  Instead  of  using  personal  pronouns  for  the  different  per- 
sons in  the  two  numbers,  singular  and  plural,  the  Latin  verb  uses  the 
pergonal  endings  (cf.  §  22  ^ ;  29).  We  have  already  learned  that  -t  is 
the  ending  of  the  third  person  singular  in  the  active  voice  and  -nt  of 
the  third  person  plural.  The  complete  list  of  personal  endings  of  the 
active  voice  is  as  follows : 

Singular  Plural 

1st  Pers.     J  -m  or  -o  ,  we       -mus 

2d  Pers.      thou  or  you      -s  you      -tis 

jd  Pers.      he,  she,  it         -t  they      -nt 

123.  Most  verbs  form  their  moods  and  tenses  after  a  regular  plan 
and  are  called  regular  verbs.  Verbs  that  depart  from  this  plan  are 
called  irregular.  The  verb  to  be  is  irregular  in  Latin  as  in  English. 
The  present,  imperfect,  and  future  tenses  of  the  indicative  are 
inflected  as  follows: 

Present  Indicative 
singular  plural 

jst  Pers.     su-m,  /  am  su-mus,  we  are 

2d  Pers.     e-s,  you  ^  are  es-tis,  you  ^  are 

jd  Pers.     es-t,  he,  she,  or  //  is  su-nt,  they  are 

Imperfect  Indicative 

1st  Pers.     er-a-m,  /  was  er-a'-mus,  we  were 

2d  Pers.      er-a-s,  you  were  er-a'-tis,  you  were 

jd  Pers.     er-a-t,  he,  she,  or  it  was  er-a-nt,  they  were 

Future  Indicative 

1st  Pers.     er-o,  /  shall  be  er'-i-mus,  we  shall  be  * 

2d  Pers.      er-i-s,  you  will  be  er'-i-tis,  you  will  lie 

jd  Pers.      er-i-t,  he  will  be  er-u-nt,  they  will  be 

a.  Be  careful  about  vowel  quantity  and  accent  in  these  forms,  and  con- 
sult §§  12.2;  14;  15. 

1  Observe  that  in  English  you  are,  you  were,  etc.  may  be  either  singular  or 
plural.   In  Latin  the  singular  and  plural  forms  are  never  the  same. 


0) 

en 
O 

S  & 


EXERCISES  53 

124.  DIALOGUE 

The  Boys  Skxtus  and  Marcus 
1  irst  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  287. 

S.  Ubi  es,  Marce  ?   Ubi  est  Quintus  ?   Ubi  estis,  amici  ? 

M.  Cum  Quinto,  Sexte,  in  silva  sum.  Non  s6li  sumus;  sunt  in 
silva  multi  alii  pueri. 

S.  Nunc  laetus  es,  sed  nOper  non  laetus  eras.   Cur  miser  eras  ? 

M.  Miser  eram  quia  amicI  mei  erant  in  alio  vico  et  eram  solus. 
Nunc  sum  apud  socios  meos.    Nunc  laeti  sumus  et  erimus. 

S.  Eratisne  in  ludo  hodie  ? 

M.  Hodie  non  eramus  in  ludo,  quod  magister  erat  aeger. 

S.  Eritisne  mox  in  ludo  } 

M.  Amici  mei  ibi  erunt,  sed  ego  (/)  non  ero. 

5.  Cur  non  ibi  eris  ?  Magister,  saepe  iratus,  inopiam  tuam  studi 
diligentiaeque  non  laudat. 

M.  Nuper  aeger  eram  et  nunc  infirmus  sum. 

125.  EXERCISE 

I .  You  are,  you  were,  you  will  be,  (j/«^.  and  plur^.  2.  I  am,  I 
was,  I  shall  be.  3.  He  is,  he  was,  he  will  be.  4.  We  are,  we  were, 
we  shall  be.    5.  They  are,  they  were,  they  will  be. 

6.  Why  were  you  not  in  school  to-day?  I  was  sick.  7.  Lately  he 
was  a  sailor,  now  he  is  a  farmer,  soon  he  will  be  a  teacher.  8.  To-day 
I  am  happy,  but  lately  I  was  wretched.  9.  The  teachers  were  happy 
because  of  the  boys'  industry. 


PUBRI   KOMANI   IN   LUDO 


54  PRESENT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE 


LESSON  XIX 

THE  FOUR  REGULAR  CONJUGATIONS  •  PRESENT  ACTIVE 
INDICATIVE  OF  AMO  AND  MONEO 

126.  There  are  four  conjugations  of  the  regular  verbs.  These  con- 
jugations are  distinguished  from  each  other  by  the  final  vowel  of  the 
present  conjugation-stem.^  This  vowel  is  called  the  distinguishing 
vowel,  and  is  best  seen  in  the  present  infinitive. 

Below  is  given  the  present  infinitive  of  a  verb  of  each  conjugation, 
the  present  stem,  and  the  distinguishing  vowel. 


Conjugation 

Pres.  Infin. 

Pres.  Stem 

DISTINGUISHING 
VOWEL 

I. 

ama're,  to  love 

ama- 

a 

II. 

mone're,  to  advise 

mone- 

I 

III. 

re'g6re,  to  rule 

reg&- 

6 

IV. 

audi're,  to  hear 

audi- 

i 

a.  Note  that  the  present  stem  of  each  conjugation  is  found  by  dropping 
-re,  the  ending  of  the  present  infinitive. 

Note.  The  present  infinitive  of  sum  is  esse,  and  es-  is  the  present  stem. 

127.  From  the  present  stem  are  formed  the  present,  imperfect,  and 
future  tenses. 

128.  The  inflection  of  the  Present  Active  Indicative  of  the  first 
and  of  the  second  conjugation  is  as  follows : 


Sing. 


Plur. 


1  The  stem  is  the  body  of  a  word  to  which  the  terminations  are  attached. 
It  is  often  identical  with  the  base  (cf.  §  58).  If,  however,  the  stem  ends  in  a 
vowel,  the  latter  does  not  appear  in  the  base,  but  is  variously  combined  with 
the  inflectional  terminations.    This  point  is  further  explained  in  §  230. 


ElEi 

a''mo,  ama'te  {love) 
s.  Stem  ama- 

mo'neS,  mone're  {advise) 
Pres.  Stem  mone- 

personal 

ENDINGS 

I. 

a'mo,  /  love 

mo'neo,  /  advise 

-6 

2. 

a'mas,  you  love 

mo'nes,  you  advise 

-s 

3. 

a'mat,  he  {she,  it)  loves 

mo'net,  he  {she,  it)  advises 

-t 

I. 

ama'mus,  we  love 

mone'mus,  we  advise 

-mus 

2. 

ama'tis,  you  love 

mone'tis,  you  advise 

-tis 

3. 

a'mant,  they  love 

mo'nent,  they  advise 

-nt 

PRESENT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE 


55 


( .  The  present  tense  is  inflected  by  adding  the  personal  endings  to  the 
present  stem,  and  its  first  person  uses  -5  and  not  -m.  The  form  »m6  is  for 
ama-d,  the  two  vowels  a-6  contracting  to  6.  In  mone5  there  is  no  contraction. 
Nearly  all  regular  verbs  ending  in  -ed  belong  to  the  second  conjugation. 

2.  Note  that  the  long  final  vowel  of  the  stem  is  shortened  before  another 
vowel  (mone-C  =  mo'nW),  and  before  final  -t  (amSt,  monfit)  and  -nt 
(^amint,  monSnt).    Compare  §  1 2.  2. 

129.  Like  amO  and  moneO  inflect  the  present  active  indicative  of  the 
following  verbs  * : 


Indicative  Present 

a'r6, 1  plow 

cu'r6,  /  care  for 
•d€ae«,  /  destroy 

desi'derO,  /  long  for 

d6,'- 1  give 
•ha  1)6(5, 1  have 

ha 'bits,  /  live^  I  dwell 
♦iu'beS,  /  order 

labS'rO,  /  labor 

Ian 'do,  I  praise 

matii'rS,  I  hasten 
"•mo'ved,  /  fnove 

nar'ro,  /  tell 

ne'c6,  /  kill 

niin'tiS,  /  announce 

pa'ro,  I  prepare 

por'to,  /  carry 

pro'per6,  /  hasten 

pug'nS,  I  fight 
♦vi'deO,  I  see 

vo'c5,  /  call 


Infinitive  Present 
ara're,  to  plow 
ciira're,  to  care  for 
dele're,  to  destroy 
desidera're,  to  long  for 
da 're,  to  give 
habe're,  to  have 
habita're,  to  live,  to  dwell 
lube 're,  to  order 
labOra're,  to  labor 
lauda're,  to  praise 
matura're,  to  hasten 
move're,  to  move 
narra're,  to  tell 
neca're,  to  kill 
niintia're,  to  announce 
para 're,  to  prepare 
porta 're,  to  carry 
propera're,  to  hasten 
pugna're,  to  fight 
vide're,  to  see 
voca're,  to  call 


130.  The  Translation  of  the  Present.  In  English  there  are  three 
ways  of  expressing  present  action.  We  may  say,  for  example,  I  live ^ 
I  am  livings  or  I  do  live.  In  Latin  the  one  expression  habitO  covers 
all  three  of  these  expressions. 

'  The  only  new  verbs  in  this  list  are  the  five  of  the  second  conjugation 
which  are  starred.  Learn  their  meanings.  *  Observe  that  in  d6,  dire,  the  a 
is  short,  and  that  the  present  stem  is  di-  and  not  dl-.  The  only  forms  of  d5 
that  have  «  long  are  dia  (pres.  indie),  di  (pres.  imv.),  and  dins  (pres.  part). 


56  IMPERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE 

131.  EXERCISES 

Give  the  voice^  mood,  tense,  person,  and  ttumber  of  each  form. 

I.  I .  Vocamus,  properatis,  iubent.  2 .  Movetis,  laudas,  vides.  3.  De- 
letis,  habetis,  dant.  4.  Maturas,  deslderat,  videmus.  5.  lubet,  mo- 
vent, necat.  6.  Narramus,  moves,  vident.  7.  Laboratis,  properant, 
portas,  parant.    8.  Delet,  habetis,  iubemus,  das. 

N.B.  Observe  that  the  personal  ending  is  of  prime  importance  in  trans- 
lating a  Latin  verb  form.    Give  that  your  first  attention. 

II.  I.  We  plow,  we  are  plowing,  we  do  plow.  2.  They  care  for, 
they  are  caring  for,  they  do  care  for.  3.  You  give,  you  are  having, 
you  do  have  (sing.y  4.  We  destroy,  I  do  long  for,  they  are  living. 
5.  He  calls,  they  see,  we  are  telling.  6.  We  do  fight,  we  order,  he 
is  moving,  he  prepares.    7.  They  are  laboring,  we  kill,  you  announce. 

LESSON   XX 
IMPERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  OF  AMO  AND  MONEO 

132.  Tense  Signs.  Instead  of  using  auxiliary  verbs  to  express 
differences  in  tense,  like  was,  shall,  will,  etc.,  Latin  adds  to  the 
verb  stem  certain  elements  that  have  the  force  of  auxiliary  verbs. 
These  are  called  tense  signs. 

133.  Formation  and  Inflection  of  the  Imperfect.  The  tense  sign 
of  the  imperfect  is  -ba-,  which  is  added  to  the  present  stem.  The 
imperfect  consists,  therefore,  of  three  parts : 

Present  Stem  Tense  Sign  personal  ending 

ama-  ba-  m 

loving  was  I 

The  inflection  is  as  follows : 

Conjugation  I  Conjugation  II  personal 

SINGULAR  ENDINGS 

1.  ama1t)am,  I  was  loving  mone'bam,  I  was  advising  -m 

2.  ama'bas,  you  were  loving        mone'bas,  you  were  advising         -s 

3.  ama'bat,  he  was  loving  mone'bat,  he  was  advising  -t 


IMPERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  57 

PERSONAL 

I'LURAL  ENDINGS 

1.  amaba'mus,  we  were  loving    moneba^mns,  we  were  advising  -mus 

2.  amaba'tis,  jtf«  were  loving  ■  monebi'tis,  7^?//  were  advising    -tis 

3.  ama'bant,  they  were  loving     mone'bant,  they  were  advising    -nt 

a.  Note  that  the  i  of  the  tense  sign  -ba-  is  shortened  before  -nt,  and 
before  m  and  t  when  final.   (Cf.  §  1 2.  2.) 

In  a  similar  manner  inflect  the  verbs  given  in  §  129. 

134.  Meaning  of  the  Imperfect.  The  Latin  imperfect  describes 
an  act  as  going  on  ox  progressing  in  past  time,  like  the  English  past- 
progressive  tense  (as,  I  was  walking).  It  is  the  regular  tense  used 
to  describe  a  past  situation  or  condition  of  affairs. 

135.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Videbamus,  dgsiderabat,  maturabas.  2.  Dabant,  vocabatis, 
delebamus.  3.  Pugnant,  laudabas,  movebatis.  4.  lubSbant,  properS- 
batis,  portabamus.  5.  Dabas,  narrabant,  laborabatis.  6.  Videbant, 
movebas,  nuntiabamus.    7.  Necabat,  movebam,  habebat,  parabatis. 

II.  I.  You  were  having  {sing,  and plur.),  we  were  killing,  they 
were  laboring.  2.  He  was  moving,  we  were  ordering,  we  were  fight- 
ing. 3.  We  were  telling,  they  were  seeing,  he  was  calling.  4.  They 
were  living,  I  was  longing  for,  we  were  destroying.  5.  You  were 
giving,  you  were  moving,  you  were  announcing,  {sing,  and  plur.). 
6.  They  were  caring  for,  he  was  plowing,  we  were  praising. 

136.  Nl'OBE  AND   HER   CHILDREN 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  287. 

Nioba,  regina  Thebanorum,   erat  pulchra  fgmina  sed   superba. 

Erat  superba  n6n  sOlum  fOrma*  suS  maritique  potentia*  sed  edam 

magnO  liberOrum  numerS.*    Nam  habebat*  septem  filiOs  et  septem 

filias.   Sed  ea  superbia  erat  reginae  •  causa  magnae  tristitiae  et  llberis  • 

causa  durae  poenae. 

Note.  The  words  Niobi,  ThSbinfirum,  and  mariti  will  be  found  in  the  general 
vocabulary.   Translate  the  selection  without  looking  up  any  other  words. 

*  Ablative  of  cause.  *  Translate  had;  it  denotes  a  past  situation.  (See 
f  134.)         •  Dative,  cf.  %  43. 


58  FUTURE  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE 

LESSON   XXI 
FUTURE  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  OF  AMO  AND  MONEO 

137.  The  tense  sign  of  the  Future  Indicative  in  the  first  and  second 
conjugations  is  -bi-.  This  is  joined  to  the  present  stem  of  the  verb 
and  followed  by  the  personal  ending,  as  follows : 

Present  Stem  Tense  Sign  personal  ending 

ama-  bi-  s 

loz'e  will  you 

138.  The  Future  Active  Indicative  is  inflected  as  follows . 
Conjugation  I  Conjugation  II 

SINGULAR 

1 .  ama'bo,  /  shall  love  mone'bo,  /  shall  advise 

2.  ama'bis,  you  will  love  mone'bis,  you  will  advise 

3.  ama'bit,  he  will  love  mone'bit,  he  will  advise 

PLURAL 

1.  2xak%vcaxi&y  we  shall  love  vcionQ'\)\m.u&,  we  shall  advise 

2.  SLmafbitis,  you  will  love  mone'hitiSy  you  will  advise 

3.  ama'bunt,  Ihey  will  love  mone'bunt,  Ihey  will  advise 

a.  The  personal  endings  are  as  in  the  present.  The  ending  -bo  in  the 
first  person  singular  is  contracted  from  -bi-o.  The  -bi-  appears  as  -bu-  in 
the  third  person  plural.  Note  that  the  inflection  is  like  that  of  ero,  the 
future  of  sum.    Pay  especial  attention  to  the  accent. 

In  a  similar  manner  inflect  the  verbs  given  in  §  129. 

139.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Movebitis,  laudabis,  arabo.  2.  Delebitis,  vocabitis,  dabunt. 
3.  Maturabis,  deslderabit,  videbimus.  4.  Habebit,  movebunt,  necabit. 
5.  Narrabimus,  monebis,  videbunt.  6.  Laborabitis,  curabunt,  dabis. 
7.  Habitabimus,  properabitis,  iubebunt,  parabit.  8.  Nuntiabo,  porta- 
bimus,  iubebo. 

II.  I.  We  shall  announce,  we  shall  see,  I  shall  hasten.  2.  I  shall 
carry,  he  will  plow,  they  will  care  for.    3.  You  will  announce,  you  will 


THE  DATIVE  WITH  ADJECTIVES  59 

move,  you  will  give,  (sing,  and  plur.).  4.  We  shall  fight,  we  shall 
destroy,  I  shall  long  for.  5.  He  will  call,  they  will  see,  you  will  tell 
{J>lur.).  6.  They  will  dwell,  we  shall  order,  he  will  praise.  7.  They 
will  labor,  we  shall  kill,  you  will  have  {sing,  and piur.),  he  will  destroy. 

140.  Ni'oBE  AND  HER  CHILDREN  (Concluded) 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  288. 

Apoll5  et  Di§na  erant  liberi  LatOnae.  lis  ThebanI  sacra  crfibra 
parabant.*  Oppidan!  amabant  LatSnam  et  liberSs  eius.  Id  superbae 
reginae  erat  molestum.  "  Cur,"  inquit,  "  Latonae  et  liberis  sacra 
paratis?  Duos  liberos  habet  Latona;  quattuordecim  habeo  ego. 
Ubi  sunt  mea  sacra  ? "  Latona  ils  verbis  *  Irata  liberos  suos  vocat.  5 
Ad  earn  volant  Apollo  Dianaque  et  sagittis'  suis  miseros  liberos 
reginae  superbae  delent.  Niobe,  nuper  laeta,  nunc  misera,  sedet 
apud  liberos  interfectOs  et  cum  perpetuis  lacrimis*  eos  desiderat. 

Note.   Consult  the  general  vocabulary  for  Apolld,  inquit,  duos,  and  quattnor- 
dedm.    Try  to  remember  the  meaning  of  all  the  other  words. 


LESSON   XXII 

REVIEW  OF  VERBS  •  THE  DATIVE  WITH  ADJECTIVES 

14L  Review  the  present,  imperfect,  and  future  active  indicative, 
both  orally  and  in  writing,  of  sum  and  the  verbs  in  §  129. 

142.  We  learned  in  §  43  for  what  sort  of  expressions  we  may 
expect  the  dative,  and  in  §  44  that  one  of  its  commonest  uses  is  with 
Trrbs  to  express  the  indirect  object.  It  is  also  very  common  with 
adjectives  to  express  the  object  toward  which  the  quality  denoted  by 
the  adjective  is  directed.   We  have  already  had  a  number  of  cases 

*  Observe  the  force  of  the  imperfect  here,  used  to  prepare,  icere  in  the  habit 
of  preparing;  so  amibant  denotes  a  past  situation  of  affairs.  (See  §  134.)  *  Abla- 
tive of  cause.  ■  Ablative  of  means.  *  This  may  be  either  manner  or  ac- 
companiment It  is  often  impossible  to  draw  a  sharp  line  between  means, 
manner,  and  accompaniment.  The  Romans  themselves  drew  no  sharp  distinc- 
tion.  It  waa  enough  for  them  if  the  general  idea  demanded  the  ablative  case. 


6o  THE  DATIVE  WITH  ADJECTIVES 

where  gratus,  agreeable  to,  was  so  followed  by  a  dative ;  and  in  the 
last  lesson  we  had  molestus,  annoying  to,  followed  by  that  case.  The 
usage  may  be  more  explicitly  stated  by  the  following  rule : 

143.  Rule.  Dative  with  Adjectives.  The  dative  is  used  with 
adjectives  to  denote  the  object  toward  which  the  given  quality 
is  directed.  Such  are,  especially,  those  meanitig  near,  also  fit, 
friendly,  pleasing,  like,  and  their  opposites. 

144.  Among  such  adjectives  memorize  the  following : 

idoneus,  -a,  -um,yf/,  suitable  (for)  molestus,  -a,  -um,  annoying  (to), 
amicus,  -a,  -was.,  friendly  (to)  troublesome  (to) 

inimicus,  -a,  -um,  hostile  (to)  finitimus, -a, -um,  neighboring  (to) 

gratus,  -a,  -um,  pleasing  (to),  agree-  proximus,  -a,  -um,  nearest,  next 

able  (to)  .  (to) 

145.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Roman!  terram  idoneam  agri  culturae  habent.  2.  Galli  copiis 
Romanis  inimici  erant.  3.  Cui  dea  Latona  arnica  non  erat?  4.  Dea 
Latona  superbae  reginae  amica  non  erat.  5.  Cibus  noster,  Marce,  erit 
armatis  viris  gratus.  6.  Quid  erat  molestum  populis  Italiae?  7.  Bella 
longa  cum  Gallis  erant  molesta  populis  Italiae.  8.  Agri  Germanorum 
fluvio  Rheno  finitimi  erant.  9.  Roman!  ad  silvam  oppido  proximam 
castra  movebant.  10.  Non  solum  forma  sed  etiam  superbia  reginae 
erat  magna.  11.  Mox  regina  pulchra  erit  aegra  tristitia.  12.  COr 
erat  Niobe,  reglna  Thebanorum,  laeta  ?  Laeta  erat  Niobe  multis  f!li!s 
et  f!liabus. 

II.  I.  The  sacrifices  of  the  people  will  be  annoying  to  the  haughty 
queen.  2.  The  sacrifices  were  pleasing  not  only  to  Latona  but  also 
to  Diana.  3.  Diana  will  destroy  those  hostile  to  Latona.  4.  The 
punishment  of  the  haughty  queen  was  pleasing  to  the  goddess  Diana. 
5.  The  Romans  will  move  their  forces  to  a  large  field  ^  suitable  for  a 
camp.  6.  Some  of  the  allies  were  friendly  to  the  Romans,  others  to 
the  Gauls. 

1  Why  not  the  dative  t 


PRESENT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  6l 

146.  Cornelia  and  her  Jewels 

First  learn  the  special  vcx:abulary,  p.  288. 

Apud  antiquas  dominSs,  Cornelia,  African!  filia,  erat  ^  maximC  cUra. 
Filii  eius  erant  Tiberius  Gracchus  et  GSius  Gracchus.  li  pueri  cum 
Cornelia  in  oppido  Roma,  claro  Italiae  oppido,  habitabant.  Ibi  eos 
curabat  ComSlia  et  ibi  magno  cum  studio  eos  docebat.  Bona  fCmina 
erat  Cornelia  et  bonam  disciplinam  maxime  amSbat. 

Note.   Can  you  translate  the  paragraph  above  ?    There  are  no  new  words. 


LESSON  XXIII 

PRESENT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  OF  REGO  AND  AUDIO 

147.  As  we  learned  in  §  126,  the  present  stem  of  the  third  con- 
jugation ends  in  -€,  and  of  the  fourth  in  -i.  The  inflection  of  the 
Present  Indicative  is  as  follows : 


Conjugation  III 

Conjugation  IV 

re'gS,  re'gere  (ru/g) 
PRES.STEM  regfc- 

au'diS,  audi're  {hear) 
Pres.  Stem  audi- 

SINGULAR 

1.  re'gft,  /  ru/e 

2.  re'gis,  you  rule 

3.  rc'git,  he  {she,  it)  rules 

au'difi,  /  hear 
au'dis,  you  hear 
au'dit,  he  {she,  if)  hears 

PLURAL 

1 .  re'gimus,  ive  rule 

2.  re'giti8,^^«  rule 

3.  re'gunt,  I  hey  rule 

audl'mui,  we  hear 
ZMdVt\Bfyou  hear 
au'diant,  they  hear 

1 .  The  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  before. 

2.  The  final  short  -e-  of  the  stem  reg*-  combines  with  the  -6  in  the  first 
person,  becomes  -u-  in  the  third  person  plural,  and  becomes  -I-  elsewhere. 
The  inflection  is  like  that  of  erO,  the  future  of  sum. 

*  Observe  that  all  the  imperfects  denote  continued  or  progressive  action, 
or  describe  a  state  of  affairs.   (Cf.  §  134.) 


62  PRESENT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE 

3.  In  audi5  the  personal  endings  are  added  regularly  to  the  stem  audi-. 
In  the  third  person  plural  -u-  is  inserted  between  the  stem  and  the  personal 
ending,  as  audi-u-nt.  Note  that  the  long  vowel  of  the  stem  is  shortened 
before  final  -t  just  as  in  ani5  and  mone5.    (Cf.  §  12.  2.) 

Note  that  -i-  is  always  short  in  the  third  conjugation  and  long  in  the 
fourth,  excepting  where  long  vowels  are  regularly  shortened.  (Cf.  §  12.  1,2.) 

148.  Like  regO  and  audio  inflect  the  present  active  indicative  of 
the  following  verbs : 

Indicative  Present  Infinitive  Present 

ag5,  /  dnve  agere,  to  drive 

dico,  /  say  dicere,  to  say 

duco,  /  lead  ducere,  to  lead 

mitto,  /  send  mittere,  to  send 

munio,  I  fortify  munire,  to  fortify 

reperio,  I  find  reperire,  to  find 

venio,  /  come  venire,  to  come 

149.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Quis  agit.?  Curvenit?  Quern  mittit?  Quern  ducis?  2.  Quid 
mittunt  ?  Ad  quem  veniunt  ?  Cuius  castra  muniunt .''  3.  Quern  agunt } 
Venimus.  Quid  puer  reperit  ?  4.  Quem  mittimus  ?  Cuius  equum  du- 
citis?  Quid  dicunt?  5.  Munimus,  venitis,  dicit.  6.  Agimus,  reperitis, 
munis.    7.  Reperis,  ducitis,  dicis.    8.  Agitis,  audlmus,  regimus. 

II.  I.  What  do  they  find.?  Whom  do  they  hear?  Why  does  he 
come  ?  2.  Whose  camp  are  we  fortifying  ?  To  whom  does  he  say  ? 
What  are  we  saying  ?  3.  I  am  driving,  you  are  leading,  they  are  hear- 
ing. 4.  You  send,  he  says,  you  fortify  {sing,  and  plur.).  5.  I  am 
coming,  we  find,  they  send.  6.  They  lead,  you  drive,  he  does  fortify. 
7.  You  lead,  you  find,  you  rule,  (all  flur.). 

150.  Cornelia  and  her  Jewels  (Concluded) 

Proximum  domicilio  Comeliae  erat  pulchrae  Campanae  domicilium. 
Campana  erat  superba  non  solum  forma  sua  sed  maxime  omamentis 
suis.    Ea^  laudabat  semper.   "  Habesne  tu  ulla  omamenta,  Cornelia  ? " 

*Ea,  accusative  plural  neuter. 


IMPERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE 


63 


inquit.    "Ubi  sunt  tua  omamenta?"     Deinde  Cornelia  filiQs  su6s 
Tiberium  et  Gaium  vocat.  "  Puen  mel,"  inquit,  "  sunt  mea  omamenta. 
Nam  bonl  llberi  sunt  semper  bonae  feminae  Omamenta  maxime  cl§ra." 
Note.   The  only  new  words  here  arc  Campinl^  semper,  and  tfl. 


"  PUERI   MEI  SUNT  MEA  ORNAMENTA" 


LESSON  XXIV 

IMPERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  OF  REGO  AND  AUDIO  •  THE 
DATIVE  WITH  SPECIAL  INTRANSITIVE  VERBS 


151. 


PARADIGMS 


Conjugation  III 


Conjugation  IV 


singular 


1 .  regettam,  /  was  ruling 

2.  regelkis,  you  were  ruling 

3.  regSlMty  he  was  ruling 

PLURAL 

1 .  rcgcba'mu«,  wi  were  ruling 

2.  regibft'tis,  you  were  ruling 

3.  regS'bAiit,  tfuy  were  ruling 


audie'bam,  /  was  hearing 
audie'bfts,  you  were  hearing 
audie'bat,  he  was  hearing 

audieba'mus,  we  were  hearing 
audieba'tis,  you  were  hearing 
audielMint,  they  were  hearing 


64  DATIVE  WITH  SPECIAL  VERBS 

1 .  The  tense  sign  is  -ba-,  as  in  the  first  two  conjugations. 

2.  Observe  that  the  final  -e-  of  the  'stem  is  lengthened  before  the  tense 
sign  -ba-.  This  makes  the  imperfect  of  the  third  conjugation  just  like  the 
imperfect  of  the  second  (cf.  monebam  and  regebam). 

3.  In  the  fourth  conjugation  -e-  is  inserted  between  the  stem  and  the 
tense  sign  -ba-  (audi-e-ba-m). 

4.  In  a  similar  manner  inflect  the  verbs  given  in  §  148. 

152.  EXERCISES 

I.  i.  Agebat,  veniebat,  mittebat,  ducebant.  2.  Agebant,  mittebant, 
ducebas,  muniebant.  3.  Mittebamus,  ducebatis,  dicebant  4.  Munie- 
bamus,  veniebatis,  dicebas.  5.  Mittebas,  veniebamus,  reperiebat. 
6.  Reperiebas,  veniebas,  audiebatis.  7.  Agebamus,  reperiebatis,  muni- 
ebat.    8.  Agebatis,  dicebam,  muniebam. 

II.  I.  They  were  leading,  you  were  driving  {sing,  and plur.),  he 
was  fortifying.  2.  They  were  sending,  we  were  finding,  I  was  com- 
ing. 3.  You  were  sending,  you  were  fortifying,  (sing,  and  plur.),  he 
was  saying.  4.  They  were  hearing,  you  were  leading  (sing,  and  plur.), 
I  was  driving.  5.  We  were  saying,  he  was  sending,  I  was  fortifying, 
6.  They  were  coming,  he  was  hearing,  I  was  finding.  7,  You  were 
ruling  (sing,  and  plur.),  we  were  coming,  they  were  ruUng. 

153.  The  Dative  with  Special  Intransitive  Verbs.  We  learned 
above  (§  20.^)  that  a  verb  which  does  not  admit  of  a  direct  object 
is  called  an  intransitive  verb.  Many  such  verbs,  however,  are  of 
such  meaning  that  they  can  govern  an  indirect  object,  which  will, 
of  course,  be  in  the  dative  case  (§  45).  Learn  the  following  list  of 
intransitive  verbs  with  their  meanings.  In  each  case  the  dative 
indirect  object  is  the  person  or  thing  to  which  a  benefit,  injury,  or 
feeling  is  directed.    (Cf.  §  43.) 

credo,  credere,  believe  (give  belief  to) 

faveo,  favere,  favor  (show  favor  to)  1 

noceo,  nocere,  injure  (do  harm  to) 

pared,  parere,  obey  (give  obedience  to) 

persuadeo,  persuadere,  persuade  (offer  persuasion  to) 

resisto,  resistere,  resist  (offer  resistance  to) 

studeo,  studere,  be  eager  for  (give  attention  to) 


FUTURE  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  65 

154.  Rule.  Dative  with  Intransitive  Verba.  The  dative  of  the 
indirect  object  is  used  with  the  intransitive  verbs  credo^  faveo^ 
noceoj  pared,  persuaded,  resisto,  studeb,  and  others  of  like  meaning. 

155.  EXERCISE 

I .  Credisne  verbis  sociorum  ?  Multi  verbis  eorum  n6n  credunt. 
2.  Mei  flnitimi  c5nsili6  tuo  non  favebunt,  quod  bello  student.  3.  Tibe- 
rius et  Gaius  disciplinae  durae  non  resistebant  et  Comeliae  parebant. 
4.  Dea  erat  inimica  septem  filiabus  reginae.  5.  Dura  poena  et  per- 
petua  tristitia  reginae  non  persuadebunt.  6.  Nuper  ea  resistebat  et 
nunc  resistit  potentiae  Latonae.  7.  Mox  sagittae  volabunt  et  liberis 
miseris  noc^bunt. 

LESSON   XXV 

FUTURE  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  OF  REGO  AND  AUDid 

156.  In  the  future  tense  of  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations  we 
meet  with  a  new  tense  sign.  Instead  of  using  -bi-,  as  in  the  first  and 
second  conjugations,  we  use  -4-*  in  the  first  person  singular  and  -«- 
in  the  rest  of  the  tense.  In  the  third  conjugation  the  final  -6-  of  the 
stem  is  dropped  before  this  tense  sign ;  in  the  fourth  conjugation  the 
final  -i-  of  the  stem  is  retained.* 

157.  PARADIGMS 

Conjugation  III  Conjugation  IV 

SINGULAR 

1 .  re'gam,  /  shall  rule  au'diam,  /  shall  hear 

2.  rc'ggs,  you  will  rule  au'diJa,  you  will  hear 
2,.  tq' gttf  he  will  rule  diu'^^/tf  he  will  hear 

PLURAL 

1 .  reg€'miu,  we  shall  rule  audiS'mus,  we  shall  hear 

2.  regi'tiaf  you  will  rule  audii^t^,  you  will  hear 

3.  re'gcnt,  they  will  rule  au'dient,  they  will  hear 

>  The  -4-  is  shortened  before  -m  final,  and  -*-  before  -t  final  and  before  -nt. 
(Cf.  §  12.  2.)  *  The  +  is,  of  course,  shortened,  being  before  another  voweL 
(C£.Ji2.  I) 


66      VERBS  IN  -10  OF  THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION 

1 .  Observe  that  the  future  of  the  third  conjugation  is  like  the  present  of 
the  second,  excepting  in  the  first  person  singular. 

2.  In  the  same  manner  inflect  the  verbs  given  in  §  148. 

158.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Dicet,  ducetis,  mtiniemus.  2.  Dicent,  dicetis,  mittemus 
3.  Munient,  venient,  mittent,  agent.  4.  Dticet,  mittes,  veniet,  aget. 
5.  Muniet,  reperietis,  agemus.  6.  Mittam,  veniemus,  regent.  7.  Au- 
dietis,  venies,  reperies.  8.  Reperiet,  agam,  ducemus,  mittet.  9.  Vide- 
bitis,  sedebo,  vocabimus. 

II.  I.I  shall  find,  he  will  hear,  they  will  come.  2.  I  shall  fortify, 
he  will  send,  we  shall  say.  3.  I  shall  drive,  you  will  lead,  they  will 
hear.  4.  You  will  send,  you  will  fortify,  {sing,  and plur.),  he  will  say. 
5.  I  shall  come,  we  shall  find,  they  will  send. 

6.  Who  ^  will  believe  the  story  ?  I  ^  shall  believe  the  story.  7.  Whose 
friends  do  you  favor  ?  We  favor  our  friends.  8.  Who  will  resist  our 
weapons  ?  Sextus  will  resist  your  weapons.  9.  Who  will  persuade  him  ? 
They  will  persuade  him.  10.  Why  were  you  injuring  my  horse?  I 
was  not  injuring  your  horse.  11.  Whom  does  a  good  slave  obey? 
A  good  slave  obeys  his  master.  12.  Our  men  were  eager  for  another 
battle. 

LESSON   XXVI 

VERBS  IN  '10  OF  THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION  •  THE  IMPERA- 
TIVE MOOD 

159.  There  are  a  few  common  verbs  ending  in  -16  which  do  not 
belong  to  the  fourth  conjugation,  as  you  might  infer,  but  to  the  third. 
The  fact  that  they  belong  to  the  third  conjugation  is  shown  by  the 
ending  of  the  infinitive.    (Cf.  §126.)    Compare 

audio,  audi're  {hear),  fourth  conjugation 
capio,  ca'pere  {take),  third  conjugation 

1  Remember  that  quis,  who,  is  singular  in  number.  ^  Express  by  ego, 
because  it  is  emphatic. 


PRESENT  ACTIVE  IMPERAllVE 


67 


160.    The  present,  imperfect,  and  future 

active 

indicative  of  capifl 

are  inflected  as  follows  : 

capio,  capere, 

take 

Pres.  Stem  cape- 

Present 

Imperfect 

SINGULAR 

Future 

1.  ca'pi6 

capie'bam 

ca'piam 

J.  ca'pis 

capie'bas 

ca'piSs 

3.  ca'pit 

capielMit 

PLURAL 

ca'piet 

I .  ca'pimus 

capieba'mus 

capie'miifl 

J.  ca'pitis 

capieba'tis 

capie'tis 

3.  ca'piunt 

capie'bant 

ca'pient 

1 .  Observe  that  capiS  and  the  other  -15  verbs  follow  the  fourth  conju- 
gation wherever  in  the  fourth  conjugation  two  vowels  occur  in  succession. 
(Cf.  capiS,  audiS ;  capiunt,  audiunt ;  and  all  the  imperfect  and  future.)  All 
other  forms  are  like  the  third  conjugation.  (Cf .  capis,  regis ;  capit,  regit ;  etc.) 

2.  Like  capid,  inflect 


faciS,  facere,  make^  do 
fugi5,  fugere,  flee 


iaci5,  iacere,  hurl 
rapid,  rapere,  seize 


161.  The  Imperative  Mood.  The  imperative  mood  expresses  a 
command;  as,  come!  send!  The  present  tense  of  the  imperative  is 
used  only  in  the  second  person,  singular  and  plural.  Tfu  singular  in 
the  active  voice  is  regularly  the  same  in  form  as  the  present  stem.  The 
plural  is  formed  by  adding  -te  to  the  singular. 


Conjugation 

Singular 

Plural 

I. 

ami,  love  thou 

ama'te,  love  ye 

II. 

mone,  advise  thou 

mone'te,  advise  ye 

III. 

{a)  rege,  rule  thou 

re'gite,  rule  ye 

{b)  cape,  take  thou 

ca'pitc,  take  ye 

IV. 

audi,  hear  thou 

audi'te,  hear  ye 

sum 

(irregular)      es,  be  thou 

este,  be  ye 

plural. 


In  the  third  conjugation  the  final  -4-  of  the  stem  becomes  -I-  in  the 


68  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE 

2.  The  verbs  dico,  say  j  duc5,  lead;  and  faci5,  make,  have  the  irregular 
forms  die,  due,  and  fae  in  the  singular. 

3.  Give  the  present  active  imperative,  singular  and  plural,  of  venio, 
dueo,  Yoco,  doeeo,  laudo,  dico,  sedeo,  ago,  faeio,  miinio,  mitto,  rapio. 

162.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Fugient,  faciunt,  iaciebat.  2.  Dele,  ntintiate,  fugiunt.  3.  Ve- 
nite,  die,  facietis.  4.  DOcite,  iaciam,  fugiebant.  5.  Fac,  iaciebamus, 
fugimus,  rapite.  6.  Sedete,  reperi,  doCete.  7 .  Fugiemus,  iacient,  rapies. 
8.  Reperient,  rapiebatis,  nocent.    9.  Favete,  resiste,  parebitis. 

10.  Vola  ad  multas  terras  etda  auxilium.  11.  Ego  tela  mea  capiam 
et  multas  feras  delebo.  12.  Quis  fabulae  tuae  credet?  13.  Este  bonl, 
pueri,  et  audite  verba  grata  magistri. 

II.  I.  The  goddess  will  seize  her  arms  and  will  hurl  her  weapons. 
2.  With  her  weapons  she  will  destroy  many  beasts.  3.  She  will  give 
aid  to  the  weak.^  4.  She  will  fly  to  many  lands  and  the  beasts  will 
flee.    5.  Romans,  telP  the  famous  story  to  your  children. 


Third  Review,  Lessons  XVIII-XXVI,  §§  510-512 


LESSON  XXVII 

THE  PASSIVE  VOICE  •  PRESENT,  IMPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE 
INDICATIVE  OF  AMO  AND  MONEO 

163.  The  Voices.  Thus  far  the  verb  forms  have  been  in  the  active 
voice;  that  is,  they  have  represented  the  subject  as  performing  an 
action  ;  as,  ^he  lion  — ^  killed  —*-  the  hunter 

A  verb  is  said  to  be  in  the  passive  voice  when  it  represents  its  sub- 
ject as  receiving  an  action  ;  as, 

The  lion  -• — was  killed  -* —  by  the  hunter 
Note  the  direction  of  the  arrows. 

1  Plural.  An  adjective  used  as  a  noun.  (Cf.  §99.  II.  3.)  -  Imperative. 
The  imperative  generally  stands  first,  as  in  English. 


PASSIVE  INDICA  1  1\  i:  ()J    JJ/i>  AND  MONEO     69 

164.  Passiye  Personal  Endings.    In  the  passive  voice  we  use  a 
different  set  of  personal  endings.    They  are  as  follows : 

r  I.  -r,  /  C  I.  -mur,  lue 

Sing.  \  2.  -ris,  -re,  you  Plur.  J  2.  -mini,  you 

[  3.  -tur,  he,  she,  it  [3.  -ntur,  they 

a.  Observe  that  the  letter  -r  appears  somewhere  in  all  but  one  of  the 
endings.    This  is  sometimes  called  the  passive  sign. 


165.  PARADIGMS 

amS,  amare  mone5,  monere 

PRBS.STBM  ama-  Fres.  Stem  mone- 

Present  Indicative 


'  a'mor,  /  am  loved 


Sing.   - 


mo'neor,  /  am  advised 


PERSONAL 
ENDINGS 

-or^ 


ama  na  or  ama  re,  you  are      mone  ris^rmoneTe,jf?«    -ns  or  -re 


loved 
^  ama'tur,  he  is  loved 

ama'mor,  we  are  loved 
ama'mini,  you  are  loved 
aman'tur,  they  are  loved 


are  advised 
mone'tur,  he  is  advised 

mone'mur,  ive  are  ad- 
vised 

mone'mini,  you  are  ad- 
vised 

monen'tur,  they  are  ad- 
vised 


-tur 
-mur 


-mmi 


-ntur 


Imperfect  Indicative  (Tense  Sign  -ba-) 
amaiMur,  /  was  being  loved     moneTwur,  /  was  being       -r 

advised 
amSbi'ria  <7r  amaba're,  ^^»      moneba'ris   or  mone- 
SiNG.  <(       were  being  loved  ba're,  you  were  being    -ris  or  -re 

advised 
amibi'tur,    he   was  being      monebi'tur,  he  was  be-       -tur 
loved  ing  advised 

'  am&bi'mor,  we  were  being  monebi'mor,    we   were       -mur 

loved  being  advised 

am&ba'mini,  you  were  be-  monSbft^miid,  you  were       -mini 

ing  loved  being  adinsed 

am&ban'tnr,  they  were  be-  moneban'tur,  they  were       -ntur 

ing  loved  being  advised 

In  the  present  the  personal  ending  of  the  first  person  singular  is  -or. 


Plur. 


70 


EXERCISES 


r-  /rr.  '    o  V   N  PERSONAL 

Future  (Tense  Sign  -bi-)  endings 

'  ama'bor,  /  shall  be  loved         mone'bor,  /  sJiall  be  ad-       -r 

vised 
ama'beris  or  ama'bere,  you      mone'beris  or  mone'- 
SiNG.  \       will  be  loved  bere,  you  will  be  ad-    -ris  or  -re 

vised 
ama'bitur,  he  will  be  loved     mone'bitur,  he  will  be       -tur 

advised 

'  ama'bimur,   we  shall  be  mone'bimur,  ze/^  i*^// ^^       -mar 

loved  advised 

p^^^^    I  amabi'mini,  you  will  be  monebi'mini,  you   will       -mini 

loved  be  advised 

amabim'tur,  they    will   be  monebun'tur,  they  will       -ntur 

loved  be  advised 


1.  The  tense  sign  and  the  personal  endings  are  added  as  in  the  active. 

2.  In  the  future  the  tense  sign  -bi-  appears  as  -bo-  in  the  first  person, 
-be-  in  the  second,  singular  number,  and  as  -bu-  in  the  third  person  plural. 

3.  Inflect  laudo,  nec5,  porto,  moveo,  dele5,  iubeo,  in  the  present,  imperfect, 
and  future  indicative,  active  and  passive. 

166.  Intransitive  verbs,  such  as  maturO,  I  hasten;  habito,  I  dwell, 
do  not  have  a  passive  voice  with  a  personal  subject. 


167. 


EXERCISES 


I.  I.  Laudaris  ^r  laudare,  laudas,  datur,  dat.  2.  Dabitur,  dabit,  vide- 
mini,  videtis.  3.  Vocabat,  vocabatur,  delebitis,  delebiminl.  4.  Para- 
batur,  parabat,  curas,  curaris  or  curare.  5.  Portabantur,  portabant, 
videbimur,  videbimus.  6.  luberis  or  iubere,  iubes,  laudabaris  or  lauda- 
bare,  laudabas.  7.  Moveberis  or  movebere,  movebis,  dabantur,  dabant. 
8.  Delentur,  delent,  parabamur,  parabamus. 

II.  I.  We  prepare,  we  are  prepared,  I  shall  be  called,  I  shall  call, 
you  were  carrying,  you  were  being  carried.  2.  I  see,  I  am  seen,  it 
was  being  announced,  he  was  announcing,  they  will  order,  they  will 
be  ordered.  3.  You  will  be  killed,  you  will  kill,  you  move,  you  are 
moved,  we  are  praising,  we  are  being  praised.    4.  I  am  called,  I  call, 


EXERCISES 


71 


you  will  have,  you  are  cared  for.    5.  They  are  seen,  they  see,  we  were 
teaching,  we  were  being  taught,  they  will  move,  they  will  be  moved. 


PERSEUS  ANDROMEDAM  SBRVAT 


168.  Per'seus  and  Androm'eda 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  288. 

Perseus  filius  erat  lovis,*  maximi  *  deorum.  De  e6  multas  fabulas 
narrant  po^tae.  El  favent  del,  ei  magica  arma  et  alas  dant,  Eis  teUs 
armatus  et  alls  fretus  ad  multas  terras  volabat  et  mOnstra  saeva  delft- 
bat  et  miseris  infirmisque  auxilium  dabat.  ^ 

1  IOTi«,  the  genitive  of  lappiter.  *  Used  substantively,  tA^  greaUit.  So 
below,  1.  4,  miMTto  and  Inflnnis  are  used  substantively. 


72      PASSIVE  INDICATIVE  OF  REGO  AND  AUDIO 

Aethiopia  est  terra  Africae.  Earn  terram  Cepheus^  regebat.  Ei^ 
Neptunus,  maximus  aquarum  deus,  erat  Iratus  et  mittit^  monstrum 
saevum  ad  Aethiopiam.  Ibi  monstrum  non  solum  latis  pulchrisque 
Aethiopiae  agris  nocebat  sed  etiam  domicilia  agricolarum  delebat,  et 
5  multos  viros,  feminas,  liberosque  necabat.  Populus  ex  agris  fugiebat 
et  oppida  muris  validls  muniebat.  Tum  Cepheus  magna  tristitia  com- 
motus  ad  lovis  oraculum  properat  et  ita  dicit :  "Amid  me!  necantur ; 
agri  mel  vastantur.  Audi  verba  mea,  luppiter.  Da  miseris  auxi- 
lium.    Age  monstrum  saevum  ex  patria." 


LESSON   XXVIII 

PRESENT,  IMPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  INDICATIVE 
PASSIVE  OF  KEGO  AND  AUDIO 

169.  Review  the  present,  imperfect,  and  future  indicative  active  of 
rego  and  audio,  and  learn  the  passive  of  the  same  tenses  (§§  490,  491). 

a.  Observe  that  the  tense  signs  of  the  imperfect  and  future  are  the  same 
as  in  the  active  voice,  and  that  the  passive  personal  endings  (§  164)  are 
added  instead  of  the  active  ones. 

b.  Note  the  slight  irregularity  in  the  second  person  singular  present  of 
the  third  conjugation.  There  the  final  -e-  of  the  stem  is  not  changed  to  -i-,  as 
it  is  in  the  active.  We  therefore  have  re'geris  or  re'gere,  not  re'giris,  re'gire. 

c.  Inflect  ago,  dico,  duco,  munio,  reperio,  in  the  present,  imperfect,  and 
future  indicative,  active  and  passive. 

170.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Agebat,  agebatur,  mittebat,  mittebatur,  ducebat.  2.  Agunt, 
aguntur,  mittuntur,  mittunt,  muniunt.  3.  Mittor,  mittar,  mittam,  du- 
cere,  ducere.  4.  Dicemur,  dicimus,  dicemus,  dicimur,  muniebamini. 
5.  Ducitur,  ducimini,  reperimur,  reperiar,  agitur.  6.  Agebamus, 
agebamur,   reperiris,   reperieminl.    7.  Munimini,  veniebam,   ducebar, 

1  Pronounce  in  two  syllables,  Ce'pheus.  2  gj^  at  him,  dative  with  iratus. 
8  The  present  is  often  used,  as  in  EngUsh,  in  speaking  of  a  past  action,  in 
order  to  make  the  story  more  vivid  and  exciting. 


PASSIVE  INDICATIVE  OF  CAPIO  -Ji 

dicetur.   8.  MittiminI,  mittitis,  mitteris,  mittens,  ageb5mini.   9.  Dicitur, 
dicit,  muniuntur,  reperient^  audientur. 

II.  I.I  was  being  driven,  I  was  driving,  we  were  leading,  we  were 
being  led,  he  says,  it  is  said.  2.  I  shall  send,  I  shall  be  sent,  you  will 
find,  you  will  be  found,  they  lead,  they  are  led.  3.  I  am  found,  we 
are  led,  they  are  driven,  you  were  being  led  {sing,  and plur.).  4.  We 
shall  drive,  we  shall  be  driven,  he  leads,  he  is  being  led,  they  will  come, 
they  will  be  fortified.  5.  They  were  ruling,  they  were  being  ruled, 
you  will  send,  you  will  be  sent,  you  are  sent,  {sing,  and  plur.).  6.  He 
was  being  led,  he  will  come,  you  are  said  {sing,  and  plur.). 

171.    .        Perseus  and  Andromeda  {Continued) 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  288. 

Tum  Oraculum  ita  respondet :  "  Mala  est  fortuna  tua.  Neptunus, 
magnus  aquarum  deus,  terrae  Aethiopiae  inimlcus,  eas  poenas  mittit. 
Sed  para  irato  deo  sacrum  idoneum  et  monstrum  saevum  ex  patria 
tua  aggtur.  Andromeda  filia  tua  est  monstro  grata.  Da  eam  monstro. 
Serva  caram  patriam  et  vltam  populi  tul."  Andromeda  autem  erat  5 
puella  pulchra.    Eam  amabat  Cepheus  maxime. 


LESSON   XXIX 

PRESENT,  IMPERFECT,  AND   FUTURE  INDICATIVE   PASSIVE  OF 
-16  VERBS  •  PRESENT  PASSIVE  INFINITIVE  AND  IMPERATIVE 

172.  Review  the  active  voice  of  capiO,  present,  imperfect,  and 
future,  and  learn  the  passive  of  the  same  tenses  (§  492), 

a.  The  present  forms  capior  and  capiuntur  are  like  aadior,  aadiuntur, 
and  the  rest  of  the  tense  is  like  regor. 

b.  In  like  manner  inflect  the  passive  of  iadS  and  rapid. 

173.  The  Infinitiye.  The  infinitive  mood  gives  the  general  mean- 
mg  of  the  verb  without  person  or  number ;  as,  amire,  to  love.  Infinitive 
means  unlimited.  The  forms  of  the  other  moods,  being  limited  by 
person  and  number,  arc  called  thc^nite,  or  limited,  verb  forms. 


74 


THE  INFINITIVE  AND  IMPERATIVE 


CONJ. 

Pres.  Stem 

Pres.  Infinitive 
Active 

I. 

ama- 

ama're,  to  love 

II. 

mone- 

mone're,  to  advise 

III. 

rege- 

re'gere,  to  rule 

cape- 

ca'pere,  to  take 

IV. 

audi- 

audrre,  to  hear 

174.  The  forms  of  the  Present  Infinitive,  active  and  passive,  are 
as  follows : 

Pres.  Infinitive 
Passive 

ama'ri,  to  be  loved 
mone'ri,  to  be  advised 
re'gi,  to  be  ruled 
ca'pi,  to  be  taken 
audfri,  to  be  heard 

1.  Observe  that  to  form  the  present  active  infinitive  we  add  -re  to  the 
present  st^m. 

a.  The  present  infinitive  of  sum  is  esse.    There  is  no  passive. 

2.  Observe  that  the  present  passive  infinitive  is  formed  from  the  active 
by  changing  final  -« to  -i,  except  in  the  third  conjugation,  which  changes  final 
-ere  to  -i. 

3.  Give  the  active  and  passive  present  infinitives  of  doced,  sedeo,  volo, 
euro,  mitto,  duco,  munio,  reperio,  iacio,  rapio. 

175.  The  forms  of  the  Present  Imperative,  active  and  passive,  are 
as  follows : 


Active! 

coNj.  sing.     plur. 

I.   a'ma     ama'te 

II.    mo'ne  mone'te 

III.    re'ge     re'gite 

ca'pe    ca'pite 


Passive 

sing.  plur. 

ama're,  be  thou  loved        ama'mini,  be  ye  loved 
mone're,  be  thou  advised  mone'mini,  be  ye  advised 
re'gere,  be  thou  ruled       regi'mini,  be  ye  ruled 
ca'pere,  be  thou  taken        capi'mini,  be  ye  taken 


IV.    au'di     audi'te         dMdVxe,  be  thou  heard       midVmim,  be  ye  heard 


1 .  Observe  that  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present  "passive  im- 
perative is  like  the  present  active  infinitive,  and  that  both  singular  and 
plural  are  like  the  second  person  singular  ^  and  plural,  respectively,  of  the 
present  passive  indicative. 

2.  Give  the  present  imperative,  both  active  and  passive,  of  the  verbs  in 
§174-3. 

1  For  the  sake  of  comparison  the  active  is  repeated  from  §  161.  2  That 
is,  using  the  personal  ending  -re.  A  form  like  amare  may  be  either  indicative, 
infinittvey  or  imperative. 


THE  ABLATIVE  DENOTING  FROM 


75 


176. 


EXERCISES 


First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  289. 

I.  I.  Turn  Perseus  alls  ad  terras  multas  volabit.  2.  MOnstrum  sae- 
vum  per  aquas  properat  et  mox  agrOs  nostros  vastabit.  3.  Si  autem 
Cepheus  ad  5raculum  properabit,  oraculum  ita  respondebit.  4.  Quis 
telis  Persel  superabitur?  Multa  monstra  telis  eius  superabuntur. 
5.  Cum  curis  magnis  et  lacrimis  multls  agricolae  ex  domiciliis  cans 
aguntur.  6.  Multa  loca  vastabantur  et  multa  oppida  delebantur. 
7.  Monstrum  est  validum,  tamen  superabitur.  8.  Credesne  sempei* 
verbis  6raculi  ?  Ego  iis  non  semper  credam.  9.  Parebitne  Cepheus 
oraculo?  Verba  oraculi  ei  persuadebunt.  10.  Si  non  fugiemus,  oppi- 
dum  capietur  et  oppidan!  necabuntur.  11.  Vocate  pueros  et  narrate 
fabulam  claram  de  monstro  saevo. 

II.  I.  Fly  thou,  to  be  cared  for,  be  ye  sent,  lead  thou.  2.  To  lead, 
to  be  led,  be  ye  seized,  fortify  thou.  3.  To  be  hurled,  to  fly,  send  thou, 
to  be  found.  4.  To  be  sent,  be  ye  led,  to  hurl,  to  be  taken.  5.  Find 
thou,  hear  ye,  be  ye  ruled,  to  be  fortified. 


LESSON  XXX 

SYNOPSES  IN  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS  •  THE  ABLATIVE 
DENOTING  FROM 

177.   Vou  should  learn  to  give  rapidly  synopses  of  the  verbs  you 
have  had,  as  follows  :  * 


Conjugation  I 

Conjugation  II 

iNDICATmt 

ACTIVF. 

PASSIVE 

ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 

Pres. 

a'mS 

a'mor 

mo'nett 

mo'neor 

Imperf. 

ama'bam 

amaiMu: 

mone'bar 

Fut. 

ama'M 

ama'bor 

moneT)© 

mone'bor 

1  Synopses  should  be  given  not  only  in  the  first  person,  but  in  other  per- 
sons as  well,  particularly  in  the  third  singular  and  plural. 


76 


SYNOPSES  OF  VERBS 


Conjugation  I 

Conjugation  II 

Imperative 

ACTIVE 

passive 

active 

PASSIVE 

Pres. 

a'ma 

ama're 

Infinitive 

mo'ne 

mone're 

Pres. 

ama're 

ama'ri 

mone're 

mone'ri 

Conjugation  III 

Conjugation  III 

Indicative 

(-io 

verbs) 

ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 

active 

PASSIVE 

'Pres. 

re'go 

re'gor 

ca'pio 

ca'pior 

Itnperf. 

rege'bam 

rege'bar 

capie'bam 

capie'bar 

FuL 

re'gam 

re'gar 

Imperative 

ca'piam 

ca'piar 

Pres. 

re'ge 

re'gere 

Infinitive 

ca'pe 

ca'pere 

Pres, 

re'gere 

re'gi 

Conjugatio:n  IV 

Indicative 
active 

ca'pere 

PASSIVE 

ca'pi 

Pres. 

au'dio 

au'dior 

Imperf. 

audiel>ain 

audie'bar 

Put. 

au'diam 

Imperative 

au'diar 

Pres, 

au'di 

Infinitive 

audi're 

Pres. 


audfre 


audrri 


I.  Give  the  synopsis  of  rapio,  munio,  reperio,  doceo,  vide5,  dico,  ago, 
laudo,  ports,  and  vary  the  person  and  number. 

178.  We  learned  in  §  50  that  one  of  the  three  relations  covered 
by  the  ablative  case  is  expressed  in  English  by  the  preposition  from. 
This  is  sometimes  called  the  separative  ablative^  and  it  has  a  number 
of  special  uses.  You  have  already  grown  familiar  with  the  first 
mentioned  below. 


THE  ABLATIVE  DENOTING  FROM  77 

179.  R  I'  1 . 1 . .  Ablative  of  the  Place  From .  The  place  from  which 
is  expressed  by  the  ablative  with  the  prepositions  a  or  ah,  de, 
e  or  ex. 

Agricolae  ex  agris  yeniunt,  the  farmers  come  from  the  fields 

a.  a  or  ab  ^exioX.c&  from  near  a  place ;  €  or  ex,  out  from  it ;  and  dc,  down 
from  it.   This  may  be  represented  graphically  as  follows : 


a  or  ab 
< 


Place 


e  or  ex 
^> 


de 

V 

180.  Rule.  Ablative  of  Separation.  Words  expressing  sepa- 
ration or  deprivation  require  an  ablative  to  complete  their 
meaning. 

(1.  If  the  separation  is  actual  and  literal  of  one  material  thing  from 
another,  the  preposition  i  or  ab,  e  or  ex,  or  de  is  generally  used.  If  no 
actual  motion  takes  place  of  one  thing  from  another,  no  preposition  is 
necessary. 

(a)  Perseus  terram  I  mSnstris  liberal 

Perseus  frees  the  land  from  ?»onsters  (literal  separation 

—  actual  motion  is  expressed) 
(J>)  Perseus  terram  tristitia  llberat 

Perseus  frees  the  land  from  sorrow  (fig^xm^vt  separation 

—  no  actual  motion  is  expressed) 

181.  Rule.  Ablative  of  the  Personal  Agent.  The  word  express- 
ing the  person  from  whom  an  action  s  tarts  y  when  not  the  subject ^ 
is  put  in  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  a  or  ah. 

It.  In  this  construction  the  English  translation  of  I,  ab  is  by  rather  than 
from.  This  ablative. is  regularly  used  with  passive  verbs  to  indicate  the 
person  by  whom  the  act  was  performed. 

Mdnstrum  a  Persed  necatnr,  the  mpnster  is  being  slain 
by  (^\.from)  Perseus 


yS  EXERCISES 

d.  Note  that  the  active  form  of  the  above  sentence  would  be  Perseus 
monstrum  necat,  Perseus  is.slayiiig  the  monster.  In  the  passive  the  object 
of  the  active  verb  becomes  the  subject^  and  the  subject  of  the  active  verb 
becomes  the  ablative  of  the  personal  agent ^  with  a  or  ab. 

c.  Distinguish  carefully  between  the  ablative  of  means  and  the  ablative 
of  the  personal  agent.  Both  are  often  translated  into  English  by  the  prepo- 
sition by.  (Cf.  §  lOO.  b)  Means  is  a  thing;  the  agent  or  actor  is  a  person. 
The  ablative  of  means  has  no  preposition.  The  ablative  of  the  personal 
agent  has  a  or  ab.    Compare 

Fera  sagitta  necatur,  the  wild  beast  is  killed  by  an  arrow 
Fera  a  Diana  necatur,  the  wild  beast  is  killed  by  Diana 

Sagitta,  in  the  first  sentence,  is  the  ablative  of  means;  a  Diana,  in  the 
second,  is  the  ablative  of  the  personal  agent. 

182.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  289. 

I.  I.  Viri  inopia  cibi  defessi  ab  eo  loco  discedent.  2.  German! 
castris  Romanis  adpropinquabant,  tamen  legatus  copias  a  proelio 
continebat.  3.  Multa  Gallorum  oppida  ab  Romanis  capientur.  4.  Tuni 
Roman!  totum  populum  eorum  oppidorum  gladiis  pilisque  interficient. 

5.  Oppidan!  Romams  resistant,   sed   defess!  longo  proelio  fugient. 

6.  Mult!   ex   Gallia   fugiebant  et  in   Germanorum  v!c!s  habitabant. 

7.  Miser!  nautae  vulnerantur  ab  inim!c!s  ^  saevis  et  cibo  egent.  8.  Dis- 
cedite  et  date  viris  frumentum  et  copiam  v!n!.  9.  Copiae  nostrae  a 
proelio  continebantur  ab  Sexto  legato.  10.  Id  oppidum  ab  provincia 
Romana  longe  aberat. 

II.  I.  The  weary  sailors  were  approaching  a  place  dear  to  the  god- 
dess Diana.  2.  They  were  without  food  and  without  wine.  3.  Then 
Galba  and  seven  other  men  are  sent  to  the  ancient  island  by  Sextus. 
4.  Already  they  are  not  far  away  from  the  land,  and  they  see  armed 
men  on  a  high  place.  5.  They  are  kept  from  the  land  by  the  men 
with  spears  and  arrows.  6.  The  men  kept  hurling  their  weapons 
down  from  the  high  place  with  great  eagerness. 

1  inimicls,  here  used  as  a  noun.    See  vocabulary. 


PERFECT  TENSES  OF  SUM  79 

'      LESSON  XXXI 

PERFECT,  PLUPERFECT,  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  OF  SUM 

183.  Principal  Parts.  There  are  certain  parts  of  the  verb  that 
are  of  so  much  consequence  in  tense  formation  that  we  call  them  the 
principal  parts. 

In  English  the  principal  parts  are  the  present,  the  past,  and  the 
past  participle ;  as,  go,  went,  gone;  see,  saw,  seen,  etc. 

The  principal  parts  of  the  Latin  verb  are  th^  Jirst  person  singular 
0/ the  present  indicative,  Xh^  present  infinitive,  \kvt  first  person  singular 
of  the  perfect  indicative,  and  \}c\'&  perfect  passive  participle. 

184.  Conjugation  Stems.  From  the  principal  parts  we  get  three 
conjugation  stems,  from  which  are  formed  the  entire  conjugation. 
We  have  already  learned  about  the  present  stem,  which  is  found  from 
the  present  infinitive  (cf.  §126.  <7).  The  other  two  stems  are  the 
perfect  stem  and  the  participial  stem. 

185.  The  Perfect  Stem.  The  perfect  stem  of  the  verb  is  formed 
in  various  ways,  but  may  always  be  found  by  dropping  -i  from  the 
first  person  singular  of  the  perfect,  the  third  of  the  principal  parts. 
From  the  perfect  stem  are  formed  the  following  tenses : 

The  Perfect  Active  Indicative 

The  Plupbrfbct  Active  Indicative  (English  Past  Psrfbct) 

The  Future  Perfect  Activb  Indicative 

All  these  tenses  express  completed  action  in  present,  past,  or 
future  time  respectively. 

186.  The  Endings  of  the  Perfect.  The  perfect  active  indicative  is 
inflected  by  adding  the  endings  of  the  perfect  to  the  perfect  stem. 
These  endings  are  different  from  those  found  in  any  other  tense,  and 
are  as  follows : 


Sing. 


1 .  -i,  / 

2.  AtM^you  Plur. 

3.  -It,  he,  she,  it 


1.  -imiis,   wi 

2.  -istis,  you 

3.  -inint  or  -fat,  th^y 


8o  PERFECT  TENSES  OF  SUM 

187.  Inflection  of  sum  in  the  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect 
indicative :  * 

Pres.  Indic.  Pres.  Infin,  Perf.  Indic. 

Prin.  Parts  sum  esse  fui 

Perfect  Stem  fu- 
siNGULAR  Perfect  plural 

ful,  /  have  been,  I  was  fu'imus,  we  have  been,  we  were 

fuis'ti,  you  have  been,  you  were  fuis'tis,  you  have  been,  you  were 

fu'it,  he  has  been,  he  was  fue'runt  or  fue're,  they  have  been, 

they  we7'e 

Pluperfect  (Tense  Sign  -era-) 
fu'eram,  /  had  been  fuera'mus,  we  had  been 

fu'eras,  you  had  been  fuera'tis,  you  had  been 

fu'erat,  he  had  been  fu'erant,  they  had  been 

Future  Perfeci'  (Tense  Sign  -eri-) 
fu'ero,  /  shall  have  been  fue'rimus,  we  shall  have  been 

fu'eris,  you  will  have  been  fue'ritis,  you  will  have  been 

f u'erit,  he  will  have  been  f u'erint,  they  will  have  been 

1.  Note  carefully  the  changing  accent  in  the  perfect. 

2.  Observe  that  the  pluperfect  may  be  formed  by  adding  eram,  the  im- 
perfect of  sum,  to  the  perfect  stem.    The  tense  sign  is  -era-. 

3.  Observe  that  the  future  perfect  may  be  formed  by  adding  ero,  the 
future  of  sum,  to  the  perfect  stem.  But  the  third  person  plural  ends  in 
-erint,  not  in  -erunt.    The  tense  sign  is  -eri-. 

4.  All  active  perfects,  pluperfects,  and  future  perfects  are  formed  on 
the  perfect  stem  and  inflected  in  the  same  way. 

188.  DIALOGUE 

The  Boys  Titus,  Marcus,  and  Quintus 
First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  289. 

M.  Ubi  fuistis,  Tite  at  Quinte  ? 

T.  Ego  in  meo  ludo  fui  et  Quintus  in  suo  ludo  fuit.  Boni  pueri 
f uimus.    Fuitne  Sextus  in  vico  hodie  ? 

M.  Fuit.  Nuper  per  agros  proximos  fluvio  properabat.  Ibi  is  et 
Cornelius  habent  navigium. 


THE  PERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  8 1 

T.  Xavigium  dicis  ?   Alii  *  narrS  earn  fabulam  I 

M.  Vero  {Yes,  truly),  pulchrum  et  novum  navigium  1 

Q.  Cuius  pecunia  *  Sextus  et  Cornelius  id  navigium  parant  ?  Quis 
lis  pecuniam  dat  ? 

M.  Amici  Comeli  multum  habent  aurum  et  puer  pecunia  n5n  eget. 

T.  Qu6  pueri  navigabunt  ?   NSvigabuntne  longg  a  terra  ? 

M.  Dubia  sunt  cSnsilia  eorum.  Sed  hodie,  credo,  si  ventus  erit  ido- 
neus,  ad  maximam  insulam  navigabunt.  lam  antea  ibi  fuerunt.  Tum 
autem  ventus  erat  perfidus  et  pueri  magno  in  periculo  erant. 

Q.  Aqua  vent6  commQta  est  inimica  nautis  semper,  et  saepe  per- 
fidus ventus  navigia  rapit,  agit,  deletque.  li  pueri,  si  non  fuerint  maxime 
attenti,  irata  aqua  et  valido  vento  superabuntur  et  ita  interficientur. 

189.  EXERCISE 

I.  Where  had  the  boys  been  before?  They  had  been  in  school. 

2.  Where  had  Sextus  been  ?  He  had  been  in  a  field  next  to  the  river. 

3.  Who  has  been  with  Sextus  to-day  ?  Cornelius  has  been  with  him. 

4.  Who  says  so.>  Marcus.  5.  If  the  wind  has  been  suitable,  the  boys 
have  been  in  the  boat  6.  Soon  we  shall  sail  with  the  boys.  7.  There  * 
will  be  no  danger,  if  we  are  (shall  have  been)  careful* 


LESSON   XXXII 

THE  PERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE  OF  THE  FOUR  REGULAR 
CONJUGATIONS 

190.  Meanings  of  the  Perfect.  The  perfect  tense  has  two  distinct 
meanings.  The  first  of  these  is  equivalent  to  the  English  present 
perfect,  or  perfect  with  have,  and  denotes  that  the  action  of  the  verb 
is  complete  at  the  time  of  speaking ;  as,  /  have  finished  my  work. 
As  this  denotes  completed  action  at  a  definite  time,  it  is  called  the 
perfect  definite. 

»  Dative  case.  (Cf.  §  109.)  «  Ablative  of  means.  »  The  expletive  there 
is  not  expressed,  but  the  verb  will  precede  the  subject,  as  in  English.  •  This 
predicate  adjective  must  be  nominative  plural  to  agree  with  toe. 


82 


THE  PERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE 


The  perfect  is  also  used  to  denote  an  action  that  happened  some- 
time in  the  past ;  as,  I  finished  my  work.  As  no  definite  time  is  speci- 
fied, this  is  called  the  perfect  indefinite.  It  corresponds  to  the  ordinary 
use  of  the  English  past  tense. 

a.  Note  carefully  the  difference  between  the  following  tenses : 

^  { was  finishing^  .  ,.         r        c.        s 

^ius.^  to  finish  I  '"y  '""''^  ('">Perfe«.  S  '34) 
I  finished  my  work  (perfect  indefinite) 
/  have  finished  my  work  (perfect  definite) 

When  telling  a  story  the  Latin  uses  the  perfect  indefinite  to  mark  the 
different  forward  steps  of  the  narrative,  and  the  imperfect  to  describe 
situations  and  circumstances  that  attend  these  steps.  If  the  following 
sentences  were  Latin,  what  tenses  would  be  used? 

"  Last  week  I  went  to  Boston.  I  was  trying  to  find  an  old  friend  of 
mine,  but  he  was  out  of  the  city.    Yesterday  I  returned  home." 

191.  Inflection  of  the  Perfect.  We  learned  in  §  i86  that  any  per- 
fect is  inflected  by  adding  the  endings  of  the  perfect  to  the  perfect 
stem.    The  inflection  in  the  four  regular  conjugations  is  then  as  follows : 

CONJ.   I 

amavi 

/  have  loved  I  have  advised  I  have  ruled  I  have  taken    I  have  heard 

I  loved  or        /  advised  or       /  ruled  or  /  took  or        /  heard  or 

did  love  did  advise  did  rule  did  take  did  hear 


CONJ.    II 

CONJ.    Ill 

CONJ.   IV 

monui 

rexi                   cepi 

audivi 

Perfect  Stems 

amav- 

monu- 

rex- 

SlNGULAR 

cep- 

audiv- 

I. 

ama'vi 

mo'nui 

re'xi 

ce'pi 

audi'vi 

2. 

amavis'ti 

monuis'ti 

rexis'ti 

cepis'ti 

audlvis'ti 

3- 

ama'vit 

mo'nuit 

re'xit 
Plural 

ce'pit 

audl'vit 

I. 

ama'vimus 

monu'imus 

re'ximus 

ce'pimus 

audi'vimus 

2. 

amavis'tis 

monuis'tis 

rexis'tis 

cepis'tis 

audi  vis 'tis 

3- 

amave'runt 

monue'runt 

re  xe 'runt 

cepe'runt 

audlve'runt 

or  amave're 

or  monue're 

or  rexe're 

or  cepe're 

or  audi  ve 're 

THE  PERFECl    AuiUl:.  IMJICATIVE 


»3 


1.  The  first  person  of  the  perfect  is  always  given  as  the  third  of  the 
principal  parts.  From  this  we  get  the  perfect  stem.  This  shows  ths 
absolute  necessity  of  learning  the  principal  parts  thoroughly. 

2.  Nearly  all  perfects  of  the  first  conjugation  are  formed  by  adding  -vi 
to  the  present  stem.    Like  amavi  inflect  paravi,  vocavi,  curavi,  laudavi. 

3.  Note  carefully  the  changing  accent  in  the  perfect.    Drill  on  it. 

192.  Learn  the  principal  parts  and  inflect  the  perfects : 
Pres.  Indic.         Pres.  Lnfin.  Perf.  Indic. 


d& 

dire 

dedi 

give 

deled 

delSre 

delevi 

destroy 

habe5 

habere 

habui 

■have 

moved 

movere 

mdvi 

move 

pared 

parere 

parui 

obey 

prohibed 

prohibere 

prohibui 

restrain^  keep  from 

Tided 

videre 

vidi 

see 

died 

dicere 

dixi 

say 

discedo 

discedere 

discessi 

depart 

dQcd 

ducere 

diizi 

lead 

facid 

facere 

feci 

make,  do 

mittd 

mittere 

misi 

send 

miinid 

miinire 

munivi 

fortify 

venid 

venire 

vSni 

cqme 

193.  Perseus  and  Andromeda  {Continued) 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  290. 

Cepheus,  adversa  fortuna  maxime  commStus,  discessit  et  multis 
cum  lacrimis  populo  Aethiopiae  verba  6r§cull  narrSvit.  Fata  Andro- 
medae,  puellae  pulchrae,  a  toto  populo  d^plSrabantur,  tamen  nullum 
erat  auxilium.  Deinde  Cepheus  cum  pleno  tristitiae  animo  caram 
suam  filiam  ex  oppidi  porta  ad  aquam  duxit  et  bracchia  eius  ad  saxa  5 
dura  revinxit.  Tum  amici  puellae  miserae  longe  discesserunt  et  diu 
monstrum  saevum  exspectSverunt. 

Tum  forte  Perseus,  alis  frgtus,  super  Aethiopiam  volabat.    Vidit 
populum,  Andromedam,  lacrimSs,  et,  magnopere  attonitus,  ad  terram 
descendit.   Tum  CCpheus  ei  tOtSs  cQras  nirrSvit  etita  dixit :  "  PSrebO  10 
verbis  OrSculi,  et  pr6  patria  filiam  meam  dabO ;  sed  si  id  mSnstrum 
interficies  et  Andromedam  scrvabis,  tibi  {to  you)  eam  dabO." 


84      PLUPERFECT,  FUTURE  PERFECT,  INDICATIVE 


LESSON   XXXIII 


PLUPERFECT  AND  FUTURE  PERFECT  ACTIVE  INDICATIVE 
PERFECT  ACTIVE  INFINITIVE 


194.  CoNj.  I 

amo 

Perfect  Stems   amav- 


CONJ.  II  CONJ.  Ill 

mone5  rego  capio 

monu-  rex-  cep- 

Pluperfect  Indicative  Active 
^  Tense  Sign   -era- 

SINGULAR 

I  had  loved  I  had  advised   I  had  ruled   I  had  taken 


ama  veram 

ama'veras 

ama'verat 


monu  eram 

monu'eras 

monu'erat 


1.  amavera  mus  monuera  mus 

2.  amavera'tis      monuera 'tis 

3.  ama'verant       monu'erant 


re  xeram 

re'xeras 

re'xerat 

PLURAL 

rexera'mus 

rexera'tis 

re'xerant 


ce  peram 

ce'peras 

ce'perat 


cepera  mus 

cepera'tis 

ce'perant 


CONJ.  IV 

audio 
audiv- 


/  had  heard 
audrveram 
audrveras 
audi'verat 

audivera'mus 

audivera'tis 

audi'verant 


Future  Perfect  Indicative  Active 
Tense  Sign   -eri- 


/  shall  have 
loved 

/  shall  have 
advised 

singular 
/  shall  have 
ruled 

/  shall  have 
taken 

/  shall  Itave 
heard 

2. 

3. 

ama'veTO 
ama'veris 
ama'verit 

monu'ero 
monu'eris 
monu'erit 

re'xero 
re'xeris 
re'xerit 

PLURAL 

ce'pero 
ce'peris 
ce'perit 

audi'vero 
audl'veris 
audl'verit 

2. 
3. 

amave'rimus 

amave'ritis 

ama'verint 

monue'rimus 

monue'ritis 

monu'erint 

rexe'rimus 

rexe'ritis 

re'xerint 

cepe'rimus 

cepe'ritis 

ce'perint 

audive'rimus 

audive'ritis 

audl'verint 

1 .  Observe  that  these  are  all  inflected  alike  and  the  rules  for  formation 
given  in  §  187.  2-4  hold  good  here. 

2.  In  like  manner  inflect  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect  indicative  active 
of  do,  porto,  deleo,  moveo,  habeo,  dico,  discedo,  facio,  venio,  miinio. 


PERFECT  ACTIVE  INFINITIVE  85 

195.  The  Perfect  Active  Infinitive.    The  perfect  active  infinitive  is 
formed  by  adding  -isse  to  the  perfect  stem. 


CONJ. 

Perfect  Stem 

Perfect  Infinitive 

I. 

amiv- 

amavis'se,  /o  have  loved 

II. 

monu- 

monuis'se,  to  have  advised 

III. 

(a)  rex- 

rexis'se,  to  have  ruled 

(d)  cep- 

cepis'se,  to  have  taken 

IV. 

audiv- 

audlvis'se,  to  have  heard 

sum 

fu- 

fuis'se,  to  have  been 

I.  In  like  manner  give  the  perfect  infinitive  active  of  d6,  port5,  deled, 
moved,  habed,  dic6,  disced5,  facio,  veniS,  miinid. 

196.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Habuisti,  moverunt,  miserant.  2.  Vidit,  dixeris,  duxisse. 
3.  Misistis,  paruerunt,  discesseramus.  4.  Munivit,  dederam,  misero. 
5.  Habuerimus,  delevi,  paruit,  fuisse.  6.  Dederas,  muniveritis,  v6nera- 
tis,  misisse.    7.  Veneras,  fecisse,  dederatis,  portaveris. 

8.  Quem  verba  oracull  moverant?  Populum  verba  oraculi  move- 
rant.  9.  Cui  Cepheus  verba  oraculi  narraverit  ?  Perseo  Cepheus 
verba  oraculi  narraverit.  10.  Amici  ab  Andromeda  discesserint. 
1 1.  Monstrum  saevum  domicilia  multa  deleverat.  12.  Ubi  monstrum 
vidistis  ?  Id  in  aqua  vidimus.  13.  Quid  mOnstrum  faciet  ?  Monstrum 
Andromedam  interficiet. 

II.  I.  They  have  obeyed,  we  have  destroyed,  I  shall  have  had. 
2.  We  shall  have  sent,  I  had  come,  they  have  fortified.  3.  I  had  de- 
parted, he  has  obeyed,  you  have  sent  {sing,  and  plur.).  4.  To  have 
destroyed,  to  have  seen,  he  will  have  given,  they  have  carried.  5.  He 
had  destroyed,  he  has  moved,  you  have  had  {sing,  and  plur.).  6.  I 
have  given,  you  had  moved  {sing,  and  plur.),  we  had  said.  7.  You 
will  have  made  {sing,  and  plur.) ,  they  will  have  led,  to  have  given. 

8.  Who  had  seen  the  monster  ?  Andromeda  had  seen  it  9.  Why 
had  the  men  departed  from  *  the  towns  ?  They  had  departed  because 
the  monster  had  come,    i  o.  Did  Cepheus  obey  *  the  oracle  •  "i   He  did. 

*  ex.  What  would  ab  mean }  «  Did  .  .  .  obey,  perfect  tense.  »  What 
case  ? 


86  REVIEW  OF  THE  ACTIVE  VOICE 

LESSON  XXXIV 

REVIEW  OF  THE  ACTIVE  VOICE 

197.  A  review  of  the  tenses  of  the  indicative  active  shows  the 
following  formation : 

'  Present  =  First  of  the  principal  parts 
Imperfect  =  Present  stem  +  -ba-m 


TENSES  OF  THE 
INDICATIVE 


_,  ,  -i^w,  Coni.  1  and  II 

Future  =  Present  stem  +  ^ 


r-bo, 
\-a-ir 


m,  Conj.  Ill  and  IV 
Perfect  =  Third  of  the  principal  parts 
Pluperfect  =  Perfect  stem  +  -era-m 
L  Future  Perfect  =  Perfect  stem  +  -ero 

198.  The  synopsis  of  the  active  voice  of  amo,  as  far  as  we  have 
learned  the  conjugation,  is  as  follows : 

Principal  Parts  amo,  amare,  amavi 
Pres.  Stem  ama-  Perf.  Stem  amav- 

r  Pres.  amo  f  Perf.  amavi 

Indic.  \  Imperf.  amabam  Indic.  <  Pluperf.  amaveram 

[  Fut.  amabo  |^  Fut.  perf.  amavero 

Pres.  Imv.  ama 
Pres.  Infin.  amare  Perf.  Infin.  amavisse 

I .  Learn  to  write  in  the  same  form  and  to  give  rapidly  the  principal  parts 
and  synopsis  of  parS,  do,  laud5,  deleo,  habeo,  moveo,  pareo,  video,  dico, 
discedo,  duc6,  mitto,  capio,  munio,  venio.^ 

199.  Learn  the  following  principal  parts  :  ^ 


Pres.  Indic 

Pres.  Infin. 

Perf.  Indic 

'  sum 

RREGULAR     J   ^, 
VERBS           i 

esse 

abes'se 

dare 

fui 

a'fui 

dedi 

be 

be  away 
give 

1  Learn  to  give  synopses  rapidly,  and  not  only  in  the  first  person  singular 
but  in  any  person  of  either  number.  2  These  are  all  verbs  that  you  have 
had  before,  and  the  perfect  is  the  only  new  form  to  be  learned. 


REVIEW  OF  THE  ACTIVE  VOICE 


87 


'  contincS 

continSre 

continm 

hold  in  ^  keep 

doced 

docere 

docui 

teach 

eged 

egere 

e^ui 

need 

fave5 

favere 

favi 

favor 

Conjugation  , 

iubed 

iubere 

iussi 

order 

II 

noceS 

nocere 

nocui 

injure 

persuaded 

persuadere 

persuasi 

persuade 

respondeo 

respondere 

respond! 

reply 

sedeS 

sedere 

sedi 

sit 

studed 

studere 

studui 

be  eager 

agS 

agere 

egi 

drive 

cr6d5 

credere 

credidi 

believe 

fugi5 

fugere 

fiigi 

flee 

Conjugation 
III 

iacio 

iacere 

ieci 

hurl 

interficio 

interficere 

interfeci 

kill 

rapio 

rapere 

rapui 

seize 

resis'tS 

resis'tere 

re'stiti 

resist 

Conjugation 
IV           ^ 

rcpe'riS 

reperi're 

rep'peri 

find 

200.  Perseus  and  Andromeda  (Concluded) 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  290.    Read  the  whole  story. 

Perseus  semper  proelio  studebat  ^  et  respondit,^  "  Verba  tua  sunt 

maxime  grata,"  et  laetus  arma  sua  magica  paravit.^   Subito  monstrum 

videtur;  celeriter  per  aquam  properat  et  Andromedae  adpropinquat. 

Eius  amici  longe  absunt  et  misera  puella  est  s6la.    Perseus  autem 

sine  mora  super  aquam  volavit.*    Subito  descendit*  et  durO  gladio  5 

saevum  mOnstrum  graviter  vubieravit.^    Diu  pugnatur,'  diQ  proelium 

est  dubium.  Denique  autem  Perseus  mOnstrum  interfecit  *  et  victOriam 

reportavit.*  Tum  ad  saxum  venit  ^  et  Andromedam  llberavit  *  et  eam  ad 

Cepheum  duxit*  Is,  nuper  miser,  nunc  laetus,  ita  dixit  * :  "  Tu6  auxilio, 

ml  amice,  cara  filia  mea  est  libera ;  tua  est  Andromeda."    DiQ  Perseus  10 

cum  Andromeda  ibi  habitabat  ^  et  magnopere  a  tOto  populO  amabatur.* 

»  See  if  you  can  explain  the  use  of  the  perfects  and  imperfects  in  this 
passage.  *  The  verb  pugnatur  means,  literally,  it  is  fought :  translate  freely, 
the  battle  is  fought^  or  the  contest  rages.  The  verb  pugnd  in  I^tin  is  intransitive, 
and  so  does  not  have  a  personal  subject  in  the  passive.  A  verb  with  an  inde- 
terminate subject,  designated  in  English  by  //.  is  called  impersonal. 


8S  THE  PASSIVE  PERFECTS 


LESSON  XXXV 

THE  PASSIVE  PERFECTS   OF  THE  INDICATIVE  •  THE  PERFECT 
PASSIVE  AND  FUTURE  ACTIVE  INFINITIVE 

201.  The  fourth  and  last  of  the  principal  parts  (§  183)  is  the  perfect 
passive  participle.  J^rom  it  we  get  the  participial  stem  on  which  are 
for?ned  the  future  active  infinitive  and  all  the  passive  perfects. 

1 .  Learn  the  following  principal  parts,  which  are  for  the  first  time  given 
in  full : 

CoNj.        Pres.  Indic.  Pres.  Infin.  Perf.  Indic.  Perf.  Pass.  Part. 

I.              amo                 ama'-re  ama'v-i  ama't-us 
This  is  the  model  for  all  regular  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation. 

II.              mo'neo             mone'-re  mo'nu-i  mo'nit-us 

III.  rego                  re'ge-re  rex-i  rect-us 
ca'pio              ca'pe-re  cep-i  capt-us 

IV.  au'dio              audi'-re  audiV-i  audi't-us 

2.  The  base  of  the  participial  stem  is  found  by  dropping  -us  from  the 
perfect  passive  participle. 

202.  In  English  the  perfect,  past  perfect,  and  future  perfect  tenses 
of  the  indicative  passive  are  made  up  of  forms  of  the  auxiliary  verb 
to  be  and  the  past  participle ;  as,  /  have  been  loved,  I  had  been  loved, 
I  shall  have  been  loved. 

Very  similarly,  in  Latin,  the  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect 
passive  tenses  use  respectively  the  present,  imperfect,  and  future  of 
sum  as  an  auxiliary  verb  with  the  perfect  passive  participle,  as 

Perfect  passive,  ama'tus  sum,  /  have  been  or  was  loved 
Pluperfect  passive,  ama'tus  eram,  /  had  been  loved 
Future  perfect  passive,  ama'tus  ero,  /  shall  have  been  loved 

I.  In  the  same  way  give  the  synopsis  of  the  corresponding  tenses  of 
moneo,  rego,  capi5,  and  audi5,  and  give  the  English  meanings. 

203.  Nature  of  the  Participle.  A  participle  is  partly  verb  and  partly 
adjective.    As  a  verb  it  possesses  tense  and  voice.    As  an  adjective  it 


THE  FUTURE  ACTIVE  INFINITIVE  89 

is  declined  and  agrees  with  the  word  it  modifies  in  gender,  number, 
and  case. 

204.  The  perfect  passive  participle  is  declined  like  bonus,  bona, 
bonum,  and  in  the  compound  tenses  (§  202)  it  agrees  as  a  predicate 
adjective  with  the  subject  of  the  verb. 

(  Vir  laudatus  est,  //le  man  was  praised,  or  has  been  praised 
Examples  in  j  Puella  laudata  est,  the  girl  was  praised^  or  has  been  praised 
Singular     j  Consilium  laudatum  est,  the  plan  was  praised,  or  has  been 
^     praised 

'  Viri  laudati  sunt,  the  men  werepraisedy  or  have  been  praised 
Puellae  laudatae  sunt,  the  girls  were  praised,  or  have  been 

praised 
CSnailia  laudata  sunt,  the  plans  were  praised,  or  have  been 
praised 


Examples  in 

Plural 


I.  Inflect  the  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  indicative  passive  of 
«im6,  moned,  regS,  capio,  and  audi5  (§§  488-492). 

205.  The  perfect  passive  infinitive  is  formed  by  adding  esse,  the 
present  infinitive  of  sum,  to  the  perfect  passive  participle ;  as,  ama't-us 
(-a,  -um)  esse,  to  have  been  loved;  mo'nit-us  (-a,  -um)  esse,  to  have 
been  advised. 

I .  Form  the  perfect  passive  infinitive  of  reg5,  capi5,  audid,  and  give  the 
English  meanings. 

206.  The  future  active  infinitive  is  formed  by  adding  esse,  the 
present  infinitive  of  sum,  to  the  future  active  participle.  This  parti- 
ciple is  made  by  adding  -firus,  -a,  -um  to  the  base  of  the  participial 
stem.  Thus  the  future  active  infinitive  of  amC  is  am§t-fl'ru8  (-a,  -um) 
esse,  to  be  about  to  love. 

a.  Note  that  in  forming  the  three  tenses  of  the  active  infinitive  we  use 
all  three  conjugation  stems: 

Present,  amare  (present  stem),  to  love 

Perfect,  amavisse  (perfect  stem),  to  have  loved 

Future,  amStiinis  esse  (participial  stem),  to  be  about  to  Inte 

I.  Give  the  three  tenses  of  the  active  infinitive  of  Uud5,  moneS,  regS, 
capi5,  audid„  with  the  English  meanings. 


90  REVIEW  OF  PRINCIPAL  PARTS 

207.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Fabula  Andromedae  narrata  est.  2.  Multae  fabulae  a  magis- 
tro  narratae  sunt.  3.  Ager  ab  agricola  valido  aratus  erat.  4.  Agri 
ab  agricolis  validis  arati  erant.  5.  Aurum  a  servo  perfido  ad  domi- 
cilium  suum  portatum  erit.  6.  Nostra  arma  a  legato  laudata  sunt. 
Quis  vestra  arma  laudavit?  7.  Ab  ancilla  tua  ad  cenam  vocatae 
sumus.  8.  Andromeda  monstro  non  data  est,  quia  monstrum  a 
Perseo  necatum  erat. 

II.  I.  The  provinces  were  laid  waste,  the  field  had  been  laid  waste, 
the  towns  will  have  been  laid  waste.  2.  The  oracles  were  heard,  the 
oracle  was  heard,  the  oracles  had  been  heard.  3.  The  oracle  will  have 
been  heard,  the  province  had  been  captured,  the  boats  have  been 
captured.  4.  The  fields  were  laid  waste,  the  man  was  advised,  the 
girls  will  have  been  advised.  5.  The  towns  had  been  ruled,  we  shall 
have  been  captured,  you  will  have  been  heard. 

LESSON   XXXVI 

REVIEW  OF  PRINCIPAL  PARTS  •  PREPOSITIONS 
YES-OR-NO  QUESTIONS 

208.  The  following  list  shows  the  principal  parts  of  all  the  verbs  you 
have  had  excepting  those  used  in  the  paradigms.  The  parts  you  have  had 
before  are  given  for  review,  and  the  perfect  participle  is  the  only  new 
form  for  you  to  learn.  Sometimes  one  or  more  of  the  principal  parts  are 
lacking,  which  means  that  the  verb  has  no  forms  based  on  that  stem.  A 
few  verbs  lack  the  perfect  passive  participle  but  have  the  future  active 
participle  in  -urns,  which  appears  in  the  principal  parts  instead. 

Irregular  Verbs 

sum  esse 

absum  abesse 

do  ^  dare 

1  do  is  best  classed  with  the  irregular  verbs  because  of  the  short  a  in  the 
present  and  participial  stems. 


fui 

futunis 

de 

afui 

afuturus 

be  away 

dedi 

datus 

give 

REVIEW  OF  PRINCIPAL  PARTS 


91 


Conjugation  I 

ports 

porUre 

porUvi 

portatus 

cany 

So  for  all  verbs  of  this  conjugation  thus  far  used. 

Conjugation  II 

contined 

continere 

continui 

contentus 

hold  in,  keep 

deled 

delere 

delevi 

deletus 

destroy 

doced 

docere 

docui 

doctus 

teach 

cge6 

egere 

egui 

lack 

faveS 

favere 

favi 

fautums 

favor 

iubeo 

iubere 

iussi 

iussus 

order 

moved 

movere 

mdvi 

mdtus 

'  move 

noced 

nocere 

nocui 

nociturus 

injure 

pared 

parere 

panii 

obey 

persuaded 

persuadere 

persuasi 

persuasus 

persuade    \^from 

prohibed 

prohibere 

prohibui 

prohibitus 

restrain,  keep 

responded 

respondere 

respond! 

respdnsus 

reply 

seded 

sedere 

sedi 

-sessus 

sit 

studed 

studere 

studui 

be  eager 

Tided 

videre 

vidi 

visas 

see 

Conjugation  III 

agd 

agere 

Sgi 

actus 

drive 

credd 

credere 

credidi 

creditus 

believe 

died 

dicere 

dixi 

dictus 

say 

discedd 

discedere 

discessi 

discessus 

depart 

ducd 

ducere 

duxi 

ductus 

lead 

facid  1 

facere 

feci 

factus 

make 

fugid 

fugere 

fugi 

fugiturus 

flee 

iacid 

iacere 

ieci 

iactus 

hurl 

interficid 

interficere 

interfeci 

interfectus 

kill 

mittd 

mittere 

misi 

missus 

send 

rapid 

rapere 

rapui 

raptus 

seize 

resistd 

resistere 

restiti 

resist 

Conjugation  IV 

munid 

munire 

munivi 

munitus 

fortify 

reperid 

repcrire 

rep 'peri 

repertus 

find 

venid 

▼eniro 

veni 

vcntus 

come 

facid  has  an  irregular  passive  which  will  be  presented  later. 


92  PREPOSITIONS   •  VES-OR-JVO  QUESTIONS 

209.  Prepositions,  i.  We  learned  in  §§  52,  53  that  only  the  accu- 
sative and  the  ablative  are  used  with  prepositions,  and  that  preposi- 
tions expressing  ablative  relations  govern  the  ablative  case.  Those 
we  have  had  are  here  summarized.  The  table  following  should  be 
learned. 

a  or  ahyfrom,  by  e  or  ex,  out  from,  out  of 

cum,  with  pro,  before,  in  front  of;  for,  in  behalf  of 

de,  down  from,  conceTjiing         sine,  without 

2.  Prepositions  not  expressing  ablative  relations  must  govern  the 
accusative  (§  52).    Of  these  we  have  had  the  following: 

ad,  to;  apud,  among;  per,  through 

There  are  many  others  which  you  will  meet  as  we  proceed. 

3.  The  preposition  in  when  meaning  in  or  on  governs  the  ablative; 
when  meaning  to,  into,  against  (relations  foreign  to  the  ablative)  in 
governs  the  accusative. 

210.  Fes-or-JVo  Questions.  Questions  not  introduced  by  some  in- 
terrogative word  like  who^  why^  when,  etc.,  but  expecting  the  answer 
yes  or  no,  may  take  one  of  three  forms : 

1.  Is  he  coming?  (Asking  for  information.    Implying  nothing  as  to 

the  answer  expected.) 

2.  Is  he  not  coming  f  (Expecting  the  answer  jk<?^.) 

3.  He  isn^t  coming,  is  he?  (Expecting  the  answer  «<?.) 

These  three  forms  are  rendered  in  Latin  as  follows : 

1 .  Venitne  ?  is  he  coming  ? 

2.  Nonne  venit?  is  he  not  coming? 

3.  Num  venit?  he  isnU  coming,  is  he? 

a.  -ne,  the  question  sign,  is  usually  added  to  the  verb,  which  then 
stands  first. 

b.  We  learned  in  §  56.  <^  that  yes-or-no  questions  are  usually  answered 
by  repeating  the  verb,  with  or  without  a  negative.  Instead  of  this,  ita, 
vero,  certe,  etc,  {so,  truly,  certainly,  etc.)  may  be  used  for  yes,  and  n5n, 
minime,  etc.  for  fio  if  the  denial  is  emphatic,  as,  by  no  means,  not  at  all. 


CONJUGATION  OF  POSSUM  93 

211.  EXERaSES 

First  Icam  the  special  vcx:abulary,  p.  290. 

I.  1.  NOnne  hab€bat  Cornelia  Omamenta  auri?  Hab^bat.  2.  Num 
Sextus  legatus  scQtum  in  dextro  bracchio  gergbat?  NOn  in  dextro, 
sed  sinistrO  in  bracchiQ  Sextus  scutum  gerebat.  3.  FrQstra  bella  multa 
ab  Gallis  gesta  erant  4.  Ubi  oppidum  a  perfido  Sexto  occupatum 
est,  oppidan!  miseri  gladiS  interfectl  sunt.  5.  Id  oppidum  erat  ple- 
num frOmentl.  6.  N5nne  Sextus  ab  oppid^nls  frumentum  postul§vit  ? 
VerO,  sed  ii  recusaverunt  frumentum  dare.  7.  Cur  oppidum  ab  Sexto 
d^letum  est?  Quia  frumentum  recQsatum  est.  8.  Ea  victoria  non 
dubia  erat  9.  Oppidan!  erant  defess!  et  arm!s  egebant.  10.  Num 
fugam  temptavgrunt  ?  Minimg. 

II.  I.  Where  was  Julia  standing  ?  She  was  standing  where  you  had 
ordered.  2.  Was  Julia  wearing  any  ornaments  ?  She  had  many  orna- 
ments of  gold.  3.  Did  she  not  attempt  flight  when  she  saw  the  danger  ? 
She  did.  4.  Who  captured  her?  Galba  captured  her  without  delay 
and  held  her  by  the  left  arm.  5.  She  did  n't  have  the  lady's  gold,  did 
she  ?  No,  the  gold  had  been  taken  by  a  faithless  maid  and  has  been 
brought  back. 

Fourth  Review,  Lessons  XXVII-XXXVI,  §§  513-516 


LESSON  XXXVII 

CONJUGATION  OF  POSSUM  •  THE  INFINITIVE  USED 
AS  IN  ENGLISH 

212.  Learn  the  principal  parts  of  possum,  /am  abh^  I can^  and  its 
inflection  in  the  indicative  and  infinitive.   (Cf.  §  495.) 

a.  Possum,  /  catty  is  a  compound  of  potis,  abU^  and  stun,  /  am. 

213.  The  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative.  The  infinitive  (cf. 
i  173)  is  a  verbal  noun.  Used  as  a  noun,  it  has  the  constructions  of 
a  noun.  As  a  verb  it  can  govern  a  case  and  be  modified  by  an  adverb. 
The  uses  of  the  infinitive  arc  much  the  same  in  I^tin  as  in  English. 


94  THE  INFINITIVE  USED  AS  IN  ENGLISH 

I.  In  English  certain  verbs  of  wishing^  commanding^  forbidding^ 
and  the  like  are  used  with  an  object  clause  consisting  of  a  substantive 
in  the  objective  case  and  an  infinitive,  as,  he  commanded  the  men  to 
flee.  Such  object  clauses  are  called  infinitive  clauses,  and  the  sub- 
stantive is  said  to  be  the  subject  of  the  infinitive. 

Similarly  in  Latin,  some  verbs  of  wishing^  commanding^  forbidding^ 
and  the  like  are  used  with  an  object  clause  consisting  of  an  infinitive 
with  a  subject  in  the  accusative  case,  as.  Is  viros  fugere  iussit,  he 
commanded  the  men  to  flee. 

214.  Rule.  Subject  of  the  Infinitive.  The  subject  of  the  infini- 
tive is  hi  the  accusative. 

215.  The  Complementary  Infinitive.  In  English  a  verb  is  often 
followed  by  an  infinitive  to  complete  its  meaning,  as,  the  Romans  are 
able  to  conquer  the  Gauls.  This  is  called  the  complementary  infinitive, 
as  the  predicate  is  not  complete  without  the  added  infinitive. 

Similarly  in  Latin,  verbs  of  incomplete  predication  are  completed 
by  the  infinitive.  Among  such  verbs  are  possum,  /  am  able,  I  can ; 
propero,  maturS,  I  hasten ;  tempto,  I  attempt;  as 

Romani  Gallos  superare  possunt,  the  Romans  are  able  to 

(or  cait)  conquer  the  Gauls 
Bellum  gerere  maturant,  they  hasten  to  wage  war 

a.  A  predicate  adjective  completing  a  complementary  infinitive  agrees 
in  gender,  number,  and  case  with  the  subject  of  the  main  verb. 

Mali  pueri  esse  boni  non  possunt,  bad  boys  are  not  able 
to  (or  cannot)  be  good 

Observe  that  boni  agrees  with  pueri. 

216.  The  Infinitive  used  as  a  Noun.  In  English  the  infinitive  is 
often  used  as  a  pure  noun,  as  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  or  as  a  predi- 
cate nominative.  For  example.  To  conquer  ( =  conquering)  is  pleas- 
ing; To  see  (=  seeing)  is  to  believe  (=  believing).  The  same  use  of 
the  infinitive  is  found  in  Latin,  especially  with  est,  as 

Superare  est  gratum,  to  conquer  is  pleasing 
Videre  est  credere,  to  see  is  to  believe 


EXERCISES  95 

a.  In  the  construction  above,  the  infinitive  often  has  a  subject,  which 
must  then  be  in  the  accusative  case,  as 

Galb&m  superare  inimlcSs  est  gratum  inultis,y^r  Galba 
to  conquer  his  enemies  is  pleasing  to  many 

b.  An  infinitive  used  as  a  noun  is  neuter  singular.  Thus,  in  the  sen- 
tence superare  est  gratum,  the  predicate  adjective  gratum  is  in  the  neuter 
nominative  singular  to  agree  with  superare  the  subject. 

217.  EXERCISES 
First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  291. 

I.  I.  Magister  ludi  liberos  cum  dlligentia  labQrare  iussit.  2.  Eg€re 
cibo  et  vino  est  viris  molestum.  3.  Viri  armati  vetuerunt  Gallos  castra 
ibi  ponere.    4.  Estne  legatus  in  castello  an  in  muro  ?  Is  est  pro  porta. 

5.  Ubi   nostri^  fugere  inceperunt,   legatus   ab   vestris^  captus  est. 

6.  Galli  castellum  ibi  oppugnaverant  ubi  praesidium  erat  infirmum. 

7.  Alii  pugnare  temptabant,  alii  portas  petebant.  8.  Feminae  pro 
domiciliis  sedebant  neque  resistere  validis  Gallis  poterant.  9.  Bellum 
est  saevum,  nee  infirmis  nee  miseris  fa  vet.  lo.  Bed  viri  arma  postu- 
labant  et  studebant  Gallos  de  muris  agere.  1 1.  Id  castellum  ab  Gallis 
occupari  ROmanis  non  gratum  erit.  12.  Galli  ubi  a  Romanis  victi 
sunt,  esse  liberi^  cessaverunt.    13.  Diu  sine  aqua  vivere  non  potestis. 

II.  I.  The  girl  began  daily  to  carry  water  from  the  river  to  the 
gates.  2.  The  Gauls  had  pitched  their  camp  in  a  place  suitable  for 
a  battle.  3.  For  a  long  time  they  tried  in  vain  to  seize  the  redoubt. 
4.  Neither  did  they  cease  to  hurl  weapons  against  *  the  walls.  5.  But 
they  were  not  able  to  (could  not)  take  the  town. 

218.  The  Faithless  Tarpe'ia 

Sabini  6lim  cum  R5m§nis  bellum  gerebant  et  multSs  victorias  re- 
portaverant.  lam  agrOs  proximos  muris  vastabant,  iam  pppido  adpro- 
pinquSbant    ROmSnl  autem  in  Capit5lium  fOgerant  et  longe  periculd 

*  Supply  men.  nostrl,  vestri,  and  sul  are  often  used  as  nouns  in  this  way. 
*  Not  children.  The  Romans  used  llb«rl  either  as  an  adjective,  meaning//r^, 
or  as  a  noun,  meaning  the  free^  thereby  signilying  their  free-bom  childrtn. 
The  word  was  never  applied  to  children  of  slaves.       *  in  with  the  accusative. 


96 


EXERCISES 


aberant.  Muris  validis  et  saxis  altis  credebant.  Frustra  Sabini  tela 
iaciebant,  frustra  portas  duras  petebant;  castellum  occupare  non 
poterant.    D^inde  novum  consilium  ceperunt.^ 

Tarpeia  erat  puella  Romana  pulchra  et  superba.    Cotidie  aquam 
5  copiis  Romanis  in  Capitolium   portabat.    El^  non  nocebant  Sabini, 


TARPEIA   PUELLA   PERFIDA 


quod  ea  sine  armis  erat  neque  Sabini  bellum  cum  feminis  liberisque 
gerebant.  Tarpeia  autem  maxime  amabat  omamenta  auri.  Cotidie 
Sabinorum  omamenta  videbat  et  mox  ea  desiderare  incipiebat.  Ei 
unus  ex  *  Sabinis  dixit,  "  Due  copias  Sabinas  intra  portas,  Tarpeia, 
lo  et  maxima  erunt  praemia  tua." 


1  consilium  capere,  to  make  a  plan.  Why  is  the  perfect  tense  used  here  and 
the  imperfect  in  the  preceding  sentences  ?  Explain  the  use  of  tenses  in  the 
next  paragraph.  2  Dative  with  nocebant.    (Cf.  §  154.)  *  ex,  out  of,  i.e. 

from  the  number  of;  best  translated  of 


THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN  97 

LESSON   XXXVIII 
THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN  AND  THE  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN 

219.  Sentences  are  simple^  compound,  or  complex. 

a.  A  simple  sentence  is  a  sentence  containing  but  one  statement,  that  is, 
one  subject  and  one  predicate :   The  Romans  approached  the  town. 

b.  A  compound  sentence  is  a  sentence  containing  two  or  more  independ- 
ent statements :   The  Romans  approached  the  town  \  and  |  the  enemy  fled. 

Note.  An  independent  statement  is  one  that  can  stand  alone ;  it  does  not 
depend  upon  another  statement. 

c.  A  complex  sentence  is  a  sentence  containing  one  independent  state- 
ment and  one  or  more  dependent  statements:  When  the  Romans 
approcuhed  the  town  \  the  enemy  fled. 

Note.  A  dependent  or  subordinate  statement  is  one  that  depends  on 
or  qualifies  another  statement ;  thus  the  enemy  fled  is  independent,  and  when 
the  Romans  approached  the  town  is  dependent  or  subordinate. 

d.  The  separate  statements  in  a  compound  or  complex  sentence  are 
called  clauses.  In  a  complex  sentence  the  independent  statement  is  called 
the  main  clause  and  the  dependent  statement  the  subordinate  clause. 

220.  Examine  the  complex  sentence 

The  Romans  killed  the  men  who  were  taken 
Here  are  two  clauses : 

a.  The  main  clause,  The  Romans  killed  the  nun 

b.  The  subordinate  clause,  who  were  taken 

The  word  who  is  a  pronoun,  for  it  takes  the  place  of  the  noun 
men.  It  also  connects  the  subordinate  clause  who  were  taken  with  the 
noun  men.  Hence  the  clause  is  an  adjective  clause.  A  pronoun  that 
connects  an  adjective  clause  with  a  substantive  is  called  a  relative  pro- 
noun, and  the  substantive  for  which  the  relative  pronoun  stands  is 
called  its  antecedent.  The  relative  pronouns  in  English  are  who,  whose, 
whom,  which,  what,  that. 


93 


THE  RELATIVE  PRONOUN 


221.  The  relative  pronoun  in  Latin  is  qui,  quae,  quod,  and  it  is 
declined  as  follows : 


Singular 

Plural 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Norn. 

qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen. 

cuius 

cuius 

cuius 

qu5rum 

quarum 

quorum 

Dat. 

cui 

cui 

cui 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

Ace. 

quem 

quam 

quod 

quos 

quas 

quae 

AM. 

quo 

qua 

quo 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

I.  Review  the  declension  of  is,  §  114,  and  note  the  similarity  in  the 
endings.  The  forms  qui,  quae,  and  quibus  are  the  only  forms  showing 
new  endings. 

Note.  The  genitive  ctiius  and  the  dative  cui  are  pronounced  cooi'yoos  (two 
syllables)  and  cooi  (one  syllable). 

222.  The  Relative  Pronoun  is  translated  as  follows  :  ^ 


Masc.  and  Fem. 

Neut. 

Norn. 

who,  that 

which,  what,  that 

Gen. 

of  whom,  whose 

of  which,  of  what,  whose 

Dat. 

to  or  for  whom 

to  ox  for  which,  to  ox  for  what 

Ace. 

whom,  that 

which,  what,  that 

Abl. 

from,  etc.,  whom 

frotn,  etc.,  which  or  what 

a.  We  see  from  the  table  above  that  qui,  when  it  refers  to  a  person,  is 
translated  by  some  form  of  who  or  by  that;  and  that  whea  it  refers  to 
anything  else  it  is  translated  by  which,  what,  or  that. 

223.  Note  the  following  sentences : 

The  Romans  killed  the  men  who  were  taken 
The  Romans  killed  the  womati  who  was  taken 
Romani  interfecerunt  vir5s  qui  capti  sunt 
Romani  interfecerunt  feminam  quae  capta  est 

In  the  first  sentence  who  (qui)  refers  to  the  antecedent  men  (viros),  and 
is  masculine  plural.  In  the  second,  who  (quae)  refers  to  woman  (feminam), 
and  \^  feminine  singular.    From  this  we  learn  that  the  relative  must  agree 

1  This  table  of  meanings  need  not  be  memorized.  It  is  inserted  for  refer- 
ence when  translating. 


THE  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUN  99 

with  its  antecedent  in  gender  and  number.  In  neither  of  the  sentences 
are  the  antecedents  and  relatives  in  the  same  case.  Virds  and  feminam  are 
accusatives,  and  qui  and  quae  are  nominatives,  being  the  subjects  of  the 
subordinate  clauses.    Hence 

224.  Rule.  Agreement  of  the  Relative.  A  relative  pronoun 
ynust  agree  with  its  antecedent  in  gender  and  number ;  but 
its  case  is  determined  by  the  way  it  is  used  in  its  own  clause, 

225.  Interrogative  Pronouns.  An  interrogative  pronoun  is  a  pro- 
noun that  asks  a  question.  In  English  the  interrogatives  are  who? 
which  i  whati  In  Latin  they  are  quis?  quid?  (pronoun)  and  qui? 
quae?  quod?  (adjective). 

226.  Examine  the  sentences 

a.  Who  is  the  man  ?  Quis  est  vir  ? 

b.  IVhat  man  is  leading  them  ?  Qui  vir  eos  diicit  ? 

In  a,  who  is  an  interrogative /r(t7«^tt«.  In  b,  what  is  an  interrogative 
adjective.  Observe  that  in  Latin  quis,  quid  is  the  pronoun  and  qui, 
quae,  quod  is  the  adjective. 

2TI.  I .  The  interrogative  adjective  qui,  quae,  quod  is  declined  just 
like  the  relative  pronoun.   (See  §  221.) 

2.  The  interrogative  pronoun  quis,  quid  is  declined  like  qui,  quae, 
quod  in  the  plural    In  the  singular  it  is  declined  as  follows : 
Masc.  and  Fem.  Neut. 

Nom.     quis,  who  f  quid,  what  ?  which  t 

Gen.       cuius,  whose?  cuius,  whose f 

Dat.      cui,  to  ox  for  whom  f        cui,  to  ox  for  what  or  which  t 
Ace.       qaem,  whom  f  quid,  what  f  which  f 

Abl.       f^ffrom,  etc.,  whom?    <^^from^  etc.,  which  or  what? 

Note.  Observe  that  the  masculine  and  feminine  are  alike  and  that  all  the 
forms  are  like  the  corresponding  forms  of  the  relative,  excepting  quis  and  quid. 

228.  EXERCISES 

1.  I.  Quis  est  aeger?  Servus  quern  amO  est  aeger.  2.  Cuius  scQ- 
tum  hab€s?  Scutum  habeO  quod  l^rgatus  ad  castellum  misit.  3.  Cui 
l€gatus  suum  scQtum  dabit  ?  FiliO  meO  scQtiun  dabit   4.  Ubi  German! 


lOO 


EXERCISES 


antiqui  vivebant  ?  In  terra  quae  est  proxima  Rheno  GermanI  vive- 
bant.  5.  Quibuscum^  GermanI  bellum  gerebant?  Cum  Romanis,  qui 
eos  superare  studebant,  German!  bellum  gerebant.    6.  Qui  viri  castra 

ponunt  ?  li  sunt  viri  quorum 
armis  Germani  victi  sunt. 

7.  Quibus  telis  copiae  nos- 
trae  eguerunt  ?  Gladiis  et 
pills  nostrae  copiae  eguerunt 

8.  A  quibus  porta  sinistra 
tenebatur.?  A  sociis  porta 
sinistra  tenebatur.  9.  Quae 
provinciae  a  Romanis  occu- 
patae  sunt?  Multae  pro- 
vinciae a  Romanis  occu- 
patae  sunt.  10.  Quibus  viris 
dei  favebunt.?  Bonis  viris 
dei  favebunt. 

II.  I.  What  victory  will 
you  announce?  2.  I  will 
announce  to  the  people  the 
victory  which  the  sailors 
have  won.  3.  The  men  who 
were  pitching  camp  were 
4.  Nevertheless  they  were  soon  conquered  by  the 
5.  They  could  not  resist  our  forces, 


GERMANI    ANTIQUI 


eager  for  battle. 

troops  which  Sextus  had  sent 

but  fled  from  that  place  without  delay. 


229. 


The  Faithless  Tarpeia  (Concluded)  ^ 


Tarpeia,  commota  ornamentis  Sablnorum  pulchris,  diu  resistere  non 
potuit  et  respondit :  "  Date  mihi  *  omamenta  quae  in  sinistris  brac- 
chiis  geritis,  et  celeriter  copias  vestras  in  Capitolium  ducam."    Nee 


1  cum  is  added  to  the  ablative  of  relative,  interrogative,  and  personal  pro- 
nouns instead  of  being  placed  before  them.  ^  Explain  the  use  of  the  tenses 
in  this  selection.         •  to  me. 


1  HK  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  CONSONANT  STEMS     loi 

Sablnl  recQsaverunt,  sed  per  durSs  magnasque  castelli  port^  pro- 
peraverunt  qu5  *  Tarp€ia  duxit  et  mox  intra  validos  et  altOs  mQrOs 
stabant.  Turn  sine  mora  in*  Tarpeiani  3cut^  grayiter  igc^inrnt;  nam 
scuta  quoque  in  sinistris  bracchiis  gei*?baat  It?  perfida  puella  Tar- 
p€ia  interfecta  est ;  ita  Sablni  CapitOlhira  occupaveruHt,  »    •  .  5 


LESSON  XXXIX 

THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  CONSONANT  STEMS 

230.  Bases  and  Steins.  In  learning  the  first  and  second  declen- 
sions w  c  saw  that  the  different  cases  were  formed  by  adding  the  case 
terminations  to  the  part  of  the  word  that  did  not  change,  which  we 
called  the  base.  If  to  the  base  we  add  -ft  in  the  first  declension, 
and  -0  in  the  second,  we  get  what  is  called  the  stem.  Thus  porta  has 
the  base  port-  and  the  stem  porta-  ;  servus  has  the  base  senr-  and  the 
stem  servo-. 

'I'hese  stem  vowels,  -ft-  and  -o-,  play  so  important  a  part  in  the 
formation  of  the  case  terminations  that  these  declensions  are  named 
from  them  respectively  the  A-  and  (9-Declensions. 

231.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension.  The  third  declension  is  called 
the  Consonant  or  /-Declension,  and  its  nouns  arc  classified  according 
to  the  way  the  stem  ends.  If  the  last  letter  of  the  stem  is  a  consonant, 
the  word  is  said  to  have  a  consonant  stem ;  if  the  stem  ends*  in  -i-,  the 
word  is  said  to  have  an  \-stem.  In  consonant  stems  the  stem  is  the  same 
as  the  base.  In  i-stems  the  stem  is  formed  by  adding  -i-  to  the  base. 
The  presence  of  the  i  makes  a  difference  in  certain  of  the  cases,  so 
the  distinction  is  a  very  important  one. 

232.  Consonant  stems  are  divided  into  two  classes : 

I.  Stems  that  add  -8  to  the  base  to  form  the  nominative  singular. 
II.  Stems  that  add  no  termination  in  the  nominative  singular. 

»  qn5  =  whither,  to  the  place  where.  Here  qa5  is  the  relative  adverb.  We 
have  had  it  used  before  as  the  interrogative  adverb,  whither t  to  what  pUuef 
•  upon. 


I02     THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  CONSONANT  STEMS 

CLASS  I 

233.   Stems  that  add  -s  to  the  base  in  the  nominative  singular  are 
either  masculine  or  feminine  and  are  declined  as  follows : 


Basest  P^'^ceps^^J'^f'^f^ 
OR  ■'>'t).Tinc&)-  . '.  •  '; : 

Stems  J  * 

miles,  m.]^o  Idler 

lapis,  m.,  stone 

,nmk'. 

lapid- 

Singular 

terminations 

M.  AND  F. 

Norn,     princeps 

miles 

lapis 

-s 

Gen.       prin'cipis 

militis 

lapidis 

-is 

Dat.       prin'cipi 

mlliti 

lapidi 

-i 

Ace.       prln'cipem 

mllitem 

lapidem 

-em 

Abl.       prin'cipe 

milite 

Plural 

lapide 

-€ 

Norn,     prin'cipes 

milites 

lapides 

-es 

Gen.       prin'cipum 

milituni 

lapidum 

-um 

Dat.       prlnci'pibus 

militibus 

lapidibus 

-ibus 

Ace.       prin'cipes 

milites 

lapides 

-es 

Abl.       prlnci'pibus 

militibus 

lapidibus 

-ibus 

Basest,  rex,  m., /&/«^ 
OR     \  reg- 

Stems  J 

iudex,  m.,  Judge 

virtiis,  f.,  manlmess 

iudic- 

virtut- 

Singular 

TERMINATIONS 
M.  AND  F. 

Norn,     rex 

iudex 

virtus 

-s 

Gen.       regis 

iudicis 

virtu'tis 

-is 

Dat.       regi 

iudici 

virtu'ti 

-i 

Ace.       regem 

iudicem 

virtu'tem 

-€m 

Abl.       rege 

iudice 

Plural 

virtu'te 

-e 

Nom.     reges 

iudices 

virtu'tes 

-es 

Gen.       regum 

iudicum 

virtu'tum 

-um 

Dat.       regibus 

iadicibus 

virtu'tibus 

-ibus 

Ace.       reges 

iudices 

virtu 'tes 

-es 

Abl.       regibus 

iudicibus 

virtQ'tibus 

-ibus 

1.  The  base  or  stem  is  found  by  dropping  -is  in  the  genitive  singular. 

2.  Most  nouns  of  two  syllables,  like  princeps  (princip-),  miles  (milit-), 
ifidex  (iiidic-),  have  i  in  the  base, 


but  e  in  the  nominative. 


EXERCISES  103 

a.  Upia  is  an  exception  to  this  rule. 

3.  Observe  the  consonant  changes  of  the  base  or  stem  in  the  nominative: 

a.  A  final  -t  or  -d  is  dropped  before  -s;  thus  miles  for  mllets,  lapis 
for  lapids,  virtus  for  virtiits. 

d.  A  final  -c  or  -g  unites  with  -e  and  forms  -x;  thus  iudec  4-  s  =  iiidez, 
rtg  +  8  =  rex. 

4.  Review  §  74  and  apply  the  rules  to  this  declension. 

In  like  manner  decline  dux,  ducis,  m.,  leader ;  eques,  equitis,  m.,  horse- 
man :  pedes,  peditis,  m.,foot  soldier ;  pes,  pedis,  m..,/oot. 

234.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  29 1 . 

I.  I.  Neque  pedites  neque  equites  occupare  castellum  ROmanum 
poterant.  2.  Summavirtutemurosaltoscotidieoppugnabant.  3.  Ped6s 
mllitum  lapidibus  qui  de  muro  iaciebantur  saepe  vulnerabantur. 
4.  Quod  novum  consilium  dux  cepit?  5.  Is  perfidam  puellam  pulchris 
Qmamentls  temptavit.  6.  Quid  puella  fecit  ?  7.  Puella  commota  auro 
milites  per  portas  duxit.  8.  Tamen  praemia  quae  summo  studio  petl- 
verat  non  reportavit  9.  Apud  Romanes  antiques  Tarpeia  non  est 
laudata. 

II.  I.  What  ship  is  that  which  I  see?  That  (illud)  ship  is  the 
Victory .  It  is  sailing  now  with  a  favorable  wind  and  will  soon 
approach  Italy.  2.  The  judges  commanded  the  savages  to  be  seized 
and  to  be  killed.  3.  The  chiefs  of  the  savages  suddenly  began  to 
flee,  but  were  quickly  captured  by  the  horsemen.  4.  The  king  led 
the  foot  soldiers  to  the  wall  from  which  the  townsmen  were  hurling 
stones  with  the  greatest  zeal. 


NAVIGIUM 


104     THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  CONSONANT  STEMS 


LESSON   XL 


THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  CONSONANT  STEMS  (Continued) 

CLASS  II 

235.  Consonant  stems  that  add  no  termination  in  the  nominative 
are  declined  in  the  other  cases  exactly  like  those  that  add  -s.  They 
may  be  masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter. 


236. 


PARADIGMS 
Masculines  and  Feminines 


consul,  m., 

legio,  f., 

ordo,  m., 

pater,  m., 

consul 
Bases-] 
OR     ^consul- 

StemsJ 

legion 
legion- 

row 
ordin- 

SlNGULAR 

father 
patr- 

terminations 

M.  AND  F. 

Nom.    consul 

legio 

5rd5 

pater 

.      

Gen.     c5nsulis 

legionis 

ordinis 

patris 

-is 

Dat.     cdnsuli 

legioni 

ordini 

patri 

-i 

Ace.      consulem 

legionem 

ordinem 

patrem 

-em 

Abl.     cdnsule 

legione 

ordine 
Plural 

patre 

-e 

Nom.   consules 

legiones 

ordines 

patres 

-es 

Gen.     consulum 

legio  num 

ordinum 

patrum 

-um 

Dat.     consulibus 

legionibus 

ordinibus 

patribus 

-ibus 

Ace.      consules 

legiones 

ordines 

patres 

-es 

Abl.      c5nsulibus 

legionibus 

ordinibus 

patribus 

-ibus 

1.  With  the  exception  of  the  nominative,  the  terminations  are  exactly 
the  same  as  in  Class  I,  and  the  base  or  stem  is  found  in  the  same  way. 

2.  Masculines  and  feminines  with  bases  or  stems  in  -in-  and  -on-  drop 
-n-  and  end  in  -o  in  the  nominative,  as  legio  (base  or  stem  legi5n-),  ordo 
(base  or  stem  drdin-). 

3.  Bases  or  stems  in  -tr-  have  -ter  in  the  nominative,  as  pater  (base  or 
stem  patr-). 

4.  Note  how  the  genitive  singular  gives  the  clue  to  the  whole  declension. 
Always  learn  this  with  the  nominative. 


THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  CONSONANT  STEMS      105 

237.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  291. 

I.  1.  Audisne  tubas,  Marce?  NOn  s6lum  tubas  audio  sed  etiam 
ordines  militum  et  carros  impedlmentorum   plenos  videre  possum. 

2.  QuSs  legiones  videmus?    Eae  legiones  nuper  ex  Gallia  venerunt. 

3.  Quid  ibi  fecerunt?    Studebantne  pugnare  an  sine  virtute  erant? 

4.  Multa  proelia  fecerunt  *  et  magnas  victorias  et  multos  captivos  re- 
portaverunt.  5.  Quisest  imperator  earum  legionum  .-*  Caesar,  summus 
Romanorum  imperator.  6.  Quis  est  eques  qui  pulchram  coronam  gevitf 
Is  eques  est  fratcr  meus.  Ei  corona  a  consule  data  est  quia  summa 
virtute  pugnaverat  et  a  barbaris  patriam  servaverat. 

II.  I.  Who  has  seen  my  father  to-day.?  2.  I  saw  him  just  now 
(n&per).  He  was  hastening  to  your  dwelling  with  your  mother  and 
sister.  3.  WTien  men  are  far  from  the  fatherland  and  lack  food,  they 
cannot  be  restrained  *  from  wrong.*  4.  The  safety  of  the  soldiers  is 
dear  to  Caesar,  the  general.  5.  The  chiefs  were  eager  to  storm  a 
town  full  of  grain  which  was  held  by  the  consul.  6.  The  king 
forbade  the  baggage  of  the  captives  to  be  destroyed. 

LESSON   XLI 


THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  CONSONANT  STEMS  (Concluded) 

238.  Neuter  consonant  stems  add  no  termination  in  the  nominative 
and  arc  declined  as  follows : 


flumen,  n., 

tempus,  n., 

opus,  n.. 

caput,  n. 

» 

river 

time 

work 

head 

Basks  ^ 
OR     ^fl&min- 

tempor- 

oper- 

capit- 

SlNGULAR 

TERMINATIONS 

Nom.    flumen  , 

tempus 

opus 

caput 



Gen.      fluminia 

temporis 

operis 

capitis 

-is 

Dat.      flu  mini 

tempori 

operi 

capili 

-i 

Ace.      flumen 

tempus 

opus 

caput 

— 

Abl.      flumine 

tempore 

opere 

capite 

-« 

^  proeliom  facere  : 

=  tojigkt  a  battU. 

s  contineo. 

Cf.  S  180. 

•  Abl.  Iniilrii. 

io6 

EXERCISES 

Plu 

RAL 

TERMINATIONS 

Nom. 

flumina 

tempora 

opera 

capita 

-a 

Gen. 

fluminum 

temporum 

operum 

capitum 

-um 

Dat. 

fluminibus 

temporibus 

operibus 

capitibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

flumina 

tempora 

opera 

capita 

-a 

Abl, 

fluminibus 

temporibus 

operibus 

capitibus 

-ibus 

1.  Review  §  74  and  apply  the  rules  to  this  declension. 

2.  Bases  or  stems  in  -in-  have  -e-  instead  of  -i-  in  the  nominative,  as 
flumen,  base  or  stem  flumin-. 

3.  Most  bases  or  stems  in  -er-  and  -or-  have  -us  in  the  nominative,  as 
opus,  base  or  stem  oper-;  tempus,  base  or  stem  tempor-. 


239.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  292. 

I.  I.  Barbari  ubi  Romam  ceperunt,  maxima  regum  opera  dele- 
verunt.  2.  Roman!  multas  calamitates  a  barbaris  acceperunt.  3.  Ubi 
erat  summus  terror  apud  oppidanos,  anim!  dubil  eorum  ab  oratore  claro 
confirmati  sunt.  4.  Roma  est  in  ripis  fluminis  magnl.  5.  Ubi  Caesar 
imperator  milites  suos  arma  capere  iussit,  ii  a  proelio  continerl  non- 
potuerunt.    6.  Ubi  proeHum  factum  est,  imperator  reperiri  non  potuit. 

7.  Imperator  sagitta  in  capite  vulneratus  erat  et  stare  non  poterat. 

8.  Eum  magno  labore  pedes  ex  proelio  portavit.  9.  Is  bracchiis  suis 
imperatorem  tenuit  et  eum  ex  periculis  summis  servavit.  10.  Virtu te 
sua  bonus  miles  ab  imperatore  coronam  accepit. 

II.  I.  The  consul  placed  a  crown  on  the  head  of  the  victor.  2.  Be- 
fore the  gates  he  was  received  by  the  townsmen.  3.  A  famous  orator 
praised  him  and  said,  "  By  your  labors  you  have  saved  the  father- 
land from  disaster."  4.  The  words  of  the  orator  were  pleasing  to 
the  victor.    5.  To  save  the  fatherland  was  a  great  task. 


CORONA 


REVIEW  OF  CONSONANT  STEMS  107 


LESSON   XLII 

REVIEW  LESSON 

240.  Review  the  paradigms  in  §§233,  236,  238;  and  decline  all 
nouns  of  the  third  declension  in  this  selection. 

Terror  Cimbricus* 

Olim  CimbrI  et  TeutonCs,  popull  Germaniae,  cum  feminis  liberisque 
Italiae  adpropinquSverant  et  copias  Romanas  maximS  proeliO  vicerant. 
Ubi  fuga  legiSnum  nuntiataest,  summus  erat  terror  totius  Romae,et  Ro- 
mani,  gi-aviter  commoti,  sacra  crebra  dels  faciebant  et  salutem  petebant. 

Turn  Manlius  Qr§tor  animSs  populi  ita  confirmavit :  —  "  Magnam  5 
calamitatem  accepimus.  Oppida  nostra  a  Cimbris  Teutonibusque 
capiuntur,  agricolae  interficiuntur,  agri  vastantur,  copiae  barbarorum 
Romae  adpropinquant.  Itaque,  nisi  novis  animis  proelium  novum 
faciemus  et  Germanos  ex  patria  nostra  sine  mora  agemus,  erit  nulla 
salus  feminis  nostris  liberisque.  Servate  liberos  1  Servate  patriam !  10 
Antea  superati  sumus  quia  imperStores  nostri  fuerunt  infirml.  Nunc 
Marius,  clarus  imperator,  qui  iam  multas  alias  victorias  reportavit, 
legiones  ducet  ct  animos  nostros  terrore  Cimbrico  liberare  maturabit." 

Marius  tum  in  Africa  bellum  gerebat.  Sine  mora  ex  Africa  in 
Italiam  vocatus  est.  Copias  novas  non  solum  toti  Italiae  sed  etiam  15 
prOvinciis  sociOrum  imperavit*  Disciplina  autem  dura  labOribusque 
perpetuis  milites  exercuit.  Tum  cum  peditibus  equitibusque,  qui  iam 
proelio  studebant,  ad  Germanorum  castra  celeriter  properavit.  Diu  et 
Scriter  pugn§tum  est.*  Denique  barbari  fuggrunt  et  multi  in  fugS  ab 
equitibus  sunt  interfectl.    Marius  pater  patriae  vocatus  est.  20 

*  About  the  year  100  B.C.  the  Romans  were  greatly  alarmed  by  an  invasion 
of  barbarians  from  the  north  known  as  Cimbri  and  Teutons.  They  were  travel- 
ing with  wives  and  children,  and  had  an  army  of  300,000  fighting  men.  Several 
Roman  armies  met  defeat,  and  the  city  was  in  a  panic.  Then  the  Senate  called 
upon  Marius,  their  greatest  general,  to  save  the  country.  First  he  defeated  the 
Teutons  in  Gaul.  Next,  returning  to  Italy,  he  met  the  Cimbri.  A  terrible  battle 
ensued,  in  which  the  Cimbri  were  utterly  destroyed ;  but  the  terror  Cimbricus 
continued  to  haunt  the  Romans  for  many  a  year  thereafter.  *  He  made  a 
ievy  (of  troops)  upon,  imperftvit  with  the  ace.  and  the  dat         *  Cf.  %  200.  n.  2. 


io8 


THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  /-STEMS 


LESSON   XLIII 
THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  /-STEMS 

241.  To  decline  a  noun  of  the  third  declension  correctly  we  must 
know  whether  or  not  it  is  an  i-stem.    Nouns  with  i-stems  are 

1 .  Masculines  and  f  eminines  : 

a.  Nouns  in  -es  and  -is  with  the  same  number  of  syllables  in  the  genitive 
as  in  the  nominative.  Thus  caedes,  caedis,  is  an  i-stem,  but  miles,  militis, 
is  a  consonant  stem. 

b.  Nouns  in  -ns  and  -rs. 

c.  Nouns  of  one  syllable  in  -s  or  -x  preceded  by  a  consonant 

2.  Neuters  in  -e,  -al,  and  -ar. 

242.  The  declension  of  i-stems  is  nearly  the  same  as  that  of  con- 
sonant stems.    Note  the  following  differences : 

a.  Masculines  and  feminines  have  -ium  in  the  genitive  plural  and  -is  or 
-es  in  the  accusative  plural. 

b.  Neuters  have  -i  in  the  ablative  singular,  and  an  -1-  in  every  form  of. 
the  plural. 

243.  Masculine  and  Feminine  /-Stems.  Masculine  and  feminine  i- 
stems  are  declined  as  follows : 


caedes,  f., 

hostis,  m. 

,      urbs,  f., 

cliens,  m., 

slaughter 

enemy 

city 

Tetainer 

Stems 

caedi- 

hosti- 

urbi- 

clienti- 

Bases 

caed- 

host- 

urb- 

SlNGULAR 

client- 

TERMINATIONS 
M.  AND  F. 

Norn. 

caedes 

hostis 

urbs 

cliens  ^ 

-s,  -is,  <7/--es 

Gen. 

caedis 

hostis 

urbis 

clientis 

-is 

Dat. 

caedi 

hosti 

urbi 

clienti 

-i 

Ace. 

caedem 

hostem 

urbem 

clientem 

-em  (-im) 

AbL 

caede 

hoste 

urbe 

clientc 

-«(-i) 

1  Observe  that  the  vowel  before  -ns  is  long,  but  that  it  is  shortened  before 
-nt.  Cf.  §12.2,3. 


THE 

THIRD  DECLENSION  •  /-STEMS 

109 

Plural 

TERMINATIONS 
M.  AND  F. 

Norn. 

caedSs 

hostCs 

urb€s 

clientCs 

-«s 

Gen. 

caedinm 

hostium 

urbium 

clientium 

-ium 

Dat. 

caedibus 

hostibus 

urbibus 

clientibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

caedis,  -Ss 

hostis,  -Ss 

urbis,  -Ss 

clientis,  -8s 

-is,  -€S 

Abl. 

caedibus 

hostibus 

urbibus 

clientibus 

-ibus 

1.  avis,  civis,  finis,  ignis,  navis  have  the  ablative  singular  in  -i  or  -e. 

2.  turris  has  accusative  tunim  and  ablative  turri  or  turre. 

244.  Neuter  /-Stems.    Neuter  i-stems  are  declined  as  follows : 


insigne,  n., 

animal,  n., 

calcar,  n., 

decoraticn 

animal 

spur 

Stems 

insigni- 

animali- 

caldri- 

Bases 

insign- 

SlNGULAR 

calcar- 

TERMINATIONS 

Norn. 

Tnsigne 

animal 

calcar 

-^or  — 

Gen, 

insignis 

animalis 

calciria 

-is 

Dat, 

Insigni 

animali 

calcari 

-i 

Ace. 

Tnsigfne 

animal 

calcar 

-tor— 

Abl. 

Insigni 

animali 

Plural 

calcari 

-i 

Norn. 

insignia 

animalU 

calcaria 

-ia 

Gen. 

Tnsignium 

animalium 

calcarium 

-ium 

Dat. 

Insignibus 

animalibus 

calcaribus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

insignia 

animalia 

calcaria 

-ia 

Abl. 

insignibus 

animalibus 

calcaribus 

-ibus 

I. 

Review  §  74  and 

see  how  it  applies  to  this  declension. 

2. 

The  final  -i-  of  the  stem  is  usually  droi 

3ped  in  the  nominative.    If  not 

dropped,  it  is  changed  to  -e. 

3.  A  long  vowel  is  shortened  before  final  -1  or  -r.   (Cf.  §  12.  2.) 

245.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  292. 

I.   I .  Quam  urbem  videmus  t  Urbs quam  videtis  est  RQma.  2.  ClvCs 
KomanI   urbem   suam   turribus   altis   et  mflris   longis  mOnlverant. 

3.  Venti  nSvis  longSs  prohibebant  finibus  hostium  adpropinqu§re. 

4.  Imperator  a  clientibus  suis  calcaria  auri  et  alia  insignia  accgpit. 

5.  MilitSs  Roman!  cum  hostibus  bella  saeva  gessarunt  et  eOs  caede 


no 


EXERCISES 


magna  superaverunt.  6.  Alia  animalia  terram,  alia  mare  amant. 
7.  Naves  longae  quae  auxilium  ad  imperatorem  portabant  igni  ab 
hostibus  deletae  sunt.  8.  In  eo  mar!  avis  multas  vidimus  quae  longg 
a  terra  volaverant.  9.  Nonne  vidistis  navis  longas  hostium  et  ignis 
quibus  urbs  nostra  vastabatur?  Certe,  sed  nee  caedem  civium  nee 


NAVES   LONGAE 

fugam  clientium  vidimus.  10.  Aves  et  alia  animalia,  ubi  ignem  vide- 
runt,  salutem  fuga  petere  celeriter  inceperunt.  11.  Num  iudex  in 
peditum  ordinibus  stabat  ?  Minime,  iudex  erat  apud  equites  et  equus 
eius  insigne  pulchrum  gerebat. 

II.  I.  Because  of  the  lack  of  grain  the  animals  of  the  village  were 
not  able  to  live.  2.  When  the  general  ^  heard  the  rumor,  he  quickly 
sent  a  horseman  to  the  village.  3.  The  horseman  had  a  beautiful 
horse  and  wore  spurs  of  gold.  4.  He  said  to  the  citizens,  "  Send 
your  retainers  with  horses  and  wagons  to  our  camp,  and  you  will 
receive  an  abundance  of  grain."  5.  With  happy  hearts  they  hastened 
to  obey  his  words.'^ 

1  Place  first.         2  jsjot  the  accusative.    Why  ? 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS • GENDER 


III 


LESSON   XLIV 

IRREGULAR  NOUNS  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  GENDER  IN 
THE  THIRD  DECLENSION 

246. 


PARADIGMS 

vis,  i.,  force 

iter,  n.,  march 

Bases 

vi-  and  vir- 

Singular 

iter-  and  itiner- 

Norn. 

vis 

iter 

Gen. 

VIS  (rare) 

itineria 

Dat. 

vT  (rare) 

idneri 

Ace. 

vim 

iter 

Abl. 

VI 

Plural 

itinere 

Norn. 

vTrJs 

itinera 

Gen. 

virium 

itinerum 

Dat. 

vlribus 

itineribus 

Ace. 

vTris,  or  -es 

itinera 

Abl: 

vlribus 

itineribus 

247.  There  are  no  rules  for  gender  in  the  third  declension  that  do 
not  present  numerous  exceptions.*  The  following  rules,  however,  are 
of  great  service,  and  should  be  thoroughly  mastered : 

1 .  Ifasculine  are  nouns  in  -or,  -Os,  -er,  -«8  (gen.  -itis). 
a.  arbor,  tree^  is  feminine ;  and  iter,  march^  is  neuter. 

2.  Feminine  are  nouns  in  -0,  -is,  -x,  and  in  -s  preceded  by  a  con- 
sonant or  by  any  long  vowel  but  0. 

a.  Masculine  are  collis  (/////),  lapis,  xslIvoSa  {month),  6rd6,  pes,  and  nouns 
in  -nis  and  -guia  —  as  ignis,  sanguis  {blood)  —  and  the  four  monosyllables 

dins,  a  tooth  ;  m6ns,  a  mountain 
pOns,  a  bridge;  fSns,  a  fountain 

3.  Neuters  are  nouns  in  -e,  -al,  -ar,  -n,  -ur,  -tts,  and  caput. 

1  Review  §  60.  Words  denoting  males  are,  of  course,  masculine,  and  those 
denoting  females,  feminine. 


112  EXERCISES 

248.   Give  the  gender  of  the  following  nouns  and  the  rule  by  vvhich 
it  is  determined : 


animal 

calamitas 

flumen 

lapis 

navis 

avis 

caput 

ignis 

legio 

opus 

caedes 

eques 

insigne 

mare 

salus 

calcar 

finis 

labor 

miles 

urbs 

249.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  292. 

I.  The  First  Bridge  over  the  Rhine.  Salus  sociorum  erat  semper  cara 
Romanis.  Olim  Galli,  amici  Romanorum,  multas  iniurias  ab  Germanis 
qui  trans  flumen  Rhenum  vivebant  acceperant.  Ubi  legatl  ab  iis  ad 
Caesarem  imperatorem  Romanum  venerunt  et  auxilium  postulaverunt, 

5  Roman!  magnis  itineribus  ad  hostium  finis  properaverunt.  Mox  ad 
ripas  magni  fluminis  venerunt.  Imperator  studebat  copias  suas  trans 
fluvium  ducere,  sed  nulla  via  ^  poterat.  NuUas  navis  habebat.  Alta 
erat  aqua.  Imperator  autem,  vir  clarus,  numquam  adversa  fortuna 
commotus,  novum  consilium  cepit.   lussit  suos^  in®  lato  fliimjne  facere 

[o  pontem.  Numquam  antea  pons  in  Rheno  visus  erat.  'Hostes  pbi  pon- 
tem  quem  Roman!  fecerant  viderunt,  summo  terrore  commoti,  sine 
mora  fugam  parare  inceperunt. 

II.  I.  The  enemy  had  taken  (possession  of)  the  top  of  the  moun- 
tain. 2.  There  were  many  trees  on  the  opposite  hills.  3.  We  pitched 
our  camp  near  (ad)  a  beautiful  spring.  4.  A  march  through  the  ene- 
mies' country  is  never  without  danger.  5.  The  time  of  the  month 
was  suitable  for  the  march.  6.  The  teeth  of  the  monster  were  long. 
7.  When  the  foot  soldiers*  saw  the  blood  of  the  captives,  they  began 
to  assail  the  fortifications  with  the  greatest  violence.^ 

^  Abl.  of  manner.  2  suSs^  used  as  a  noun,  his  men.  ^  We  say  bttila 
a  bridge  over;  the  Romans,  make  a  bridge  on.         *  Place  first. 


Fifth  Review,  Lessons  XXXVU-XLIV,  §§  517-520 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION      113 

LESSON   XLV 
ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  •  /-STEMS 

250.  Adjectives  are  either  of  the  first  and  second  declensions  (like 
bonus,  aeger,  or  liber),  or  they  are  of  the  third  declension. 

251.  Nearly  all  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  i-stems^  and 
they  are  declined  almost  like  nouns  with  i-stems. 

252.  Adjectives  learned  thus  far  have  had  a  different  form  in  the 
nominative  for  each  gender,  as,  bonus,  m. ;  bona,  f. ;  bonum,  n.  Such 
an  adjective  is  called  an  adjective  of  three  endings.  Adjectives  of  the 
third  declension  are  of  the  following  classes : 

I.  Adjectives  of  three  endings  — 

a  different  form  in  the  nominative  for  each  gender. 
II.  Adjectives  of  two  endings  — 

masculine  and  feminine  nominative  alike,  the  neuter  different. 
III.  Adjectives  of  one  ending  — 

masculine,  feminine,  and  neuter  nominative  all  alike. 

253.  Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  in  -er  have  three  endings ; 
those  in  -is  have  two  endings ;  the  others  have  one  ending. 

CLASS  I 

254.  Adjectives  of  Three  Endings  are  declined  as  follows : 


icer 

,  icris,  acre, 

keen,  eager 

Stem  icri- 

Base  icr- 

SlNGULAR 

Plural 

MASC 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NBUT. 

Nom. 

acer 

icris 

acre 

acr«8 

acrSa 

acria 

Gen. 

icria 

icris 

acria 

aoium 

acriam 

acrium 

Pat. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

aoibna 

acribua 

acribua 

Aci. 

acrem 

acrem 

acre 

acrii, -te 

acris, -Ss 

acria 

Abl. 

icri 

ftcri 

acri 

acribuf 

acribua 

acribua 

114      ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION 

CLASS  II 

255.  Adjectives  of  Two  Endings  are  declined  as  follows : 

omnis,  omne,  every ^  all^ 
Stem  oinni-  Base  omn- 


Singular 

Plural 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

Norn. 

omnis 

omne 

omnes 

omnia 

Gen. 

omnis 

omnis 

omnium 

omnium 

Dat. 

omni 

omni 

omnibus 

omnibus 

Ace. 

omnem 

omne 

omnis,  -es 

omnia 

Abl. 

omni 

omni 

• 
CLASS 

III 

omnibus 

omnibus 

256.  Adjectives  of  One  Ending  are  declined  as  follows : 
par,  equal 


Stem 

pari- 

Base 

par- 

Singular 

Plural 

MASC  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom.     par 

par 

pares 

paria 

Gen.       paris 

paris 

parium 

parium 

Dat.       pari 

pari 

paribus 

paribus 

Ace.       parem 

par 

paris,  -es 

paria 

Abl.       pari 

pari 

paribus 

paribus 

1.  All  i-stem  adjectives  have  -i  in  the  ablative  singular. 

2.  Observe  that  the  several  cases  of  adjectives  of  one  ending  have  the 
same  form  for  all  genders  excepting  in  the  accusative  singular  and  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative  plural. 

3.  Decline  vir  acer,  legi5  acris,  animal  acre,  ager  omnis,  sciitum  omne, 
proelium  par. 

257.  There  are  a  few  adjectives  of  one  ending  that  have  consonant 
stems.    They  are  declined  exactly  like  nouns  with  consonant  stems. 

1  omnis  is  usually  translated  every  in  the  singular  and  all  in  the  plural. 


EXERCISES  115 

258.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  293. 

I.  The  Romans  invade  the  Enemy's  Country.  Olim  pedites  RQmani 
cum  equitibus  velocibus  in  hostium  urbem  iter  faciebant.  Ubi  non 
longe  afu€runt,  rapuerunt  agricolam,  qui  eis  viam  brevem  et  facilem 
demonstravit.  lam  RomanI  moenia  alta,  turns  validas  aliaque  opera 
urbis  videre  poterant.  In  moenibus  stabant  mult!  principes.  Principes  5 
ubi  viderunt  Romanes,  iusserunt  civis  lapides  aliaque  tela  de  muris 
iacere.  Tum  milites  fortes  contineri  a  proelio  non  poterant  et  Seer 
imperator  signum  tuba  dari  iussit.  Summa  vi  omnes  properaverunt. 
Imperator  Sexto  legato  impedimenta  omnia  mandavit.  Sextus  impe- 
dimenta in  summo  colle  conlocavit.  Grave  et  acre  erat  proelium,  sed  10 
hostes  non  pares  Romanis  erant.  Alii  interfecti,  alii  capti  sunt.  Apud 
captivos  erant  mater  sororque  regis.  PaucI  Romanorum  ab  hostibus 
vulnerati  sunt.  Secundum  proelium  Romanis  erat  gratum.  Fortuna 
fortibus  semper  favet. 

II.  I.  Some  months  are  short,  others  are  long.  2.  To  seize  the 
top  of  the  mountain  was  difficult.  3.  Among  the  hills  of  Italy  are 
many  beautiful  springs.  4.  The  soldiers  were  sitting  where  the  bag- 
gage had  been  placed  because  their  feet  were  weary.  5.  The  dty 
which  the  soldiers  were  eager  to  storm  had  been  fortified  by  strong 
walls  and  high  towers.  6.  Did  not  the  king  intrust  a  heavy  crown 
of  gold  and  all  his  money  to  a  faithless  slave?  Yes,  but  the  slave 
had  never  before  been  faithless. 


AQUILA   LEGIONS 


Il6  THE  FOURTH  OR   ^-DECLENSION 

LESSON   XLVI 
THE  FOURTH  OR  J7-DECLENSI0N 

259.  Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  are  either  masculine  or  neuter. 

260.  Masculine  nouns  end  in  -us,  neuters  in  -u.   The  genitive  ends 
in  -us. 

a.  Feminine  by  exception  are  domus,   house;   manus,  hand ;   and  a 
few  others. 

PARADIGMS 

adventus,  m.,  arrival  comu,  n.,  horn 


Bases 

advent- 

corn- 

SlNGULAR 

TERMINATIONS 
MASC.                   NEUT. 

Nom. 

adventus 

comu 

-US 

-u 

Gen. 

adventus 

comijs 

-US 

-us 

Dat. 

adventui  (u) 

comu 

-ui  (u) 

-u 

Ace. 

adventum 

cornu 

-um 

-u 

AM. 

adventu 

comu 
Plural 

-u 

-u 

Nom. 

adventus 

comua 

-us 

-ua 

Gen. 

adventuum 

cornuum 

-uum 

-uum 

Dat. 

adventibus 

comibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

adventus 

cornua 

-us 

-ua 

AM. 

adventibus 

cornibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

1.  Observe  that  the  base  is  found,  as  in  other  declensions,  by  dropping 
the  ending  of  the  genitive  singular. 

2.  lacus,  lake,  has  the  ending  -ubus  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural ; 
portus,  harbor,  has  either  -ubus  or  -ibus. 

3.  comu  is  the  only  neuter  that  is  in  common  use. 

261.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  293. 

I.  I.  Ante  adventum  Caesaris  veloces  hostium  equites  acrem 
impetum  in  castra  fecerunt.  2.  Continere  exercitum  a  proelio  non 
facile  erat.    3.  Post  adventum  suum  Caesar  iussit  legiones  ex  castris 


EXPRESSIONS  OF  PLACE  II7 

duci.  4.  Pro  castris  cum  hostium  equitdtQ  pugn^tum  est  5.  Post 
tempus  breve  equitatus  trans  flumen  fugit  ubi  castra  hostium  posita 
erant.  6.  Tum  victor  imperator  agros  vastavit  et  vicOs  hostium  cre- 
mSvit.  7.  Castra  autem  n5n  oppugnSvit  quia  mllitgs  erant  defessl 
et  locus  difficilis.  8.  Hostes  non  cessaverunt  iacere  tela,  quae  paucis 
nocuerunt.  9.  Post  adversum  proelium  principes  Gallonim  legStos  ad 
Caesarem  mittere  studebant,  sed  populo  persuadere  non  poterant. 

II.  1.  Did  you  see  the  man-of-war  on  the  lake?  2.  I  did  not  see 
it  {fern.)  on  the  lake,  but  I  saw  it  in  the  harbor.  3.  Because  of 
the  strong  wind  the  sailor  forbade  his  brother  to  sail.  4.  Caesar 
didn't  make  an  attack  on  the  cavalry  on  the  right  wing,  did  he? 
5.  No,  he  made  an  attack  on  the  left  wing.  6.  Who  taught  your 
swift  horse  to  obey?  7.  I  trained  my  horse  with  my  (own)  hands, 
nor  was  the  task  difficult.  8.  He  is  a  beautiful  animal  and  has  great 
strength. 

LESSON   XLVII 

EXPRESSIONS  OF  PLACE  •  THE  DECLENSION  OF  DOMUS 

262.  We  have  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  expressions  like  the 

followmg  :  Q^y^  ^^  ^^^  .^-^  oppidum  properat 

Galba  ab  (dc  or  ex)  oppid5  properat 
Golba  in  oppid5  habitat 

From  these  expressions  we  may  deduce  the  following  rules : 

263.  Rule.  Accusative  of  the  Place  to.  77/^  place  to  which  is 
expressed  by  ad  or  in  with  the  accusative.  This  answers  the 
question  Whither? 

264.  Rule.  Ablative  of  the  Place  from.  The  place  from  which  is 
expressed  by  a  or  ab,  de,  i  or  ex,  with  the  separative  ablative. 
This  answers  the  question  Whence  ?   (Cf .  Rule,  §  1 79.) 

265.  Rule.  Ablative  of  the  Place  at  or  in.  The  place  at  or  in 
which  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  with  in.  This  answers  the 
question  Where  f 


Il8  EXPRESSIONS  OF  PLACE 

a.  The  ablative  denoting  the  place  where  is  called  the  locative  ablative 
(cf.  locus,  place). 

266.  Exceptions.  Names  of  towns,  small  islands,^  domus,  home, 
rus,  country,  and  a  few  other  words  in  common  use  omit  the  prepo- 
sitions in  expressions  of  place,  as, 

Galba  Athenas  properat,  Galba  hastens  to  Athens 
Galba  Athenis  properat,  Galba  hastens  fro7n  Athens 
Galba  Athenis  habitat,  Galba  lives  at  (or  in)  Athens 
Galba  domum  properat,  Galba  hastens  home 
Galba  riis  properat,  Galba  hastens  to  the  country 
Galba  dom5  properat,  Galba  hast etis  from  home 
Galba  rure  properat,  Galba  hastens  from  the  country 
Galba  ruri  (less  commonly  riire)  habitat,  Galba  lives  in 
the  country 

a.  Names  of  countries,  like  Germania,  Italia,  etc.,  do  not  come  under 
these  exceptions.    With  them  prepositions  must  not  be  omitted. 

267.  The  Locative  Case.  We  saw  above  that  the  place-relation  ex- 
pressed by  at  or  in  is  regularly  covered  by  the  locative  ablative.  How- 
ever, Latin  originally  expressed  this  relation  by  a  separate  form  known 
as  the  locative  case.  This  case  has  been  everywhere  merged  in  the  abla- 
tive excepting  in  the  singular  number  of  the  first  and  second  declen- 
sions. The  form  of  the  locative  in  these  declensions  is  like  the  genitive 
singular,  and  its  use  is  limited  to  names  of  towns  and  small  islands, 
domi,  at  home,  and  a  few  other  words. 

^68.  Rule.  Locative  and  Locative  Ablative.  To  express  the  place 
in  which  with  names  of  towns  and  small  islands,  if  they  are  sin- 
gular and  of  the  first  or  second  declension,  use  the  locative;  otherwise 
use  the  locative  ablative  without  a  prepositio7i ;  as, 

Galba  Romae  habitat,  Galba  lives  at  Rome 
Galba  Corinthi  habitat,  Galba  lives  at  Corinth . 
Galba  domi  habitat,  Galba  lives  at  home 

'  Small  islands  are  classed  with  towns  because  they  generally  have  but  one 
town,  and  the  name  of  the  town  is  the  same  as  the  name  of  the  island. 


DOMUS  119 

Here  R5mae,  Corinthi,  and  domi  arc  locatives,  being  singular  and  of  the 
first  and  second  declensions  respectively.    But  in 

Galba  Athenis  habitat,  Galba  lives  at  Athens, 
Galba  Pompeiis  habitat,  Galba  lives  at  Pompeii 

Athenis  and  Pompeiis  are  locative  ablatives.  These  words  can  have  no 
locative  case,  as  the  nominatives  Athenae  and  Pompeii  are//«nz/and  there 
is  no  plural  locative  case  form. 

269.  The  word  domus,  home,  house,  has  forms  of  both  the  second 
and  the  fourth  declension.    Learn  its  declension  (§  468). 


270.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,"  p.  293. 

I.  I.  Corinthi  omnia  insignia  auri  a  ducibus  victoribus  rapta  erant. 
2.  Caesar  Genavam  exercitum  magnis  itineribus  duxit.  3.  Quern  pon- 
tem  hostes  cremaverant?  Pontem  in  Rheno  hostes  cremaverant. 
4.  Pompeiis  multas  Romanorum  demos  videre  poteritis.  5.  Roma 
cOnsul  equ5  veloci  rus  properavit.  6.  Domi  consulis  homines  multi 
sedebant.  7.  Imperator  iusserat  legatum  Athgnas  cum  multis  nSvibus 
longis  navigare.    8.  Ante  moenia  urbis  sunt  Ordines  arborum  altarum. 

9.  Propter  arborcs  altas  ncc  lacum  nee  portum  reperire  potuimus. 

10.  Proeliis  crebris  Caesar  legiones  suas  quae  erant   in  Gallia  ex- 
ercebat,    11.  Cotidig   in   loco   idoneo   castra   ponebat   et   muniebat 

II.  1.  Caesar,  the  famous  general,  when  he  had  departed  from 
Rome,  hastened  to  the  Roman  province  on  a  swift  horse.*  2.  He  had 
heard  a  rumor  concerning  the  allies  at  Geneva.  3.  After  his  arrival 
Caesar  called  the  soldiers  together  and  commanded  them  to  join  battle. 
4.  The  enemy  hastened  to  retreat,  some  because  *  they  were  afraid, 
others  because*  of  wounds.  5.  Recently  I  was  at  Athens  and  saw 
the  place  where  the  judges  used  to  sit.*  6.  Marcus  and  Sextus  are  my 
brothers ;  the  one  lives  at  Rome,  the  other  in  the  country. 

»  Latin  says  "  by  a  swift  horse."  What  construction  ?  *  Distinguish  be- 
tween the  English  conjunction  because  (quia  or  quod)  and  the  preposition 
because  ^(propter).        *  mc-:  A-  sit,  express  by  the  imperfect 


DAEDALUS    ET   ICARUS 


^•_^ 


J  20 


THE  FIFIH  OR  ^-DECLENSION  12I 

271.  Daed'alus  and  Ic'arus 

Creta  est  Insula  antiqua  quae  aqua  alta  magni  maris  pulsatur.  Ibi 
6lim  Min5s  erat  r€x.  Ad  cum  venit  Daedalus  qui  ex  Graecia  patria 
fugiSbat.  Eum  Minos  rex  benignis  verbis  accepit  et  ei  domicilium  in 
Creta  dedit.  ^  Quo  in  loco  Daedalus  sine  cur5  vivebat  et  regl  multa 
et  clara  opera  faciebat.  Post  tempus  longum  autem  Daedalus  patriam  5 
caram  desiderare  incepit  Domum  properare  studebat,  sed  regi  per- 
suadere  n6n  potuit  et  mare  saevum  fugam  vetabat. 

LESSON   XLVIII 

THE  FIFTH  OR  JF-DECLENSION  •  THE  ABLATIVE  OF  TIME 

272.  Gender.  Nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  are  feminine  except 
digs,  day^  and  meridiSs,  midday^  which  are  usually  masculine. 

273. 


paradigms 

dies,  m. 

,  day                res,  f.,  thing 

Bases 

di- 

r- 

SlNGULAR 

TERMINATIONS 

Norn. 

dies 

fit 

•«8 

Gen. 

diei 

I^ 

-ii 

Dat. 

difi 

re! 

^ 

Ace. 

diem 

rem 

-em 

Abl. 

die 

Plural 

'        -€ 

Norn. 

diis 

rSs 

-€8 

Gen. 

dierum 

rSmm 

-erum 

Dat. 

diebus 

ribns 

-ebus 

Ace. 

diSs 

res 

-«8 

Abl. 

diibus 

rSbus 

-fbus 

^  And  in  thii  place ;  quo  does  not  here  introduce  a  subordinate  relative 
clause,  but  establishes  the  connection  with  the  preceding  sentence.  Such  a 
relative  is  called  a  connecting  relative^  and  is  translated  by  and  and  a  demon- 
strative or  personal  pronoun. 


122  ABLATIVE  OF  TIME 

1.  The  vowel  e  which  appears  in  every  form  is  regularly  long.  It  is 
shortened  in  the  ending  -ei  after  a  consonant,  as  in  r-ei;  and  before  -m 
in  the  accusative  singular,  as  in  di-em.  (Cf .  §  1 2.  2.) 

2.  Only  dies  and  res  are  complete  in  the  plural.  Most  other  nouns  of 
this  declension  lack  the  plural.  Acies,  line  of  battle,  and  spes,  hope,  have 
the  nominative  and  accusative  plural. 

274.  The  ablative  relation  (§  50)  which  is  expressed  by  the  prep- 
ositions at,  in,  or  071  may  refer  not  only  to  place,  but  also  to  time, 
as  at  noon,  in  summer,  on  the  first  day.  The  ablative  which  is  used 
to  express  this  relation  is  called  the  ablative  of  time. 

275.  Rule.  The  Ablative  of  Time.  The  ti7ne  when  or  within 
which  anytlmig  happens  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition. 

a.  Occasionally  the  preposition  in  is  found.  Compare  the  English  Next 
day  we  started  and  On  the  next  day  we  started. 

276.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  294. 

I.  Galba  the  Farmer.  Galba  agricola  run  vivit.  Cotidie  prima  luce 
laborare  incipit,  nee  ante  noctem  in  studio  suo  cessat.  Meridie  lulia 
filia  eum  ad  cenam  vocat.  Nocte  pedes  defessos  domum  vertit. 
Aestate  filii  agricolae  auxilium  patri  dant.  Hieme  agricola  eos  in 
ludum  mittit.  lb;  magister  pueris  multas  fabulas  de  rebus  gestis 
Caesaris  narrat.  Aestate  filii  agricolae  perpetuis  laboribus  exercentur 
nee  grave  agri  opus  est  iis  molestum.  Galba  sine  ulla  cura  vivit  nee 
res  adversas  timet. 

II.  I.  In  that  month  there  were  many  battles  in  Gaul.  2.  The  cav- 
alry of  the  enemy  made  an  attack  upon  Caesar's  line  of  battle.  3.  In 
the  first  hour  of  the  night  the  ship  was  overcome  by  the  billows.  4.  On 
the  second  day  the  savages  were  eager  to  come  under  Caesar's  pro- 
tection. 5.  The  king  had  joined  battle,  moved  by  the  hope  of  victory. 
6.  That  year  a  fire  destroyed  many  birds  and  other  animals.  7.  We 
saw  blood  on  the  wild  beast's  teeth. 


PRONOUNS  CLASSIFIED  1 23 

277.  Daed'alus  am.   h  arus  (Continued) 

Turn  Daedalus  gravibus  curis  commOtus  filiOsuS  icar5  ita  dixit: 
"  Animus  meus,  Icare,  est  plenus  tristitiae  nee  ocull  lacrimis  egent. 
I  )iscedere  ex  Creta,  Athcnas  proper§re,  maxime  studeo ;  sed  rex  re- 
t  Cisat  audire  verba  mea  et  omnem  reditus  spem  eripit.  Sed  numquam 
rebus  adversis  vincar.  Terra  et  mare  sunt  inimica,  sed  aliam  fugae  s 
viam  reperiam."  Turn  in  artis  ighotas  animum  dimittit  et  mirum 
capit  consilium.    Nam  pennas  in  Qrdine  ponit  et  v€ras  alas  fadt. 

LESSON   XLIX 

PRONOUNS  CLASSIFIED  •  PERSONAL  AND  REFLEXIVE 
PRONOUNS 

278.  We  have  the  same  kinds  of  pronouns  in  Latin  as  in  English. 
They  are  divided  into  the  following  eight  classes : 

1.  Personal  pronouns,  which  show  the  person  speaking,  spoken  to, 
or  spoken  of;  as,  ego,  /;  t%  you ;  is,  he.   (Cf.  §  279,  etc.) 

2.  Possessive  pronouns,  which  denote  possession;  as,  meus,  tuus, 
8UU8,  etc.    (Cf.  §  98.) 

3.  Reflexive  pronouns,  used  in  the  predicate  to  refer  back  to  the 
subject ;  as,  he  saw  himself.    (Cf.  §  281.) 

4.  Intensive  pronouns,  used  to  emphasize  a  noun  or  pronoun ;  as, 
I  myself  saw  it.    (Cf.  §  285.) 

5.  Demonstrative  pronouns,  which  point  out  persons  or  things ;  as, 
is,  this,  that.    (Cf.  i  112.) 

6.  Relative  pronouns,  which  connect  a  subordinate  adjective  clause 
with  an  antecedent ;  as,  qui,  who.    (("f.  §  220.) 

7.  Interrogative  pronouns,  which  ask  a  question;  as,  quia,  who^ 
(Cf.  §  225.) 

8.  Indefinite  pronouns,  which  point  out  indefinitely ;  as,  some  one, 
any  one,  some,  certain  ones,  etc.   (Cf 

279.  The  demonstrative  pronoun  is,  ea,  id,  as  we  learned  in  §  115, 
is  regularly  used  as  the  personal  pronoun  of  the  third  person  (he,  she, 
it,  they,  etc.). 


124        PERSONAL  AND  REFLEXIVE  PRONOUNS 

280.  The  personal  pronouns  of  the  first  person  are  ego,  I;  nos,  we; 
of  the  second  person,  tu,  thou  or  you ;  vos,  ye  or  you.  They  are 
declined  as  follows : 

Singular 
first  person  second  person 

Nam.     ego,  /  tu,  you 

Gen.      mei,  of  me  tui,  of  you 

Dat.      mihi,  to  or  for  me  tibi,  to  ox  for  you 

Ace.       me,  me  te,you 

AM.       me,  with^from^  etc.,  me  te,  with,  from,  etc.,  you 

Plural 
Nom.     n5s,  we  vos,  you 

Gen.      nostrum  or  nostri,  of  us         vestrum  or  vestri,  of  you 
Dat.       nobis,  to  ox  for  us  v5bis,  to  ox  for  you 

Ace.       nos,  us  vos,  you 

AM.       nobis,  with,  from,  etc.,  us      vobis,  with,  from,  etc.,  you 

1.  The  personal  pronouns  are  not  used  in  the  nominative  excepting  for 
emphasis  or  contrast. 

281.  The  Reflexive  Pronouns,  i.  The  personal  pronouns  ego  and 
tu  may  be  used  in  the  predicate  as  reflexives ;  as, 

video  me,  /  see  myself  videmus  nos,  we  see  ourselves 

vides  te,  you  see  yourself  videtis  vos,  you  see  yourselves 

2.  The  reflexive  pronoun  of  the  third  person  {himself,  herself,  itself 
themselves^  has  a  special  form,  used  only  in  these  senses,  and  declined 
alike  in  the  singular  and  plural. 

Singular  and  Plural 
Gen.   sui  Ace.   se 

Dat.   sibi  AM.   se 


Examples- 


Puer  se  videt,  the  boy  sees  hiynself 
Puella  se  videt,  the  girl  sees  herself 
Animal  se  videt,  the  animal  sees  itself 
li  se  vident,  they  see  themselves 


a.  The  form  se  is  sometimes  doubled,  sese,  for  emphasis. 


CC/MV/ITH  PRONOUNS  1 25 

3.  Give  the  Latin  for 

/  feacA  myself  We  teach  ourselves 

You  teach  yourself  You  teach  yourselves 

He  teaches  himself  They  teach  themselves 

282.  The  preposition  cum,  when  used  with  the  ablative  of  ego,  tfl, 
ex  8ui,  is  appended  to  the  form,  as,  mecum,  with  me;  tecum,  with  you ; 
nSbiscum,  with  us;  etc. 

283.  EXERCISES 
First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  294. 

I.  I.  Mea  mater  est  cara  mihi  et  tua  mater  est  cara  tibi.  2.  Vestrae 
litterae  erant  gratae  nobis  et  nostrae  litterae  erant  gratae  vobls. 
3.  Nuntius  rggis  qui  nobiscum  est  nihil  respondebit.  4.  Nuntii  pacem 
amicitiamque  sibi  et  suis  sociis  postulaverunt.  5.  Si  tu  arma  sumes, 
ego  regnum  occupabo.  6.  Uter  vestrum  est  civis  Romanus  .'*  Neuter 
nostrum.  7.  Eo  tempore  multi  supplicium  dederunt  quia  regnum 
petierant.  8.  Sume  supplicium,  Caesar,  de  hostibus  patriae  acribus. 
9.  Prima  luce  alii  metu  commoti  sese  fugae  mandaverunt;  alii 
autem  magna  virtute  impetum  exercitus  nostri  sustinuerunt.  10.  Soror 
regis,  ubi  de  adverso  proelio  audivit,  sese  Pompeiis  interfecit. 

II.  I.  Whom  do  you  teach?  I  teach  myself.  2.  The  soldier 
wounded  himself  with  his  sword.  3.  The  master  praises  us,  but  you 
he  does  not  praise.  4.  Therefore  he  will  inflict  punishment  on  you,  but 
we  shall  not  suffer  punishment.  5.  Who  will  march  (i.e.  make  a  march) 
with  me  to  Rome  ?  6.  I  will  march  with  you  to  the  gates  of  the  city. 
7.  Who  will  show  us  ^  the  way  ?   The  gods  will  show  you  *  the  way. 

Daed'alus  and  Ic'arus  {Concluded) 

284.  Puer  Icarus  una  *  stabat  et  mirum  patris  opus  videbat.  Post- 
quam  manus  ultima*  alis  imposita  est,  Daedalus  eSs  tempt§vit  et  similis 
avi  in  auras  volavit.  Tum  alas  umeris  fili  adligavit  et  docuit  eum  volare 
et  dixit,  "  Te  veto,  mi  fili,  adpropinquare  aut  s5li  aut  mari.  Si  fluctibus 
adpropinquaveris,*  aqua  alis  tuis  nocSbit,  et  si  s6li  adpropinquaveris,*  5 

*  Not  accusative.  *  Adverb,  see  vocabulary.  *  manna   nltima,  the 

finishing  touch.  What  literally  ?      *  Future  perfect.  Translate  by  the  present. 


126  THE  PRONOUNS  IPSE  AND  IDEM 

ignis  eas  cremabit."  Turn  pater  et  filius  iter  difficile  incipiunt.  Alas 
movent  et  aurae  sese  committunt.  Sed  stultus  puer  verbis  patris  non 
p5ret.  Soli  adpropinquat.  Alae  cremantur  et  Icarus  in  mare  decidit 
et  vltam  amittit.  Daedalus  autem  sine  uUo  periculo  trans  fluctus  ad 
5  insulam  Siciliam  volavit. 

LESSON  L 

THE  INTENSIVE  PRONOUN  IPSE  AND  THE  DEMON- 
STRATIVE IDEM 

285.  Ipse  means  -self  {himself,  herself,  etc.)  or  is  translated  by 
even  or  very.  It  is  used  to  emphasize  a  noun  or  pronoun,  expressed 
or  understood,  with  which  it  agrees  like  an  adjective. 

a.  Ipse  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  reflexive  sui.  The 
latter  is  always  used  as  a  pronoun,  while  ipse  is  regularly  adjective.    Compare 

Homo  se  videt,  the  man  sees  himself  (reflexive) 

Homo  ipse  periculum  videt,  the  man  himself  (intensive)  sees  the  danger 

Homo  ipsum  periculum  videt,  the  man  sees  the  danger  itself  (intensive) 

286.  Except  for  the  one  form  ipse,  the  intensive  pronoun  is  de- 
clined exactly  like  the  nine  irregular  adjectives  (cf.  §§  io8,  109). 
Learn  the  declension  (§  481). 

287.  The  demonstrative  idem,  meaning  the  same,  is  a  compound 
of  is.    It  is  declined  as  follows : 

Singular 
masc.         fem.  neut. 

Nom.  idem  e'adem  idem 

Gen.     eius^dem  eius'dem  eius'dem 

Dat.     ei'dem  ei'dem  ei'dem 

Ace.     eun'dem  ean'dem  idem 

Abl.     eo'dem      ea'dem      eo'dem         \  "7 ,,  -  ,,  ^tcM^^, 

[.els  dem        eis  dem        eis  dem 

a.  From  forms  like  eundem  (eum  +  -dem),  eorundem  (eonim  +  -dem), 
we  learn  the  rule  that  m  before  d  is  changed  to  n. 

b.  The  forms  iidem,  iisdem  are  often  spelled  and  pronounced  with  one  i. 


Plural 

MASC 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

'ii'dem 
^ei'dem 

eae'dem 

e'adem 

eorun'dem 

earun'dem 

eorun'dem 

fiis^dem 

iis'dem 

iis'dem 

i,  eis 'dem 

eis 'dem 

eis 'dem 

eos'dem 

eas 'dem 

e'adem 

f  iis'dem 

iis'dem 

iis'dem 

EXERCISES  127 

288.  EXERCISES 
First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  295. 

I .  I .  Ego  et  to  *  in  eSdem  urbe  vivimus.  2.  Iter  ipsum  n6n  timemus 
scd  leras  saevas  quae  in  silva  densa  esse  dicuntur.  3.  Olim  nos  ipsi 
idem  iter  fecimus.  4.  Eo  tempore  multas  feras  vidimus.  5.  Sed  nobis 
non  nocuerunt.  6.  Caesar  ipse  scutum  de  manibus  militis  eripuit  et 
in  ipsam  aciem  properavit.  7.  Itaque  milites  summa  virtute  tela  in  hos- 
tium  corpora  iecerunt.   8.  Roman!  quoque  gravia  vulnera  acceperunt. 

9.  Denique  hostes   terga  vert^runt   et   omnis   in  partis*   fugerunt. 

10.  Eadem  bora  litterae  Romam  ab  imperatore  ipso  missae  sunt. 

11.  Eodem  mense  captivi  quoque  iii  Italiam  miss!  sunt.  12.  Sed 
multi  propter  vulnera  iter  difficile  trans  monfis  facere  recusabant  et 
Genavae  esse  dicebantur. 

II.  I.  At  Pompeii  there  is  a  wonderful  mountain.  2.  When  I  was 
in  that  place,  I  myself  saw  that  mountain.  3.  On  the  same  day  many 
cities  were  destroyed  by  fire  and  stones  from  that  very  mountain. 

4.  You  have  not  heard  the  true  story  of  that  calamity,  have  you?* 

5.  On  that  day  the  very  sun  could  not  give  light  to  men.  6.  You 
yourself  ought  to  tell  (to)  us  that  story. 

289.  How    HORATIUS    HELD    THE    BrIDGE* 

Tarquinius  Superbus,  Septimus  et  ultimus  r€x  ROmanorum,  ubi  in 
cxsilium  ab  irStis  Romanis  eiectus  est,  a  Porsena,  rege  Etruscorum, 
auxilium  petiit.  Mox  Porsena  magnis  cum  copiis  Romam  v€nit,  et 
ipsa  urbs  summo  in  periculo  erat.  Omnibus  in  partibus  exercitus 
Romanus  victus  erat.  lam  rex  montem  laniculum'  occupaverat.  5 
Numquam  antea  Roman!  tanto  metu  tenebantur.  Ex  agris  in  urbem 
properabant  et  summQ  studio  urbem  ipsam  muniebant. 

1  Observe  that  in  Latin  we  say  I  and  you,  no\.  you  and  I.  •  "Not  parts, 
but  directions.  •  Cf.  §210.  *  The  story  of  Horatius  has  been  made 
familiar  by  Macaulay's  well-known  poem  "  Horatius  "  in  his  Lays  of  Ancient 
Rome.  Read  the  poem  in  connection  with  this  selection.  •  The  Janiculum 
is  a  high  hill  across  the  Tiber  from  Rome. 


128       THE  DEMONSTRATIVES  HIC,  ISTE,  ILLE 


LESSON   LI 

THE  DEMONSTRATIVE  PRONOUNS  HIC,  ISTE,  ILLE 

290.  We  have  already  learned  the  declension  of  the  demonstrative 
pronoun  is  and  its  use.  (Cf.  Lesson  XVII.)  That  pronoun  refers  to 
persons  or  things  either  far  or  near,  and  makes  no  definite  reference 
to  place  or  time.  If  we  wish  to  point  out  an  object  definitely  in  place 
or  time,  we  must  use  hie,  iste,  or  ille.  These  demonstratives,  like 
is,  are  used  both  as  pronouns  and  as  adjectives,  and  their  relation  to 
the  speaker  may  be  represented  graphically  thus : 


hie 


iste 


ille 


Speaker 


this^  he  (near) ;  that^  he  (remote) ;  that^  he  (more  remote) 


a.  In  dialogue  hie  refers  to  a  person  or  thing  near  the  speaker ;  iste,  to 
a  person  or  thing  near  the  person  addressed ;  ille,  to  a  person  or  thing 
remote  from  both.  These  distinctions  are  illustrated  in  the  model  sentences, 
§  293,  which  should  be  carefully  studied  and  imitated. 

291.  Hie  is  declined  as  follows : 


Singular 

Plural 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Norn, 

hie 

haee 

hoe 

hi 

hae 

haee 

Gen. 

huius 

huius 

huius 

horum 

harum 

horum 

Dat. 

huic 

huic 

huie 

lus 

his 

his 

Ace. 

hunc 

hanc 

hoc 

h5s 

has 

haee 

Abl. 

hoe 

hac 

hoe 

his 

his 

his 

a.  Huius  is*  pronounced  hdo'yoos,  and  huie  is  pronounced  hdoic  (one 
syllable). 

292.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  iste,  ista,  istud,  and  ille,  ilia, 
illud,  except  for  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  neuter 
forms  istud  and  illud,  are  declined  exactly  like  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum. 
(See  §481.) 


THE  DEMONSTRATIVES  HIC,  ISTE,  ILLE       129 

293.  MODEL  SENTENCES 

Is  this  horse  (of  mine)  strong?  Estne  hie  equus  validus ? 

That  horse  (of  yours)  is  strongs  but  that\     Iste  equus  est  validus,  sed 
one  (yonder)  is  weak  J         ille  est  infirmus 

Are  these  (men  by  mt)  your  friends  f  Suntne  hi  amici  tui  ? 

Those  {jfxtn  by  you)  are  my  friends^  but^     Isti   sunt   amici  mei,  sed 
those  (men  yonder)  are  enemies  /         illi  sunt  inimici 

294.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  295. 

I.  A  German  Chieftain  addresses  his  Followers.  Ille  fortis  Ger- 
m§n6rum  dux  su5s  convoc5vit  et  h6c  modo  animOs  eonim  cOnfir- 
mavit  "  Vos,  qui  in  his  finibus  vivitis,  in  hunc  locum  convocavi^  quia 
mecum  debetis  istos  agros  et  istas  domos  ab  iniuriis  Romanorum 
liberare.  Hoc  nobis  nOn  difficile  erit,  quod  illi  hostgs  has  silvas  5 
densas,  fer§s  saevas  qu§rum  vestigia  vident,  montes  altos  timent.  Si 
fortes  erimus,  dei  ipsi  nobis  viam  salutis  demonstrabunt.  Ille  sol, 
isti  oculi  calamitates  nostras  viderunt.*  Itaque  nomen  illius  rei  pu- 
blicae  Romanae  non  solum  nobis,  sed  etiam  omnibus  hominibus  qui 
libertatem  amant,  est  invisum.  Ad  arma  vos  voco.  Exercete  istam  10 
pristinam  virtu tem  et  vincetis." 

II.  I.  Does  that  bird  (of  yours)*  sing?  2.  This  bird  (of  mine)* 
sings  both*  in  summer  and  in  winter  and  has  a  beautiful  voice. 

3.  Those  birds   (yonder)*    in   the  country  don't    sing    in   winter. 

4.  Snatch  a  spear  from  the  hands  of  that  soldier  (near  you)*  and 
come  home  with  me.  5.  With  those  very  eyes  (of  yours)*  you  will  see 
the  tracks  of  the  hateful  enemy  who  burned  my  dwelling  and  made  an 
attack  on  my  brother.  6.  For  (propter)  these  deeds  (rCs)  we  ought  to 
inflict  punishment  on  him  without  delay.  7.  The  enemies  of  the  repub- 
lic do  not  always  suffer  punishment. 

'  The  perfect  definite.  (Cf.  §  190.)  «  English  words  in  parentheses  are 
not  to  be  translated.  They  arc  inserted  to  show  what  demonstratives  should 
be  u»ed.  (Cf.  {  290.)         •  both  .  .  .  and,  et  .  .  .  et. 


I^O 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS 


HORATIUS   PONTEM   DEFENDIT 

295.      How  HoRATius  held  the  Bridge  {Continued) 

Altera  urbis  pars  muris,  altera  flumine  satis  munlrl  videbatur.  Sed 
erat  pons  in  flumine  qui  hostibus  iter  paene  dedit.  Turn  Horatius 
Codes,  fortis  vir,  magna  voce  dixit,  "  Rescindite  pontem,  Roman! ! 
Brevi  tempore  Porsena  in  urbem  copias  suas  traducet."  lam  hostes 
5  in  ponte  erant,  sed  Horatius  cum  duobus  (cf.  §  479)  comitibus  ad 
extremam  pontis  partem  properavit,  et  hi  soli  aciem  hostium  sustinue- 
runt.  Tum  vero  cives  Romani  pontem  a  tergo  rescindere  incipiunt, 
et  hostes  frustra  Horatium  superare  temptant. 


LESSON   LII 

THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS 

296.  The  indefinite  pronouns  are  used  to  refer  to  some  person  or 
some  things  without  indicating  which  particular  one  is  meant.  The 
pronouns  quis  and  qui,  which  we  have  learned  in  their  interrogative 
and  relative  uses,  may  also  be  indefinite ;  and  nearly  all  the  other  in- 
definite pronouns  are  compounds  of  quis  or  qui  and  declined  almost 
like  them.    Review  the  declension  of  these  words,  §§221,  227- 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS  131 

297.  Learn  the  declension  and  meaning  of  the  following  indefinites : 


Neut. 
quid,  some  one,  any  one  (substantive) 
quod,  some,  any  (adjective),  §  483 
aliquid,  some  one,  any  one  (substan- 
tive), §  487 
aliquod,  some,  any  (adjective),  §  487 
quoddam,  quiddam,  a  certain,  a  certain 

one,  §  485 
quicquam  or  quidquam  (no  plural),  any 

one  (at  all)  (substantive),  §  486 
qnidque,  each  one,  every  one  (substan- 
tive), §  484 
quodque,  each^  every  (adjectiveX  §  484 


Masc. 

I'lM. 

quis 

qui 

qua  or  quae 

aliquis 

aliqui 

aliqua 

quidam 

quaedam 

quisquam 

quisque 

quisque 


quaeque 


Note,  The  meanings  of  the  neuters,  something,  etc.,  are  easily  inferred 
from  the  masculine  and  feminine. 

a.  In  the  masculine  and  neuter  singular  of  the  indefinites,  quis-forms 
and  quid-forms  are  mostly  used  as  substantives,  qui-forms  and  quod-forms 
as  adjectives. 

b.  The  indefinites  quis  and  qui  never  stand  first  in  a  clause,  and  are 
rare  excepting  after  si,  nisi,  ne,  num  (as,  si  quis,  if  any  one ;  si  quid,  if 
anything;  nisi  quis,  unless  some  one).  Generally  aliquis  and  aliqui  are 
used  instead. 

c.  Tfie  forms  qua  and  aliqua  are  both  feminine  nominative  singular 
and  neuter  nominative  plural  of  the  indefinite  adjectives  qui  and  aliqui 
respectively.  How  do  these  differ  from  the  corresponding  forms  of  the 
relative  qui? 

</.  Observe  that  quidam  (qui  +  -dam)  is  declined  like  qui,  except  that  in 
the  accusative  singular  and  genitive  plural  m  of  qui  becomes  n  (cf.  §  287.  a) : 
quendam,  quandam,  qudnmdam,  quanmdam ;  also  that  the  neuter  has  quid- 
dam  (substantive)  and  quoddam  (adjective)  in  the  nominative  and  accusative 
singular.  Quidam  is  the  least  indefinite  of  the  indefinite  pronouns,  and 
implies  that  you  could  name  the  person  or  thing  referred  to  if  you  cared 
to  do  so. 

e.  Quisquam  and  quisque  (substantive)  are  declined  like  quia. 
f  Quisquam,  any  one  (quicquam  or  quidquam,  anything),    is   always 
used  substantively  and  chiefly  in  negative  sentences.    The  corresponding 
adjective  any  is  Qlhis,  -a,  -urn  (§  108). 


132  EXERCISES 

298.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  295. 

I.  I.  Aliquis  de  ponte  in  flumen  decidit  sed  sine  uUo  periculo  ser- 
vatus  est.  2.  Est  vero  in  vita  cuiusque  hominis  aliqua  bona  fortuna. 
3.  Ne  militum  quidem^  quisquam  in  castris  mansit.  4.  Si  quern  meae 
domi  vides,  iube  eum  discedere.  5.  Si  quis  pontem  tenet,  ne  tantus 
quidem  exercitus  capere  urbem  potest.  6.  Urbs  non  satis  munlta  erat 
et  meridie  rex  quidam  paene  copias  suas  trans  pontem  traduxerat. 
7.  Denique  miles  quidam  armatus  in  fluctiis  desiluit  et  incolumis  ad 
alteram  ripam  oculos  vertit.  8.  Quisque  illi  forti  militi  aliquid  dare 
debet  9.  Tanta  vero  virtus  Romanis  semper  placuit.  10.  Olim  Co- 
rinthus  erat  urbs  satis  magna  et  paene  par  Romae  ipsi;  nunc 
vero  moenia  deciderunt  et  pauca  vestigia  urbis  illius  reperiri  possunt. 
1 1.  Quisque  libertatem  amat,  et  aliquibus  vero  nomen  regis  est  invisum. 

II.  I.  If  you  see  a  certain  Cornelius  at  Corinth,  send  him  to  me. 
2.  Almost  all  the  soldiers  who  fell  down  into  the  waves  were  un- 
harmed. 3.  Not  even  at  Pompeii  did  I  see  so  great  a  fire.  4.  I 
myself  was  eager  to  tell  something  to  some  one.  5.  Each  one  was 
praising  his  own  work.  6.  Did  you  see  some  one  in  the  country  ? 
I  did  not  see  any  one.  7.  Unless  some  one  will  remain  on  the  bridge 
with  Horatius,  the  commonwealth  will  be  in  the  greatest  danger. 

299.  How  Horatius  held  the  Bridge  (Concluded) 

Mox,  ubi  parva  pars  pontis  mansit,  Horatius  iussit  comites  disce- 
dere et  solus  mira  constantia  impetum  illius  totius  exercitus  sustingbat. 
Denique  magno  fragore  pons  in  flumen  decidit.  Tum  vero  Horatius 
tergum  vertit  et  armatus  in  aquas  desiluit.  In  eum  hostes  multa  tela 
5  iecerunt ;  incolumis  autem  per  fluctus  ad  alteram  ripam  tranavit.  Ei 
propter  tantas  res  gestas  populus  Romanus  non  solum  alia  magna 
praemia  dedit  sed  etiam  statuam  Horati  in  loco  publico  posuit. 

Sixth  Review,  Lessons  XLV-LII,  §§521-523 

1  Observe  that  qaldam  and  quidem  are  different  words. 


COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 


33 


LESSON  LIII 


REGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

300.  The  quality  denoted  by  an  adjective  may  exist  in  either  a  higher  or 
a  lower  degree,  and  this  is  expressed  by  a  form  of  inflection  called  compari- 
son. The  mere  presence  of  the  quality  is  expressed  by  the  positive  degree, 
its  presence  in  a  higher  or  lower  degree  by  the  comparative,  and  in  the 
highest  or  lowest  of  all  by  the  superlative.  In  English  the  usual  way  of 
comparing  an  adjective  is  by  using  the  suffix  -er  for  the  comparative  and 

est  for  the  superlative ;  as,  positive  high,  comparative  higher,  superlative 
highest.  Less  frequently  we  use  the  adverbs  more  and  most;  as,  positive 
beautiful,  comparative  more  beautiful,  superlative  most  beautiful. 

In  Latin,  as  in  English,  adjectives  are  compared  by  adding  suffixes 
or  by  using  adverbs. 

301.  Adjectives  are  compared  by  using  suffixes  as  follows : 


Positive 
clams,  -a,  -um  {bright) 

(Base  clar-) 
brevis,  breve  {short) 

(Base  brer-) 
velfix  {swift) 

(Base  veldc-) 


Superlative 
clarissimus,  -a,  -um 

{brightest) 
brevlssimus,  -a,  -um 

{shortest) 
vel5cissimus,  -a,  -um 

{swiftest) 


Comparative 
clarior,  clarius 

{brighter) 
brevior,  brevius 

{shorter) 
yelScior,  yel5cius 

{swifter) 

a.  The  comparative  is  formed  from  the  base  of  the  positive  by  adding 
-ior  masc.  and  fem.,  and  -ius  neut.;  the  superlative  by  adding  -issimus, 
-issima,  -issimum. 

302.  Less  frequently  adjectives  are  compared  by  using  the  adverbs 
magis,  more;  maximS,  most;  as,  idOneus,  suitable;  magis  idOneus, 
more  suitable ;  maximS  idOneus,  most  suitable. 

303.  Declension  of  the  Comparative.  Adjectives  of  the  comparative 
degree  are  declined  as  follows : 

Singular  Plural 


ICASC  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC  and  fem. 

NEUT. 

Norn,     dirior 

clarius 

claridres 

clariSra 

Gen.      cliriSris 

clarioris 

clariorum 

clari5rum 

Dat.      cliridri 

claridri 

clariSribua 

clari5ribus 

Ace.       clari&rem 

clarius 

clariOres 

cUridra 

Abl.       clari6r« 

dirifire 

clariSribus 

clar\6tibua 

134  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

a.  Obsen^e  that  the  endings  are  those  of  the  consonant  stems  of  the 
third  declension. 

b.  Compare  longus,  lo?igj  fortis,  brave ;  recens  (base,  recent-),  recent ; 
and  decline  the  comparative  of  each. 

304.  Adjectives  in  -er  form  the  comparative  regularly,  but  the  super- 
lative is  formed  by  adding  -rimus,  -a,  -um  to  the  nominative  masculine 
of  the  positive ;  as, 

Positive  Comparative  Superlative 

acer,  acris,  acre  acrior,  acrius  acerrimus,  -a,  -um 

(Base  acr-) 
pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchrum      pulchrior,  pulchrius       pulcherrimus,  -a,  -um 

(Base  pulchr-) 
liber,  libera,  liberum  liberior,  liberius  liberrimus,  -a,  -um 

(Base  liber-) 

^.  In  a  similar  manner  compare  miser,  aeger,  creber. 

305.  The  comparative  is  often  translated  by  quite,  too,  or  somemhat, 
and  the  superlative  by  very;  as,  altior,  quite  (too,  somewhat)  high;  altis- 
simus,  very  high. 

306.  EXERCISES 
First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  296. 

I.  I.  Quid  exploratores  quaerebant?  Exploratores  tempus  oppor- 
tunissimum  itineri  quaerebant.  2.  Media  in  silva  ignis  quam  creber- 
rimos  fecimus,  quod  feras  tam  audacis  numquam  antea  videramus. 
3.  Antiquls  temporibus  German!  erant  fortiores  quam  Galli.  4.  Caesar 
erat  clarior  quam  inimici^  qui  eum  necaverunt.  5.  Quisque  scutum 
ingens  et  pilum  longius  gerebat.  6.  Apud  barbaros  German!  erant 
audacissimi  et  fortissimi,  .  7.  Mens  hominum  est  celerior  quam  corpus. 
8.  Viri  aliquarum  terrarum  sunt  miserrimi.  9.  Corpora  Germanorum 
erant  ingentiora  quam  Romanorum.  10.  AcerrimI  Gallorum  principes 
sine  iilla  mora  trans  fltimen  quoddam  equos  velocissimos  traduxerunt. 
II.  Aestate  dies  sunt  longiores  quam  hieme.  12.  Imperator  quidam 
ab  exploratoribus  de  recent!  adventu  navium  longarum  quaesivit. 

II.  I.  Of  all  birds  the  eagle  is  the  sv^iftest.  2.  Certain  animals 
are  swifter  than  the  swiftest  horse.    3.  The  Roman  name  was  most 

^  Why  is  this  word  used  instead  of  hostSs  ? 


IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES     135 

hateful  to  the  enemies  of  the  commonwealth.  4.  The  Romans  always 
inflicted  the  severest*  punishment  on  faithless  allies.  5.  I  was  quite 
ill,  and  so  I  hastened  from  the  city  to  the  country.  6.  Marcus  had 
some  friends  dearer  than  Caesar.*  7.  Did  you  not  seek  a  more  recent 
report  concerning  the  battle  ?  8.  Not  even  after  a  victory  so  opportune 
did  he  seek  the  general's  friendship. 

N.B.  Beginning  at  this  point,  the  selections  for  reading  will  be  found 
near  the  end  of  the  volume.    (See  p.  197.) 


LESSON   LIV 

IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  •  THE  ABLATIVE 
WITH  COMPARATIVES  WITHOUT  QUAM 

307.  The  following  six  adjectives  in  -lis  form  the  comparative 
regularly ;  but  the  superlative  is  formed  by  adding  -limus  to  the  base 
of  the  positive.   Leam  the  meanings  and  comparison. 

Positive  Comparative  Superlative 

facilis,  -€,  easy  facilior,  -ius  facillimus,  -a,  -um 

difficilis,  -e,  hard  difficilior,  -ius  difficillimus,  -a,  -um 

similis,  -e,  like  similior,  -ius  simillimus,  -a,  -um 

dissimilis,  -«,  unlike  dissimilior,  -ius  dissimillimus,  -a,  -um 

gracilis,  -e,  slender  gracilior,  -ius  gracillimus,  -a,  -um 

humilis,  -e,  low  humilior,  -iua  humillimus,  -a,  -um 

308.  From  the  knowledge  gained  in  the  preceding  lesson  we 
should  translate  the  sentence  Nothing  is  brighter  than  the  sun 

Nihil  est  clirius  quam  861 

But  the  Romans,  especially  in  negative  sentences,  often  expressed 
the  comparison  in  this  way, 

Nihil  est  cUrius  sSIe 

which,  literally  translated,  is  Nothing  is  brighter  away  from  the  sun; 
that  is,  starting  from  the  sun  as  a  standard,  nothing  is  brighter.  This 
relation  is  expressed  by  the  separative  ablative  aCle.    Hence  the  rule 

*  Use  the  superlative  of  graria.  •  Accusative.  In  a  comparison  the  noun 
after  quam  is  in  the  same  case  as  the  one  before  it. 


136 


ABLATIVE  WITH  COMPARATIVES 


309.  Rule.  Ablative  with  Comparatives.  The  comparative  de- 
gree^ if  quam  is  omitted^  is  followed  by  the  separative  ablative. 

310.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  296. 

I.  I.  Nemo  milites  alacriores  Romanis  vidit.  2.  Statim  imperator 
iussit  nuntios  quam  celerrimos  litteras  Romam  portare.  3.  Multa 
flumina  sunt  leniora  Rheno.  4.  Apud  Romanes  quis  erat  clarior 
Caesare?  5.  Nihil  pulchrius  urbe  Roma  vidi.  6.  Subito  multitudo 
audacissima  magno  clamore  proelium  acrius  commisit.  7.  Num  est 
equus  tuus  tardus  ?  Non  vero  tardus,  sed  celerior  aquila.  8.  Ubi 
Romae  fui,  nemo  e'rat  mihi  amicior  Sexto.  9.  Quaedam  mulieres 
cibum  militibus  dare  cupiverunt.  10.  Rex  vetuit  civis  ex  urbe  noctu 
discedere.  11.  Ille  puer  est  gracilior  hac  muliere.  12.  Explorator 
duas  {two)  vias,  alteram  facilem,  alteram  difficiliorem,  demonstravit. 

II.  I.  What  city  have  you  seen  more  beautiful  than  Rome  ?  2.  The 
Gauls  were  not  more  eager  than  the  Germans.  3.  The  eagle  is  not 
slower  than  the  horse.  4.  The  spirited  woman  did  not  fear  to  make 
the  journey  by  night.  5.  The  mind  of  the  multitude  was  quite  gentle 
and  friendly.  6.  But  the  king's  mind  was  very  different.  7.  The  king 
was  not  like  (similar  to)  his  noble  father.  8.  These  hills  are  lower 
than  the  huge  mountains  of  our  territory. 


ARMA    ROMANA 


IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES       137 


LESSON   LV 

IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  (Continued) 

311.  Some  adjectives  in  English  have  irregular  comparison,  as  g^oo/if 
better,  best ;  many,  more,  most.  So  Latin  comparison  presents  some 
irregularities.   Among  the  adjectives  that  are  compared  irregularly  are 


Positive 
bonus,  -a,  -um,  good 
magnus,  -a,  -um,  great 
malus,  -a,  -um,  bad 
multus,  -a,  -um,  much 
multi,  -ae,  -a,  many 
parvus,  -a,  -um,  small 


Comparative 
melior,  melius 
maior,  maius 
peior,  peius 

,  plus 

plures,  plura 
minor,  minus 


Superlative 
optimus,  -a,  -um 
maximus,  ^,  -um 
pessimus,  -a,  -um 
plurimus,  -a,  -um 
plurimi,  -ae,  -a 
minimus,  -a,  -am 


312.  The  following  four  adjectives  have  two  superlatives.   Unusual 
forms  are  placed  in  parentheses. 


exterus,  -a,  -am, 

outward 
inferus,  -a,  -um, 

low 
posterus,  -a,  -um, 

next 
superus,  -a,  -um, 

above 


(exterior,  -ius, 

outer) 
inferior,  -ius, 

lower 
(posterior,  -ius, 

later) 
superior,  -ius, 

higher 


{extremus,  -a,  -um  ^  outermost, 
(extimus,  -a,  -um)    J        last 
f  infimus,  -a,  -um      *| 
\  imus,  -a,  -um  J 

r  postremus,  -a,  -um  1 
\(postumus,  -a,  -imi)  / 
r.«prtmus,-a,-um| 
l^  summus,  -a,  -um     J        '* 


lowest 


last 


313.   Plfis,  more  (plural  more,  many,  several),  is  declined  as  follows : 


Singular 
m  asc.  and  pem. 

A'OM.       

Ct-n.  

Da/.  

Au:  

Abl.  


Plural 

neut. 

MASC  AND  FKM. 

neut. 

plus 

pluris 

plura 

pluris 

plurium 

pluriam 

plOribas 

pluribas 

plus 

pluris, -te 

plura 

plQre 

pluribos 

pluribas 

a.  In  the  singular  pl&s  is  used  only  as  a  neuter  substantive. 


138     IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

314.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  296, 

I.  I.  Reliqui  hostes,  qui  a  dextro  cornu  proelium  commiserant,  de 
superiore  loco  fugerunt  et  sese  in  silvam  maximam  receperunt.  2.  In 
extrema  parte  silvae  castra  hostium  posita  erant.  3.  Plurimi  captivi  ab 
equitibus  ad  Caesarem  ducti  sunt.  4.  Caesar  vero  iussit  eos  in  servi- 
tutem  tradi.  5.  Postero  die  magna  multitudo  mulierum  ab  Romanis 
in  valle  ima  reperta  est.  6.  Hae  mulieres  maxime  perterritae  adventu 
Caesaris  sese  occidere  studebant.  7.  Eae  quoque  pluris  fabulas  de  exer- 
citus  Roman!  sceleribus  audiverant.  8.  Fama  illorum  mllitum  optima 
non  erat.  9.  In  barbarorum  aedificiis  maior  copia  frumenti  reperta 
est.    10.  Nemo  crebris  proeliis  contendere  sine  aliquo  periculo  potest. 

II.  I.  The  remaining  women  fled  from  their  dwellings  and  hid 
themselves.  2.  They  were  terrified  and  did  not  wish  to  be  captured 
and  given  over  into  slavery.  3.  Nothing  can  be  worse  than  slavery. 
4.  Slavery  is  worse  than  death.  5.  In  the  Roman  empire  a  great  many 
were  killed  because  they  refused  to  be  slaves.  6.  To  surrender  the 
fatherland  is  the  worst  crime. 

LESSON  LVI 

IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES  (Concluded)  •  ABLATIVE 
OF  THE  MEASURE  OF  DIFFERENCE 

315.  The  following  adjectives  are  irregular  in  the  formation  of  the 
superlative  and  have  no  positive.  Forms  rarely  used  are  in  paren- 
theses. 

Comparative  Superlative 

citerior,  hither  (citimus,  hithermosf) 

interior,  inner  (intimus,  inmost) 

^xiox J  former  primus,  yfrj-/ 

propior,  nearer  proximus,  next^  nearest 

ulterior,  further  ultimus,  furthest 

316.  In  the  sentence  Galba  is  a  head  taller  than  Sextus,  the  phrase 
a  head  taller  expresses  the  measure  of  difference  in  height  between 


Examples.. 


ABLATIVE  OF  THE  MEASURE  OF  DIFFERENCE     139 

Galba  and  Sextus.   The  Latin  form  of  expression  would  be  Galba  is 
taller  than  Sextus  by  a  head.   This  is  clearly  an  ablative  relation,  and 
the  construction  is  called  the  ablative  of  the  measure  of  difference. 
'  Galba  est  altior  capite  quam  Sextus 
Galba  is  a  head  taller  (taller  by  a  head)  than  Sextus. 
niud  iter  ad  Italiam  est  mult5  brevius 
That  route  to  Italy  is  much  shorter  (shorter  by  much) 

317.  Rule.  Ablative  of  the  Measure  of  Difference.  With  com- 
paratives and  words  implying  comparison  the  ablative  is  used 
to  denote  the  measure  of  difference. 

a.  Especially  common  in  this  construction  are  the  neuter  ablatives 
e6,  by  this^  by  that  nihild,^  by  nothing 

h6c,  by  this  pauld,  by  a  little 

mult5|  by  much 

318.  EXERCISES 
First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  297. 

1 .  I .  Barbari  proelium  committere  statugnint  eO  magis  quod  Ro- 
man! infirmi  esse  videbantur.  2.  Meum  consilium  est  multo  melius 
quam  tuum  quia  multo  facilius  est.  3.  Haec  via  est  multo  latior  quam 
ilia.  4.  Barbari  erant  nihilo  tardiores  quam  Romanl.  5.  Tuus  equus 
est  paulo  celerior  quam  meus.  6.  li  qui  paulo  fortiores  erant  pro- 
hibuerunt  reliquos  aditum  relinquere.  7.  Inter  illas  civitates  Germania 
milites  habet  optimos.  8.  Propior  via  quae  per  banc  vallem  ducit  est 
inter  portum  et  lacum.  9.  Servi,  qui  agros  citeriores  incolebant,  priores 
dominos  relinquere  non  cuplverunt,  quod  eos  amabant.  10.  Ultimae 
Germaniae  partes  numquam  in  fidem  Romanorum  venerunt.  1 1 .  Nam 
trans  RhSnum  aditus  erat  multo  difficilior  exercitui  Romano. 

n.  I.  Another  way  much  more  difficult  (more  difficult  by  much) 
was  left  through  hither  Gaul.  2.  In  ancient  times  no  state  was 
stronger  than  the  Roman  empire.  3.  The  states  of  further  Gaul  did 
not  wish  to  give  hostages  to  Caesar.  4.  Slavery  is  no  better  (better  by 
nothing)  than  death.  5.  The  best  citizens  are  not  loved  by  the  worst. 
6.  The  active  enemy  immediately  withdrew  into  the  nearest  forest, 
for  they  were  terrified  by  Caesar's  recent  victories. 

'  nihil  was  originally  nihilum  and  declined  like  pQum.   There  is  no  plural. 


I40    FORMATION  AND  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 


LESSON   LVII 
FORMATION  AND  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 

319.  Adverbs  are  generally  derived  from  adjectives,  as  in  English 
(e.g.  adj.  sweety  adv.  sweetly).  Like  adjectives,  they  can  be  compared ; 
but  they  have  no  declension. 

320.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  de- 
clensions are  formed  and  compared  as  follows : 


Positive 

Adj.  cams,  dear 

Adv.  care,  dearly 

Adj.  pulcher,  beautiful 

Adv.  pulchre,  beautifully 

Adj.  liber,  free 

Adv.  libere,  freely 


Comparative       Superlative 


carior 
carius 

pulchrior 
pulchrius 

liberior 
liberius 


canssimus 
carissime 

pulcherrimus 
pulcherrime 

liberrimus 
liberrime 


a.  The  positive  of  the  adverb  is  formed  by  adding  -e  to  the  base  of  the 
positive  of  the  adjective.  The  superlative  of  the  adverb  is  formed  from  the 
superlative  of  the  adjective  in  the  same  way. 

b.  The  comparative  of  any  adverb  is  the  neuter  accusative  singular  of 
the  comparative  of  the  adjective. 

321.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  are 
formed  hke  those  described  above  in  the  comparative  and  superlative. 
The  positive  is  usually  formed  by  adding  -iter  to  the  base  of  adjectives 
of  three  endings  or  of  two  endings,  and  -ter  to  the  base  of  those  of 
one  ending ;  ^  as, 


Positive 

Comparative 

Superlative 

Adj. 

fortis,  brave 

fortior 

fortissimus 

Adv. 

fortiter,  bravely 

fortius 

fortissime 

Adj. 

audax,  bold 

audacior 

audacissimus 

Adv. 

audacter,  boldly 

audacius 

audacissime 

^  This  is  a  good  working  rule,  though  there  are  some  exceptions  to  it 


FORMATION  AND  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS     141 

322.  Case  Forms  as  Adverbs.    As  we  learned  above,  the  neuter 

accusative  of  comparatives  is  used  adverbially.  So  in  the  positive  or 
superlative  some  adjectives,  instead  of  following  the  usual  formation, 
use  the  accusative  or  the  ablative  singular  neuter  adverbially ;  as. 

Adj.      facilia,  easy  primus,  yfrj/ 

Adv.     facile  (ace),  easily  primum  {2.qx:),  first 

primd  (abl.),  at  first 
Adj.      multus,  many  '  plurimua,  most 

Adv.     multum  (ace.),  much  plurimum  (ace.),  most 

multd  (abl.),  by  much 

323.  Learn  the  following  irregular  comparisons : 

bene,  well  melius,  better  optime,  best 

diu,  long  (time)  diutius,  longer  diutissime,  longest 

magno-peTtf  greatly  magis,  more  maxime,  most 

parum,  little  minus,  less  minime,  least 

prope,  nearly,  near  propius,  nearer  proxime,  nearest 

>,  often  saepius,  oftener  saepissime,  oftenest 


324.  Form  adverbs  from  the  following  adjectives,  using  the  regular 
rules,  and  compare  them :  laetus,  superbus,  molestus,  amicus,  acer, 
brevis,  gravis,  recgns. 

325.  Rule.  Adverbs.  Adverbs  modify  verbs,  adjectives y  and 
otiicr  adverbs. 

326.  EXERCISES 
First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  297. 

I.  I.  Nulla  res  melius  gesta  est  quam  proelium  illud^  ubi  Marius 
mult5  minSre  exercitu  multo  maiores  c6pias  Germanorum  in  fugam 
dedit  2.  Audacter  in  RomanOrum  cohortis  hostes  impetus  fgcerunt 
3.  Marius  autem  omn€s  hOs  fortissime  sustinuit.  4.  Barbail  nihilQ. 
fortiOres  erant  quam  ROmSnl.  5.  Primo  barbari  esse  superiOres 
videbantur,  tum  ROmSni  Scrius  contend€runt.  6.  Denique,  ubi  iam 
diOtissime  paene  aequO  proeliO  pugnatum  est,  barbari  fugam  petierunt. 
7.  Quaedam  GermSnOrum  gentes,  simul  atque  rOmorem  illius  calami- 
tatis  audlvCrunt,  sCse  in  ultimls  regi6nibus  finium  su5rum  abdiderunt. 
I  ille  standing  after  its  noun  means  that  vHll-kn^wn,  that fcuncus. 


142 


NUMERALS 


8.  Romani  saepius  quam  hostes  vicerunt,  quod  meliora  arma  habebant. 

9.  Inter  omnis  gentis  Romani  plurimum  valebant.  10.  Hae  cohortes 
simul  atque  in  aequiorem  regionem  se  receperunt,  castra  sine  ulla 
difficultate  posuerunt. 

II.  I.  Some  nations  are  easily  overcome  by  their  enemies.  2.  Ger- 
many is  much  larger  than  Gaul.  3.  Were  not  the  Romans  the  most 
powerful  among  the  tribes  of  Italy  ?  4.  On  account  of  (his)  wounds 
the  soldier  dragged  his  body  from  the  ditch  with  the  greatest  difficulty. 
5.  He  was  able  neither  to  run  nor  to  fight.  6.  Who  saved  him?  A 
certain  horseman  boldly  undertook  the  matter.  7.  The  rumors  con- 
cerning the  soldier's  death  were  not  true. 


LESSON  LVIII 

NUMERALS  •  THE  PARTITIVE  GENITIVE 

327.  The  Latin  numeral  adjectives  may  be  classified  as  follows : 

1.  Cardinal  Numerals,  answering  the  question  how  many  ?  as,  unus, 
one ;  duo,  two ;  etc. 

2.  Ordinal  Numerals,  derived  in  most  cases  from  the  cardinals  and 
answering  the  question  in  what  order  1  as,  primus,  first ;  secundus, 
second ;  etc. 

3.  Distributive  Numerals,  answering  the  question  how  many  at  a 
time  1  as,  singuli,  one  at  a  time. 

328.  The  Cardinal  Numerals.  The  first  twenty  of  the  cardinals  are 
as  follows : 

ii,undecim  16,  sedecim 

12,  duodecim  17,  septendecim 

13,  tredecim  18,  duodeviginti 

14,  quattuordecim  19,  undeviginti 

15,  quindecim  20,  viginti 

100,  ducenti  =  200,  mille  =  1000. 

329.  Declension  of  the  Cardinals.  Of  the  cardinals  only  unus,  duo, 
trgs,  the  hundreds  above  one  hundred,  and  mille  used  as  a  noun,  are 
declinable. 


I,  iinus 

6,  sex 

2,  duo 

7,  septem 

3,  tres 

8,  octo 

4,  quattuor 

9,  novem 

5,  quinque 

10,  decern 

a.  Learn  also  centum  =  ic 

THE  PARTITIVE  GENiriVE  143 

a.  &niiB  is  one  of  the  nine  irregular  adjectives,  and  is  declined  like  n&Uaa 
(cf.  §§  109,  470).  The  plural  of  Onus  is  used  to  agree  with  a  plural  noun  of 
a  singular  meaning,  as,  una  castra,  one  camp;  and  with  other  nouns  in  the 
sense  of  only,  as,  Galli  uni,  only  the  Gauls. 

b.  Learn  the  declension  of  duo,  two  ;  tres,  three;  and  mille,  a  thousand. 

(§  479) 

c.  The   hundreds  above  one  hundred  are  declined   like  the   plural  of 

bonus ;  as, 

ducenti,  -ae,  -a 

ducentSnun,  -arum,  -drum 

etc.  etc.  etc. 

330.  We  have  already  become  familiar  with  sentences  like  the 

following : 

Omnium  avium  aquila  est  velScissima 

Of  all  birds  the  eagle  is  the  swiftest 

Hoc  Sraculum  erat  omnium  clarissimum 

This  oracle  was  the  most  famous  of  all 

In  such  sentences  the  genitive  denotes  the  whole,  and  the  word  it 
modifies  denotes  a  part  of  that  whole.  Such  a  genitive,  denoting  the  whole 
of  which  a  part  is  taken,  is  called  a  partitive  genitive. 

331.  Rl  LE.  Partitive  Genitive.  Words  denoting  a  part  are 
often  used  with  the  genitive  of  the  whole ^  known  as  the  partitive 
genitive. 

a.  Words  denoting  a  part  are  especially  pronouns,  numerals,  and  other 
adjectives.  But  cardinal  numbers  excepting  mflle  regularly  take  the  abla- 
tive with  ex  or  de  instead  of  the  partitive  genitive. 

b.  Mille,  a  thousand,  in  the  singular  is  usually  an  indeclinable  adjective 
(as,  mUle  milites,  a  thousand  soldiers),  but  in  the  plural  it  is  a  declinable 
noun  and  takes  the  partitive  genitive  (as,  decern  milia  militum,  ten  thousand 
soldiers)^ 


Examples  : 


Fortisaimi  h5rum  sunt  Germ&m 

The  bravest  of  these  are  the  Germans 

Decem  milia  hostium  interfecta  sunt 

Ten  thousand  (Vit.  thousands)  of  the  enemy  were  slain 

Una  ex  captivis  erat  soror  rSgis 

One  of  the  captives  was  the  kin^s  sister 


144  THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  EXTENT 

332.  EXERCISES 

First  learn  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  297. 

I.  I.  Caesarmaximam  partem  aedificionim  incendit.  2.  Magna  pars 
munitionis  aqua  fluminis  deleta  est.  3.  Galli  huius  regionis  quinque 
milia  hominum  coegerant.  4.  Duo  ex  meis  fratribus  eundem  rumorem 
audiverunt.  5.  Quis  Romanorum  erat  clarior  Caesare?  6.  Quinque 
cohortes  ex  ilia  legione  castra  quam  fortissime  defendebant.  7.  Hie 
locus  aberat  aequo  spatio  ^  ab  castris  Caesaris  et  castris  Germanorum. 

8.  Caesar  simul  atque  pervenit,  plus  commeatus  ab  sociis  postulavit. 

9.  Nonne  mercatores  magnitudinem  insulae  cognoverant  ?  Longitudi- 
nem  sed  non  latitudinem  cognoverant.  10.  Pauci  hostium  obtinebant 
coUem  quern  exploratores  nostri  viderunt. 

II.  I.I  have  two  brothers,  and  one  of  them  lives  at  Rome.  2.  Cassar 
stormed  that  very  town  with  three  legions.  3.  In  one  hour  he  de- 
stroyed a  great  part  of  the  fortification.  4.  When  the  enemy  could 
no  longer  ^  defend  the  gates,  they  retreated  to  a  hill  which  was  not 
far  distant.®  5.  There  three  thousand  of  them  bravely  resisted  the 
Romans.* 

LESSON  LIX 
NUMERALS  (Continued)  •  THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  EXTENT 

333.  Learn  the  first  twenty  of  the  ordinal  numerals  (§  478). 
The  ordinals  are  all  declined  like  bonus. 

334.  The  distributive  numerals  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 

The  first  three  are 

singuli,  -ae,  -a,  one  each^  one  by  one 
bini,  -ae,  -a,  two  each,  two  by  two 
terni,  -ae,  -a,  three  each,  three  by  three 

335.  We  have  learned  that,  besides  its  use  as  object,  the  accusative 
is  used  to  express  space  relations  not  covered  by  the  ablative.  We 
have  had  such  expressions  as  per  plurimOs  annOs,  for  a  great  many 

1  Ablative  of  the  measure  of  difference.        «  Not  longius.  Why  ?         »  Latin, 

was  distant  by  a  small  space.         *  Not  the  accusative. 


THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  EXTENT  145 

years;  per  tOtum  diem,  for  a  whoU  day.  Here  the  space  relation  is 
one  of  extent  of  time.  We  could  also  say  per  decern  pedes,  y^r  ten  feet, 
where  the  space  relation  is  one  of  extent  of  space.  While  this  is  correct 
Latin,  the  usual  form  is  to  use  the  accusative  with  no  preposition,  as, 

Vir  tStum  diem  cucurrit,  the  man  ran  for  a  whole  day 

Caesar  miinim  decern  pedSs  mSvit,  Casar  moved  the  wall  ten  feet 

336.  Rule.  Accusative  of  Extent.  Duration  of  time  and  ex- 
tent of  space  are  expressed  by  the  accusative. 

a.  This  accusative  answers  the  questions  how  long?  how  far  f 

b.  Distinguish  carefully  between  the  accusative  of  time  how  long  and 
the  ablative  of  time  when,  or  within  which. 

Select  the  accusatives  of  time  and  space  and  the  ablatives  of  time 
in  the  following : 

When  did  the  general  arrive  ?  He  arrived  at  two  o'clock.  How  long  had 
he  been  marching?  For  four  days.  How  far  did  he  march?  He  marched 
sixty-five  miles.  Where  has  he  pitched  his  camp?  Three  miles  from  the 
river,  and  he  will  remain  there  several  days.  The  wall  around  the  camp  is 
ten  feet  high.  When  did  the  war  begin?  In  the  first  year  after  the  king's 
death. 

337.  EXERCISES 

First  learri  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  298. 

I.  Casar  in  Gaul.   Caesar  bellum  in  Gallia  septem  annOs  gessit 

rrimO  ann5  Helv€ti5s  vidt,  et  eOdem  annO  multae  GermSnOrum 

gentes  ei  s€se  d^diderunt.    MultOs  iam  ann5s  German!  Gallos  vexa- 

bant  *  et  duces  German!  c6pias  suas  trans  Rhenum  saepe  traducebant.* 

N5n  singull  veniebant,  sed  multa  milia  hominum  in  Galliam  contends-  5 

bant.    Qua  de  causa  princip€s  Galliae  concilium  convocavfirunt  atque 

statu€runt  ISgatOs  ad  Caesarem  mittere.    Caesar,  simul  atque  hunc 

rumQrem  audivit,  c6pias  suas  sine  mora  coSgit.    Prima  iQce  fortiter 

cum  Germanis  proelium  commisit    TOtum  diem  acriter  pugnatum 

est   Caesar  ipse  a  dextrO  comQ  aciem  dQxit.    Magna  pars  cxerdtiis  10 

German!  ceddit   Post  magnam  caedem  paucf  multa  milia  passuum 

ad  flflmen  fOp^runt. 

*  Translate  as  if  pluperfect. 


146  DEPONENT  VERBS 

II.  I.  Caesar  pitched  camp  two  miles  from  the  river.  2.  He  forti- 
fied the  camp  with  a  ditch  fifteen  feet  wide  and  a  rampart  nine  feet 
high.  3.  The  camp  of  the  enemy  was  a  great  way  off  (was  distant  by  a 
great  space).  4.  On  the  next  day  he  hastened  ten  miles  in  three  hours. 
5.  Suddenly  the  enemy  with  all  their  forces  made  an  attack  upon  (in 
with  ace.)  the  rear.  6.  For  two  hours  the  Romans  were  hard  pressed 
by  the  barbarians.    7.  In  three  hours  the  barbarians  were  fleeing. 

LESSON   LX 

DEPONENT  VERBS 

338.  A  number  of  verbs  are  passive  in  form  but  active  in  meaning; 
as,  hortor,  /  encourage ;  vereor,  I  fear.  Such  verbs  are  called  deponent 
because  they  have  laid  aside  (de-p6nere,  to  lay  aside)  the  active  forms. 

a.  Besides  having  all  the  forms  of  the  passive,  deponent  verbs  have  also 
the  future  active  infinitive  and  a  few  other  active  forms  which  will  be  noted 
later.   (See  §§375,  403.  <5-) 

339.  The  principal  parts  of  deponents  are  of  course  passive  in 

form,  as, 

Cofij.  I  hortor,  hortari,  hortatus  sum,  encourage 

Conj.  II        vereor,  vereri,  veritus  sum,/mr 
Conj.  Ill  {a)  sequor,  sequi,  secutus  sum,  follow 

{b)  patior,  pati,  passus  sum,  suffer^  allow 
Conj.  IV        partior,  partiri,  partitus  sum,  share^  divide 

Learn  the  synopses  of  these  verbs.  (See  §  493.)  Patior  is  conjugated  like 
the  passive  of  capio  (§  492). 

340.  PREPOSITIONS  WITH  THE  ACCUSATIVE 

The  prepositions  with  the  accusative  that  occur  most  frequently  are 

ad,  to  ante,  before  intra,  within 

apud,  among  ob,  on  account  of  (quam  ob  rem, 

circum,  around  wherefore^  therefore) 

contra,  against^  contrary  to  per,  through^  by  means  of 

extra,  outside  of  post,  after,  behind 

in,  into.,  in,  against,  upon  propter,  on  account  of  because  of 

inter,  between,  among  trans,  across,  over 

a.  Most  of  these  you  have  had  before.  Review  the  old  ones  and  learn 
the  new  ones.    Review  the  list  of  prepositions  governing  the  ablative,  §  209. 


EXERCISES  147 

341.  EXERCISES 

First  Icam  the  special  vocabulary,  p.  298. 

I.  I.  Trcs  ex  legatis,  contra  Caesaris  opiniCnem,  iter  facere  per 
hostium  finis  verebantur.  2.  Quis  eos  hortatus  est?  Imperator  eos 
hortatus-est  et  iis  persuadere  conatus  est,  sed  non  potuit.  3.  Quid 
li<;at6s  pertemiit?  Aut  timor  hostium,  qui  undique  premebant,  aut 
longitud5  viae  eOs  pertemiit.  4.  Tamen  omnes  fere  Caesarem  multo 
magis  quam  hostis  veriti  sunt.  5.  Fortissimae  gentes  Galliae  ex  Ger- 
manis  oriebantur.  6.  Quam  ob  rem  tam  fortes  erant?  Quia  nee 
\inum  nee  alia  quae  virtu  tern  delent  ad  se  portari  patiebantur. 
7.  Caesar  ex  mercatoribus  de  insula  Britannia  quaesivit,  sed  nihil 
cogn6scere  potuit.  8.  Itaque  ipse  statuit  hanc  terram  petere,  et  media 
fere  aestate  cum  multis  navibus  longis  profectus  est.  9.  Magna 
celeritate  iter  confecit  et  in  opportunissimo  loco  egressus  est.  10.  Bar- 
ban  summis  viribus  eum  ab  insula  prohibere  conati  sunt.  11.  Ille 
autem  barbaros  multa  milia  passuum  insecutus  est;  tamen  sine 
equitatu  eos  consequi  non  potuit. 

II.  I.  Contrary  to  our  expectation,  the  enemy  fled  and  the  cavalry 
followed  close  after  them.  2.  From  all  parts  of  the  multitude  the 
shouts  arose  of  those  who  were  being  wounded.  3.  Caesar  did  not 
allow  the  cavalry  to  pursue  too  far.*  4.  The  cavalry  set  out  at  the 
first  hour  and  was  returning  *  to  camp  at  the  fourth  hour.  5.  Around 
the  Roman  camp  was  a  rampart  twelve  feet  high.  6.  Caesar  will 
delay  three  days  because  of  the  grain  supply.  7.  Nearly  all  the  lieu- 
tenants feared  the  enemy  and  attempted  to  delay  the  march. 

*  Comparative  of  longi.        2  yvill  this  be  a  deponent  or  an  active  form  ? 


Seventh  Review,  Lessons  LIII-LX,  §§  524-526 


PART  III 
CONSTRUCTIONS 


INTRODUCTORY  NOTE 

The  preceding  part  of  this  book  has  been  concerned  chiefly  with  forms  and 
vocabulary.  There  remain  still  to  be  learned  the  forms  of  the  Subjunctive 
Mood,  the  Participles,  and  the  Gerund  of  the  regular  verb,  and  the  conjugation 
of  the  commoner  irregular  verbs.  These  will  be  taken  up  in  connection  with 
the  study  of  constructions,  which  will  be  the  chief  subject  of  our  future  work. 
The  special  vocabularies  of  the  preceding  lessons  contain,  exclusive  of  proper 
names,  about  six  hundred  words.  As  these  are  among  the  commonest  words 
in  the  language,  they  must  be  mastered.  They  properly  form  the  basis  of  the 
study  of  words,  and  will  be  reviewed  and  used  with  but  few  additions  in  the 
remaining  lessons. 

For  practice  in  reading  and  to  illustrate  the  constructions  presented,  a  con- 
tinued story  has  been  prepared  and  may  be  begun  at  this  point  (see  p.  204). 
It  has  been  divided  into  chapters  of  convenient  length  to  accompany  progress 
through  the  lessons,  but  may  be  read  with  equal  profit  after  the  lessons  are 
finished.  The  story  gives  an  account  of  the  life  and  adventu.es  of  Publius 
Cornelius  Lentulus,  a  Roman  boy,  who  fought  in  Caesar's  campaigns  and 
shared  in  his  triumph.  The  colored  plates  illustrating  the  story  are  faithful 
representations  of  ancient  life  and  are  deserving  of  careful  study. 

148 


Plate  III 


CAPTIVI   INTERROGANTUR 
(See  page  aai) 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD 


49 


LESSON   LXI 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD 

342.  In  addition  to  the  indicative,  imperative,  and  infinitive  moods, 
which  you  have  learned,  Latin  has  a  fourth  mood  called  the  subjunc- 
tive.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  are 


Present 
Imperfect 
Perfect 
Pluperfect 


AcTivK  AND  Passive 


343.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  have  the  same  time  values  as 
the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative,  and,  in  addition,  each  of 
them  may  refer  to  future  time.  No  meanings  of  the  tenses  will  be  given 
in  the  paradigms,  as  the  translation  varies  with  the  construction  used. 

344.  The  present  subjunctive  is  inflected  as  follows : 


CONJ.  I 


1.  a  mem 

2.  a'mes 

3.  a'met 


1 .  ame  mus 

2.  ame 'tis 

3.  a'ment 


CONJ.  II 


moneam 

mo'neas 

mo'ne*t 


monei'mas 

monea'^tis 

mo'neant 


CONJ.  Ill 
Active  Voick 
singular 


CONJ.  IV 


regain 

re'gas 

re'gat 

PLURAL 

reg&'mns 

rega'tis 

re'gant 


ca'piam 

ca'piis 

ca'piat 


capi&'mas 

capii^tifl 

ca'piant 


au 

au'diis 

au'diat 


audia'mus 

audia'tis 

au'diant 


Passive  Voice 


SINGULAR 


1.  a'mer  mo'ncar  re'gar  ca'piar  au'diar 

2.  ami'ris  (-re)     monei'ria  (-re)    regi'ri«  (-re)    capii'ris  (4re)    audii'ria(-re) 
3    ixc\l'\xx  moneft'tur  r^i'tur  capil'tor  audii'tor 


150  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD 


1.  ame'mur  monea''mur  rega'mur         capia^mur         audia'^mur 

2.  ame'mini         monea^mini         rega'mini        capia'mini        audia'mini 

3.  amen'tur  monean'tur         regan'tur        capian'tur         audian'tur 

a.  The  present  subjunctive  is  formed  from  the  present  stem, 

b.  The  mood  sign  of  the  present  subjunctive  is  -e-  in  the  first  conjuga- 
tion and  -a-  in  the  others.  It  is  shortened  in  the  usual  places  (cf .  §  1 2),  and 
takes  the  place  of  the  final  vowel  of  the  stem  in  the  first  and  third  conjuga- 
tions, but  not  in  the  second  and  fourth. 

c.  The  personal  endings  are  the  same  as  in  the  indicative. 

d.  In  a  similar  way  inflect  the  present  subjunctive  of  euro,  iubeo,  sumo, 
iacio,  munio. 

345.  The  present  subjunctive  of  the  irregular  verb  sum  is 
inflected  as  follows: 


Sing. -^  2.  sis  Plur. 


346.  The  Indicative  and  Subjunctive  Compared,  i.  The  two  most 
important  of  the  finite  moods  are  the  indicative  and  the  subjunctive. 
The  indicative  deals  with  facts  either  real  or  assumed.  If,  then,  we 
wish  to  assert  something  as  a  fact  or  to  inquire  after  a  fact,  we  use 
the  indicative. 

2.  On  the  other  hand,  if  we  wish  to  express  a  desire  or  wish^  a 
purpose^  a  possibility^  an  expectation^  or  some  such  notion,  we  must 
use  the  subjunctive.  The  following  sentences  illustrate  the  difference 
between  the  indicative  and  the  subjunctive  ideas. 

Indicative  Ideas  Subjunctive  Ideas 

1.  He  is  brave  i.  May  he  be  brave 

Fortis  est  Fortis  sit  (idea  of  wishing) 

2.  We  set  out  at  mice  2.  Let  us  set  out  at  once 

Statim  proficiscimur  Statim  proficiscamur  (idea  of  will- 

ing) 

3.  You  hear  him  every  day  3.  You  can  hear  him  every  day 
Ck)tidie  eum  aadis  Cotidie  eum  audias  (idea  of  possi- 
bility) 


INDICATIVE  AND  SUBJUNCTIVE  COMPARED     151 

Indicative  Ideas  Subjunctive  Ideas 

4.  He    remained    until    the    ship      4.  He  waited  until  the  ship  should 

arrived  arrive 

Mansit  dam  navis  pervenit  Ezspectavit  dum  navis  perveni- 

ret  ^  (idea  of  expectation) 

5.  Casar  sends  men  who  find  the      5.  Casar  sends  men   who  are  to 

bridge  find  (or  to  find)  the  bridge 

Caesar  mittit  homines  qui  pontem  Caesar  homines  mittit  qui  pontem 

reperiunt  reperiant  (idea  of  purpose) 

Note.  From  the  sentences  above  we  observe  that  the  subjunctive  may  be 
used  in  either  independent  or  dependent  clauses;  but  it  is  far  more  common 
in  the  latter  than  in  the  former. 

347.  EXERCISE 

Which  verbs  in  the  following  paragraph  would  be  in  the  indicative  and 
which  in  the  subjunctive  in  a  Latin  translation  ? 

There  have  been  times  in  the  history  of  our  country  when  you  might 
be  proud  of  being  an  American  citizen.  Do  you  remember  the  day 
when  Dewey  sailed  into  Manila  Bay  to  capture  or  destroy  the  enemy's 
fleet  ?  You  might  have  seen  the  admiral  standing  on  the  bridge  calmly 
giving  his  orders.  He  did  not  even  wait  until  the  mines  should  be 
removed  from  the  harbor's  mouth,  but  sailed  in  at  once.  Let  us  not 
despair  of  our  country  while  such  valor  exists,  and  may  the  future  add 
new  glories  to  the  past. 

LESSON   LXII 
THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  PURPOSE 

348.  Observe  the  sentence 

Caesar  homings  mittit  qui  pontem  reperiant,  Ccesar  sends  men 

to  find  the  bridge 

The  verb  reperiant  in  the  dependent  clause  is  in  the  subjunctive 
because  it  tells  us  what  Caesar  wants  the  men  to  do ;  in  other  words, 
it  expresses  his  will  and  the  purpose  in  his  mind.  Such  a  use  of  the 
subjunctive  is  called  the  subjunctive  of  purpose. 

1  perveniret,  imperfect  subjunctive. 


152  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  PURPOSE 

349.  Rule.  Subjunctive  of  Purpose.  The  subjunctive  is  used 
in  a  dependent  clause  to  express  the  purpose  of  the  action  in  the 
principal  clause, 

350.  A  clause  of  purpose  is  introduced  as  .follows : 

1.  If  something  is  wanted,  by 

qui,  the  relative  pronoun  (as  above) 

ut,  conj.,  in  order  that^  that 

quo  (abl.  of  qui,  by  which),  in  order  that,  that,  used  when 
the  purpose  clause  contains  a  comparative.  The  ablative 
quo  expresses  the  measure  of  difference.  (Cf .  §317.) 

II.  If  something  is  not  wanted,  by 

ne,  conj.,  in  order  that  not,  that  not,  lest 

351.  EXAMPLES 

1.  Caesar  copias  cogit  quibus  hostis  insequatur 

Ccesar  collects  troops  with  which  to  pursue  the  foe 

2.  Pacem  petunt  ut  domum  revertantur 

They  ask  for  peace  in  order  that  they  may  return  home 

3.  Pontem  faciunt  quo  facilius  oppidum  capiant 

They  build  a  bridge  that  they  may  take  the  town  more 
easily  (lit.  by  which  the  more  easily) 

4.  Fugiunt  ne  vulnerentur 

They  flee  that  they  ?nay  not  (or  lest  they)  be  wounded 

352.  Expression  of  Purpose  in  English.  In  English,  purpose  clauses 
are  sometimes  introduced  by  that  or  in  order  that,  but  much  more 
frequently  purpose  is  expressed  in  English  by  the  infinitive,  as  We 
eat  to  live,  She  stoops  to  conquer.  In  Latin  prose,  on  the  other  hand, 
purpose  is  never  expressed  by  the  infinitive.  Be  on  your  guard  and 
do  not  let  the  English  idiom  betray  you  into  this  error. 

353.  EXERCISES 

rducant,  mittant,  videant,  audiant, 
Iducantur,  mittantur,  videantur,  audiantur. 

^     .  _  rcapiamur,  tradamur,  videamus, 

2.  Fugimus  ne  -^        _  ._  .  ^_ 

°  Lnecemur,  rapiamur,  resistamus. 


THE  IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 


153 


3.  Mittit  nQntiOs     jdicant,  audiant,  veniant, 

qui  Inarrent,  audiantur,  in  concilio  sedeant. 

4.  Castra  mQniunt  f  s€se  defendant,  impetum  sustineant, 

quo  fadlius     Ihostis  vincant,  salutem  petant. 

II.  I.  The  Helvetii  send  ambassadors  to  seek^  peace.  2.  They  are 
setting  out  at  daybreak  in  order  that  they  may  make  a  longer  march 
before  night.  3.  They  will  hide  the  women  in  the  forest  (ace.  with  in) 
that  they  may  not  be  captured.  4.  The  Gauls  wage  many  wars  to 
free^  their  fatherland  from  slavery.  5.  They  will  resist  the  Romans* 
bravely  lest  they  be  destroyed. 


LESSON   LXIII 

INFLECTION  OF  THE  IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 
THE  SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES 

354.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  may  be  formed  by  adding  the 
personal  endings  to  the  present  active  infinitive. 


CONJ.  I 

CONJ.  II 

CoNj. 

ACTIVE 

III 

CoNj.  IV 

I. 
3- 

ama'rem 

ama'rSs 

ama'ret 

mone'rem 
mone'rSs 
mone'ret 

re'gerem 

re'geres 

re'geret 

ca'perem 

ca'peres 

ca'peret 

audl'rem 

audl'res 

audl'ret 

3- 

amarf'mua 

amare'tis 

ama'rent 

monerg'mus 

monere'tis 
nione'rent 

regerS'mua 

rcgcre'tis 
re'gerent 

PASSIVE 

capere'mus 

capere'Us 

ca'perent 

audlre'mos 

audire'tis 

audi'rent 

I. 

amS'rer 

mone'rer 

re'gerer 

ca'perer 

audl'rer 

2.  amar6'ri8(-re)  moner6'ri8(-re)  reger§'ri8(-re)  caper6'ri8(-re)  audlr€'ris(-re) 

3.  amarC'tur         monerc'tur         regerC'tur        caperS'tur        audlre'tur 

I.  amarS'mur  monerS'mur  regerg'mnr  caperC'mur  audlre'mor 
1.  amare'mini  monere'mini  regert'mini  caperS'mini  audire'mini 
3.  amaren'tur       moneren'tor      r^eren'tnr      caperen'tur      audiren'tur 

tf.  In  a  similar  way  inflect  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  active  and  passive, 
of  cur5,  iubeQ,  sumO,  iaciS,  muni5. 

*  Not  infinitive.        *  Not  accusative. 


154 


SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES 


355.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  of  the  irregular  verb  sum  is  in- 
flected as  follows : 


I. 

es'sem 

T.  esse'mus 

2. 

es'ses 

PlurJ  2.  esse'tis 

3- 

es'set 

3.  es'sent 

Sing. 


356.  The  three  great  distinctions  of  time  2X^  present^  past,  3x16.  future. 
All  tenses  referring  to  present  or  future  time  are  called  primary  tenses,  and 
those  referring  to  past  time  are  called  secondary  tenses.  Now  it  is  a  very 
common  law  of  language  that  in  a  complex  sentence  the  tense  in  the  de- 
pendent clause  should  be. of  the  same  kind  as  the  tense  in  the  principal 
clause.  In  the  sentence  He  says  that  he  is  coming,  the  principal  verb,  says, 
is  present,  that  is,  is  in  a  primary  tense ;  and  is  coming,  in  the  dependent 
clause,  is  naturally  also  primary.  If  I  change  he  says  to  he  said,  —  in  other 
words,  if  I  make  the  principal  verb  secondary  in  character,  —  I  feel  it 
natural  to  change  the  verb  in  the  dependent  clause  also,  and  I  say,  He  said 
that  he  was  coming.  This  following  of  a  tense  by  another  of  the  same  kind 
is  called  tense  sequence,  from  sequi,  "  to  follow." 

In  Latin  the  law  of  tense  sequence  is  obeyed  with  considerable 
regularity,  especially  when  an  indicative  in  the  principal  clause  is 
followed  by  a  subjunctive  in  the  dependent  clause.  Then  a  primary 
tense  of  the  indicative  is  followed  by  a  primary  tense  of  the  subjunc- 
tive, and  a  secondary  tense  of  the  indicative  is  followed  by  a  second- 
ary tense  of  the  subjunctive.    Learn  the  following  table : 


357. 


Table  for  Sequence  of  Tenses 


> 

I 

> 
z 

8 

eg 

Principal  Verb  in  the 
Indicative 

Dependent  Verbs  in  the  Subjunctive 

Incomplete  or  Con- 
timimg  Action 

Completed  Action 

Present 

Future 

Future  perfect 

Present 

Perfect 

Imperfect 

Perfect 
Pluperfect 

Imperfect 

Pluperfect 

SEQUENCE  OF  TENSES  1 55 

358.  Rri  1  .   Sequence  of  Tenses.   Primary  tenses  are  followed 
by  primary  tenses  and  secondary  by  secondary. 

359.  EXAMPLES 

I .   Primary  tenses  in  principal  and  dependent  clauses : 


Mittit 

Mittet   \  homines  ut  agr5s  vastent 


MiseritJ 

{sends  'X  ^ that  they  may^ 

will  send  \  men  \  in  order  to        \  lay  waste  the  fields 

will  have  sent]  ^to  J 

II.  Secondary  tenses  in  principal  and  dependent  clauses : 

MittSbatI 

Misit        I  homines  ut  agr5s  vastarent 

MIserat 


{was  sending     "| 
sent  ox  has  sent  Kmen^ 
had  sent  J 


'that  they  might'\ 
in  order  to  \lay  waste  the  fields 


to 


360.  EXERCISES 

rdQcerent,  mitterent,  vid€rent  audirent, 
I.  \  enerant  ut-^  ,  . 

Lducerentur,  mitterentur,  viderentur,  audlrentur. 


capergtur,  traderetur,  videretur, 
necaretur,  raperetur,  resisteret. 


I.  Kugiebat  ne-j 

-,.  .  ._        .    rdlcerent,  audirent,  venlrent, 

3.  Misit  nuntios  qui   \  ,  .  .,.        , 

tnarrarent,  audlrentur,  m  concilio  sed€renL 

4.  Castramunlveruntrses€  defenderent,  impetum  sustinerent, 

qu6  facilius         Ihostis  vincerent,  salutem  peterent. 

II.  I.  Caesar  encouraged  the  soldiers  in  order  that  they  might  fight 
more  bravely.  2.  The  Helvetii  left  their  homes  to  wage  war.  3.  The 
scouts  set  out  at  once  lest  they  should  be  captured  by  the  Germans. 
4.  Caesar  inflicted  punishment  on  them  in  order  that  the  others  might 
be  more  terrified.  5.  He  sent  messengers  to  Rome  to  announce  the 
victory. 


156     PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 


LESSON  LXIV 

THE  PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 
SUBSTANTIVE  CLAUSES  OF  PURPOSE. 

361.  The  perfect  and  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  active  are  inflected 
as  follows : 

CONJ.  I  CONJ.  II  CONJ.   Ill  CONJ.  IV 

Perfect  Subjunctive  Active 
singular 


I. 

2. 
3. 

amaVerim 

ama'veris 

amaVerit 

monu'erim 

monu'eris 

monu'erit 

re'xerim 
re'xeris 
re'xerit 

PLURAL 

ce'perim. 

ce'peris 

ce'perit 

audi'verim 
audi'veris 
audl'verit 

I. 
2. 
3. 

amave'rimus 

amave'ritis 

ama'verint 

monue'rimus 

monue'ritis 

monu'erint 

rexe'rimus 

rexe'ritis 

re'xerint 

cepe'rimus 

cepe'ritis 

ce'perint 

audlve'rimus 

audive'ritis 

audi'verint 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive 

Active 

SINGULAR 

I. 

2. 

3- 

amavis'sem 

amavis'ses 

amavis'set 

monuis'sem 

monuis'ses 

monuis'set 

rexis'sem 

rexis'ses 

rexis'set 

PLURAL 

cepis'sem 

cepis'ses 

cepis'set 

audivis'sem 

audivis'ses 

audlvis'set 

I. 

2. 
3. 

amavisse'mus 

amavisse'tis 

amavis'sent 

monuisse'mus 

monuisse'tis 

monuis'sent 

rexisse'mus 

rexisse'tis 

rexis'sent 

cepisse'mus 

cepisse'tis 

cepis'sent 

audivisse'mus 
audi  visse 'tis 
audlvis'sent 

a.  Observe  that  these  two  tenses,  like  the  corresponding  ones  in  the 
indicative,  are  formed  from  the  perfect  stem. 

b.  Observe  that  the  perfect  subjunctive  active  is  like  the  future  perfect 
indicative  active,  excepting  that  the  first  person  singular  ends  in  -m  and 
not  in  -0. 

c.  Observe  that  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  active  may  be  formed  by 
adding  -issem,  -isses,  etc.  to  the  perfect  stem. 

^.  In  a  similar  way  inflect  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  active 
of  euro,  iubeo,  sumo,  iacio,  munio. 


PERFECT  AND  PLUPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE      157 


362.  The  passive  of  the  perfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  combining 
the  perfect  passive  participle  with  slm,  the  present  subjunctive  of  sum. 


CONJ.  I 


ama  tus  sun 
ama'lus  sis 
ama'tus  sit 


1 .  ama  ti  sunus 

2.  ama'ti  sitis 

3.  ama'ti  sint 


CONJ.  II  CONJ.  Ill 

Perrbct  Subjunctive  Passive 
singular 
mo'nitus  sim      rec'tus  slm      cap'tus  aim 
mo'nitus  sis        rec'tus  sis        cap'tus  sis 
mo'nitus  sit        rec'tus  sit       cap'tus  sit 


mo'niti  simus 
mo'niti  sitis 
mo'niti  sint 


PLURAL 

rec'ti  simus 
rec'ti  sitis 
rec'ti  sint 


cap'ti  sitis 
cap'ti  sint 


CONJ.  IV 


audi'tus  sim 
audl'tus  sis 
audi'tus  sit 


audi'ti  simus 
audl'ti  sitis 
audi'ti  sint 


363.  The  passive  of  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  is  formed  by  com- 
bining the  perfect  passive  participle  with  essem,  the  imperfect  sub- 
junctive of  sum. 

CONJ.  I  CONJ.  II  CONJ.  Ill  CONJ.  IV 

Pluperfect  Subjunctive  Passive 
singular 

1.  amatusessem   monitusessem   rectus essem   captusessem    audltusessem 

2.  amatus  esses     monitus  esses     rectus  esses     captus  esses     auditus  esses 

3.  amatus  esset     monitus  esset     rectus  esset     captus  esset     auditus  esset 

PLURAL 

1.  amatiessemns  moniti essSmus  recdessemus  captiessemus  auditi essemus 

2.  amatiessetis    moniti  essetis     recti  essetis     captiessetis     auditi  essetis 

3.  amatiessent     moniti  essent     recti  essent     captiessent     auditi  essent 

a.  In  a  similar  way  inflect  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  passive 
of  ciir5,  iubeS,  8ilm5,  iaciO,  miini5. 

364.  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  of  the  irregular  verb 
sum  are  inflected  as  follows : 


Perfect 
fu'erim  fue'rimus 

fu'eris  fue'ritis 

fu'erit  fu'erint 


Pluperfect 
fuis'sem  fuiss^'mus 

fuis'sSs  fuisse'tis 

fuis'set  fuis'sent 


158  SUBSTANTIVE  CLAUSES  OF  PURPOSE 

365.  A  substantive  clause  is  a  clause  used  like  a  noun,  as, 

That  the  fnen  are  afraid  is  clear  enough  (clause  as  subject) 
He  ordered  them  to  call  on  him  (clause  as  object) 

We  have  already  had  many  instances  of  infinitive  clauses  used  in  this 
way  (cf.  §  213),  and  have  noted  the  similarity  between  Latin  and  English 
usage  in  this  respect.  But  the  Latin  often  uses  the  subjunctive  in  sub- 
stantive clauses,  and  this  marks  an  important  difference  between  the  two 
languages. 

366.  Rule.  Substantive  Clauses  of  Purpose.  A  substantive 
clause  of  purpose  with  the  subjunctive  is  used  as  the  object  of 
verbs  of  commanding,  urging,  asking,  persuading,  or  advising,  where 
in  English  we  should  usually  have  the  infinitive. 

EXAMPLES 

1 .  The  general  ordered  the  soldiers      Imperator    militibus    imperavit  ut 

to  run  currerent 

2.  He  urged  them  to  resist  bravely      Hortatus  est  ut  fortiter  resisterent 

3.  He  asked  them  to  give  the  chil-      Petivit  ut  liberis  cibum  darent 

drefi  food 

4.  He  will  persuade  us  7iot  to  set      Nobis  persuadebit  ne  proficiscamur 

out 

5.  He  advises  us  to  remaiji  at  home      Monet  ut  domi  maneamus 

a.  The  object  clauses  following  these  verbs  all  express  the  purpose  or 
will  of  the  principal  subject  that  something  be  done  or  not  done.   (Cf.  §  348.) 

367.  The  following  verbs  are  used  with  object  clauses  of  purpose. 
Learn  the  list  and  the  principal  parts  of  the  new  ones. 

hortor,  urge  peto,  quaero,  rogo,  ask,  seek 

impero,  order  (with  the  dative  of  the  persuadeo,  perstiade  (with  the  same 
person  ordered  and  a  subjunctive  construction  as  impero) 

clause  of  the  thifig  ordered  done)  postulo,  demaftd,  require 

moneo,  advise  suadeo,  advise  (cf.  persuadeo) 

N.B.  Remember  that  iubeo,  order,  takes  the  infinitive  as  in  English 
(Cf.  §213. 1.)    Compare  the  sentences 

Iubeo  eum  venire,  /  order  him  to  come 

Impero  ei  ut  veniat,  I  give  orders  to  him  that  he  is  to  come 


SUBSTANTIVE  CLAUSES  OF  PURPOSE 


159 


We  ordinarily  translate  both  of  these  sentences  like  the  first,  but  the  diflfer- 
riice  in  meaning  between  iubeo  and  imperd  in  the  Latin  requires  the  infinitive 
ill  the  one  case  and  the  subjunctive  in  the  other. 

368.  EXERCISES 

I.  1.  Petit  atque  hortStur  ut  ipse  dicat.  2.  Caesar  Helvetiis  impe- 
lavit  ne  per  provinciam  iter  facerent.  3.  Caesar  non  iussit  Helveti6s 
per  provinciam  iter  facere.  4.  Ille  civibus  persuasit  ut  de  finibus  suis 
discederent.    5.  Caesar  principes  monebit  ne  proelium  committant. 

6.  Postulavit  ne  cum  Helvetiis  aut  cum  eorum  sociis  bellum  gererent. 

7.  Ab  iis  quaesivi  ne  proficiscerentur.   8.  lis  persuadere  non  potui  ut 
dom!  manerent. 

II.  I .  Who  ordered  Caesar  to  make  the  march  ?  (  Write  this  sentena 
both  with  imperO  and  with  iubed.)  2.  The  faithless  scouts  persuaded 
him  to  set  out  at  daybreak.  3.  They  will  ask  him  not  to  inflict  punish- 
ment. 4.  He  demanded  that  they  come  to  the  camp.  5.  He  advised 
them  to  tell  everything  (omnia). 

Note.  Do  not  forget  that  the  English  infinitive  expressing  purpose  must 
be  rendered  by  a  Latin  subjunctive.   Review  §  352. 


LEGIO  ITER  FACIT 


l6o      SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  VERBS  OF  FEARING 

LESSON  LXV 
THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  POSSUM  •  VERBS  OF  FEARING 

369.  Learn  the  subjunctive  of  possum  (§  495),  and  note  especially 
the  position  of  the  accent. 

370.  Subjunctive  after  Verbs  of  Fearing.  We  have  learned  that 
what  we  want  done  or  not  done  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  a  sub- 
junctive clause  of  purpose.  In  this  class  belong  also  clauses  after 
verbs  of  fearing,  for  we  fear  either  that  something  will  happen  or  that 
it  will  not,  and  we  either  want  it  to  happen  or  we  do  not.  If  we  want 
a  thing  to  happen  and  fear  that  it  will  not,  the  purpose  clause  is  in- 
troduced by  ut.  If  we  do  not  want  it  to  happen  and  fear  that  it 
will,  ne  is  used.  Owing  to  a  difference  between  the  English  and  Latin 
idiom  we  translate  ut  after  a  verb  of  fearing  by  that  not,  and  ne  by 
that  or  lest. 

371.  EXAMPLES 

timeo        ^       fveniat 
timebo       j^utJ 
timuero     J       [venerit 

I  fear,  shall  fear,  shall  have  feared,  that  he  will  not  come, 
has  not  come 

timebam  'j       fveniret 
timui         lut^ 
timueram  J       [  venisset 

/  was  fearing,  feared,  had  feared,  that  he  would  not  come, 
had  not  come 

The  same  examples  with  ne  instead  of  ut  would  be  translated  I  fear 
that  or  lest  he  will  come,  has  come,  etc. 

372.  Rule.  Subjunctive  after  Verbs  of  Fearing.  Verbs  of  fear- 
ing are  followed  by  a  substantive  clause  of  purpose  introduced 
by  ut  {that  not)  or  ne  (that  or  lest). 


THE  PARTICIPLES 


l6l 


373.  EXERCISES 

I.  1.  Caesar  verCbatur  ut  supplicium  captivOrum  Gallls  plac€ret 
2.  ROmani  ipsi  magnopere  verebantur  ne  Helvetii  iter  per  pr5vin- 
ciam  facerent.  3.  Timebant  ut  satis  rei  frumentariae  mitti  posset 
4.  Vereor  ut  hostium  impetum  sustinere  possim.  5.  Timuit  ne  imf)e- 
dimenta  ab  hostibus  capta  essent.  6.  Caesar  numquam  timuit  ne 
legi6n€s  vincerentur.    7.  Legiones  pugnare  non  timuerunt.* 

II.  I.  We  fear  that  they  are  not  coming.  2.  We  fear  lest  they  are 
coming.  3.  We  feared  that  they  had  come.  4.  We  feared  that  they 
had  not  come.  5.  They  feared  greatiy  that  the  camp  could  not  be 
defended.    6.  Almost  all  feared  *  to  leave  the  camp. 


LESSON  LXVI 


THE  PARTICIPLES 
374.  The  Latin  verb  has  the  following  Participles :  * 

CONJ.  I  CONJ.  II  CONJ.  Ill 


CONJ.  IV 


ACTIVE 

famana 
Prrsbnt    < 

monens 

regens 

capiens 

audiens 

^  loving 

advising 

ruling 

taking 

hearing 

'  amatums 

monitums 

recturus 

capturus 

auditurus 

il   rURK        • 

about  to 

about  to 

about  to 

about  to 

about  to 

love 

advise 

rule 

take 

hear 

PASSIVE 

amatus 

monitus 

rectus 

captns 

audltus 

Perfect    « 

loved^hav-  advised,  hav- 

ruled, hav-  taken,  hav- 

heard, hav- 

ing been 

ing  been 

ing  been 

ing  been 

ing  been 

loved 

advised 

ruled 

taken 

heard 

amandns 

monendos 

regendns 

capiendoa 

audiendns 

Future*    - 

to  be 

to  be 

to  be 

to  be 

to  be 

loved 

advised 

ruled 

taken 

heard 

^  distinguish  between  what  one  is  afraid  to  do  (complementary  infinitive 
as  here)  and  what  one  is  afraid  will  take  plcue  or  has  taken  place  (substantive 
cUuse  with  the  subjunctive).  «  Review  §  203.  ■  The  future  passive  par- 
ticiple is  often  called  the  gerundive. 


l62 


THE  PARTICIPLES 


a.  The  present  active  and  future  passive  participles  are  formed  from  the 
present  stem,  and  the  future  active  and  perfect  passive  participles  are 
formed  from  the  participial  stem. 

b.  The  present  active  participle  is  formed  by  adding  -ns  to  the  present 
stem.  In  -io  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation,  and  in  the  fourth  conjugation, 
the  stem  is  modified  by  the  addition  of  -e-,  as  capi-e-ns,  audi-e-ns.  It  is 
declined  like  an  adjective  of  one  ending  of  the  third  declension.  (Cf.  §  256.) 

amans,  lovifig 
Base  amant-  Stem  amanti- 

SiNGULAR  Plural 


MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom.  amans 

amans 

amantes 

amantia 

Gen.    amantis 

amantis 

amantium 

amantium 

Dat.     amanti 

amanti 

amantibus 

amantibus 

Ace.     amantem 

amans 

amantis  or  -es 

amantia 

Abl.     amanti  ^r-€ 

amanti  or  -e 

amantibus 

amantibus 

(i)  When  used  as  an  adjective  the  ablative  singular  ends  in  -i ;  when  used 
as  a  participle  or  as  a  substantive,  in  -e. 

(2)  In  a  similar  way  decline  monens,  regens,  capiens,  audiens. 

c.  The  future  active  participle  is  formed  by  adding  -iirus  to  the  base  of 
the  participial  stem.  We  have  already  met  this  form  combined  with  esse 
to  produce  the  future  active  infinitive.   (Cf.  §  206.) 

d.  For  the  perfect  passive  participle  see  §  201.  The  future  passive 
participle  or  gerundive  is  formed  by  adding  -ndus  to  the  present  stem. 

e.  All  participles  in  -us  are  declined  like  bonus. 

f.  Participles  agree  with  nouns  or  pronouns  like  adjectives. 

g.  Give  all  the  participles  of  the  following  verbs  :  ciiro,  iubeo,  sumo,  iacio, 


375.  Participles  of  Deponent  Verbs.  Deponent  verbs  have  the 
participles  of  the  active  voice  as  well  as  of  the  passive;  consequently 
every  deponent  verb  has  four  participles,  as, 

Pres.  Act.    hortans,  urging 

Fut.  Act.     hortatiirus,  about  to  urge 

Perf.  Pass,  (in  form)        hortatus,  having  urged 

Fut.  Pass.  {Gerundive)  hortandus,  to  be  urged 


THE  PARTICIPLES  1 63 

a.  Observe  that  the  perfect  participle  of  deponent  verbs  is  passive  in 
form  but  active  in  meaning.  No  other  verbs  have  a  perfect  active  par- 
ticiple. On  the  other  hand,  the  future  passive  participle  of  deponent  verbs 
is  passive  in  meaning  as  in  other  verbs. 

b.  Give  the  participles  of  c5nor,  vereor,  sequor,  patior,  partior. 

376.  Tenses  of  the  Participle.   The  tenses  express  time  as  follows: 

1 .  The  present  active  participle  corresponds  to  the  English  present 
active  participle  in  -ing,  but  can  be  used  only  of  an  action  occurring 
at  the  same  time  as  the  action  of  the  main  verb ;  as,  militgs  insequentgs 
c6p6runt  multOs,  the  soldiers,  while  pursuing,  captured  many.  Here 
the  pursuing  and  the  capturing  are  going  on  together. 

2.  The  perfect  participle  (excepting  of  deponents)  is  regularly  pas- 
sive and  corresponds  to  the  English  past  participle  with  or  without 
the  auxiliary  having  been ;  as,  auditus,  heard  or  having  been  heard. 

3.  The  future  active  participle,  translated  about  to,  etc,  denotes 
time  after  the  action  of  the  main  verb. 

377.  Review  §§  203,  204,  and  note  the  following  model  sentences: 

1 .  Milites  currentes  erant  defessi,  the  soldiers  who  were  running  (lit. 
running)  were  weary. 

2.  Caesar  profectiirus  R5inam  n5n  exspectavit,  Ccesar,  when  about  to  set 

out  (lit.  about  to  set  out)  for  Rome,  did  not  wait. 

3.  Oppidom  captum  vidimus,  we  saw  the  town  which  had  been  cap- 
tured (lit.  captured  town). 

4.  Imperitor  triduttm  moratus  profectus  est,  the  general,  since  [when,  or 
after)  he  had  delayed  (lit.  the  general,  having  delayed)  three  days,  set  out. 

5.  MnitSs  victi  terga  n6n  vertenmt,  the  soldiers,  though  they  were 
conquered  (lit  the  soldiers  conquered),  did  not  retreat. 

In  each  of  these  sentences  the  literal  translation  of  the  participle  is  given 
in  parentheses.  We  note,  however,  that  its  proper  translation  usually  re- 
quires a  clause  banning  with  some  conjunction  (when,  since,  after,  though, 
etc.),  or  a  relative  clause.  Consider,  in  each  case,  what  translation  will 
best  bring  out  the  thought  and  do  not,  as  a  rule,  translate  the  participle 
literally. 


I64     THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS  VOLO,  NOLO,  MALO 

378.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Puer  timens  ne  capiatur  fugit.  2.  Aquila  Ira  commota  avis 
reliquas  interficere  conata  erat.  3.  Milites  ab  hostibus  press!  tela  iacere 
non  potuerunt.  4.  Caesar  decimam  legionem  laudaturus  ad  primum 
agmen  progressus  est.  5.  Imperator  hortatus  equites  ut  fortiter  pug- 
narent  signum  proelio  dedit.  6.  Milites  hostis  octo  milia  passuum  inse- 
cuti  multis  cum  captivis  ad  castra  reverterunt.  7.  Sol  oriens  multos 
interfectos  vidit  8.  RomanI  consilium,  audax  suspicati  barbaris  sese 
non  commiserunt.   9.  Navis  e  porta  egressa  nullo  in  periculo  erat 

11.^  I.  The  army  was  in  very  great  danger  while  marching  through 
the  enemy's  country.  2.  Frightened  by  the  length  of  the  way,  they 
longed  for  home.  3.  When  the  scouts  were  about  to  set  out,  they 
heard  the  shouts  of  victory.  4.  When  we  had  delayed  many  days,  we 
set  fire  to  the  buildings  and  departed.  5.  While  living  at  Rome  I 
heard  orators  much  better  than  these.  6.  The  soldiers  who  are  fight- 
ing across  the  river  are  no  braver  than  we. 


LESSON   LXVII 

THE  IRREGULAR  VERBS  VOLO,  NOLO,  MALO  •  THE  ABLATIVE 
WITH  A  PARTICIPLE,  OR  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE 

379.  Learn  the  principal  parts  and  conjugation  of  volo,  wish  ;  nol5 
(ne  +  volo),  be  unwilling ;  malo  (magis  +  volo),  be  more  willing,  prefer 
(§497).  Note  the  irregularities  in  the  present  indicative,  subjunctive, 
and  infinitive,  and  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive.    (Cf.  §  354.) 

a.  These  verbs  are  usually  followed  by  the  infinitive  with  or  without  a 
subject  accusative ;  as,  volunt  venire,  they  wish  to  come;  volunt  amicos 
venire,  they  wish  their  friends  to  come.    The  English  usage  is  the  same.^ 

380.  Observe  the  following  sentences : 

I.  Magistro  laudante  omnes  pueri  diligenter  lab5rant,  with  the  teacher 
praising,  or  since  the  teacher  praises,  or  the  teacher  praising,  all  the  boys 
labor  diligently. 

1  In  this  exercise  use  participles  for  the  subordinate  clauses.  *  Sometimes 
the  subjunctive  of  purpose  is  used  after  these  verbs.    (See  §  366.) 


THE  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE  165 

2.  Caesare  ducente  n€m6  prtgredi  timet,  with  Casar  leadings  or  when 
Casar  leads,  or  if  Casar  leads,  or  Casar  leadings  no  one  fears  to  advance. 

3.  Hla  rebus  cognitis  milites  fugerunt,  when  this  was  known,  or  since 
this  was  known,  or  these  things  having  been  learned,  the  soldiers  fled. 

4.  ProeliS  commissd  multi  vulnerati  sunt,  after  the  battle  had  begun,  or 
when  the  battle  had  begun,  or  the  battle  having  been  joined,  many  were 
wounded. 

a.  One  of  the  fundamental  ablative  relations  is  expressed  in  English  by 
the  preposition  with  (cf.  §  50).  In  each  of  the  sentences  above  we  have  a 
noun  and  a  participle  in  agreement  in  the  ablative,  and  the  translation  shows 
that  in  each  instance  the  ablative  expresses  attendant  circumstance.  For 
example,  in  the  first  sentence  the  circumstance  attending  or  accompanying 
the  diligent  labor  of  the  boys  is  the  praise  of  the  teacher.  This  is  clearly  a 
with  relation,  and  the  ablative  is  the  case  to  use. 

b.  We  observe,  further,  that  the  ablative  and  its  participle  are  absolutely 
independent  grammatically  of  the  rest  of  the  sentence.  If  we  were  to  ex- 
press the  thought  in  English  in  a  similar  way,  we  should  use  the  nominative 
independent  or  absolute.  In  Latin  the  construction  is  called  the  Ablative 
Absolute,  or  the  Ablative  wjth  a  Participle.  This  form  of  expression  is  ex- 
ceedingly common  in  Latin,  but  rather  rare  in  English,  so  we  must  not,  as  a 
rale,  employ  the  English  absolute  construction  to  translate  the  ablative  abso- 
lute. The  attendant  circumstance  may  be  one  of  time  (when  or  after),  or  one 
of  cause  (since),  or  one  of  concession  (though),  or  one  of  condition  (if).  In 
each  case  try  to  discover  the  precise  relation,  and  translate  the  ablative  and 
its  participle  by  a  clause  which  will  best  express  the  thought 

381.  Rule.  Ablative  Absolute.  The  ablative  of  a  noun  or  pro- 
noun with  a  present  or  perfect  participle  in  agreement  is  used 
to  express  attendant  circumstance. 

Note  i.  The  verb  sum  has  no  present  participle.  In  consequence  we  often 
find  two  nouns  or  a  noun  and  an  adjective  in  the  ablative  absolute  with  no 
participle  expressed ;  as,  t8  duce,  you  (being)  leader,  with  you  as  leader;  patre 
infinnS,  my  father  (being)  weak. 

Note  2.  Be  very  careful  not  to  put  in  the  ablative  absolute  a  noun  and 
participle  that  form  the  subject  or  object  of  a  sentence.   Compare 

a.  7^e  Gauls,  having  been  conquered  by  Casar,  returned  home 

b.  The  Gauls  having  been  conquered  by  Ctesar,  the  army  returned  M0me 

In  a  the  subject  is  TTke  Gauls  having  been  conquered  by  Casar^  and  we  translate 
OalU  I  Caesare  ▼let!  domam  r«vMtiraiit 


1 66  EXERCISES 

In  ^  the  subject  is  the  army.  The  Gauls  having  been  conquered  by  Ccesar 
is  nominative  absolute  in  English,  which  requires  the  ablative  absolute  in 
Latin,  and  we  translate, 

Gallis  a  Caesare  victis  exercitus  domum  revertit 

Note  3.  The  fact  that  only  deponent  verbs  have  a  perfect  active  participle 
(cf-  §  375-  a)  often  compels  a  change  of  voice  when  translating  from  one  lan- 
guage to  the  other.  For  example,  we  can  translate  Ccesar  having  encouraged 
the  legions  just  as  it  stands,  because  hortor  is  a  deponent  verb.  But  if  we  wish 
to  say  Ccesar  having  conquered  the  Gauls,  we  have  to  change  the  voice  of  the 
participle  to  the  passive  because  vinco  is  not  deponent,  and  say,  the  Gauls 
having  been  conquered  by  Ccesar  (see  translation  above). 

382.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Mavis,  non  vis,  vultis,  nolumus.  2.  Ut  nolit,  ut  vellemus,  ut 
malit.  3.  Noli,  velle,  noluisse,  malle.  4.  Vult,  mavultis,  ut  nollet, 
nolite.  5.  Sole  oriente,  aves  cantare  inceperunt.  6.  Clamoribus  audi- 
tis,  barbari  progredi  reciisabant.  7.  Caesare  legiones  hortato,  milites 
paulo  fortius  pugnaverunt.  8.  His  rebus  cognitis,  Helvetii  finitimis 
persuaserunt  ut  secum  iter  facerent.  9.  Laboribus  confectis,  milites 
a  Caesare  quaerebant  ut  sibi  praemia  daret.  10.  Concilio  convocato, 
principes  ita  responderunt.  1 1 .  Dux  pluris  dies  in  Helvetiorum  finibus 
morans  multos  vicos  incendit.  12.  Magnitudine  Germanorum  cognita, 
quidam  ex  Romanis  timebant.  13.  Mercatoribus  rogatis,  Caesar  nihilo 
plus  reperire  potuit. 

II.  I.  He  was  unwilling,  lest  they  prefer,  they  have  wished.  2.  You 
prefer,  that  they  might  be  unwilling,  they  wish.  3.  We  wish,  they 
had  preferred,  that  he  may  prefer.  4.  Caesar,  when  he  heard  the  rumor 
{the  rumor  having  been  heard),  commanded  (imperare)  the  legions  to 
advance  more  quickly.  5.  Since  Caesar  was  leader,  the  men  were 
willing  to  make  the  journey.  6.  A  few,  terrified  ^  by  the  reports  which 
they  had  heard,  preferred  to  remain  at  home.  7.  After  these  had  been 
left  behind,  the  rest  hastened  as  quickly  as  possible.  8.  After  Caesar 
had  undertaken  the  business  ( Ccesar^  the  business  having  been  under- 
taken), he  was  unwilling  to  delay  longer.^ 

1  Would  the  ablative  absolute  be  correct  here  ?        *  Not  longius.    Why  "i 


THE  IRREGULAR  VERB  FIO  167 

LESSON  LXVIII 
THE  IRREGULAR  VERB  FIO  •  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  RESULT 

383.  The  verb  fiO,  be  madCy  happen^  serves  as  the  passive  of  faciO, 
make,  in  the  present  system.  The  rest  of  the  verb  is  formed  regu- 
larly from  faciO.  Learn  the  principal  parts  and  conjugation  (§  500). 
Observe  that  the  i  is  long  except  before  -«r  and  in  fit. 

a.  The  compounds  of  faciS  with  prepositions  usually  form  the  passive 
regularly,  as, 

Active      c5nfici5,  c5nficere,  cSnfeci,  cOnfectus 
Passive    conficior,  confici,  confectus  sum 

384.  Observe  the  following  sentences : 

1 .  Terror  crat  tantus  ut  omnes  fugerent,  the  terror  was  so  great  that 
all  fled. 

2.  Terror  erat  tantus  ut  n6n  facile  milites  sese  reciperent,  the  terror 
was  so  great  that  the  soldiers  did  not  easily  recover  themselves. 

3.  Terror  fecit  ut  omnes  fugerent,  terror  caused  all  to  flee  (lit  mcuie 
that  all  fled). 

a.  Each  of  these  sentences  is  complex,  containing  a  principal  clause  and 
a  subordinate  clause. 

b.  The  principal  clause  names  a  cause  and  the  subordinate  clause  states 
the  consequence  or  result  of  this  cause. 

c.  The  subordinate  clause  has  its  verb  in  the  subjunctive,  though  it  is 
translated  like  an  indicative.  The  construction  is  called  the  subjunctive  of 
consequence  or  result,  and  the  clause  is  called  a  consecutive  or  result  clause. 

//.In  the  last  example  the  clause  of  result  is  the  object  of  the  verb  fJcit 
e.  The  conjunction  introducing  the  consecutive  or  result  clause  is  ut  = 
so  that;  negative,  ut  n6n  =  so  that  not. 

385.  Rule.  Subjunctive  of  Result.  Consecutive  clauses  of  re- 
<".lt  are  introduced  by  ut  or  ut  non  and  have  the  verb  in  the 

b June  live. 

386.  Rule.  Object  clauses  of  result  with  ut  or  ut  ndn  are 
found  after  verbs  of  effecting  or  bringing  about. 

387.  Purpose  and  Result  Clauses  Compared.  There  is  great  simi- 
larity in  the  expression  of  purpose  and  of  result  in  Latin.     If 


1 68  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  RESULT 

the  sentence  is  affirmative,  both  purpose  and  result  clauses  may  be 
introduced  by  ut ;  but  if  the  sentence  is  negative,  the  purpose  clause 
has  ne  and  the  result  clause  ut  nOn.  Result  clauses  are  often  preceded 
in  the  main  clause  by  such  words  as  tarn,  ita,  sic  (so)^  and  these 
serve  to  point  them  out.    Compare 

a.  Tarn  graviter  vulneratus  est      /le  was  so  severely  wounded  that  he 

ut  caperetur  was  captured 

b.  Graviter    vulneratus    est    ut      He  was  severely  wounded  in  order 

caperetur  that  he  might  be  captured 

Which  sentence  contains  a  result  clause,  and  how  is  it  pointed  out  ? 

388.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Fit,  fiet,  ut  flat,  fiebamus.  2.  Fio,  fies,  ut  fierent,  fieri,  fiunt. 
3.  Fietis,  ut  fiamus,  fis,  fiemus.  4.  Milites  erant  tam  tardi  ut  ante 
noctem  in  castra  non  pervenirent.  5.  Sol  facitut  omnia  sint  pulchra. 
6.  Eius  modi  pericula  erant  ut  nemo  proficisci  vellet.  7.  Equites  hos- 
tium  cum  equitatu  nostro  in  itinere  contenderunt,  ita  tamen  ^  ut  nostri 
omnibus  in  partibus  superiores  essent.  8.  Virtus  militum  nostrorum 
fecit  ut  hostes  ne  unum  quidem  ^  impetum  sustinerent.  9.  Homines 
erant  tam  audaces  ut  nullo  modo  contineri  possent.  10.  Spatium  erat 
tam  parvum  ut  milites  tela  iacere  non  facile  possent.  11.  Hoc  proelio 
facto  barbari  ita  perterriti  sunt  ut  ab  ultimis  gentibus  legati  ad 
Caesarem  mitterentur.  12.  Hoc  proelium  factum  est  ne  legati  ad 
Caesarem  mitterentur. 

II.  I.  It  will  happen,  they  were  being  made,  that  it  may  happen. 
2.  It  happens,  he  will  be  made,  to  happen.  3.  They  are  made,  we  were 
being  made,  lest  it  happen.  4.  The  soldiers  are  so  brave  that  they 
conquer.    5.  The  soldiers  are  brave  in  order  that  they  may  conquer. 

6.  The  fortification  was  made  so  strong  that  it  could  not  be  taken. 

7.  The  fortification  was  made  strong  in  order  that  it  might  not  be 
taken.  8.  After  the  town  was  taken,*  the  townsmen  feared  that  they 
would  be  made  slaves.  9.  What  state  is  so  weak  that  it  is  unwilling 
to  defend  itself  ? 

1  ita  tamen,  with  such  a  result  however.  "^  vtA  .  .  .  quidem,  not  even.  The 
emphatic  word  is  placed  between.         ^  Ablative  absolute. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  CHARACTERISTIC      .169 


LLbbUN    LXIX 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OF  CHARACTERISTIC  OR  DESCRIPTION 
THE  PREDICATE  ACCUSATIVE 

389.  Akin  to  the  subjunctive  of  consequence  or  result  is  the  use 
of  the  subjunctive  in  clauses  of  characteristic  or  description. 

This  construction  is  illustrated  in  the  following  sentences : 

1 .  Quis  est  qui  suam  domum  n5n  amet  ?  who  is  there  who  does  not  love 
his  own  home  ? 

2.  Erant  qui  hoc  facere  ndllent,  there  were  {some)  who  were  unwilling 
to  do  this. 

3.  Tu  non  is  es  qui  amicos  tradas,  j^«  are  not  such  a  one  as  to,  ox  you 
are  not  the  man  to,  betray  your  friends. 

4.  Nihil  yided  quod  timeam,  /  see  nothing  to  fear  (nothing  of  such  a 
character  as  to  fear  it). 

a.  Each  of  these  examples  contains  a  descriptive  relative  clause  which 
tells  what  kind  of  a  person  or  thing  the  antecedent  is.  To  express  this 
thought  the  subjunctive  is  used.  A  relative  clause  that  merely  states  a  fact 
and  does  not  describe  the  antecedent  uses  the  indicative.  Compare  the 
sentences 

Casar  is  the  man  who  is  leading  us,  Caesar  est  is  qui  n5s  ducit 
(mere  statement  of  fact,  no  description,  with  the  indicative) 

Casar  is  the  man  to  lead  us,  Caesar  est  is  qui  n5s  ducat  (descrip- 
tive relative  clause  with  the  subjunctive) 

b.  Observe  that  in  this  construction  a  demonstrative  pronoun  and  a 
relative,  as  is  qui,  are  translated  such  a  one  as  to,  the  man  to. 

r.  In  which  of  the  following  sentences  would  you  use  the  indicative  and 
in  which  the  subjunctive? 

These  are  not  the  men  who  did  this 
These  are  not  the  men  to  do  this 

390.  Rule.  Subjunctive  of  Characteristic.  A  relative  clause 
stvith  the  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  describe  an  antecedent. 

This  is  called  the  subjunctive  of  characteristic  or  description. 


I  70  THE  PREDICATE  ACCUSATIVE 

391.  Observe  the  sentences 

1 .  Romani  Caesarem  consulem  f  ecerunt,  the  Romans  made  CkEsar  consul 

2.  Caesar  consul  a  Romanis  factus  est,  CcBsar  was  made  consul  by  the 

Romans. 

• 

a.  Observe  in  i  that  the  transitive  verb  f ecerunt,  made^  has  two  objects  : 
(I)  the  direct  object,  Caesarem;  (2)  a  second  object,  consulem,  referring 
to  the  same  person  as  the  direct  object  and  completing  the  predicate.  The 
second  accusative  is  called  a  Predicate  Accusative. 

b.  Observe  in  2  that  when  the  verb  is  changed  to  the  passive  both  of 
the  accusatives  become  nominatives,  the  direct  object  becoming  the  subject 
and  the  predicate  accusative  the  predicate  no7ninative. 

392.  Rule.  Two  Accusatives.  Verbs  of  making,  choosing,  calling, 
showing,  and  the  like,  may  take  a  predicate  accusative  along 
with  the  direct  object.  With  the  passive  voice  the  two  accusa- 
tives become  nomiiiatives. 

393.  The  verbs  commonly  found  with  two  accusatives  are 

creo,  creare,  creavi,  creatus,  choose 
appello,  appellare,  appellavi,  appellatus"] 
nomino,  nominare,  nominavi,  nominatus  \call 
voc5,  vocare,  vocavi,  vocatus  J 

facio,  facere,  feci,  factus,  make 

394.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  In  Germaniae  silvis  sunt^  multa  genera  ferarum  quae  reliquis 
in  locis  non  visa  sint.  2.  Erant^  itinera  duo  quibus  Helvetii  domo  dis- 
cedere  possent.  3.  Erat^  manus  nulla,  nullum  oppidum,  nullum  prae- 
sidium  quod  se  armis  defenderet.  4.  Toto  frumento  rapto,  domi  nihil 
erat  quo  mortem  prohibere  possent.  5.  Romani  Galbam  ducem  cre- 
averunt  et  summa  celeritate  profecti  sunt.  6.  Neque  erat^  tantae 
multitudinis  quisquam  qui  morari  vellet.  7.  Germani  non  ii  sunt  qui 
adventum  Caesaris  vereantur.    8.  Consulibus  occisis  erant  qui  ^  vellent 

1  Remember  that  when  the  verb  sum  precedes  its  subject  it  is  translated 
there  is,  there  are,  there  were,  etc.  ^  erant  qui,  there  were  (some)  who.  A' 
wholly  indefinite  antecedent  of  qui  does  not  need  to  be  expressed. 


CONSTRUCTIONS  WITH  THE  CONJUNCTION  CUM    171 

eum  regem  creare.  9.  Pace  facta  erat  nemO  qui  arma  tradere  nOllet 
10.  Inter  Helvetios  quis  erat  qui  nobilior  illo  esset  ? 

II.  I.  The  Romans  called  the  city  Rome.  2.  The  city  was  called 
Rome  by  the  Romans.  3.  The  better  citizens  wished  to  choose  him 
king.  4.  The  brave  soldier  was  not  the  man  to  run.  5.  There  was 
no  one  4o  call  me  friend.  6.  These  are  not  the  men  to^  betray  their 
friends.    7.  There  were  (some)  who  called  him  the  bravest  of  alL 

Eighth  Review,  Lessons  LXI-LXIX,  §§  527-528 


LESSON  LXX 

THE  CONSTRUCTIONS  WITH  THE  CONJUNCTION  CUM 
THE  ABLATIVE  OF  SPECIFICATION 

395.  The  conjunction  cum  has  the  following  meanings  and  con- 
structions : 

cum  TEMPORAL  =  when,  followed  by  the  indicative  or  the 

subjunctive 
cum  CAUSAL  =  since,  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
cum  CONCESSIVE  =  although,  followed  by  the  subjunctive 

As  you  observe,  the  mood  after  cum  is  sometimes  indicative  and 
sometimes  subjunctive.  The  reason  for  this  will  be  made  clear  by  a 
study  of  the  following  sentences : 

1.  Caesarem  vidi  tum  cum  in  Gallii  eram,  /  saw  Casar  at  the  time 
ivhen  I  was  in  Gaul. 

2.  Caesar  in  eds  impetxun  fecit  cum  p&cem  peterent,  Casar  made  an 
lit  tack  upon  them  when  they  were  seeking  peace. 

3.  Hoc  erat  difficile  cum  pauci  sine  vulneribus  essent,  this  was  difficult, 
since  only  a  few  were  without  wounds. 

4.  Cimi  primi  SrdlnSs  fugissent,  tamen  reliqui  fortiter  cOnsistebant, 
though  the  front  ranks  had  fled,  yet  the  rest  bravely  stood  their  ground. 

a.  The  underlying  principle  is  one  already  familiar  to  you  (cf.  §  389.  a\ 
When  the  cum  clause  states  a  fact  and  simply ^.r^.f  the  time  at  which  the 
main  action  took  place,  the  indicative  mood  is  used.  So,  in  the  first  example, 
cum  in  Gallii  eram  fixes  the  time  when  I  saw  Caesar.  « 

*  A  relative  clause  of  characteristic  or  descri]>tion.        *  See  §  389.  b. 


172  THE  ABLATIVE  OF  SPECIFICATION 

b.  On  the  other  hand,  when  the  cum  clause  describes  the  circumstances 
under  which  the  main  act  took  place,  the  subjunctive  mood  is  used.  So,  in 
the  second  example,  the  principal  clause  states  that  Caesar  made  an  attack, 
and  the  cum  clause  describes  the  circumstances  under  which  this  act  occurred. 
The  idea  of  time  is  also  present,  but  it  is  subordinate  to  the  idea  of  descrip- 
tion. Sometimes  the  descriptive  clause  is  one  of  cause  and  we  translate  cum 
by  since  J  sometimes  it  denotes  concession  and  cum  is  translated  although. 

396.  Rule.  Constructions  with  Cwm.  The  conjunction  cum  means 
when,  since,  or  although.  It  is  followed  by  the  subjunctive  unless 
it  means  when  and  its  clause  jixes  the  time  at  which  the  m^ain 
action  took  place. 

Note.  Cum  in  clauses  of  description  with  the  subjunctive  is  much  more 
common  than  its  use  with  the  indicative. 

397.  Note  the  following  sentences : 

1.  Oppidum  erat  parvum  magnitudine  sed  magnum  multitudine  homi- 
num,  the  town  was  small  in  size  but  great  in  population. 

2.  Homo  erat  corpora  infirmus  sed  validus  animo,  the  man  was  weak 
in  body  but  strong  in  courage. 

a.  Observe  that  magnitiidine,  multitudine,  corpora,  and  animo  tell  in 
what  respect  something  is  true.  The  relation  is  one  covered  by  the 
ablative  case,  and  the  construction  is  called  the  ablative  of  specification. 

398.  Rule.  Ablative  of  Specification.  The  ablative  is  used  to 
denote  in  what  respect  something  is  true. 

399.  IDIOMS 

aliquam  certioram  facare,  to  inform  some  one  (lit.  to  make 

some  07ie  more  certain) 
certior  fieri,  to  be  informed  (lit.  to  be  made  more  certain) 
iter  dara,  to  give  a  right  of  way  ^  allow  to  pass 
obsides  inter  se  dara,  to  give  hostages  to  each  other 

400.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Helvetil  cum  patrum  nostrorum  tempore  domo  profecti 
assent,  consulis  exercitum  in  fugam  dederant.  2.  Cum  Caesar  in 
Gralliam  venit,  Helvetil  alios  agros  petebant.  3.  Caesar  cum  in 
citeriore  GalUa  esset,  tamen  de  Helvetiorum  consiliis  certior  flebat. 


THE  GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE       173 

4.  Cum  Helvetii  bell6  clarissimi  essent,  Caesar  iter  per  provinciam 
dare  recusavit.  5.  Legatus  cum  haec  audivisset,  Caesarem  certio- 
rem  fecit.  6.  Cum  principes  inter  se  obsides  darent,  Roman!  bellum 
paraverunt.  7.  Caesar,  cum  id  nuntiatum  esset,  maturat  ab  urbe  pro- 
ficisci.  8.  Ne  virtute  quidem  Galli  erant  pares  Germanis.  9.  Caesar 
neque  corpore  neque  animo  infirmus  erat.  10.  I  Hud  bellum  tum 
incepit  cum  Caesar  fuit  c6nsul. 

Observe  in  each  case  what  mood  follows  cum,  and  try  to  give  the  reasons 
for  its  use.  In  the  third  sentence  the  cum  clause  is  concessive,  in  the  fourth 
and  sixth  causal. 

II.  I.  That  battle  was  fought  at  the  time  when  (tum  cum)  I  was 
at  Rome.  2.  Though  the  horsemen  were  few  in  number,  nevertheless 
they  did  not  retreat.  3.  When  the  camp  had  been  sufficiently  forti- 
fied, the  enemy  returned  home.  4.  Since  the  tribes  are  giving  hostages 
to  each  other,  we  shall  inform  Caesar.  5.  The  Gauls  and  the  Germans 
are  very  unlike  in  language  and  laws. 


LESSON  LXXI 

VOCABULARY  REVIEW  •  THE  GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE 
THE  PREDICATE  GENITIVE 

401.  Review  the  word  lists  in  §§  510,  511. 

402.  The  Gerund.    Suppose  we  had  to  translate  the  sentence 

By  overcoming  the  Gauls  Casar  won  great  glory 

We  can  see  that  overcoming  here  is  a  verbal  noun  corresponding  to 
the  English  infinitive  in  -ing^  and  that  the  thought  calls  for  the  abla- 
tive of  means.  To  translate  this  by  the  Latin  infinitive  would  be 
impossible,  because  the  infinitive  is  indeclinable  and  therefore  has  no 
ablative  case  form.  Latin,  however,  has  another  verbal  noun  of  cor- 
responding meaning,  called  the  gerund,  declined  as  a  neuter  of  the 
second  declension  in  ^&  genitive,  dative,  accusative^  and  ablative  singular^ 
and  thus  supplying  the  cases  that  the  infinitive  lacks.*  Hence,  to 
*  Sometimes,  however,  the  infinitive  is  used  as  an  accusative. 


174 


THE  GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE 


decline  in  Latin  the  verbal  noun  overcoming^  we  should  use  the  infinitive 
for  the  nominative  and  the  gerund  for  the  other  cases,  as  follows: 


JVom. 

Gen. 
Dat. 

Ace. 
Abl. 


f  overcomin£[  \ 
superare-^  ^  ^   mnfinitive 

X^to  overcome] 

superandi,  of  overcoming  ^ 

sw^Qxa.n6.0j  for  overco7nijig 

,  .         Y  Gerund 

superandum,  overcoming 

superando,  by  overcoming  J 


Like  the  infinitive,  the  gerund  governs  the  same  case  as  the  verb  from 
which  it  is  derived.    So  the  sentence  given  above  becomes  in  Latin 

Superando  Gallos  Caesar  magnam  gloriam  reportavit 

403.  The  gerund  ^  is  formed  by  adding  -ndi,  -ndo,  -ndum,  -nd5,  to 

the  present  stem,  which  is  shortened  or  otherwise  changed,  as  shown 

below : 

Paradigm  of  the  Gerund 


CONJ.  I 

amandi 
amando 
amandum 
amandd 


CONJ.  II 

monendi 
monendo 
monendum 
monendo 


CONJ.  Ill 


regendi 
regendo 
regendum 
regendo 


capiendi 
capiend5 
capiendum 
capiendo 


CONJ.  IV 

audiendi 
audiend5 
audiendum 
audiendo 


Give  the  gerund  of  euro,  deleo,  sumo,  iacio,  venio. 

Deponent  verbs  have  the  gerund  of  the  active  voice  (see  §  493).    Give 


Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Abl. 

a. 
b. 
the  gerund  of  conor,  vereor,  sequor,  patior,  partior. 

404.  The  Gerundive.  The  gerundive  is  the  name  given  to  the  future 
passive  participle  (§  374.^)  when  the  participle  approaches  the  mean- 
ing of  a  verbal  noun  and  is  translated  like  a  gerund.  It  is  the  adjective 
corresponding  to  the  gerund.  For  example,  to  translate  the  plan  of 
waging  war,  we  may  use  the  gerund  with  its  direct  object  and  say 
consilium  gerendi  bellum ;  or  we  may  use  the  gerundive  and  say  con- 
silium belli  gerendi,  which  means,  literally,  the  plan  of  the  war  to  be 
waged,  but  which  came  to  have  the  same  force  as  the  gerund  with 
its  object,  and  was  even  preferred  to  it. 

1  The  gerund  is  the  neuter  singular  of  the  future  passive  participle  used 
as  a  noun,  and  has  the  same  formation.    (Cf.  §  374.0'.) 


THE  GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE  175 

405.  Compare  the  following  parallel  uses  of  the  gerund  and  ge- 

I  uiulive : 

Gerund  Gerundive 

I  ,fn.  Spes  faciendi  pacem  Spes  faciendae  pacis 

The  hope  of  making  peace  The  hope  of  making  peace 

l\it.  Locua  iddneus  pugnandd  Locus  iddneus  castris  pSnendia 

A  place  suitable  for  fighting  A  place  suitable  for  pitching  camp 

.  \cc.   Misii  equites  ad  insequendum  Misit  equites  ad  insequendds  hostis 

lie  sent  horsemen  to  pursue  He  sent  horsemen   to  pursue  the 

enemy 

//'/.   Narrand5  fabulas  magister  Narrandis   fabulis   magister   pueris 

pueris  placuit              ^  placuit 

The  teacher  pleased  the  boys  The  teacher  pleased  the  boys  by 

by  telling  stories  telling  stories 

a.  We  observe 

(i)  That  the  gerund  is  a  noun  and  the  gerundive  an  adjective. 

(2)  That  the  gerund,  being  a  noun,  may  stand  alone  or  with  an  object. 

(3)  That  the  gerundive,  being  an  adjective,  is  used  only  in  agreement 
with  a  noun^ 

406.  Rule.  Gerund  and  Gerundive.  I.  The  Gerund  is  a  verbal 
noun  and  is  used  only  in  the  genitive^  dative ^  accusative ^  and 
ablative  singular.  The  constructions  of  these  cases  are  in  general 
the  same  as  those  of  other  nouns. 

2.  The  Gerundive  is  a  verbal  adjective  and  must  be  used 
instead  of  gerund  •\-  object  excepting  in  the  genitive  and  in  the 
ablative  without  a  preposition.  Even  in  these  instances  the 
gerundive  construction  is  more  usual. 

407.  Rule.  Gerund  or  Gerundive  of  Purpose.  The  accusative 
of  the  gerund  or  gerundive  ivith  ad,  or  the  genitive  with  causa  ^ 
(=for  the  sake  of),  is  used  to  express  purpose. 

Gerund  Gerundive 

Ad  audiendum  venenmt  or  Ad  urbem  videndam  venerunt  or 

Audiendi  cauaa  venenmt  Urbia  videndae  causa  venenmt 

Tkey  came  to  hear  They  came  to  see  the  city 

'  caosi  iX'mzy*  follows  the  genitive. 


176  THE  PREDICATE  GENITIVE 

Note.  These  sentences  might,  of  course,  be  written  with  the  subjunctive 
of  purpose,  —  venerunt  ut  audirent ;  venerunt  ut  urbem  viderent.  In  short  expres- 
sions, however,  the  gerund  and  gerundive  of  purpose  are  rather  more  common. 

408.  We  have  learned  that  the  word  denoting  the  owner  or  pos- 
sessor of  something  is  in  the  genitive,  as,  equus  Galbae,  Galba^s  horse. 
If,  now,  we  wish  to  express  the  idea  the  horse  is  Galba's,  Galba 
remains  the  possessor,  and  hence  in  the  genitive  as  before,  but  now 
stands  in  the  predicate,  as,  equus  est  Galbae.  Hence  this  is  called  the 
predicate  genitive. 

409.  Rule.  Predicate  Genitive.  The  possessive  genitive  often 
stands  hi  the  predicate,  especially  a^ter  the  forms  of  sum,  and 
is  then  called  the  predicate  genitive, 

410.  IDIOMS 

alicui  negotium  dare,  to  employ  some  one  (lit.  to  give 

business  to  some  07te) 
novis  rebus  studere,  to  be  eager  for  a  revolution  (lit.  to  be 

eager  for  new  things^ 
rei  militaris  peritissimus,  very  skillful  in  the  art  of  war 
se  suaque  omnia,  themselves  and  all  their  possessions 

411.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Caesar  cum  in  Gallia  bellum  gereret,  militibus  decimae 
legionis  maxime  favit  quia  re!  militaris  peritissimi  erant.  2.  Sociis 
negotium  dedit  rei  frumentariae  curandae.  3.  Legati  non  solum 
audiendl  causa  sed  etiam  dicendi  causa  venerunt.  4.  Imperator  iussit 
exploratores  locum  idoneum  muniendo  reperire.  5.  Nuper  hae  gentes 
novis  rebus  studebant ;  mox  iis  persuadebo  ut  Caesari  se  suaque  omnia 
dedant.  6.  lubere  est  reginae^  et  parere  est  multitudinis.^  7.  Hoc 
proelio  facto  quidam  ex  hostibus  ad  pacem  petendam  venerunt. 
8.  Erant  qui  arma  tradere  nollent.  9.  Hostes  tarn  celeriter  progress! 
sunt  ut  spatium  pila  in  hostis  iaciendi  non  daretur.  10.  Spatium  neque 
arma  capiendi^  neque  auxili  petendi^  datum  est. 

1  Predicate  genitive.  ^  Which  of  these  expressions  is  gerund  and  which 
gerundive  ? 


THE  IRREGULAR  VERB  EO  177 

II.  I.  These  ornaments  ^belong  to  Cornelia.  2.  Men  very  skillful 
in  the  art  of  war  were  sent  *to  capture  the  town.  3.  The  scouts 
found  a  hill  suitable  for  fortifying  very  near  to  the  river.  4.  Soon  the 
cavalry  will  come  'to  seek  supplies.  5.  The  mind  of  the  Gauls  is  eager 
for  revolution  and  for  undertaking  wars.  6.  To  lead  the  line  of  battle 
*  belongs  to  the  general.  7.  "Whom  shall  we  employ  to  look  after  the 
grain  supply? 

LESSON  LXXII 

THE  IRREGULAR  VERB  EO  •  INDIRECT  STATEMENTS 

412.  Learn  the  principal  parts  and  the  conjugation  of  ^^go  (§  499). 

a.  Notice  that  I-,  the  root  of  e6,  is  changed  to  e-  before  a  vowel,  except- 
ing in  iSns,  the  nominative  of  the  present  participle.  In  the  perfect  system 
-v-  is  regularly  dropped. 

413.  Learn  the  meaning  and  principal  parts  of  the  following 
compounds  of  e5  with  prepositions: 

ad'eo,  adi're,  ad'ii,  ad'itos,  go  to^  visits  with  the  accusative 
ez'ed,  exi're,  ex'ii,  tu'W^s^  go  forth^  with  ex  or  de  and  the  abla- 
tive of  the  place  from  which 
in'ed,  irn're,  in'ii,  in'itus,  begin^  enter  upon^  Math  the  accusative 
red'e5,  redi're,  red'ii,  redltas,  return^  with  ad  or  in  and  the  accu- 
sative of  the  place  to  which 
trans'ed,  transi're,  trans'ii,  transltos,  cross^  with  the  accusative 

414.  Indirect  Statements  in  English.  Direct  statements  are  those 
which  the  speaker  or  writer  makes  himself  or  which  are  quoted  in 
his  exact  language.  Indirect  statements  are  those  reported  in  a 
different  form  of  words  from  that  used  by  the  speaker  or  writer. 
Compare  the  following  direct  and  indirect  statements : 

{I .  The  Gauls  are  brave 
2.  The  Gauls  were  brave 
3.  The  Gauls  will  be  brave 

*  belong  to  —  areof.  •  Use  the  gerundive  with  ad.  •  Use  the  genitive 
with  canaJL  Where  should  canai  stand?  ^  Compare  the  first  sentence. 
^  Compare  the  second  sentence  in  the  Latin  above. 


178  INDIRECT  STATEMENTS 

Indirect  statements  (  i .  He  says  that  the  Gauls  are  brave 
after   a  verb   in  -^  2.  He  says  that  the  Gauls  were  brave 
the  present  tense  [3.  He  says  that  the  Gauls  will  be  brave 

Indirect  statements  f  i .  He  said  that  the  Gauls  were  brave 
after   a  verb   in  -|  2.  He  said  that  the  Gauls  had  been  brave 
a  past  tense         [3.  He  said  that  the  Gauls  would  be  brave 

We  see  that  in  English 

a.  The  indirect  statement  forms  a  clause  introduced  by  the  conjunc- 
tion that. 

b.  The  verb  is  finite  (cf .  §  1 73)  and  its  subject  is  in  the  nominative. 

c.  The  tenses  of  the  verbs  originally  used  are  changed  after  the  past 
tense,  He  said. 

415.  Indirect  Statements  in  Latin.  In  Latin  the  direct  and  indirect 
statements  above  would  be  as  follows : 

r  I .  Gain  sunt  fortes 

[^3.  Galli  erunt  fortes 

1 .  Dicit  or  Dixit  Gallos  esse  fortis  {He  says  or  He  said  the 
Gauls  to  be  brave)  ^ 

2.  Dicit  or  Dixit  Gallos  fuisse  fortis  {He  says  or  He  said 
Statements  j  the  Gauls  to  have  been  brave)'^ 

I  3.  Dicit  or  Dixit  Gallos  futiiros  esse  fortis  {He  says  or  He 
(^  said  the  Gauls  to  be  about  to  be  brave)  ^ 

Comparing  these  Latin  indirect  statements  with  the  English  in  the 
preceding  section,  we  observe  three  marked  differences : 

a.  There  is  no  conjunction  corresponding  to  that. 

b.  The  verb  is  in  the  infinitive  and  its  subject  is  in  the  accusative. 

c.  The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  are  not  changed  after  a  past  tense  of  the 
principal  verb. 

416.  Rule.  Indirect  Statements.  When  a  direct  statement  be- 
comes indirect^  the  principal  verb  is  changed  to  the  infinitive 
and  its  subject  nominative  becomes  subject  accusative  of  the 
infinitive. 

1  These  parenthetical  renderings  are  not  inserted  as  translations,  but  merely 
to  show  the  literal  meaning  of  the  Latin 


Indirect 


INDlRhci    oiAiEMKMS  1 79 

417.  Tenses  of  the  lafinitive.  When  the  sentences  in  §  415  were 
changed  from  the  direct  to  the  indirect  form  of  statement,  sunt 
became  esse,  erant  became  fuisse,  and  erunt  became  futiirOs  esse. 

418.  Rule.  Infinitive  Tenses  in  Indirect  Statements.  A  present 
indicative  of  a  direct  statement  becomes  present  infinitive  of  the 
indirect,  a  past  indicative  becomes  perfect  infinitive,  and  a 
future  indicative  becomes  future  infinitive. 

Note.  When  translating  into  Latin  an  English  indirect  statement,  first  de- 
cide what  tense  of  the  indicative  would  have  been  used  in  the  direct  form.  That 
will  show  you  what  tense  of  the  infinitive  to  use  in  the  indirect. 

419.  Rule.  Verbs  followed  by  Indirect  Statements.  The  accusa- 
tive-with-infinitive  construction  in  indirect  statemefits  is  found 
after  verbs  of  saying,  telling,  knowing,  thinking,  and  perceiving. 

420.  Verbs  regularly  followed  by  indirect  statements  are : 

a.  Verbs  of  saying  and  telling : 

dic5,  dicere,  dixi,  dictiis,  say 
negS,  negare,  negavi,  negatus,  deny,  say  not 
nuntio,  niintiare,  nuntiavi,  nuntiatus,  announce 
responded,  respondere,  respond!,  responsus,  reply 

b.  Verbs  of  knowing : 

cogn5scd,  cognoscere,  cogndyi,  cognitus,  learn ^  (in  the  perf.)  know 
sold,  scire,  scivi,  scitus,  ktww 

c.  Verbs  of  thinking : 

arbitror,  arbitrari,  arbitratus  sum,  think,  consider 
existim5,  existimare,  existimavi,  existimatus,  think^  believe 
iudico,  iudicare,  iudicavi,  '\\x^\qa\m&,  judge,  decide 
puts,  putare,  putavT,  putatus,  reckon,  think 
8per5,  sperare,  speravi,  speratus,  hope 

d.  Verbs  of  perceiving : 

audid,  audire,  audivi,  audltus,  hear 

aenti5,  sentire,  sensi,  sins}Xi,  feel,  perceive 

Tided,  yidere,  vidi,  yisus,  see 

bitelleg5,  intellegere,  intellSzi,  intellSctus,  understand,  perceive 

Learn  such  of  these  verbs  as  arc  new  to  you. 


l8o  EXERCISES 

421.  IDIOMS 

postridie  eius  diei,  on  the  next  day  (lit.  on  the  next  day  of  that  day) 

inita  aestate,  at  the  beginning  of  summer 

memoria  tenere,  to  remember  (lit.  to  hold  by  memory) 

per  exploratores  cognoscere,  to  learn  through  scouts 

^i2.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  It,  Imns,  Ite,  ire.  2.  Eunti,  iisse  or  isse,  ibunt,  eunt.  3.  Eundi, 
ut  eant,  ibitis,  is.  4.  Ne  irent,  i,  ibant,  ierat.  5.  Caesar  per  explora- 
tores cognovit  Gallos  fliimen  transisse.  6.  Romani  audiverunt  Helve- 
tios  inita  aestate  de  finibus  suis  exituros  esse.  7.  Legati  responderunt 
neminem  ante  Caesarem  illam  insulam  adisse.  8.  Principes  Gallorum 
dicunt  se  nullum  consilium  contra  Caesaris  imperium  inituros  esse. 
9.  Arbitramur  potentiam  reginae  esse  maiorem  quam  civium.  10.  Ro- 
mani negant  se  libertatem  Gallis  erepturos.  esse.  11.  His  rebus  cog- 
nitis  sensimus  legates  non  venisse  ad  pacem  petendam.  12.  Helvetii 
sciunt  Romanes  priores  victorias  memoria  tenere.  13.  Socii  cum  in- 
tellegerent  multos  vulnerari,  statuerunt  in  suos  finis  redire.  14.  Aliquis 
nuntiavit  Marcum  consulem  creatum  esse. 

II.  I .  The  boy  is  slow.  He  says  that  the  boy  is,  was,  (and)  will  be 
slow.  2.  The  horse  is,  has  been,  (and)  will  be  strong.  He  judged  that 
the  horse  was,  had  been,  (and)  would  be  strong.  3.  We  think  that  the 
army  will  go  forth  from  the  camp  at  the  beginning  of  summer.  4.  The 
next  day  we  learned  through  scouts  that  the  enemy's  town  was  ten 
miles  off.^  5.  The  king  replied  that  the  ornaments  belonged  to^ 
the  queen. 

"^  to  be  off,  to  be  distant ,  abesse.         ^  Latin,  were  of  (§  409). 


THE  IRREGULAR  VERB  FEKO  l8l 


LESSON  LXXIII 

VOCABULARY  REVIEW  •  THE  IRREGULAR  VERB  FER(> 
THE  DATIVE  WITH  COMPOUNDS 

423.  Review  the  word  lists  in  §§513,  514. 

424.  Learn  the  principal  parts  and  conjugation  of  the  verb  fert, 
bear  (§  498). 

I.  Learn  the  principal  parts  and  meanings  of  the  following  com- 
pounds of  fer5,  bear: 

ad'fer5,  adfer're,  at'tuli,  adla^tus,  bring  to;  report 
cSn'fero,  confer're,  con'tuli,  conla'tus,  bring  together^  collect 
de'fero,  defer're,  de'tuli,  dela'tus,  bring  to  j  report;  grants  confer 
in'ferS,  infer're,  in'tuli,  inla'tus,  bring  in,  bring  against 
re'fero,  refer're,  ret'tuli,  rela'tus,  bear  back;  report 

425.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  the  indirect  object.  Many  intransi- 
tive verbs  take  an  indirect  object  and  are  therefore  used  with  the 
dative  (cf.  §  153).  Transitive  verbs  take  a  direct  object  in  the  ac- 
cusative ;  but  sometimes  they  have  an  indirect  object  or  dative  as  well. 
The  whole  question,  then,  as  to  whether  or  not  a  verb  takes  the  dative, 
depends  upon  its  capacity  for  governing  an  indirect  object.  A  number 
of  verbs,  some  transitive  and  some  intransitive,  which  in  their  simple 
form  would  not  take  an  indirect  object,  when  compounded  with  certain 
prepositions,  have  a  meaning  which  calls  for  an  indirect  object.  Ob- 
serve the  following  sentences : 

1.  Haec  rSs  ezercitui  maguam  calamitatem  attulit,  this  circumstance 
brought  great  disaster  to  the  army. 

2.  Germani  Gallia  bellum  infenmt,  the  Germans  make  war  upon  the 
Gauls. 

3.  Hae  cdpiae  proeli5  n6n  mtererant,  these  troops  did  not  take  part  in 
the  battle. 

4.  Equites  fugientibua  hostibus  occummt,  the  horsemen  meet  the  fee- 
ing enemy. 

5.  Galba  cdpiia  fHium  praefecit,  Galba  put  his  son  in  command  of  the 
troops. 


1 82  THE  DATIVE  WITH  COMPOUNDS 

In  each  sentence  there  is  a  dative,  and  in  each  a  verb  combined  with  a 
preposition.    In  no  case  would  the  simple  verb  take  the  dative. 

426.  Rule.  Dative  with  Compounds.  Some  verbs  compoimded 
with  ad,  ante,  con,  de,  in,  inter,  ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub,  super,  admit 
the  dative  of  the  indirect  object.  Transitive  compounds  may 
take  both  an  accusative  and  a  dative. 

Note  i.   Among  such  verbs  are^ 

ad'fero,  adfer're,  at'tuli,  adla'tus,  bring  to ;  report 
ad 'sum,  ades'se,  ad'fui,  adfutu''rus,  assist;  be  present 
de'fero,  defer're,  de'tuli,  dela'tus,  report;  grant,  confer 

de'sum,  dees'se,  de''fui,  ,  be  wanting,  be  lacking 

in^fero,  infer're,  in'tuli,  inla'tus,  bring  agaijist,  bring  upon 
inter'sum,  interes'se,  inter'fui,  interfutu'rus,  take  part  in 
occur'to,  occur''rere,  occur'ri,  occur'sus,  7'un  against,  meet 
praefi''ci6,  praefi'cere,  praefe''ci,  praefec'tus,  appoint  over,  plcue 

in  command  of 
prae'sum,  praees''se,  prae'fui, ,  be  over,  be  in  command 

1^*1.  IDIOMS 

graviter  or  moleste  ferre,  to  be  annoyed  at,  to  be  indignant 

at,  followed  by  the  accusative  and  infinitive 
se  conferre  ad  or  in,  with  the  accusative,  to  betake  one's  self  to 
alicui  bellum  inferre,  to  make  war  upon  some  one 
pedem  referre,  to  retreat  (lit.  to  bear  back  the  foot) 

428.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Fer,  ferent,  ut  ferant,  ferunt.  2.  Ferte,  ut  ferrent,  tulisse,  tule- 
rant.  3.  Tulimus,  ferens,  latus  esse,  ferre.  4.  Cum  navigia  insulae  adpro- 
pinquarent,  barbari  terrore  commoti  pedem  referre  conati  sunt.  5.  Galli 
moleste  ferebant  Romanes  agros  vastare.  6.  Caesar  sociis  imperavit 
ne  finitimis  suis  bellum  inferrent.  7.  Exploratores,  qui  Caesari  occur- 
rerunt,  dixerunt  exercitum  hostium  vulneribus  defessum  sese  in  alium 
locum  contuHsse.  8.  Hostes  sciebant  Romanes  frumento  egere  et 
banc  rem  Caesari  summum  periculum  adlaturam  esse.  9.  Impedl- 
mentis  in  unum  locum  conlatis,  aliqui  militum  flumen  quod  non  longe 

1  But  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in  is  used  with  some  of  these,  when  the 
idea  of  motion  to  or  against  is  strong. 


THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDIRECT  QUESTIONS     183 

aberat  transierunt.  10.  H6s  rtx  hortatus  est  ut  Oraculum  adirent  et 
res  auditas  ad  s€  referrent.  1 1.  Quern  imperator  ill!  legiOnT  praefecit  ? 
Publius  ill!  legiOni  praeerat.  12.  Cum  esset  Caesar  in  citeriSre  Gallia, 
crebri  ad  eum^  rumores  adferebantur  litterisque  quoque  certior  figbat 
GallOs  obsides  inter  se  dare. 

II.  I.  The  Gauls  will  make  war  upon  Caesar's  allies.  2.  We  heard 
that  the  Gauls  would  make  war  upon  Caesar's  allies.  3.  Publius  did 
not  take  part  in  that  battle.  4.  We  have  been  informed  that  Publius 
did  not  take  part  in  that  battle.  5.  The  man  who  was  in  command  of 
the  cavalry  was  wounded  and  began  to"  retreat.  6.  Caesar  did  not 
place  you  in  command  of  the  cohort  to  bring  *  disaster  upon  the  army. 

LESSON   LXXIV 

VOCABULARY  REVIEW  •  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDIRECT 
QUESTIONS 

429.  Review  the  word  lists  in  §§517,  518. 

430.  When  we  report  a  statement  instead  of  giving  it  directly,  we 
have  an  indirect  statement.  (Cf.  §  414.)  So,  if  we  report  a  question 
instead  of  asking  it  directly,  we  have  an  indirect  question. 

Direct  Question  Indirect  Question 

H^Ao  conquered  the  Gauls  f  He  asked  who  conquered  the  Gauls 

a.  An  indirect  question  def>ends,  usually  as  object,  upon  a  verb  of  ask- 
ing (as  pets,  postulo,  quaerd,  rog6)  or  upon  some  verb  or  expression  of  saying 
or  mental  action.    (Cf.  §  420.) 

431.  Compare  the  following  direct  and  indirect  questions: 

Direct  Indirect 

'  a.  Rogat  quis  Gallds  yincat 

He  asks  who  is  conquering  the 
Gauls 
b.  Rogavit  quia  GallSa  yinceret 
He  asked  who  was  conquering 
the  Gauls 

1  Observe  that  when  adferO  denotes  motion  to,  it  is  not  followed  by  the 
dative;  cf.  footnote,  p.  182.        «  Not  the  infinitive.  (Cf.  S  352.) 


Quis  Gallds  yincit? 

Who  is  conquering  the  Gauls  f 


1 84     THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDIRECT  QUESTIONS 


Ubi  est  Roma? 

Where  is  Rome? 


Caesarne  Gallos  vicit? 

Did  Ccesar  conquer  the  Gauls  i 


a.  Rogat  ubi  sit  Roma 

He  asks  where  Rome  is 

b.  Rogavit  ubi  esset  Roma 
He  asked  where  Rome  was 

f  a.  Rogat  num  Caesar  Gallds  vicerit 

He  asks  whether  Ccesar  conquered 

the  Gauls 
Rogavit  num  Caesar  Gall5s  vicisset 
He  asked  whether  Ccesar  had  con- 
quered the  Gauls 


a.  The  verb  in  a  direct  question  is  in  the  indicative  mood,  but  the 
mood  is  subjunctive  in  an  indirect  question. 

b.  The  tense  of  the  subjunctive  follows  the  rules  for  tense  sequence. 

c.  Indirect  questions  are  introduced  by  the  same  interrogative  words  as 
introduce  direct  questions,  excepting  thatjyes-or-no  direct  questions  (cf.  §  210) 
on  becoming  indirect  are  usually  introduced  by  num,  whether. 

432.  Rule.  Indirect  Questions.  In  an  indirect  question  the 
verb  is  hi  the  subjunctive  and  its  tense  is  determined  by  the 
law  for  tense  sequence, 

433.  IDIOMS 

de  tertia  vigilia,  about  the  third  watch 
iniurias  alicui  inferre,  to  inflict  injuries  upon  some  one 
facere  verba  pro,  with  the  ablative,  to  speak  in  behalf  of 
in  reliquum  tempus,^^^  the  future 

434.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Rex  rogavit  quid  legati  postularent  et  cur  ad  se  venissent. 
2.  Quaesivit  quoque  num  nee  recentis  iniurias  nee  dubiam  Romano- 
rum  amicitiam  memoria  tenerent.  3.  Videtisne  quae  oppida  hostes 
oppugnaverint  ?  4.  Nonne  scltis  cur  Galli  sub  montem  sese  contu- 
lerint?  5.  Audlvimus  quas  iniurias  tibi  German!  intulissent.  6.  De 
tertia  vigilia  imperator  misit  homines  qui  cognoscerent  quae  esset 
natura  montis.  7.  Pro  his  orator  verba  fecit  et  rogavit  cur  consules 
navis  ad  plenum  summi  periculi  locum  mittere  vellent.  8.  Legatis 
convocatis  dcmonstravit  quid  fieri  vellet.    9.  Nuntius  referebat  quid 


DATIVE  OF  PURPOSE,  OR  END  FOR  WHICH     185 

in  Gallorum  concilio  de  armis  tradendis  dictum  esset.  i  o.  Mone6  n6 
in  reliquum  tempus  peditgs  et  equites  trans  flumen  ducas. 

II.  I.  What  hill  did  they  seize ?  I  see  what  hill  they  seized.  2.  Who 
has  inflicted  these  injuries  upon  our  dependents  ?  3.  They  asked  who 
had  inflicted  those  injuries  upon  their  dependents.  4.  Whither  did  you 
go  about  the  third  watch?  You  know  whither  I  went.  5.  At  what 
time  did  the  boys  return  home?  I  will  ask  at  what  time  the  boys 
returned  home. 

LESSON  LXXV 

VOCABULARY  REVIEW  •  THE  DATIVE  OF  PURPOSE,  OR  END 
FOR  WHICH 

435.  Review  the  word  lists  in  §§521,  522. 

436.  Observe  the  following  sentences: 

1.  Expl5rat5res  locum  castris  delegerunt,  the  scouts  chose  a  place  for 
a  camp. 

2.  Hoc  erat  magno  impedimento  Gallis,  this  wets  (for)  a  great  hindrance 
to  the  Gauls. 

3.  Duas  legiones  praesidid  castris  reliquit,  he  left  two  legions  as  (^\\..  for) 
a  guard  to  the  camp. 

In  each  of  these  sentences  we  find  a  dative  expressing  the  purpose  or  end 
for  which  something  is  intended  or  for  which  it  serves.  These  datives  are 
castris,  impedimentd,  and  praesidid.  In  the  second  and  third  sentences  we 
find  a  second  dative  expressing  the  person  or  thing  affected  (Gallis  and 
castris).  As  you  notice,  these  are  true  datives,  covering  the  relations  of 
for  which  and  to  which.   (Cf.  §  43.) 

437.  Rule.  Dative  of  Purpose  or  End.  The  dative  is  used  to 
denote  the  purpose  or  end  for  which,  often  with  another  dative 
denoting  the  person  or  thing  affected. 

438.  miOMS 

c5nsilium  omittere,  to  give  up  a  plan 
locum  castris  deligere,  to  choose  a  place  for  a  camp 
alicui  magnd  usui  esse,  to  be  of  great  advantai^r  '  •  -^  'rr 
one  i^'L  for  great  advantage  to  some  one) 


1 86        GENITIVE  AND  ABLATIVE  OF  QUALITY 

439.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Rogavit  cur  illae  copiae  relictae  essent.  Responderunt  illas 
copias  esse  praesidio  castris.  2.  Caesar  misit  exploratores  ad  locum 
deligendum  castris.  3.  Quisque  existimavit  ipsum  nomen  Caesaris 
magno  terrori  barbaris  futurum  esse.  4.  Prima  luce  idem  exercitus 
proelium  acre  commisit,  sed  gravia  suorum  vulnera  magnae  curae  im- 
peratori  erant.  5.  Rex  respondit  amicitiam  populi  Romani  sibi  orna- 
mento  et  praesidio  debere  esse.  6.  Quis  praeerat  equitatui  quem  auxilio 
Caesari  socii  miserant  ?  7.  Aliquibus  res  secundae  sunt  summae  cala- 
mitati  et  res  adversae  sunt  miro  usui.  8.  Gallis  magno  ad  pugnam 
erat  impedimento  quod  equitatus  a  dextro  comu  premebat.  9.  Me- 
moria  pristinae  virttitis  non  minus  quam  metus  hostium  erat  nostris 
magno  usui.    10.  Tam  densa  erat  silva  ut  progredi  non  possent. 

II.  I.I  advise  you  Ho  give  up  the  plan  ^of  making  war  upon  the 
brave  Gauls.  2.  Do  you  know  ^ where  the  cavalry  has  chosen  a  place 
for  a  camp  ?  3.  The  fear  of  the  enemy  will  be  of  great  advantage  to 
you.  4.  Caesar  left  three  cohorts  as  (for)  a  guard  to  the  baggage. 
5.  In  winter  the  waves  of  the  lake  are  so  great  *that  they  are  (for)  a 
great  hindrance  to  ships.  6.  Caesar  inflicted  severe^  punishment  on 
those  who  burned  the  public  buildings. 


LESSON   LXXVI 

VOCABULARY  REVIEW  •  THE  GENITIVE  AND  ABLATIVE  OF 
QUALITY  OR  DESCRIPTION 

440.  Review  the  word  lists  in  §§524,  525. 

441.  Observe  the  English  sentences 

(i)  A  man  of  great  courage^  or  (2)  A  man  with  great  courage 
(3)  A  forest  of  tall  trees ^  or  (4)  A  forest  with  tall  trees 

Each  of  these  sentences  contains  a  phrase  of  quality  or  description.  In 
the  first  two  a  man  is  described ;  in  the  last  two  a  forest.  The  descriptive 
phrases  are  introduced  by  the  prepositions  of  and  with. 

1  Subjunctive  of  purpose.  (Cf.  §  366.)  ^  Express  by  the  genitive  of  the 
gerundive.        *  Indirect  question.        *  A  clause  of  result.        ^  gravis,  -e. 


GENITIVE  AND  ABLATIVE  OF  QUALITY        187 

In  Latin  the  expression  of  quality  or  description  is  very  similar. 

The  prepositions  of  and  with  suggest  the  genitive  and  the  ablative 

respectively,  and  we  translate  the  sentences  above 

( I )  Vir  magnae  virtutis,  or  (2)  Vir  magna  virtute 

(3)  Silva  altarum  arbonim,  or  (4)  Silva  altis  arboribua 

There  is,  however,  one  important  difference  between  the  Latin  and 
the  English.  In  English  we  may  say,  for  example,  a  man  of  courage^ 
using  the  descriptive  phrase  without  an  adjective  modifier.  In  Latin, 
however,  an  adjective  modifier  must  ahvays  be  used,  as  above. 

a.  Latin  makes  a  distinction  between  the  use  of  the  two  cases  in  that 
numerical  descriptions  of  measure  are  in  the  genitive  and  descriptions  of 
physical  characteristics  are  in  the  ablative.  Other  descriptive  phrases  may 
be  in  either  case. 

442.  EXAMPLES 

1.  Fossa  duodecim  pedum,  a  ditch  of  twelve  feet. 

2.  Hom5  magnis  pedibus  et  parv5  capite,  a  man  with  big  feet  and  a 
small  head. 

3.  RSx  erat  vir  summa  audacia  or  rex  erat  yir  summae  audaciae,  the  king 
was  a  man  of  the  greatest  boldness. 

443.  Rule.  Genitive  of  Description.  Numerical  descriptions 
of  measure  are  expressed  by  the  genitive  with  a  modifying 
adjective. 

444.  Rule.  Ablative  of  Description.  Descriptions  of  physical 
characteristics  are  expressed  by  the  ablative  with  a  modifying 
adjective. 

445.  Rule.  Genitive  or  Ablative  of  Description.  Descriptions 
involving  neither  numerical  statements  nor  physical  character- 
istics may  be  expressed  by  either  the  genitive  or  the  ablative 
with  a  modifying  adjective. 

446.  IDIOMS 

Helvetiis  in  animd  Mt,  the  Helvetii  intend  (lit.  //  is  in  mind  to 

the  Hehetians) 
in  matrimSnium  dare,  to  give  in  marriage 
nihil  posse,  to  have  no  power 
fossam  perduoere,  to  construct  a  ditch  (lit  to  lead  a  ditch  through) 


1 88  EXERCISES 

447.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Milites  fossam  decern  pedum  per  eorum  finis  perduxerunt. 
2.  Princeps  Helvetiorum,  vir  summae  audaciae,  principibus  gentium 
finitimarum  sorores  in  matrimonium  dedit.  3.  Eorum  amicitiam  con- 
firmare  voluit  quo  facilius  Romanis  bellum  inferret.  4.  Germani  et 
Galli  non  erant  eiusdem  gentis.  5.  Omnes  fere  Germani  erant 
magnis  corporum  viribus.^  6.  Galli  qui  oppidum  fortiter  defendebant 
saxa  ingentis  magnitudinis  de  muro  iaciebant.  7.  Cum  Caesar  ab 
exploratoribus  quaereret  qui  illud  oppidum  incolerent,  exploratores 
responderunt  eos  esse  homines  summa  virtu te  et  magno  consilio. 
8.  Moenia  viginti  pedum  a  sinistra  parte,  et  a  dextra  parte  flumen 
magnae  altitudinis  oppidum  defendebant.  9.  Cum  Caesar  in  Galliam 
pervenisset,  erat  rumor  Helvetiis  in  animo  esse  iter  per  provinciam 
Romanam  facere.  10.  Caesar,  ut  eos  ab  finibus  Romanis  prohiberet, 
miinitionem  ^multa  milia  passuum  longam  fecit. 

II.  I.  Caesar  was  a  general  of  much  wisdom  and  great  boldness, 
and  very  skillful  in  the  art  of  war.  2.  The  Germans  were  of  great 
size,  and  thought  that  the  Romans  had  no  power.  3.  Men  of  the 
highest  courage  were  left  in  the  camp  as  (for)  a  guard  to  the  bag- 
gage. 4.  The  king's  daughter,  who  was  given  in  marriage  to  the  chief 
of  a  neighboring  state,  was  a  woman  of  very  beautiful  appearance. 

5.  The  soldiers  will  construct  a  ditch  of  nine  feet  around  the  camp. 

6.  A  river  of  great  width  was  between  us  and  the  enemy. 

1  From  vis.    (Cf.  §  468.)  ^  Genitives  and  ablatives  of  description  are 

adjective  phrases.  When  we  use  an  adverbial  phrase  to  tell  how  long  or  how 
high  ox  how  deep  anything  is,  we  must  use  the  accusative  of  extent.  (Cf.  §  336.) 
For  example,  in  the  sentence  above  multa  milia  passuum  is  an  adverbial  phrase 
(accusative  of  extent)  modifying  longam.  If  we  should  omit  longam  and  say 
a  fortification  of  many  miles,  the  genitive  of  description  (an  adjective  phrase) 
modifying  miinitionem  would  be  used,  as  miinitionem  multorum  milium  passuum. 


GLADII 


REVIEW  OF  AGREEMENT  189 


LESSON  LXXVII 

REVIEW  OF  AGREEMENT,  AND  OF  THE  GENITIVE,  DATIVE, 
AND  ACCUSATIVE 

448.  ITiere  are  four  agreements: 

1 .  That  of  the  predicate  noun  or  of  the  appositive  with  the  noun  to 
which  it  belongs  (§§  76,  81). 

2.  That  of  the  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle  with  its 
noun  (§  65). 

3.  That  of  a  verb  with  its  subject  (§  28). 

4.  That  of  a  relative  pronoun  with  its  antecedent  (§  224). 

449.  The  relation  expressed  by  the  genitive  is,  in  general,  denoted 
in  English  by  the  preposition  of.    It  is  used  to  express 

r  a.  As  attributive  (§  38). 

1.  Possessions  ,    .    ,.         j-    .  ^^ 

\,b.  In  the  predicate  (§  409). 

2.  The  whole  of  which  a  part  is  taken  (partitive  genitive)  (§331). 

3.  Quality  or  description  (§§  443,  445). 

450.  The  relation  expressed  by  the  dative  is,  in  general,  denoted 
in  English  by  the  prepositions  to  or  for  when  they  do  not  imply 
motion  through  space.    It  is  used  to  express 

a.  With  intransitive  verbs  and  with  transitive 
verbs  in  connection  with  a  direct  object 
in  the  accusative  (§  45). 

b.  With  special  intransitive  verbs  (§  1 54). 

c.  With  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante, 
con,  de,  in,  inter,  ob,  post,  prae,  pr5, 
sub,  super  (§426). 


I.  The  indirect  object 


2.  The  object  to  which  the  quality  of  an  adjective  is  directed  (§  1 43). 

3.  The  purpose,  or  end  for  which,  often  with  a  second  dative 
denoting  the  person  or  thing  affected  (§  437). 


I90  GENITIVE,  DATIVE,  ACCUSATIVE 

451.  The  accusative  case  corresponds,  in  general,  to  the  English 
objective.    It  is  used  to  express 

1.  The  direct  object  of  a  transitive  verb  (§  37). 

2.  The  predicate  accusative  together  with  the  direct  object  after 
verbs  of  makings  choosing^  callings  showing,  and  the  like  (§392). 

3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  (§  214). 

4.  The  object  of   prepositions    that  do  not  govern  the  ablative 

(§  340)- 

5.  The  duration  of  time  and  the  extent  of  space  (§336). 

6.  The  place  to  which  (§§  263,  266). 

452.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Milites  quos  vidimus  dixerunt  imperium  belli  esse  Caesaris 
imperatoris.  2.  Helvetii  statuerunt  quam^  maximum  numerum  equo- 
rum  et  carrorum  cogere.  3.  Totius  Galliae  Helvetii  plurimum  value- 
runt.  4.  Multas  horas  acriter  pugnatum  est  neque  quisquam  poterat 
videre  hostem  fugientem.  5.  Viri  summae  virtutis  hostis  decem  milia 
passuum  insecuti  sunt.  6.  Caesar  populo  Romano  persuasit  ut  se 
consulem  crearet.  7.  Victoria  exercitus  erat  semper  imperatori  gra- 
tissima.  8.  Triduum  iter  fecerunt  et  Genavam,  in  oppidum^  hostium, 
pervenerunt.  9.  Caesar  audivit  Germanos  bellum  Gallis  intulisse. 
10.  Magno  Usui  militibus  Caesaris  erat  quod  prioribus  proeliis  sese 
exercuerant. 

II.  I.  One^  of  the  king's  sons  and  many  of  his  men  were  cap- 
tured. 2.  There  was  no  one  who  wished*  to  appoint  her  queen. 
3.  The  grain  supply  was  always  a  care  (for  a  care)  to  Caesar,  the 
general.  4.  I  think  that  the  camp  is  ten  miles  distant.  5.  We 
marched  for  three  hours  through  a  very  dense  forest.  6.  The  plan 
^of  making  war  upon  the  allies  was  not  pleasing  to  the  king.  7.  When 
he  came  to  the  hill  he  fortified  it  ®by  a  twelve-foot  wall. 

1  What  is  the  force  of  quam  with  superlatives  ?  2  m-^jg  ©r  oppidum,  appos- 
itive  to  a  name  of  a  town,  takes  a  preposition.  '  What  construction  is 
used  with  numerals  in  preference  to  the  partitive  genitive  ?  *  What  mood  ? 
(Cf.  §  390.)       ^  Use  the  gerund  or  gerundive.       *  Latin,  by  a  wall  of  twelve  feet. 


REVIEW  OF  THE  ABLATIVE  191 


LESSON  LXXVIII 

REVIEW  OF  THE  ABLATIVE 

453.  The  relations  of  the  ablative  are,  in  general,  expressed  in  Eng- 
lish by  the  prepositions  with  (or  by),  from  (or  by),  and  in  (or  at).  The 
constructions  growing  out  of  these  meanings  are 

I.  Ablative  rendered  with  (or  by): 

1.  Cause  (§  102) 

2.  Means  (§  103) 

3.  Accompaniment  (§  104) 

4.  Manner  (§  105) 

5.  Measure  of  difference  (§317) 

6.  With  a  participle  (ablative  absolute)  (§381) 

7.  Description  or  quality  (§§  444,  445) 

8.  Specification  (§  398) 

II.  Ablative  rendered  from  (or  by): 

1.  Place  from  which  (§§  179,  264) 

2.  Ablative  of  separation  (§180) 

3.  Personal  agent  with  a  passive  verb  (§181) 

4.  Comparison  without  quam  (§  309) 

III.  Ablative  rendered  in  (or  at): 

1.  Place  at  or  in  which  (§§  265,  266) 

2.  Time  when  or  within  which  (§275) 

454.  EXERCISES 

I.  I.  Galli  locis  superioribus  occupatis  itinere  exercitum  prohib€re 
conantur.  2.  Omnes  oppidani  ex  oppido  ggressi  salutem  fug§  petere 
inc^p€runt.  3.  Caesar  docet  s€  militum  vitam  sua  salute  habere  multO 
cariOrem.  4.  Cum  celerius  omnium  opinione  pervenisset,  hostes  ad 
eum  obsides  mis€runt.  5.  Vicus  in  valle  positus  montibus  altissimis 
undique  contin6tur.  6.  PlQrimum  inter  Gall6s  haec  g^ns  et  virtute  et 
hominum  numerO  val€bat.  7.  Secunda  vigilia  nQllO  cert6  Ordine  neque 
impend  S  castris  SgressI  sunt   8.  Duabus  legiOnibus  Genavae  relictiSi 


192  GERUND,  INFINITIVE,  SUBJUNCTIVE 

proximo  die  cum  reliquls  domum  profectus  est.  9.  Erant  itinera  duo 
quibus  itineribus  Helvetii  domo  exire  possent.  10.  Rex  erat  summa 
audacia  et  magna  apud  populum  potentia.  11.  Galli  timore  servitutis 
commoti  bellum  parabant.  12.  Caesar  monet  legates  ut  contineant 
milites,  ne  studio  pugnandi  aut  spe  praedae  longius^  progrediantur. 
13.  Bellum  acerrimum  a  Caesare  in  Gallos  gestum  est. 

II.  I.  The  lieutenant  after  having  seized  the  mountain  restrained 
his  (men)  from  battle.  2.  All  the  Gauls  differ  from  each  other  in  laws. 
3.  This  tribe  is  much  braver  than  the  rest.  4.  This  road  is  ^ten  miles 
shorter  than  that.  5.  In  summer  Caesar  carried  on  war  in  Gaul,  in 
winter  he  returned  to  Italy.  6.  At  midnight  the  general  set  out  from 
the  camp  with  three  legions.  7.  I  fear  that  you  cannot  protect  *  your- 
self from  these  enemies.  8.  ■*  After  this  battle  was  finished  peace  was 
made  by  all  the  Gauls. 

LESSON  LXXIX 

REVIEW  OF  THE  GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE,  THE  INFINI- 
TIVE, AND  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

455.  The  gerund  is  a  verbal  noun  and  is  used  only  in  the  genitive, 
dative,  accusative,  and  ablative  singular.  The  constructions  of  these 
cases  are  in  general  the  same  as  those  of  other  nouns  (§§  402,  406.  i). 

456.  The  gerundive  is  a  verbal  adjective  and  must  be  used  instead 
of  gerund  -f  object,  excepting  in  the  genitive  and  in  the  ablative 
without  a  preposition.  Even  in  these  instances  the  gerundive  con- 
struction is  more  usual  (§  406.  2). 

457.  The  infinitive  is  used : 
I.  As  in  English. 

a.  As  subject  or  predicate  nominative  (§  216). 

b.  To  complete  the  predicate  with  verbs  of  incomplete  predication 
(complementary  infinitive)  (§  215). 

c.  As  object  with  subject  accusative  after  verbs  of  wishing^  commanding^ 
forbidding^  and  the  like  (§  2 1 3). 

1  longius,  too  far.    (Cf.  §  305.)         ^  Latin,  by  ten  thousands  of  paces. 
•  defendere.         *  Ablative  absolute. 


GERUND,  INFINITIVE,  SUBJUNCTIVE  193 

II.  In  the  principal  sentence  of  an  indirect  statement  after  verbs 
of  saying  and  mental  action.  The  subject  is  in  the  accusative  (§§416, 
418,  419). 

458.  The  subjunctive  is  used : 

1.  To  denote  purpose  (§§  349,  366,  372). 

2.  To  denote  consequence  or  result  (§§  385,  386). 

3.  In  relative  clauses  of  characteristic  or  description  (§  390). 

4.  In  cum  clauses  of  time,  cause,  and  concession  (§  396). 

5.  In  indirect  questions  (§  432). 

459.  EXERCISES 

I .  I .  Caesar,  cum  pervfinisset,  mllites  hortabatur  ne  cSnsilium  oppidi 
capiendi  omitterent.  2.  Rex,  castris  prope  oppidum  positis,  misit  ex- 
plore tores  qui  cognOscerent  ubi  exercitus  Romanus  esset.  3.  Nemo 
relinquSbatur  qui  arma  ferre  posset.  4.  Nuntii  viderunt  ingentem 
armOrum  multitudinem  de  muro  in  fossam  iactam  esse.  5.  Dux  su6s 
transire  flumen  iussit.  Transire  autem  hoc  flumen  erat  difficillimum. 
6.  R6mani  cum  banc  calamitatem  moleste  ferrent,  tamen  terga  vertere 
recusaverunt.  7.  Hoc  rumore  audito,  tantus  terror  omnium  animos 
occupavit    ut   ne   fortissimi   quidem    proelium    committere    vellent 

8.  Erant  qui  putarent  tempus  anni  idoneum  non  esse  itineri  faciendO. 

9.  Tam  acriter  ab  utrSque  parte  pugnabatur  ut  multa  milia  hominum 
occiderentur.  10.  Quid  times  ?  Timeo  nS  Romanis  in  animo  sit  totam 
Galliam  superare  et  nObis'iniurias  inferre. 

II.  I.  Do  you  not  see  who  is  standing  on  the  wall?  2.  We  hear 
that  the  plan  of  taking  the  town  has  been  given  up.  3.  Since  the 
Germans  thought  that  the  Romans  could  not  cross  the  Rhine,  Caesar 
ordered  a  bridge  to  be  made.  4.  When  the  bridge  was  finished,  the 
savages  were  so  terrified  that  they  hid  themselves.  5.  They  feared 
that  Caesar  would  pursue  them.  6.  Caesar  *  asked  the  traders  what  the 
size  of  the  island  was.  7.  The  traders  advised  him  not  *to  cross  the 
sea.   8.  He  sent  scouts  'to  choose  a  place  for  a  camp. 

>  qoaerere  «b.        *  Not  infinitive.        •  Use  the  gerundive  with  ad. 


READING   MATTER 


INTRODUCTORY  SUGGESTIONS 

How  to  Translate.  You  have  already  had  considerable  practice  in 
translating  simple  Latin,  and  have  learned  that  the  guide  to  the  mean- 
ing lies  in  the  endings  of  the  words.  If  these  are  neglected,  no  skill 
can  make  sense  of  the  Latin.  If  they  are  carefully  noted  and  accu- 
rately translated,  not  many  difficulties  remain.  Observe  the  following 
suggestions: 

1.  Read  the  Latin  sentence  through  to  the  end,  noting  endings  of 
nouns,  adjectives,  verbs,  etc. 

2.  Read  it  again  and  see  if  any  of  the  words  you  know  are 
nominatives  or  accusatives.  This  will  often  give  you  what  may  be 
called  the  backbone  of  the  sentence;  that  is,  subject,  verb,  and 
object. 

3.  Look  up  the  words  you  do  not  know,  and  determine  their  use 
in  the  sentence  from  their  endings. 

4.  If  you  cannot  yet  translate  the  sentence,  put  down  the  Eng- 
lish meanings  of  all  the  words  in  the  same  order  as  the  Latin  words. 
You  will  then  generally  see  through  the  meaning  of  the  sentence. 

5.  Be  careful  to 

a.  Translate  adjectives  with  the  nouns  to  which  they  belong. 

b.  Translate  together  prepositions  and  the  nouns  which  they  govern. 

c.  Translate  adverbs  with  the  words  that  they  modify. 

d.  Make  sense.    If  you  do  not  make  sense,  you  have  made  a  mistake. 
One  mistake  will  spoil  a  whole  sentence. 

6.  When  the  sentence  is  correctly  translated,  read  the  Latin  over 
again,  and  try  to  understand  it  as  Latin,  without  thinking  of  the 
English  translation. 

194 


THE  PARTS  OF  A  SENTENCE  195 

The  Parts  of  a  Sentence.  You  will  now  meet  somewhat  longer 
sentences  than  you  have  had  before.  To  assist  in  translating  them, 
remember,  first  of  all,  that  every  sentence  conveys  a  meaning  and 
either  tells  us  something,  asks  a  question,  or  gives  a  command.  Every 
sentence  must  have  a  subject  and  a  verb,  and  the  verb  may  always 
have  an  adverb,  and,  if  transitive,  will  have  a  direct  object 

However  long  a  sentence  is,  you  will  usually  be  able  to  recognize 
its  subject,  verb,  and  object  or  predicate  complement  without  any 
difficulty.  These  will  give  you  the  leading  thought,  and  they  must 
never  be  lost  sight  of  while  making  out  the  rest  of  the  sentence.  The 
chief  difficulty  in  translating  arises  from  the  fact  that  instead  of  a 
single  adjective,  adverb,  or  noun,  we  often  have  a  phrase  or  a  clause 
taking  the  place  of  one  of  these;  for  Latin,  like  English,  has  adjective, 
adverbial,  and  substantive  clauses  and  phrases.  For  example,  in  the 
sentence  The  idle  boy  does  not  study,  the  word  idle  is  an  adjective. 
In  The  boy  wasting  his  time  does  not  study,  the  words  wasting  his  time 
form  an  adjective  phrase  modifying  boy.  In  the  sentence  The  boy  who 
wastes  his  time  does  not  study,  the  words  who  wastes  his  time  form  an 
adjective  clause  modifying  boy,  and  the  sentence  is  complex.  These 
sentences  would  show  the  same  structure  in  Latin. 

In  translating,  it  is  important  to  keep  the  parts  of  a  phrase  and  the 
parts  of  a  clause  together  and  not  let  them  become  confused  with  the 
principal  sentence.  To  distinguish  between  the  subordinate  clauses 
and  the  principal  sentence  is  of  the  first  importance,  and  is  not  diffi- 
cult if  you  remember  that  a  clause  regularly  contains  a  word  that 
marks  it  as  a  clause  and  that  this  word  usually  stands  first.  These 
words  join  clauses  to  the  words  they  depend  on,  and  are  called  subor- 
dinate conjunctions.  They  are  not  very  numerous,  and  you  will  soon 
learn  to  recognize  them.  In  Latin  they  are  the  equivalents  for  such 
words  as  when,  while,  since,  because,  if,  before,  after,  though,  in  order 
that,  that,  etc.  Form  the  habit  of  memorizing  the  Latin  subordinate 
conjunctions  as  you  meet  them,  and  of  noting  carefully  the  mood  of 
the  verb  in  the  clauses  which  they  introduce. 


HERCULES 


HERCULES  AND  THE  SERPENTS 


197 


THE  LABORS  OF  HERCULES 

Hercules,  a  Greek  hero  celebrated  for  his  great  strength,  was  pursued 
throughout  his  life  by  the  hatred  of  Juno.  While  yet  an  infant  he  strangled 
some  serpents  sent  by  the  goddess  to  destroy  him.  During  his  boyhood  and 
youth  he  performed  various  marvelous 
feats  of  strength,  and  on  reaching  man- 
hood he  succeeded  in  delivering  the 
Thebans  from  the  oppression  of  the 
Minyac.  In  a  fit  of  madness,  sent  upon 
him  by  Juno,  he  slew  his  own  children; 
and,  on  consulting  the  Delphic  oracle 
as  to  how  he  should  cleanse  himself 
from  this  crime,  he  was  ordered  to  sub- 
mit himself  for  twelve  years  to  Eurys- 
theus,  king  of  Tiryns,  and  to  perform 
whatever  tasks  were  appointed  him. 
Hercules  obeyed  the  oracle,  and  during 
the  twelve  years  of  his  servitude  ac- 
complished twelve  extraordinary  feats 
known  as  the  Labors  of  Hercules.  His 
death  was  caused,  unintentionally,  by 
his  wife  Deiani'ra.  Hercules  had  shot 
with  his  poisoned  arrows  a  centaur 
named  Nessus,  who  had  insulted  Deia- 
nira.  Nessus,  before  he  died,  gave  some 
of  his  blood  to  Deianira,  and  told  her 
it  would  act  as  a  charm  to  secure  her 

husband's  love.  Some  time  after,  Deianira,  wishing  to  try  the  charm,  soaked 
one  of  her  husband's  garments  in  the  blood,  not  knowing  that  it  was  poisoned. 
Hercules  put  on  the  robe,  and,  after  suffering  terrible  torments,  died,  or  was 
carried  off  by  his  father  Jupiter. 


HERCULES  ET  SERPENTES 


UII.i  THE  INFANT  HERCULES  AND  THE  SERPENTS 

Di*  grave  supplicium  sumunt  dg  malls,  sed  ii  qui  legibus*  deorum 
parent,  etiam  post  mortem  curantur.  Ilia  vita  dis*  erat  gratissima  quae 
hominibus  miseris  utilissima  fuerat.  Omnium  autem  praemiorum 
summum  erat  immortalitas.    I  Hud  praemium  Herculi  datum  est. 

Herculis  pater  fuit  luppiter,  mater  Alcmena,  et  omnium  hominum  5 
validissimus  fuisse  didtur.    Sed  lQn(^,  r€gina  dednim,  eum,  adhQc 

*  This  number  refers  to  the  lesson  after  which  the  selection  may  be  read. 
*  Di  and  dis  arc  from  deu*.    Cf.  §  468.         '  ligibus,  §  501.  14. 


198  HERCULES  CONQUERS  THE  MINY^ 

infantem,  interficere  studebat;  nam  ei^  et^  Hercules  et  Alcmena  erant 
invisi.  Itaque  misit  duas  serpentis,  utramque  saevissimam,  quae  media 
nocte  domum^  Alcmenae  venerunt.  Ibi  Hercules,  cum  fratre  suo, 
non  in  lectulo  sed  in  scuto  ingenti  dormiebat  lam  audaces  serpentes 
5  adpropinquaverant,  iam  scutum  movebant.  Tum  frater,  terrore  com- 
motus,  magna  voce  matrem  vocavit,  sed  Hercules  ipse,  fortior  quam 
frater,  statim  ingentis  serpentis  manibus  suis  rapuit  et  interfecit. 

LIV.  HERCULES  CONQUERS  THE  MINY.E 

Hercules  a  puero*  corpus  suum  gravissimis  et  difficillimis  labori- 
bus  exercebat  et  hoc  modo  vires  ^  suas  confirmavit.    Iam  adulescens 

10  Thebis^  habitabat.  Ibi  Creon  quidam  erat  rex.  Minyae,  gens  vali- 
dissima,  erant  finitimi  Thebanis,  et,  quia  olim  Thebanos  vicerant, 
quotannis  legates  mittebant  et  vectigal  postulabant.  Hercules  autem 
constituit  civis  suos  hoc  vectigali  liberare  et  dixit  regi,  "Da  mihi 
exercitum  tuum  et  ego  hos  superbos  hostis  superabo."    Hanc  con- 

15  dicionem  rex  non  recusavit,  et  Hercules  nuntios  in  omnis  partis  dimisit 
et  copias  coegit.'^  Tum  tempore  opportunissimo  proelium  cum  Minyis 
commisit  Diu  pugnatum  est,  sed  denique  illi  impetum  Thebanorum 
sustinere  non  potuerunt  et  terga  verterunt  fugamque  ceperunt. 

HE  COMMITS  A  CRIME  AND  GOES  TO  THE  DELPHIAN 
ORACLE  TO  SEEK  EXPIATION 

Post  hoc  proelium  Creon  rex,  tanta  victoria  laetus,  filiam  suam 
20  Herculi  in  matrimonium  dedit.  Thebis  Hercules  cum  uxore  sua  diu 
vivebat  et  ab  omnibus  magnopere  amabatur;  sed  post  multos  annos 
subito  ®in  furorem  incidit  et  ipse  sua  manu  liberos  suos  interfecit. 
Post  breve  tempus  *ad  sanitatem  reductus  tantum  scelus  expiare 
cupiebat  et  constituit  ad  oraculum  Delphicum  iter  facere.  Hoc  autem 
25  oraculum  erat  omnium  clarissimum.  Ibi  sedebat  femina  quaedam  quae 
Pythia  appellabatur.    Ea  consilium  dabat  iis  qui  ad  oraculum  veniebant. 

^  ei,  to  her,  referring  to  Juno.  ^  et  .  ,  .  et^  both  .  .  .  and.  ^  domum, 
§  501. 20.  *  a  puer6,/n7w  boyhood.  ^  vires,  from  vis.  Cf.  §  468.  ^  Thebis, 
§  501.  36.  I.  7  coegit,  from  cogo.  ^  in  furorem  incidit,  went  mad.  •  ad 
sanitatem  reductus,  lit.  led  back  to  sanity.    What  in  good  English? 


HERCULES  STRANGLES  THE  NEMEAN  LION     199 

LV.  HERCULES   BECOMES   SUBJECT   TO  EURYSTHEUS^ 
HE  STRANGLES  THE  NEME'AN  LION 

Itaque  Hercules  Pythiae  tOtam  rem  demSnstravit  nee  scelus  suum 
abdidit  Ubi  iam  Hercules  finem  fecit,  Pythia  iussit  eum  ad  urbem 
'Hryntha'*  discedere  et  ibi  regi  Eurystheo  sese  committere.  Quae*  ubi 
audivit,  Hercules  ad  illam  urbem  statim  contendit  et  EurystheO  sg  in 
servitutem  tradidit  et  dixit,  "Quid  primum,  O  rex,  me  facere  iubes  ?"  5 


HERCULES  LEONEM  SUPERAT 


Eurystheus,  qui  perterrebatur  vi  et  corpore  ingenti  Herculis  et  eum 
occldl*  studebat,  ita  respondit:  "Audi,  Hercules  1  Multa  mira*  narrantur 
de  le5ne  saevissimo  qui  hoc  tempore  in  valle  Nemaea  omnia  vastat 
lubeO  te,  virOrum  omnium  fortissimum,  illo  monstrO  homines  libe- 
rSre."    Haec  verba  Herculi  maxime  placuerunt.    "Properabo,"  inquit,  10 

*  Ea-rys^theus  (pronounced  U-ris'thus)  was  king  of  Ti'ryns^  a  Grecian  city, 
whose  foundation  goes  back  to  prehistoric  times.  ^  Tiryntha,  the  ace.  case 
of  Tiryns,  a  Greek  noun.  *  Quae,  obj.  of  audivit.  It  is  placed  first  to  make 
a  close  connection  with  the  preceding  sentence.  This  is  called  a  connecting 
relative.  ^  occldl,  pres.  pass,  infin.  *  mlra,  marvelous  tAingSt  the  adj. 
being  used  as  a  noun.    Cf.  omnia,  in  the  next  line. 


200  SLAYING  THE  LERNEAN  HYDRA 

"et  parebo  imperio^  tuo."  Turn  in  silvas  in  quibus  leo  habitabat 
statim  iter  fecit.  Mox  feram  vidit  et  pluris  impetus  fecit;  frustra 
tamen,  quod  neque  sagittis  neque  uUo  alio  telo  monstrum  vulnerare 
potuit.  Denique  Herculgs  saevum  leonem  suis  ingentibus  bracchiis 
5  rapuit  et  faucis  eius  omnibus  viribus  compressit.  Hoc  modo  brevi 
tempore  eum  interfecit.  Tum  corpus  leonis  ad  oppidum  in  umeris 
reportavit  et  pellem  postea  pro^  veste  gerebat.  Omnes  autem  qui  earn 
regionem  incolebant,  ubi  famam  de  morte  leonis  ingentis  acceperunt, 
erant  laetissimi  et  Herculem  laudabant  verbis  amplissimis. 

LVI.   SLAYING  THE  LERNE'AN  HYDRA 

10  Deinde  Hercules  ab  Euiystheo  iussus  est  Hydram  occidere.  Itaque 
cum  amico  lolao^  contendit  ad  paludem  Lernaeam  ubi  Hydra  incole- 
bat.  Hoc  autem  monstrum  erat  serpens  ingens  quae  novem  capita 
habebat.  Mox  is  monstrum  repperit  et  summo*  cum  periculo  collum 
eius  sinistra  manu  rapuit  et  tenuit.    Tum  dextra  manu  capita  novem 

15  abscidere  incepit,  sed  frustra  laborabat,  quod  quotiens  hoc  fecerat 
totiens  alia  nova  capita  videbat.  Quod^  ubi  vidit,  statuit  capita  ignl 
cremare.  Hoc  modo  octo  cap'ita  delevit,  sed  extremum  caput  vulnerari 
non  potuit,  quod  erat  immortale.  .  Itaque  illud  sub  ingenti  saxo  Her- 
cules posuit  et  ita  victoriam  reportavit. 

LVII.  THE  ARCADIAN   STAG  AND  THE  ERYMANTHIAN  BOAR 

20  Postquam  Eurystheo  mors  Hydrae  nuntiata  est,  summus  terror  ani- 
mum  eius  occupavit.  Itaque  iussit  Herculem  capere  et  ad  se  reportare 
cervum  quendam ;  nam  minime  cupivit  tantum  virum  in  regno  suo 
tenere.  Hie  autem  cervus  dicebatur  aurea  cornua  et  pedes  multo^ 
celeriores  vento^  habere.    Primum  Hercules  vestigia  animalis  petivit, 

25  deinde,  ubi  cervum.  ipsum  vidit,  omnibus  viribus  currere  incepit.  Per 
plurimos  dies  contendit  nee  noctu  cessavit.    Denique  postquam  per 

1  imperio,  §  501.  14.  ^  pro,  for,  instead  of.  ^  lolao,  abl.  of  I-o-ld'us,  the 
hero's  best  friend.  *  Note  the  emphatic  position  of  this  adjective.  ^  Quod 
ubi,  when  he  saw  this,  another  instance  of  the  connecting  relative.  Cf.  p.  199, 1.  3. 
*  multo,  §  501,  z"],        ''  vento,  §  501. 34. 


CLEANING  THE  AUGEAN  STABLES  20 1 

t6tum  annum  cucurrerat  —  ita  dicitur  —  cervum  iam  defessum  cCpit 
et  ad  Eurystheum  portavit. 

Turn  vero  iussus  est  Hercules  aprum  quendam  capere  qui  illo  tem- 
pore agrOs  ErymanthiSs  vastabat  et  homines  illius  loci  magnopere  per- 
terrgbat.  Hercules  laete  negotium  suscepit  et  in  Arcadiam  celeriter  se  5 
recepit  Ibi  mox  aprum  repperit.  lUe  autem,  simul  atque  Herculem 
vidit,  statim  quam^  celerrime  fugit  et  metu  perterritus  in  fossam  altam 
sese  abdidit  Hercules  tamen  summa  cum  difficultate  eum  extraxit, 
nee  aper  ullo  modo  sesS  liberare  potuit,  et  vivus  ad  Eurystheum 
portatus  est  10 


LVIII.   HERCULES  CLEANS  THE  AUGE'AN  STABLES  AND 
KILLS  THE  STYMPHALIAN  BIRDS 

Deinde  Eurystheus  Herculi  hunc  laborem  multo  graviorem  imperavit. 
Augeas^  quidam,  qui  illo  tempore  regnum  Elidis*  obtinebat,  tria  milia 
boum*  habebat.  Hi  *ingenti  stabulo  continebantur.  Hoc  stabulum, 
quod  per  triginta  annos  non  purgatum  erat,  Hercules  intra  spatium 
unius  diel  purgare  iussus  est  lUe  negotium  alacriter  suscepit,  et  pri-  15 
mum  labore  gravissimo  maximam  fossam  fodit  per  quam  fluminis 
aquam  de  montibus  ad  murum  stabuli  duxit.  Tum  partem  parvam 
muri  delevit  et  kquam  in  stabulum  immisit.  Hoc  modo  finem  operis 
fecit  uno  die  facillime. 

Post  paucos  dies  Hercules  ad  oppidum  Stymphalum  iter  fecit ;  nam  20 
Eurystheus  iusserat  eum  avis  Stymphalides  occidere.  Hae  aves  rostra 
ferrea  habebant  et  homines  miseros  devorabant  Ille,  postquam  ad 
locum  pervenit,  lacum  vidit  in  quo  aves  incolebant  Nullo  tamen  modo 
Hercules  avibus  adpropinquare  potuit;  lacus  enim  non  ex  aqu5  sed 
e  limo  cOnstitit.*  Denique  autem  aves  ''de  aliqua  causa  perterritae  in  25 
aurSs  volaverunt  et  magna  pars  earum  sagittis  Herculis  occisa  est 

^  quam.  What  is  the  force  of  ^uam  with  a  superlative?  ^AugSia,  pro- 
nounced in  English  Aw-jy as.  '  Elidis,  gen.  case  of  Elis,  a  district  of  Greece. 
*  bourn,  gen.  plur.  of  bSs.  For  construction  see  §  501.  1 1.  *  ingenti  stabuld, 
abl.  of  means,  but  in  our  idiom  we  should  say  fti  a  huge  stabU.  •  cdnstitit, 
from  ofottft.        ^  di  aliqaJl  oiusi  perterritae,  frigkUnedfar  s0m*  rtas9n. 


202  CAPTURING  THE  CRETAN  BULL 

LIX.    HERCULES    CAPTURES  THE   CRETAN   BULL  AND 
CARRIES  HIM  LIVING  TO  EURYSTHEUS 

Turn  Eurystheus  iussit  Herculem  portare  vivum  ex  insula  Greta 
taurum  quendam  saevissimum.  Ille  igitur  navem  conscendit — nam 
ventus  erat  idoneus  —  atque  statim  solvit.  Postquam  triduum  navi- 
gavit,  incolumis  insulae  adpropinquavit.  Deinde,  postquam  omnia 
5  parata  sunt,  contendit  ad  eam  regionem  quam  taurus  vexabat.  Mox 
taurum  vidit  ac  sine  uUo  metu  comua  eius  corripuit.  Tum  ingenti 
labore  monstrum  ad  navem  traxit  atque  cum  hac  praeda  ex  insula 
discessit 


HERCULES  ET  TAURUS 

THE  FLESH-EATING  HORSES  OF  DIOME'DES 

Postquam  ex  Insula  Creta  domum  pervenit,  Hercules  ab  Eurystheo 
lo  in  Thraciam  missus  est  Ibi  Diomedes  quidam,  vir  saevissimus,  reg- 
num  obtinebat  et  omnis  a  finibus  suls  prohibebat.  Hercules  iussus 
erat  equos  Diomedis  rapere  et  ad  Eurystheum  ducere.  Hi  autem  equi 
homines  miserrimos  devorabant  de  quibus  rex  supplicium  sumere 
cupiebat.  Hercules  ubi  pervenit,  primum  equos  a  rege  postulavit,  sed 
15  rex  eos  dedere  recusavit.  Deinde  ille  ira  commotus  regem  occidit  et 
corpus  eius  equis  tradidit.  Itaque  is  qui  antea  multos  necaverat,  ipse 
eodem  supplicio  necatus  est.  Et  equI,  nuper  saevissima  animalia, 
postquam  domini  sui  corpus  devoraverunt,  mansueti  erant. 


THE  BELT  OF  HIPPOLYTE 


203 


LX.  THE  BELT  OF  HIPPOL'YTE,  QUEEN  OF  THE  AMAZONS 
G€ns  Amazonum  *  dicitur  'omnInO  ex  mulieribus  fuisse.    Hae  cum 
viris  proelium  committere  nOn  vergbantur.    Hippolyte,  Am§zonum 
rSgina,  balteum  habuit  pulcherrimum.    Hunc  balteum  possidere  filia 
Eurysthei  vehementer  cupi^bat.    Itaque  Eurystheus  iussit  Herculem 
impetum  in  Amazon6s  facere.    Ille  multis  cum  cSpiis  navem  c5n-  5 
scendit  et  paucis  diebus  in  Amazonum  finis  pervenit,  ac  balteum 
postulaviL    Eum  trSdere  ipsa  Hippolyte  quidem  cupivit ;  reliquls  ta- 
men  Amazonibus*  persu5dere  non  potuit.   Postridie  Hercules  proelium 
commlsit.    Multas  horas  utrimque  quam  fortissime  pugnatum  est. 
Denique  tamen  mulier^s  terga  verterunt  et  fuga  salutem  petienint.  lo 
Multae  autem  captae  sunt,  in  qu5  numer5  erat  ipsa  Hippolytg.    Her- 
cules postquam  balteum  accgpit,  omnibus  captivis  libertatem  dedit. 

THE  DESCENT  TO  HADES  AND  THE  DOG  CER'BERUS 
lamque  Onus  modo  6  duodecim  laboribus  relinquebatur  sed  inter 

omnis  hie  erat  difficillimus.    lussus  est  enim  canem  Cerberum*  ex 

Orc6  in  lucem  trahere.    Ex  Oreo 

autem  nemo  antea  reverterat.  Prae- 

terea  Cerberus  erat  monstrum  max- 

irafe  horribile  et  tria  capita  habebat. 

Hercules  postquam  imperia  Eurys- 
thei accepit,  statim  profectus  est  et  in 

Orcum  descendit.    Ibi  vSrQ  non  sine 

summo  periculO  Cerberum  manibus 

rapuit  et  ingent!  cum  labore  ex  Oreo 

in  lucem  et  ad  urbem  Eurysthei  traxit. 
Sic  duodecim  labor^s  illi*  intrd 

duodecim  ann5s  cOnfectI  sunt.    DS- 

mum  post  longam  vitam  Hercules 

§  dels  receptus  est  et  luppiter  filiO 

su5  dedit  immortSlitatem. 


HERCULES  ET  CERBERUS 


^  A  fabled  tribe  of  warlike  women  living  in  Asia  Minor.  *  omalaS,  etc.,  (a 
kofe  consisted  entirely  of  women.  *  Amltonibus,  §  501. 14.  ♦  The  dog  Cer- 
berus guarded  the  gate  of  Orcus,  the  abode  of  the  dead.      *  ilU,  those  famous. 


204 


THE  STORY  OF  A  ROMAN  BOY 


P.  CORNELIUS  LENTULUS :  THE  STORY  OF  A 
ROMAN  BOYi 

LXI.  PUBLIUS  IS  BORN  NEAR  POMPE'II 

P.  Cornelius  Lentulus,^  adulescens  Romanus,  amplissima  familia* 
natus  est ;  nam  pater  eius,  Marcus,  erat  dux  peritissimus,  cuius  virtute* 
et  consilio  multae  victoriae  reportatae  erant;  atque  mater  eius,  lulia,  a 
clarissimis  maioribus  orta  est.  Non  vero  in  urbe  sed  ruri^  Publius 
5  natus  est,  et  cum  matre  habitabat  in  villa  quae  in  maris  litore  et  sub 
radicibus  magni  montis  sita  erat.    Mons  autem  erat  Vesuvius  et  parva 


PUERI    ROMANI 

urbs  Pompeii  octo  milia*  passuum'  aberat.  In  Italia  antiqua  erant 
plurimae  quidem  villae  et  pulchrae,  sed  inter  has  omnis  nulla  erat  put 
chrior  quam  villa  Marcl  luliaeque.  Frons  villae  muro  a  maris  fluctibus 
lo  mOniebatur.  Hinc  mare  et  litora  et  insulae  longe  lateque  conspici^ 
ac  saepe  naves  longae  et  onerariae  poterant.  A  tergo  et  ab  utroque 
latere  agri  feracissimi  patebant.  Undique  erat  magna  variorum  florum 
copia  et  multa  ingentium   arborum  genera  quae  aestate®   umbram 

1  This  story  is  fiction  with  certain  historical  facts  in  Caesar's  career  as  a 
setting.  However,  the  events  chronicled  might  have  happened,  and  no  doubt 
did  happen  to  many  a  Roman  youth.  ^  ^  Roman  had  three  names,  as, 

Publius  (given  name),  Cornelius  (name  of  the  gens  or  clan),  Lentulus  (family 
name).  ^  Abl.  of  source,  which  is  akin  to  the  abl.  of  separation  (§  501.  32). 
*yirtute,  §  501.  24.  ^  ruri,  §  501.  36.  i.  "^  milia,  §  501.  21.  '  passuum, 
§  501.  II.  ^  c5nspici,  infin.  with  poterant,  §  215.  Consult  the  map  of  Italy  for 
the  approximate  location  of  the  villa.         ^  aestate,  §  501.  35. 


HIS  LIFE  ON  THE  FARM  205 

defessis  agricolls  gratissimam  adferebant  Praeterea  erant^  in  agrls 
stabulisque  multa  animalium  genera,  n5n  sOlum  equi  et  boves  sed 
etiam  rarae  aves.  Etiam  erat*  magna  piscina  plena  pisdum;  nam 
RSmani  piscis  diligenter  colebant 


LXII.  HIS  LIFE  ON  THE  FARM 

Huius  villae  Davus,  servus  MarcT,  est  vilicus  *  et  cum  Lesbia  uxOre  5 
omnia  curat.  Vilicus  et  uxor  in  casa  humill,  mediis  in  agris  sita,  habi- 
tant. A  prima  iQce  Qsque  ad  vesperum  se*  gravibus  laboribus  exercent 
ut  omnis  res  bene  gerant.*  Plurima  enim  sunt  officia  Davi  et  Lcsbiae. 
Vilicus  servOs  regit  ng  tardi  sint* ;  mittit  ali5s  qui  agrOs  arent,*  aliOs 
qui  hortOs  inrigent,*  et  opera  in*  tQtum  10 

diem  impOnit.  Lesbia  autem  omnibus 
vestimenta  parat,  cibum  coquit,  panem 
facit. 

NOn   longe  ab  hOrum   casa  et  in    i-- 
summ5  colle  situm  surgebat  domici-   ..^^Bl^B^^^^^^H^^'^     '5 
Hum  ipsius  domini  dominaeque  am- 
plissimum.    Ibi  pluris  annos*  Publius 
cum  matre  vitam  felicem  agebat;  nam 
pater  eius,  Marcus,  in  terris  longinquis  ^^^^  romana 

gravia  rei  publicae  bella  gerebat  nee  20 

domum'  reverfl  poterat  Neque  puerS  quidem  molestum  est  rOri* 
vivere.  Eum  multae  res  delectant  Magnopere  amat  silvas,  agros, 
equ6s,  boves,  galllnas,  avis,  reliquaque  animalia.  Saepe  pluris  boras* 
ad  mare  sedet  quo*®  melius  fluctus  et  navis  spectet.  Nee  omnino 
sine  comitibus  erat,  quod  Lydia,  Davi  filia,  quae  erat  eiusdem  aetatis,  25 
cum  eo  adhQc  infante  ludebat,  inter  quos  cum  annis  amicitia  crescebat. 
Lydia  nQllum  alium  ducem  deligebat  et  Publius  ab  puellae  latere  rarO 


*  How  are  the  forms  of  sum  translated  when  they  precede  the  subject? 
*  The  yilicas  was  a  slave  who  acted  as  overseer  of  a  farm.  He  directed  the 
farming  operations  and  the  sale  of  the  produce.  *  •<,  reflexive  pron.,  object 
of  exercent.  "*  For  the  construction,  see  §  501.  40.  *  in,  for.  •  annos, 
§  501.  21.  '  domom,  §  501.  20.  •  rtW,  §  501.  36.  i.  •  hOris,  of.  annSs, 
line  17.        10  qu6  .  .  .  ipoctet,  §§  349.  Z%o. 


2o6         MARCUS  LENTULUS  IS  SHIPWRECKED 

discedebat.  Itaque  sub  claro  Italiae  sole  Ptiblius  et  Lydia,  amici  fide- 
lissiml,  per  campos  collisque  cotldie  vagabantur.  Modo  in  silva  finitima 
ludebant  ubi  Publius  sagittis^  celeribus  avis  deiciebat  et  Lydia  coronis 
variorum  florum  comas  suas  omabat;  modo  aquam  et  cibum  portabant 
5  ad  Davum  servosque  defessos  qui  agros  colebant;  modo  in  casa  parva 
aut  boras  laetas  in  ludo  consumebant  aut  auxilium  dabant  Lesbiae, 
quae  cibum  viro  et  servis  parabat  vel  alias  res  domesticas  agebat. 

LXIII.  MARCUS  LENTULUS,  THE  FATHER  OF  PUBLIUS, 

IS  SHIPWRECKED  •  JULIA  RECEIVES  A 

LETTER  FROM  HIM 

lam  Publius  ^decem  annos  habebat  cum  M.  Cornelius  Lentulus,  pater 
eius,  qui  qulnque  annos  ^  grave  bellum  in  Asia  gerebat,  non  sine  gloria 

lo  domum^revertebatur.  Namque  multa  secunda  proelia  fecerat,  maximas 
hostium  copias  deleverat,multasurbls  populo^  Romano  inimicasceperat. 
Primum  nuntius  pervenit  qui  a  Lentulo®  missus  erat  "^ut  profectionem 
suam  nuntiaret.  Deinde  pluris  dies^  reditum  viri  optimi  mater  filiusque 
exspectabant  et  animis®  sollicitis  deos  immortalis  frustra  colebant.  Tum 

15  demum  has  litteras  summo  cum  gaudio  acceperunt: 

^^ ''  Marcus  luliae  suae  salutem  dicit.  Si  vales,  bene  est;  ego  valeo. 
Ex  Graecia,  quo^^  praeter  spem  et  opinionem  hodie  perveni,  has  litteras 
ad  te  scribo.  Namque  navis  nostra  fracta  est;  nos  autem  —  ^*dis  est 
gratia  —  incolumes  sumus.    Ex  Asiae^^  portu  navem  leni  vento  solvi- 

20  mus.  Postquam  "altum  mare  tenuimus  ^^nec  iam  ullae  terrae  apparu- 
erunt,  caelum  undique  et  undique  fluctus,  subito  magna  tempestas 
coorta   est   et   navem   vehementissime  adflixit.    Ventis  fluctibusque 

1  sagittis,  §  50 1 .  24.  2  ^as  ten  years  old.  '  ann5s,  §  50 1 .  2 1 .  *  domum, 
§  501.  20.         ^  populo,  dat.  with  inimicas,  cf.  §  501.  16.         ^  Lentulo,  §  501.  33. 

'ut nuntiaret,  §  501.40.         ^  dies,  cf.  annos,  1. 9.         ^  animis,  abl.  of  manner. 

Do  you  see  one  in  line  15  ?  ^®  This  is  the  usual  form  for  the  beginning  of  a 
Latin  letter.  First  we  have  the  greeting,  and  then  the  expression  Si  vales,  etc. 
The  date  of  the  letter  is  usually  given  at  the  end,  and  also  the  place  of  writing, 
if  not  previously  mentioned  in  the  letter.  ^^  quo,  where.  i"  dis  est  gratia, 
thank  God,  in  our  idiom.  ^^  Asia  refers  to  the  Roman  province  of  that  name 
in  Asia  Minor.  1*  altum  mare  tenuimus,  we  were  well  out  to  sea.  ^^  nee 
iam,  and  no  longer. 


LENTULUS  REACHES  HOME  207 

adflictati  *  nee  sOlem  discemere  nee  cursum  tenere  poteramus  et 
omnia  praesentem  mortem  intentabant.  Tris  dies*  et  tris  noetis* 
sine  remis  velisque  agimur.  Quarto  die'  primum  terra  visa  est  et 
violenter  in  saxa,  quae  non  longe  a  litore  aberant,  deieeti  sumus.  Turn 
v6r6  maiora  perieula  timebamus ;  sed  nauta  quidam,  vir  fortissimus,  5 
ex  nave  in  fluetus  iratOs  desiluit  *ut  funem  ad  litus  portaret;  quam 
rem  summo  labdre  vix  eflfeeit  Ita  omnes  servati  sumus.  GrStils 
igitur  et  honorem  Neptuno  debemus,  qui  deus  nos  e  perieulo  eripuit 
Nune  Athenis*  sum,  quo  eonfugi  ut  mihi  paueas  boras  ad  quietem 
darem.*  Quam  primum  autem  aliam  navem  eondueam  ut  iter  ad  ic 
Italiam  reliquum  conficiam  et  domum'  ad  meos  earos  revertar.  Saluta 
nostrum  Publium  amleissime  et  valetudinem  tuam  eura  diligenter. 
'Kakndis  Martiis." 

LXIV.  LENTULUS  REACHES  HOME  •  PUBLIUS  VISITS  POMPEII 
WITH  HIS  FATHER 

Post  paueos  dies  navis  M.  Cornell  Lentuli  portum  Miseni*  petiit, 
qui  portus  non  longe  a  Pompeiis  situs  est ;  quo  in  portu  classis  Rornana  1 5 
pCnebatur  et  ad  pugnas  navalis  omabatur.  Ibi  naves  omnium  generum 
eonspici  poterant.  lamque  incredibili  celeritate  navis  longa  qua  Len- 
tulus  vehgbatur  litori  adpropinquavit ;  nam  non  solum  vento  sed  etiam 
remis  impellebatur.  In  alta  puppe  stabat  gubemator  et  non  proeul 
aliqul  milites  ROmani  eum  armis  splendidis,  inter  quos  elarissimus  erat  20 
I^entulus.  Deinde  servl  remis  eontendereeessaverunt";  nautae  velum 
contraxerunt  et  aneoras  iecerunt.  Lentulus  statim  e  navi  egressus  est 
et  "ad  villam  suam  properavit.  Eum  lulia,  Publius,  totaque  familia 
exeeperunt   "Qui  eom plexus,  quanta  gaudia  fuerunt  1 

"Postridie  eius  diel  Lentulus  filiS  su5  dixit, "  VenI,  ml  Publi,  mfieum.  25 

*  adfllctiti,  perf.  passive  part  tossed  about.  *  What  construction  ?  •  diS, 
§50*- 35-  *  ut. .  .portiret,  §  501.  40.  »  Athinis,  §  501.  36.  1.  *  darem, 
cf.  portiretf  1.  6.  ^  Why  not  ad  domum?  *  Kalendis  lUrtils,  the  Calends 
ox  first  of  March;  abl.  of  time,  giving  the  date  of  the  letter.  •  Misenum  had 
an  excellent  harbor,  and  under  the  emperor  Augustus  became  the  chief  naval 
station  of  the  Roman  fleet  See  map  of  Italy.  *®  Why  is  the  infinitive  used 
with  cesslvirunt?  "  See  Plate  I,  Frontispiece.  "  Observe  that  these 
words  are  exclamatory.  i»  PostridiS  eius  di€l,  on  the  next  day. 


2o8  A  DAY  AT  POMPEII 

Pompeios  iter  hodie  faciam.  Mater  tua  suadet^  ut  fructtis  et  ciba- 
ria  emam.  Namque  pluris  amicos  ad  cenam  vocavimus  et  multis 
rebus  ^  egemus.  Ea  hortatur  ut  quam  primum  proficiscamur. "  "  Li- 
benter,  mi  pater,"  inquit  Publius.  "  Tecunj  esse  mihi  semper  est  gra- 
5  tum ;  nee  Pompeios  umquam  vidi.  Sine  mora  proficisci  paratus  sum." 
Tum  celeriter  currum  conscenderunt  et  ad  urbis  muros  vecti  sunt. 
Stabiana  porta  ^  urbem  ingress!  sunt.  Publius  stratas  vias  miratur  et 
saxa  altiora  quae  in  medio  disposita  erant  et  altas  orbitas  quas  rotae 
inter  haec  saxa  fecerant.  Etiam  strepitum  miratur,  multitudinem,  car- 
lo ros,  fontis,  domos,  tabemas,  forum*  cum  statuis,  templis,  reliquisque 
aedificiis  publicis. 

LXV.  A  DAY  AT  POMPEII 

Apud  forum  e  currti  descenderunt  et  Lentulus  dixit,  "Hie  sunt 
multa  tabemarum  genera,  mi  Publi.  Ecce,  trans  viam  est  popinal 
*Hoc  genus  tabemarum  cibaria  vendit.    Fructus  quoque  ante  ianuam 

15  stant.  Ibi  cibaria  mea  emam."  "Optime,"  respondit  Publius.  "At 
ubij  mi  pater,  crustula  emere  possumus  ?  Namque  mater  nobis  impe- 
ravit  ®ut  haec  quoque  pararemus.  Timeo  ut'  ista  popina  vendat  crus^ 
tula."  "Bene  dicis,"  inquit  Lentulus.  "At  nonne  vides  ilium  fontem 
a  dextra  ubi  aqua  per  leonis  caput  fluit?    In  illo  ipso  loco  est  tabema 

20  pistoris  qui  sine  dubi5  vendit  crustula." 

Brevi  tempore^  omnia  erant  parata,  iamque  ^quinta  hora  erat. 
Deinde  Lentulus  et  filius  ad  cauponam  properaverunt,  quod  fame  ^°  et 

'  1  What  construction  follows  suadeo?  §  501. 41.  ^  rebus,  §  501. 32.  ^  This 
is  the  abl.  of  the  way  by  which  motion  takes  place,  sometimes  called  the 
abl.  of  route.  The  construction  comes  under  the  general  head  of  the  abl.  of 
means.  For  the  scene  here  described,  see  Plate  II,  p.  53,  and  notice  espe- 
cially the  stepping-stones  for  crossing  the  street  (saxa  quae  in  medio  disposita 
erant).  *  The  forum  of  Pompeii  was  surrounded  by  temples,  public  halls, 
and  markets  of  various  sorts.  Locate  Pompeii  on  the  map.  ^  We  say,  this 
kind  of  shop;  Latin,  this  kind  of  shops.  *  ut . . .  pararemus,  §  501. 41.  ''  How 
is  ut  translated  after  a  verb  of  fearing?  How  ne?  Cf.  §  501.  42.  ^  tempore, 
§  501-  35-  ^  quinta  hora.  The  Romans  numbered  the  hours  of  the  day  con- 
secutively from  sunrise  to  sunset,  dividing  the  day,  whether  long  or  short, 
into  twelve  equal  parts.  '^^  fame  shows  a  slight  irregularity  in  that  the  abl. 
ending  -e  is  long. 


LENTULUS  ENGAGES  A  TUTOR  FOR  HIS  SON  209 

siti*  urgebantur.  Ibi  sub  arboris  umbra  sederunt  et  puerO  impera- 
venint  ut  sibi*  cibum  et  vinum  daret.  Huic  imperiO*  puer  celeriter 
pSruit.   Turn  laeti  sS*  ex  labore  refecerunt 

Post  prandium  profecti  sunt  ut  alia  urbis  spectScula  viderent.  1116 
tempore  fuerunt  Pomp€iis*  multa  templa,  duo  theStra,  thermae  mag-  5 
numque  amphitheStrum,  quae  omnia  post  paucOs  annOs  flammis  atque 
incendiis  Vesuvi  et  terrae  motu  deleta  sunt.  Ante  banc  calamitatem 
autem  homines  •  nihil  de  monte  verifi  sunt.  In  amphitheatro  quidem 
Publius  morSri  cupivit  ut  spectacula  gladiatOria  videret,  quae  in'  ilium 
ipsum  diem  proscripta  erant  et  iam  *re  vera  inceperant.  Sed  Lentu-  10 
lus  dixit,  "Morari,  Publi,  •vereor  ut  possimus.  Iam  decima  hora  est 
et  via  est  longa.  Tempus  suadet  ut  quam  primum  domum  reverta- 
mur."  Itaque  serv5  imperavit  ut  equos  iungeret,  et  solis  occasQ" 
ad  villam  pervenerunt 


LXVI.  LENTULUS  ENGAGES  A  TUTOR  FOR  HIS  SON 

A  primls  annis  quidem  lulia  ipsa  filium  suum  docuerat,  et  PQblius  15 
n6n  solum  "pure  et  Latine  loqul  poterat  sed  etiam  commode  legebat 
et  scrlbebat.  Iam  Ennium"  aliosque  poetas  legerat.  Nunc  vero 
Publius  "duodecim  annos  habebat;  itaque  ei  pater  bonum  magistrum, 
"virum  omni  doctrina  et  virtute  omatissimum,  parSvit,  "qui  Graeca, 
musicam,  aliSsque  artis  doceret.  "Namque  illis  temporibus  omnes  fere  20 
gentes  Graece  loquebantur.    Cum  Publio  alii  pueri,  Lentuli  amicorum 

^  sitia,  thirst,  has  -im  in  the  ace.  sing.,  -I  in  the  abl.  sing.,  and  no  plural. 
*  Observe  that  the  reflexive  pronoun  sibi  does  not  here  refer  to  the  subject  of 
the  subordinate  clause  in  which  it  stands,  but  to  the  subject  of  the  main  clause. 
This  so-called  indirect  use  of  the  reflexive  is  often  found  in  object  clauses 
of  purpose.  *  What  case?  Cf.  §  501.  14.  *  si,  cf.  p.  205,  1.  7,  and  note. 
'  PompSilfl,  §  501.  36. 1.  •  nihil . .  .  veriti  sunt,  had  no  fears  of  the  mountain. 
^  in,  for.  •  ^  viri,  in  fact.  •  vereor  ut,  §  501.  42.  "^^  occAsu,  §  501.  35. 
"  pflr*  .  .  ,  poterat,  freely,  could  speak  Latin  well.  "What  is  the  literal  trans- 
lation }  13  Ennium,  the  father  of  Latin  poetry.  1*  duodecim  .  .  .  habitat, 
cf.  p.  206,  1.  8,  and  note.  "  Tirom,  etc.,  a  very  well-educated  and  worthy 
man.  Observe  the  Latin  equivalent.  **  qui  .  .  .  dociret,  a  relative  clause  of 
purpose.  Cf.  §§  349, 350.  ^  In  Caesar's  time  Greek  WM  spoken  more  widely 
in  the  Roman  world  than  any  other  language. 


2IO 


SCENE  IN  SCHOOL 


filii/  discebant.  Nam  saepe  apud  Romanos  mos  erat  ^non  in  ludum 
filios  mittere  sed  domi  per  magistrum  docere.  Cot5die  discipuli  cum 
magistro  in  peristyle^  Marc!  domus  sedebant.  Omnes  pueri  buUam 
auream,  originis  honestae  signum,  in  coUo  gerebant,  et  omnes  toga 
5  praetexta  amicti  erant,  *quod  nondum  sedecim  annos®  nati  sunt. 


1 

d 

^^ 

TABULA   ET  STILUS 


SCENE  IN  SCHOOL  •  AN  EXERCISE  IN  COMPOSITION 

Discipuli.  Salve,  magister. 

Magister.  Vos  quoque  omnes, 
salvete.    ^Tabulasne  portavistis  et 
stilos? 
o       D.  Portavimus. 

M.  lam    fabulam   Aesopi"^   dis- 

cemus.    Ego  legam,  vos  in  tabu- 

lls  scribite.    Et  tu,  Publl,  da  mihi 

e  capsa^  Aesop!  volumen.^     lam 

5  audite  omnes:  Vulpes  et  Uva. 

Vulpes  olim  fame  coacta  uvam 
dependentem  v!dit.   Ad  uvam  salie- 
bat,  sumere  conans.    Frustra  diu  conata,  tandem  !rata  erat  et  salire 
cessans  dixit:  "Ilia  uva  est  acerba;  acerbam  uvam  ^° nihil  moror." 
!o       Omnia'ne  scripsistis,  pueri  ? 

D.  Omnia,  magister. 

1  filii,  in  apposition  with  pueri.  ^  n5n  .  .  .  mittere.  This  infinitive  clause 
is  the  subject  of  erat.  Cf.  §  216.  The  same  construction  is  repeated  in  the 
next  clause,  domi  .  .  .  docere.  The  object  of  docere  is  filios  understood. 
8  The  peristyle  was  an  open  court  surrounded  by  a  colonnade.  *  At  the 
age  of  sixteen  a  boy  laid  aside  the  bulla  and  the  toga  praetexta  and  assumed 
the  toga  vinlis  or  manly  gown.  ^  annos,  §  501.  21.  The  expression  nondum 
sedecim  annos  nati  sunt  means  literally,  they  were  bom  not  yet  sixteen  years. 
This  is  the  usual  expression  for  age.  What  is  the  English  equivalent? 
«  Tablets  were  thin  boards  of  wood  smeared  with  wax.  The  writing  was  done 
with  a  stylus,  a  pointed  instrument  like  a  pencil,  made  of  bone  or  metal,  with 
a  knob  at  the  other  end.  The  knob  was  used  to  smooth  over  the  wax  in 
making  erasures  and  corrections.  '  Aesopi,  the  famous  Greek  to  whom  are 
ascribed  most  of  the  fables  current  in  the  ancient  world.  «  a  cylindrical 
box  for  holding  books  and  papers,  shaped  like  a  hatbox.  ^  Ancient  books 
were  written  on  rolls  made  of  pap/rus.         i<>  nihil  moror,  I  care  nothing  for. 


PUBLIUS  GOES  TO  ROME  2 1 1 

LXVII.   PUBLIUS  GOES  TO  ROME  TO  FINISH  HIS  EDUCATION 

lamque  Publius,  *quindecim  annos  natus,  *primis  litterarum  de- 
mentis confectis,  Romam  petere  voluit  ut  scholas  grammaticorum 
et  philosophorum  frequentaret.  Et  facillime  patri'  suo,  qui  ipse 
philosophiae  studio  tenebatur,  persuasit.  Itaque  *  omnibus  rebus  ad 
profectionem  compaiHtis,  pater  filiusque  equis  animosis  vecfi*  ad  s 
magnam  urbem  profecti  sunt  Eos  proficiscentis  Julia  totaque  familia 
votis  precibusque  prosecutae  sunt.  Tum  per  loca*  plana  et  coUls 
silvis  vestitos  viam  ingressi  sunt  ad  Nolam,  quod  oppidum  eos  hos- 
pitio  modico  excepit.  Nolae'  duas  horas  morati  sunt,  quod  sol  meri- 
dianus  ardebat.  Tum  recta  via"  circiter  viginti  milia*  passuum*  lo 
Capuam,*  ad  insignem  Campaniae  urbem,  contenderunt.  Eo^  multa 
nocte  defessi  pervenerunt.  "Postridie  eius  die!,  somno  et  cibo  re- 
creati,  Capua  discesserunt  et  "viam  Appiam  ingressi,  quae  Capuam 
tangit  et  usque  ad  urbem  Romam  ducit,  ante  meridiem  Sinuessam  per- 
venerunt, quod  oppidum  tangit  mare.  Inde  prima  luce  proficiscentes  15 
Formias"  properSverunt,  ubi  Cicero,  orator  clarissimus,  qui  forte  apud 
villam  suam  erat,  eos  benigne  excepit.  Hinc  "itinere  viginti  quinque 
milium  passuum  facto,  Tarracinam,  oppidum  in  saxis  altissimis  situm, 
viderunt.  lamque  non  longe  aberant  paludes  magnae,  quae  multa  milia 
passuum  undique  patent.  Per  eas  pedestris  via  est  gravis  et  in  nSve  20 
viatores  vehuntur.  Itaque  "equis  relictis  Lentulus  et  Publius  navem 
c5nscend6runt,  et,  Una  nocte  in  transitu  cOnsumpta,  Forum  Appi  vene- 
runt   Tum  brevi  tempore  Aricia  eos  excepit.    Hoc  oppidum,  in  colle 

*  quindecim,  etc.,  cf.  p.  210,  1.  5,  and  note.  *  primis  .  .  .  confectis,  abl. 
abs.  Cf.  §  501.  28.  *  patri,  dat.  with  persu&sit.  *  omnibus  .  .  .  comparAtis, 
cf.  note  2.  *  vecti,  perf.  pass.  part,  of  veho.  •  What  is  there  peculiar 
about   the    gender  of    this   word?  '  Nolae,    locative   case,   §501.36.2. 

*  vil,  cf.  porti,  p.  208,  1.  7,  and   note.  "What   construction?  *°  ES, 

adv.  there.  ^^  PostridiS  eius  diil,  on  the  next  day.  "  viam  Appiam,  the 
most  famous  of  all  Roman  roads,  the  great  highway  from  Rome  to  Tarentum 
and  Brundisium,  with  numerous  branches.  Locate  on  the  map  the  various 
towns  that  are  mentioned  in  the  lines  that  follow.  *•  FOrmiis,  Formia^ 
one  of  the  most  beautiful  spots  on  this  coast,  and  a  favorite  site  for  the  villas 
of  rich  Romans.  >*  itinere  .  .  .  facts,  abl.  abs.  The  gen.  mlliam  modifies 
itinere.  »*  equis  relictis.  What  construction?  Point  out  a  similar  one  in 
the  next  line. 


212 


PUBLIUS  PUTS  ON  THE  TOGA  VIRILIS 


situm,  ab  urbe  Roma  sedecim  milia  passuum  abest.  Inde  declivis  via 
usque  ad  latum  campum  ducit  ubi  Roma  stat.  Quem  ad  locum  ubi 
Publius  venit  et  Romam  adhuc  remotam,  maximam  totius  orbis  terra- 
rum  urbem,  conspexit,  summa  admiratione  et  gaudio  adfectus  est. 
5  Sine  mora  descenderunt,  et,  medio  intervallo  quam  celerrime  superato, 
urbem  porta  Capena  ingress!  sunt. 


LXVIII.  PUBLIUS  PUTS  ON  THE  TOGA  VIRILIS 

Publius  iam    totum   annum    Romae   morabatur^  multaque   urbis 

omnes 
Publius 


spectacula   viderat   et   multos    sibi^   amicos   paraverat.    Ei' 

Cotidie 


favebant;   *de   eo  omnes  bene    sperare  poterant 
lo  scholas  philosophorum  et  grammaticorum  tanto 

studio  frequentabat  ^ut  aliis  clarum  exemplum 

praeberet.    Saepe  erat  cum  patre  in  curia ^;  quae 

res  effecit  "^ut  summos  rei  publicae  viros  et  audi- 

ret  et  videret.    Ubi  ^sedecim  annos  natus  est, 
15  bullam^    auream    et    togam    praetextam    more 

Romano  deposuit  atque  virilem  togam  sumpsit.     1 

Virilis  autem  toga  erat  omnino  alba,  sed  praetexta 

clavum  purpureum  in  margine  habebat.   •^''Depo- 

nere  praetextam  togam  et  sumere  virilem  togam 
20  erat  res  gratissima  puero  Romano,  quod  postea 

vir  et  civis  Romanu^  habebatur. 

^^  His  rebus  gestis  Lentulus  ad  uxorem  suam  has  litteras  scripsit : 
^"Marcus  luliae  suae  salutem  dicit.    Si  vales,  bene  est;  ego  valeo. 

Accepi  tuas  litteras.    Has  nunc  Roma  per  servum  fidelissimum  mitto 
25  ut  de  Publio  nostro  quam  celerrime  scias.   Nam  hodie  el  togam  virilem 

dedi.    Ante  lucem  surrexl^*  et  primum  buUam  auream  de  collo  eius 

1  morabatur,  translate  as  if  pluperfect.        2  si\ii,  for  himself.        *  Ei,  why  dat  ? 
*  de  • . .  poterant,  in  English,  all  regarded  him  as  a  very  promising  yojith  ;  but  what 


BULLA 


does  the  Latin  say  i 


ut . . .  praeberet,  §  501. 43. 


curia,  a  famous  building 


near  the  Roman  Forum.  '  ut .  .  .  audiret  et  videret,  §  501.  44.  ^  sedecim, 
etc.,  cf.  p.  210, 1.  5,  and  note.  ^  bullam,  cf.  p.  210, 1. 3,  and  note  4.  '^^  These 
infinitive  clauses  are  the  subject  of  erat.  Cf.  §  216.  ^^  His  rebus  gestis,  i.e. 
the  assumption  of  the  toga  virilis  and  attendant  ceremonies.  ^^  Compare 
the  beginning  of  this  letter  with  the  one  on  page  206.         1*  surrexi,  from  surgo. 


Plate  IV 


(See  page  224) 


PUBLIUS  JOINS  CiBSAR'S  ARMY  IN  GAUL       213 

removi.  Hac  Laribus*  cOnsecratS  et  sacrTs  factis,  eum  toga  virili 
vestivi.  Interim  plQres  amici  cum  multitudine  optimorum  civium  et 
honestorum  clientium  pervenerant  *qui  Publium  domo  in  forum  de- 
ducerent.  Ibi  in  civitatem  receptus  est  et  nomen,  Publius  Cornelius 
Lentulus,  apud  civis  Romanes  ascriptum  est.  Omnes  ei  amicissimi  5 
fuerunt  et  magna*  de  eo  praedicunt.  Sapientior  enim  aequalibus* 
est  et  magnum  ingenium  habet.   *Cura  ut  valeas." 

LXIX.  PUBLIUS  JOINS  CiESAR'S  ARMY  IN  GAUL 

Publius  iam  adulescens  postquam  togam  virilem  sumpsit,  alils  rebus 
studere  incepit  et  praesertim  usu*  armorum  se'  diligenter  exercuit. 
Magis  magisque  amavit  illas  artis  quae  militarem  animum  delectant.  10 
lamque  erant  *qul  ei  cursum  militarem  praedicerent.  Nee  sine  causa, 
quod  certe  patris  insigne  exemplum  ®ita  multum  trahebat.  ^"Paucis 
ante  annis  C.  lulius  Caesar,  ducum  Romanorum  maximus,  consul 
creatus  erat  et  hoc  tempore  in  Gallia  bellum  grave  gerebat.  Atque  in 
exercitu  eius  plures  adulescentes  militabant,  apud  quos  erat  amicus  15 
quidam  Publi.  I  lie  Publium  crebris  litteris  vehementer  hortabatur  "ut 
iter  in  Galliam  faceret  Neque  Publius  recusavit,  et,  multis  amicis  ad 
portam  urbis  prosequentibus,  ad  Caesaris  castra  profectus  est.  Quarto 
die  postquam  iter  ingressus  est,  ad  Alpis,  montis  altissimos,  pervenit. 
His  summa  difficultate  superatis,  tandem  Gallorum  in  finibus  erat.  20 
Primo  autem  veritus  est  ut"  castris  Romanis  adpropinquare  posset, 
quod  Galli,  maximis  copiis  coactis,  Romanes  obsidebant  et  vias  omnis 
iam  clauserant.  His  rebus  commQtus  Publius  vestem  Gallicam  induit 
n6  a  Gallis  caperetur,  et  ita  per  hostium  cdpias  incolumis  ad  castra 

*  The  Lares  were  the  spirits  of  the  ancestors,  and  were  worshiped  as  house- 
hold gods.  All  that  the  house  contained  was  confided  to  their  care,  and  sacri- 
fices were  made  to  them  daily.  *  qui  .  .  .  dMflcereiit,  §  350.  ■  magna, 
great  things^  a  neuter  adj.  used  as  a  noun.  ^  aequiUbaa,  §  501.  34.  '  Cflri 
at  Taleis,  take  good  care  of  your  health.  How  does  the  Latin  express  this  idea } 
•  Abl.  of  means.  '  sC,  reflexive  object  of  ezercait.  "  qui  .  .  .  praedicerent, 
§501.45.  •ita  multum  trahibat,  had  a  great  influence  in  that  direction. 
^  Panda  ante  annis,  a  few  yean  before:  in  Latin,  before  by  a  few  years,  ante  being 
an  adverb  and  annia  abl.  of  degree  of  difference.  ^  ut  .  .  .  faceret,  f  501.  41. 
*•  ttt,  how  translated  here?   Sec  §  501.  43. 


214    HOW  THE  ROMANS  MARCHED  AND  CAMPED 

pervenire  potuit.  Intra  munitiones  acceptus,  a  Caesare  benigne  excep- 
tus  est.  Imperator  fortem  adulescentem  amplissimis  verbis  laudavit 
et  eum  ^tribunum  mllitum  creavit. 

HOW  THE  ROMANS  MARCHED  AND  CAMPED 

Exercitus  qui  in  hostium  finibus  bellum  gerit  multis  periculis  cir- 
5  cumdatus  est.    ^Quae  pericula  ut  vitarent,  Romani  summam  curam 


IMPEDIMENTA 


adhibere  solebant.  Adpropinquantes  copiis  hostium  agmen  ita  dis- 
ponebant  ^ut  imperator  ipse  cum  pluribus  legionibus  expeditis*  pri- 
mum  agmen  diSceret.    Post  eas  copias  impedimenta^  totius  exercitus 

1  The  Tnilitary  tribune  was  a  commissioned  officer  nearly  corresponding  to 
our  rank  of  colonel.  The  tribunes  were  often  inexperienced  men,  so  Caesar 
did  not  allow  them  much  responsibility.  ^  Quae  pericula,  object  of  vitarent. 
It  is  placed  first  to  make  a  proper  connection  with  the  preceding  sentence. 
'  ut  .  .  .  duceret,  §  501.  43.  *  expeditis,  i.e.  without  baggage  and  ready  for 
action.  ^  impedimenta.  Much  of  the  baggage  was  carried  in  carts  and  on 
beasts  of  burden,  as  is  shown  above;  but,  beside*  this,  each  soldier  (unless 
expeditus)  carried  a  heavy  pack.    See  also  picture,  p.  159. 


THE  RIVAL  CENTURIONS  2  1 5 

conlocabant.  ^Tum  legiOnCs  quae  proximg  cOnscriptae  erant  tOtum 
agmen  claudebant.  Equites  quoque  in  omnis  partis  dimittebantur  qui 
loca  explorarent;  et  centuriones  praemittebantur  ut  locum  castris 
idOncum  deligerent.  Locus  habebatur  idoneus  castris  *qul  facile 
d€fendi  posset  et  prope  aquam  esset.  Qua  de  causa  castra*  in  colle  5 
ab  utraque  parte  arduo,  a  fronte  leniter  declivi  saepe  ponebantur; 
vel  locus  paludibus  cinctus  vel  in  fluminis  ripis  situs  deligebatur.  Ad 
locum  postquam  exercitus  pervenit,  alii  militum  *in  armis  erant,  alii 
castra  munire  incipiebant.  Nam  *quo  tutiores  ab  hostibus  milites 
essent,  n6ve  incauti  et  imparati  opprimerentur,  castra  fossa  l5ta  et  10 
vall6  alto  muniebant.  In  castris  portae  quattuor  erant  ut  eruptiS 
militum  omnis  in  partis  fieri  posset.  In  angulis  castrorum  erant  turr€s 
d6  quibus  tela  in  hosds  coniciebantur.  "Talibus  in  castris  qu3lia 
descripsimus  PQblius  a  Caesare  exceptus  est. 

LXX.  THE  RIVAL  CENTURIONS 

Illis  in  castris  erant  duo  centuriones,'  fortissimi  viri,  T.  PuUo  et  15 

L.  Vorgnus,  quorum  neuter  alteri  virtute*  cedere  volebat.    Inter  eos 

iam  multos  annos  infensum  certamen  gerebatur.    Turn  demum  finis 

controversiae  hoc  modo*  factus  est.     Die  tertio  postquam  Publius 

pervenit,   hostes,  maioribus   copiis  coactis,  acerrimum  impetum  in 

castra  fecerunt.    Tum  PuUo,  *°cum  Romani  tardiores"  viderentur,  20 

"Cur  dubitas,"  inquit,  "Vorgne.^    Quam  commodiorefn  occasionem 

exspectas  ?  Hie  digs  dS  virtute  nostra  iudicSbit"  Haec^*  cum  dixisset, 

^  The  newest  legions  were  placed  in  the  rear,  because  they  were  the  least 
reliable.  *  qui .  .  .  po8«et  .  .  .  esset,  §  501.  45.  •  castra,  subject  of  pdnS- 
bantur.  *  in  armis  erant,  stood  under  arms.         ^  qu5  .  .  .  essent.    When  is 

qud  used  to  introduce  a  purpose  clause?  See  §  350. 1.  *  T&libus  in  castris 
quilia,  in  such  a  camp  as.  It  is  important  to  remember  the  correlatives  tilis  . . . 
quilis,  such  .  .  .  as.  '^  A  centurion  commanded  a  company  of  about  sixty 
men.  He  was  a  common  soldier  who  had  been  promoted  from  the  ranks  for 
his  courage  and  fighting  qualities.  The  centurions  were  the  real  leaders  of  the 
men  in  battle.  There  were  sixty  of  them  in  a  legion.  The  centurion  in  the 
picture  (p.  216)  has  in  his  hand  a  staff  with  a  crook  at  one  end,  the  symbol  of  his 
authority.  '  virtate,  §  501. 30.  •  Abl.  of  manner.  *®  com  . . .  vidirentur, 
§  501.  46.  **  tardi5r6s,  too  slow,  a  not  infrequent  translation  of  the  compara- 
tive degree.  *'  Haec,  obj.  of  dixisset.  It  is  placed  before  cum  to  make  a  close 
connection  with  the  preceding  sentence.  What  is  the  construction  of  dixiM«t? 


2l6 


THE  ENEMY  ARE  REPULSED 


extra  munitiones  processit  et  in  earn  hostium  partem  quae  confertis- 

sima  ^videbatur  inrupit.     Neque  Vorenus  quidem  turn  vallo^  sese 

continet,  sed  Pullonem  subsequitur.    Turn 

Pullo  pilum  in  hostis  immittit  atque  tinum 
5  ex  multitudine  procurrentem  traicit.    Hunc 

percussum    et  exanimatum   hostes   scutis 

protegunt  et  in  Pullonem  omnes  tela  coni- 

ciunt.    Eius  scutum  transfigitur  et  telum 

in   balteo    defigitur.    Hie  casus  vaginam 
lo  avertit  et  dextram  manum  eius  gladiimi 

educere  conantis^  moratur.    Eum  ita  im- 

peditum  hostes  circumsistunt. 

Turn  vero  *ei  laborantl  Vorenus,  cum 

sit  inimlcus,  tamen  auxilium  dat.    Ad  hunc 
15  confestim  ^a  PuUone  omnis  multitudo  se 

convertit.    Gladio  comminus  pugnat  Vore- 
nus, atque,  uno  interfecto,  reliquos  paulum 

propellit.     Sed   instans   cupidius®   infelix, 

^pede  se  fallente,  concidit. 
20       Huic  rursus  circumvento  auxilium  dat 

Pullo,    atque    ambo    incolumes,    pluribus 

interfectis,     summa     cum     laude     intra 

munitiones  se  recipiunt.    Sic  inimicorum  alter  alteri  auxilium  dedit 

nee  de  eorum  virtute  quisquam  iudicare  potuit. 


CENTURIO 


LXXI.  THE  ENEMY  BESIEGING  THE  CAMP  ARE  REPULSED 

25  Cum  iam  sex  horas  pugnatum  esset^  ac  non  solum  vires  sed  etiam  tela 
Romanos  deficerent,®  atque  hostes  acrius  instarent,®  et  vallum  scindere 
fossamque  complere  incepissent,®  Caesar,  vir  rei  militaris  peritissimus, 

1  videbatur,  inrupit.  Why  is  the  imperfect  used  in  one  case  and  the  perfect 
in  the  other?  Cf.  §  190.  2  valid,  abl.  of  means,  but  in  EngUsh  we  should  say 
within  the  rampart.  Cf.  ingenti  stabulo,  p.  201,  1.  13,  and  note.  ^  conantis, 
pres.  part,  agreeing  with  eius.  *  ei  laboranti,  indir.  obj.  of  dat.  ^  a  PullSne, 
from  Pullo,  abl.  of  separation.  ®  cupidius,  too  eagerly.  "^  pede  se  fallente,  lit. 
the  foot  deceiving  itself;  in  our  idiom,  his  foot  slipping.  ®  pugnatum  esset,  defice- 
rent,  instarent,  incepissent.    These  are  all  subjunctives  with  cum.    Cf.  §301.46. 


PUBLIUS  GOES  TO  GERMANY  21 7 

suis  imperavit  ut  proelium  paulisper  intermitterent,*  et,  sign6  datS,  ex 
castris  erumperent.*  *Quod  iussi  sunt  faciunt,  et  subito  ex  omnibus 
portis  erumpunt.  Atque  tarn  celeriter  mllites  concurrerunt  et  tarn  pro- 
pinqui  erant  hostes*ut  spatium  pila  coniciendi*  non  daretur.  Itaque 
reiectis  pilis  'comminus  gladiis  pugnatum  est.  Diu  et  audacter  hostes  5 
restiterunt  et  in  extrema  spe  salutis  tantam  virtutem  praestiterunt  ut 
a  dextro  comu  vehementer  'multitudine  suorum  aciem  Romanam  pre- 
merent.  ^Id  imperator  cum  animadvertisset,  Publium  adulescentem 
cum  equitatu  misit  qui  laborantibus  *  auxilium  daret.  Eius  impetum 
sustinere  non  potuerunt  hostes*  et  omnes  terga  vertenint.  Eos  in  10 
fugam  datos  Publius  subsecutus  est  usque  ad  flumen  Rhenum,  quod 
ab  eo  loco  quinque  milia  passuum  aberat.  Ibi  pauci  salutem  sibi 
reppererunt.  Omnibus  reliquis  interfectis,  Publius  et  equites  in  castra 
sese  receperunt.  De  hac  calamitate  finitimae  gentes  cum  certiores  factae 
essent,  ad  Caesarem  legatos  miserunt  et  se  suaque  omnia  dediderunt  15 

LXXII.  PUBLIUS  GOES  TO  GERMANY  •  ITS  GREAT  FORESTS 
AND  STRANGE  ANIMALS 

Inita  aestate  Caesar  litteris  certior  fiebat  et  per  expl6rat5r€s  cognos- 
cebat  pluris  civitates  Galliae  novis  rebus  studere,*®  et  contra  populum 
Romanum  coniurare*"  obsidesque  "inter  se  dare,*®  atque  cum  his 
Germanos  quosdam  quoque  sese  coniuncturSs  esse."  His  litteris  nun- 
tiisque  commotus  Caesar  constituit  quam  celerrime  in  Gallos  proficisci,**  20 
ut  eos  inopinantis  opprimeret,  et  Labienum  legatum  cum  duabus 
legiOnibus  peditum  et  duobus  milibus  equitum  in  Germanos  mittere." 

1  intermitterent,  erumperent.  What  use  of  the  subjunctive?  *  Quod,  etc., 
they  do  as  oniered.  The  antecedent  of  quod  is  id  understood,  which  would  be  the 
object  of  faciunt.  '  ut .  .  .  daretur.  Is  this  a  clause  of  purpose  or  of  result? 
*  coniciendi,  §  402.  '  comminus  gladiis  pugnitum  est,  a  hand-to-hand  conflut 
VHU  waged  with  swords.  *  multitfldine  suorum,  by  their  numbers.  ■aOmm  is 
used  as  a  noun.  What  is  the  literal  translation  of  this  expression?  ^  Id  im- 
peri  tor.  Id  is  the  obj.  and  imperitor  the  subj.  of  animadvertisset.  '  lab^ 
rantibus.  This  participle  agrees  with  ils  understood,  the  indir.  obj.  of  daret; 
qui  .  .  .  daret  is  a  purpose  clause,  §  501.  40.  *  hostis,  subj.  of  potuinint. 
^"  Observe  that  all  these  infinitives  are  in  indirect  statements  after  certior  fiibat, 
he  was  informed,  and  cogn5ac<bat,  he  learned.  Cf.  §  $01 .  48,  49.  ^*  inter  si,  /• 
tack  othtr.        u  proftciacl,  mittar^.  These  infinitives  depend  upon  coBatitiut. 


2l8  THE  STORMING  OF  A  CITY 

^Itaque  re  frumentaria  comparata  castra  movit.  Ab  utroque^  res 
bene  gesta  est ;  nam  Caesar  tarn  celeriter  in  hostium  finis  pervenit  ut 
spatium  ^copias  cogendi  non  daretur*;  et  Labienus  de  Germanis  tarn 
grave  supplicium  sumpsit  ut  nemo  ex  ea  gente  in  reliquum  tempus 
5  Gallls  auxilium  dare  auderet.* 

Hoc  iter  in  Germaniam  Publius  quoque  fecit  et,  ^cum  ibi  moraretur, 
multa  mirabilia  vidit.  Praesertim  vero  ingentem  silvam  mirabatur, 
quae  tantae  magnitudinis  esse  dicebatur  ^ut  nemo  earn  transire  posset, 
nee  quisquam  sciret  aut  initium  aut  finem.    Qua  de  re  plura  cogno- 

lo  verat  a  mllite  quodam  qui  olim  captus  a  Germanis  multos  annos  ibi 
incoluit.  lUe '  de  silva  dicens,  "  Infinltae  magnitudinis  est  haec  silva," 
inquit;  "nee  quisquam  est  ^huius  Germaniae  ®qul  initium  eius  sciat 
aut  ad  fInem  adierit.  Nascuntur  illlc  multa  talia  animalium  genera 
qualia  reliquls  in  locis  non  inveniuntur.    Sunt  boves  qui  unum  ^^  comu 

1 5  habent ;  sunt  etiam  animalia  quae  appellantur  alces.  Hae  nullos  cru- 
rum^^  articulos  habent.  Itaque,  si  forte  conciderunt,  sese  erigere  nullo 
modo  possunt.  Arbores  habent  pro^^  cubilibus;  ad  eas  se  applicant 
atque  ita  recllnatae  quietem  capiunt.  Tertium  est  genus  eorum  qui 
uri  appellantur.   Hi  sunt  paulo  minores  elephantls.^*  Magna  vis  eorum 

20  est  et  magna  velocitas.    Neque  homini  neque  ferae  parcunt.^*  " 

LXXIII.   THE  STORMING  OF  A  CITY 

Publius  pluris  dies  in  Germania  moratus  ^*  in  Galliam  rediit,  et  ad 
Caesaris  castra  se  contulit.  Ille  quia  moleste  ferebat  Gallos^®  eius 
regionis  obsides  dare  recusavisse  et  exercitui  frumentum  praebere 

1  Before  beginning  a  campaign,  food  had  to  be  provided.  Every  fifteen 
days  grain  was  distributed.  Each  soldier  received  about  two  pecks.  This  he 
carried  in  his  pack,  and  this  constituted  his  food,  varied  occasionally  by  what 
he  could  find  by  foraging.  2  Abl.  of  personal  agent,  §  501.  33.  ^  copias 
cogendi,  §  501.  37.  i.  *  daretur,  auderet,  §  501.  43.  auderet  is  not  from  audio. 
^  cum  .  .  .  moraretur,  §  501.  46.  ^  ut .  .  .  posset,  .  . .  sciret,  §  501.  43.  ^  Hie, 
subj.  of  inquit.  ^  huius  Germaniae,  0/  this  part  of  Germany.  ^  qui  .  .  . 
sciat  .  .  .  adierit,  §  501.  45.  ^^  unum,  only  one.  ^^  crurum,  from  crus. 
12  pro,  for,  in  place  of.  ^^  elephantis,  §  501.  34.  "  parcunt.  What  case  is 
used  with  this  verb  ?  ^^  moratus.  Is  this  part,  active  or  passive  in  meaning.'' 
1^  Gallos,  subj.  ace.  of  the  infins.  recusavisse  and  noluisse.  The  indirect  state- 
ment depends  upon  moleste  ferebat. 


THE  STORMING  OF  A  CITY 


219 


VINEA 


15 


nOluisse,  cOnstituit  cis  *  bellum  inferre.    Agris  vastaUs,  vicis  inc€nsis, 
pervenit  ad  oppidum  validissimum  quod  et  naturS  et  arte  munitum 
crat.    Cingebatur  muro  viginti  quinque  pedes*  alto.    A  lateribus  duo- 
bus  man  muniebatur;   a  tertio  latere  collis,  in  quo  oppidum  erat 
situm,    praerupt5    fastigio    ad 
planitiem    verg€bat;    a   quSrtS 
tantum"  latere  aditus  erat  facilis. 
Hoc  oppidum  oppugnare,  *  cum 
opus  esset  difficillimum,  tamen 
constituit    Caesar.     Et    castris 
munitis  Publio  negotium  dedit 
ut  res  'ad  oppugnandum  neces- 
sarias  pararet. 

R5man5rum    autem  ^ppug- 
nati5  est  haec.'    Primum  tufres 

aedificantur  quibus  militas  in  summum  murum  evadere  possint'; 
vineae*  fiunt  quibus  tecti  mllites  ad  murum  succedant ;  plutei*  paran- 
tur  post  quos  milites  tormenta*®  administrent ;  sunt  quoque  arietes 
qui  murum  et  portas  discutiant.  His  omnibus  rebus  comparatis, 
deinde  "agger  ab  ea  parte  ubi  aditus  est  facillimus  exstruitur  et  cum  20 

^  eis,  §  501.  15.  '  pedSs,  §  501.  21.  *  tantum,  adv.  only.  *  cum  .  .  . 
esset,  a  clause  of  concession,  §  501. 46.  ^  ad  oppugnandum,  a  gerund  express- 
ing purpose.  •  haec,  as  follows.  '  possint,  subjv.  of  purpose.  Three  similar 
constructions  follow.  «  vineae.  These  vineae  were  wooden  sheds,  open  in 
front  and  rear,  used  to  protect  men  who  were  working  to  take  a  fortification. 
They  were  about  eight  feet  high,  of  like  width,  and  double  that  length,  covered 
with  raw  hides  to  protect  them  from  being  set  on  fire,  and  moved  on  wheels  or 
rollers.  •  plutei,  large  screens  or  shields  with  small  wheels  attached  to  them. 
These  were  used  to  protect  besiegers  while  moving  up  to  a  city  or  while  serving 
the  engines  of  war.  *°  tormenta.  The  engines  of  war  were  chiefly  the  cata- 
pult for  shooting  great  arrows,  and  the  ballista,  for  hurling  large  stones.  They 
had  a  range  of  about  two  thousand  feet  and  were  very  cflfective.  **  The  agger, 
or  mound,  was  of  chief  importance  in  a  siege.  It  was  begun  just  out  of  reach  of 
the  missiles  of  the  enemy,  and  then  gradually  extended  towards  the  point  to  be 
attacked.  At  the  same  time  its  height  gradually  increased  until  on  a  level  with 
the  top  of  the  wall,  or  even  higher.  It  was  made  of  earth  and  timber,  and  had 
covered  galleries  running  through  it  for  the  use  of  the  besiegers.  Over  or 
beside  the  agger  a  tower  was  moved  up  to  the  wall,  often  with  a  battering-ram 
\arits)  in  the  lowest  story.   (Sec  picture,  p.  221.) 


220 


THE  CITY  IS  TAKEN 


vineis  ad  ipsum  oppidum  agitur.  Turn  turns  in  aggere  promovetur  ; 
arietibus  qui  sub  vineis  conlocati  erant  murus  et  portae  discutiuntur; 
ballistis,  catapultis,  reliquisque  tormentis  lapides  et  tela  in  oppidum 
coniciuntur.  Postremo  cum  iam  turns  et  agger  altitudinem  muri 
5  adaequant  et  arietes  moenia  perfregerunt,^  signo  dato  milites  inruunt 
et  oppidum  expugnant. 


LXXIV.   THE   CITY  IS   TAKEN  •  THE   CAPTIVES   ARE 
QUESTIONED 

Omnibus  rebus  necessariis  ad  oppugnandum  a  Publio  comparatis, 

deliberatur  in  concilio  quod  consilium  ^oppidi  expugnandi  ineant.^ 

Tum  unus*  ex  centurionibus, 
lo  vir   rei   militaris   peritissimus, 

"  Ego  suadeo,"  inquit,  "  ut  ab 

ea  parte,  ubi  aditus  sit^  facilli- 

mus,  aggerem  exstruamus^  et 

turrim  promoveamus^  atque 
15  ariete   admoto   simul   mtirum 

discutere    conemur.^ "    ^  Hoc 

consilium  cum  omnibus  place- 
ret,  Caesar  concilium  dimisit. 

Deinde  milites  hortatus  ut  pri- 
20  ores  victorias  memoria^  tene- 

BALLISTA 

rent,   iussit   aggerem   exstrui, 

turrim  et  arietem  admoveri.  Neque  oppidanis®  consilium  defuit.  Alii 
ignem  et  omne  genus  telorum  de  miiro  in  turrim  coniecerunt,  alii  in- 
gentia  saxa  in  vineas  et  arietem  devolverunt.    Diu  utrimque  acerrime 

1  perfregerant,  from  perfringo.  ^  oppidi  expugnandi.  Is  this  a  gerund  or 
a  gerundive  construction?  Cf.  §  501.  37.  ^  ineant,  §  501.  50.  *  unus,  subj. 
of  inquit.  ^  sit.  This  is  a  so-called  subjunctive  by  attraction,  which  means 
that  the  clause  beginning  with  ubi  stands  in  such  close  connection  with  the 
subjv.  clause  beginning  with  ut,  that  its  verb  is  attracted  into  the  same  mood. 
*  All  these  verbs  are  in  the  same  construction.  '  Hoc  consilium,  subj.  of 
placeret.  For  the  order  cf.  Haec  cum,  etc.,  p.  215,  1.  22,  and  note;  Id  imperator 
cam,  p.  217,  1.  8.         •  memoria,  abl.  of  means.         •  oppidanis,  §  501.  15. 


THE  CAPTIVES  ARE  QUESTIONED 


221 


pugnatum  est  N€  vulncrSti  quidem  pedem  rettulerunt.  Tandem, 
*de  tenia  vigilia,  Publius,  quem  Caesar  illi  open'  praefecerat,  nuntiavit 
partem*  muri  ictibus  ^_^ 

arietis  labefactam  con- 
ddisse.  Qua  rt  au- 
dita Caesar  signum 
dat ;  militgs  inruunt  et 
magna  cum  caede  hos- 
tium  oppidum  capiunt. 
Postridie  eius  diei, 
h5c  oppido  expugnatO, 
^captivorum  qui  no- 
bilissimi  sunt  ad  im- 
peratorem  ante  prae- 
tOrium*    adducuntur. 

TURRES,  ARIETES,  VINEA 


15 


Ipse,  iQrica  aurata  et 

paludamentO   purpureo  insignis,  captivOs   per  interpretem  in  hunc 

modum  interrogat:*  Vos  qui  estis'? 

Interpres.  Rogat  imperator  qui  sitis. 

CaptTvT.  Filii  regis  sumus.  ao 

Interpres.  Dicunt  se  filios  esse  regis. 

ImperAtor.  Cur  mihi  tantas  iniurias  intulistis  ? 

Interpres.    Rogat  cur  sibi  tantas  iniurias  intuleritis. 

CapttvT.  Iniurias  ei  non  intulimus  sed  pro  patria  bellum  gessimus. 
Semper  voluimus  ROmanis  esse  amici,  sed  Roman!  sine  causa  n6s  25 
domo  patriaque  expellere  cOnati  sunt. 

Interpres.  'Negant  s6  iniurias  tibi  intulisse,  sed  pr6  patria  bellum 
gessisse.  'Semper  s€  voluisse  amicos  Romanis  esse,  sed  R5manos 
sine  causa  se  dom5  patriaque  expellere  conatSs  esse. 

^  Between  twelve  and  three  o'clock  in  the  morning.  The  night  was  divided 
into  four  watches.        ^  opeii,  §  501.  15.        '  partem,  subj.  ace.  of  concidiaae. 

*  captivdnim  . . .  aunt,  /Af  noblest  of  the  captives.        '  The  general's  headquarters. 

*  Study  carefully  these  direct  questions,  indirect  questions,  and  indirect  state- 
ments. '  See  Plate  1 1 1,  p.  1 48.  '  Negant,  etc.,  they  say  that  they  have  not,  etc. 
Negant  is  equivalent  to  dicunt  ndn,  and  the  negative  modifies  intuliaae,  but  not  the 
remainder  of  the  indirect  statement.       '  Semper,  etc.,  that  they  have  always,  etc. 


222  CIVIL  WAR  BREAKS  OUT 

Imperator.  ^  Manebitisne  in  reliquum  tempus  in  fide,  hac  rebellione 
condonata  ? 

Turn  vero  captivi  multis  cum  lacrimis  iuraverunt  se  in  fide  manstiros 
esse,  et  Caesar  eos  incolumis  domum  dimisit. 

LXXV.  CIVIL  WAR  BREAKS  OUT  BETWEEN  C^SAR  AND 
POMPEY  •  THE  BATTLE  OF  PHARSALIA 

5  Ne  confecto^  quidem  hello  Gallico,  ^helium  civile  inter  Caesarem 
et  Pompeium  exortum  est.  Nam  Pompeius,  qui  summum  imperium 
petebat,  senatui  persuaserat  ut  Caesarem  rel  publicae  hostem*  iudicaret 
et  exercitum  eius  dimitti  iuberet.  Quibus  cognitis  rebus  Caesar  exer- 
citum  suum  dimittere  recusavit,  atque,  hortatus  milites  ut  ducem  totiens 

lo  victorem  ab  inimlcorum  iniuriis  defenderent,  imperavit  ut  se  Romam 
sequerentur.  Summa  cum  alacritate  milites  paruerunt,  et  transito 
Rubicone^  initium  belli  civilis  factum  est. 

Italiae  urbes  quidem  omnes  fere  ^  rebus  Caesaris  favebant  et  eum 
benigne  exceperunt.   Qua  re  commotus  Pompeius  ante  Caesaris  adven- 

15  tum  Roma  excessit  et  Brundisium"^  pervenit,  inde  ^paucis  post  diebus 
cum  omnibus  copiis  ad  Epirum  mare  transiit.  Eum  Caesar  cum  septem 
legionibus  et  quingentis  equitibus  secutus  est,  et  insignis  inter  Caesaris 
comitatum  erat  Publius. 

Pluribus  levioribus  proeliis  factis,  tandem  copiae  adversae  ad  Phar- 

20  salum®  in  Thessalia  sitam  castra  posuerunt.    Cum  Pompei  exercitus 

1  Manebitisne  in  fide,  will  you  remain  loyal?  ^  With  ne  .  .  .  quidem  the 
emphatic  word  stands  between  the  two.  *  The  Civil  War  was  caused  by  the 
jealousy  and  rivalry  between  Cassar  and  Pompey.  It  resulted  in  the  defeat 
and  subsequent  death  of  Pompey  and  the  elevation  of  Caesar  to  the  lordship 
of  the  Roman  world.  *  hostem,  predicate  accusative,  §  501.  22.  ^  The 
Rubicon  was  a  small  stream  in  northern  Italy  that  marked  the  boundary  of 
Caesar's  province.  By  crossing  it  with  an  armed  force  Caesar  declared  war 
upon  Pompey  and  the  existing  government.  Caesar  crossed  the  Rubicon  early 
in  the  year  49  B.C.  ^  rebus  Caesaris  favebant,  favored  Ccesar's  side.  In  what 
case  is  rebus?  "^  Brundisium,  a  famous  port  in  southern  Italy  whence  ships 
sailed  for  Greece  and  the  East.  See  map.  ^  paucis  post  diebus,  a  few  days 
later;  literally,  afterwards  by  a  few  days.  Cf.  paucis  ante  annis,  p.  213, 1. 12,  and 
note.  »  The  battle  of  Pharsalia  was  fought  on  August  9,  48  B.C.  In  impor- 
tance it  ranks  as  one  of  the  great  battles  of  the  world. 


THE  BATTLE  OF  PHARSALIA        223 

essct  bis  tantus  quantus  Caesaris,  tamcn  erant  mulU  qui  veteranas 
legiSnes  quae  Gallos  et  Germanos  superaverant  vehementer  timebant. 
Qu6s*  ^ante  proelium  commissum  Labienus*  legatus,  qui  ab  Caesare 
nQper  defecerat,  ita  adlocutus  est:  "*Nolite  existimare  hunc  esse 
exercitum  veteranOrum  militum.  Omnibus  interful  proeliis*  neque  5 
temerg  incognitam  rem  pr6nunti6.  Perexigua  pars  illlus  exercitus 
qui  Gallos  superavit  adhQc  superest.  Magna  pars  occisa  est,  multi 
domum  discesserunt,  mult!  sunt  relict!  in  Italia.  Hae  copiae  quas 
videtis  in  •citeriore  Gallia  nuper  conscriptae  sunt."  Haec^  cum  dlx- 
isset,  iQrSvit  s€  nisi  victorem  in  castra  n6n  reversQrum  esse.  'Hoc  10 
idem  Pomp€ius  et  omnes  reliqu!  iuraverunt,  et  magna  sp€  et  laetitia, 
sicut  certam  ad  victoriam,  copiae  e  castris  exierunt. 

Item  Caesar,  animo*  ad  dimicandum  paratus,  exercitum  suum 
eduxit  et  septem  cohortibus  ^"praesidio  castris  relictis  copias  triplici 
acie  instruxit.  Tum,  militibus  studio  pugnae  ardentibus,  tuba  signum  15 
dedit.  Milites  procurrerunt  et  pTlIs  missis  gladios  strinxerunt.  Neque 
vero  virtus  hostibus  defuit.  Nam  et  tela  missa  sustinuerimt  et  impetum 
gladiorum  exceperunt  et  Srdines  conservav€runt.  Utrimque  diu  et 
acriter  pugnatum  est  nee  quisquam  pedem  rettulit.  Tum  equites 
Pomp€I  aciem  Caesaris  circumire  cSnati  sunt.  Quod"  ubi  Caesar  20 
animadvertit,  tertiam  aciem,"  quae  ad  id  tempus  quieta  fuerat,  procur- 
rere  iussit.  Tum  ver5  integrorum  impetum"  defessi  hostes  sustinere 
n5n  potuerunt  et  omnSs  terga  verterunt.  Sed  Pompeius  de  fortunis 
suis  desperans  s€  in  castra  equ5  contulit,  inde  mox  cum  paucis 
equitibus  effugit  25 

*  Quds,  obj.  of  adlocfltus  est.  *  ante  proeliam  commissDm,  before  the  begin- 
ning of  the  battle.  '  Labienus,  Caesar's  most  faithful  and  skillful  lieutenant 
in  the  Gallic  War.  On  the  outbreak  of  the  Civil  War,  in  49  h.c,  he  deserted 
Csesar  and  joined  Pompey.  His  defection  caused  the  greatest  joy  among  the 
Pompeian  party;  but  he  disappointed  the  expectations  of  his  new  friends, 
and  never  accomplished  anything  of  importance.  He  fought  against  his  old 
commander  in  several  battles  and  was  slain  at  the  battle  of  Munda  in  Spain, 
45  B.C.  <  Ndlite  ezistinULre,  don't  think.  *  proeliia,  §  501. 1 5.  '  citeriSre 
Gallil.  This  name  is  applied  to  Cisalpine  Gaul,  or  Gaul  south  of  the  Alps. 
^  Haec,  obj.  of  diziaset.  "  Hoc  idem,  obj.  of  iflrAvimnt.  *  animS,  §  501.  30. 
'°  praesididcaatrfs,  §  501. 17.  ^i  Quod,  obj.  of  animadvertit.  ^' aciem,  sub j. 
of  prdcuxrere.         ^'  impetom,  obj.  of  tustinire. 


224 


THE  TRIUMPH  OF  C^SAR 


LXXVI.  THE  TRIUMPH  OF  CESAR 

Pompeio  amiclsque  eius  superatis  atque  omnibus  hostibus  ubique 

victis,  Caesar  imperator  Romam  rediit  et  -^  extra  moenia  urbis  in  campo 
Martio  castra  posuit.  Turn  vero  amplissimis 
honoribus  adfectus  est.  Dictator  creatus  est, 
et  ei  triumphus  a  senatu  est  decretus.  ^Quo 
die  de  Gallis  triumphum  egit,  tanta  multitudo 
hominum  in  urbem  undique  confluxit  ^ut  omnia 
loca  essent  conferta.  Templa  patebant,  arae 
fumabant,  columnae  sertis  ornatae  erant.  *Cum 
vero  pompa  urbem  intraret,  quantus  hominum 
fremitus  ortus  est!  Primum  per  portam  in- 
gress! sunt  senatus  et  magistrates.  Secuti 
sunt  tibicines,  signiferi,  pedites  laurea  cor5nati 
canentes :  "  Ecce  Caesar  nunc  triumphat,  qui 
subegit  Galliam,"  et  "Mllle,  mille,  mllle,  mille 
Gallos  trucidavimus."  Multi  praedam  capta- 
rum  urbium  portabant,  arma,  omnia  belli  in- 
strumenta.  Secuti  sunt  equites,  animosis  atque 
splendidissime  omatis  equls  vecti,  inter  quos 
Publius  adulescens  fortissimus  habebatur.  Ad- 
ducebantur  tauri,  arietes,  ^qui  dis  immortalibus 

immolarentur.    Ita  longo  agmine  progrediens  exercitus  ^  sacra  via  per 

forum  in  Capitolium  perrexit. 

Imperator  ipse  cum  urbem  intraret,  undique  laeto  clamore  multi- 
25  tudinis  salutatus  est.    Stabat  in  curru  aureo  quern  quattuor  albi  equ! 

vehebant.     Indutus  "^toga   picta,   altera  manu  habenas  et   lauream 

1  A  victorious  general  with  his  army  was  not  allowed  to  enter  the  city  until 
the  day  of  his  triumph.  A  triumph  was  the  greatest  of  all  military  honors. 
2  Quo  die,  on  the  day  that,  abl.  of  time.         ^  ut . . .  essent,  §  501 .  43.         *  Cum . . . 


SIGNIFER 


intraret,  §  501.  46. 


qui  .  .  .  immolarentur,  §  501.  40. 


The  Sacred  Way 


was  a  noted  street  running  along  one  side  of  the  Forum  to  the  base  of  the 
Capitoline  Hill,  on  whose  summit  stood  the  magnificent  temple  of  Jupiter 
Capitolinus.  This  route  was  always  followed  by  triumphal  processions.  '^  The 
toga  picta  worn  by  a  general  in  his  triumph  was  a  splendid  robe  of  Tyrian 
purple  covered  with  golden  stars.    See  Plate  IV,  p.  213. 


THE  TRIUMPH  OF  C^SAR 


225 


15 


tenCbat,  altera  ebumeum  scSptmm.  Post  eum  servus  in  currQ  stSns 
auream  corSnam  super  caput  eius  tenebat.  Ante  currum  miserriml 
captivi,  reg€s  principesque  su- 
peratSrum  gentium,  cat6nls 
vincti,  progrediebantur;  et  vi- 
gintl  quattuor  l!ct5res*  laurea- 
tes fascis  ferentes  et  signiferi 
currum  Caesaris  comitabantur. 
Concludit  agmen  multitude 
captiv5rum,  qui,  in  servitutem 
redact!,  ^demisso  vultu,  vinctis* 
bracchiis,  sequuntur;  quibus- 
cum  veniunt  longissimo  5rdine 
milites,  etiam  hi  praedam  vel 
insignia  militSria  ferentgs. 

Caesar  cum  Capit5lium  as- 
ccndisset,  in  templo  lovi  Ca- 
pitolino  sacra  fecit.  *Simul 
captivOrum     qui     nObilissimi 

,  J       ^.      .  ft  LICTORES  CUM    FASCIBUS 

erant,    abducti    m    carcerem,* 

interfecti  sunt    Sacris  factis  Caesar  de  Capitolio  dSscendit  et  in  forS 

militibus  suis  honOres  mllitaris  dedit  elsque  pecQniam  ex  belli  praeda 

distribuit. 

His  omnibus  rebus  confectis,  Publius  Caesarem  'valere  iussit  et 
quam  celerrime  ad  villam  contendit  ut  patrem  mStremque  salQtaret     25 

'De  rebus  gestis  P.  Cornell  Lentull  hactenus. 

*  The  lictors  were  a  guard  of  honor  that  attended  the  higher  magistrates  and 
made  a  way  for  them  through  the  streets.  On  their  shoulders  they  carried  the 
/as:esy  a  bundle  of  rods  with  an  ax  in  the  middle,  symbolizing  Uie  power  of 
the  law.        ^  dimissd  vult&,  with  downcast  countenance.        *  viactis,  from  vindd. 

*  Simul,  etc.,  At  the  same  time  those  of  the  captives  who  were  the  noblest.        *  The 
prson  was  a  gloomy  dungeon  on  the  lower  slopes  of  the  Capitoline  Hill. 

•  ralfee  iuMlt,  bade  farewell  to.        ^  This  sentence  mark*  the  end  of  the  story. 


30 


APPENDIX  I 

DECLENSIONS,  CONJUGATIONS, 
NUMERALS,  ETC. 

NOUNS 

460.  Nouns  are  inflected  in  five  declensions,  distinguished  by  the 
final  letter  of  the  stem  and  by  the  termination  of  the  genitive  singular. 

First  Declension  —  A-stems,  Gen.  Sing,  -ae 

Second  Declension  —  0-stems,  Gen.  Sing,  -i 

Third  Declension  —  Consonant  stems  and  I-stems,  Gen.  Sing,  -is 

Fourth  Declension  —  U-stems,  Gen.  Sing,  -us 

Fifth  Declension  —  E-stems,  Gen.  Sing,  -li 

461.  FIRST  DECLENSION.  l-STEMS 
domina,  lady       Stem  domina- 

SlNGULAR 

TERMINATIONS 

Nom.  domina  -a 

Gen.  dominae  -ae 

Dat.  dominae  -ae 

Ace.  dominam  -am 

Abl.  domina  -a 

a.  Dea  and  filia  have  the  termination  -abus  in  the  dative  and  ablative 
plural. 

226 


Base  domin- 

Plural 

TERMINATIONS 

dominae 

-ae 

dominamm 

^amm 

dominis 

-is 

dominas 

-as 

dominis 

-is 

SECOND  DECLENSION 


227 


462. 


SECOND  DECLENSION.   0-STEMS 

a.  Masculines  in  -us 


dominua, 

master 

Stem 

dOBUJPO- 

Base  domin- 

Singular 

Plural 

TERMINATIONS 

TERMINATIONS 

Norn. 

dominiw 

-n» 

domini 

-i 

Gen. 

domini 

-i 

domin5rum 

-onim 

Dat. 

dominfi 

-« 

dominis 

-is 

Ace. 

dominnm 

-am 

dominSs 

-6s 

Abl. 

domind 

-6 

dominis 

-is 

1.  Nouns  in  -ns  of  the  second  declension  have  the  termination  -e  in  the 
vocative  singular,  as  domine. 

2.  Proper  names  in  -ius,  and  filins,  end  in  -i  in  the  vocative  singular, 
and  the  accent  rests  on  the  penult,  as  Vergili,  fill. 

b.  Neuters  in  -um 
pilom,  spear       Stem  pilo-      Base  pil- 
SiNGULAR  Plural 

TERMINATIONS 


TERMINATIONS 

Norn. 

pilum 

-urn 

Gen. 

pm 

-i 

Dat. 

pil6 

-5 

Ace. 

pilom 

-um 

Abl. 

pns 

-« 

pTla 

-a 

pil5rum 

-orum 

pilis 

-is 

pna 

-a 

pnis 

-is 

I .  Masculines  in  -ins  and  neuters  in  -inm  end  in  -1  in  the  genitive  singular, 
not  in  -il,  and  the  accent  rests  on  the  penult 

c.  Masculines  in  -€r  and  -It  / 

puer,  boy  9.%,tt afield  Tir,  man 


Stems  pnero- 

agro- 

TiHH 

Basbs  puer- 

agr- 

SlNGULAR 

Tir- 

TKl 

iUCIN 

Nom.     puer 

ager 

vir 

— 

Gen.      pueri 

agrf 

virl 

A 

Dat.       puerS 

agrO 

viro 

•0 

Ace.       puenun 

agnim 

viram 

-Ul 

Abl.      puerO 

agrft 

vir6 

-6 

228 


• 

APPENDIX 
Plural 

I 

TERMINATIONS 

Norn. 

pueri 

agri 

viri 

-i 

Gen. 

pueronun 

agrorum 

vir5nim 

-orum 

Dat. 

pueris 

agris 

viris 

-is 

Ace. 

pueros 

agros 

viros 

-OS 

AM. 

pueris 

agris 

viris 

-is 

463. 


CLASSIFI- 
CATION 


Consonant " 
Stems 


II.  /-Stems 


THIRD  DECLENSION 

'  I .  Stems  that  add  -s  to  the  base  to  form  the 
nominative  singular:  masculines  and 
feminines  only. 
2.  Stems  that  add  no  termination  in  the 
nominative  singular:  a.  masculines  and 
feminines;  b.  neuters. 

Masculines,  feminines,  and  neuters. 


464. 


I.  CONSONANT  STEMS 


I.  Nouns  that  add  -s  to  the  base  to  form  the  nominative  singular: 
masculines  and  feminines  only 


prlnceps, 

m.,  chief 

miles 

,  m.,  soldier 

lapis 

,  m.,  stone 

Bases  ^ 
OR     ^princip- 

Stems  J 

mflit 

lapid 

- 

Singular 

terminations 

Norn. 

princeps 

miles 

lapis 

-s 

Gen. 

prlncipis 

militis 

lapidis 

-is 

Dat. 

prlncipi 

militi 

lapidi 

-i 

Ace. 

principem 

mllitem 

lapidem 

-em 

Abl. 

principe 

milite 

lapide 

-e 

Plural 

Nom. 

principes 

milites 

lapides 

-es 

Gen. 

principum 

militnm 

lapidum 

-um 

Dat. 

principibus 

militibus 

lapidibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

principes 

milites 

lapides 

-es 

Ahl. 

principibus 

militibus 

lapidibus 

-ibus 

THIRD  DECLENSION 


229 


Basks  ^ 

OR 

Stkms. 

rfa,  m.,  king 
reg- 

ifldex,  m.  Judge 
iudic- 

SlNGULAR 

Tirtfls,  f.,  virtue 
virtiit- 

TKRM I  nations 

Norn. 

rgx 

iudex 

virtus 

-e 

Gen. 

regis 

iudids 

viitQtU 

-is 

Dat. 

regi 

iudici 

virtud 

-i 

Ace. 

regem 

iudiccm 

virtu  tern 

•vm. 

Abl. 

rege 

iudice 

Plural 

virtute 

-« 

Norn. 

reg€s 

iudices 

virtu  tgs 

•^ 

Gen. 

reguin 

iudicum 

virtu  turn 

-am 

Dat. 

regibus 

iudicibus 

virtu  tibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

reges 

iudices 

virtu tes 

-es 

Abl. 

regibus 

iudicibus 

virtu  tibus 

-ibus 

Note.   For  consonant  changes  in  the  nominative  singular,  of.  §  233.  3. 

2.  Nouns  that  have  no  termination  in  the  nominative  singular 
a.  Masculines  and  Feminines 


cdnsnl,  m., 

legiS,  f., 

6rd5,  m., 

pater,  m., 

Bases 

OR 

Stems 

consul 
-consul- 

legion 
legiSn- 

row 
5rdin- 

SlNGULAR 

father 
patr- 

TERMINATIONS 

Vom. 

c5nsul 

legio 

6rd5 

pater 

Gen. 

consulis 

legionis 

ordinis 

patria 

-is 

Pat. 

consuli 

legioni 

ordini 

patri 

-i 

Uc. 

consulem 

legionem 

ordinem 

patrem 

-em 

Abl. 

cdnsule 

legione 

ordine 
Plural 

patre 

-e 

\'om. 

consults 

legionfa 

ordines 

patrfa 

-^ 

!  />«. 

consulum 

Icgionum 

ordinum 

patrum 

-um 

Dat. 

consulibus 

ordinibus 

patribus 

-ibus 

.Ice. 

consults 

legi6n€s 

ordines 

patris 

-St 

tbl. 

cdnsulibns 

legionibns 

ordinibus 

patribus 

-ibna 

Note.   For  vowel  and  consonant  changes  in  the  nominative  singular, 
cf.  I  236.  1-3. 


230  APPENDIX  I 

b.  Neuters 
flumen,  n.,  river  tempus,  n.,  time   opus,  n,,  work   caput,  n.,  head 


Bases 

-flumin- 

OR 

Stems 

tempor- 

oper- 

capit- 

Singular 

terminations 

Nom. 

flumen 

tempus 

opus 

caput 

Ge?i. 

fluminis 

temporis 

operis 

capitis 

-is 

Dat. 

flumini 

tempori 

operi 

capid 

-i 

Ace. 

flumen 

tempus 

opus 

caput 

Abl. 

flumine 

tempore 

opere 
Plural 

capite 

-e 

Nom. 

flumina 

tempora 

opera 

capita 

-a 

Gen. 

fluminum 

temporam 

operum 

•capitum 

-um 

Dat. 

flu  minibus 

temporibus 

operibus 

capitibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

flumina 

tempora 

opera 

capita 

-a 

Abl. 

fluminibus 

temporibus 

operibus 

capitibus 

-ibus 

Note.    For  vowel  and  consonant  changes  in  the  nominative  singular, 
cf.  §  238.  2,  3. 

465.  II.   /-STEMS 

a.  Masculines  and  Feminines 
caedes,  f.,  slaughter   hostis,  m.,  enemy     urbs,  f.,  city     aliens,  m.,  retainer 
Stems    caedi-  hosti-  urbi-  clienti- 

Bases     caed-  host-  urb-  client- 


Singular 

TERMINATIONS 

Nom. 

caedes 

hostis 

urbs 

cliens 

-s,-is,  ^r-es 

Gen. 

caedis 

hostis 

urbis 

clientis 

-is 

Dat. 

caedi 

hosti 

urbi 

client! 

-i 

Ace. 

caedem 

hostem 

urbem 

clientem 

-em  (-im) 

Abl. 

caede 

hoste 

urbe 
Plural 

cliente 

-^(-i) 

Nom. 

caedes 

hostes 

urbes 

clientes 

-«s 

Gen. 

caedium 

hostium 

urbium 

clientium 

-ium 

Dat. 

caedibus 

hostibus 

urbibus 

clientibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

caedis,  -es 

hostis,  -es 

urbis,  -es 

clientis,  -es 

-is,  -es 

Abl. 

caedibus 

hostibus 

urbibus 

clientibus 

-ibus 

1.  Avis,  civis,  finis,  ignis,  navis,  have  the  abl.  sing,  in   -i  or 

2.  Turris  has  accusative  turrim  and  ablative  turri  or  turre. 


FOURTH  DECLENSION 


231 


b.  Neuters 
Insigne,  n.,  decoration     animal,  n.,  animal  •  calcar,  n.,  spur 
TEMs    insigni-  animali-  calcari- 


Hases     insign- 


animal- 


calc&r- 


Singular 

Xom. 

Tnsigne 

animal 

calcar 

Gen. 

insignia 

animalia 

calcaris 

Pat. 

Tnsigni 

animalT 

calcari 

Ace. 

Tnsigne 

animal 

calcar 

\bl. 

Tnsigni 

animali 

Plural 

calcari 

Vom. 

insignia 

animalia 

calcaria 

•en. 

Tnsignium 

animalium 

calcarium 

Dat. 

Tnsignibus 

animalibus 

calcaribus 

Ace. 

Tnsignia 

animalia 

calcaria 

Abl. 

Tnsignibus 

animalibus 

calcaribus 

TERMINATIONS 

■^or 

-is 
-i 

-^or  — 
-i 


-ia 

-ium 

-ibus 


-ibus 


466. 


THE  FOURTH  DECLENSION.    ^/-STEMS 


adventus,  m.,  arrival 
Stem  adrenttt-       Base  advent- 


comu,  n.,  horn 
Stem  oomu-       Base  corn- 


TERMINATIONS 

Singular 

masc. 

NEUT. 

\  'om. 

adventua 

comfl 

-US 

-a 

ren. 

adventiis 

comiis 

-us 

-lis 

;\it. 

adventui  (ft) 

comu 

-ui(fi) 

-ft 

Ice. 

adventum 

comu 

-um 

-ft 

ibi. 

adventft 

comu 
Plural 

-tt 

-ft 

Vom. 

adventiis 

comua 

-iis 

-ua 

Lien. 

adventuum 

cornuum 

-unm 

-uum 

Dat. 

advcntibus 

com  ibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

ad vent  us 

comna 

-iis 

-ua 

Abl. 

adventibus 

comibot 

-ibus 

-ibus 

232 


467. 


APPENDIX  I 


THE  FIFTH  DECLENSION.  £-STEMS 


dies,  m.,  day  res,  f.,  thing 

Stem  die-  Base  di-  Stem  re-  Base  r- 


OiWLiUUAK 

terminations 

Norn. 

dies 

res 

-es 

Gen. 

diei 

rei 

4i 

Dat. 

die! 

rei 

4i 

Ace. 

diem 

rem 

-em 

Abl. 

die 

re 

Plural 

-e 

Nom. 

dies 

res 

-€s 

Gen. 

dietum 

rerum 

-enun 

Dat. 

diebus 

rebus 

-ebus 

Ace. 

dies- 

res 

-«s 

Abl. 

diebus 

rebus 

-ebus 

468.  SPECIAL  PARADIGMS 

deus,  m.,  god    domus,  f.,  house    vis,  f.,  strength     iter,  n.,  way. 


Stems 

deo- 

domu-                     vi- 

•  and  viri- 

iter- 

and  itiner- 

Bases 

de- 

dom-                       V- 

Singular 

and  vir- 

iter- 

and  itiner- 

Nom. 

deus 

domus 

vis 

iter 

Gen. 

del 

domiis 

vis  (rare) 

itineris 

Dat. 

de5 

domui,  -o 

vi  (rare) 

itineri 

Ace. 

deum 

domum 

vim 

iter 

Abl. 

deo 

domo,  -u 

Plural 

vi 

itinere 

Nom. 

del,  di 

domiis 

vires 

itinera 

Gen. 

deorum,  deum 

domuum,  -orum 

vlrium 

itinerum 

Dat. 

deis,  dis 

domibus 

vTribus 

itineribus 

Ace. 

deos 

domos,  -lis 

viris,  -es 

itinera 

Abl. 

deis,  dis 

domibus 

vTribus 

itineribus 

a.  The  vocative  singular  of  deus  is  like  the  nominative, 

b.  The  locative  of  domus  is  domi. 


DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES 


233 


ADJECTIVES 

469.     FIRST  AND  SECOND  DECLENSIONS.     O-  AND  1-STEHS 

a.  Adjectives  in  -us 
\)onua,^ood    Stems  bono-  m.  and  n.,  bona-  f.     Base  bon- 


Singular 

MASC. 

FEM. 

Norn. 

bonns 

bona 

Gen. 

boni 

bonae 

Dat. 

bon5 

bonae 

Ace. 

bonum 

bonam 

Abl. 

bond 

bona 
.  Plural 

Norn. 

boni 

bonae 

Gen. 

bonSrum 

bonarum 

Dat. 

bonis 

bonis 

Ace. 

bonds 

bonas 

Abl. 

bonis 

bonis 

NEUT. 

bonum 

boni 

bon5 

bonum 

bond 

bona 

bon5rum 

bonis 

bona 

bonis 


b.  Adjectives  in  -er 
lS!bvr,/rei    Stems  libero-  m.  and  n.,  liberi-  f.     Base  liber- 


Singular 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Norn. 

liber 

libera 

liberum 

Gen. 

liberl 

llberae 

llberi 

Dat. 

libert 

liberae 

llbert 

Ace. 

liberum 

llbcram 

liberum 

Abl. 

liberS 

libeii 
Plural 

libera 

Norn. 

ITberi 

liberae 

libera 

Gen. 

ITberOrum 

libcrimm 

iTberOnim 

Dat. 

liberis 

liberis 

liberis 

Ace. 

libcrts 

liberis 

libera 

Abl. 

Uberit 

liberis 

liberii 

234  APPENDIX  I 

pulcher,  pretty     Stems  pulchro-  m.  and  n.,  pulchra-  f.     Base  pulchr- 


Singular 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Norn. 

pulcher 

pulchra 

pulchrum 

Gen. 

pulchri 

pulchrae 

pulchri 

Dat. 

pulchro 

pulchrae 

pulchro 

Ace. 

pulchnim 

pulchram 

pulchrum 

Abl. 

pulchro 

pulchra 
Plural 

pulchro 

Nom. 

pulchri 

pulchrae 

pulchra 

Gen. 

pulchrorum 

pulchrarum 

pulchr5nim 

Dat. 

pulchris 

pulchris 

pulchris 

Ace. 

pulchros 

pulchras 

pulchra 

AbL 

pulchris 

pulchris 

pulchris 

470. 


THE  NINE  IRREGULAR  ADJECTIVES 


alius,  another  Stems  alio-  m.  and  n.,  alia-  f.  Base  ali- 

SiNGULAR  Plural 


MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

alius 

alia 

aliud 

alii 

aliae 

alia 

Gen. 

alius 

alius 

alius 

aliorum 

aliarum 

aliorum 

Dat. 

alii 

alii 

alii 

aliis 

aliis 

aliis 

Ace. 

alium 

aliam 

aliud 

ali5s 

alias 

alia 

Abl. 

ali5 

alia 

alio 

aliis 

aliis 

aliis 

iinus,  one^ 

only 

Stems  uno-  m. 

and  n.,  una- 

f.           Base 

un- 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

Onus 

una 

unum 

uni 

unae 

una 

Gen. 

unius 

unius 

ijiiius 

unorum 

Qnarum 

unorum 

Dat. 

uni 

uni 

uni 

unis 

unis 

unis 

Ace. 

unum 

unam 

unum 

unos 

Unas 

una 

Abl. 

uno 

una 

uno 

Unis 

unis 

unis 

a.  For  the  complete  list  see  §  ro8. 


DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES 

471.         ADJECTIVES  OP  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION.  /-STEMS 
I.  THREE  ENDINGS 
icer,  icris,  Icre,  keen^  eager 

Singular 

masc.  fem.  nkut. 

Nom.   accr  acris  Sere 

Gen.     Scria  acris  Scris 

Dat.     acrf  acri  acri 

Ace.     acrem  acrem  acre 

Abl.     acri  acri  Scri 


235 


Stem  icri- 

Base  ftcr 
Plural 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

5cr«8 

acres 

acria 

acrium 

acrium 

acrium 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

acris,  -€s 

acris,  -es 

acria 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

II.   TWO  ENDINGS 


omnis, 

omne,  evety, 

all 

Stem  omni-     Base 

omn- 

Singular 

Plural 

MASC  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

omnis 

omne 

omnes 

omnia 

Gen. 

omnis 

omnia 

omnium 

omnium 

Dat. 

omni 

omni 

omnibus 

omnibus 

Ace. 

omnem 

omne 

omnis,  -es 

omnia 

Abl, 

omni 

omni 

omnibus 

.  omnibus 

III.   ONE  ENDING 

pir,  equal    Stem  pari-     Base  par- 

SiNGULAR  Plural 


MASC  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom.     par 

par 

par€8 

paria 

Gen.      pads 

pari* 

padnm 

parium 

Dat.      pari 

pari 

paribus 

paribus 

Ace.       parem 

par 

paria,^ 

paria 

Abl.      pari 

pari 

parilma 

paribus 

I .  Observe  that  ail  i-«tem  adjectives  have  -4  in  the  ablative  singular. 


236 


APPENDIX  I 


472.  PRESENT  ACTIVE  PARTICIPLES 

amans,  loving    Stem  amanti-     Base  amant- 

SiNGULAR  Plural 


MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NKUT. 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom. 

amans 

amans 

amantes 

amantia 

Gen. 

amantis 

amantis 

amantium 

amantium 

Dat. 

amanti 

amanti 

amantibus 

amantibus 

Ace. 

amantem 

amans 

amands,  -es 

amantia 

AM. 

amante,  -i 

amante,  -i 

amantibus 

amantibus 

ieuSf  going    Stem  ienti-, 

eunti-     Base  ient-,  eunt- 

Nom. 

iens 

iens 

euntes 

euntia 

Gen. 

euntis 

euntis 

euntium 

euntium 

Dat. 

eunti 

eunti 

euntibus 

euntibus 

Ace. 

euntem 

iens 

euntis,  -es 

euntia 

AbL 

eunte,  -i 

eunte,  -i 

euntibus 

euntibus 

473. 


REGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 


Positive 

Comparative 

Superlative 

MASC. 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC.               FEM.  NEUT. 

altus  (alto-) 

altior 

altius 

altissimus          -a      -um 

liber  (libero-) 

liberior 

liberius 

ITberrimus          -a      -um 

pulcher  (pulchro-) 

pulchrior 

pulchrius 

pulcherrimus     -a      -um 

audax  (audaci-) 

audacior 

audacius 

audacissimus     -a      -um 

brevis  (brevi-) 

brevior 

brevius 

brevissimus       -a      -um 

acer  (acri-) 

acrior 

acrius 

acerrimus          -a      -um 

474. 


DECLENSION  OF  COMPARATIVES 


altior, 

MgAer 

Singular 

Plural 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

JVom.     altior 

altius 

altiores 

altiora 

Gen.       altioris 

altioris 

altiorum 

altiarum 

Dat.       altiori 

altiori 

altioribus 

altioribus 

Ace.       altiorem 

altius 

altiores 

altiora 

AM.       altiare 

altiore 

altioribus 

altioribus 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 
plus,  more 


Nam. 

Gen. 

Dat, 

Ace. 

Abl. 


plus 
pluri* 

plus 
plure 


plurSs 
plurium 
pluribus 
pluris  (-es) 
pluribus 


237 


plura 

plOrium 

pluribus 

plura 

pluribus 


475. 


IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 


Positive 
bonus,  -a,  -um,  good 

malus,  -a,  -um,  bad 

magnus,  -a,  -om,  great 

multus,  -a,  -am,  much 
parvus,  -a,  -um,  small 

scnex,  senis,  old 
iuvenis,  -^^  young 
vetus,  veteris,  old 
facilis,  -c,  ecLsy 
difficilis,  -€,  difficult 
similis,  -e,  similar 
dissimilis,  -e,  dissimilar 
humilis,  -«,  low 
gracilis,  -e,  slender 
extents,  outward 

Inferus,  below 

posterus,  following 

superus,  above 

[ds,  dtri,  on  this  side] 
[in,  intrS,  in,  within'] 
[prae,  pr6,  be/ore] 
[prope,  near] 
[ultr&f  beyond] 


Comparative 
melior,  melius, 

better 
peior,  peius, 

worse 
maior,  maius, 

greater 

,  plus,  more 

minor,  minus, 

smaller 
senior 
iunior 

vetustior,  -ius 
fadlior,  -ius 
difficilior,  -ius 
similior,  -ius 
dissimilior,  -ius 
humilior,  -ius 
gradlior,  -ius 
exterior,  outer^ 

exterior 
inferior,  lower 

posterior,  later 

superior,  higher 

dterior,  hither 
interior,  inner 
prior,  former 
propior,  nearer 
\i[\cr\ott  further 


Superlative 
optimus,   -a,  -um,  best 

pessimus,  -a,  -um,  worst 

maximus,  -a,  -um,  greatest 

plurimus,  -a,  -um,  most 
minimus,  -a,  -um,  smallest 

maximus  natu 

minimus  natu 

veterrimus,  -a,  -um 

fadllimus,   -a,  -um 

diffidllimus,  -a,  -um 

simillimus,  -a,  -um 

dissimillimus,  -a,  -um 

humillimus,  -a,  -um 

gradllimus,  -a,  -um 

extremus  ^  outermost  ^ 

extimus  J      last 

Tnfimus^  , 

>■  lowest 
imus      j 

postrcmus^^^^ 

postumus  j 

suprSmuaj 

summus   j     * 

citimus,  hithermost 

intimus,  inmost 

primus,  first 

proximus,  next 

ultimus,  furthest 


2  38 


APPENDIX  I 


476. 


REGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 


Positive 

Comparative 

Superlative 

care  (carus),  dearly 

carius 

carissime 

mi  sere  (miser),  wretchedly 

miserius 

miserrime 

acriter  (acer),  sharply 

acrius 

acerrime 

facile  (facilis),  easily 

facilius 

facillime 

477.                   IRREGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 

Positive 

Comparative 

Superlative 

diu,  long^  a  long  time 

diutius 

diutissime 

bene  (bonus),  well 

melius,  better 

optime,  best 

male  (malus),  ill 

peius,  worse 

pessime,  worst 

magnopere,  greatly 

magis,  more 

maxime,  most 

multum  (multus),  much 

plus,  more 

plurimum,  most 

parum,  little 

minus,  less 

minime,  least 

saepe,  often 

saepius 

saepissime 

478. 

NUMERALS 

The  cardinal  numerals  are  indeclinable  excepting  iinus,  duo,  tres,  the 
hundreds  above  one  hundred,  and  mille  used  as  a  noun.  The  ordinals  are 
declined  like  bonus,  -a,  -um. 


Cardinals 

Ordinals 

{How  many) 

(Jn  what  order) 

I,  iinus,  -a,  -um 

one 

pnmus,  -a,  -um 

first 

2,  duo,  duae,  duo 

two 

secundus  {or  alter) 

second 

3,  tres,  tria 

three. 

tertius 

third, 

4,  quattuor 

etc. 

quartus 

etc. 

5,  quinque 

quTntus 

6,  sex 

sextus 

7,  septem 

Septimus 

8,  octo 

octavus 

9,  novem 

nonus 

10,  decern 

decimus 

II,  iindecim 

undecimus 

12,  duodecim 

duodecimus 

13,  tredecim  (deceir 

i(et)tres) 

tertius  decimus 

14,  quattuordecim 

quartus  decimus 

NUMERALS 


239 


Cardinals 

15,  quindecim 

16,  sedecim 

17,  septendecim 

18,  duodevlginti  (octodecim) 

19,  undevigintl(novendecim) 

20,  viginti 

r  viginti  Onus  or 
'\unus  et  viginti,  etc. 
30,  triginta 
40,  quadraginta 
50,  quinquaginta 
60,  sexaginta 
70,  septuagintl 
80,  octdginta 
90,  nonaginta 

100,  centum 

10 1,  centum  (et)  Onus,  etc. 

1 20,  centum  (et)  viginti 

121,  centum  (et)  viginti  unus,  etc. 
200,  ducend,  -ae,  -a 

300,  trecenti 
400,  quadringenti 
500,  quingenti 
600,  sescenti 
700,  septingenti 
800,  octingenti 
900,  nongenti 
1000,  mille 


Ordinals 

quintus  decimus 

sextus  decimus 

Septimus  decimus 

duodevlcensimus 

undevlcensimus 

vicensimus 

fvicensimus  primus  or 
\unus  et  vicensimus,  etc. 

tricensimus 

quadragensimus 

quinquagensimus 

sexagensimus 

septuagensimus 

octogensimus 

nonagensimus 

centensimus 

centensimus  (et)  primus,  etc 

centensimus  vicensimus 

centensimus  (et)  vicensimus  primus 

ducentensimus 

trecentensimus 

quadringentensimus 

quingentensimus 

sescentensimus 

septingentensimus 

octingentensimus 

nongentensimus 

millensimus 


479.  Declension  of  duo,  two,  trts,  three,  and  mille,  a  thousand. 


Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

.V.  duo  duae  duo 

G.    duSniin         duirum  du6rum 

/^.    dudboa  duabus  dudbus 

./.    duds  (?r  duo  duis  duo 

A,    dudbus  duibus  du5bu8 


M.  AND  F.  Neut.  Sing.    Plur. 

tres  tria  mille  milia 

trium  trium  mille  milium 

tribus  tribus  mille  milibus 

tris  or  trSs  tria  mille  milia 

tribtts  tribus  mille  milibus 


Note.  Wile  is  used  in  the  plural  as  a  noun  with  a  modifying  genitive,  and 
is  occasionally  so  used  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular.  For  the 
declension  of  anue  cf.  §  470. 


240 

APPENDIX  I 
PRONOUNS 

480. 

PERSONAL 

ego,/ 

tu, 

,you 

sui,  of  himself,  etc. 

Sing.         Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Nom.   ego      nos 

Gen.     mei      nostrum,  -tri 

tu 
tui 

vos 

vestrum,  -tri 

suT 

sui 

Dat.     mihi    ndbis 

tibi 

vobis 

sibi 

sibi 

Ace.     me       nos 

te 

vos 

se,  sese 

se,  sese 

AM.     me       nobis 

te 

vobls 

se,  sese 

se,  sese 

Note  that  sui' is  always  reflexive. 


481. 


DEMONSTRATIVE 


Demonstratives  belong  to  the  first  and  second  declensions,  but  have  the 
pronominal  endings  -lus  and  -i  in  the  gen.  and  dat.  sing. 

ipse,  self 


Singular 

Plural 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT, 

Nom. 

ipse 

ipsa 

ipsum 

ipsT 

ipsae 

ipsa 

Gen. 

ipsi'us 

ipsrus 

ipsrus 

ipsorum 

ipsarum 

ipsorum 

Dat. 

ipsT 

ipsi 

ipsi 

ipsTs 

ipsis 

ipsis 

Ace. 

ipsum 

ipsam 

ipsum 

ipsos 

ipsas 

ipsa 

AM. 

ipso 

ipsa 

ipso 
hie,  this 

ipsis 
(here),^f 

ipsis 

ipsis 

Nom. 

hie 

haec 

hoc 

hi 

hae 

haec 

Gen. 

huius 

huius 

huius 

horum 

harum 

horum 

Dat. 

huic 

huic 

huic 

his 

his 

his 

Ace. 

hunc 

banc 

hoc 

hos 

has 

haec 

AM. 

hoc 

hac 

hoc 

his 

his 

his 

iste 

1,  this.,  that  (of  yours),  he 

Nom. 

iste 

ista 

istud 

isti 

istae 

ista 

Gen. 

istrus 

isti'us 

istfus 

istorum 

istarum 

istorum 

Dat. 

isti 

isti 

isti 

istis 

istis 

istis 

Ace. 

istum 

istam 

istud 

istos 

istas 

ista 

AM. 

isto 

ista 

isto 

istis 

istis 

istis 

RELATIVE  PRONOUN 
ille,  that  (yonder),  he 


241 


Singular 

Plural 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Norn, 

ille 

ilia 

illud 

illl 

illae 

ilia 

Gen. 

illl'us 

illl'us 

illi'us 

illorum 

illarum 

illorum 

Dat, 

illl 

illl 

illl 

illls 

illls 

illls 

Ace. 

ilium 

illam 

illud 

illos 

illas 

ilia 

Abl. 

illo 

iim 

illo 
is,  this. 

illls 
that,  he 

illls 

illls 

Norn. 

is 

ea 

id 

il,  ei 

eae 

ea 

Gen. 

eius 

eius 

eius 

eorum 

eSrum 

eorum 

Dat. 

el 

Cl 

el 

lis,  els 

ils,  els 

ils,  CIS 

Ace. 

eum 

earn 

id 

eos 

eSs 

ea 

Abl. 

e6 

ei 

eo 

ils,  els 

ils,  els 

ils,  CIS 

idem,  the  same 

Norn. 

Idem 

e'adem 

idem 

fil'dem 
\  ei'dem 

eae'dem 

e'adem 

Gen. 

eius'dem 

eius'dem 

eius'dem 

eorun'dem 

earun'dem 

eorun'dem 

Dat. 

ei'dem 

ci'dem 

ei'dem 

J  iis'dem 
\  eis'dem 

iis'dem 
eis'dem 

iis'dem 
eis'dem 

Ace. 

eun'dem 

ean'dem 

idem 

eos'dem 

eas'dem 

e'adem 

Abl. 

eS'dem 

eS'dem 

eo'dem 

nis'dem 
\  eis'dem 

iis'dem 
eis'dem 

iis'dem 
eis'dem 

Note.   In  the  plural  of  ia  and  idem  the  forms  with  two  i's  are  preferred, 
the  two  i's  being  pronounced  as  one. 


482. 


RELATIVE 
qui,  tvhOy  whichy  that 


Singular 

Plural 

MASC.           FEM. 

NEUT. 

IfASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Norn. 

qui            quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen. 

cuius         cuius 

cuius 

qu6rum 

qu&rum 

quorum 

Dat. 

cui            cm 

cm 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

Aee. 

quod 

qu6s 

qu^ 

quae 

Abl 

quo          qu& 

qu6 

quibus 

quibus 

quibu^ 

242 


APPENDIX  I 


483. 


INTERROGATIVE 
quis,  substantive,  who^  what 


Singular 

Plural 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom.     quis 

quid 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Gen.       cuius 

cuius 

quorum 

quarum 

qu5rum 

Dat.       cui 

cui 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

Ace.       quern 

quid 

quos 

quas 

quae 

Abl.       quo 

quo 

quibus 

quibus 

quibus 

The  interrogative  adjective  qui,  quae,  quod,  is  declined  like  the  relative. 

484.  INDEFINITES 

quis  and  qui,  as  declined  above,^  are  used  also  as  indefinites  {some, 
any).    The  other  indefinites  are  compounds  of  quis  and  qui. 

quisque,  each 


Substantive 

Adjective 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom.    quisque 

quidque 

quisque 

quaeque 

quodque 

Gen.      cuius'que 

cuius'que 

cuius'que 

cuius'que 

cuius'que 

Dat.      cuique 

cuique 

cuique 

cuique 

cuique 

Ace.       quemque 

quidque 

quemque 

quamque 

quodque 

Abl.      quoque 

quoque 

quoque 

quaque 

quoque 

485. 


quidam,  a  certain  one.,  a  certain 


Observe  that  in  the  neuter  singular  the  adjective  has  quoddam  and  the 
substantive  quiddam. 

Singular 


Nom. 

quTdam 

Gen. 

cuius'dam 

Dat. 

cuidam 

Ace. 

quendam 

Abl. 

quodam 

FEM. 

quaedam 

cuius'dam 
cuidam 

quandam 

quadam 


f  quoddam 

\  quiddam  (subst.) 

cuius'dam 

cuidam 

{quoddam 
quiddam  {subst.) 
quodam 


1  qua  is  generally  used  instead  of  quae  in  the  feminine  nominative  singular 
and  in  the  neuter  nominative  and  accusative  plural. 


INDEFINITE  PRONOUNS 


243 


Nom.  quidam 

Gen.  quorun'dam 

Dat.  quibus'dam 

Ace.  quosdam 

Abl.  quibus'dam 


486. 


Plural . 
quaedam 
quorun'dam 
quibus'dam 
quasdam 
quibus'dam 


quaedam 

quorun'dam 

quibus'dam 

quaedam 

quibus'dam 


quisquam,  substantive,  any  one  (at  all) 


MASC.   AND   FEM. 

Nom.  quisquam 

Gen.  cuius'quam 

Dat.  cuiquam 

Ace.  quemquam 

Abl.  quoquam 


NEUT. 

quicquam  (quidquam) 

cuius'quam 

cmquam 

quicquam  (quidquam) 

quoquam 


487.      aliquia,  substantive,  some  one.   aliqui,  adjective,  some 
Singular' 


Substantive 

Adjective 

MASC.  AND  FEM. 

NEUT. 

MASC. 

FEM. 

NEUT. 

Nom.     aliquis 

aliquid 

aliquT 

aliqua 

aliquod 

Gen.      alicu'ius 

alicu'ius 

alicu'ius 

alicu'ius 

alicu'ius 

Dat.       alicui 

alicui 

alicui 

alicui 

alicui 

Ace.       aliqucm 

aliquid 

aliquem 

aliquam 

aliquod 

Abl.      aUquo 

aliqud 

aliqu5 

aliqul 

aliqud 

Plural  for  both  Substantive  and  Adjective 
masc.  fem.  neut. 


Nom. 

aliquT 

aliquae 

aliqua 

Gen. 

aliquo'rum 

aliqua'rum 

aliquo'rum 

Dat. 

ali'quibus 

ali'quibus 

ali'quibus 

Ace. 

aliquos 

aliqu&s 

aliqua 

Abl. 

ali'quibus 

ali'quibus 

ali'quibus 

a.  qoii  (qid),  any  one,  any,  is  the  least  definite  (§  297.  b).  aliquis  (aliqnl), 
some  one,  some,  is  more  definite  than  quis.  quisquam,  any  one  (at  all),  and 
its  adjective  fillus,  any,  occur  mosUy  with  a  negative,  expressed  or  implied, 
and  in  clauses  of  comparison. 


244  APPENDIX  I 

REGULAR  VERBS 

488.  FIRST  CONJUGATION.  il-VERBS.  AMO 

Principal  Parts  amo,  amare,  amavi,  amatus 
Pres.  Stem  ama-     Perf.  Stem  amay-     Part.  Stem  amat- 


ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 
INDICATIVE 

PRESENT 

/  love. 

am  loving,  do  love, 

etc.                              /  am  loved,  etc. 

amo 

amamus 

amor                       amamur 

amas 

amatis 

amaris,  -re             amamini 

amat 

amant 

amatur                   amantur 

IMPERFECT 

/  loved,  was  loving,  did  love,  etc.  /  was  loved,  etc. 


amabam              amabamus 
amabas                amabatis 
amabat                amabant 

amabar  amabamur 
amabaris,  -re  amabamini 
amabatur                amabantur 

/  shall  love,  etc. 

FUTURE 

/  shall  be  loved,  etc. 

amabo                  amabimus 
amabis                 amabitis 
amabit                 amabunt 

amabor  amabimur 
amaberis,  -re  amabimini 
amabitur                amabuntur 

PERFECT 

/  have  loved,  loved,  did  love,  etc.  /  have  been  {was)  loved,  etc. 

amavi  amavimus  _        ["sum  _      fsumus 

amavisti  amavistis  amatus,  I  ^^  amati,  I  ^^^.^ 

amavit  amaverunt, -re  -a, -um    \^^^^         -ae,-a  J^g^jj^ 

PLUPERFECT 

/  had  loved,  etc.  /  had  been  loved,  etc. 

amaveram  amaveramus  _        Teram  _  ,  Teramus 

amaveras  amaveratis  amatus,  I  ^^.-^       amati,  !  ^j.-^.^ 


amaverat  amaverant  -a, -um    j^g^^^       -ae,-a   |^gj.ant 

FUTURE   PERFECT 

/  shall  have  loved,  etc.  /  shall  have  been  loved,  etc. 

amavero  amaverimus  _        fero  _  _  ferimus 

amaveris  amaveritis  amatiis,  I  ^^^        amati,  i  ^^^^^ 


amaverit  amaverint  "*»  "^"*^  [erit        "*®»"*  ^enint 


FIRST  CONJUGATION 


245 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT 

amem 

amSmns 

amer 

amimar 

ames 

ametis 

ameris,  -re 

amemini 

amet 

ament 

ametur 

IMPERFECT 

amentur 

amarem 

amaremua 

amarcr 

am&rSmur 

amarSs 

amaretis 

amareris,  -re 

amaremini 

amaret 

amarent 

amaretur 

PERFECT 

amarentur 

amaverim 
amaveris 

amaverimus 
amaveritis 

aim 
^atua,  1  gjg 

^^^J  aitia 

amSverit 

amaverint 

PLUPERFECT 

-"'^[aint 

amavisscm 

amavissemus 

or«oH.-     r««««™ 

atr^ofT  fessemua 

amavissea 

amavissetis 

amatua,  I  ^^^-^ 

^^^''J  essetia 

amavisset 

amavisaent 

-*»-^  1  easet 
IMPERATIVE 
PRESENT 

-*^'-*[easent 

ama,  love  thou 

amare,  be  thou  loved 

amate,  love  ye 

amamini,  be  ye  loved 

amatS,  thou  shall  love 
amatd,  he  shall  love 
amat5te,  you  shall  love 
amantd,  they  sJiall  love 


FUTURE 

amator,  thou  shall  be  loved 
amator,  he  shall  be  loved 


Pres. 
rerf. 
Fut. 


Pres. 
Fut. 

Perf. 


amantor,  they  shall  be  loved 
INFINITIVE 
am§re,  to  lo%>e  amari,  to  be  loved  \loved 

amaviaae,  to  have  loved  amatua,  -a,  -um   eaae,  to  have  been 

am§tunia,  -a,  -um  eaae,  to  be      [amatum   iri],    to   be  about  to   be 
about  to  love  loved 

PARTICIPLES 


am&na,  -antia,  loving 
amaturua,  -a,  -um,  about  to 
loxie 


Pres.     

Gerundive^     amandua,  -«,  -um,  to 

be  loved 
Perf.     am&tna,  -«,  -um,  having  been 

loved y  loved 


GERUND 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

AbL 


Ace. 
Abl. 


amandi,  of  looting 
amandS,  for  loving 
amandum,  loving 
amand5,  by  loving 

1  Sometimes  called  the  future  passive  participle. 


SUPINE  (Active  Voice) 
[am^tom],  to  love 
[amStfi],  to  love^  in  the  loving 


246  APPENDIX  I 

489.  SECOND  CONJUGATION.    £-VERBS.  MONEO 

Principal  Parts  moned,  monere,  monui,  monitus 
Pres.  Stem  mone-     Perf.  Stem  monu-     Part.  Stem   monit- 


ACTIVE 


I  advise,  etc. 


moneo 
mones 
monet 


monemus 

monetis 

monent 


INDICATIVE 
PRESENT 


PASSIVE 


/  am  advised^  etc. 


monens,  -re 
monetur 


monemur 
monemini 
monentur 


IMPERFECT 


/  was  advising^  etc. 

monebam  monebamus 

monebas  monebatis 

monebat  monebant 


/  was  advised^  etc. 

monebar  monebamur 

monebaris,  -re  monebamini 

monebatur  monebantur 


/  shall  advise,  etc. 


monebo 
monebis 
monebit 


monebimus 

monebitis 

monebunt 


/  shall  be  advised,  etc. 


monebor 
moneberis,  -re 
monebitur 


monebimur 
monebimini 
monebuntur 


/  have  advised^  I  advised^  etc. 


monui 

monuisti 

monuit 


monuimus 
monuistis 
monuenmt,  -re 


/  have  been  (was)  advised,  etc. 

f  sum  .  .  f  sumus 

momtus,  1  gg       moniU,  I  ^^^.^ 

-*'-"°^   lest     -^^'-^    [sunt 


I  had  advised,  etc. 


monueram 

monueras 

monuerat 


monueramus 

monueratis 

monuerant 


PLUPERFECT 


/  had  been  advised^  etc. 


f  eram         .  _  f  eramus 
"^^"^t^^'Jeras    "^«"^^^'J  eratis 
-*'-"°^    lerat     '"    ' 


FUTURE   PERFECT    - 

I  shall  have  advised,  etc.  J  shall  have  been  advised,  etc. 


monuero 
monueris 
monuerit 


monuenmus 

monueritis 

monuerint 


Tero  .  _   ferimus 

monitus,  1  ^^^     moniti,  I  ^^-^.^ 

^'-"°^    lerit    -*^>-^  lerunt 


SECOND  CONJUGATION 


247 


nioneam 

inoneas 

inoneat 

iiionerem 

inoneres 

inoneret 

monuerim 

inonucris 
nionucrit 

nionuissem 

inonuisses 

monuisset 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT 

mone&mus  monear 

moneatis  monearis,  -re 

moneant  moneatur 

IMPERFECT 

moneremus  monerer 

moneretis  monereris,  -re 

monerent  moneretur 


moneimur 
moneamini 
moneantur 

moneremur 
moneremini 
monerentur 


monuerimus 

monueritis 

monuerint 


PERFECT 

{aim  . .  f  simua 

sis  moniti,  I  g-^jg 

sit  -^^'-^Isint 

PLUPERFECT 

monuissemus  f  essem         .  .  f  essemus 

monuissetis  "^°"'^«'J  eases  "^^"•"'J  essetis 

monuiaaent  -A, -um     y^^^^  ^e, -a   ^533^^^ 

IMPERATIVE 


mone,  advise  thou 
monete,  advise  ye 

monetS,  thou  shalt  advise 
monet6,  he  shall  advise 
monetSte,  you  shall  advise 
rnonentd,  they  shall  advise 

Pres.   monere,  to  advise 


PRESENT 

monere,  be  thou  advised 
monemini,  be  ye  advised 

. FUTURE 

monetor,  thou  shalt  be  advised 
monetor,  he  shall  be  advised 


monentor,  they  shall  be  advised 
INFINITIVE 

moneri,  to  be  advised 


Perf.   monuiaae,  to  have  advised         monitus,  -a,  -um  esse,  to  have  been 

advised 
Fut.    monitfima, -a, -um  ease,  to  be      [monitum   iri],   to   be  about  to  be 
about  to  advise  advised 


PARTICIPLES 

Pres. 

monens,  -cutis,  advising 

Pres. 

Fut. 

monitiirus,  -a,  -um,  about  to 
advise 

Ger. 

Perf. 

GERUND 

Perf. 

Xom. 

( ien. 

monendl,  o/advising 

Ace. 

to    be 


Dat.    monendO,  for  advising 
Ace.    moncndum,  advising 
Ibl.    moncndS,  by  advising 


monendus,   -a,    - 

advised 
monitus,  -a,  -um,  having  been 

advised y  adr'ised 

SUPINE  (Active  Voice) 
[monitum],  to  advise 
Abl.    [monitu],  to  advise^  in  thi 
advising 


248 

490. 


APPENDIX  I 

THIRD  CONJUGATION.  £-VERBS.  REGO 

Principal  Parts  rego,  regere,  rexi,  rectus 


Pres.  Stem 

rege- 

Perf.  Stem   rex-       Part.  Stem  rect- 

ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 
INDICATIVE 

/  rule,  etc. 

PRESENT 

/  am  ruled,  etc. 

rego 
regis 
regit 

regimus 

regitis 

regunt 

re'gor                            re'gimur 
re'geris,  -re                   regi'mini 
re'gitur                          regun'tur 

/  was  ruling,  etc. 
regebam         regebamus 


IMPERFECT 


/  was  ruled,  etc. 
rege'bar  regeba'mur 


■egebas          regebatis 
•egebat          regebant 

regeba'ris,  -re               regeba'mini 
regeba'tur                     regeban'tur 

^  /  shall  rule,  etc. 

FUTURE 

■/  shall  be  ruled,  etc. 

■egam            regemus 
■eges              regetis 
■eget              regent 

re'gar                            rege'mur 
rege'ris,  -re                   rege'mini  ' 
rege'tur                         regen'tur 

/  have  ruled,  etc. 


rexi 

rexisti 

rexit 


rexmius 
rexistis 
rexerunt,  -re 


/  had  ruled,  etc. 

rexeram         rexeramus 
rexeras  rexeratis 

rexerat  rexerant 


/  shall  have  ruled,  etc. 


rgxer9 

rexerimus 

rexerig 

rexeritis 

rexerit 

rexeriBt 

/  have  been  ruled,  etc. 


rectus, 
-a,  -um 


es 
est 


recti, 


{sumus 
estis 
sunt 


PLUPERFECT 


/  had  been  ruled,  etc. 


-  ^       feram  -  ^-      feramus 

rectus,        _  recti,  Z7. 

-a  -um  1  ®^^®  -ae  -a  1  ®''^*^^ 

'         [erat  '        [erant 

FUTURE   PERFECT 

/  shall  have  been  ruled,  etc. 

r  erimus 


rectus,  f^'^ 

^a,-um^"« 

'         [erit 


recti, 
-ae, -a 


\  eritis 
[erunt 


THIRD  CONJUGATION 


249 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT 

regam 
-is 

.gat 

regamu8 

regatia 

regant 

regar 

regaris,  -re 
regatur 

IMPERFECT 

rcgamur 
rcgamini 
rcgantur 

regerem 
regert. 

regeremua 

regerttia 

regerent 

regerer 
regereris,  -re 
regeretur 

PERFECT 

regeremur 
regeremini 
regerentur 

rexerim 

rexeris 

rexerit 

rexerimua 

rexcritis 

rexerint 

rectus,  [«1°* 

-a, -mil"! 

'          [sit 

PLUPERFECT 

recti,    f'i"" 
'      [sint 

rexissem 

rexissemus 

rectus   f®®*®™ 

reed     fessemus 

rexisses 

rexissetis 

T  uii  «^^« 

_ae  A  i  essetis 

rexisaet 

rexissent 

^'■^\esset 
IMPERATIVE 

-ae, -a 

1  essent 

rege,  rule  thou 
regite,  rule  ye 

PRESENT 

regere,  be  thou  ruled 
regimini,  be  ye  ruled 

regit5,  thou  shall  rule 
regit5,  he  shall  rule 
regitSte,  ye  shall  rule 
reguntd,  they  shall  rule 


FUTURE 

regitor,  thou  shall  be  ruled 
regitor,  he  shall  be  ruled 


Pres. 

Per/. 

I'ut. 


regere,  to  rule 
rexiase,  to  have  ruled 


reguntor,  they  shall  be  ruled 
INFINITIVE 

regi,  to  be  ruled 

rectus,  -a,  -um  esse,  to  have  been 
ruled 
recturua,  -a,  -um  esse,  to  be      [rectum  iri],  to  be  about  to  be  ruled 
about  to  rule 

PARTICIPLES 

Pres.     

Ger. 


Pres.     r^Sna,  -entis,  ruling 

Fut.      rSctfirua,  -a,  -um,  about  to 

rule 
Per/,     


GERUND 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Abl. 


regendi,  0/ ruling 
r^endd,  /or  ruling 
r^endum,  ruling 
regendO,  by  ruling 


regendus,    -a,    -um,    to    be 
ruled 
Per/,     rectus,  -a,  -um,  having  been 
ruled,  ruled 


SUPINE  ( Active  Vok*) 
Ace.     [rectum],  to  rule 
Abl.     [rectfl],  to  rule,  in  the  ruling 


250 

491 


APPENDIX  I 


FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  /-VERBS.  AUDIO 

Principal  Parts  audio,  audire,  audivi,  auditus 

Pres.  Stem  audi-  Perf.  Stem  audiv-  Part.  Stem  audit- 


ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 
INDICATIVE 

PRESENT 

/  hear,  etc. 

/  am  heard,  etc. 

audi5 
audis 
audit 

audimus 

audltis 
audiunt 

au'dior                      audi'mur 
audrris,  -re               audfrnini 
audi'tur                    audiun'tur 

/  was  hearing,  etc. 

audiebam  audiebamus 

audiebas  audiebatis 

audiebat  audiebant 


IMPERFECT 

/  luas  heard,  etc. 

audie'bar  audieba'mur 

audieba'ris,  -re         audieba'mini 


audieba'tur 


audieban'tur 


/  shall  hear,  etc. 

audiam  audiemus 

audies  audietis 

audiet  audient 


/  have  heard,  etc. 

audivi  audlvimus 

audivisti  audivistis 

audivit  audiverunt,  -re 


FUTURE 

/  shall  be  heard,  etc. 

au'diar  audie'mur 

audie'ris,  -re  audie'mini 

audie'tur  audien'tur 


PERFECT 


/  have  been  heard,  etc. 


auditus, 


es 
est 


auditi, 
-ae,  -a 


sumus 
estis 


sunt 


PLUPERFECT 


/  had  heard,  etc. 

audiveram  audiveramus 

audiveras  audiveratis 

audiverat  audiverant 


/  had  been  heard,  etc. 


auditus, 
-a,  -um 


eram 

eras 

erat 


auditi, 
-ae,  -a 


eramus 

eratis 

erant 


/  shall  have  heard,  etc. 

audivero  audiverimus 

audiveris  audiveritis 

audiverit  audiverint 


FUTURE   PERFECT 

/  shall  have  been  heard,  etc. 

^^^^  auditi,  f^^^,^"^ 


auditus, 
-a,  -um 


ens 
erit 


l^enmt 


FOURTH  CONJUGATION 


251 


SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT 

audiam 

audiamus 

audiar 

audiamiir 

idias 

audiatis 

audiaris,  -re 

audiamini 

aidiat 

audiant 

audiatur 

IMPERFECT 

audiantur 

audlrem 

audirSmus 

audlrer 

audiremur 

audlrSs 

audirttis 

audireris,  -re 

audiremini 

audlret 

audirent 

audlretur 

PERFECT 

audirentur 

audlverim 
audiveris 

audiverimus 
audiveritis 

auditiis,f^|f 

^"d'^^'    sitis 

audlverit 

audiverint 

PLUPERFECT 

^^>-*lsint 

audlvissem 

audivissemus 

-^•f^«>fLT 

'^'^\^^ 

audlvisaes 

audivissetis 

audlvisset 

audlvissent 

-*'  -""^  [esset 
IMPERATIVE 
PRESENT 

-*«»■*  [essent 

audi,  hear  thou 

audire,  be  thou  heard 

audlte,  hear  ye 

audimini,  be  ye 

heard 

FUTURE 

audits,  thou  shalt  hear 

auditor,  thou  shalt  be  heard 

audits,  he  shall  hear 

auditor,  he  shall  be  heard 

audiuntS,  they  shall  hear 


Pres. 
Petf. 

Fut. 


Pres. 
Fut. 

Per/. 


Vom. 
( ten. 
Pat. 

tec. 

Ibl. 


audire,  to  hear 


audivisse,  to  liave  heard 

auditums,  -a,  -am  esse,  to  be 
about  to  hear 


audiontor,  they  shall  be  heard 
INFINITIVE 

audiri,  to  be  heard 


auditus,  -a,  -um  esse,  to  have  been 

heard 
[auditum   in],    to   be  about  to   be 

heard 


PARTICIPLES 
audiSns,  -entis,  hearing  Pres. 


auditums, 
hear 


-um,  about  to 


GERUND 


audiendi,  0/  hearing 
audiendS,  /or  hearing 
audiendom,  hearing 
audiendS,  Ify  hearing 


Ger.      audiendos,   -a,   -um,    to    be 

heard 
Per/,     auditus,  -a,  -um ,  having  been 

heard,  heard 

SUPINE  (Active  Voice) 
Ace.    [auditum],  to  hear 
Abl.    [auditft],  to  hear,  in  the  hear- 


252 


APPENDIX  I 


492.  THIRD  CONJUGATION.  VERBS  IN  -10.   CAPIO 

Principal  Parts  capio,  capere,  cepi,  captus 
Pres.  Stem   cape-     Perf.  Stem  cep-     Part.  Stem   capt- 


ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 
INDICATIVE 

PRESENT 

capi5 

capimus 

ca'pior 

ca'pimur 

capis 

capitis 

ca'peris,  -re 

capi'mini 

capit 

capiunt 

ca'pitur 

IMPERFECT 

capiun'tur 

capiebam 

capiebamus 

capie'bar 

capieba'mur 

capiebas 

capiebatis 

capieba^ris,  -re 

capieba'mini 

capiebat 

capiebant 

capieba'tur 

capieban'tur 

FUTURE 

, 

capiam 

capiemus 

ca'piar 

capie'mur 

capies 

capietis 

capieMs,  -re 

capie^mim 

capiet 

capient 

capie'tur 
perfect 

capien^tur 

cepi,  cepisti,  cepit,  etc. 

captus,  -a,  -um   sum,  es. 

,  est,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT 

ceperam,  ceperas,  ceperat,  etc.  captus,  -a,  -um  eram,  eras,  erat,  etc. 

FUTURE  PERFECT 

cepero,  ceperis,  ceperit,  etc.  captus,  -a,  -um   ero,  eris,  erit,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

PRESENT 

capiam,  capias,  capiat,  etc.  capiar,  -iaris,  -re,  -iatur,  etc. 

IMPERFECT 

caperem,  caperes,  caperet,  etc.  caperer,  -ereris,  -re,  -eretur,  etc. 

PERFECT 

ceperim,  ceperis,  ceperit,  etc.  captus,  -a,  -um   sim,  sis,  sit,  etc. 

PLUPERFECT 

cepissem,  cepisses,  cepisset,  etc.         captus, -a, -um  essem,  esses,  esset,  etc.  ' 


2d  Pers.   cape 


IMPERATIVE 

PRESENT 

capite  capere 


capimini 


DEPONENT  VERBS 

FUTURE 


253 


2d  Pers.   capito               capitote 
jd  Pers.   capitS               capiuntd 

capitor               

capitor                capiuntc 

INFINITIVE 
Pres.    capere 
Peff.     cepisse 
Put.     capturus,  -a,  -um   esse 

cap! 

captiis,  -a,  -am  esse 

[captum  iri] 

PARTICIPLES 

Pres.    capiSns,  -ientis                      Pres. 
Put.     capturus,  -a,  -um                  Ger. 
Peff.     Perf. 

capiendus,  -a,  -um 
captus,  -a,  -um 

GERUND 
Gen.     capiendi 
etc. 


SUPINE  (Active  Voice) 
Ace.    [captum] 
Abl.    [captu] 


493. 


Principal 
Parts 


DEPONENT  VERBS 

I.  hortor,  hortari,  hortatus  sum,  urge 

II.  vereor,  vereri,  veritus  sum, y^^r 

III.  sequor,  sequi,  secutus  sum^  follow 

IV.  partior,  partiri,  partitus  sum,  share,  divide 


Note.  In  addition  to  the  passive  conjugation,  deponent  verbs  use  certain 
forms  from  the  active.  These  are  marked  with  a  star.  Deponent  -io  verbs  of 
the  third  conjugation  are  inflected  like  the  passive  of  capi5. 


Indicative 

Pres. 

hortor    • 

vereor 

sequor 

partior 

hortlris,  -re 

vereris,  -re 

sequeris,  -re 

partlris,  -re 

hortatur 

veretur 

sequitur 

partitur 

hortamur 

veremur 

sequimur 

partimur 

hortamini 

veremini 

sequiminT 

partimini 

hortantur 

verentur 

sequuntur 

partiuntur 

Impf 

hortabar 

verebar 

sequebar 

partiebar 

lut. 

hortabor 

verebor 

sequar 

partiar 

Perf. 

hortatus  sum 

veritus  sum 

secutus  sum 

partitus  sum 

riup. 

hortatus  eram 

veritus  eram 

secutus  eram 

partitus  eram 

F.  p. 

hortatus  ero 

veritus  ero 

secutus  ero 

partitus  ero 

254 

APPENDIX  I 

Subjunctive 

Pres.    horter 

verear                   sequar 

partiar 

Imp/,  hortarer 

vererer                   sequerer 

partirer 

Perf.    hortatus  sim 

veritus  sim            secutus  sim 

partltus  sim 

Plup.   hortatus  essem 

veritus  essem        secutus  essem 
Imperative 

partltus  essem 

Pres.    hortare 

verere                   sequere 

partire 

Fut.     hortator 

veretor                  sequitor 
Infinitive 

partitor 

Pres.    hortari 

vereri                    sequi 

partiri 

Pe/f.    hortatus  esse 

veritus  esse           secutus  esse 

partltus  esse 

Fut,  *hortaturus  esse 

*veriturus  esse     *secuturus  esse 

Participles 

*partitunis  esse 

Pres.  *hortans 

*verens                  *sequens 

*partiens 

Fut.   *hortaturus 

*veritunis             *secuturus 

*partiturus 

Perf.    hortatus 

veritus                    secutus 

partltus 

Ger.     hortandus 

verendus               sequendus 
Gerund 

partiendus 

*hortandi,  etc. 

*verendi,  etc.        *sequendi,  etc. 

Supine 

*partiendi,  etc. 

*[hortatum,  -tu] 

*[verituin,  -tu]     *[secutum,  -tu] 

*[partitum,  -tu] 

IRREGULAR  VERBS 
494.  sum,  a7n,  be 

Principal  Parts  sum,  esse,  fui,  futurus 
Pres.  Stem  es-  Perf.  Stem  fu-  Part.  Stem  fut- 


singular 
sum,  /  am 
es,  thou  art 
est,  he  {she^  it)  is 

eram,  /  was 
eras,  thou  wast 
erat,  he  was 


Indicative 
Present 


Imperfect 


plural 
sumus,  we  are 
estis,  you  are 
sunt,  they  are 

eramus,  we  were 
eratis,  you  were 
erant,  they  were 


IRREGTTT,AR  VERBS  255 

ert,  /  shall  be  trimus,  we  shall  be 

eris,  thou  wilt  be  ,  critis,  you  will  be 

erit,  he  will  be  eruot,  they  will  be 

Perfect 
fui,  /  have  been^  tu&s  fuimus,  we  have  beeii^  were 

fuisti,  thou  hast  been^  wast  fuiatis,  you  have  been^  were 

fuit,  he  has  been^  was  fuSnmt, 


^  _        *  }•  they  have  been,  were 


Pluperfect 
fueram,  /  had  been  fueramus,  we  had  been 

fueras,  thou  hadst  been  fueratis,  you  had  been 

f  uerat,  he  had  been  f  uerant,  they  had  been 

Future  Perfect 
f uer5,  /  shall  have  been  f uerimas,  we  shall  Jiave  been 

fueris,  thou  wilt  have  been  fueritis,  you  will  have  been 

f ueriti  he  will  have  been  f uerint,  they  will  have  been 

„  Subjunctive 

Present  Imperfect 

singular  plural  singular  plural 

sim  simns  essem  essSmua 

sis  sitis  essSs  essStis 

sit  sint  esset  essent 

Perfect  Pluperfect 

fuerim  fuerimus  fuissem  fuissemus 

fueris  fueritis  fuissSs  fuissetis 

fuerit  fuerint  fuisset  fuissent 

Imperative 

PRESENT  future 

2d  Pers.  Sing,  es,  be  thou  2d  Pers.  Sing,  estfi,  thou  shall  be 

2d  Pers.  Plur.  este,  be  ye  jd  Pers.  Sing.  estS,  he  shall  be 

2d  Pers.  Plur.  estSte,  ye  shall  be 
jd  Pers.  Plur.  svaM,  they  shall  be 

iNriNiTivE  Participle 

"rt-s.   esse,  to  be 

■rf.   fuisse,  to  have  been 
I- lit.     futfirus, -a, -um  esse  or  fore,  futfirus,  -a,  -nm,  about  to  be 

to  be  about  to  be 


256  APPENDIX  I 

495.  possum,  be  able,  can 

Principal  Parts  possum,  posse,  potui. 
Indicative 


Subjunctive 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Pres. 

possum 

pos'sumus 

possim 

possfmus 

potes 

potes'tis. 

possls 

possi'tis 

potest 

possunt 

possit 

possint 

Imp/. 

poteram 

poteramus 

possem 

posse'mus 

Fut. 

potero 

poterimus 

Perf. 

potuT 

potuimus 

potuerim 

potuerimus 

Plup. 

potueram 

potueramus 

potuissem 

potuissemus 

F.P. 

potuero 

potuerimus 

Infinitive 

Pres.    posse 


PeTf.     potuisse 


Participle 
Pres.    potens,  gen.  -entis,  (adjective)  powerful 

496.  prosum,  benefit 

Principal  Parts  prosum,  prodesse,  pr5fui,  profuturus 
Pres.  Stem  prodes-        Perf.  Stem  profu-        Part.  Stem  profut- 


Indicative 

Subjunctive 

SINGULAR 

plural 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

Pres. 

prosum 

pra'sumus 

prasim 

prasT'mus 

prades 

prades'tis 

prasis 

prasftis 

prodest 

prasunt 

prasit 

prasint 

Imp/. 

proderam 

praderamus 

pradessem  • 

prodesse'mus 

Fut. 

pradero 

praderimus 

Perf. 

prafuT 

prafuimus 

prafuerim 

prafuerimus 

Plup. 

prafueram 

prafueramus 

prafuissem 

prafuissemus 

F.P. 

prafuera 

prafuerimus 

Imperative 
Pres.  2d  Pers.  prodes,  prodeste  Fut.  2d  Pers.  pradesta,  pradestote 

Infinitive 
Pres.  pradesse  Perf.  prafuisse  Fut.  prafuturus,  -a,  -um    esse 

Future  Participle   profuturus,  -a,  -um 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


257 


487. 


Principal 
Parts 


f  toW,  Telle,  Tolul, ,  be  willing^  will^  vnsh 

nOlle,  nSlui, ,  be  unwilling^  will  not 

malle,  malui, ,  be  more  tvilling^  prefer 


\  n616, 
[  malO, 


11616  and  mal6  are  compounds  of  vol6.  N616  is  for  ne  (no()  +  vol6,  and 
mild  for  ma  (from  magis,  more)  4-  vol6.  The  second  person  vis  is  from  a 
different  root. 

Indicative 


SINGULAR 

Pres. 

vols 

nolo 

malo 

VIS 

non  vis 

mavis 

vult 

non  vult 

PLURAL 

mavult 

volumus 

nolumus 

malumus 

vultis 

non  vultis 

mavul'tis 

volunt 

nolunt 

malunt 

Imp/, 

volebam 

nolebam 

malebam 

Fut. 

volam,  voles,  etc. 

nolam,  noles,  etc. 

malam,  males,  etc 

Perf. 

volul 

ndlul 

maluT 

Plup. 

volueram 

nolueram 

malueram 

/•.  P. 

voluero 

noluerd 

Subjunctive 
singular 

maluero 

rres. 

velim 

nolim 

m§lim 

veils 

nolTs 

mails 

velit 

nolit 

PLURAL 

malit 

veli'mus 

noirmus 

malT'mus 

vcirtis 

noirtis 

mali'tis 

velint 

nolint 

malint 

Impf. 

vellem 

noUem 

mallem 

rerf. 

voluerim 

ndluerim 

miluerim 

riup. 

voluissem 

noluissem 
Imperative 

maluisscm 

Pres 

n6li 
ndllte 

I   rd. 

I'ttt. 

ndlitd.  etc 

258 

APPENDIX  I 

Infinitive 

Pres.     velle 

nolle 

Perf.     voluisse 

noluisse 

Participle 

Pres.     volens,  -ends 

n5lens,  -entis 

498. 

fero,  bear^  carry ^  endu 

malle 
maluisse 


Principal  Parts  fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latus 
Pres.  Stem   fer-  Perf.  Stem  tul-  Part.  Stem  lat- 


Indicative 

active 

PASSIVE 

Pres. 

fero 

ferimus 

feror                       ferimur 

fers 

fertis 

ferris,  -re               ferimini 

fert 

ferunt 

fertur                      feruntur 

Imp/. 

ferebam 

ferebar 

Put. 

feram,  feres, 

etc. 

ferar,  fereris,  etc. 

Perf. 

tulT 

latus,  -a,  -um   sum 

Plup. 

tuleram 

latus,  -a,  -um   eram 

P.P. 

tulero 

Subjunctive 

latus,  -a,  -um    ero 

Pres. 

feram,  feras, 

etc. 

ferar,  feraris,  etc. 

Imp/. 

ferrem 

ferrer 

Perf. 

tulerim 

latus, -a, -um   sim 

Plup. 

tulissem 

Imperative 

latus,  -a,  -um   essem 

Pres.  2d  Pers.     fer 

ferte 

ferre                  ferimini 

Fut.  2d  Pers.     ferto 

fertote 

fertor 

3d  Pers.     ferto 

feruntd 

fertor                feruntor 

Infinitive 

Pres. 

ferre 

• 

ferri 

Perf 

tulisse 

latus,  -a,  -um   esse 

Fut. 

laturus,  -a,  -um   esse 

Participles 

Pres. 

ferens,  -entis 

Pres. 

Fut. 

laturus,  -a,  -um 

Ger. 

ferendus,  -a,  -um. 

Perf 

Perf 

latus,  -a,  -um 

(rift. 

Pat. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS 


Gerund 


ferendl 
ferendo 


Ace. 
Abl. 


ferendum 
ferendo 


Supine  (Active  Voice) 
[latum] 


Ace. 
Abl, 


[lata] 


499. 


^,  go 
Principal  Parts  eB,  ire,  ii  (ivi),  Itum  (n.  perf.  part.) 
Pres.  Stem  i-     Pbrf.  stem   i-  or  iv-     Part.  Stem  it- 


Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Imperative 

SING. 

PLUR. 

Pres. 

eo            imus 
is             itis 
it              eunt 

earn 

2d  Pers.   i 

ite 

Imp/. 

lut. 

Perf. 

Ibam 
ibo 

ii  (IvT) 

irem 

ierim  (Tverim) 

'  2d  Pers.   Tto 
'  jd  Pers.   Ito 

Ttote 
eunto 

Plup. 

ieram  (iveram) 

issem  (ivissem) 

P.P. 

iero  (ivero) 
Infinitive 

Participles 

Pres. 

ire 

Pres. 

iens,  gen.  euntis 

(§472) 

Perf. 

isse  (Tvisse) 

Put. 

iturus,  -a,  -Um 

Put. 

iturus, -a, -um   esse 

Ger. 

eundum 

Gerund  Supine 

Gen.    eundi  Ace.    eundum  Ace.    [itum] 

Dat.    eundd  Abl.    eundo  Abl.    [itu] 

a.  The  verb  e5  is  used  impersonally  in  the  third  person  singular  of  the 
passive,  as  itur,  itum  est,  etc. 

b.  In  the  perfect  system  the  forms  with  v  are  very  rare. 

500.  fi5,  passive  of  faci5 ;  be  made.,  become^  happen 

Principal  Parts  fi5,  fieri,  factua  sum 


Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Imperativx 

Pres.     fi6             

fiam 

2d  Pers.   fi          fite 

fis             

fit              fiunt 

Impf.   fi€bam 

nerein 

Fut.     fiam 

26o 


APPENDIX  I 


Indicative 
Pe?f.     f actus,  -a,  -um   sum 
Plup.    factus,  -a,  -um   eram 
F.  P.     factus,  -a,  -um   ero 


Subjunctive 
factus,  -a,  -um   sim 
factus,  -a,  -um   essem 


Infinitive 
Pres.     fieri 

Perf.     factus,  -a,  -um   esse 
Fut.      [factum  Tri] 


Participles 
Perf.  factus,  -a,  -um 
Ger.      faciendus,  -a,  -um 


CASTRA  MURO    FOSSAQUE  MUNIUNTUR 


APPENDIX   II 


501.  RULES  OF  SYNTAX 

Note.  The  rules  of  syntax  are  here  classified  and  numbered  consecutively. 
The  number  of  the  text  section  in  which  the  rule  appears  is  given  at  the  end 
of  each. 

Nominative  Case 

1.  The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  in  the  nominative  and  answers  the 
question  Who?  or  What?   §  36. 

Agreement 

2.  A  finite  verb  must  always  be  in  the  same  person  and  number  as 
its  subject.    §  28. 

3.  A  predicate  noun  agrees  in  case  with  the  subject  of  the  verb.    §  76. 

4.  An  appositive  agrees  in  case  with  the  noun  which  it  explains.    §  81. 

5.  Adjectives  agree  with  their  nouns  in  gender,  number,  and  case.    §  65. 

6.  A  predicate  adjective  completing  a  complementary  infinitive  agrees 
in  gender,  number,  and  case  with  the  subject  of  the  main  verb.    §  215.  a. 

7.  A  relative  pronoun  must  agree  with  its  antecedent  in  gender  and 
number ;  but  its  case  is  determined  by  the  way  it  is  used  in  its  own  clause. 
§224. 

Pr^>ositions 

8.  A  noun  governed  by  a  preposition  must  be  in  the  accusative  or 
ablative  case.    §  52. 

Genitive  Case 

9.  The  word  denoting  the  owner  or  possessor  of  something  is  in  the 
genitive  and  answers  the  question  Whose  ?   §  38. 

10.  The  possessive  genitive  often  stands  in  the  predicate,  especially  after 
the  forms  of  sum,  and  is  then  called  th^  predicate  genitive.   §  409. 

11.  Words  denodng  a  part  are  often  used  with  the  genidve  of  the  whole, 
known  as  the  partitive  genitive.    §  331. 

12.  Numerical  descripdons  of  measure  arc  expressed  by  the  genitive 
with  a  modifying  adjective.   $  443. 

a6i 


262  APPENDIX  II 

Dative  Case 

13.  The  indirect  object  of  a  verb  is  in  the  dative.    §  45. 

14.  The  dative  of  the  indirect  object  is  used  with  the  intransitive  verbs 
credd,  fave5,  noceo,  pared,  persuadeo,  resisto,  studeo,  and  others  of  like 
meaning,    §  154. 

15.  Some  verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  con,  de,  in,  inter,  ob,  post, 
prae,  pro,  sub,  super,  admit  the  dative  of  the  indirect  object.  Transitive 
compounds  may  take  both  an  accusative  and  a  dative.    §  426. 

16.  The  dative  is  used  with  adjectives  to  denote  the  object  toward  which 
the  given  quahty  is  directed.  Such  are,  especially,  those  meaning  near,  also 
Jit,  friendly,  pleasi7tg,  like,  and  their  opposites.    §  143. 

17.  The  dative  is  used  to  denote  the  purpose  or  end  for  which;  often 
with  another  dative  denoting  the  person  or  thing  affected.    §  437. 

Accusative  Case 

18.  The  direct  object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  in  the  accusative  and 
answers  the  question  Whom?  or  What?    §  37. 

19.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  in  the  accusative.    §  214. 

20.  The  place  to  which  is  expressed  by  ad  or  in  with  the  accusative. 
Before  names  of  towns,  small  islands,  domus,  and  rus  the  preposition  is 
omitted.    §§  263,  266. 

21.  Duration  of  time  and  extent  of  space  are  expressed  by  the 
accusative.    §  336. 

22.  Verbs  of  making,  choosing,  calling,  showing,  and  the  like,  may  take 
a  predicate  accusative  along  with  the  direct  object.  With  the  passive  voice 
the  two  accusatives  become  nominatives.    §  392. 

Ablative  Case 

23.  Cause  is  denoted  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition.  This  answers 
the  question  Because  of  what?    §  102. 

24.  Means  is  denoted  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition.  This  answers 
the  question  By  means  of  what?  or  With  what?    §  103. 

25.  Accompaniment  is  denoted  by  the  ablative  with  cum.  This  answers 
the  question  With  whom?    §  104. 

26.  The  ablative  with  cum  is  used  to  denote  the  manner  of  an  action. 
Cum  may  be  omitted,  if  an  adjective  is  used  with  the  ablative.  This  answers 
the  question  How?  or  In  what  manner?    §  105. 

27.  With  comparatives  and  words  implying  comparison  the  ablative  is 
\ssieAx.o  ^'SSOQXitXh't  measure  of  difference.    §317. 


RULES  OF  SYNTAX  263 

28.  The  ablative  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  with  a  present  or  perfect  parti- 
iple  in  agreement  is  used  to  express  attendant  circumstance.  This  is  called 
:  le  ablative  absolute.    §381. 

29.  I.  Descriptions  of  physical  characteristics  are  expressed  by  the 
ablative  with  a  modifying  adjective.    §  444. 

2.  Descriptions  involving  neither  numerical  statements  nor  physical  char- 
acteristics may  be  expressed  by  either  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  with  a 
modifying  adjective.    §  445. 

30.  The  aJjlative  is  used  to  denote  in  what  respect  something  is  true. 

i^  398- 

31.  The  place  from  which  is  expressed  by  a  or  ab,  de,  g  or  ex  with 
the  separative  ablative.  This  answers  the  question  Whence.'*  Before 
names  of  towns,  small  islands,  domus,  and  rus  the  preposition  is  omitted. 
§§  264,  266. 

32.  Words  expressing  separation  or  deprivation  require  an  ablative  to 
complete  their  meaning.   This  is  called  the  ablative  of  separation.   §  1 80. 

33.  The  word  expressing  the  person  from  whom  an  action  starts,  when 
not  the  subject,  is  put  in  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  a  or  ab.  This  is 
called  the  ablative  of  the  personal  agent.    §  181. 

34.  The  comparative  degree,  if  quam  is  omitted,  is  followed  by  the 
separative  ablative.    §  309. 

35.  The  time  when  or  within  which  anything  happens  is  expressed  by 
I  he  ablative  without  a  preposition.    §  275. 

36.  I.  TYit. place  at  or  in  which  is  expressed  by  the  ablative  with  in. 
This  answers  the  question  Where  .-*  Before  names  of  towns,  small  islands, 
and  riis  the  preposition  is  omitted.    §§  265,  266. 

2.  Names  of  towns  and  small  islands,  if  singular  and  of  the  first  or 
second  declension,  and  the  word  domus  express  the  place  in  which  by  the 
locative.    §  268. 

Gerund  and  Gerundiot 

37.  I .  The  gerund  is  a  verbal  noun  and  is  used  only  in  the  genitive, 
dative,  accusative,  and  ablative  singular.  The  constructions  of  these  cases 
are  in  general  the  same  i&  those  of  other  nouns.    §  406.  i . 

2.  The  gerundive  is  a  verbal  adjective  and  must  be  used  instead  of 
gerund  -f  object,  excepting  in  the  genitive  and  in  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition.  Even  in  tht*se  instances  the  gerundive  construction  is  more 
usual.    §  406.  2. 

38.  The  accusative  of  the  gerund  or  gerundive  with  ad,  or  the  genitive 
with  cau8&,  is  used  to  expcess  purpose.   §  407. 


266 


APPENDIX  III 


503.  Give  the  Latin  of  the  following  words  :  ^ 

Underline  the  words  you  do  not  remember.  Do  not  look  up  a  single 
word  till  you  have  gone  through  the  entire  list.  Then  drill  on  the  words 
you  have  underlined. 


flight 

tells 

goddess 

what 

story 

money 

wild  beast 

way 

new 

calls 

praises  (verb) 

bad 

lives  (verb) 

with 

alone 

loves 

away  from 

your 

pleasing 

pretty 

who 

then,  in  the 

prepares 

water 

why 

next  place 

are 

great 

forest 

daughter 

to 

is 

wreath 

to  whom 

because 

announces 

deep,  high 

fortune 

arrow 

injury,  wrong 

dinner 

fajnous 

cottage 

battle  (noun) 

out  from 

labors  (verb) 

gives 

small 

my 

kills 

girl 

fights  (verb) 

where 

not 

good 

maid 

trumpet 

in 

carries 

down  from 

lady,  mistress 

and 

chicken 

long 

whom 

sailor 

victory 

cause 

island 

farmer 

land 

whose 

wide 

504.  Review  Questions.  How  many  syllables  has  a  Latin  word?  How 
are  words  divided  into  syllables.?  What  is  the  ultima.?  the  penult?  the 
antepenult .?  When  is  a  syllable  short  ?  When  is  a  syllable  long .?  What  is 
the  law  of  Latin  accent  ?  Define  the  subject  of  a  sentence ;  the  predicate ; 
the  object;  the  copula.  What  is  inflection?  declension?  conjugation? 
What  is  the  ending  of  the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular,  and  what  in 
the  plural?  What  does  the  form  of  a  noun  show?  Name  the  Latin  cases. 
What  case  is  used  for  the  subject?  the  direct  object?  the  possessor?  What 
relation  is  expressed  by  the  dative  case?  Give  the  rule  for  the  indirect 
object.  How  are  questions  answered  in  Latin  ?  What  is  a  predicate  adjec- 
tive? an  attributive  adjective?  What  is  meant  by  agreement?  Give  the 
rule  for  the  agreement  of  the  adjective.  What  are  the  three  relations  ex- 
pressed by  the  ablative?  What  can  you  say  of  the  position  of  the  pos- 
sessive pronoun?  the  modifying  genitive?  the  adjective?  What  is  the 
base  ?  What  is  grammatical  gender  ?  What  is  the  rule  for  gender  in  the 
first  declension  ?   What  are  the  general  principles  of  Latin  word  order  ? 

1  The  translations  of  words  used  in  Caesar  are  in  italics. 


REVIEWS 


267 


505.  Fill  out  the  following  summary  of  the  first  declension": 

'  I .  Ending  in  the  nominative  singular 
2.  Rule  for  gender 


Thb  FiftST  OR  X-Dbclbnsion  • 


3.  Case  termmations  -^  ,    ^,      , 
,  ,  1^.  Pural 

4.  Irregular  nouns     ^ 


II.   REVIEW  OF  LESSONS  IX-XVII 
506.  Give  the  English  of  the  following  words : 
Nouns  of  the  First  Declension 


agri  cultura        c6pia 

fpma 

galea           lacrima 

patria 

cdnstantia           diligentia 

fSmina 

inopia          lorica 

praeda 

Nouns  of 

THE  Second  Declension 

ager                     cibtu 

frumentum         oppidanus 

scutum 

amicus                  cdnsilium 

gladius 

oppidum 

seryus 

anna  (plural)        domicilium 

legatus 

pilum 

studium 

auziliom               dominus 

liberi 

populus 

telum 

bellum                  equus 

magister 

praemium 

vicus 

camis                   filius 

muras 

proelium 

vir 

castrum                flmius 

numeras 

puer 

Adjectives  op  the 

First  and 

Second  Declensions 

acger,  aegra,  aegrum 

neuter,  neutra,  neutram 

alius,  alia,  aliud 

.    noster,  nostra,  nostram 

alter,  altera,  alteram 

nullus,  -a,  -um 

armatus,  -a,  -um 

pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchram 

creber,  crebra,  crebrum 

851u8,  -a,  -um 

duras,  -a,  -um 

8UU8,  -a,  -um 

finitimus,  -a,  -um 

t5tus,  -a,  -um 

infirmus,  -a,  -um 

tuu8,  -a,  -um 

legiSnarius,  -a,  -um 

iillus,  -a,  -um 

liber,  libera,  liberum 

unus,  -a,  -um 

maturus,  -a,  -um 

nter,  utra,  utrum 

meus,  -a,  -um 

validus,  -a,  -ura 

miser,  misera,  auMnu 

a 

▼•fter,  vestra,  Tettrnm 

multua.  •«,  -am 

266 


APPENDIX  III 


503.  Give  the  Latin  of  the  following  words  :  ^ 

Underline  the  words  you  do  not  remember.  Do  not  look  up  a  single 
word  till  you  have  gone  through  the  entire  list.  Then  drill  on  the  words 
you  have  underlined. 

flight 

story 

new 

lives  (verb) 

away  from 

who 

why 

forest 

wreath 

deep,  high 

dinner 

out  from 

my 

where 

tru7npet 

lady,  mistress 

who7n 

island 

wide 

504.  Review  Questions.  How  many  syllables  has  a  Latin  word?  How 
are  words  divided  into  syllables.?  What  is  the  ultima.?  the  penult?  the 
antepenult.?  When  is  a  syllable  short.?  When  is  a  syllable  long.?  What  is 
the  law  of  Latin  accent.?  Define  the  subject  of  a  sentence;  the  predicate; 
the  object;  the  copula.  What  is  inflection?  declension?  conjugation? 
What  is  the  ending  of  the  verb  in  the  third  person  singular,  and  what  in 
the  plural?  What  does  the  form  of  a  noun  show?  Name  the  Latin  cases. 
What  case  is  used  for  the  subject?  the  direct  object?  the  possessor?  What 
relation  is  expressed  by  the  dative  case?  Give  the  rule  for  the  indirect 
object.  How  are  questions  answered  in  Latin  ?  What  is  a  predicate  adjec- 
tive? an  attributive  adjective?  What  is  meant  by  agreement?  Give  the 
rule  for  the  agreement  of  the  adjective.  What  are  the  three  relations  ex- 
pressed by  the  ablative?  What  can  you  say  of  the  position  of  the  pos- 
sessive pronoun?  the  modifying  genitive?  the  adjective?  What  is  the 
base  ?  What  is  grammatical  gender  ?  What  is  the  rule  for  gender  in  the 
first  declension?   What  are  the  general  principles  of  Latin  word  order? 


tells 

goddess 

what 

money 

wild  beast 

way 

calls 

praises  (verb) 

bad 

with 

alone 

loves 

your 

pleasing 

pretty 

theft,  in  the 

prepares 

water 

next  place 

are 

great 

daughter 

to 

is 

to  whom 

because 

announces 

fortune 

arrow 

injury,  wrong 

famous 

cottage 

battle  (noun) 

labors  (verb) 

gives 

small 

kills 

girl 

fights  (verb) 

not 

good 

maid 

in 

carries 

down  from 

and 

chicken 

long 

sailor 

victory 

cause 

farmer 

land 

whose 

1  The  translations  of  words  used  in  Caesar  are  in  italics. 


REVIEWS 


267 


505.  Fill  out  the  following  summary  of  the  first  declension': 


Thb  FimsT  OR  X-Dbclbnsion 


1 .  Ending  in  the  nominative  singular 

2.  Rule  for  gender 

3.  Case  terminations -I  ,*  ^.      , 
"^  ,  ,  \^.  Plural 

4.  Irregular  nouns     ^ 


II.   REVIEW  OF  LESSONS  IX-XVII 
506.  Give  the  English  of  the  following  words : 

Nouns  of  the  First  Dfxlension 


agri  cultura 

copia 

fama 

galea 

lacrima 

patria 

cdnstantia 

diligentia 

'femina 

inopia 

lorica 

praeda 

Nouns  of 

THE  Second  Declension 

ager 

cibus 

frumentum 

oppidanus 

scutum 

amicus 

cdnsilium 

gladius 

oppidum 

servus 

arma  (plural) 

domicilium 

legatus 

pilum 

studium 

auxilium 

dominus 

liberi 

populus 

telum 

bellum 

equus 

magister 

praemium 

vicus 

carrus 

fflius 

mums 

proelium 

vir 

castrum 

fluvius 

nomems 

puer 

Adjectives  of  the  First 

aeger,  aegra,  aegnim 
alius,  alia,  aliud 
alter,  altera,  alterum 
armatus,  -a,  -um 
creber,  crebra,  crebrum 
durus,  -a,  -um 
finitimus,  -a,  -um 
infirmus,  -a,  -um 
legiSnarius,  -a,  -um 
liber,  libera,  liberum 
maturus,  -a,  -um 
meus,  -a,  -um 
miser,  misera,  miserum 
multus,  -a,  -um 


AND  Second  Declensions 

neuter,  neutra,  neutrum 
.    noster,  nostra,  nostrum 
niillaa,  -a,  -am 
pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchrum 
solus,  -a,  -um 
suus,  -a,  -um 
tdtus,  -a,  -um 
tuus,  -a,  -um 
ullus,  -a,  -um 
unus,  -a,  -um 
uter,  utra,  utnun 
validus,  -a,  -ura 

'1  ▼Mtra,  TMtiufli 


268 


APPENDIX  III 


Verbs 

Demonstrative  Pronoun 

Adverbs 

arat 

is,  ea,  id 

iam 

curat 

qu5 

desiderat 

Conjunctions 

saepe 

maturat 

an 

properat 

-que 

Preposition 

sed 

apud 

507.  Give  the  Latin  of  the  following  words : 

sword 

war 

shield  (noun) 

plan  (noun) 

corselet 

number 

whole 

people 

man 

my 

it 

beautiful 

your  (plural) 

free  (adj.) 

aid  (noun) 

no  (adj.) 

hasten 

children 

legioncery 

our 

but 

wall 

weak 

battle 

among 

grain 

arms 

spear 

tear  (noun) 

weapon 

master  (of  school) 

food 

village 

one 

friend 

steadiness 

strong 

plow  (verb) 

neighboring 

fatherland 

long  for 

this  or  that 

sick 

town 

and  (enclitic) 

already 

lieutenant 

fort 

often 

helmet 

field 

camp 

want  (noun) 

river 

report,  rumor 

neither  {pi  two) 

which  (of  two) 

zeal 

abode 

much 

care  for 

any 

boy 

agriculture 

or  (in  a  ques- 

he 

his  own 

other 

tion) 

son 

alone 

the  other  {pi 

whither 

slave 

prize  (noun) 

two) 

wagon 

your  (singui 

lar)        master  (owner) 

hard 

townsman 

she 

carefulness 

booty 

wretched 

woman 

plenty 

frequent 

ripe 

horse 

troops 

armed 

508.  Review  Questions.  How  many  declensions  are  there?  What  three 
things  must  be  known  about  a  noun  before  it  can  be  declined  ?  What  three 
cases  of  neuter  nouns  are  always  alike,  and  in  what  do  they  end  in  the  plural  ? 
What  two  plural  cases  are  always  alike  ?  When  is  the  vocative  singular  not 
like  the  nominative  ?  What  is  a  predicate  noun  ?  With  what  does  it  agree  ? 
What  is  an  appositive  ?  Give  the  rule  for  the  agreement  of  an  appositive. 
How  can  we  tell  whether  a  noun  in  -er  is  decUned  Uke  puer  or  like  ager? 


REVIEWS  269 

Decline  bonus,  liber,  pulcher.  How  can  we  tell  whether  an  adjective  in  -tr 
is  declined  like  liber  or  like  pulcher  ?  Why  must  we  say  nauta  bonus  and 
not  nauta  bona?  Name  the  Latin  possessive  pronouns.  How  are  they 
declined  ?  With  what  does  the  possessive  pronoun  agree  ?  When  do  we  use 
tuus  and  when  vaster  ?  Why  is  suus  called  a  reflexive  possessive  ?  What  is 
the  non-reflexive  possessive  of  the  third  person?  When  are  possessives 
omitted  ?  What  four  uses  of  the  ablative  case  are  covered  by  the  relations 
expressed  in  English  by  tvith  f  Give  an  illustration  in  Latin  of  the  ablative 
of  manner;  of  the  ablative  of  cause ;  of  the  ablative  of  means ;  of  the 
ablative  of  accompaniment.  What  ablative  regularly  has  cum  ?  What 
ablative  sometimes  has  cum  ?  What  uses  of  the  ablative  never  have  cum  ? 
Name  the  nine  pronominal  adjectives,  with  their  meanings.  Decline  alius, 
niillus.  Decline  is.  What  does  is  mean  as  a  denaonstrative  adjective  or 
pronoun  ?   What  other  important  use  has  it? 

509.  Fill  out  the  following  summary  of  the  second  declension : 

1.  Endings  in  the  nominative 

2.  Rule  for  gender 

3.  Case  terminations  of  nouns  (  a.  Singular 
in  -us  \  b.  Plural 
a.  The  vocative  singular  of  nouns  in  -us 

4.  Case  terminations  of  nouns  J  a.  Singular 
in  -um  \  b.  Plural 

5.  Peculiarities  of  nouns  in  -er  and  -ir 

6.  Peculiarities  of  nouns  in  -ius  and  -ium 

III.  REVIEW  OF  LESSONS  XVIII-XXVI 

510.  Give  the  English  of  the  following  words  : 

Nouns  of  the  First  Declension 
discipUna  poena  rSglna  tristitia 

fSrma  potentia  superbia 

Nouns  of  the  Second  Declension 
ludus  Omamentom  sacrum  socins  Terbtim 

Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions 
amicus  gritus  interfectns  molestus  septem 

antiquus  iddneos  Tr§tus  perpetuus  snperbtis 

finitimus  inimldis  iMtnt  prozimus 


Thb  Second  or 
O-Dbclension 


270 


APPENDIX  III 


Adverbs 

Conjunctions                  Personal  Pronoun 

hodie           mox 

etiam 

ego 

ibi               nunc 

non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam 

maxime       nuper 

Verbs 

CON  J.  I 

tONJ.  II 

CONJ.  Ill                            CONJ.  IV 

volo,  -are 

deleo,  -ere 

ago,  -ere                 audio,  -ire 

doceo,  -ere 

capio,  -ere               munio,  -ire 

faveo,  -ere 

credo,  -ere               reperio,  -ire 

habeo,  -ere 

dico,  -ere                 venio,  -ire 

iubeo,  -ere 

duco,  -ere 

IRREGULAR  VERB 

sum,  esse 

moneo,  -ere 
moveo,  -ere 
noceo,  -ere 

facio,  -ere 
fugi5,  -ere 
iacio,  -ere 

pareo,  -ere 

mitto,  -ere 

persuadeo,  -ere 

rapid, -ere 

sedeo,  -ere 

rego,  -ere 

studeo,  -ere 

resisto,  -ere 

video,  -ere 

511.  Give  the  Latin  of  the  following  words.    In  the  case  of  verbs 
always  give  the  first  form  and  the  present  infinitive. 


ancient 

not  only  .  .  . 

nearest 

move 

training 

come 

but  also 

sacred  rite 

soon 

take 

resist 

seven 

queen 

glad 

have 

see 

ally,  companion 

flee 

punishment 

to-day 

be 

pride 

obey 

believe 

unfriendly 

fly 

fortify 

lately 

advise 

drive 

/ 

send 

constant 

especially, 

favor  (verb) 

proud  ^ 

sit 

ornament 

most  of  all 

suitable 

word 

also 

power 

angry 

pleasing 

sadness 

school 

make,  do 

beauty 

teach 

find 

hear 

injure 

say 

neighboring 

rule  (verb) 

hurl 

now 

command  (verb) 

destroy 

be  eager 

persuade 

annoying 

there 

friendly 

for 

only 

lead 

slain 

seize 

512.  Review  Questions.    What  is  conjugation.?    Name  two  important 
differences  between  conjugation  in  Latin  and  in  English.   What  is  tense? 


REVIEWS 


271 


What  is  mood?  What  are  the  Latin  moods?  When  do  we  use  the  indica- 
:ive  mood?  Name  the  six  tenses  of  the  indicative.  What  are  personal 
I  iidings?  Name  those  you  have  had.  Inflect  sum  in  the  three  tenses  you 
have  learned.  How  many  regular  conjugations  are  there?  How  are  they 
distinguished?  How  is  the  present  stem  found?  What  tenses  are  formed 
:10m  the  present  stem?  What  is  the  tense  sign  of  the  imperfect?  What 
is  the  meaning  of  the  imperfect?  What  is  the  tense  sign  of  the  future  in 
the  first  two  conjugations?  in  the  last  two?  Before  what  letters  is  a  final 
long  vowel  of  the  stem  shortened  ?  What  are  the  three  possible  translations 
of  a  present,  as  of  pugn6?  Inflect  aro,  sedeo,  mitto,  faci6»  and  veniS,  in  the 
present,  imperfect,  and  future  active.  What  forms  of  -16  verbs  of  the  third 
conjugation  are  like  audid?  what  like  regS?  Give  the  rule  for  the  dative 
with  adjectives.  Name  the  special  intransitive  verbs  that  govern  the  dative. 
What  does  the  imperative  mood  express?  How  is  the  present  active  im- 
perative formed  in  the  singular  ?  in  the  plural  ?  What  three  verbs  have  a 
shortened  present  active  imperative  ?  Give  the  present  active  imperative  of 
port5,  deleo,  ag5,  facid,  munid. 


IV.   REVIEW  OF  LESSONS  XXVII-XXXVI 
513.  Give  the  English  of  the  following  words : 


aU 


Nouns  of  the  First  Declknsion 
cura  mora  porta  prSvincia 


vita 


Nouns  of  the  Second  Declension 


animoa         bracchium 

locus                navigium 

periculum 

aurum           deus 

monstrum        oraculum 

ventus 

Adjectives 

of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions 

adversQS 

commStus               dubius 

plenus 

attentus 

defessus                  maximus 

saevus 

c&nia 

dexter                    perfidus 
Adverbs 

sinister 

antei 

difl                         iU 

subit5 

celeriter 

frustri                    longS 

tamen 

dteique 

graviter                  semper 

torn 

vmom 


Conjunctions 
si 


obi 


272 

APPENDIX  III 

Prepositions 

dg 

per                 pro 

Verbs 

sine 

CONJ, 

.  I 

CONJ.  II 

adpropinquS            recuse              supero 

contineo 

navigo 

reporto             tempto 

egeo 

occupo 

servo               vasto 

prohibeo 

postulo 

sto 

vulnero 

responded 
teneo 

CONJ. 

III 

IRREGULAR  VERB 

discedo 

gero 

interficio 

absum 

514.  Translate  the  following  words.    Give  the  genitive  and  the 

gender  of  the  nouns  and  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs. 

be  away 

moreover 

boat,  ship 

without 

before, 

wind 

greatest 

sail  (verb) 

hold 

previously 

through 

oracle 

life 

suddenly 

depart. 

if 

danger 

save 

dear 

go  away 

savage 

lay  waste 

full 

always 

province 

wound  (verb) 

gate 

refuse 

god 

care,  trouble 

wine 

doubtful 

heavily 

hold  in. 

kill 

delay 

opposite. 

monster 

keep 

reply 

faithless 

adverse 

approach 

afar 

(verb) 

right 

demand 

nevertheless 

thus,  so. 

wing 

seize 

finally 

place 

as  follows 

mind. 

quickly 

attentive 

be  without. 

arm  (noun) 

heart 

before,  in 

then,  at 

lack 

when 

left  (adj.) 

behalf  of 

that  time 

moved 

in  vain 

bear,  carry  on 

battle 

weary 

gold 

stand 

try 

down  from  or 

overcome, 

restrain. 

bring  back. 

for  a  long 

concerning 

conquer 

keep  from 

win 

time 

515.  Give  the  principal*  parts  and  meaning  of  the  following  verbs  : 

sum 

moveo 

moneo 

pareo 

venio 

d5 

credo 

capio 

duco 

iacio 

teneo 

rapio 

doceo 

facio 

video 

iubeo 

reperi5 

rego 

persuadeo 

1               absum 

ago 

deleo 

faveo 

sedeo 

egeo 

mitto 

resist5 

noceo 

studeo 

gero 

munio 

audio 

dico 

fugio 

sto 

REVIEWS 


273 


516.  Review  Questions.  What  are  the  personal  endings  in  the  passive 
>icc  ?  What  is  the  letter  -r  sometimes  called  ?  What  are  the  distinguishing 
\ .  >wels  of  the  four  conjugations  ?  What  forms  constitute  the  principal  parts  ? 
What  are  the  three  different  conjugation  stems?  How  may  they  be  found? 
What  are  the  tenses  of  the  indicative?  of  the  infinitive?  What  tense  of 
the  imperative  have  you  learned?  What  forms  are  built  on  the  present 
stem  ?  on  the  perfect  stem  ?  on  the  participial  stem  ?  What  are  the  endings 
of  the  perfect  active  indicative  ?  What  is  the  tense  sign  of  the  pluperfect 
active?  of  the  future  perfect  active?  How  is  the  present  active  infinitive 
formed?  the  present  passive  infinitive?  How  is  the  present  active  impera- 
tive formed?  the  present  passive  imperative?  How  is  the  perfect  active 
infinitive  formed  ?  the  perfect  passive  infinitive  ?  How  is  the  future  active 
infinitive  formed?  What  is  a  participle?  How  are  participles  in  -us  de- 
clined? Give  the  rule  for  the  agreement  of  the  participle.  How  are  the 
perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  passive  indicative  formed  ?  Conjugate 
the  verb  sum  in  all  moods  and  tenses  as  far  as  you  have  learned  it  (§  494)- 
What  is  meant  by  the  separative  ablative  ?  How  is  the  place  /rom  which 
expressed  in  Latin  ?  Give  the  rule  for  the  ablative  of  separation ;  for  the 
ablative  of  the  personal  agent.  How  can  we  distinguish  between  the  abla- 
tive of  means  and  the  ablative  of  the  personal  agent  ?  What  is  the  perfect 
definite?  the  perfect  indefinite  ?  What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between 
the  perfect  indefinite  and  the  imperfect  ?  What  two  cases  in  Latin  may  be 
<:^ovemed  by  a  preposition  ?  Name  the  prepositions  that  govern  the  abla- 
tive.  What  does  the  preposition  in  mean  when  it  governs  the  ablative?  the 
accusative?  What  are  the  threeanterrogatives  used  to  introduce ^y^j-and-//^? 
questions  ?  Explain  the  force  of  each.  What  words  are  sometimes  used  for 
yes  and  no  t  What  are  the  different  meanings  and  uses  of  ubi  ? 

V.  REVIEW  OF  LESSONS  XXXVII-XLIV 


517.  Give  the  English  of  the  following  words : 

Nouns 


FIRST  DECLENSION 

ripa 

animal 

caUmitas 

arbor 

calcar 

avis 

caput 

caedes 

civis 

SECOND  DECLENSION 

barbari  castellum 

captivus  impedimentum 

THIRD  DECLENSION 

cliSns            dux  fdns              ignis 

collia            equM  fritar            imperator 

cSnsul           finis  homd             insigne 

dens             flumen  bostis            iter 


274 


APPENDIX  III 


iudex 

mater 

opus 

pes 

sanguis 

urbs 

labor 

mensis 

orator 

pons 

soror 

victor 

lapis 

mUes 

5rdo 

princeps 

tempus 

virtus 

legio 

mons 

pater 

rex 

terror 

vis 

mare 

navis 

pedes 

salus 

turris 

Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions 
barbarus  dexter  sinister  summus 


Prepositions 

in  with  the  abl. 
in  with  the  ace. 
trans 


Adverbs 

cotidie 
numquam 


Conjunctions 

nee,  neque 

nee  .  .  .  nee,  or  neque .  . 


neque 


Verbs 


CONJ.  I 


cesso 
cdnfirmo 


oppugno 
veto 


accipio 
ineipio 


CONJ.  Ill 

peto         vinco 
pono        vivo 


518.  Translate  the  foUovidng  words.    Give  the  genitive  and  the 
gender  of  the  nouns  and  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs : 


forbid 

man-of-war 

conquer 

redoubt,  fori 

rank^  row 

judge 

consul 

sea 

brother 

defeat,  disaster 

mother 

tower 

force 

fire 

retainer 

drill  (verb) 

across 

tree     ■ 

aitizen 

legion 

savages 

foot  soldier 

head 

terror 

horseman 

receive 

safety 

into,  to 

never 

general 

'  assail^ 

right  (adj.) 

mountain 

highest 

storm 

in 

manliness^ 

fountain 

begin 

stofte 

courage 

orator 

march 

blood 

leader 

neither .  .  .  nor 

decoration 

labor  (noun) 

put,  place 

and  not 

bridge 

king 

time 

left 

bird 

spur 

savage,  barba- 

tooth 

cease 

chief 

rous 

soldier 

man 

slaughter 

sister 

month 

river 

strengthen 

seek 

city 

work  (noun) 

foot 

captive 

victor 

and 

enemy 

hindrance, 

daily 

ship 

animal 

baggage 

live  (verb) 

bank 

father 

REVIEWS 


275 


519.  Review  Questions.  Give  the  conjugation  of  possum.  What  is  an 
infinitive?  What  three  uses  has  the  Latin  infinitive  that  are  like  the  Eng- 
lish? What  is  the  case  of  the  subject  of  the  infinitive?  What  is  meant  by 
a  complementary  infinitive  ?  In  the  sentence  The  bad  boy  cannot  be  happy^ 
what  is  the  case  of  happy  f  Give  the  rule.  Decline  qui.  Give  the  rule  for 
the  agreement  of  the  relative.  What  are  the  two  uses  of  the  interrogative? 
I>edine  quia.  What  is  the  base  of  a  noun  ?  How  is  the  stem  formed  from 
the  base  ?  Are  the  stem  and  the  base  ever  the  same  ?  How  many  declen- 
sions of  nouns  are  there  ?  Name  them.  What  are  the  two  chief  divisions 
of  the  third  declension  ?  How  are  the  consonant  stems  classified  ?  Explain 
the  formation  of  lapis  from  the  stem  lapid-,  miles  from  milit-,  rex  from  reg-. 
What  nouns  have  i-stems  ?  What  peculiarities  of  form  do  i-stems  have,  — 
masc.,  fem.,  and  neut.  ?  Name  the  five  nouns  that  have  -i  and  -e  in  the  abl. 
Decline  turris.  Give  the  rules  for  gender  in  the  third  declension.  Decline 
miles,  lapis,  rex,  virtus,  consul,  legio,  homo,  pater,  fliimen,  opus,  tempus, 
caput,  caedes,  urbs,  hostis,  mare,  animal,  vis,  iter. 


520.  Fill  out  the  following  scheme : 

{Masculine 
Feminine 
Neuter 


Tmb  Third 
Declension 


Gender 
Endings 


Case 
Terminations 


I.  Consonant 
Stems 


II.  /-Stems 
iRRBGuuut  Nouns 


ft 


Masc.  and  fem. 
Neuters 

Masc.  and  fem. 
Neuters 


VI.    REVIEW  OF  LESSONS  XLV-LII 
521.  Give  the  English  of  the  following  words : 


Nouns 

I  IRST  DECLENSION 

SECOND  DECLENSION 

amicitia 

annua 

r§gnum                       tergum. 

hdra 

modus 

signum                           tergum  vertere 

Utter* 

nuntius 

supplicium,                 yestigium 

•culos 

tupplicium  dare 
supplicium  sumere  dS 

276 


APPENDIX  III 


THIRD  DECLENSION 


FOURTH  DECLENSION 


aestas 

nox 

adventus 

impetus 

corpus 

pars 

comu 

lacus 

hiems 

pax 

domus 

manus 

libertas 

rus 

equitatus 

metus 

lux, 

sol 

exercitus 

portus 

prima  lux         vox 

fluctus 

nomen 

vulnus 

FIFTH  DECLENSION 

indeclinable  noun 

acies 

res. 

spes 

nihil 

dies 

res  gestae 

fides, 

res  adversae 

in  fidem  venire        res  secundae 

res  publica 

Adjectives 

FIRST  AND  SECOND  DECLENSIONS                                   THIRD  DECLENSION 

densus 

pristinus 

acer,  acris,  acre 

gravis,  grave 

invisus 

publicus 

brevis,  breve 

incolumis,  incolume 

minis 

secundus 

difRcilis,  difdcile 

omnis,  omne 

pauci 

tantus 

facilis,  facile 

par, 

par 

primus 

verus 

fortis,  forte 

velox,  velox 

Pronouns 

PERSONAL 

DEMONSTRATIVE         INTENSIVE            INDEFINITE 

ego 

hie 

ipse             aliq 

uis,  aliqui 

nos 

idem 

quidam 

sui 

ille 

quis 

,  qui 

tu 

iste 

quisquam 

vos 

quisque 

Adverbs 

Conjunctions 

Prepositions 

ne  . . .  quidem 

paene 

satis                   itaque 

ante 

aiim 

quoque 

vero                   nisi 

Verbs 

post 
propter 

CONJ.  I 

CONJ.  II 

CONJ.  Ill 

CONJ.  IV 

conloco 

debeo 

committo, 

desilio 

convoco 

exerceo 

committere  proelium 

cremo 

maneo 

decido 

demonstro 

placeo 

eripio 

mando 

sustined 

sumo, 

sumere  supplicium 
traduco 
verto 

de 

REVIEWS 


277 


522.  Translate  the  following  words.  Give  the  genitive  and  the 
gender  of  the  nouns  and  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs. 

if  not ^  unless 
tm  account  of 
unharmed 
public 

commonwealth 
leap  down,  dis- 
mount 
lead  across 
remain 
call  together 
friendship 
footprint,  trace 
each 

fear  (noun) 
hope 
thenfore 
behind,  after 
so  great 
equal 

in  truth,  indeed 
that  (yonder) 
a  certain 
fall  down 
owe,  ought 

lOsure,  mode 
eye 
name 

wave,  billow 
Jhing,  matter 
exploits 
republic 
prosperity 

523.  Review  Questions.  By  what  declensions  are  Latin  adjectives  de- 
clined.^ What  can  you  say  about  the  stem  of  adjectives  of  the  third 
declension?  Into  what  daases  are  these  adjectives  divided?  How  can  you 
tell  to  which  of  the  classes  an  adjective  belongs?  Decline  &cer,  omnia, 
pftr.   What  are  the  nominative  endings  and  genders  of  nouns  of  the  fourth 


adversity 

bum 

peace 

former,  old- 

that  (of  yours) 

back 

time 

before 

turn  the  back. 

all,  every 

you  (plur.) 

retreat 

any  one  (at  all) 

light 

night 

this  (of  mine) 

daybreak 

hand,  force 

heavy,  serious 

winter 

lake 

hateful,  detested 

attack 

day 

true 

line  of  battle 

commit,  intrust 

bum 

army 

a  few  only 

snatch  from 

drill,  train 

sharp,  eager 

letter 

Join  battle 

we 

punishment 

house,  home 

turn 

inflict  punish- 

midday 

you  (sing.) 

ment  on 

wonderful 

/ 

suffer  punish- 

brave 

signal 

ment 

almost 

summer 

liberty 

the  same 

cavalry 

sun 

some,  any 

wound 

sustain 

if  any  one 

horn,  wing 

take  up,  assume 

self,  very 

country 

hour 

not  even 

second,  favor- 

reign, realm 

easy 

able 

messenger 

dense 

short 

part,  direction 

point  out,  ex- 

voice 

body 

plain 

formerly,  once 

harbor 

difficult 

arrival 

faith,  protection 

first 

come  under  th€ 

of  himself 

arrange,  station 

protection  of 

also,  too 

plfMse 

swift 

sufficiently 

year 

nothing 

278 


APPENDIX  III 


or  Ti-declension  ?  What  nouns  are  feminine  by  exception  ?  Decline  adven- 
tus,  lacus,  cornu,  domus.  Give  the  rules  for  the  ordinary  expression  of 
the  place  to  which^  the  place  from  which^  the  place  in  which.  What 
special  rules  apply  to  names  of  towns,  small  islands,  and  rus  ?  What 
is  the  locative  case?  What  words  have  a  locative  case?  What  is  the 
form  of  the  locative  case  ?  Translate  Galba  lives  at  home.,  Galba  lives  at 
Rome.,  Galba  lives  at  Pompeii.  What  is  the  rule  for  gender  in  the  fifth 
or  e-declension  ?  Decline  dies,  res.  When  is  the  long  e  shortened  ?  What 
can  you  say  about  the  plural  of  the  fifth  declension  ?  Decline  tuba,  servus, 
pilum,  ager,  puer,  miles,  consul,  flumen,  caedes,  animal.  How  is  the  time 
when  expressed?  Name  the  classes  of  pronouns  and  define  each  class. 
Decline  ego,  tii,  is.  What  are  the  reflexives  of  the  first  and  second  per- 
sons? What  is  the  reflexive  of  the  third  person?  Decline  it.  Translate 
/  see  myself  he  sees  himself  he  sees  hifn.  Decline  ipse.  How  is  ipse 
used?  Decline  idem.  Decline  hie,  iste,  ille.  Explain  the  use  of  these 
words.  Name  and  translate  the  commoner  indefinite  pronouns.  Decline 
aliquis,  quisquam,  quidam,  quisque. 


VII.   REVIEW  OF  LESSONS  LIII-LX 

524.  Give  the  English  of  the  following  words  : 

Nouns 
first  declension  second  declension 

aquila        fossa  aedificium  imperium 

captivus  negotium 

concilium 


spatium 
Valium 


THIRD  ] 

DECLENSION 

agmen 

gens 

mors 

regi5 

celeritas 

latitudo 

mulier 

rumor 

civitas 

longitiido 

multitudo 

scelus 

clamor 

magnitudo 

munitio 

servitus 

cohors 

mens 

nemo 

timor 

difficultas 

mercator 

obses 

valles 

e3q)16rator 

mille 

opinio 

FOURTH 

DECLENSION 

FIFTH 

DECLENSION 

aditus 

passus 

res  frumentaria 

commeatus 


REVIEWS 

Adjectives 
first  and  second  declensions 


279 


aequus 

maximoa 

plurimus 

singuli 

bini 

medius 

posterns 

superus 

ducenti 

minimus 

primus 

tardus 

duo 

opportunus 

reliquus 

terni 

exterus 

optimus 

secundus 

iinus 

inferus 

pessimus 

THIRD  DECLENSION 

alacer,  alacris,  alacre 

humilis,  humile 

peior,  peius 

audax,  audax 

ingens 

,  ingens 

,  plus 

celer,  celeris,  cclere 

interior,  interius 

prior,  prius 

citerior,  citerius 

lenis,  lene 

recens,  recena 

difficilia,  difficile 

maior, 

mains 

similis,  simile 

dissimilis,  dissimile 

melior, 

,  melius 

tres,  tria 

facilis,  facile 

minor, 

minus 

ulterior,  ulteriue 

gracilis,  gracile 

ndbilis 

,  nobile 

Adverbs 

acriter 

magis 

optime 

proxime 

audacter 

magnopere 

parum 

quam 

bene 

maxime 

paulo 

statim 

facile 

melius 

plQrimum 

tam 

fere 

prope 

undique 

fortiter 

multum 

propius 

Conjunctions 

Prepositions 

atque,  ac 

qu2  de  causa 

circum 

aut 

quam  ob 

rem 

contra 

aut  .  .  .  aut 

simul  atque  or 

inter 

et  .  .  .  et 

simul 

ac 

Ob 

nam 

trans 

Verbs 

CONJ.  I 

CONJ.  11 

c6nor                 moror 

obtineo 

valeS 

-  hortor               vex6 

perterred               vereor 

CONJ. 

III 

abdS 

dSd5 

patior 

reverter 

cad6 

defends 

premo 

sequor 

cogndscd 

egredior 

proficiscor 

sUtud 

consequor 

incendS 

pr6gredior 

subsequor 

contend5 

incolo 

quaerS 

suscipio 

cupi5 

insequor 

recipid 

trado 

curr5 

occidd 

relinqu6 

traho 

CONJ. 

IV 

pervenio 


28o 


APPENDIX  III 


525.  Translate  the  following  words.    Give  the  genitive  and  the 
gender  of  the  nouns  and  the  principal  parts  of  the  verbs : 


on  account  of 

width 

fear  (verb) 

leave 

nearly 

scout 

worse 

abandon 

keenly^  sharply 

cohort 

greater,  larger 

be  strong 

thousand 

tribe,  nation 

two  by  two 

receive,  recover 

two 

business 

least  (adv.) 

terrify,  frighten 

opportune 

by  a  little 

opinion,  expec- 

dwell 

refnaining 

somewhat 

tation 

state,  citizen- 

above (adj.) 

crime 

approach,  en- 

ship 

next 

difficult 

trance 

valley 

grain  supply 

equal 

trader 

slavery 

pace 

move  forward, 

magnitude,  size 

greatly 

shout  (noun) 

advance 

council,  assembly 

best  of  all  (dAv:) 

from  all  sides 

fnultitude 

space,  room 

better  (adv.) 

against 

woman 

either  .  .  .  or 

well  (adv.) 

around 

desire  (verb) 

rise,  arise 

very  much 

three 

give  over,  sur- 

suffer, allow 

much 

further 

render 

press  hard 

unlike 

line  of  march 

kill 

fall 

like  (adj.) 

rumor 

overtake 

surrender 

slow 

region 

hasten,  strive 

set  fire  to 

very  greatly. 

fortification 

hide 

defend 

exceedingly 

eagle 

one 

possess,  hold 

btdlditig 

almost 

first 

delay  (verb) 

mind  (noun) 

boldly 

second,  favorable 

nearest  {lai&v.) 

easily 

bravely 

two  hundred 

nearer  (adv.) 

easy 

across 

former 

better  (adj.) 

recent 

between,  among 

inner 

well  known. 

huge,  great 

hither  (3.6].) 

middle 

noble 

bold 

so 

low 

mild,  gentle 

immediately 

less 

outward 

swift 

as  soon  as 

more 

three  by  three 

eager 

for 

most 

provisions 

low  (adj.) 

than 

worst 

speed 

slender 

/^^/'(adj.) 

difficulty 

ditch 

one  by  one 

greatest 

hostage 

wherefore  or 

no  ofte 

follow  close 

death 

therefore 

least  (adv.) 

encourage 

command,  power 

for  this  reason 

little  (adv.) 

annoy,  ravage 

captive 

fear  (noun) 

learn,  know 

hide 

or 

return 

drag 

follow 

and 

inquire 

undertake 

pursue 

arrive 

set  out 

run 

both  .  .  .  and 

attempt^  try 

move  out,  dis- 

fix, decide 

rampart 

length 

embark 

REVIEWS  281 

526.  Review  Questions.   What  is  meant  by  comparison?   In  what  two 
ways  may  adjectives  be  compared?    Compare  clarus,  brevis,  veldx,  and 
explain  the  formation  of  the  comparative  and  the  superlative.    What  arc 
the  adverbs  used  in  comparison?    Compare  brevis  by  adverbs.    Decline 
the  comparative  of  yel5z.    How  are  adjectives  in  -er  compared?   Compare 
acer,  pulcher,  liber.    What  are  possible  translations  for  the  comparative 
nd  superlative?    Name  the  six  adjectives  that  form  the  superlative  in 
limus.    Translate  in  two  ways  Nothing  is  brighter  than  the  sun.    Give 
;c  rule  for  the  ablative  with  comparatives.    Compaie  bonus,  magnus, 
nalus,  multus,  parvus,  ezterus,  inferus,  posterns,  superus.    Decline  plus, 
ompare  citerior,  interior,  propior,  ulterior.    Translate  That  route  to  Italy 
■\  much  shorter.   Give  the  rule  for  the  expression  of  measure  of  difference. 
Name  five  words  that  are  especially  common  in  this  construction.    How 
re  adverbs  usually  formed  from  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declen- 
Kjns?  from  adjectives  of  the  third  declension?   Compare  the  adverbs  care, 
iibere,  fortiter,  audacter.   What  cases  of  adjectives  are  sometimes  used  as 
Iverbs?    What  are  the  adverbs  from  facilis?   multus?    primus?  pluri- 
nus?  bonus?  magnus?  parvus?  Compare  prope,  saepe,  magnopere.   How 
1  e  numerals  classified  ?    Give  the  first  twenty  cardinals.    Decline  iinus,  duo, 
tres,  mille.    How  are  the  hundreds  declined?    What  is  meant  by  the  parti- 
tive genitive?  Give  the  rule  for  the  partitive  genitive.  What  sort  of  words 
are  commonly  used  with  this  construction  ?   What  construction  is  used  with 
quidam  and  cardinal  numbers  excepting  mille?    Give  the  first  twenty  ordi- 
nals.   How  are  they  declined?    How  are  the  distributives  declined?   Give 
the  rule  for  the  expression  of  duration  of  time  and  extent  of  space.   What 
is  the  difference  between  the  ablative  of  time  and  the  accusative  of  time? 
What  is  a  deponent  verb?    Give  the  synopsis  of  one.  What  form  always 
has  a  passive  meaning?  Conjugate  amd,  moned,  reg5,  capid,  audid,  in  the 
active  and  passive. 


VIII.  REVIEW  OF  LESSONS  LXI-LXIX 

527.  Review  the  vocabularies  of  the  first  seventeen  lessons.  See 
§§S02»  503»  506,  507. 

528.  Review  Questions.  Name  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive.  What 
time  is  denoted  by  these  tenses  ?  What  are  the  mood  signs  of  the  present 
subjunctive?  How  may  the  imperfect  subjunctive  be  formed?  How  do 
the  perfect  subjunctive  and  the  future  perfect  indicative  active  differ  in 
form?  How  is  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  active  formed?  Inflect  the  sub- 
junctive active  and  passive  of  cur5,  dele6,  Tinc6,  rapid,  moniO.    Inflect  the 


282 


APPENDIX  III 


subjunctive  tenses  of  sum;  of  possum.  What  are  the  tenses  of  the  parti- 
ciples in  the  active?  What  in  the  passive?  Give  the  active  and  passive 
participles  of  amo,  moneo,  rego,  capio,  audio.  Decline  regens.  What  par- 
ticiples do  deponent  verbs  have?  What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  be- 
tween the  perfect  participle  of  a  deponent  verb  and  of  one  not  deponent  ? 
Give  the  participles  of  vereor.  How  should  participles  usually  be  translated  ? 
Conjugate  volo,  nolo,  malo,  fi5. 

What  is  the  difference  between  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  in  their 
fundamental  ideas?  How  is  purpose  usually  expressed  in  English?.  How 
is  it  expressed  in  Latin?  By  what  words  is  a  Latin  purpose  clause  intro- 
duced ?  When  should  quo  be  used  ?  What  is  meant  by  sequence  of  tenses  ? 
Name  the  primary  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  of  the  subjunctive;  the 
secondary  tenses.  What  Latin  verbs  are  regularly  followed  by  substantive 
clauses  of  purpose  ?  What  construction  follows  iubeS  ?  What  construction 
follows  verbs  oi  fearing?  How  is  consequence  or  result  expressed  in  Latin? 
How  is  a  result  clause  introduced?  What  words  are  often  found  in  the 
principal  clause  foreshadowing  the  coming  of  a  result  clause?  How  may 
negative  purpose  be  distinguished  from  negative  result?  What  is  meant 
by  the  subjunctive  of  characteristic  or  description  ?  How  are  such  clauses 
introduced?  Explain  the  ablative  absolute.  Why  is  the  ablative  absolute 
of  such  frequent  occurrence  in  Latin?  Explain  the  predicate  accusative. 
After  what  verbs  are  two  accusatives  commonly  found?  What  dc  these 
accusatives  become  when  the  verb  is  passive  ? 


I 


IMPERATOR   MIHTES  HORTATUR 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 

The  words  in  heavy  type  are  used  in  Caesar's  "  Gallic  War." 

LESSON   IV,  §  39 
Nouns  Verbs 

dea,  goddess  (deity)  est,  he  {she,  it)  is;  sunt,  they  are 

Dia'na,  Diana  necat,  he  {she,  it)  kills,  is  killing, 
fera,  a  wild  beast  (fierce)  does  kill 

Lato'na,  Latona  Conjunction  » 

sagit'U,  arrow  ^^^  ^^^ 

Pronouns 
quis,  interrog.  pronoun,  nom.  sing.,  who  ?    cuius  (^pronounced  cooi'yobs, 
two  syllables),  interrog.  pronoun,  gen.  sing.,  whose  ? 

LESSON  V,  §  47 

Nouns  Verbs 

cord'na,  wreath,  garland,  crown  dat,  he  {she,  it)  gives 

fa'bula,  story  (fable)  narrat,  he  {she,  it)  tells  (narrate) 
pecu^nia,  money  (pecuniary) 

pugna,  battle  (pugnacious)  Conjunction  * 

victS'ria,  victory  quia  or  quod,  because 

cui  (pronounced  cdbi,  one  syllable),  interrog.  pronoun,  dat  sing.,  to  whom  t 
for  whom  ? 

LESSON  VI,  §56 

Adjectives 
bona,  good  P^TTa,  small,  little 

grata,  pleasing  pulchra,  beautiful,  pretty 

magna,  large,  great  sftla,  alone 

mala,  bcul^  wicked 

'  K  conjunction  is  a  word  which  connects  words,  parts  of  sentences,  or 
sentences. 

»83 


284 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 


Nouns 
anciria,  maidservant 
lulia,  Julia 

Adverbs  1 
cur,  why  J  non,  not 


Pronouns 
mea,  my ;  tua,  //zy,  _y<??^r  (possessives) 
quid,  interrog.  pronoun,  nom.  and  ace. 
sing.,  what? 


-ne,  the  question  sign,  an  enclitic  (§  16)  added  to  the  first  word,  which, 
in  a  question,  is  usually  the  verb,  as  amat,  he  loves,  but  amat'ne  ?  does  he 
love  ?  est,  he  is  j  estne  ?  is  he  f  Of  course  -ne  is  not  used  when  the 
sentence  contains  quis,  cur,  or  some  other  interrogative  word. 


LESSON 

Nouns 
casa,  -ae,  f.,  cottage 
cena,  -ae,  f.,  dinner 
galli'na,  -ae,  f.,  hen^  chicken 
in'sula,  -ae,  f.,  /j/«??^  (pen-insula) 

Adverbs 
deiu'de,  then^  in  the  next  place 
ubi,  where 

Preposition 
ad,  to,  with  ace.  to  express  motion 
toward 


VII,  §62 

Verbs 

ha'bitat,  he  {she,  it)  lives,  is  living, 
does  live  (inhabit) 

laudat,  he  {she,  it)  praises,  is  prais- 
ing, does  praise  (laud) 

parat,  he  {she,  it)  prepares,  is  pre- 
paring, does  prepare 

vocat,  he  {she,  it)  calls,  is  calling, 
does  call  J  invites,  is  invititig^ 
does  invite  (vocation) 


Pronoun 
quern,  interrog.  pronoun,  ace.  smg.,  whom  f 


LESSON  VIII,  §  69 
Nouns  Adjectives 

Italia,  -ae,  f.,  Italy  alta,  high,  deep  (altitude) 

Sicilia,  -ae,  f.,  Sicily  clara,  clear,  bright;  famous 

tuba,  -ae,  f.,  trumpet  (tube)  lata,  7vide  (latitude) 

via,  -ae,  f.,  way,  road,  street  longa,  long  (longitude) 

(viaduct)  nova,  new  (novelty) 

1  An  adverb  is  a  word  used  to  modify  a  verb,  an  adjective,  or  another 
adverb ;  as,  She  sings  sweetly ;  she  is  very  talented ;  she  began  to  sing  very 
early. 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES  285 

LESSON  IX,  §  n 
Nouns 

bellum,  -1,  n.,  war(re-bel)  mums,  -I,  m.,  wa// (mural) 

cdnstAntia,  -ae,   f.,  firmness^    con-  oppidanus,  -i,  m.,  townsman 

stancy,  steadiness  oppidum,  -i,  n.,  town 

dominus,  -I,  m.,  master,  lord  {6.0m-  pilum,  -i,  n.,  spear  {p\\e  driver) 

inate)  servus,  -i,  m.,  slave,  servant 

equns,  -i,  m.,  horse  (equine)  Sextus,  -i,  m.,  Sextus 
frumentum,  -i,  n.,  grain  Verbs 

legatus,  -i,  m.,  lieutenant,  ambas 

sc 
Marcus,  -i,  m.,  Marcus,  Mark 


curat,  he  (she,  it)  cares  for,  with  ace. 
zrt'^r  ( legate)  '       \       t      -.s  ?     . 

..«-    V  1     M^^^..  H^^^t,  v^ovtxa.t,he  {she,  tt)  hastens 


LESSON  X,  §  82 
Nouns 
amicus,  -i,  m.,_/W^«// (amicable)  populus,  -i,  m.,  people 

Germania,  -ae,  f.,  Germany  Rhenus,  -i,  m.,  the  Rhine 

patria,  -ae,  i.,  fatherland  vicua,  -i,  m.,  village 

LESSON  XI,  §  86 
Nouns 
arma,  armdrum,  n,,  plur.,  arms,  es-      galea,  -ae,  f.,  helmet 

pecially  defensive  weapons  praeda,  -ae,  f.,  booty,  spoils  (preda- 

fima,  -«e,  f.,  rumor;  reputation,  tory) 

fame  \.^vaa.y-\^xi.,weapon  of  offense,  spear 

Adjectives 
durus,  -a,  -um,  hard,   rough;  un-      Rdmanus,  -a,  -um,  Roman.     As  a 
feeling,  cruel;  severe,   toilsome  noun,  RSmanus,  -i,  m.,a  Ronmn 

(durable) 

LESSON  XII,  §90 
Nouns  Adjectives 

filias,  fili,  m.,  son  (filial)  flnitimus,  -a,  -um,  bordering  upon, 

fluvius,  fluvT,  m.,  river  (fluent)  neighboring,  near  to.  As  a  noun, 

gladius,  gladi,  m.,  jze;^r((/ (gladiator)  finitimi, -drum,  m.,  plur., //^/]f^^<7rj 

praesidium,  praesi'di,  n.,  garrison,      Germanus,  -a,  -um,  German.   As  a 
guard,  protection  noun,  Germanus, -i,  m.,  a  G^^fwa« 

proelium,  proeli|  n.,  battle  multus,  -a,  -um,  much;  plur.,  many 

Adverb 
Mepe,  often 


286  SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 

LESSON   XIII,  §95 

Nouns 
ager,  agri,  m.^  field  (acre)  praemium,  praemi,  n.,  reward, prize 

copia,  -ae,  f.,  plenty,  abundance  (co-  (premium) 

pious);  plur.,  tt^oops,  forces  puer,  pueri,  m.,  boy  (puerile) 

Cornelius,  Cornell,  m.,  Cornelius  Roma,  -ae,  f.,  Rome 

lori'ca,  -ae,  f.,  coat  of  mail,  corselet      scutum,  -i,  n.,  shield  (escutcheon) 

vir,  viri,  m.,  man,  hero  (virile) 

Adjectives 

legionarius,  -a,  -um,^  legionary,  be-      pulcher,  pulchra,  pulchrum,  pretty^ 

lo7igi7ig  to  the  legion.  As  a  noun,  beautiful 

legionarii,  -orum,  m.,  plur.,  legion-  _, 

^       ,  ,.'  '        ^       '    ^  Preposition 

ary  soldiers 

liber,  libera,  Uberum.,  free  (liberty).        V     }  s^ 

As  a  noun,  liberi,  -orum,  m.,  plur.,  Conjunction 

children  (lit.  the  free  born)  sed,  but 

LESSON  XIV,  §  99 

Nouns 

auxilium,  auxili,  n.,  help,  aid  (aux-      consilium,  consili,  n.,  plan  (counsel) 

iliary)  diligentia,  -ae,  f.,  diligence,  industry 

castrum,  -i,   n.,  fort  (castle) ;  plur.,       magister,     magistri,     m.,     master, 

camp  (\\t.  forts)  teacher^ 

cibus,  -i,  m.,food 

Adjectives 
aeger,  aegra,  aegrum,  sick  miser,  misera,  miserum,  wretched, 

creber,  crebra,  oxobrava.,  frequent  unfortunate  (miser) 

LESSON  XV,  §107 
Nouns  Adjectives 

camis,  -i,  m.,  cart,  wagon  armatus,  -a,  -um,  armed 

inopia,  -ae,  f.,  want,  lack;  the  oppo-      infirmus, -a, -um,w^(2>^,y^^<^/^ (infirm) 

site  of  copia  validus,  -a,  -um,  stnmg,  sturdy 

studium,  studi,   n.,  zeal,   eagerness 
(study) 

1  The  genitive  singular  masculine  of  adjectives  in  -ius  ends  in  -ii  and  the 
vocative  in  -ie ;  not  in  -i,  as  in  nouns.  ^  Observe  that  dominus,  as  distin- 
guished from  magister,  means  master  in  the  sense  of  owner. 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES  287 

Verb  Adverb 

maturat,  he  {she^  if)  hastens,    if.      xdiVCi^  already  ^  now 

properat 

-que,  conjunction,  and;  an  enclitic  (cf.  §  16)  and  always  added  to  the 
second  of  two  words  to  be  connected,  as  arma  tela 'que,  arms  and  weapons. 

LESSON  XVII,  §  117 
Nouns 
agri  cultura,  -ae,  f.,  agriculture  Gallia,  -*e,  f.,  Gaul 

domicilium,    domicili,    n.,    abode,      Gallus,  -i,  m.,  a  Gaul 

dwelling  place  (domicile)  lacrima,  -ae,  f,,  tear 

femina,  -ae,  f.,  woman  (female)  numenis,  -i,  m.,  //«w^^r  (numeral) 

Adjective  Adverb 

maturus,  -«,  -um,  ripe,  mature  quo,  whither 

Verbs  Conjunction 

arat,  he  {she,  it)  plows  (arable)  an,  or,  introducing  the  second  half 

desiderat,  he  {she,  it)  misses,  longs  of  a  double  question,  as  Is  he  a 

for  (desire),  with  ace.  Roman  or  a  Gaul,  Estne  Romanus 

an  Gallus  ? 

LESSON  XVIII,  §  124 
Nouns  Adjectives 

ludus,  -T,  m.,  school  Tratus,  -a,  -um,  angry ,  furious  (wztxt) 

socius,   soci,   m.,   companion,   ally      laetus,  -a,  -um,  happy,  glad 
(social) 

Adverbs 
hodie,  to-day  nunc,  now,  the  present  moment 

ibi,  there,  in  that  place  nuper,  lately,  recently,  of  the  imme- 

mox,  presently,  soon,  of  the  imme-  diate  past 

diate  future 

LESSON  XX,  §  136 
Nouns 

fOrma,  -ae,  {.,form,  beauty  rSgina,  -ae,  f.,  queen  (r^;al) 

poena,  -ae,  i.,  punishment,  penalty  superbia,  -ae,  f.,  pride,  haughtiness 

potentiA,  -ae,  f.,  power  (potent)  tristitia,  -ae,  f.,  sadness,  sorrow 

Adjectives  Conjunctions 

septem,  indeclinable,  seven  ndn  sOliun  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  not  only 

superbus,  -a,  -um,  proud,  haughty  .  .  .  but  also 
(superb) 


288  SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 

LESSON  XXI,  §  140 

Nouns  Adjectives 

sacrum,  -T,  n.,  sacrifice^  offerings  rite  interfectus,  -a,  -um,  slain 

verbum,  -i,  n.,  word  (verb)  molestus,  -a,  -um,  troublesome,  an- 

Verbs  noying  ix^oX^st) 

sedeo,  -ere,  sit  (sediment)  perpetuus,  -a,  -um,  perpetual,  con- 

volo,  -are,7?K  (volatile)  ttnuous 

ego,  personal  pronoun,  /  (egotism).    Always  emphatic  in  the  nominative. 

LESSON  XXII,  §  146 

Nouns 

disciplina,  -ae,  f.,  training,  culture,      Gaius,  Gai,  m.,  Caius,  a  Roman  first 

discipline  name 

binkmentum, -i,  n.,  ornament,  jeit/el      Tiberius,    Tibe'ri,   m.,   Tiberius,  a 

Roman  first  name 
Verb  Adverb 

doceo,  -«re,  teach  (doctrine)  mazime,  most  of  all,  especially 

Adjective 
antiquus,  -qua,  -quum,  old,  ancient  (antique) 

LESSON  XXVII,  §  168 
Nouns  Adjectives 

ala,  -ae,  f.,  ivirig  commotus,  -a,  -um,  moved,  excited 

deus,  -1,  m.,  god  (deity)  ^  maximus,  -a,  -um,  greatest  (maxi- 
monstrum,  -i,   n.,  omen,  prodigy j  mum) 

7nonster  saevus,  -a,  -Mvci,  fierce,  savage 
oraculum,  -T,  n.,  oracle  Adverbs 

Verb  ita,  thus,  in  this  way,  as  follows 

vasto,  -are,  lay  waste,  devastate  turn,  then,  at  that  time 

LESSON  XXVIII,  §  171 
Verbs  Conjunction 

responded,  -ere,  respond,  reply  autem,  but,  moreover,  now.    Usu- 

servo,  -are,  save,  preserve  ally  stands  second,  never  first 

Adjective  Noun 

cams,  -a,  -um,  dear  (cherish)  vita,  -ae,  f.,  life  (vital) 

For  the  declension  of  deus,  see  §  468 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 


289 


LESSON  XXIX,  §  176 


Verb 
supers,  -are,  conquer^  overcome  (in- 
superable) 

Nouns 
cura,  -«e,  f.,  care,  trouble 
locus,  -i,  m.,  plcLce,  spot  (location). 
Locus  is  neuter  in  the  plural  and 
is  declined  loca,  -drum,  etc. 
periculum,  -1,  n.,  danger^  peril 


Adverbs 
seniper,  always 
tamen,  yet^  nevertheless 
Prepositions 
d8,   with    abl.,   down  from, 

ceming 
per,  with  ace.,  through 

Conjunction 
si,// 


LESSON  XXX,  §  182 
Verbs 


absum,  abesse,  irreg.,  be  away,  be 
absent,  be  distant,  with  separa- 
tive abl. 

adpropinquo,  -are,  draw  near,  ap- 
proach (propinquityX  with  dative  * 

contined,  -€re,  hold  together,  hem  in, 
keep  (contain) 

Nouns 
pr5vincia,  -ae,  f.,  province 
yinum,  -i,  n.,  imne 


discedd,  -ere,  depart, go  away,  leave, 

with  separative  abl. 
egeo,  -ere,  lack,  need,  be  without, 

with  separative  abl. 
interficia,  -ere,  kill 
prohibeo,  ere,  restrain,  keep  from 

(f)rohibit) 
vulnerS,  -are,  wound  (vulnerable) 

Adjective 
defessus,  -a,  -um,  weary,  worn  out 

Adverb 
long5,/rr,  by  far,  far  away 


LESSON  XXXI,  §  188 


Nouns 
aunim,  -T,  n.,  gold  (oriole) 
mora,  -ae,  f.,  delay 
navigium,  navi'gi,  n.,  boat,  ship 
ventus,  -i,  m.,  wind  (ventilate) 

Verb 
nayig5,  -ire,  sail  (navigate) 


Adjectives 
attentus,  -a,  -um,  attentive,  careful 
dubius,  -diy  -um,  doubtful  (dubious) 
perfidus,  -a,  -\xvc\,  faithless^  treacher- 
ous (perfidy) 

Adverb 
antei,  before,  previously 


Preposition 
sine,  with  abl.,  without 

^  This  verb  governs  the  dative  because  the  idea  of  nearness  to  is  stronger 
than  that  of  motion  to.  If  the  latter  idea  were  the  stronger,  the  word  would 
be  used  with  ad  and  the  accusative. 


290  SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 

LESSON  XXXII,  §  193 
Nouns  Adjectives 

animus,  -i,  m.,  mind,  heart;  spirit,      adtversuSy -a., -um,  opposite;  adverse. 

feeling  (animate)  contrary 

bracchium,  bracchi,  xi.,  forearm,  arm      plenus,  -a,  -um,  full  (plenty) 
porta,  -ae,  f.,  gate  (portal) 

Preposition  Adverb 

pr5,  with  abl.,  before;  in  behalf  of  ;      dm,  for  a  long  time,  long 
instead  of 

LESSON  XXXIV,  §  200 
Adverbs 
celeriter,  quickly  (celerity)  graviter,  heavily ,  severely  (gravity) 

denique,  finally  subito,  suddenly 

Verb 
reports,  -are,  -avi,  bring  back,  restore;  win,  gain  (report) 

LESSON  XXXVI,  §  211 

dexter,  dextra,  dextnim,  right  (dex-      sinister,  sinistra,  sinistnim,  left 
trous)  frustra,  adv.,  in  vain  (frustrate) 

gero,  gerere,  gessi,  gestus,  bear,  carry  on;  wear;  bellum  gerere,  to  wage  war 

occupo,  occupare,  occupavi,  occupatus,  seize,  take  possession  of  (occupy) 

postulo,  postulare,  postulavi,  postulatus,  demand  (ex-postulate) 

recuso,  recusare,  reciisavi,  recusatus,  refuse 

sto,  stare,  steti,  status,  stand 

tempto,  temptare,  temptavi,  temptatus,  try,  tempt,  test;  attempt 

tene5,  tenere,  tenui, ,  keep,  hold  (tenacious) 

The  word  ubi,  which  we  have  used  so  much  in  the  sense  of  where  in 
asking  a  question,  has  two  other  uses  equally  important : 

1.  ubi  =  w^<r;?,  as  a  relative  conjunction  denoting  time;  as, 

Ubi  monstrum  audiverunt,  fugerunt,  when  they  heard 
the  monster,  they  fled 

2.  ubi  =  where,  as  a  relative  conjunction  denoting  place;  as, 

Vide5  oppidum  ubi  Galba  habitat,  /  see  the  town  where 
Galba  lives 

Ubi  is  called  a  relative  conjunction  because  it  is  equivalent  to  a  relative 
pronoun.  When  in  the  first  sentence  is  equivalent  to  at  the  time  at  which; 
and  in  the  second,  where  is  equivalent  to  the  place  in  which. 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES  291 

LESSON  XXXVII,  §217 

neque  or  nee,  conj.,   iit-itlitt\   nor,      ca8tellum,-i,n.,  r^</<7«/^/,y5?/T^ (castle) 
and  .  .  .  not ;  neque  .  .  .  neque,      cotidie,  adv.,  daily 
neither .  .  .  nor 

cesso,  cessare,  cessavl,  cessStus,  cease^  with  the  infin. 

incipiS,  incipcre,  incepi,  inceptus,  begin  (incipient),  with  the  infin. 

oppugn5,  oppugnare,  oppugnavi,  oppugnatus,  storm,  assail 

peto,  petere,  petivi  or  petii,  petitus,  aim  at^  assail,  storm^  attack;  seek^ 

ask  (petition) 
p6n6,  ponere,  posui,  positus,  place^  put  (position) ;  castra  p5nere,  to  pitch 

camp 

possum,  posse,  potui, ,  be  able,  can  (potent),  with  the  infin. 

veto,  vetare,  vetui,  vetitus,y^r^/V/(veto),  with  the  infin. ;  opposite  of  iubed, 

command 
▼incS,  vincere,  vici,  victua,  conquer  (in-vincible) 
vivo,  vivere,  vixi, ,  live,  be  alive  (re-vive) 

LESSON  XXXIX,  §  234 

hax\>dsxi% J -eL,-Mmy  strange,  foreigfi,  pedes,  peditis,  m.,  foot  soldier  {po- 

barbarous.    As  a  noun,  barbari,  destrian) 

-5nim,  m.,  plur.,  savages^  barba-  pes,  pedis,i  \x\.,/oot  (pedal) 

rians  princeps,  principis,  m.,  chief  {^nn- 

dux,  duels,  m.,  leader  (duke).    Cf.  cipal) 

the  verb  diic5  rex,  regis,  m.,  king  (regal) 

eques,  equitis,  m.,  horseman^  cav-  sununus,  -a,  -um,  highest,  greatest 

alryman  (equestrian)  (summit) 

iudex,  iudicis,  xn.,  judge  virtus,  virtutis,  f.,  manliness,  cour- 

lapis,  lapidis,  m.,  stone  (lapidary)  age  (virtue) 

miles,  militis,  m.,  soldier  (militia) 

LESSON  XL,  §  237 

Caeaar,  -aria,  m.,  Ccesar  impedimentum,   -I,    n.,    hindrance 

eaptivua,  -i,  m.,  captive, prisoner  (impediment);  plur.  impedimenta, 

c5nsul,  -is,  m.,  consul  -^mm,  baggage 

frater,  fritris,  m.,  brother  (frater-  impeiitor,    imperitOris,    m.,   com- 

nity)  mander  in   chief,  general  (em- 

hcmO,   hominis,   m.,  man,  human  peror) 

being 

^  Observe  that  e  is  hng  in  the  nom.  sing,  and  sk^rt  in  the  other  cases. 


292 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 


legi5,  legi5nis,  f.,  legion 

mater,  matris,  f.,  //z^M^r  (maternal) 

ordo,  ordinis,  m.,  row^  rank  (order) 


pater,  patris,  m.,y2zM<?r  (paternal) 
salus,  salutis,  f.,  safety  (salutary) 
soror,  sororis,  f .,  sister  (sorority) 


LESSON  XLI,  §  239 


calamitas,  calamitatis,  f.,  loss^  dis- 
aster^ defeat  (calamity) 
caput,  capitis,  n.,  ^^<a;^  (capital) 
flumen,  fliiminis,  n.,  river  (flume) 
labor,  laboris,  m.,  labor^  toil 
opus,  operis,  n.,  work,  task 


orator,  oratoris,  m.,  orator 
ripa,  -ae,  f.,  bank  (of  a  stream) 
tempus,   temporis,   n.,    time  (tern 

poral) 
terror,  terroris,  m.,  terror^  fear 
victor,  victoris,  m.,  victor 


accipio,  accipere,  accepi,  acceptus,  receive^  accept 

confirms,  confirmare,  confirmavi,  confirmatus,  strengthen,  establish,  en 
courage  (confirm) 

LESSON  XLIII,  §  245 

animal,  animalis  (-ium^),  n.,  animal 
avis,  avis  (-ium),  f.,  bird  (aviation) 
caedes,  caedis  (-iiun),  f.,  slaughter 


calcar,  calcaris  (-ium),  n.,  spr^r 
civis,  civis  (-ium),  m.  and  f.,  citizen 

(civic) 
cliens,  clientis  (-ium),  m.,  retainer, 

depe7ide7it  (client) 
finis,  finis   (-ium),   m,,    end,  limit 

(final);  plur.,  country,  territory 
hostis,  hostis  (-ium),  m.  and  f .,  enemy 

in  war  (hostile).    Distinguish  from 


inimicus,  which  means  a  personal 
enemy 
ignis,  ignis  (-ium),  m.,fre  (ignite) 
insigne,  insignis  (-ium),  n.,  decora- 
tion, badge  (ensign) 
mare,  maris  (-ium  2),  n.,  sea  (marine) 
navis,  navis  (-ium),  f.,  ship  (naval); 

navis  longa,  ma7t-ofwar 
turris,  turris  (-ium),  f.,  tower [pixx^'C) 
urbs,  urbis  (-ium),  f.,  city  (suburb). 
An  urbs  is  larger  than  an  oppi- 
dum 


arbor,  arboris,  f.,  tree  (arbor) 
collis,  coUis  (-ium),  m.,  hill 
dens,  dentis  (-ium),  m.,  tooth  (dentist) 
fons,    fontis    (-ium),    m..  fountain, 

spring;  source 
iter,   itineris,   n.,  march,  journey, 

route  (itinerary) 


LESSON  XLIV,  §  249 

mensis,  mensis  (-ium),  m.,  month 
moenia,  -ium,  n.,  plur.,  walls,  fortifi- 
cations.   Cf.  murus 
mons,  montis  (-ium),  m.,  mountain; 
summus  mons,  top  of  the  mountain 
numquam,  adv.,  never 
pons,  pontis,  m.,  bridge  (pontoon) 


1  The  genitive  plural  ending  -ium  is  written  to  mark  the  i-stems. 
genitive  plural  of  mare  is  not  in  use. 


8  The 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 


293 


sanguis,  sanguinis,  m.,  blood  (san- 
guinary) 
summus,  -a,  -um,  highest^  greatest 

(summit) 


trans,  prep,  with  ace.,  across  (trans- 
atlantic) 

vis(vis),gen.  plur.virium,f.,  j/r^/r^/t, 
force^  violence  (vim) 


LESSON  XLV,  §  258 


leer,  acris,  acre,  sharps  keen^  eager 

(acrid) 
brevis,  breve,  shorty  brief 
difficilis,  difficile,  difficult 
facilis,  idiZxXt^  facile,  easy 
fortis,  forte,  brave  (fortitude) 
gravis,  grave,  heavy ^  severe,  serious 

(grave) 


omnis,  omne,  every,  all  (omnibus) 

par,  gen.  paris,  equal  (par) 

pauci,  -ae,  -a,  few,   only   a  few 

(paucity) 
secundus,  -a,  -um,  second;  favorable^ 

opposite  of  adversus 
signum,  -i,  n.,  signal,  sign,  standard 
velox,  gen.  veldcis,  swift  (velocity) 


conlocS,  conlocare,  conlocavi,  conlocltus,  arrange,  station,  place  (collocation) 
demSnstro,  demonstrare,  demonstravi,  dem5nstratus,  point  out,  explain 

(demonstrate) 
mandd,  mandare,  mandavi,  mandatus,  commit,  intrust  (mandate) 

LESSON  XLVI,  §  261 


adventus,  -Qs,  m.,  approach,  arrival 
(advent) 

ante,  prep,  with  ace,  before  (ante- 
date) 

comu,  -fls,  n.,  horn,  wingoi  an  army 
(cornucopia);  a  dextrd  comu,  on 
the  right  wing;  a  sinistr5  cornii, 
on  the  left  wing 

equitatus,  -us,  m.,  cavalry 


impetus,  -us,  m.,  attack  (impetus); 

impetum  facere  in,  with  ace,  to 

make  an  attack  on 
lacus,  -lis,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  lacu- 

bus,  m.,  lake 
manus,  -us,  f.,  hand;   band,  force 

(manual) 
portus,  -us,  m.,  harbor  (port) 
post,  prep,  with  ace.,  behind,  after 

(post-mortem) 


exercitus,  -us,  m.,  army 

crem5,  cremare,  cremavi,  crematus,  bum  (cremate) 

ezerced,  exercere,  exercui,  exercitus,  prentice,  drill,  train  (exercise) 

LESSON  XLVII,  §270 


Aihcnae,  -5rum,  f.,  plur.,  Atluns 
'  orinthus,  -I,  f.,  Corinth 
domus,  -&8,  locative  doml,  f.,  house^ 
home  (dome).   Cf.  domicilium 


Geniva,  -ae,  f.,  Geneva 
Pompeii,  -drum,  m.,  plur.,  Pompeii, 
a  d^  in  Campania.   See  map 


!94 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 


propter,  prep,  with  ace,  on  account  tergum,  tergi,  n.,  back;  a  tergo,  be- 
of^  because  of  Jiind^  in  the  rear 

rus,  ruris,  in  the  plur.  only  nom.  and  vulnus,  vulneris,  n.,  wound  (vul- 
acc.  riira,  n.,  country  (rustic)  nerable) 

committo,  committere,  commisi,  commissus,  intrust^  commit;   proelium 

committere,  join  battle 
convoc5,  convocare,  convocavi,  convocatus,  call  together,  summofi  (convoke) 

timeo,  timere,  timui, ,  fear;  be  afraid  (timid) 

verto,  vertere,  verti,  versus,  tu?'n,  change  (convert) ;  terga  vertere,  to  turn 

the  backs,  hence  to  retreat 


LESSON  XLVIII,  §276 


acies,  -ei,  f.,  line  of  battle 

aestas,  aestatis,  f,,  summer 

annus,  -i,  m.,  year  (annual) 

dies,  diei,  m,,  day  (diary) 

fides,  fidei,  no  plur.,  i.,  faith,  trust; 
pro7nise,  word;  protection ;  in 
fidem  venire,  to  coine  under  the 
protection 

fluctus,  -lis,  m,,  wave,  billow  (fluc- 
tuate) 

hiems,  hiemis,  f.,  winter 

hora,  -ae,  f.,  hour 


liix,  liicis,  f.,  light  (lucid);  prima 
liix,  daybreak 

meridies,  ace.  -em,  aW.  -e,  no  plur., 
m,,  jnidday  (meridian) 

nox,  noctis  (-ium),  f.,  night  (noc- 
turnal) 

primus,  -a,  -um,  first  (prime) 

res,  rei,  f.,  thing,  jnatter  (real);  res 
gestae,  deeds,  exploits  (lit.  thitigs 
performed) ;  res  adversae,  adver- 
sity; res  secundae,  prosperity 

spes,  spei,  f.,  hope 


amicitia,   -ae,  f.,  friendship   (ami- 
cable) 

itaque,  conj.,  and  so,  therefore,  ac- 
cordingly 

littera,  -ae,f.,  a  letter  of  the  alpha- 
bet; plur.,  a  letter,  an  epistle 

metus,  metiis,  m.,fear 

nihil,     indeclinable,    n.,    nothing 
(nihilist) 


LESSON  XLIX,  §  283 

nQntius,  niinti,  m.,  messenger.  Ct 
niintid 

pax,  pacis,  f.,  peace  (pacify) 

regnum,  -I,  n.,  reign,  sovereignty, 
kingdom 

supplicium,  suppli'ci,  n.,  punish- 
ment; supplicium  stimere  de, 
with  abl.,  inflict  punishment  on; 
supplicium  dare,  suffer  punish- 


ment.   Cf.  poena 

placeo,  placere,  placui,  placitus,  be  pleasing  to,  please,  with  dative.   Cf .  §  1 54 
siimo,  siimere,  sumpsi,  siimptus,  take  up,  assmne 
sustineo,  sustinere,  sustinm,  sustentus,  sustain 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 


295 


LESSON  L,  §  288 


corpus,  cori>oris,  n.,  body  (corporal) 

densus,  -a,  -um,  dense 

Idem,  e'adem,  idem,  demonstrative 
pronoun,  the  same  (identity) 

ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  intensive  pronoun, 
self;  e7>en,  very 

mirus,  -a,  -um,  wonderful^  marvel- 
ous (miracle) 


Slim,  adv.,  formerly,  once  upon  a 

time 
pars,  partis  (-ium),  f.,  part^  region, 

direction 
quoque,  adv.,  also.    Stands  after  the 

word  which  it  emphasizes 
s61,  sSlis,  m.,  sun  (solar) 
verus,  -a,  -um,  true,  real  (verity) 


debed,  debere,  debul,  debitus,  owe^  ought  (debt) 
JripiS,  eripere,  eripui,  ereptus,  snatch  from 


LESSON  LI,  §  294 


hie,  haec,  hoc,  demonstrative  pro- 
noun, this  (of  mine);  he,  she,  it 

ille,  ilia,  illud,  demonstrative  pro- 
noun, that  (yonder);  he,  she,  it 

invisus,  -a,  -um,  hateful,  detested, 
with  dative     Cf.  §  143 

iste,  ista,  istud,  demonstrative  pro- 
noun, that  (of  yours);  he,  she,  it 

libertas,  -atis,  f.,  liberty 

modus,  -1,  m.,  measure;  manner, 
way,  mode 


ndmen,  n5minis,  n.,  name  (nomi- 
nate) 

oculus,  -1,  m.,  eye  (oculist) 

pristinus,  -a,  -vany  former,  old-time 
(pristine) 

piiblicus,  -a,  -um,  public,  belonging 
to  the  state ;  res  piiblica,  rei  pu- 
blicae,  f.,  the  commonwealth,  the 
state,  the  republic 

vestigium,  vesti'gi,  n.,  footprint, 
track;  trace,  vestige 

v6x,  vOcis,  f.,  voice 


LESSON  LII,  §  298 


incolumis,  -e,  unharmed 

ne  .  .  .  quidem,  adv.,  not  even.  The 

emphatic  word  stands  between  ne 

and  quidem 
nisi,  con].,  unless,  if .  .  .  not 
paene,  adv.,  almost  (pen-insula) 


satis,  adv.,  enough,  sufficiently  (satis^ 
faction) 

tantus,  -a,  -um,  so  great 

yerO,  adv.,  truly,  indeed,  in  fact. 
As  a  conj.  but,  however,  usually 
stands  second,  never  first 


dScidS,  decidere,  decidi, ,  fall  down  (deciduous) 

deailio,  desilire,  desilui,  desultus,  leap  down,  dismount 
maned,  manure,  mansi,  mansurus,  remain 
triducd,  traducere,  traduxi,  traductus,  lead  across 


296 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 


LESSON  LIII,  §  306 


aquila,  -ae,  f.,  eagle  (aquiline) 
audax,    gen.    audacis,    adj.,    bold^ 

audacious 
celer,  celeris,   celere,   swift,  quick 

(celerity).    Cf .  velox 
explorator,    -oris,    m.,    scout,    spy 

(explorer) 
ingens,    gen.   ingentis,    adj.,    huge, 

vast 
medius, -a, -um,  middle,  middle paTi: 

^t/"  (medium) 

quaero,  quaerere,  quaesivi,  quaesitus, 


,  mentis  (-ium),  f.,  mind  (men- 
tal).   Cf.  animus 
opportiinus,  -a,  -um,  opportune 
quam,  adv.,  than.    With  the  super- 
lative quam  gives  the  force  of  as 
possible,    as    quam    audacissimi 
viri,  7nen  as  bold  as  possible 
recens,  gen.  recentis,  adj.,  recent 
tam,  adv.,  so.    Always  with  an  ad- 
jective  or   adverb,    while    ita   is 
generally  used  with  a  verb 

ask,  inquire,  seek  (question).    Cf .  peto 


LESSON   LIV,  §  310 


alacer,  alacris,  alacre,  eager,  spirited, 

excited  (alacrity) 
celeritas,  -atis,  f.,  jr/^*?^^  (celerity) 
clamor,  clamoris,  m.,  shout,  clamor 
lenis,  lene,  7nild,  gentle  (lenient) 
mulier,  muli'eris,  f.,  woman 
multitudo,  multitudinis,  f .,  multitude 
nemo,  dat.    nemini,   ace.    neminem 


(gen.  nuUius,  abl.  nuUo,  from  nul- 
lus),  no  plur.,  m.  and  f.,  no  07te 
nobilis,  nobile,  well  known,  noble 
noctu,  adv.  (an  old  abl.),  by  night 

(nocturnal) 
statim,  adv.,  im,m.ediately ,  at  once 
subito,  adv.,  suddenly 
tardus,  -a,  -um,  slow  (tardy) 


cupio,  cupere,  cupivi,  cupitus,  desire,  wish  (cupidity) 


aedificium,   aedifi'ci,   n.,    building, 

dwelling  (edifice) 
imperium,   impe'ri,    n.,    command, 

chief  power  ;  empire 
mors,  mortis  (-ium),  f .,  death  (mortal) 


LESSON   LV,  §  314 

reliquus,  -a,  -um,  remaining,  rest  of. 
As  a  noun,  m.  and  n.  plur.,  the 
rest  (relic) 
scelus,  sceleris,  n.,  crime 
servitiis,  -utis,  f.,  slavery  (servitude) 
valles,  vallis  (-ium),  f.,  valley 
abdo,  abdere,  abdidi,  abditus,  hide 

contendo,  contendere,  contend!,  contentus,  strain,  struggle;  hastett  (contend) 
occido,  occidere,  occidi,  occlsus,  cut  down,  kill.    Cf.  neco,  interficio 
perterreo,  perterrere,  pertemii,  perterritus,  terrify,  frighten 
recipio,  recipere,  recepi,  receptus,  receive,  recover;  se  recipere,  betake  one's 

self,  withdraw,  retreat 
trado,  tradere,  tradidi,  traditus,  give  over,  surrender,  delii'er  (traitor) 


SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES  297 

LESSON   LVI,  §318 

aditus,  -us,  m.,  approach^  access ;  nam,  conj.,y&r 

entrance  obses,  obsidis,  m.  and  f.,  hostage 

civitas,  civitatis,  f.,  citizenships  paulo,  adv.  (abl.  n.  of  paulus),  by  a 

body  of  citizens,  state  (city)  little^  somewhat 

inter,  prep,  with  ace,   between; 
among  (interstate  commerce) 

incolo,  incolere,  incolul, ,  transitive,  inhabit;  intransitive,  dwell.   Cf. 

habits,  vivd 
relinqu5,  relinquere,  reliqui,  relictus,  leave,  abandon  (relinquish) 
statuo,  statuere,  statui,  statutus,  fix.  decide  (statute),  usually  with  infin. 

LESSON   LVII,  §326 

aequus,  -a,  -um,  even,  level;  equal  gens,  gentis  (-ium),   f.,  race,  tribe, 

cohors,  cohortis  (-ium),  f.,  cohort,  a  nation  (Gentile) 

tenth  part  of  a  legion,  about  360  negotium,  neg6ti,n.,  ^«j/>/^jj,^7^;r, 

men              .  matter  (negotiate) 

curr5,  currere,  cucurri,  cursus,  run  regio,  -onis,  f.,  region,  district 

(course)  rumor,  rumoris,  m.,  rumor,  report. 

difl&cultas,  -atis,  f.,  difficulty  Cf.  fama 

fossa,  -ae,  f.,  ditch  (fosse)  simul  atque,  conj.,  as  soon  as 

suscipio,  suscipere,  suscepT,  susceptus,  undertake 
traho,  trahere,  traxi,  tractus,  drag,  draw  (ex-tract) 

valeo,  valere,  valui,  valiturua,  be  strong;  pliirimum  valere,  to  be  most 
powerful,  have  great  influence  (value).    Cf .  validus 

LESSON  LVIII,  §332 

commeatua,  -fis,  m.,  provisions  mercator,    mercatoris,    m.,    trader, 

latitudo,  -inis,  f.,  width  (latitude)  merchant 

longitudo,  -inis,  f.,  length  (longi-  munitid,  -5nis,  f.,  fortiflcation  (mu- 

tude)  nition) 

magnitiidd,  -inis,  f.,  size,  magni-  spatium,  spati,  n.,  room,  space,  dis- 

tude  tance;  time 

cogndscS,  cogndscere,  cognSvi,  cognitus,  learn;  in  the  perfect  tenses,  know 

(re-cognize) 
c6g6,  c5gere,  coegi,  coactus,  collect ;  compel  {cogent) 
defends,  defendere,  defend!,  de^ensus,  defend 


298  SPECIAL  VOCABULARIES 

incendo,  incendere,  incendi,  incensus,  set  fire  to,  burn  (incendiary).    Cf .  cremo 
obtineo,  obtinere,  obtinui,  obtentus,  possess,  occupy,  hold  (obtain) 
pervenio,  pervenire,  perveni,  perventus,  come  through,  arrive 

LESSON   LIX,  %ZZ1 

agmen,  agminis,  n.,  line  of  tnarch,  Eelvetii,  -orum,  m.,  the  Helvetii,  a 

coluimi;^ivssyVira.d.%,vci^r\.^thevan;  Gallic  tribe 

novissimum  agmen, //z^  ;r^r  passus,   passus,    m.,    a    pace,    five 

atque,  ac,  conj.,  <2;^<^y  atque  is  used  Roman    feet;    mille   passuum,  a 

before  vowels  and  consonants,  ac  thousand  {of)  paces,    a    Roman 

before  consonants  only.  Cf.  et  and  mile 

-que  qua  de  causa,  for  this  reason,  for 

concilium,   concili,   n.,  council,  as-  what  reason 

sefnbly  vallum,  -i,  n.,  earthworks,  rampart 

cado,  cadere,  cecidi,  casurus,  fall  (decadence) 

dedo,  dedere,  dedidi,  deditus,  surrender,  give  up;  with  a  reflexive  pronoun, 

surrender  ofie's  self,  submit,  with  the  dative  of  the  indirect  object 
premo,  premere,  pressi,  pressus,  press  hard,  harass 
vexo,  vexare,  vexavi,  vexatus,  annoy,  ravage  (vex) 

LESSON   LX,  §  341 

aut,  conj.,  or;  aut  .  .  .  aut,  either  opinio,  -onis,  f.,  opinioft,  supposi- 
.  .  .  or  tion,  expectation 

causa,  abl.  of  causa,ytfr  the  sake  of,  res  frumentaria,  rei  friimentariae,  f. 
becajise  of    Always  stands  after  (\\t.thegrai?t  affair), grain  supply 

the  gen.  which  modifies  it  timor, -oris,  m.,^(a;r.    Cf.  timeo 

fere,  adv.,  neatly,  ahnost  undique,  2id.v.,from  all  sides 

Conor,  conari,  conatus  sum,  attempt,  try 

egredior,  egredi,  egressus  sum,  move  out,  disembark ;  progredior,  jnove 
forward,  advance  (egress,  progress) 

motor,  morari,  moratus  sum,  delay 

orior,  oriri,  ortus  sum,  arise,  spring ;  begin ;  be  born  {from)  (origin) 

proficiscor,  proficisci,  profectus  sum,  set  out 

revertor,  reverti,  reversus  sum,  return  (revert).  The  forms  of  this  verb  are 
usually  active,  and  not  deponent,  in  the  perfect  system.    Perf.  act.,  reverti 

sequor,  sequi,  secutus  sum,  follow  (sequence).  Note  the  following  com- 
pounds of  sequor  and  the  force  of  the  different  prefixes :  consequor  {follow 
with),  overtake;  insequor  {follow  against),  pursue;  subsequor  {follow 
under),  follow  close  after 


I 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


Translations  inclosed  within  parentheses  are  not  to  be  used  as  such ;  they  are  inserted 
to  show  etymological  meanings. 


a  or  ab,  prep,  with  abl./rvm,  by,  off. 

Translated  on  in  &  dextid  comQ,  on 

the  right  wing ;  &  fronte,  on  the  front 

or  in  front ;  k  deztri,  on  the  right ; 

ft  latere,  on  the  side ;  etc. 
ab-d6,  -ere,  -didi,  -ditus,  hide,  conceal 
ab-ducd,  -ere,  -dfixi,  -ductas,  lead  off, 

lead  away 
abs-cid5,  -ere,  -cidi,  -cisos  [ab(s),  off,  + 

caedS,  cut],  cut  off 
ab-sum,  -esse,  ftfui,  ftfuturus,  be  away, 

be  absent,  be  distant,  be  off;  with  ft 

crab  and  abl.,  §501.32 

ac,  conj.,  see  atque 

ac-cipi6,  -ere,  -c€pi,  -ceptns  [ad,  to,  + 
capid,  take\,  receive,  accept 

accr,  ftcris,  ftcre,  adj.  sharp ;  figura- 
tively, keen,  active,  eager  {§471) 

acerbus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  bitter,  sour 

acies,  -Ji,  f .  [ftcer,  sharp],  edge :  line  of 
b.  'tie 

acriter,  adv.  [ftcer,  sharp],  compared 
ftcrius,  ftcerrimi,  sharply,  fiercely 

ad,  prep,  with  ace.  to,  towards,  near. 
With  the  gerund  or  gerundive,  to,  for 

ad-aeqa5,  -ftre,  -&▼!,  -ftttis,  maJke  equal, 

make  level  with 
ad-ducO,  -ere,  -dOxI,  -dactaa,  lead  to  ; 

move,  induce 
ad-«5,  -Ire,  -li,  -itus,  go  to,  approach, 

draw  near,  i/isit,  with  ace.  (§413) 


ad-ferd,    ad-ferre,    at-toli,     ad-lfttns, 

bring,    convey ;    report,    announce; 

render,  give  (§426) 
ad-fici5,  -ere,  -fSci,  -fectus  [ad,  to,  + 

facid,  do],  affect,  visit 
adflictatus,    -a,   -um,    adj.    [part,   of 

adflictd,  shatter],  shattered 
ad-fligd,  -ere,  -flixi,  -flictus,  dash  upon, 

strike  upon ;  harass,  distress 
ad-hibe5,  -€re,  -ui,  -itus  [ad,  to,  + 

habeo,  hold],  apply,  employ,  use 
ad-hiic,  adv.  hitherto,  as  yet,  thus  far 
aditus,    -us,     m.     [aded,     approach], 

approach,     cucess ;     entrance.      Cf. 

adventus 
ad-ligO,  -ftre,  -ftvi,  -fttus,  bind  to,  fasten 
ad-loquor,  -loqui,  -locutus  sum,  dep. 

verb  [ad,  to,  -f  loquor,  speak],  speak 

to,  address,  with  ace. 
ad-ministr5,  -ftre,  -ftvi,  -fttus,  manage, 

direct 
admiratid,  -dnis,  f.  [admlror,  wonder 

at],  admiration,  astonishment 
ad-moveS,  -ire,  -m6vi,   -mdtus,  move 

to  ;  apply,  employ 
ad-propinqud,  -ftre,  -tvi,  -fttus,  come 

near,  approach,  with  dat. 
ad-sum,  -ease,  -fui,  -futflrus, 

ent ;  assist ;  with  dat.,  §  426 
adulSacSna,  -entia,  m.  and  f.  [part,  of 

adolSscS,  grow]t  o  youth, young  man, 

young  person 


290 


300  LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 

adyentus 
adventus,   -us,    m.    [ad,   to^  +  venio. 


come\,  approach,  arrival  (§  466) 
adversus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  adverto, 

turn    io\  turned   towards ^  facing; 

contrary^  adverse,    res  adversae,  ad- 
versity 
aedificium,  aedifi'ci,n.  [aedific5,  build], 

building,  edifice 
aedifico,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [aedes,  house, 

4-  facio,  make],  build 
aeger,  aegra,  aegrum,  adj.  sick,  feeble 
aequalis,   -e,   adj.  equal,  like.   As  a 

noun,  aequalis,  -is,  m.  or  f.  one  of 

the  same  age 
aequus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  even,  level;  equal 
Aesopus,  -I,   m.   .^op,  a  writer  of 

fables 
aestas,  -atis,  f.  summer,    inita  aestate, 

at  the  beginning  of  summer 
aetas,  -atis,  f.  age 
Aethiopia,  -ae,  f.  Ethiopia,  a  country 

in  Africa 
Africa,  -ae,  f.  Africa 
Africanus,   -a,   -um,    adj.  of  Africa. 

A   name   given  to  Scipio  for  his 

victories  in  Africa 
ager,  agri,  m.field,farm,  land  (§  462.  c) 
agger,  -eris,  m.  mound 
agmen,  -inis,  n.  [ago,  drive],  an  army 

on    the    march,    column,     primum 

agmen,  the  van 
ag5,  -ere,  egi,  actus,  drive,  lead;  do, 

perform.   \ita.m,agere,  pass  life 
agricola,  -ae,  m.  [ager,  field,  +  colo, 

cultivate] ,  farmer 
agri  cultiira,  -ae,  f.  agriculture 
ala,  -ae,  f.  wing 
alacer,   -oris,  -ere,  adj.  active,  eager. 

Cf.  acer 
alacritas,    -atis,    f.    [alacer,    active], 

eagerness,  alacrity 


ancilla 
alacriter,  adv.  [alacer,  active"],  comp 

alacrius,  alacerrime,  actively,  eagerly 
albus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  white 
aloes,  -is,  f.  elk 
Alcmena,  -ae,  f.  Alcm/na,  the  mother       1 

of  Hercules  1 

aliquis    (-qui),    -qua,    -quid   (-quod), 

indef.  pron.  some  one,  some  (§  487) 
alius,  -a,  -ud  (gen.  -ius,  dat.  -i),  adj. 

another,  other,    alius  .  .  .  alius,  one 

.  .  .  another,    alii  .  .  .  alii,  some  . . . 

others  (§  1 10) 
Alpes,  -ium,  f.  plur.  the  Alps 
alter, -era, -erum  (gen.  -ius,  dat.  -i),  adj. 

the  one,  the  other  (of  two),   alter  .  .  . 

alter,  the  one  .  .  .  the  other  (§  1 10) 
altitiido,  -inis,  f.  [altus,  high],  height 
altus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  high,  tall,  deep 
Amazones,  -um,  f.  plur.  Amazons,  a 

fabled  tribe  of  warlike  women 
ambo,  -ae,  -0,  adj.  (decl.  like  duo),  both 
amice,  adv.  [amicus,  yhVwdf/j/],  superl. 

amicissime,  in  a  friendly  manner 
amicio,  -ire, ,  -ictus  [am-,  about, 

+  iacio,  throw],  throw  around,  wrap 

about,  clothe 
amicitia,    -ae,    f.    [amicus,  friend], 

friendship 
amicus,    -a,    -um,    adj.    [am5,    love], 

friendly.    As  a  noun,  amicus,  -i,  m. 

friend 
a-mitto,    -ere,    -misi,    -missus,    send 

away;  lose 
amo,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  love,   like,  be 

fond  of  (§  488) 
amphitheatrum,  -i,  n.  amphitheater 
amplus,  -a,   -um,   adj.  large,  ample; 

honorable,  noble 
an,  conj.  or,  introducing  the  second 

part  of  a  double  question 
ancilla,  -ae,  f.  maidservant 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


301 


ancora 
ancora,  Hie,  f.  ofuAor 

Andromeda,     -ee,     f.     Andnym'eJa, 

daughter  of  Cepheus  and  wife  of 

Perseus 
angnlus,  -I,  m,  an^e^  comer 
anim-adverto,  -ere,  -ti,  -eus  [animus, 

mind,  4-  adverts,  turn  to],  turn  the 

mind  to,  notice 
animal, -Alis,  n.  \9ssiTaA^breaih\animal 

(§465.'^) 
anim5sus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  spirited 
animus,  -i,  m.  [anima,  breath\,  mind^ 

heart ;  spirit,  coura^,  feeling,  in  this 

sense  often  plural 
annus,  -1,  m.  year 
ante,  prep,  with  ace.  before 
antea,  adv.  [ante],  before,  formerly 
antiquus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [ante,  before]^ 

former,  ancient,  old 
apcr,  apri,  m.  vnld  boar 
Apoll5,  -inis,  m.  Apollo,  son  of  Jupiter 

and  Latona,  brother  of  Diana 
ap-pare5,  -€re,  -ui,  [ad  +  p&reo, 

appear],  appear 
ap-pell5,  -4re,  -ivl,  -Atus,  call  by  name^ 

name.    Cf.  n5min5,  voc5 
Appius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Appian 
ap-plic6,  -ire,  -Svi,  -Stas,  apply,  direct, 

turn 
apud,  prep,  with  ace.  among;  at^  at 

thi-  house  of 
aqua,  -ae,  f.  7oater 
aquila,  -ae,  f.  eagle 
ara,  -ae,  f.  altar 

arbitror,  -Ari,  -itus  sum,  think,  sup- 
pose (§  420.  ^).   Cf.  exIstimS,  put5 
arbor,  -oris,  f.  tree  (§  247.  i.  a) 
Arcadia,  -ae,  f.  Arcadia,  a  district  in 

southern  Greece 
arded,  -€re,  irsi,  irsOms,  be  on  fin, 

blaze,  bum 


auritus 
arduus,  -«,  -um,  adj.  steep 
Aricia,  -ae,  f.  Aricia,  a  town  on  the 

Appian  Way,  near  Rome  [mw 

aries,  -etis,  m.  battering-ram  (p.  221), 
arma,  -drum,    n.   plur.   arms,  armor, 

7veapons.    Cf.  telum 
armatus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [arm5,  arm], 

armed,  equipped 
ar5,  -ire,  -Svi,  -itus,  plow,  till 
ars,  artis,  f.  art,  skill 
articulus,  -1,  m.  joint 
ascribd,  -ere,  -scrips!,  -scrlptus  [ad,  in 

addition,   +    scribS,    7vrite],    enroll, 

enlist 
Asia,  -ae,  f.  Asia,  i.e.  Asia  Minor 
at,  conj.  but.   Cf.  autem,  sed 
Athenae,  -irum,  f.  plur.  Athens 
Atlas,  -antis,  m.  Atlas,  a  Titan  who 

was  said  to  Jiold  up  the  sky 
at-que,  ac,  conj.  and,  and  also,  and 

what  is  more,   atque  may  be  used 

before  either  vowels  or  consonants, 

ac  before  consonants  only 
attentus,  -a,  -uin,  adj.  [part  of  at- 
tends,   direct   (the    mind)    toward], 

attentive,  intent  on,  careful 
at-tonitus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  thunderstruck^ 

astounded 
audacia,  -ae,  f.  [audiz,  bold],  boldness^ 

audacity 
audacter,  adv.  [aud4x,  bold],  compared 

audftcius,  audicissimC,  boldly 
audax,  -icis,  adj.  bold,  daring 
aude5,  -€re,  ausus  sum,  dare 
audid,  -ire,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  -itus,  hear,  listen 

to  (§§420.</,  491) 
AugSis,  -«e,  m.  Aug/as,  a  king  whose 

stables  Hercules  cleaned 
aura,  -«e,  f.  air,  breeze 
auritus,  •«,  -am,  adj.  [aoram,  gold], 

mubnud  vnik  gM 


302 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


aureus 

aureus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [aurum,  gold], 
golden 

aurum,  -i,  n.  gold 

aut,  conj.  or.   aut .  .  .  aut,  either  . .  .or 

autem,  conj.,  usually  second,  never 
first,  in  the  clause,  but,  moreover, 
however.,  now.    Cf.  at,  sed 

auxilium,  auxili,  n.  help,  aid,  assist- 
ance;  plur.  auxiliaries 

a-vertO,  -ere,  -ti,  -sus,  turn  away,  turn 
aside 

avis,  -is,  f.  bird  (§  243.  i) 

6 

ballista,  -ae,  f.  ballista,  an  engine  for 
hurling  missiles  (p.  220) 

balteus,  -i,  m.  belt,  sword  belt 

barbarus,  -i,  m.  barbarian,  savage 

bellum,  -i,  n.  war.  bellum  inferre,  with 
dat.  make  war  upon 

bene,  adv.  [for  bone,  from  bonus],  com- 
pared melius,  optime,  -ivell 

benigne,  adv.  [benignus,  kind],  com- 
pared benignius,  benignissime,  kindly 

benignus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  good-natured, 
kind,  often  used  with  dat 

bini,  -ae,  -a,  distributive  numeral  adj. 
two  each,  two  at  a  time  (§  334) 

bis,  adv.  twice 

bonus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  compared  melior, 
optimus,  good,  kind  (§  469.  a) 

bos,  bovis  (gen.  plur.  boum  or  bovum, 
dat.  and  abl.  plur.  bobus  or  bubus), 
m.  and  f.  ox,  cow 

bracchium,  bracchi,  n.  arm 

brevis,  -e,  adj.  short 

Brundisium,  -i,  n.  Brundisium,  a  sea- 
port in  southern  Italy.    See  map 

bulla,  -ae,  f.  bulla,  a  locket  made  of 
small  concave  plates  of  metal  fas- 
tened by  a  spring  (p.  212) 


casa 
C 

C.  abbreviation  for  Gaius,  Eng.  Caius 
cad5,  -ere,  ce''cidi,  casurus,/^// 
caedes,  -is,  f.  [caedo,  cut],  [a  cutting 

down),  slaughter,  carnage  (§  465.  a) 
caelum,  -i,  n.  sky,  heavens 
Caesar,  -aris,  m.  Ccesar,  the  famous 

general,  statesman,  and  writer 
calamitas,  -atis,  f .  loss,  calamity,  defeat, 

disaster 
calcar,  -aris,  n.  spur  (§  465.  b) 
Campania,  -ae,   f.    Campania,  a  dis- 
trict of  central  Italy.    See  map 
Campanus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  of  Campania 
campus,  -i,  m.  plain,  field,  esp.  the 
Campus  Martius,  along  the  Tiber 
just  outside  the  walls  of  Rome 
canis,  -is,  m.  and  f.  dog 

cano,  -ere,  ce'cini, ,  sing 

canto,  -are,  -avi,  -atus    [cano,  sing], 

sing 
Capenus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  of  Capena,  esp. 
the  Porta  Cape'na,  the  gate  at  Rome 
leading  to  the  Appian  Way 
capio,  -ere,    cepi,   captus,   take,  seize, 

capture  (§492) 
Capitolinus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  belonging 

to  the  Capitol,  Capitoline 
Capitolium,     Capitoli,     n.     [caput, 
head],  the  Capitol,  the  hill  at  Rome 
on    which    stood    the    temple    of 
Jupiter  Capitolinus  and  the  citadel 
capsa,  -ae,  f.  box  for  books 
captivus,  -i,  m.  [capio,  take],  captive 
Capua,  -ae,  f.  Capua,  a  large  city  of 

Campania.    See  map 
caput,  -itis,  n.  head  (§  464.  2.  b) 
career,  -eris,  va.  prison,  jail 
carrus,  -i,  m.  cart,  wagon 
cams,  -a,  -um,  adj.  dear,  precious 
casa,  -ae,  f.  hut,  cottage 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


castellum 
castellum,   -i,   n.    [ciiin.    <.t    castrum, 
yiwTj,  rtdoubt^Jort 
\    castmm,  -i,  n.  fort.   Usually  in  the 

plural,    castra,    -5rum,    a    military 

camp,    castra  ponere,  to  pitch  camp 
casus,   -us,    m.   [cado, /a//],  chance; 

misfortune^  loss 
catapulta,  -ae,  f.  caiapulty  an  engine 

for  hurling  stones 
catena,  -ae,  f.  chain 
caupona,  -ae,  f.  inn 
causa,   -ae,   f.  cause,  reason,    qua  de 

cau&i,  for  this  reason 
cedo,  -ere,  ceasi,  cesafinis,  ^ive  way, 

retire 
celer,  -eris,  -ere,  adj.  swift,  fleet 
celeritas,  -itis,  f.  [celer,  swift],  swift- 

tiess,  speed 
celeriter,  adv.  [celer,  swift\,  compared 

celerius,  celerrimS,  swiftly 
cena,  -ae,  f.  dinner 
centum,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  hundred 
Centuri5,  -onis,  m.  centurion,  captain 
Cepheus   (dissyl.),  -ei   (ace.  Ciphea), 

m.  Cepheus,  a  king  of  Ethiopia  and 

father  of  Andromeda 
Cerberus,  -i,  m.  Cerberus,  the  fabled 

three-headed  dog  that  guarded  the 

entrance  to  Hades 
certamen,  -inia,  n.   [certd,  struggle], 

^if^gg^f^  contest,  rivalry 
certe,   adv.  [certus,  sure],  compared 

certius,  certissimS,  surely,  certainly 
certus,   -a,   -um,    adj.  fixed,    certain, 

sure,    aliquem  certidrem  facere  {to 

make  some    one    more  certain),   to 

inform  some  one 
cervus,  -I,  m.  stag,  deer 
cesso,  -ire,  -ivi,  -Atus,  delay^  cease 
cibaria,  -drum,  n.  \\\ix.food^ provisions 
cibus,  -i,  vn.food,  victuals 


coUum 
Cimbri,  -^rum,  m.  plur.  the  Cimbri 
Cimbricus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Cimbrian 
cinctus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  cingS, 

surround],  girt,  surrounded 
cingo,  -ere,  cinxi,  cinctus,  gird,  sur- 
round 
circiter,  adv.  about 
circum,  prep,  with  ace.  around 
circum'-d5,  -dare,  -dedi,  -datus,  place 

around,  surround,  inclose 
circum''-e6,  -ire,  -ii,  -itus,  go  around 
circum-sisto,  -ere,  circum'steti,  , 

stand  around,  surround 
circum-venio,  -ire,  -veni,  -ventus  (come 

atvund),  surround 
citerior,  -ius,  adj.  in  comp.,  superl. 

citimus,  hither,  nearer  (§475) 
civilis,  -e,  adj.  [civis],  civil 
civis,  -is,  m.  and  f.  citizen  (§  243. 1) 
civitas,  -fttis,  f.  [civis,  citizen],  (body 

of  citizens),  state;  citizenship 
clamor,  -oris,  m.  shout,  cry 
clams,  -a,   -um,   adj.  clear;  famous, 

renoxcned ;  bright,  shining 
classis,  -is,  {.fleet 
claudo,  -ere,  -si,  -sus,  shut,  close. 
clavus,  -i,  m.  stripe 
cliens,  -entis,  m.  dependent    •■''''••"»-. 

client  (§  465.  a) 
COCleS,    -itiS,    m.    {blind   in    one   eye). 

Codes,  the  surname  of  Horatius 
C0-gli68c5,  -ere,  -gndvi,  -gnitus,  learti, 

knoio,  understand.   Cf.  scid  (§  420.  b) 
C6g6,  -ere,  co«gi,  coictus  [co(m)-,  to- 
gether, -f  ago,  drive],  {drive  together), 

collect ;  compel,  drive 
cohors,  cohortia,  f.  cohort,  the  tenth 

part  of  a  legion,  about  360  men 
collis,  -ia,  m.  hill,    in  summd  coUe,  on 

top  of  the  kill  {%2^j.  2.  a) 
collum,  -5.  n    neck 


304  LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 

col5  con-scend5 

COlo,  -ere,  colui,  cultus,  cultivate.,  till ; 


honor.,  worship ;  devote  one^s  self  to 

columna,  -ae,  f .  column,  pillar 

com-  (col-,  con-,  cor-,  co-),  a  prefix, 
together,  with,  or  intensifying  the 
meaning  of  the  root  word 

coma,  -ae,  f.  hair 

comes,  -itis,  m.  and  f.  [com-,  together, 
+  eo,  go]^,  companion,  comrade 

COmitatus,  -us,  m.  [comitor,  accom- 
pany], escort,  company 

comitor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.  verb 
[comes,  companion],  accompany 

com-meatus,  -us,  m.  supplies 

COm-minus,  adv.  [com-,  together,  + 
manus,  hand],  hand  to  hand 

com-mitt5,  -ere,  -misi,  -missus,  yif^m  to- 
gether; commit,  intrust,  proelium 
committere,  join  battle,  se  commit- 
tere  with  dat,  trust  one^s  self  to 

commode,  adv.  [commodus,  fit],  com- 
pared commodius,  conunodissime,  cott- 
veniently,  fitly 

commodus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  suitable,  fit 

com-motus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  com- 
moveo,  m,ove],  aroused,  moved 

com-paro,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [com-,  in- 
tensive, +  paro,  prepare],  prepare; 
provide,  get 

com-pleo,  -ere,  -plevi,  -pletus  [com-, 
intensive,  -{-  ^\^,  fill],  fill  up 

complexus,  -us,  m.  embrace 

com-primo,  -ere,  -pressi,  -pressus 
[com-,  together,  ■\-  premo,  press], 
press  together,  grasp,  seize 

con-cid5,  -ere,  -cidi, [com-,  inten- 
sive, +  Cdid.0,  fall],  fall  down 

concilium,  concili,  n.  meeting,  council 

con-cludo,  -ere,  -clusi,  -clusus  [com-, 
intensive,  +  claudo,  close],  shut  up, 
close;  end, finish 


con-curro,  -ere,  -curri,  -cursus  [com-j 
together,  +  curro,  run],  run  together; 
rally,  gather 

condicio,  -onis,  f.  [com-,  together,  ■\- 
dico,  talk],  agree?nent,  condition, 
terms 

con-dono,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  pardon 

con-d\ic5,  -ere,  -duxi,  -ductus,  hire 

con-fero,  -ferre,  -tuli,  -latus,  bring 
together,  se  conferre,  betake  one's 
self 

COn-fertus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  crowded,  thick 

COnfestim,  adv.  immediately 

con-ficio,  -ere,  -feci,  -fectus  [com-,  com- 
pletely, +  facio,  do],  make,  complete, 
accomplish ,  fin  ish 

con-firmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  make  firm, 
establish,  strengthen,  afiirm,  assert 

con-fluo,  -ere,  -fluxi, ,flow  together 

con-fugio,  -ere,  -fugi,  -fugiturus,  flee 
for  refuge,  flee 

con-ici5,  -ere,  -ieci,  -iectus  [com-,  in- 
tensive, +  iacio,  throw],  hurl 

con-iungo,  -ere,  -iunxi,  -iunctus  [com-, 
together,  +  iungo,  Join], Join  together, 
unite  - 

con-iiiro,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [com-,  together, 
-f  iuro,  swear],  unite  by  oath,  con- 
spire 

con-loco,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [com-,  to- 
gether, +  loco,  place],  afrange,  place, 
station 

conloquium,  conlo'qui,  n.  [com-,  to- 
gether, -f-  loquor,  speak],  conversation, 
conference 

Conor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.  verb,  en- 
deavor, attempt,  try 

con-scendo,  -ere,  -scendi,  -scensus 
[com-,  intensive,  -f  scando,  climb], 
climb  up,  ascend,  navem  consceu' 
dere,  embark,  go  on  board 


I 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


cfln-eciibS 

c6n-scriM,  -ere,  -ecripsi,  -scrfptus 
[com-,  togtther,  +  scribd,  wriU], 
(wriU  together),  enroll ,  enlist 

cOn-aecrO,  -Are,  -4vi,  ^tus  [com-,  inten- 
sive, +  8«cr5,  consecraie],  consecrate, 
t/ez'ote 

c5n-sequor,  -sequi,  -sectitus  sum,  dep. 
verb  [com-,  intensive,  +  8eq\ioT,/ol- 
lo7o], pursue ;  overtake;  win 

c5n-8crv6,  -ftre,  -ivi,  -atus  [com-,  in- 
tensive, +  seryo,  save'\, preserve,  save 

cdnsilium,  consili,  n.  plan,  purpose, 
design  ;  wisdom 

con-8ist5,  -«re,  -stiti,  -atitus  [com-, 
intensive,  -f  sisto,  cause  to  stand], 
stand  fimtly,  halt,  take  one^s  stand 

c5n-spici5,  -ere,  -spSx!,  -spectus  [com-, 
intensive,  -f  spicid,  spy\,  look  at  at- 
tentively, perceive,  see 

constantia,  -ae,  I.  firmness ,  steeuiiness, 
perseverance 

c6n-stitu6,  -ere,  -ui,  -fltus  [com-,  in- 
tensive, -f  8tata5,  se(\,  establish,  de- 
termine, resolve 

c5n-«t5,  -ftre,  -«titi,  -stfttfinis  [com-, 
together,  -f-  sto,  stand],  agree;  be 
certain  ;  consist  of 

consul,  -ulis,  m.  consul  (§  464.  2.  a) 

con-sumS,  -ere,  -sdmpsi,  -sumptus 
[com-,  intensive,  -f  sumo,  take],  con- 
sume, use  up 

C0n-tend5,  -ere,  -di,  -tus,  strain  ;  has- 
ten ;  fight,  contend,  struggle 

con-tined,  -§re,  -ol,  ^entus  [com-,  to- 
gether, +  tened,  hold],  hold  together, 
hem  in,  contain ;  restrain 

COntri,  prep,  with  ace.  against,  con- 
trary to 

con-trahO,  -ere,  -trftzl,  -trftctus  [com-, 
together,  -f  trahS,  draw],  draw  to- 
gether; of  sails,  shorUn^furi 


crSscS 

C0ntr5versia,  -ae,  f.  dispute,  quarrel 

con-venio,  -ire,  -v§ni,  -ventus  [com-, 
together,  -f-  yenid,  come],  come  to- 
gether, meet,  assemble 

con-vert5,  -ere,  -verti,  -versus  [com-, 
intensive,  +  vertS,  turn],  turn 

COn-VOCO,  -ftre,  -ftvi,  -fttus  [com-,  to- 
gether, -f  voco,  call],  call  together 

co-orior,  -iri,  -ortus  sum,  dep.  verb 
[com-,  intensive,  -|-  orior,  rise],  rise, 
break  forth 

copia,  -ae,  f.  [com-,  intensive,  +  ops, 
wealth],  abundance,  wealth,  plenty. 
riur.  copiae,  -firum,  troops 

C0qu5,  -ere,  coxi,  coctus,  cook 

Corinthus,  -i,  f.  Corinth,  the  famous 
city  on  the  Isthmus  of  Corinth 

Cornelia,  -ae,  f.  Cornelia,  daughter  of 
Scipio  and  mother  of  the  Gracchi 

Cornelius,  ComSli,  m.  Cornelius,  a 
Roman  name 

cornu,  -fls,  n.  horn  ;  wing  of  an  army,  ft 
dextrd  cornu,  on  the  right  wing(%  466) 

C0r5na,  -ae,  f.  garland,  wfsath  ;  crown 

coronatus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  crowned 

corpus,  -oris,  n.  body 

cor-ripi6,  -ere,  -ui,  -reptus  [com-,  in- 
tensive, -f  rapid,  seize],  seize,  grasp 

cotidianus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  daily 

cotidie,  adv.  daily 

creber,  -bra,  -brum,  adj.  thick,  crowded, 
numerous,  frequent 

cred5,  -ere,  -didi,  -ditus,  trust,  believe, 
with  dat.  (§  501.  14) 

crem5,  -ftre,  -ftvi,  -fttus,  bum 

cre6,  -ftre,  -ftvi,  -fttus,  make;  elect, 
appoint 

Credn,  -ontis,  m.  Creon,  a  king  of 
Corinth 

crescO,  -ere,  crftrl,  crfttus,  rise,  grow, 
increase 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


306 

Creta 
Creta,  -ae,  f.  Crete,  a  large  island  in 

the  Mediterranean 
Cretaeus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Cretan 
crus,  cruris,  n.  leg 
criistulum,  -i,  n.  pastry,  cake 
cubile,  -is,  n.  bed 
cultura,  -ae,  f.  culture,  cultivation 
cum,  conj.  with  the  indie,  or  subjv. 

when;  since;  although  (§  501.  46) 
cum,  prep,  with  abl.  with  (§  209) 
cupide,  adv.  [cupidus,  desirousl,  com- 
pared cupidius,  cupidissime,  eagerly 
cupiditas,  -atis,  f.  [cupidus,  desirous'\, 

desire,  longijig 
cupio,   -ere,   -ivi  or  -ii,   -itus,   desire, 

wish.    Cf.  V0I6 
ciir,  adv.  why,  wherefore 
cura,  -ae,  f.  care,  pains ;  anxiety 
curia,  -ae,  f.  senate  house 
euro,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [cura,  care\,  care 

for,  attend  to,  look  after 
curro,  -ere,  cucurri,  cursus,  run 
currus,  -us,  m.  chariot 
cursus,  -us,  m.  course 
custodio,  -ire,  -ivi,  -itus  [cust6s,^/ar^] , 

guard,  watch 


Daedalus,  -i,  m.  Dad'alus,  the  sup- 
posed inventor  of  the  first  flying 
machine 

Davus,  -i,  m.  Davus,  name  of  a  slave 

de,  prep,  with  abl.  down  from,  from  ; 
concerning,  about,  for  (§  209).  qua 
de  causa,  for  this  reason,  wherefore 

dea,  -ae,  f.  goddess  {§  461.  a) 

debe5,  -ere,  -ui,  -itus  [de,  from,  + 
habeo,  hold],  owe,  ought,  should 

decern,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  ten 

de-cerno,  -ere,  -crevi,  -cretus  [de,/ww, 
-f  cemo,  separate],  decide,  decree 


densus 
de-cido,  -ere,  -cidi, [d€j  down,  + 

CdidOy  fall],  fall  down 
decimus,  -a,  -um,  numeral  adj.  tenth 
declivis,  -e,  adj.  sloping  downward 
de-do, -ere,  -didi,  -ditus,  give  up,  surren- 

der.  se  dedere,  surrender  one's  self 
de-diico,  -ere,  -duxi,  -ductus  [de,  down, 

-f  duco,  lead],  lead  down,  escort 
de-fendo,  -ere,  -di,  -fensus,  ward  off, 

repel,  defend 
de-fero,  -ferre,  -tuli,  -latus  [de,  down, 

+  fero,  bring],  bring  down  ;  report, 

announce  (§  426) 
de-fessus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  tired  out,  weaiy 
de-ficio,  -ere,  -feci,  -fectus  [de,  from, 

+  facio,   make],  fail,  be  wanting; 

revolt  from 
de-figo,  -ere,  -fixi,  -fixus  [de,  down,  + 

figo,  fasten] ,  fasten,  fix 
de-icio,  -ere,  -ieci,  -iectus  [de,  down, 

-f  iacio,  hurl],  hurl  down  ;    bring 

down,  kill 
de-inde,  adv.  {from  thence),  then,  in 

the  next  place 
delecto,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  delight 
deleo,  -ere,  -evi,  -etus,  blot  out,  destroy 
delibero,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  weigh,  delib- 
erate, ponder 
de-ligo,  -ere,  -legi,  -Iectus  [de,  from, 

-f  lego,  gather],  choose,  select 
Delphicus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Delphic 
demissus,  -a,  -um  [part,  of  demitto, 

send  down],  downcast,  humble 
de-monstro,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [de,  out, 

-f  monstio,  point], point  out,  sho7v 
demum,  adv.  at  last,  not  till  then,  tum 

demum,  then  at  last 
denique,    adv.    at   last,  finally.     Cf. 
'    postremo 

dens,  dentis,  m.  tooth  (§  247.  2.  a) 
densus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  dense,  thick 


LATIN-ENGLISH 

de-pendeo 
de-pendeo,  -«re, , [d«,  down, 

-f  peDdeo,  hatig\y  hang  from ^  hang 

down 
de-pldr5,  -4re,  -Svi,  -fttus  [d«,  inten- 
sive, 4-  ploro,  wv;//],  bewail^  deplore 
de-pdn5,  -ere,  -posui,  -positus  [d8,  down, 

+  pond,  put],  put  down 
de-scendo,  -ere,  -di,  -scensus  [d*,  down, 

+  scandd,  cltmb\,climb  down, descend 
de-scribo,  -ere,  -scripsi,  -scriptus  [d8, 

do7t>n,  +  scribo,  7vr/te],  write  down 
desidero,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  long/or 
de-silio,  -ire,  -ui,  -sultus  [de,  down,  + 

salid,  leap'],  leap  do7vn 
de-spero,  -4re,  -4vi,  -atus  [de,  away 

from,  +  spero,  hope],  despair 
de-spicio,  -ere,   -8p€xi,  -spectus   [de, 

do7vH],  look  down  upon,  despise 
de-sum,  -esse,  -fui,>futuru8  [d€,  away 

frqm,  +  sum,  be\^  be  wanting,  lack, 

with  dat.  (§  426) 
deus,  -1,  m.  god  (§  468) 
de-volv6,   -ere,   -volvi,   -volutus    [de, 

do7vn,  4-  volvo,  roll],  roll  down 
de-voro,  -ire,  -4vi,  -&tus  [di,  down^ 

-f  voro,  swallow],  devour 
dexter,  -tra,  -trum  (-tera,  -terum),  adj. 

to  the  right,  right,    ft  dextr5  comO, 

on  the  right  wing 
Diana,  -ae,  f.  Diana,  goddess  of  the 

moon  and  twin  sister  of  Apollo 
died,    -ere,    dixl,    dictus    (imv.    die), 

say,  speak,  tell.    Usually  introduces 

indirect  discourse  (§  420.  a) 
dictator,    -dria,    m.    [diets,    dictate], 

dictator,   a   chief    magistrate    with 

unlimited  power 
digs,  -*i  or  diJ,  m.,  sometime*;  f.  in 

sing.,  day  (§  467) 
dif-fer6,  -ferre,  distull,  dllitus  [dis-, 

apart,  +  fer6,  carry],  carry  apart ; 


VOCABULARY  307 

dis-tribu5 
differ,    differre  inter  se,  differ  from 
each  other 

dif-ficilis,  -e,  adj.  [dis-,  not,  -H  faci- 
lis,  easy],  hard,  difficult  (§  307) 

difficultas,  -atis,  f.  [diffieilis,  hard], 
difficulty 

diligenter,  adv.  [dOigens,  careful], 
compared  diligentius,diligenti8sime, 
industriously,  diligently 

dnigentia,  -ae,  f.  [diligens,  careful], 
•  industry,  diligence 

di-mic6,  -are,  -fivl,  -Situa,fght,  strtdggle 

di-mitto,  -ere,  -misi,  -missus  [di-,  off, 
+  mittd,  send],  send  away,  dismiss, 
disband,  dimittere  animum  in,  direct 
one's  mind  to,  apply  one's  self  to 

Diomedes,  -is,  m.  Dt-o-me'des,  a  name 

dis-,  di-,  a  prefix  expressing  separa- 
tion, off,  apart,  in  different  directions. 
Often  negatives  the  meaning 

dis-cedd,  -ere,  -cessi,  -cessus  [dis-, 
apart,  -f  ch^o, go],  depart frvm,  leave, 
withdraw,  go  away 

dia-cemo,  -ere,  -crevi,  -cretus  [dis-, 
apart,  -\-  eemo,  sift],  separate;  dis- 
tinguish 

dlsciplina,  -ae,  f.  instruction,  train- 
ing, discipline 

discipulus, -i,  m.  [disco,  learn],  pupil, 
disciple 

disco,  -ere,  didici, ,  learn 

dis-cutid,  -ere,  -cussi,  -eussus  [dia-, 
apart,  ■\-  quatiS,  shake],  shatter,  dash 
to  pieces 

dis-p5n5,  -ere,  -posui,  -positus  [dis-, 
apart,  -f-  pono,  put],  put  here  and 
there,  arrange,  station 

dis-tflmilis,  -e,  adj.  [dis-,  apart,  -|-  ai- 
milis,  like],  unlike,  dissimilar  (%  307) 

di»-tribu5,  -ere,  -ul,  -fltus,  divide, 
distribute 


308  LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 

diu 
diu,  adv.,  compared   diutius,  difitis 


simef /or  a  long  time,  long  (§477) 
d5,  dare,  dedi,  datus,  give,     in  fugam 

dare,  put  to  flight,    alicui  negotium 

dare,  employ  some  one 
doceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -tus,  teach,  show 
doctrina,    -ae,     f.     [doctor,    teacher\y 

teaching,  learning,  wisdom 
dolor,  -oris,  m.  pain,  sorrow 
domesticus,    -a,    -um,    adj.    [domus, 

hou5e\,  of  the  house,  domestic 
domicilium,    domicili,    n.    dwelling, 

house,  abode.    Cf.  domus 
domina,  -ae,  f.  mistress  (of  the  house), 

dominus,  -i,  m.  master  (of  the  house), 
owner,  ruler  (§  462) 

domus,  -us,  f .  house,  home,  domi,  loca- 
tive, at  home  (§  468) 

dormio,  -ire,  -ivi,  -itus,  sleep 

draco,  -onis,  m.  serpent,  dragon 

dubito,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  hesitate 

dubius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [duo,  two^  {mo-v- 
ing  two  ways),  doubtful,  dubious 

du-centi,  -ae,  -a,  numeral  adj.  two 
hundred 

duco,  -ere,  duxi,  ductus  (imv.  due),  lead, 
conduct 

dum,  conj.  while,  as  long  as 

duo,    duae,    duo,    numeral    adj.    two 

(§479) 
duo-decim,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  twelve 
durus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  hard,  tough  ;  harsh, 

pitiless,  bitter 
dux,  ducis,  m.  and  f.  [cf.  dQc5,  lecul'l, 

leader,  commander 

E 

e  or  ex,  prep,  with  abl.  out  of,  from, 

of,  of  (%  209) 
ebumeus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  of  ivory 


eruptiO 
ecce,  adv.  seel  behold!  there!  here!        n 
e-diico,  -ere,  -duxi,  -ductus  [e,  out,  -h     I 

duco,  lead^,  lead  out,  draw  out 
ef-ficio,  -ere,  -feci,  -fectus   [ex,  thor- 
oughly, +  facio,  do^y  work  out;  make^ 

cause 
ef-fugio,   -ere,   -fugi,   -fugiturus   [ex, 

from,  +  iMgio,  fleel,  escape 
ege5,  -ere,  -ui, ,  be  in  need  of,  lack, 

with  abl.  (§  501.  32) 
ego,  pers.  pron.  /;  plur.  nos,  we  (§  480) 
e-gredior,  -i,  egressus  sum,  dep.  verb 

[e,  out  of,  +  gradior,  go\  go  out,  go 

forth,    e  navi  egredi,  disembark 
e-ici5,  -ere,  -ieci,  -iectus  [e,  forth,  + 

iacio,  hurl],  hurl  forth,  expel 
elementum,  -i,  n.,  in  ^\\xx.  first  prin^ 

ciples,  rudiments 
elephantus,  -i,  m.  elephant 
Elis,  Elidis,  f.  ^lis,  a  district  of  so.uth- 

ern  Greece 
em5,  -ere,  emi,  emptus,  buy,  purchase 
enim,  conj.,  never  standing  first,  for, 

iji  fact,  indeed.    Cf.  nam 
Ennius,  Enni,  m.  Ennius,  the  father  of 

Roman  poetry,  born  239  B.C. 
eo,  ire,  ii  (ivi),  iturus,  go  (§  499) 
e5,  adv.  to  that  place,  thither 
Epirus,  -i,  f.  Epi'rus,  a  district  in  the 

north  of  Greece 
eques,  -itis,  m.  [equus,  horse],  horse- 

mafi,  cavalryman 
equitatus,  -us,  m.  [equito,  ride^cavalry 
equus,  -i,  m.  horse 
e-rigo,  -ere,  -rexi,  -rectus  [e,  out,  -f- 

rego,  make  straight],  raise  up 
e-ripio,  -ere,  -ul,  -reptus  [e,  out  of  + 

rapio,  seize],  seize;  rescue 
e-rumpo,  -ere,  -rupi,  -ruptus  [e,  forth, 

+  rumpo,  break],  burst  forth 
eruptid,  -^nis,  f.  sally 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


Erymanthius 
Erymanthius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Eryman- 

t/tiiiHt  of  Erymanihusy  a  district  in 

southern  Greece 
et,  conj.  and^  also,   et  .  ,  .  et,  boi/t  .  .  . 

and.   Cf.  atque,  ac,  -que 
etiam,  adv.  (rarely  conj.)  [et,  also^  + 

iam,  n(nu]tyei,  still;  also,  besides.  Cf. 

quoqae.    ndn  sdlum sed  etiam,  not 

only  .  .  .  but  also 
Etrusci,  -drum,  m.  Jhe  Etruscans^  the 

people  of  Etruria.   See  map  of  Italy 
Eur5pa,  -ae,  f.  Europe 
Eurystheus,  -i,  m.  Eurys'theus^  a  king 

of  Tiryns,  a  city  in  southern  Greece 
e-vado,  -«re,  -vJisi,  -v&aus  [S,  out,  + 

v&d5,  go\y  gofortky  escape 
ex,  see  e 
exanimatus,  -a,  -um  [part,  of  exanimo, 

put  out  of  breath  (anlma)],  adj.  out 

of  breath,  tired;  lifeless 
ex-cipio,  -ere,  -cfpi,  -ceptus  [ex,  out, 

-f  capio,  take\,  welcome,  receive 
exemplum,  -i,  n.  example,  model 
ex-€6,-ire,-ii,-ituru8  [ex,  out,  +  eo,^], 

go  out,  go  forth  (§413) 
ex-erceS,  -€re,  -ui,  -itus  [ex,  out,  + 

arced,  shut\,  {shutout),  employ,  train, 

exercise,  use 
exercitus,   -Qs,    m.    [exerceC,    train], 

army 
ex-istimS,  -&re,  -ftvl,  -Atus  [ex,  out,  + 

aestimd,    rechon],    estimate;    think. 

Judge  (§420.r).  Cf.  arbitror,  puto 
ez-orior,  -iri,  -ortus  aum,  dep.  verb  [ex, 

forth,  +  orior,  rise],  come  forth,  rise 
expeditus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  without  baggage 
ex-pell6,  -ere,  -pull,  -pulsus  [ex,  out, 

+  pelld,  drive],  drive  out 
ex-piO,  -ire,  -irl,  -itus  [ex,  intensive, 

-f-  pi5,  atone  for],  muJu  amonds  for* 

akmo  for 


fama 

expI5rator,  -oris,  m.  [expldro,  investi- 
gate], spy,  scout 

explOrS,  -ire,  -ivi,  -itus,  examine,  ex- 
plore 

ex-pugn5,  -ire,  -ivI,  -itus  [ex,  out,  + 
pugjD6,yf^///j,  taMe  by  storm,  capture 

exsilium,  exsi'll,  n.  [exsul,  exile],  ban- 
ishment, exile 

ex-specto,  -ire,  -4vi,  -itus  [ex,  out,  + 
spectd,  look],  expect,  wait 

ex-stru5,  -ere,  -strflxi,  -structus  [ex, 
out,  +  struo,  build],  build  up,  erect 

extenis,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  compared  ex- 
terior, extrgmus  or  extimus,  outside, 
outer  {%  112) 

extra,  prep,  with  zcc.beyond,  outside  of 

ex-traho,  -ere,  -trixi,  -trictus  [ex,  out, 
+  traho,  drag],  drag  out,  pull  forth 

extremus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  superl.  of  ex- 
terus,  utmost,  farthest  (§312) 


fibula,  -ae,  f .  story,  tale,  fable 

facile,  adv.  [facilis,  easy],  compared 
faciiius,  facillime,  easily  (§  322) 

facilis,  -e,  adj.  [cf.  facid,  mahe],  easy, 
without  difficulty  (§  307) 

facid,  -ere,  f§ci,  f actus  (imv.  fac), 
make,  do ;  cause,  bring  about,  impe- 
tum  facere  in,  make  an  attack  upon. 
proelium  facere,  fight  a  battle,  iter 
facere,  make  a  march  or  journey. 
aliquem  certi5rem  facere,  inform 
some  one.  iaceie  verba  pr6,  speah  in 
behalf  of.  Passive  fio,  fieri,  factus 
•um,  be  done,  happen,  certior  fieri, 
be  informed 

fallO,  -«re,  fefelll,  falsus,  trip,  betray, 
deceive 

fiLnuti  -ae,  f.  report^  rumor;  renown, 
fame,  reptttaiion 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


310 

fames 
fames,  -is  (abl.  fame),  f.  hunger 
familia,  -ae,  f.  servants,  slaves;  house- 
hold, family 
fasces,  -ium  (plur.  of  fascis),  i.  fasces 

(p.  225) 
fastigium,    fasti'gi,    n.    top;    slope, 

descent 
fatum,  -i,  w.fate,  destiny 
fauces,  -ium,  f.  YAux.jaws,  throat 
faveo,  -ere,  favi,  fauturus,  be  favorable 

to,  favor,  with  dat.  (§  501. 14) 
felix,  -ids,  adj.  happy,  lucky 
femina,  -ae,  f.  woman.   Cf.  mulier 
fera,  -ae,  f.  [ferus,  wild},  wild  beast 
ferax,  -acis,  did],  fertile 
fere,  adv.  about,  nearly,  almost 
fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latus,  bear,    graviter 
or     moleste     ferre,     be     annoyed 

(§498) 
ferreus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [ferrum,  iron'], 

made  of  iron 
fidelis, -e,  adj.  [fides,  trust],  faithful, 

true 
fides,  fidei  (?r fidS,  trust,  faith ;  promise, 

word ;  protection,    in   fidem  venire, 

come  under  the  protection,    in  fide 

manere,  remain  loyal 
filia,  -ae  (dat.  and  abl.  plur.  filiabus), 

f .  daughter  (§  461 .  a) 
filius,  fill  (voc.  sing,  fili),  m.  son 
finis,  -is,  m.  boicndary,  limit,  end;  in 

plur.  territory,  country  (§  243.  i) 
finitimus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [finis,  bound- 
ary], adjoining,  neighboring.    Plur. 

finitimi,  -orum,  m.  neighbors 
fio,  fieri,  factus  sum,  used  as  passive 

of  faci5.    See  faci5  (§  500) 
flamma,  -ae,  i.  fire,  flame 
flos,  floris,  r^.  flower 
fluctus,  -us,  m.  [cf.  fluo,  flow],  flood, 

wave,  billow 


fuga 
fliimen,  -inis,  n.  [cf.  Hud,  flow],  river 

(§464.  2. /5) 
fluo,  -ere,  fluxi,  fluxus,y?^7£/ 
fluvius,  fluvi,  m.  [cf.  fim,flow],  river 
fodi5,  -ere,  fodi,  fossus,  dig 
fons,  fontis,  m.  fountain  (§  247.  2.  a) 
forma,  -ae,  i.form,  shape,  appearance ; 

beauty 
Formiae,  -arum,  f.  Formiae,  a  town  of 

LatiumontheAppianWay.  See  map 
forte,  adv.  [abl.  of  fors,  chance],  by 

chance 
fortis,  -e,  adj.  strong;  fearless,  brave 
fortiter,    adv.    [fortis,    strong],   com- 
pared fortius,  fortissime,  strongly; 

bravely 
fortiina,  -ae,  f.  [fors,  chance],  chance, 

fate,  fortune 
forum,  -i,  n.  market  place,  esp.  the 

Forum  RomSnum,  where  the  life  of 

Rome  centered 
Forum  Appi,  Forum  ofAppius,  a  town 

in  Latium  on  the  Appian  Way 
fossa,  -ae,  f.  [cf.  fodio,  dig],  ditch 
fragor,  -oris,  m.   [cf.  frango,  break], 

crash,  noise 
frangS,  -ere,  fregi,  fractus,  break 
frater,  -tris,  m.  brother 
fremitus,  -us,  m.  loud  noise 
frequento,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  attend 
fretus,  -a,  -um,  did],  supported,  trusting. 

Usually  with  abl.  of  means 
f  rons,  f  rontis,  i.  front,  a  fronte,  in  front 
fructus,  -us,  m.  fruit 
friimentarius,  -a,  -um,  ^d]. pertaining 

to   grain,     res    frumentaria,    grain 

supplies 
f riimentum,  -i,  n.  grain 
frustra,  adv.  in  vain,  vainly 
fuga,  -ae,   f.    [cf.   fugio,  flee],  flight. 

in  fugam  ^axe^put  to  flight 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


311 


fngiS 
tnglO,  -ere,  fflgi,  f ugitflrus, yKf*,  run; 
axwidt  shun 

fumd,  -4re, , ,  smcke 

funis,  -is,  TO.  ropt 

iiror,  -Sris,  m.  [furS,  rage\^  madness. 
in  f  urorem  incidere,  go  mad 


Gaius,  Gil,  m.  Gaius,  a  Roman  name, 
abbreviated  C,  English  form  Cains 

Galba,  -ac,  m.  Gaiboy  a  Roman  name 

galea,  -«e,  f.  helmet 

Gallia,  -ae,  f.  Gauly  the  country  com- 
prising what  is  now  Holland,  Bel- 
gium, Switzerland,  and  France 

Gallicus,  -a,  -urn,  adj.  Galite 

gallina,  -ae,  f.  hen,  chicken 

Gallus,  -1,  m.  a  Gaul 

gaudium,  gaud!,  n.joy 

Genava,  -ae,  f.  Geneva,  a  city  in 
Switzerland 

gens,  gentia,  f.  [cf.  gignd,  beget],  nue, 
family  ;  people,  nation,  tribe 

genus,  -eris,  n.  kind,  variety 

Germania,  -ae,  f.  Germany 

Germanus,  -!,  m.  a  German 

gerS,  -ere,  gessi,  gestua,  carry,  wear: 
uui^r.  bellum  gerere,  wage  war.  ris 
gestae,  exploits,  bene  gerere,  carry 
on  successfully 

gladiatShus,  -a,  -om,  adj.  gladiatorial 

gladiua,  gladi,  m.  sworJ 

gI5ria,  -ae,  i.  glory,  fame 

Gracchus,  -I,  m.  Gracchus^  name  of  a 
famous  Roman  family 

gracilis,  -e,  adj.  slender  (§  307) 

Graeca,  -Orum,  n.  plur.  Greek  writ- 
ings, Greek  literature 

GraecS,  adv.  in  Greek 

Graecia,  •«e,  f.  Greece 

gramnuticiu,  -I,  m.  gmmmariam 


honestus 
gratia,  -ae,  f .  thanks,  gratitude 
gratus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  acceptable,  pleas- 
ing.  Often  with  dat.  (§  501,  16) 
gravia,  -«,  adj.  heavy;  disagreeable; 
serious,  dangerous  ;  earnest,  weighty 
graviter,  adv.   [gravis,    heavy],  com- 
pared  gravius,  gravissimg,  heavily  ; 
greatly,    seriously,     graviter    ferre, 
bear  ill,  take  to  heart 
gubernator,  -«ri8,  m.  [gnbemO,  pilot], 

pilot 

H 

habena,  -ae,  f.  halter,  rein 

habed,   -€re,   -ui,   -itua,    have,  hold; 

regard,  consider,  deem 
habits,  -4re,  -4vi,  -itus   [cf.  habeO, 

have],   dwell,    abide,    inhabit.     Cf. 

incolo,  viv6 
hac-tenus,  adv.  thus  far 
Helvetii,   -orum,   m.  the   Helvetii^  a 

Gallic  tnbe 
Hercules,  -is,   m.    Hercules,   son   of 

Jupiter  and  Alcmena,  and  god  of 

strength 
Hesperides,   -um,   f.   the  Hesperides, 

daughters  of  Hesperus,  who  kept 

the  garden  of  the  golden  apples 
hie,    haec,    hoc,    demonstrative    adj. 

and  pron.  this  (of  mine) ;  as  pera. 

pron.  he,  she,  it  (§481) 
hie,  adv.  here 
hiema,  -emia,  f.  winter 
hine,  adv.  [hie,  here],  from  here,  hence 
Hippol3rtS,  -*8,  f.  Hippolyte,  queen  of 

the  Amazons 
ho-diS,  adv.  [modified  form  of  hOc  dii, 

on  this  day],  to-day 
hom5,  -inia,  m.  and  f.  {human  being), 

man,  person 
hOUMTtU,  -a,  -um,  adv.  [honor,  honor], 

nsptcted,  honorabU 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


312 

honor 
honor,  -oris,  m.  honor 
hora,  -ae,  f.  hour 
Horatius,   Hora'15,   m.   Horatius,   a 

Roman  name 
horribilis,  -e,  adj.  terrible^  horrible 
hortor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.  verb, 

urge^     incite^     exhort^     encourage 

(§493) 
hortus,  -i,  m.  garden 
hospitium,  hospi''ti,  n.  [hospes,  host^, 

hospitality 
hostis,    -is,    m.    and   f.  enemy,  foe 

(§465.^) 
humilis,  -e,  adj.  low,  humble  (§  307) 
Hydra,  -ae,  f.  the  Hydra,  a  mythical 

water  snake  slain  by  Hercules 


iacio,  -ere,  ieci,  iactus,  throw,  hurl 
iam,  adv.  now,  already,    nee  iam,  and 

no  longer 
laniculum,  -i,  n.  the  Janiculum,  one 

of  the  hills  of  Rome 
ianua,  -ae,  f.  door 
ibi,  adv.  there,  in  that  place 
Icarus,    -i,    m.   Ic^arus^  the    son    of 

Daedalus 
ictus,  -us,  m.  [cf.  ico,  strikel,  blow 
idem,    e'adem,    idem,    demonstrative 

pron.  [is  -}-  dem],  same  (§  481) 
idoneus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  suitable,  fit 
igitur,  conj.,  seldom  the  first  word, 

therefore,  then.    Cf.  itaque 
ignis, -is,  m.fire  {§§  243.  i ;  247.  2:  a ; 

465,  I) 
ignotus,   -a,  -um,   adj.  [in-,   not,    + 

(g)n6tus,  known'\,  unknown,  strange 
ille,  ilia,  illud,  demonstrative  adj.  and 

pron.  that  (yonder);  as  pers.  pron. 

he,  she,  it  (§481) 
illic,  adv.  [cf.  ille],  yonder,  there 


in-cautus 
im-mitt5,    -ere,    -misi,    -missus    [in, 

against,  +  vaitto,  send'\,  send  against ; 
let  in 

immol5,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [in,  upon,  + 
mola,  meal],  sprinkle  with  sacrificial 
meal ;  offer,  sacrifice 

im-mortalis,  -c,  adj.  [in-,  noty  +  nior- 
talis,  mortal],  immortal 

im-mortalitas,  -atis,  f.  [immortalis, 
immortal],  immortality 

im-paratus,  -a,  -ixm,  adj.  [in-,  not,  + 
paratus,  prepared],  unprepared 

impedimentum,  -i,  n.  [impedio,  hin- 
der], hindrance ;  in  plur.  baggage 

impeditus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  im- 
pedio, hinder],  hindered,  burdened 

im-pell5,  -ere,  -puli,  -pulsus  [in, 
against,  +  pello,  strike],  strike 
against ;  impel,  drive,  propel 

imperator,  -oris,  m.  [impero,  com- 
mand], general 

imperium,  impe'ri,  n.  [impero,  com- 
mand], command,  order;  realm.,  em- 
pire ;  power,  authority 

impero,  -are,'  -avi,  -atus,  command, 
order.  Usually  with  dat.  and  an  ob- 
ject clause  of  purpose  (§501.41). 
With  ace.  object,  levy,  impose 

impetus,  -us,  m.  attack,  impetum 
facere  in,  make  an  attack  upon 

im-pon5,  -ere,  -posui,  -positus  [in,  upon^ 
+  pon5,  place]t  place  upon  ;  impose^ 
assign 

in,  prep,  with  ace.  into,  to,  against,  aty 
upon,  towards  ;  with  abl.  in,  on.  in 
reliquum  tQva.i^nB,  for  the  future 

in-,  inseparable  prefix.  With  nouns 
and  adjectives  often  with  a  negative 
force,  like  English  un-,  in- 

in-cautus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [in-,  not,  + 
cautus,  careful],  off  one*  s  guard 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY  313 

m-fltru5 
ingenium,  inge'ni,  n,  talent,  ability 


incenditun 
incendium,  incendi,  i\.  Jlame,  fire.    Cf. 

in-cendd,  -«re,  -dl,  -cSnaat,  set  fire  to, 

burn 
in-€id6,  -ere,  -cidi, [in,  in,  on,  + 

cd^Ao,  fall],  fall  in,  fall  on  :  happen. 

in  furorem  incidere,  go  mad 
in-cipi5,  -ere,  -c*pi,  -ceptus  [in,  on, 

4-  capio,  take\,  begin 
in-cognitus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [in-,  not,  + 

cognitus,  known^  unknown 
in-colo,  -ere,  -ui,  [in,  in,  +  colo, 

(i~ccll],  inhabit ;  live 
incolumis,  -c,  adj.   sound,   safe,   un- 
injured, unharmed 
in-credibilis,   -«,   adj.    [in-,    not,  + 

credibilis,  to  be  believed],  incredible 
xnde,  from  that  place,  thence 
induo,  -ere,  -ui,  -fitU8,/w/  on 
indutus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part  of  induo, 

/;//  on],  clothed 
in-eS,  -ire,  -ii,  -itus  [in,  /«/<?,  +  e5,  jv], 

go  into  ;  enter  upon,  begin,  with  ace. 

(§413) 
In-fans,  -fantis,  adj.  [in-,  not,  +  •  fins, 

speaking],  not  speaking.  As  a  noun, 

m.  and  f.  infant 
in-felix,  -ids,  adj.  [in-,  not,  +  f€lix, 

happy],  unhappy,  unlucky 
infensas,  -a,  -um,  adj.  hostile 
in'-fcr5,  infer're,  in'tuli,  inli'tus  [in, 

against,  +  ferS,  bear],  bring  against 

or  upon,  inflict,  with  ace.  and  dat 

(§  50*-  *  5)-  bellum  inferre,  wifh  Hnf  . 

make  war  upon 
infenis,    -a,    -um,    adj.    /..< .    rr^^..- 
_   (§3' 2) 
in-finitii8,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [in-,  not,  + 

finitus,  bounded],  boundless,  endless 
in-firmu8,  -a,  -um,  adj.   [in-,  not,  + 

firmus,  itrong],  weak,  infirm 


ingens,  -entis,  adj.  vast,  huge,  ettor- 

mous,  large.    Cf.  magnus 
in-gredior,  -gredi,  -gressua  sum  [in,  in, 

-f  gradior,  walk],  advance,  enter 
inimicus,  -a,  -um,  adj.   [in-,  not,  + 

amicu8,/rfV«<//>'],  hostile.  As  a  noun, 

inimicus,  -i,  va.  enemy, foe.  Cf.  hostis 
initium,  ini''ti,  entrance,  beginning 
initus,  -a,  -um,  part  of  ineo.     initA 

aestate,  at  the  beginning  of  summer 
iniiiria,  -ae,  f.  [in,  against,  +  ius,  law], 

injustice,  xvrong,  injury,    alicui  in- 

iurias  inferre,   inflict  wrongs  upon 

some  one 
inopia,   -ae,    f.    [inops,   needy],  want, 

need,  lack 
in-opinans,  -antis,    adj.   [in-,  not,  + 

opinins,    thinking],    not    expecting, 

taken  by  surprise 
inquiti  said  he,  said  she.    Regularly 

inserted  in  a  direct  quotation 
iil-rig5,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  irrigate,  water 
in-nimpo,  -ere,  -rupi,  -ruptus  [in,  into, 

+  rumpo,  break],  burst  in,  break  in 
inniS,  -ere,  -rui, [in,  in,  +  ruo, 

rush],  rush  in 
in-sequor,  -sequi,  -secOtus  sum,  dcp. 

verb  [in,  on,  •\-  sequor,  follow],  fol- 
low on,  pursue 
lO-signei    -is,     n.     badge,    decoration 

insignis,  -e,  adj.  remarkable,  noted 
instans,  -antis,  adj.  [part,  of  insto,  be 

at  hand],  present,  immediate 
in-sto,  -ire,  -stiti,  -staturus  [in,  upon, 

+  8t5,  stand],  stand  upon ;   be  at 

hand ;  pursue,  press  on 
Instnunentum,  -I,  n.  instrument 
in-etrud,  -ere,  -striixi,  -strOctus  [in,  on, 

+  struo,  build],  draw  up 


314  LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 

insula 
insula,  -ae,  f.  island 


integer, -gra,  -grum,  untouched^whole ; 
fresh  y  new 

intellego,  -ere,  -lexl,  -lectus  [inter,  be- 
tween, +  lego,  choose\,,  perceive,  under- 
stand (§  420.  </) 

intento,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  aim  ;  threaten 

inter,  prep,  with  ace.  between,  among; 
during,  while  (§  340) 

interf ectus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  inter- 
ficio,  kiWl,  slain,  dead 

inter-ficio,  -ere,  -feci,  -fectus  [inter, 
between,  +  faciS,  make\,  put  out  of 
the  way,  kill.  Cf .  neco,  occido,  trucidd 

interim,  adv.  meanwhile 

interior,  -ius,  adj.  interior,  inner  {^2^^) 

inter-mitto,  -ere,  -misi,  -missus,  leave 
off,  suspend 

interpres,  -etis,  m.  and  f.  interpreter 

inter-rogo,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  question 

inter-sum,  -esse,  -fui,  -futurus  [inter, 
between,  +  sum,  bel,  be  present,  take 
part  in,  with  dat.  (§  501. 15) 

inter-vallum,  -i,  n.  interval,  distance 

intra,  adv.  and  prep,  with  ace.  within^ 
in 

intro,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  go  into,  enter 

in-venio,  -ire,  -veni,  -ventus  [in,  upon, 
+  venio,  cornel,  find 

invisus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  invideo, 
envy],  hated,  detested 

lolaus,  -i,  m.  I-o-ld'us,  a  friend  of 
Hercules 

ipse,  -a,  -um,  intensive  pron.  that  very, 
this  very;  self,  himself,  herself,  itself, 

_    (§481) 

ira,  -ae,  f.  wrath,  anger 

iratus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  irascor, 
be  angry],  angered y  enraged 

is,  ea,  id,  demonstrative  adj.  and  pron. 
this,  that;  he,  she,  it  (§  481) 


lacus 

iste,  -a,  -ud,  demonstrative  adj.  and 
pron.  that  (of  yours),  he,  she,  it 
(§481) 

ita,  adv.  so,  thus.   Cf.  sic  and  tam 

Italia,  -ae,  f.  Italy 

ita-que,  conj.  and  so,  therefore 

item,  adv.  also 

iter,  itineris,  vs..  journey,  march,  route ; 
way, passage  {§§  247.  i.a\  468).  iter 
^axQjgivea  right  of  way,  allow  to  pass. 
iter  facere,  march  (see  p.  1 59) 

iubeo,  -ere,  iussi,  iussus,  order,  com- 
mand. Usually  with  the  infin.  and 
subj.  ace.  (§213) 

iudex,  -icis,  m.  and  f.  judge  (§  464.  i ) 

iudico,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [iudex,  y«^(?], 
judge,  decide  (§  420.  c) 

lulia,  -die,  Julia,  a  Roman  name 

lulius,  luli,  m.  Julius,  a  Roman  name 

iungo,  -ere,  iunxi,  iunctus,  join ;  yoke, 
harness 

luno,  -onis,  f.  funo,  the  queen  of  the 
gods  and  wife  of  Jupiter 

luppiter,  lovis,  m.  Jupiter,  the  su- 
preme god 

iur5,  -are,  -avi,  -dX\i&,swear,  take  an  oath 

iussus,  -a,  -um,  part,  of  iubeo,  ordered 


L.,  abbreviation  for  Lucius 

labef actus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  labe- 
facio,  cause  to  shake],  shaken,  weak- 
ened, ready  to  fall 

Labienus,  -i,  m.  La-bi-/nus,  one  of 
Caesar's  lieutenants 

labor,  -oris,  m.  labor,  toil 

laboro,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [labor,  labor], 
labor;  suffer,  be  hard  pressed 

lacrima,  -ae,  f.  tear 

lacus,  -us  (dat.  and  abl.  plur.  lacubus), 
m.  lake 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


315 


laete 
UetC,  adv.  fUetus,  giad],  compared 

laetius,  laetissimg,  gladly 
laetitia,  -ae,  f.  \\aiCt\xs,  glad],  joy 
laetus,  -a,  -um,  vl^].  glad,  joyful 
lapis,-idi8,m.j/<»«/(§§247.2.a;464.i) 
Lar,  Laris,  m.;  plur.  LarSs, -um  (rarely 

-iom),  ih£  Lares  or  household  gods 
late,    adv.    [Utus,    7vide],    compared 

latius,  UltisaimS,  widely 
Latins,  adv.  in  Latin.     Latln6  loqui, 

to  speak  Latin 
latitude,  -inis,  f.  [latus,  ivide\y  width 
Latona,    -ae,    f.    Latona,    mother   of 

Apollo  and  Diana 
latus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  wide' 
latus,  -eris,  n.  side,  flank,   ab  utr5que 

latere,  on  each  side 
laud5,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [laus,  praise], 

praise 
laurea,  -ae,  f.  laurel 
laureatus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  crtysnvai  -^vith 

laurel 
laus,  laudis,  f.  praise 
lectulus,  -i,  m.  couch,  bed 
legatus,  -i,  m.  ambassador;  lieutenant 
legio,  -onis,  f.  [cf.  legS,  gather],  (body 

0/  soldiers),  legion,  about  3600  men 

(§  464.  2.  a) 
legidnarius,  -a,  -um,   adj.  legionary. 

riur.  legionArii,  -drum,  m.  the  soldiers 

of  the  legion 
legs,  -ere,  16gi,  ISctus,  read 
lenis,  -e,  Ad\.  gentle,  smooth,  mild 
leniter,  adv.  [Ifinis,  gentle],  compared 

linius,  linisaimt,  gently 
Lentulus,  -i,  m.  Lentulus,  a  Roman 

family  name 
led,  -onis,  m.  lion 
Lernaeus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Lemeean,  of 

I.crnat  in  southern  Greece 
Lesbia,  -«e,  f.  Lesbia,  a  girl's  name 


magis 

leris,  -«,  adj.  light 

lex,  legis,  f.  measure,  law 

libenter,  adv.  [libSns,  willing],  com- 
pared libcntius,  libentiasimS,  will- 
'»gh'^  giadly 

liber,  -era,  -erum,  2id'].free  (§469.  b) 

liberi,  -drum,  m.  [liber,  free],  children 

libero,  -are,  -ftvi,  -&tu8  [liber, /;r^],  set 
free,  release,  liberate 

libertas,  -atis,  f.  [\\bex,  free],  freedom, 
liberty 

lictor,  -oris,  m.  lictor  (p.  225) 

limus,  -i,  m.  mud 

littera,  -ae,  f.  a  letter  of  the  alphabet ; 
in  plur.  a  letter,  epistle 

litus,  -oris,  n.  seashore,  beach 

locus,  -i,  m.  (plur.  loci  and  loca,  m. 
and  x\.),  place,  spot 

longe,  adv.  [longus,/<j«^],  comp.longi- 
us,  longissime,  a  long  way  off;  by  far 

longinquus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [longus,  long\ 
distant,  remote 

longitiido,  -inis,  f.  [longus,  long],  Ir.tgth 

longus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  long 

loquor,  loqui,  locutus  sum,  dep.  verb, 
talk,  speak 

Idrica,  -ae,  f.  [lorum,  though,  coat  of 
mail,  corselet 

liido,  -ere,  lusi,  lusus,  play 

ludus,  -i,  m.  play ;  school,  the  elemen- 
tary grades.    Cf.  schola 

liina,  -ae,  f.  moon 

liix,  lucis,  f.  (no  gen.  plur.),  light. 
prima  lux,  daybreak 

Lydia,  -ae,  f.  Lydia,  a  girl's  name 


M.,  abbreviation  for  lUrcus 
magicus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  magic 
magis,  adv.  in  comp.  degree  [magnua, 
great],  more,  in  a  higher  degree  (§  323) 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


316 

•     magister 
magister,  -tri,  m.  master,  commander; 

teacher 
magistratus,  -us,  m.  [magister,  mas- 

ter},  magistracy  ;  magistrate 
magnitudo,  -inis,  f.  [magnus,  greaf], 

greatness,  size 
magnopere,    adv.    [abl.    of    magnum 

opus],    compared    magis,    maxime, 

greatly,  exceedingly  (§323) 
magnus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  compared  maior, 

maximus,  great,  large;  strong,  loud 

(§3") 
maior,   maius,   -oris,   adj.,  comp.   of 

magnus,  greater,  larger  (§311) 
maiores,  -um,  m.  plur.  of  maior,  an- 
cestors 
mal5,  malle,  malui, [magis,  more, 

+  V0I6,  wisK\,wish  more,  prefer  (§  497) 
malus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  compared  peior, 

pessimus,  bad,  evil,  zcicked  (§  311) 
mando,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [manus,  hand, 

+  do, /«/],  {put  in  hand),  intrust; 

order,  command 
maneo,  -ere,  mansi,  mansurus,  stay, 

remain,  abide 
Manlius,  Manli,  m.  Manlius,  a  Roman 

name 
mansuetus,   -a,    -um,    adj.    [part,  of 

mansuesco,  tame^,  tamed 
manus,  -us,  f.  hand;  force,  band 
Marcus,  -i,  m.  Marcus,  Mark,  a  Roman 

first  name 
mare,  -is,  n.  (no  gen.  plur.),  sea..m3XQ 

tenere,  be  out  to  sea 
marg5,  -inis,  m.  edge,  border 
maritus,  -i,  m.  husband 
Marius,  Mari,  m.  Marius,  a  Roman 

name,  esp.  C.  Marius,  the  general 
Martins,  -a,  -um,  adj.  of  Mars,  esp. 

the  Campus  Martius 
mater,  -tris,  f.  mother 


mmmie 

matrimonium,  matrimo'ni,  n.  mar- 
riage, in  matrimonium  ducere,  marry 

matiirO,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  hasten.  Cf. 
contend©,  propero 

maturus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  ripe,  mature 

maxime,  adv.  in  superl.  degree  \mdi:xX- 
vcms, greatest\,  compared  magnopere, 
magis,  maxime,  especially,  very  much 

(§323) 

maximus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  superl.  of  mag- 
nus, greatest,  extreme  (§311) 

medius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  middle  part; 
middle,  intervening 

melior,  -ius,  -oris,  adj.,  comp.  of  bonus, 
<^^//^r  {§311) 

melius,  adv.  in  comp.  degree,  com- 
pared bene,  melius,  optime,   better 

(§323) 

memoria,  -ae,  f.  [memor,  mindful^, 
memory,    memoria  tenere,  remember 

mens,  mentis,  f.  mind.   Cf.  animus 

mensis,  -is,  m.  month  (§  247.  2.  a) 

mercator,  -oris,  m.  [mercor,  trade\, 
trader,  merchant 

meridianus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [meridies, 
noon'\,  of  midday 

meridies, (ace.  -em,  abl.  -e),  m. 

[medius,  mid,  +  dies,  day'X,  noon 

metus,  -us,  m.fear,  dread 

meus,  -a,  -um,  possessive  adj.  and 
pron.  my,  mine  (§  98) 

miles,  -itis,  m.  soldier  (§  464.  i) 

militaris,  -e,  adj.  [mfles,  soldier],  mili- 
tary,  res  militaris,  science  of  war 

milito,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [miles,  soldier], 
serve  as  a  soldier 

mille,  plur.  milia,  -ium,  numeral  adj. 
and  subst  thousand  (§  479) 

minime,  adv.  in  superl.  degree,  com- 
pared parum,  minus,  minime,  least, 
very  little;  by  no  means  (§323) 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


2>^1 


minim  as 

minimus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  in  superl. 
degree,  compared  parvus,  minor, 
minimus,  Uast,  smallest  (§311) 

minor,  minus,  -5ris,  adj.  in  comp. 
degree,  compared  parvus,  minor, 
minimus,  smaller^  less  (§311) 

Minds,  -ois,  m.  Minos,  a  king  of  Crete 

minus,  adv.  in  comp.  degree,  com- 
pared  parum,   minus,  minime,   less 

Minyae,   -&rum,    m.   the    Minyae,    a 

people  of  Greece 
mirabilis,  -e,  adj.  [miror,  wonder  a/], 

'ivondetful,  marvelous 
miror,   -4ri,    -itus    sum,    dep.   verb 

[mirus,  w0HdeTful\y  wonder^  marvel , 

admire 
minis,  -a,  -um,  adj.  xvondetful 
Misenum,  -i,  Afis/num,   a  promon- 
tory and  harbor  on   the  coast  of 

Campania.   See  map 
miser,  -era,  -erum,  adj.  wretchedy  un- 

hapfy,  miserable 
missus,  -a,  -um,  part,  of  mittd,  sent 
mitts,  -ere,  misi,  missus,  send 
modicus,   -a,   -um   [modus,  mectsure^ 

modest,  ordinary 
modo,  adv.  [abl.  of  modus,  measure, 

with  shortened  0],  <»«/>',  merely,  just 

no7v.    modo  .  .  .  modo,  now .  .  .  now^ 

sometimes  .  .  .  sometimes 
modus,  -i,  m.  measure;  manner,  way; 

kind 
moenia,  -ium,  n.  plur.  [cf.  mfiniS,  for- 

tify^,  walls,  ramparts 
molests,  adv.  [molestus,  troublesome], 

compared   molestius,   molestissimi, 

annoyingly.    molestS    ferre,    to    be 

annoyed 
molestus,  -a,  -um,  troublesome,  annoy- 

tti£,  unpleasant  (§  501.  16) 


nauta 
moneO,  -€re,  -ui,  -itus,  remind,  tuiviie, 

warn  (§489) 
m5ns,  mentis,  m.  mountain{%  247.  2. a) 
mSnstrum,  -i,  n.  monster 
mora,  -ae,  f.  delay 
moror,    -4ri,    -fttus  sum,   dep.   verb 

[mora,  delay],  delay,  linger;  impede 
mors,  mortis,  f.  [cf.  morior,  die],  death 
m6s,  moris,  m.  custom,  habit 
m5tus,   -us,    m.    [cf.    moved,    move], 

motion,    movement,     terrae    mdtus, 

earthquake 
moved,  -Sre,  m5vi,  mdtus,  move 
mox,  adv.  soon, presently 
mulier,  -eris,  f.  woman 
multitiido,  -inis,  f.   [multus,    much], 

multitude 
multum  (multd),  adv.  [multus,  much], 

compared    plus,    plurimum,    much 

(§477) 

multus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  compared  plQs, 
plurimus,  much  ;  plur.  many  (§311) 

miiniS,  -ire,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itus,  fortify, 
defend 

miiniti5,  -dnis,  f.  [munid,  fortify],  de- 
fense, fort  if  cation 

mums,  -i,  m.  7vall.   Cf.  moenia 

miisica,  -ae,  f.  music 

N 

nam,  cony  for.   Cf.  enim 

nam-qne,  conj.,  a  strengthened  nam, 
introducing  a  reason  or  explana- 
tion, /ir,  and  in  fact ;  seeing  that 

narrO,  -ire,  -AvI,  -itus,  tell,  relate 

nascor,  nisei,  nitus  sum,  dep.  verb, 
be  bom,  spring  from 

natura,  -ae,  f.  nature 

natus,  part,  of  nisoor 

nauta,  -ae,  m.  [for  nivita,  from  nivia, 
ship],  sailor 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


318 

navalis 
navalis,  -e,  adj.  [navis,  ship\  naval 
navigium,  navi'gi,  n.  ship,  boat 
nayigo,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [navis,  ship, 

+  ago,  drive],  sail,  cruise 
nayis,   -is    (abl.   -i   or   -e),    f.   ship 

(§  243.  i).    navem  conscendere,  em- 
bark, go  on  board,   navem  solvere, 

set  sail,   navis  longa,  man-of-war 
ne,  conj.  and  adv.  in  order  that  not, 

that  (with  verbs  of  fearing),  lest; 

not.   ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not  even 
-ne,  interrog.  adv.,  enclitic  (see  §§  16, 

210).    Cf.  nonne  and  num 
nec  or  neque,  conj.  [ne,  not,  +  que, 

and\,  and  not,  nor.   nec  .  .  .  nec  or 

neque  .  .  .  neque,  neither  .  .  .  nor 
necessarius,    -a,    -urn,    adj.    needfod, 

necessary 
neco,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [cf.  nex,  death], 

kill.    Cf.  interficio,  occido,  trucido 
negO,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  deny,  say  not 

(§420.  «) 
negotium,  nego'ti,  n.  [nec,  not,  +  otium, 

ease],  business,  affair,  Tnatter.    alicui 

negotium  dare,  to  employ  some  one 
Nemaeus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Neme'an,  of 

Neme'a,  in  southern  Greece 
nemo,  dat.  nemini  (gen.  nuUius,  abl. 

nuUo,  supplied  from  nuUus),  m.  and 

f.   [ne,   not,  +  homo,   man],   {not  a 

man),  no  one,  nobody 
Neptunus,  -i,  m.  Neptune,  god  of  the 

sea,  brother  of  Jupiter 
neque,  see  nec 
neuter,  -tra,  -trum  (gen.  -trius,  dat. 

-tri),  adj.  neither  (of  two)  (§  108) 
ne-ye,  conj.  adv.  and  not,  and  that  not, 

and  lest 
nihil,  n.  indecl.  [ne,  not,  +  hilum,  a 

whit],  nothing,   nihil  posse,  to  have 

no  power 


num 
nihilum,  -i,  n.,  see  nihil 
Niobe,  -es,  f.  Ni'obe,  the   queen   of 

Thebes  whose   children  were   de- 
stroyed by  Apollo  and  Diana 
nisi,  conj.  [ne,  not,  +  si,  if],  if  not, 

unless,  except 
nobilis,  -e,  adj.  well  known ;  noble 
noceo,  -ere,  -ui,  -iturus  [cf.  neco,  kill], 

hurt,  injure,  with  dat.  (§  501. 14) 
noctii,  abl.  used  as  adv.  [cf.  nox,  night], 

at  night,  by  night 
Nola,  -ae,  f.  Nola,  a  town  in  central 

Campania.    See  map 
nol5,  nolle,  nolui, [ne,  not,  +  volo, 

wish],  not  to  wish,  be  unwilling{  §  497 ) 
nomen,   -inis,   n.    [cf.    nosco,  know], 

[means  of  knowing),  name 
nomino, -are,  -avi,  -atus  [n5men,  name], 

name,  call.    Cf.  appello,  voco 
non,  adv.  [ne,  not,  +  unum,  one],  not. 

non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  not  only 

.  .  .  but  also 
non-dum,  adv.  not  yet 
non-ne,  interrog.  adv.  suggesting  an 

affirmative  answer,  «d7/.?  (§210).  Cf. 

-ne  and  num 
nos,  pers.  pron.  we  (see  ego)  (§  480) 
noster,   -tra,   -trum,   possessive    adj. 

and  pron.  our,  ours.    Plur.   nostri, 

-orum,  m.  our  men  (§  98) 
novem,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  nine 
novus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  new.   novae  res,  a 

revolution 
nox,  noctis,  f.  night.   multS  nocte,  late 

at  night 
nullus,  -a,  -um  (gen,  -ius,  dat.  -i)  adj. 

[ne,  not,  +  uUus,  any],  not  any,  none, 

no  (§  108) 
num,  interrog.  adv.  suggesting  a  neg- 
ative  answer   (§210).    Cf.  -ne  and 

nonne.    In  indir.  questions,  whether 


319 


nmnenis 
nomenis,  -i,  m.  number 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 

orior 
Omi^nO,  adv.  [omnia,  a//],  altogether^ 


numquam,  adv.  [ni,  not,  +  umquam, 

rfer\,  never 
nunc,  adv.  now.   Cf.  iam 
nuntid,  -ire,  -*vi,  -fttus  [nflntius,  nus- 

senger\y  report,  announce  (§  i^-^    '^ 
nuntius,  nOnti,  m.  messenger 
nup>er,  adv.  recently,  lately,  jus i  now 
nympha,  -ae,  f.  nymph 


ob,  prep,  with  ace.  on  account  of.    In 

compounds  it  often  means  in  front 

of,  against,  or  is  intensive,  quam  ob 

xvcdy  for  this  reason  (§  340) 
obses,  -idis,  m.  and  f.  hostage 
ob-side6,-ere,-85di,  -eessna  \p\against, 

+  sedeo,  j//],  besiege 
obtine5,  -€re,  -ui,  -^entus  [ob,  against, 

+  teneo,  ho/<f\,  possess,  occupy,  hold 
occasid,  -5iU8,  i.  favorable  opportunity, 

favorable  moment 
occasus,  -us,  m.  going  down,  setting 
occido,  -ere,  -cidi,  -cisus  [ob,  down,  ■\- 

caedo,  strike],  strike  doton  ;  cut  down, 

kill.   Cf.  interfidS,  neo5 
0ccup5,  -ftre,  -ivi,  -itoa  [ob,  completely, 

4-  capio,  take],  seize,  take  possession 

of,  occupy.    Cf.  rapid 
oc-curr6,  -ere,-carri,-cur8U8[ob,dr^mj/, 

-f-  carr5,  run],  run  towards ;  meet, 

with  dat  (§  426) 
5ceanu8,  -i,  m.  the  ocean 
0Ct6,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  eight 
oculus,  -i,  m.  eye 
officium,  offl'cl,  n.  duty 
Slim,  adv.  formerly^  once  upon  a  time 
Omen,  -inia,  n.  sign,  token,  omen 
0-mitt6,  -ere,  -mial,  -fniaaoa  [ob,  over, 

past,  4-  mittd,   send],  let  go,  omit. 

cdnailiom  omittare,  give  up  a  plem 


wholly,  entirely 
omnis,  -e,  adj.  all,  every.    Cf.  tStua 
oneraria,   -ae,  f.   [onus,  load],  with 

n4vi8    expressed    or    understood, 

merchant  vessel,  transport 
onus,  -eris,  n,  locui,  burden 
opinid,   -dnia,    f.    [opinor,    suppose], 

opinion,  supposition,  expectation 
oppidanus,  -i,  m.   [oppidum,   town], 

townsman 
oppidum,  -i,  n.  town,  stronghold 
opportiinus,  -a,   -um,   adj.   suitable, 

opportune,  favorable 
op-primo,  -ere,  -preaai,  -preaaua  [ob, 

against,  -f-  premd,    press'\,     {press 

against),  crush  ;  surprise 
oppugnatio,  -onis,  f.  storming,  assault 
oppugno,  -ire,  -ftvi,  -itua  [ob,  against, 

■\-  '^\x^gBSi,fight],fight again st,  assault. 

stonn,  assail 
optime,  adv.  in  superl.  degfree,  com- 
pared bene,  melius,  optimi,  very  well, 

best  of  all  (§  323) 
optimus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  in  superl.  de- 
gree, compared  bonua,  melior,  opti- 

mus,  best,  most  excellent  (§311) 
opus,    -eris,     n.    work,     labor,     task 

(§  464.  2.  b) 
6raculum,  -i,  n.  [5r6,  speak],  oracle 
Orator,  -oris,  m.  [6r5,  speak],  orator 
orbis,  -ia,  m.  ring,  circle,   orbia  terri- 

mm,  the  earth,  world 
orbita,  -ae,  f.  [orbia,  wheel],  rut 
Orcua,  -i,  m.  Ortus,  the  lower  woHd 
OrdS,    -inia,     m.     row^    order,    rank^ 

(§  247.  2.  a) 
orfgO,   -inia,    f.    [orior,   rise\,  source, 

origin 
orior,  -Iri,  ortua  sum,  dep.  verb,  arise, 

rise ;  begin  ;  spring,  be  bom 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


320 

omamentum 
drnamentum,    -i,    n.   [orno,  //  out], 

ornament,  jewel 
ornatus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part  of  orno, 

fit  out],  fitted  out ;  adorned 
orno,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,yf/  out,  adorn 


P.,  abbreviation  for  Publius 
paene,  adv.  nearly,  almost 
paliidamentum,  -i,  n.  military  cloak 
palus,  -udis,  f.  S7vamp,  marsh 
panis,  -is,  m.  bj-ead 
par,  paris,  adj.  equal  (§  471.  iii) 
paratus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  paro, 

prepare], prepared,  ready 
parco,  -ere,  peper''ci  (parsi),  parsurus, 

spare,  with  dat.  (§501.  14) 
pareo,  -ere,  -ui,  ,  obey,  with  dat. 

(§501-14) 

paro,  -are,  -avi,  -dXns^  prepare  for,  pre- 
pare; provide,  procure 

pars,  partis,  f.  part,  share;  side, 
direction 

panim,  adv.,  compared  minus,  minime, 
too  little,  not  enough  (§323) 

parvus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  compared  minor, 
minimus,  small,  little  (§311) 

passus,  -us,  m.  step,  pace,  mille  pas- 
suum,  thousand  paces,  mile  (331.  <^) 

pateo,  -ere,  patui,  ,  lie  open,  be 

open  ;  stretch,  extend 

pater,  -tris,  m.  father  (§  464.  2.  a) 

patior,  -i,  passus  sum,  dep.  verb,  bear, 
suffer,  allow,  permit 

patria,  -ae,  f.  [cf.  ^qXax,  father],  father- 
land, {one^s)  country 

paucus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  (generally  plur.), 
few,  only  afeiv 

paulisper,  adv.>r«  little  while 

paulo,  adv.  by  a  little,  little 

paulum,  adv.  a  little,  somewhat 


per-suade5 
pax,  pads,  f.  (no  gen.  ^^\\xx.),  peace 
pecunia,  -ae,  f.  [pecus,  cattle],  mo7tey 
pedes,  -itis,  m.  \^ls,  foot],  foot  soldier 
pedester,  -tris,  -tre,  adj.  ]j^lB,foot],  on 

foot;  by  land 
peior,  peius,  -oris,  adj.  in  comp.  de 
gree,  compared  malus,  peior,  pessi- 
mus,  worse  (§311) 
pellis,  -is,  f.  skin,  hide 
penna,  -ae,  i.  feather 
per,    prep,    with    ace.    through,    by 
means  of  on  account  of    In  com- 
position it  often  has  the  force  of 
thoroughly,  completely,  very  (§340) 
percussus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  per- 

cutio,  strike  through],  pierced 
per-duco,   -ere,    -duxi,    -ductus    [{)er, 
through,  -f  duco,  lead],  lead  throug/i. 
fossam  perducere,  to  construct  a  ditch 
per-exiguus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [per,  ve?y,  + 
exiguus,  small] ,  very  small,  very  short 
perfidus,  -a,  -um,  did],  faithless,  treach- 
erous, false 
per-fringo,  -ere,  -fregi,  -fractus  [per, 

through,  +  frango,  break],  shatter 
pergo,  -ere,   perrexi,   perrectus    [per, 
through,  +  rego,   conduct],  go   on, 
proceed,  hasten 
periculum,  -i,  n.  trial,  test;  danger 
peristylum,  -i,  n.  peristyle,  an  open 

court  with  columns  around  it 
peritus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  skillful 
perpetuus,  -a,  -um,  did],  perpetual 
Perseus,  -ei,  Perseus,  a  Greek  hero, 

son  of  Jupiter  and  Danae 
persona,  -ae,  f .  part,  character,  person 
per-suadeo,  -ere,  -suasi,  -suasus  [per, 
thoroughly,  +  suadeo,  persuade],  per- 
suade, advise,  with  dat.  (§  501.  14), 
often  with  an  object  clause  of  pur- 
pose (§  501.41) 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


321 


per-terre^) 

per-terreO,  -«re,  -oi,  -itus  [p«r,  thor- 
oughly., +  terre<5,  frighten^,  thor- 
oughly terrify,  alarm 

per-vcniS,  -ire,  -vSnl,  -yentus  [per, 
through,  +  ytv^fComt],  arrive,  rtiuht 
conu  to 

p€8,  pedis,  m./oot.  pedem  referre,  re- 
treat  (§247.  2.  a) 

pessimus,  -a,  -nm,  adj.  in  superl.  de- 
gree, compared  malus,  peior,  pessi- 
mus, worst  (§31 1) 

pets,  -«re,  -ivi  or  -ii,  -itus,  strive  for, 
seek,  beg,  ask ;  make  for,  travel  to. 
V{.  postul5,  quaerS,  rogd 

Pharsalus,  -i,  f.  Pharsa'lus  or  Pharsa'- 
lia,  a  town  in  Thessaly,  near  which 
Caesar  defeated  Pompey,  48  B.C. 

philosophia,  -ae,  {.philosophy 

philosophus,  -i,  m.  philosopher 

pictus,  -a,  -urn,  adj.  [part,  of  pingS, 
paint],  colored,  variegated 

pTlum,  -i,  n.  spear,  javelin  (§462.^) 

piscina,  -ae,  f.  [pi8cis,/j/4],/j-4  pond 

piscis,  -is,  va.fish 

pistor,  -oris,  m.  baker 

placed,  -€re,  -a!,  -itXLS,  please,  be  pleas- 
ing, with  dat.  (§  501. 14) 

planities,  -«i,  f.  [pUnus,  level],  plain 

planus,  -a,  -am,  adj.  level,  flat 

plenus,  -a,  -um,  adj./«// 

pliirimiun,  adv.  in  superl.  degree, 
compared  multum,  plus,  plflrimtun, 
very  m  uch .  plflrimum  valtre,  be  most 
influential  (§  322) 

plurimns,  -a,  -am,  adj.  in  superl.  de- 
gree, compared  maltos,  plQs,  plOri- 
mas,  most,  very  many  (§311) 

pliia,  plOris,  adj.  in  comp.  degree, 
compared  maltua,  plfls,  plOrimns; 
ting.  n.  as  substantive,  m^re;  plur. 
more,  several  (J  31 0 


potentia 
pluteus,  -I,  m.  shield,  parapet 
poena,  -ae,  {.  punishment, penalty 
poeta,  -ae,  m.  poet 
pompa,  -ae,  i.  procession 
Pompeii,  -drum,  m.  Pompeii,  a  city  of 

Campania.    See  map 
Pompeius,    Pomp6l,    m.    Pompey,    a 

Roman  name 
pomum,  -i,  n.  apple 
pon5,  -ere,  posui,  positus,  put,  place. 

castra  ponere,  pitch  camp 
pdns,  pontis,  m.  bridge  (§  247.  2.  a) 
popina,  -ae,  f.  restaurant 
populus,  -i,  m.  people 
Porsena,   -ae,   m.   Porsena,   king    of 

Etruria,  a  district  of  Italy.   See  map 
porta,  -ae,  f.  gate,  door 
porto,  -ire,  -avi,  -atus,  bear,  carry 
portus,  -us,  m.  [of.  porta, ^/<f],  harbor 
possideo,   -ere,    -sedi,   -sessus,    have, 

07vn,  possess 
possum,  posse,  potui, ,  irreg.  verb 

[potis, able, -f-  sum, I am\,be able, can 

(§  495).   nihil  posse,  have  no  power 
post,    prep,   with    ace.  after,  behind 

(§340) 
postea,  adv.  [post,  after,  4-  ei,  this\, 

afterwards 
(posterns),  -a,   -um,  adj.,   compared 
^  postenor,   postremus    or    postumua, 

following,  next  (§312) 
postqoam,  conj.  after,  as  soon  as 
postrem5,    adv.    [abl.   of    postrSmus, 

last],  at  last,  finally.    Cf.  demum, 

denique  (§  322) 
postridig,  adv.  [posters,  next,  -|-  dii, 
.    day],  on  the  next  day 
postulft,  -ire,  -ivi,  -itos,  ask,  demand, 

require.    Cf.  pet6,  quaerd,  rogS 
potentia,  -ae,  f.  [potSns,  able],  might, 
force 


322 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


prae-be5 

prae-beo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itus  [prae,  yi>r;?/4, 
+  habeo,  hold},  offer,  give 

praeda,  -ae,  f,  booty,  spoil,  plunder 

prae-dico,  -ere,  -dixi,  -dictus  [prae, 
before,  +  dico,  teW},  foretell,  predict 

prae-ficio,  -ere,  -feci,  -fectus  [prae, 
before,  +  facio,  make'\,  place  in  com- 
mand,yf\th.  ace.  and  dat  (§  501. 15) 

prae-mitto,  -ere,  -misi,  -missus  [prae, 
forward,  +  mitto,  send},  send  for- 
ward 

praemium,  praemi,  n.  reward,  prize 

praeruptus,  -a,  -um  [part,  of  prae- 
rumpo,  b7-eak  off],  broken  off,  steep 

praesens,  -entis,  adi.present,  immediate 

praesertim,  adv.  especially,  chiefly 

praesidium,  praesi''di,  n.  guard,  gar- 
rison, protection 

prae-sto,  -are,  -stiti,  -stitus  [prae,  be- 
fore, +  sto,  stand},  (stand  before), 
excel,  surpass,  with  dat  (§  501.  15) ; 
show,  exhibit 

prae-sum,  -esse,  -ful,  -futfirus  [prae, 
before,-\-%yxn\.^  be},  be  over,  be  in  com- 
mand of  ,  with  dat.  (§  501. 15) 

praeter,  prep,  with  ace.  beyond,  con- 
trary to  (§  340) 

praeterea,  adv.  [praeter,  besides,  +  ea, 
this},  in  addition,  besides,  moreover 

praetextus,  -a,  -tun,  adj.  bordered,  edged 

praetorium,  praet6''ri,  n.  pmtorium 

prandium,  prandi,  n.  luncheon 

prem5,  -ere,  pressi,  pressus,  press 
hard,  compress;  crowd,  drive,  harass 

(prex,  precis),  i.  prayer 

prim5,  adv.  [primus, /»y/],  at  first,  in 
the  beginning  {§  322) 

primum,  adv.  [primus,  first},  first. 
quam  primum,  as  soon  as  possible 

primus,  -ft,  -um,  adj.  in  superl.  degree, 
compared  prior,  primu«,yf rj/  (5  315) 


pr5-pell5 
princeps,  -cipis,  m.  [primus,  ^rr/,  -|- 

capio,  take},  {taking  the  first  place)., 

chief,  leader  (§  464.  i) 
prior,  prius,  -oris,  adj.  in  comp.  degree, 

superl.  primus, y^?7w^r  (§  315) 
pristinus,  -a,  -um,  Sid].  former^  previ- 
ous 
pro,  prep,  with  abl.  before;  for,  for 

the  sake  of,  in  behalf  of;  instead  of, 

as  (§  209)..    In  composition,  forth, 

forward 
pro-cedo,  -ere,  -cessi,  -cessurus  [pro, 

forward,  +  cedo,  go},  go  forward, 

proceed 
procul,  adv.  far,  afar  off 
pro-curro,  -ere,  -curri  (-cucurri),  -cur- 

sus  [SiXO,  forward,  +  curro,  run},  run 

forward 
proelium,    proeli,    n.    battle,    combat. 

proelium     committere.    Join    battle. 

proelium  facere,  fight  a  battle 
profectiS,  -onis,  f.  departure 
proficiscor,  -i,  -fectus  sum,  dep.  verb, 

set  out,  march.    Cf.  egredior,  exeo 
pro-gredior,  -i,  -gressus  sum,  dep.  verb 

\$ro,  forth,  +  gT^SL^ox^  go},  go  forth, 

proceed,  advance.    Cf.  pergo,  pr5ced5 
progressus,  see  progredior 
prohibeo,  -ere,  -ui,  -itus  [pr6,  forth, 

away  from,  +  habeo,  hold},  keep  away 

from,  hinder,  prevent 
pr5-move5,  -ere,  -movi,  -m5tus  [pro, 

forward,  +  moved,  move},  move  for- 
ward, advance 
pr5-nunti6, -are, -ivi, -atus  [pr5,^^>i, 

■\-nnriXiOfannounce},proclaim, declare 
prope,  adv.,  compared  propius,  proxi- 

me,  nearly.    Prep,  with  ace.  near 
pr6-pell6,    -ere,    -puli,    -pulsus    [pro, 

forth,  +  pello,  drive},  drive  forth; 

move,  impel 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


323 


properd 
proper^,   -Are,   -4vi,  -Atus   [propenis, 

i/uiik]y  go  quickly,  hasten.  Cf.  con- 
tendo,  mdturo 

propinquus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [prope,  near\y 
near,  neighboring 

propior,  -ius,  -^ris,  adj.  in  comp.  de- 
gree,    superl.     proximus,     fuunr 

(§3'S) 
propius,  adv.  in  comp.  degree,  com- 
pared prope,  propiu8,proxim8,«/r<j?rr 

(§323) 

propter,  prep,  with  ace.  on  account 
of,  because  0/ {%  T^AO) 

pro-scribo,  -ere,  -scripsi,  -scriptus  [pro, 
forth,  4-  scTibdf  7arite], />rvc/aim,pub- 
lish.    Cf.  proDuntio 

pr5-sequor,  -sequi,  -secfltus  sum,  dep. 
verb  [pr6,  forth,  -f  sequor,  follow^ 
escort,  attend 

pr5-sum,  prodesae,  profui,  prSfutflrus 
[pr6,yt;r,  -f  sum,  be\,  be  useful^  bene- 
fit, with  dat.  (§§496;  hoi.x^) 

pr5-teg6,  -ere,  -t6xi,  -tSctus  [pr6,  in 
front,  +  tego,  co'i)er\,  cover  in  front, 
protect 

pr5yincia,  -ae,  f.  territory^  province 

proxime,  adv.  in  superl.  degree,  com- 
pared prope,  propius,  proximS,  near- 
est, next;  last,  most  recently  (§323) 

proximus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  in  superl.  de- 
gree, compared  propior,  proximus, 
nearest ^  next  (§315) 

piiblicuB,  -ft,  -um,  adj.  [populus, /^o- 
ple\,  of  the  people^  public.  rJa  pfl- 
blica,  the  commonwealth 

puella,  -ae,  f.  [diminutive  of  puer, 
boy\,  girl,  maiden 

puer,  -eri,  m.  boy;  slave  (§ 462. c) 

pugna,  -ae,  i. fight,  battle.  Cf.  proeliom 

pugn5,  -ire,  -4vi,  -itua  [pugoa,  battle], 
fight,    Cf.  oontendo,  dimico 


qui 


pulcher,  -chra,  -chrum,  adj.  beautiful^ 

pretty  (§§469-^;  304) 
Pullo,  -onis,  m.  Pullo,  a  centurion 
pulso,  -are,  -avi,  -fttus,  strike,  beat 
puppis,  -is  (ace.  -im,  abl.  -i),  f.  stem 

of  a  ship,  deck 
piire,  adv.  [puru8,/«^],  comp.  pOriua, 

purely 
purgo,  -are,  -4vi,  -Atua,  cleanse,  clean 
purpureas,  -a,  -um,  adj.  purple,  dark 

red 
put5,  -Ire,  -avi,  -atus,  reckon,  think 

(§  420,  r).    Cf.  arbitror,  existimd 
Pythia,  -ae,  f.  Pythia,  the  inspired 

priestess  of  Apollo  at  Delphi 


qua  de  causa,  for  this  reason^  where- 
fore 

qua  re,  therefore,  for  this  reason 

quaerd,  -ere,  -sivi,  -situs,  seek,  ask, 
inquire.    Cf.  peto,  postuld,  rogo 

qualis,  -e,  interrog.  pronom.  adj.  of 
what  sort,  what  kind  of.  talis  .  .  . 
quaiis,  such  .  .  .  as 

quam,  adv.  how;  after  a  compara- 
tive, than ,'  with  a  superlative,  trans- 
lated as  .  .  .  cu  possible,  quam  prl- 
mum,  as  soon  as  possible 

quantus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [quam,  how], 
how  great,  hortv  much,  tantus  .  .  . 
quantus,  as  great  as 

quartus,  -a,  -um,  numeral  adj.  [quat- 
ttior ,  fou  r] ,  fou  rth 

quattuor,  indecl.  numeral  ad'],  four 

quattuor-decim,  indecl.  numeral  adj. 
fourteen 

-que,  conj.,  enclitic,  and  (§16).  Cf 
ac,  atque,  et 

qui,  quae,  quod,  rel.  pron.  and  adj 
who,  which,  what,  that  ($  4S2) 


324 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


quia 
quia,  conj.  because.    Cf.  quod 
quidam,  quaedam,  quiddam  (quoddam), 
indef.  pron.  and  adj.  a  certain  one, 
a  certain,  a  (§  485) 
quidem,  adv.  to  be  sure,  certainly,  in- 
deed,    ne  .  .  .  quidem,  7wt  even 
quies,  -etis,  f.  rest,  repose 
quietus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  quiet,  restful 
quindecim,  indecl.  numeral  2^6.).  fifteen 
quingenti,  -ae,  -a,  numeral  adj.  five 

hundred 
quinque,  indecl.  numeral  adj.yfz/^ 
quintus,  -a,  -um,  numeral  did],  fifth 
quis  (qui),  quae,  quid  (quod),  interrog. 
pron.  and  adj.  who  ?  what  ?  which  ? 

(§483) 
quis  (qui),   qua   (quae),  quid  (quod), 

indef.  pron.  and  adj.,  used  after  si, 

nisi,  ne,  num,  anyone,  anything,  some 

one,  something,  any,  some  (§  484) 
quisquam,  quicquam  or  quidquam  (no 

fern,  or  plur.),  indef.  pron.  any  07te 

(at  all),  anything  (at  all)  (§  486) 
quisque,  quaeque,  quidque  (quodque), 

indef.  pron.  and  adj.  each,  each  one, 

every  (§  484) 
quo,  interrog.  and  rel.  adv.  whither, 

where 
quo,  conj.  in  order  to,  that,  with  comp. 

degree  (§  350) 
quod,  conj.  because,  in  that.    Cf.  quia 
quoque,  conj.,  following  an  emphatic 

word,  also,  too.    Cf.  etiam 
quot-annis,  adv.  [quot,  how  many  + 

annus,  year\  every  year,  yearly 
quotiens,  interrog.  and  rel.  adv.  how 

often  ?  as  often  as 


radix,  -Icis,  f .  root ;  foot 

rapi5,  -ere,  -ui,  ^tus,  seize,  snatch 


re-linqu6 
rar5,  adv.  [rarus,  rare^,  rarely 
rarus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  7-are 
re-    or   red-,    an   inseparable   prefix, 

again,  back,  anew,  in  return 
rebellio,  -onis,  f.  renewal  of  war,  rebel- 
lion 
recens,  -entis,  adj.  recent 
re-cipio,  -ere,  -cepi,  -ceptus  [re-,  back, 

+  capio,  take\,  take  back,  receive,   se 

recipere,  withdraw,  retreat 
re-clinatus,  -a,  -xun,  part,  of  recline, 

leaniftg  back 
re-creatus,   -a,   -um,  part,  of  recreo, 

refreshed 
rectus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  rego,  keep 

straight^,  straight,  direct 
re-ciiso,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  refuse 
red-actus,  -a,  -um,  part,  of  redigo,  re- 
duced, subdued 
red-€0,  -ire,  -ii,  -itus  [red-,  back,  +  eo, 

gd\,  go  back, return  (^^x-}^).  Cf.revertS 
reditus,  -us,   m.    [cf.  redeo,  return], 

return,  going  back 
re-duco,  -ere,  -duxi,  -ductus  [re-,  back, 

+  duco,  lead},  lead  back 
re-fero,  -ferre,  rettuli,  -latus  [re-,  back, 

+  f  ero,  bear'\ ,  bear  back  ;  report,  pedem 

referre,  withdraw,  retreat 
re-ficio,  -ere,  -feci,  -fectus  [re-,  again, 

+  facio,  make],  make  again,  repair. 

se  reficere,  refresh  one's  self 
regina,  -ae,  f.  [rex,  king\,  queen 
regio,  -onis,  f.  region,  district 
regnum,  -i,  n.  sovereignty ;  kingdom 
rego,  -ere,  rexi,  rectus  [cf.  rex,  king\, 

govern,  rule  (§  490) 
re-icio,  -ere,  -ieci,  -iectus  [re-,  back,  -}- 

iacio,  hurl],  hurl  back;  throw  away 
re-linquo,  -ere,  -liqui,  -lictus  [re-,  be- 
hind, +  linquo,  leave],  leave  behind^ 

leave,  abandon 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


325 


reliquus 

reliquus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [cf.  relinqu5, 
/tii7Y],  left  tmer,  remaining.  As  a 
noun,  plur.  the  rest 

remdtus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  re- 
mo  veo,  remove^  remote,  distant 

re-move6,  -ere,  -movi,  -motus  [re-,  hacky 
-I-  mo  veo,  move\  remove 

remus,  -i,  m.  oar 

re-perio,  -ire,  repperi,  repertu8,yf«^ 

re-porto,  -Are,  -«vi,  -atus  [re-,  back, 
+  ports,  carry],  carry  back,  bring 
back,  win,  gain 

res,  rei,  f.  thing,  business,  matter,  deed, 
event,  circumstance  (§  467 ) .  quam  ob 
rem,  for  this  reason.  rSs  adversae, 
adversity.  r§8  frumentlria,  grain 
supplies.  rSs  gestae,  exploits.  rSs 
milit&ris,  science  of  war.  rSs  piiblica, 
the  commr'——'''-  rSs  secundae, 
prosperity 

re-8cixid5,  -ere,  -semi,  -scissus  [re-, 
back,  -\-  scindo,  cut],  cut  off,  cut 
down 

re-8ist5,  -ere,  -etiti, [re-,   back, 

■\-  8i8t5,  ccutse  to  stand],  oppose,  re- 
sist, with  dat.  (§  501.  14) 

re-spondeo,  -€re,  -spondi,  -sponsus 
(re-,  in  return,  ■\-  spondeo,  premise], 
answer,  reply  (§  420.  a) 

re-Tert6,  -ere,  -I, ,  or  dep.  verb 

re-vertor,  -i,  -«us  sum  [re-,  back,  -\- 
verto,  turn],  turn  back,  return.  Usu- 
ally active  in  the  pcrf.  system 

re-vinci6,  -ire,  -vinxi,  -vfnctas  [re-, 
back,  -f-  vincid,  bind],  fasten 

rex,  rJgia,  m.  [cf.  regS,  rule],  king 

Rhenus,  -i,  m.  the  /Chine,  a  river  of 
Cicrmany 

ripa,  -ae,  f.  banh 

rogS,  -ire,  -tvi,  -4tua,  ask.  Cf.  petS, 
poatulo,  quaarS 


sapiens 
R5ma,  -ae,  f.  Rome.    See  map 
RSmanus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [Rdma,  Rome], 

Roman,   follows    its    noun.     As    a 

noun,  m.  and  f.  a  Roman 
rosa,  -ae,  f.  rose 
rdstmm,  -i,   n.  beak  of  a   ship.    In 

plur.,  the  rostra,  the  speaker's  stand 

in  the  Roman  Forum 
rota,  -ae,  f.  wheel 
Rubico,  -onis,  m.  the  Rubicon,  a  river 

in  northern  Italy.  See  map 
riimor,  -oris,  m.  report,  rumor 
riirsus,    adv.    [for    reversus,    turned 

back],  again,  tn  turn 
riis,  ruris  (locative  abl.  rflri,  no  gen., 

dat.,  or  abl.  plur.),  n.  the  country 

(§  501-  36. 1).   Cf.  ager,  patria,  terra 


Sabinus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  Sabine.  As  a 
noun,  m.  and  f.  a  Sabine.  The 
Sabines  were  an  ancient  people  of 
central  Italy.    See  map 

sacnun,  -i,  n.  [sacer,  consecrated], 
something  consecrated,  sacrifice  ;  usu- 
ally in  plur.,  religious  rites 

saepe,  adv.,  compared  saepius,  sae- 
pissime,  often,  frequently 

saevus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  cruel^  savage 

sagitta,  -ae,  f.  arrow 

salio,  -ire,  -ui,  saltus,y«m/ 

saliis,  -utis,  f.  safety;  health,  salfl- 
tem  dicere,  send  greetings 

salutd,  -&re,  -Avi,  -AtusXsalfla,  kealtk], 
greet,  salute 

salve,  imv.  of  salved,  hail,  greetings 

sanguis,  -inis,  m.  blood  (§  247.  2.  a) 

s&nitas,  -itit,  f.  [ainos,  sound]^  healthy 
sanity 

sapiens,  -entis,  adj.  [part,  of  sapid, 
be  wise],  wise,  sensibU 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


326 

satis 

satis,  adv.  and  indecl.  noun,  enough^ 
sufficient,  sufficiently 

saxum,  -i,  n.  rock,  stone 

scelus,  -eris,  n.  crime,  sin 

sceptrum,  -i,  n.  scepter 

schola,  -ae,  f.  school,  the  higher 
grades.    Cf.  ludus 

scientia,  -ae,  f.  [sciens,  knowing\, 
skill,  knowledge,  science 

scindo,  -ere,  scidi,  scissus,  cut,  tear 

scio,  -ire,  -ivi,  -itus,  know  (§420.  (5). 
Cf.  cognosco 

scribo,  -ere,  scripsi,  scriptus,  write 

scutum,  -i,  n.  shield,  buckler 

se,  see  sui 

secum  =  se  +  cum 

secundus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [sequor,y27//^w], 
followitig,  next,  second ;  favorable, 
successful,    res  secundae,  prosperity 

sed,  conj.  but,  on  the  contrary,  non 
sdlum  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  not  only  .  .  . 
but  also 

sedecim,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  sixteen 

sedeo,  -ere,  sedi,  sessus,  sit 

semper,  adv.  always,  forever 

senatus,  -us,  m.  [cf.  senex,  old'l,  coun- 
cil of  elders,  senate 

sentio,  -ire,  sensi,  squsms,  feel,  know, 
perceive  (§  420.  d ) .   Cf .  intellego,  vide5 

septem,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  seven 

Septimus,  -a,  -um,  numeral  adj. 
seventh 

sequor,  -i,  secutus  sum,  dep.  verb, 
follow  (§  493) 

serpens,  -entis,  f.  [serpo,  crawl], 
serpent,  snake 

sertae,  -arum,  f.  plur.  wreaths,  gar- 
lands 

servitus,  -utis,  f.  [servus,  slave], 
slavery,  servitude 

servo,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  save,  rescue,  keep 


solvo 
servus,  -i,  m.  slave  ' 
sese,  emphatic  for  se 
sex,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  six 
Sextus,  -i,  m.  Sextus,  a  Roman  first 

name 
si,  conj,  if 

sic,  adv.  thus,  in  this  way.  Cf.  ita,  tam 
Sicilia,  -ae,  f.  Sicily.    See  map 
sic-ut,  just  as,  as  if 
signifer,  -eri,  m.  [signum,  standard,  + 

fero,  bear],  staiidard  bearer  (p.  224) 
signum,  -i,  n.  ensign,  standard ;  sigftal 
silva,  -ae,  f.  wood,  forest 
similis,  -e,   adj.,   compared   similior, 

simillimus,  like,  similar  (§  307) 
simul,  adv.  at  the  same  time 
simul  ac  or  simul  atque,  conj.  as 

soon  as 
sine,   prep,  with  abl.  withotU  (§  209) 
singuli,  -ae,  -a,  distributive  numeral 

adj.  one  at  a  time,  single  (§  334) 
sinister,  -tra,  -trum,  adj.  left 
Sinuessa,  -ae,  f.  Sinues'sa,  a  town  in 

Campania.    See  map 
sitis,  -is  (ace.  -im,  abl.  -i,  no  plur.),  f. 

thirst 
situs,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  sino,  set], 

situated,  placed,  lying 
socius,  soci,  m.  comrade,  ally 
sol,  s51is  (no  gen.  plur.),  m.  sun 
soleo,    -ere,    solitus    sum,    semi-dep. 

verb,  be  wont,  be  accustomed 
sollicitus,    -a,    -um,    adj.    disturbed, 

anxious 
s51um,  adv.  [solus,  alone],  alone,  only. 

non  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam,  not  only 

.  .  .  but  also 
s51us,  -a,  -um  (gen.  -ius,  dat.  -i),  adj. 

alone,  only  (§  108) 
S0lv5,  -ere,  solvi,  solutus,  loosen,  un- 
bind,  navem  solvere,  set  sail 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


327 


8011UIU8 
somnus,  -i,  m.  sleep 
soror,  -oris,  f.  sister 
spatium,    spati,    n. 

time;  ofportunitv 
spectacolttm,  -i,  n    Ispecto, 

shcnv,  spectacle 
spectS,  -»re,  -Avi,  -Atus,  lock  at,  wii- 

ttfSS 

8pcr6,  -ire,  -ivi,   -itus   [spSt,  Aope], 

hipe,  expect  (§  420.  c) 
spes,  spei,  f.  hope  (§  273.  2) 
splendide,     adv.     [splendidus],    com- 
pared   splendidius,    splendidissime, 

spUndiiUy,  handsomely 
splendidus,    -a,    -am,    adj.   brilliant, 

gorgeous,  splendid 
Stabianus,  -a,  -um,  Stabian 
stabulum,  -i,  n.  [cf.  stS,  stand],  stand- 
ing place,  stable,  stall 
statim,  adv.   [cf.  stS,  stand],  on  the 

spot,  at  once,  instantly 
^tatua,    nae,     f.    [sisto,    place,    set], 

iiatue 
statu5,  -ere,  -ui,  -iltua  [status,  station], 

decide,  determine 
"^tilus,  -i,  m.  iron  pencil,  style  (p.  210) 
st5,  -ire,  steti,  status,  stand 
stratus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  stemo, 

spread],  paved  (of  streets) 
strepitus,   -Qs,    m.    [strepd,    make   a 

noise],  noise,  din 
string^,   -ere,  strinzl,  strictus,   bind 

tight;  draw,  unsheathe 
studed,  -*re,  -ol, ,  give  attention 

to,  be  eager,  with  dat.  (§  501.  14) 
studiom,  studl,  n.  [cf.  studed,  be  eager 

/or],  eagerness,  desire,  teal,  devotion 
stultus,  -a,  -um,  Sid).  foolish,  stupid 
Stymphalis,  -idis,  adj.  f.  Stymphalian^ 

of  Siymphaflusf  a  lake  in  southern 

Greece 


super-sum 

Stymphalus,  -I,  m.  Stympha'lus,  a 
district  of  southern  Greece  with 
I  town,  mountain,  and  lake,  all  of 
the  same  name 

8uade5,  -€re,  -si,  -sus,  advise,  recom- 
mend,    with      subjv.     of     purpose 

{§50»-4i) 
sub,  prep,  with  ace.  and  abl.  under, 

below,  up  to ;  at  or  to  the  foot  of 
sub-ig5,  -ere,  -€gi,  -Actus  [sub,  under, 

-f-  ago,  dri7)e],  subdue,  reduce 
subit5,  adv.  [subitus,  sudden],suddenly 
sub-sequor,  -i,  -secutus  sum,  dep.  verb 

[sub,  below,  +  sequor,  follow],  fol- 
low close  after,  follow  up 
8UC-€ed5,   -ere,    -cessi,   -cessus    [sub, 

belo7v,  +  cedo,  go],  folloiu,  succeed 
sui,  reflexive  T^ron.  of  himself  (herself, 

itself,  themselves)  (§480).    sScum  = 

s5  -f  cum.  sSse,  emphatic  form  of  sS 
sum,  esse,  fui,  futurus,  irreg.  verb,  be; 

exist  (§  494) 
summus,    -a,    -um,    adj.    in    superl. 

degree,  compared  superus,  superior, 

suprgmus  or  summus  (§312),  supreme, 

highest;  best, greatest,  in  summo  colle, 

on  the  top  of  the  hill 
sum5,  -ere,  sOmpsi,  sOmptus,  take  up ; 

assume,  put  on.    sfimere  supplidum 

d8,  inflict  punishment  on 
super,  prep,  with  ace.  and  abl.  over, 

above 
superbia,  -ae,   f.    [superbus,  prvud], 

pride,  arrogance 
superbus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  proud^  haughty 
superior,  comp.  of  superus 
super5,    -ire,    -*vi,    -itus    [superus, 

above],  go  over;  subdue,  overcome; 

surpass,  excel 
super-aum,  -esse,  -ful,  ,  kg  over, 

survive,  with  dat  ($  501.15) 


328 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


superus 

superus,  -a,  -um,  adj.,  compared 
superior,  supremus  or  summus,  adove, 
upper  {%  2)^2) 

supplicium,  supplied,  n.  [supplex, 
kneeling  in  entreaty],  punishment, 
torture,  supplicium  sumere  de,  in- 
flict punishment  on.  supplicium 
dare,  suffer  punishment 

surgo,  -ere,  surrexl,  [sub,  froin 

below,  +  rego,  straighten],  rise 

sus-cipio,  -ere,  -cepi,  -ceptus  [sub, 
under,  +  capio,  take],  undertake,  as- 
sume, begin 

suspicor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  dep.  verb, 
suspect,  surmise,  suppose 

sus-tineo,  -ere,  -tinui,  -tentus  [sub, 
under,  +  teneo,  hold],  hold  up,  bear, 
sustain,  withstand 

suus,  -a,  -um,  reflexive  possessive  adj. 
and  pron.,  his,  her,  hersy  its,  their, 
theirs  (§  98) 

T 

T.,  abbreviation  of  Titus 
taberna,  -ae,  f.  shop,  stall 
tabula,  -ae,  f.  tablet  for  writing 
talis,  -e,  adj.  such,    talis  .  .  .  qualis, 

such  .  .  .  as 
tarn,  adv.  so,  such.   Cf.  ita,  sic 
tamen,  adv.  yet,  however,  nevertheless 
tandem,  adv.  at  length,  finally 
tango,  -ere,  tetigi,  tactus,  touch 
tantum,  adv.  [tantus],  only 
tantus,   -a,  -um,   adj.  so  great,  such. 

tantus  .  .  .  quantus,  as  large  as 
tardus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  slow,  late;  lazy 
Tarpeia,  -ae,  f.  Tarpeia  (pronounced 

Tar-pe'ya),  the  maiden  who  opened 

the  citadel  to  the  Sabines 
Tarquinius,    Tarqui'ni,     Tarquin,    a 

Roman   king.    With  the   surname 

Superbus,  Tarquin  the  Proud 


times 
Tarracina,  -ae,  f.  Tarraci'na,  a  town 

in  Latium.    See  map 
taurus,  -i,  m.  bull 
tectus,  -a,  -um,  adj.    [part,  of  tego, 

cover],  covered,  protected 
telum,  -i,  n.  weapon 
temere,  adv.  rashly,  heedlessly 
tempestas,   -atis,   f.    [tempus,  time\ 

storm,  tempest 
templum,  -i,  n.  temple,  shrine 
tempto,  -are,  -avi,-atus,  try,  test;  make 

trial  of,  attempt 
tempus,  -oris,  n.  time  (§  464.  2.  (5).    in 

reliquum  tempus,  y^r  the  future 

teneo,  -ere,  tenui, ,  hold,  keep 

tergum,  -I,  n.  back,    a  tergo,  on  the 

rear,   tergum  vertere,  ret?-eat,flee 
term,  -ae,  -a,  distributive  numeral  adj. 

th7'ee  each,  by  threes  (§  334) 
terra,  -ae,  f.  earth,  ground,  land,   orbis 

terrarum,  the  whole  world 
terror,  -oris,  m.  [cf.  texxeo,  frighten], 

dread,  alarm,  terror 
tertius,  -a,  -um,  numeral  adj.  third 
Teutones,  -um,  m.  the  Teutons 
theatrum,  -i,  n.  theater 
Thebae,  -arum,  f.   Thebes,  a  city  of 

Greece    • 
Thebani,    -orum,    m.     Thebans,    the 

people  of  Thebes 
thermae,  -arum,  f.  plur.  baths 
Thessalia,  -ae,  f.  Thessaly,  a  district 

of  northern  Greece 
Thracia,    -ae,    f.    Thrace,    a    district 

north  of  Greece 
Tiberius,     Tibe'ri,     m.     Tiberius,    a 

Roman  first  name 
tibicen,  -inis,  m.  [cf.  i5bmy pipe], piper, 

flute  player 
timeo,  -ere,  -ui, ,fear,  be  afraid  of. 

Cf.  vereor 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


329 


timor 
timor,  -dris,  m.  [cf.  timed,  fear\yfeary 

litfad,  alarm.    Cf.  metus 
Tiryns,  Tirynthis,  f.  Ti'ryns,  an  an- 
cient   town    in    southern   Greece, 

where  Hercules  served  Eurystheus 
toga,  -ae,  f.  [cf.  tego,  cover],  toga 
tormentum,  -i,  n.  engine  of  war 
totiens,  adv.  so  often,  so  many  times 
lotus,  -a,  -urn  (gen.  -ius,  dat.  -I),  adj. 

all,  the  whole,  entire  {§  108) 
tra-dd,  -ere,  -didi,  -ditua  [trius,  across, 

+  dS,  deliver],  give  «/,  hand  over, 

surrender,  betray 
tTa-duc5,  -ere,  -diixi,  -ductus  [tr&ns, 

across,  +  duc6,  lead],  lead  across 
trah5,  -ere,  trixi,  trJictus,  draw,  pull, 

drag,    multum  ixahtxty  protract,  pro- 
long much 
tra-ici6,-ere,-ifci,-iectus  [trins,  across, 

+  iacio,  hurl],  throw  across;  transfix 
tra-n6,  -ftre,  -ivi,  -itus  [trins,  across, 

+  n6,  sivim],  S7uim  across 
trans,    prep,    with    ace.    across,   over 

(§  340) 
trans-eo,  -ire,  -ii,  -itus  [trins,  across, 

+  eo,  go],  go  across,  cross  (§413) 
trans-figd,  -ere,  -fix!,  -fixus   [trins, 

through,  +  fig6,  drive],  transfix 
transitus, (ace.  -am,  abl.  -fl),  m. 

[cf.    trftnsed,    cross    over],   passage 

across 
trfs,  tria,  numeral  adj.  three  (§  479) 
triduum,  tridui,  n.  [tr^s,  three,  +  dite, 

days],  three  days'  time,  three  days 
triginta,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  thirty 
triplex,  -ids,  adj.  threefold,  triple 
tristis,  -e,  adj.  sad;  severe,  terrible 
tristitia,  -ae,  f.  [titetis,  sad],  sadness, 

sorrow 
triumphs,  -Are,  -4vl,  -ttt;s  [triumphas, 

triumph],  celebrate  a  triumph 


triamphus,  -i,  m.  triumphal  proces- 
sion, triumph,  triumphum  agere, 
celebrate  a  triumph 

trucidO,  -ire,  -4vi,  -itus,  cut  to  pieces, 
slaughter.    Cf.  interficio,  neco,  occido 

tu,  tui  (plur.  v6s),  pars.  pron.  thou, 
you  (§480) 

tuba,  -ae,  f.  trumpet 

Tullia,  -ae,  f.  Tullia,  a  Roman  name 

turn,  adv.  then,  at  that  time 

turris,  -is,  f.  tower  (§  465. 2) 

tutus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  safe 

tuus,  -a,  -um,  possessive  adj.  and  pron. 
your,  yours  (§  98) 


ubi,  rcl.  and  interrog.adv.  -  ■'•       -  ''■•// 

ubique,  adv.  everywhere 

ullus,  -a,  -um  (gen.  -ius,  ciai.  -11,  adj. 

atiy  (§  108) 
ulterior,-ius,-6ri8,  adj.  in  comp..  superl. 

ultimu8,yi//t//<r/-,  more  remote  (§315) 
ultimus,  -a,  -imi,  adj.  in  superl.  de- 
gree (see  v\X»vm)y  farthest  (§315) 
umbra,  -ae,  f.  shade 
umerus,  -i,  m,  shoulder 
umquam,  adv.  ever,  at  any  time 
una,  adv.  [Onus,  one],  in  the  same  place, 

at  the  same  time 
undecimus,-a,-um,  numeral  adj.  [unus, 

one,  +  decimus,  tenth],  eleventh 
nndique,  adv.  from  every  quarter,  #« 

(///  sides,  everywhere 
unus,  -«,  -am   (gen.   -Ius,    dat.   -I), 

numeral  adj.  one;  alone  (§  108) 
urbs,  -is,  f.  city  (§  465.  a) 
urged,  -«re,  onl,  ,  press  upon, 

crowd,  hem  in 
^iXMAy  -I,  m.  wild  ox,  urus 
&sque,  adv.  ail  the  way,  nam 
tMOMf  -flt,  m.  use,  adfmnUige 


330 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


ut 

ut,  conj.  with  the  subjv.  that,  in  order 

that,  that  not  (with  verbs  of  fearing), 

so  that,  to  (§  350.  i) 
uter,  -tra,  -trum  (gen.  -ius,  dat.  -i),  in- 

terrog.  pron.  which  of  two?  which? 

(§  108) 
uterque,    utraque,    utrumque,    indef. 

pron.  each   of  two,   each,   both,     ab 

utraque  parte,  on  both  sides 
utilis,  -e,  adj.  [utor,  use'l,  useful 
utrimque,  adv.  [uterque,  each  of  two'], 

on  each  side,  on  either  hand 
iiva,  -ae,  f.  grape,  bunch  of  grapes 
uxor,  -oris,  f.  wife 


vagina,  -ae,  sheath,  scabbard 

vagor,  -ari,  -atus    sum,    dep.    verb, 

wander 
valeo,  -ere,  -ui,  -iturus,  be  powerftil,  be 

well;  in  the  imperative  as  a  greet- 
ing,/atr^w^//.    plurimum  valere,  have 

the  most  power 
valetudo,   -inis,   f.    [valeo,    be   well], 

health 
validus,  -a,  -um,   adj.   [cf.  valeo,   be 

strong],  strong,  able,  well 
valles,  -is,  f.  valley 
vallum,  -i,  n.  rampart,  earthworks 
varius,  -a,  -um,  adj.  bright-colored 
vasto,  -are,  -avi,  -atus  [vastus,  empty], 

{make  empty),  devastate,  lay  waste 
vectigal,  -alis,  n.  tax,  tribute 
vehementer,   adv.  [vehemens,  eager], 

compared  vehementius,  vehementis- 

sime,  eagerly,  vehemently 
veho,  -ere,  vexi,  vectus,  convey,  carry. 

In  the  passive  often  in  the  sense  of 

ride,  sail 
vel,  conj.  or.    vel .  .  .  rel,  either ...  or. 

Cf.  aut 


Via 
velocitas,  -atis,  f.  [velox,  swift],  swift- 
ness 
vel5x,  -ocis,  adj.  swift,  fleet 
velum,  -i,  n.  sail 
vends,  -ere,  vendidi,  venditus,  sell 
venio,  -ire,  veni,  ventus,  cojtie,  go 
ventus,  -i,  m.  wind 
verbum,  -i,  n.  word,   verba  facere  pro, 

speak  in  behalf  of 
vereor,   -eri,   -itus    sum,    dep.    verb, 

fear;  reverence,  respect  (§493).    Cf. 
.  timeo 
Vergilius,  Vergi^i,  m.  Vergil,  the  poet 

vergo,  -ere, , ,  turn,  lie 

vero,  adv.  [verus,  true],in  truth,  surely; 

conj.  but,  however,    turn  vero,  then 

you  may  be  sure,  introducing  the 

cHmax  of  a  story 
verto,   -ere,   -ti,    -sus,    turn,   change. 

tergum  vertere,  retreat,  flee 
verus,  -a,  -um,  true,  actual 
vesper,  -eri,  m.  evening 
vester,  -tra,  -trum,  possessive  adj.  and 

pron.  your,  yours  (§  98) 
vestigium,   vesti'gi,   n.    [cf.   vestigo, 

track],  footstep,  track,  trace 
vestimentum,  -i,  n.  [vestis,  clothing], 

garment 
vesti5,  -ire,  -ivi,  -itus  [vestis,  clothing], 

■clothe,  dress 
vestis,  -is,  f.  clothing,  attire,  garment, 

robe 
vestitus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [part,  of  vestio, 

clothe],  clothed 
Vesuvius,  Vesu'vi,  m.   Vesuvius,  the 

volcano  near  Pompeii.    See  map 
veteranus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  old,  veteran 
vet5,  -are,  -ui,  -itns,  forbid,  prohibit 
vexo,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  trouble,  annoy 
via,    -ae,   f.   way,   road,   street;   way, 

manner.    Cf.  iter 


LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


331 


viator 
viator,  -oris,  m.  [via],  traveler 
victor,  -oris,  m.  [vinc5,  conquer\,  con- 
queror, victor.    In  apposition,  with 

adj.  force,  victorious 
victSria,  -ae,  f.  [victor,  victor\,  victory 
vicus,  -1,  m.  village 
vided,  -€re,  vidi,  visas,  see,  perceive. 

Pass,  be  seen  ;  seem  (§  420.  t/) 
vigilia,  -ae,  f.  [vigil,  awaJke],  watch.  d6 

tertii  vigiliA,  about  the  third  watch 
viginti,  indecl.  numeral  adj.  twenty 
vilicus,  -i,  m.   [villa,  fann\,  steward, 

overseer  of  a  /arm 
villa,  -ae,  i./ami,  7nlla 
vinciS,  -ire,  vinxi,  vinctus,  hind,  tie, 

fetter 
vincft,     -ere,     vici,     victus,     conquer, 

defeat,  overcome.    Cf.  sabigd,  supero 
vinea,  -ae,  f.  shed  (p.  219) 
vinum,  -i,  n.  wine 
violenter,    adv.    [violentus,    7tiolent\, 

compared  violentius,  violentissime, 

viol  en  tly,  fu  riously 
vir,    viri,    m.    man,  husband;    hero 

(§  462.  c) 
virilis,  -e,  adj.  [vir,  man^,  manly 
virtus,  -fitis,  f.  [vir,  man],  manliness  ; 

courage,  valor;  virtue  (§464.  i) 


vulpes 
vis,   (vis),   f.   strength,  power 

violence  (§  468) 
Vita,  -ae,  f  [cf.  viv5,  live\,  life,  vitam 

agere,  spend  or  pass  life 
vlt5,  -ire,  -Svi,  -Htus,  shun,  avoid 
viv5,  -ere,  vixi, ,  litie.    Cf.  habitd, 

incolo 
vivus,  -a,  -um,  adj.  [cf.  vivo,  live],  alive, 

living 
vix,  adv.  scarcely,  hardly 
voco,  -are,  -avi,  -atus,  call,  summon, 

invite.    Cf.  appelld,  ndmino 
V0I6,  -are,  -avi,  -aturus,  //v 
V0I5,  velle,  volui, ,  irreg.  verb,  will, 

be  ivilling,  wish  (§  497).    Cf.  capiS 
voliimen,  -inis,  n.  roll,  book 
Vorenus,    -i,    m.    Vor/nus,  a    centu- 
rion 
v6s,  pers.  pron.  you  (see  tfi)  (§480) 
votum,  -i,  n.  [neut.  part  of  voveo,  vow], 

V070,  pledge,  prayer 
VOX,  v5ci8,  f.  [cf.  voco,  calf],  voice,  cry  ; 

word 
vulnero,    -are,    -avi,    -atus    [vulnus, 

wound],  7vound,  hurt 
vulnus,  -eris,  n.  wound,  injury . 
vulpes,  -is,  i.fox 


■QUBS  ROMANUS 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


This  vocabulary  contains  only  the  words  used  in  the  English-Latin  exercises.    For 

details  not  given  here,  reference  may  be  made  to  the  Latin-English  vocabulary.   The 

figures  I,  2,  3,  4,  after  verbs  indicate  the  conjugation. 


a,  an,  commonly  not  translated 

able  (be),  possum,  posse,  potui, 

(§495) 
abode,  domicilium,  domical,  n. 
about  [adv.)^  circiter 
about  {prep.),  de,  with  abl. 
about  to,  expressed  by  fut.  act.  part. 
abundance,  copia,  -ae,/. 
across,  trans,  with  cue. 
active,  acer,  acris,  acre 
advance,  progredior,  3 
advantage,  usus,  -us,  m. 
advise,  moneo,  2 
after  {conj.),  postquam ;'  often  expressed 

by  the  per/,  part. 
after  {prep.),  post,  with  ace. 
against,  in,  contra,  with  ace. 
aid,  auxilium,  auxi'll,  n. 
all,  omnis,  -e ;  totus,  -a,  -um  (§  108) 
allow,  patior,  3 
ally,  socius,  sod,  m. 
almost,  paene ;  fere 
alone,unus,-a,-um ;  solus, -a,-uni(§  108) 
already,  iam 
also,  quoque 
always,  semper 
ambassador,  legatus,  -\,m. 
among,  apud,  7vith  ace. 
ancient,  antlquus,  -a,  -um 
iind,  et ;  atque  (ac) ;  -que 


and  so,  itaque 

Andromeda,  Andromeda,  -ae,/". 

angry,  Iratus,  -a,  -um 

animal,  animal,  -alis,  n. 

announce,  nuntio,  i 

annoying,  molestus,  -a,  -um 

another,  alius,  -a,  -ud  (§  109) 

any,  ullus,  -a,  -um  (§  108) 

any  one,  anything,  quisquam,  quic- 

quam  or  quidquam  {§  486) 
appearance,  forma,  -ae,/. 
appoint,  creo,  i 

approach,  adpropinquo,  i,  with  dat. 
are,  used  as  auxiliary,  not  translated ; 

as  a  copula,  sum  (§  494) 
arise,  orior,  4 

arm,  bracchium,  bracchl,  n. 
armed,  armatus,  -a,  -um 
arms,  arma,  -orum,  n.  plur. 
army,  exercitus,  -iis,  m. 
around,  circum,  with  ace. 
arrival,  adventus,  -us,  m. 
arrow,  sagitta,  -ae,/. 
art  of  war,  res  mllitaris 
as  possible,  expressed  by  quam  and 

superl. 
ask,  peto,  3  ;  quaero,  3  ;  rogo,  i 
assail,  oppugns,  i 
at,  in,  with  ace.  or  abl. ;  with  names  of 

towns,  locative  case  or  abl.  without  a 

preposition  (§  268) ;  time  when,  abl. 


332 


ENGLISH-LA  1  IN    VUCAJU  l.ARY 


333 


at  once 
at  once,  statim 
at  the  beginning  of   summer,  inita 

aestatc 
Athens,  Athenae,  -arum,/. 
attack,  impetus,  -us,  m. 
attempt,  conor,  i  ;  tempto,  i 
away  from,  a  or  ab,  with  abl. 

B 

bad,  malus,  -a,  -urn 

baggage,  impedimenta,  -orum,  n.plur. 

bank,  ripa,  -ae,/. 

barbarians,  barbarl,  -orum,  tn.  plur. 

battle,  proelium,proeli,w.;pugnc,-ae^. 

be,  sum  (§494) 

be  absent,  be  far,  absum  (§  494) 

be  afraid,  timeo,  2  ;  vereor,  2 

be  away,  absum  (§  494) 

be  in  command  of,  praesum,  with  dat. 

(§§494.  426) 
be  informed,  certior  fio 
be  off,  be  distant,  absum  (§  494) 
be  without,  egeo,  with  abl.  (§  180) 
beast  (wild),  fera,  -ae,/. 
beautiful,  pulcher,  -chra,  -chrum 
because,  quia ;  quod 
because  of,  propter,  with  ace;  or  abl. 

of  cause  , 

before,  heretofore  {adv.)^  antt  a 
before   {prep.),  ante,   7vith  ate;   pro, 

T.'/M  abl. 
begin,  incipid,  3 

believe,  cred5,  3,  with  dat.  (§153) 
belong  \fi^  predicate  genitive  (§409) 
best,  optimus,  superl.  ^ bonus 
betray,  tradd,  3 
better,  melior,  comp.  <?/" bonus 
between,  inter,  with  a. . 
billow,  ductus,  -us,  m. 
bird,  avis,  -is,/  (§  243.  i) 
blood,  sanguis,  •iois,  m. 


carry 
boat,  navigium,  navi'gT,  n. 
body,  corpus,  -oris,  n. 
bold,  audax,  -acis ;  fortis,  -c 
boldly,  audacter;  fortiter 
boldness,  audacia,  -ae,/ 
booty,  praeda,  -ae,/  [utrumque 

both,  each  {of  two),  uterque,  utraque, 
both  .  .  .  and,  et . . .  et 
boy,  puer,  -eri,  m. 
brave,  fortis,  -e 
bravely,  fortiter 
bridge,  pons,  pontis,  m. 
bright,  clarus,  -a,  -um 
bring  back,  reports,  i 
bring  upon,  Infero,  -ferrc,  -tuli,  -latus, 

li'ith  ace.  and  dat.  (§  426) 
brother,  frater,  -tris,  m. 
building,  aediiicium,  aediii'ci,  //. 
burn,  cremo,  i  ;  incendo,  3 
business,  negotium,  nego'tl,  n. 
but,  however,  autem,  sed 
by,  a,  ab,  with  abl. ;  denoting  means, 

abl.  alone:  sometimes  implied  in  a 

participle 
by  night,  noctu 


Csesar,  Caesar,  -aris,  m. 

calamity,  calamitas.  -atis,  /i 

call,  voco,  I  ;  appello,  i  ;  nomino,  i 

call  together,  convocS,  i 

camp,  castra,  -orum,  n.  plur. 

can,  could,   possum,   posse,   potu!, 

(§495) 

capture,  capio,  3 ;  occupd,  i 
care,  cura,  -ae,  /I 
care  for,  euro,  i 
careftil,  attentus,  -a,  -um 
carefulness,  dlligentia,  -ae,/ 
carry,  ferS,  ferre,  tuli,  latus  (§  498) ; 

ports,  I 


334 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


carry  on 
carry  on,  gero,  3 
cart,  carrus,  -i,  m. 
cause,  causa,  -ae,/. 
cavalry,  equitatus,  -us,  m. 
cease,  cesso,  \~ 
Cepheus,  Cepheus,  -i,  m. 
certain  (a) ,  quidam,  quaedam,  quoddam 

(quiddam)  (§  485) 
chicken,  gallina,  -ae,/. 
chief,  princeps,  -cipis,  m. 
children,  llberl,  -orum,  m.  plnr. 
choose,  deligo,  3 
choose,  elect,  cre5,  i 
citizen,  cTvis,  -is,  m.  and  f.  (§  243.  i ) 
city,  urbs,  urbis,/. 
clear,  clarus,  -a,  -um 
cohort,  cohors,  -rtis,y. 
come,  veni5,  4 
command,     impero,     i,     with     dat. 

{§  45) ;     iubeo,    2 ;    praesum,    with 

dat.    {§426) 
commit,  committo,  3 
commonwealth,  res  publica,  rel  publi- 

cae 
concerning,  de,  with  abl. 
conquer,  super5,  i ;  vinco,  3 
construct  {a  ditch),  perduco,  3 
consul,  consul,  -ulis,  m. 
contrary  to,  contra,  with  ace. 
Corinth,  Corinthus,  -T,/. 
Cornelia,  Cornelia,  -ae,/. 
Cornelius,  Cornelius,  Corne'lT,  tn. 
corselet,  lorTca,  -ae,/. 
cottage,  casa,  -ae,/ 
country,  as  distingtcished  from  the  city., 

rus,  ruris,  n.\  as  territory,  fJnes,-ium, 

ni.,plur.  </ finis 
courage,  virtus,  -utis,/ 
crime,  scelus,  -eris,  n. 
cross,  transeo,  4  (§  499) 
crown,  corona,  -ae,/. 


dwelling 

D 

daily,  cotldie 

danger,  periculum,  -i,  n. 

daughter,  filia,  -ae,/  (§.67) 

day,  dies,  -ei,  m. 

daybreak,  prima  lux 

dear,  carus,  -a,  -um 

death,  mors,  mortis,/ 

deed,  res,  rei,/ 

deep,  altus,  -a,  -um 

defeat,  calamitas,  -atis,/ 

defend,  defends,  3 

delay  (noun),  mora,  -ae,/ 

delay  [verb),  moror,  i 

demand,  postulo,  i 

dense,  densus,  -a,  -um 

depart,  discedo,  3 ;  exe5,  4 ;  profi- 
ciscor,  3 

dependent,  cliens,  -entis,  m. 

design,  consilium,  consi'li,  n. 

desire,   cupio,  3 

destroy,  deleo,  2 

Diana,  Diana,  -ae,/ 

differ,  differs,  differre,  distuli,  dilatus 
(§498) 

different,  dissimilis,  -e 

di£&cult,  difficilis,  -e 

difficulty,  diffrcultas;   atis,/ 

diligence,  dlligentia,  -ae,/ 

dinner,  cena,  -ae,/ 

disaster,  calamitas,  -atis,/ 

distant  (be),  absum,  -esse,  afu!,  afu- 
turus  (§  494) 

ditch,  fossa,  -ae,/ 

do,  agS,  3 ;  f  aciS,  3 ;  when  used  as  aux- 
iliary, not  translated 

down  from,  de,  with  abl. 

drag,  traho,  3 

drive,  agS,  3 

dwell,  habits,  i  ;  incolS,  3 ;  vivo,  3 

dwelling,  aedificium,  aedifi^ci,  n. 


ENOMSH    T  ATIN  VOCABULARY 

each  full 

£  find,  reperi5,  4 


335 


each,  quisque,  quaeque,  quidque  (quod- 

que)  (§484) 
each  of  two,  uterque,  utraque,  utrum 

que 
each  other,  inter  with  ace.  of  a  reflexive 
eager,  accr,  acris,  acre;  alacer.  nlacris, 

alacre 
eager  (be),  studeS,  2 
eagerness,  studium,  stud!,  n. 
eagle,  aquila,  -ae,/. 
easily,  facile 
easy,  facilis,  -e 
either  .  .  .  or,  aut  .  .  .  aut 
empire,  imperium,  impc'ri,  n. 
employ,  negotium  do 
encourage,  hortor,  i 
enemy,  hostis,  -is,  m.  and  /.;  inimi- 

cus.  -T.  in. 
enough,  satis 

entire,  totus,  -a,  -urn  (§  108) 
expectation,  opTn;^  .rinic,  /-. 
eye,  oculus,  -T,  // 

F 

faithless,  perfidus,  -a,   um 

famous,  clarus,  -a,  -um 

far,  longe 

farmer,  agricola,  -ae,  m. 

farther,  ulterior,  -ius 

father,  pater,  patris,  m. 

fatherland,  patria,  -ae,/. 

favor,  faveO,  2 

favorable,  idQneus,  -a,  -um ;  secundus, 

-a,  -um 
fear,  metus,  -Qs,  m,\  timer,  -Oris,  m. 
fear,  be  afraid,  timed,  2 
few,  pauci,  -ae,  -a 
field,  ager,  agri,  m. 
fifteen,  qulndcci 
fight,  contendo,  j,  ,.-t,'- '•  ' 


finish,  conficio,  3 

fire,  ignis,  -is,  m.  (§  243.1) 

firmness,  constantia,  -2x,yf. 

first,  primus,  -a,  -um 

flee,  fugio,  3 

flight,  fuga,  -ae,/ 

fly,  vols,  I 

foe,  see  enemy 

follow  close  after,  subsequor,  3 

food,  cibus,  -1,  m. 

foot,  pes,  pedis,  tn. 

foot-soldier,  pedes,  -itis,  m. 

for  {conj.),  enim,  nam 

for  {prep.),  sign  of  dat.;  d€,  pro,  with 

abl.;   to  express  purpose,  ad,  Tvith 

gerundive;  implied  in  ace.  of  time 

and  of  extent  rf  space 
for  a  long  time,  diu 
forbid,  veto,  i 

forces,  copiae,  -arum,/,//«r.  <7/"c6pia 
forest,  silva,  -ae,/ 
fort,  castellum,  -I,  «.;  castrum,  -T,  «. 
fortification,  munitio,  -5nis,/ 
fortify,  munio,  4 
fortune,  fortuna,  -ae,/ 
fourth,  quartus,  -a,  -um 
free,  liber,  -era,  -erum 
free,  liberate,  libero,  i 
frequent,  creber,  -bra,  -brum 
friend,  amicus,  -I,  m. 
friendly  {adj.),  amicus,  -a,  -um 
friendly  {adv.),  amice 
friendship,  amicitia,  -ae,/ 
frighten,  pertcrreo,  2 
from,  a  or  ab,  de,  e,  ex,  with  aSi.  Often 

expressed  by  the  separative  etbleUive 

without  a  prep. 
from  each  other,  inter,  with  tuc.  ef  a 

reflexive  pron. 
full,  '^i'">'<   -a,  -ura 


336  ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 

Galba  in 


Galba,  Galba,  -ae,  m. 

garland,  corona,  -ae,/. 

garrison,  praesidium,  praesi'dl,  n. 

gate,  porta,  -ae,/. 

Gaul,  Gallia,  -ae,/ 

Gaul  (a),  Gallus,  -i,  m. 

general,  imperator,  -oris,  m. 

Geneva,  Genava,  -slq.,/. 

gentle,  lenis,  -e 

German,  Germanus,  -a,  -um 

Germans   (the),    Germanl,  -orum,  m. 

plur. 
Germany,  Germania,  -ae,/ 
get  {dinner),  paro,  i 
girl,  puella,  -ae,/ 
give,  do,  dare,  dedl,  datus 
give  over,  surrender,  dedo,  3  ;  trado,  3 
give  up,  omitto,  3 
go,  eo,  4  (§  499) 
go  forth,  progredior,  3 
god,  deus,  -I,  m.  (§  468) 
goddess,  dea,  -ae,/  (§  67) 
gold,  aurum,  -1,  n. 
good,  bonus,  -a,  -um 
grain,  frumentum,  -1,  «. 
grain  supply,  res  friimentaria 
great,  ingens,  -entis  ;  magnus,  -a,  -um 
greatest,  maximus,  -a,  -um ;  summus, 

-a,  -um 
guard,  praesidium,  praesi'di,  n. 


hand,  manus,  -us,/ 

happy,  laetus,  -a,  -um 

harbor,  portus,  -us,  m. 

hasten,  contendo,  3 ;  maturS,  i  ;  pro- 

pero,  I 
hateful,  invisus,  -a,  -um 
haughty,  superbus,  -a,  -um 
have,  habeo,  2 


-orum,  m.plur. 


reflex- 


have  no  power,  nihil  possum 

he,  is  ;  hie ;  iste ;  ille  ;  or  not  expressed 

head,  caput,  -itis,  n. 

hear,  audio,  4 

heart,  animus,  -1,  m. 

heavy,  gravis,  -e 

Helvetii  (the),  Helvetii, 

hem  in,  contineo,  2 

hen,  gallina,  -ae,/ 

her,  eius  ;  huius  ;  istlus  ;  illius  : 

ive,  suus,  -a,  -um  (§  116) 
hide,  abdo,  3 
high,  altus,  -a,  -um 
highest,  summus,  -a,  -um 
hill,  collis,  -is,  m. 
himself,  sui.    See  self 
hindrance,  impedimentum,  -T,  «. 
his,  eius ;  huius ;  istlus ;  illius ;  reflexive, 

suus,  -a,  -um  (§  116) 
hither,  citerior,  -ius  (§315) 
hold,  teneo,  2 
home,domus,  -us,/  (§468).   at  home, 

domi  (§  267) 
hope  (noun),  spes,  spei,/ 
hope  {verb),  spero,  i 
horse,  equus,  -1,  m. 
horseman,  eques,  -itis,  m. 
hostage,  obses,  -idis,  m.  and/. 
hostile,' inimlcus,  -a,  -um 
hour,  bora,  -ae,/ 
house,      domicilium,     domicilii,     n.; 

domus,  -us,/  (§  468) 
hurl,  iacio,  3 


I)  sgo  (§  280) ;  or  not  expressed 
if,  SI.   if  not,  nisi 
ill,  aeger,  -gra,  -grum 
immediately,  statim 
in  {of  place),  in,  with  abl.;  {of  time  or 
of  specification)  abl.  without  prep. 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


in  order  that 

in  order  that,  ut,  with  subjv. ;  in  order 
that  not,  lest,  ne,  7vith  subjv. 

in  vain,  frustra 

industry,  dlligentia,  -ac,/. 

inflict  injuries  upoiii  iniurias  infero 
with  dat.  (§  426) 

inflict  punishment  on,  supplicium 
sumo  de 

inform  some  one,  aliquem  certiorem 
facio 

injure,  noce5,  2,  with  dat.  (§  153) 

injury,  iniuria,  -ae,/. 

into,  in,  ivith  ace. 

intrust,  committo,  3 ;  mando,  i 

invite,  voco,  i 

is,  used  as  auxiliaryy  not  translaUd; 
as  a  copula,  sum  (§  494) 

island,  insula,  -ae,/. 

it,  is;  hie;  iste;  ille;  or  not  ex- 
pressed 

Italy,  Italia,  -ae,/ 

its,  eius;  huius;  istius;  illlus;  re- 
flexive, suus,  -a,  -um  (§  116) 

itself,  sul.   See  self 

J 
join  battle,  proelium  committo 
journey,  iter,  itineris,  n.  (§  468) 
judge  {noun),  iudex,  -icis,  m. 
judge  i^verb),  iudico,  i 
Julia,  lulia,  -ae,/ 
just  now,  nuper 


keep,  contineo,  2 ;  prohibeo,  2 ;  tenedj  2 
keep  on  doing  something,  expressed 

by  the  imp/,  indie. 
kill,  interficio,  3;  nec6,  i ;  occldo,  3 
king,  rex,  regis,  m. 
kingdom,  rcgnum,  -I,  n. 
know,  cogndscd,  3,  in  per/. ;  tciO,  4 


337 

love 
L 

labor  (noun),  labor,  -oris,  m. 

labor  (verb),  laboro,  I 

lack  (noun),  inopia,  -ae,/ 

lack  (verb),  egeo,  2,  with  abl.  (§  180) 

lady,  domina,  -ae,/ 

lake,  lacus,  -us,  m.  (§  260.  2) 

land,  terra,  -ae,/ 

language,  lingua,  -ae,/ 

large,  ingens,  -entis ;  magnus,  -a,  -um 

larger,  maior,  maius 

lately,  nuper 

Latona,  Lat5na,  -ae,/ 

law,  lex,  legis,/ 

lay  waste,  vasto,  i 

lead,  duco,  3 

leader,  dux,  ducis,  m.  and/. 

learn,  know,  cognosco,  3 

leave,  depart  from,  discedo,  3 

leave  behind,  abandon,  relinquo,  3 

left,  sinister,  -tra,  -trum 

legion,  legio,  -onis,/ 

legionaries,     legionaril,    -orum,     m. 

plur. 
length,  longitudo,  -inis,/ 
lest,  nc,  with  subjv. 
letter    (0/  the  alphabet),   littera,  -ae, 

/ ;    (an  epistle)   litterae,   -arum,  / 

plur. 
lientenant,  legatus,  -1,  m. 
light,  lux,  lucis,/ 
like  (adj.),  similis,  -c 
like,  love,  amo,  i 
line  of  battle,  acies,  aciei,  /: 
little,  parvus,  -a,  -um 
live,  habito,  1  ;  incol5,  3  ; 
long,  longus,  -a,  -um 
long,  for  a  long  time,  diu 
long  for,  desidcro,  i 
look  after,  duro,  i 
lore,  amd,  i 


33^ 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


maid 
M 
maid,  maid  servant,  ancilla,  -ae,/ 
make,  facio,  3 
make  war  upon,  bellum  infero  7c>M 

dat.  (§  426) 
man,    homo,    -inis,   m.   and  /.;    vir, 

viri,  m. 
man-of-war,  navis  longa 
many,  multl,  -ae,  -a,  plur.  of  multus 
march,  iter,  itineris,  n.  (§  468) 
Mark,  Marcus,  -1,  m. 
marriage  J        matrimonium,        matri- 

mo'ni,  71. 
master,    dominus,   -i,    m.;    magister, 

-tri,  m. 
matter,    negStium,    neg6''tT,   ;;.  ;    res, 

rei,y. 
means,  by  means  of,  the  abl. 
messenger,  nuntius,  nunti,  m. 
midnight,  media  nox 
mile,  mllle  passuum  (§331.  b) 
miles,  milia  passuum 
mind,  animus,  -1,  m.\  ripens,  mentis,/", 
mine,  meus,  -a,  -um 
mistress,  domina,  -ae,/. 
money,  pecunia,  -ae,/. 
monster,  monstrum,  -I,  n. 
month,  mensis,  -is,  m. 
moon,  luna,  -ae,/ 
more  {adj.)^  plus,  pluris  (§313);  or  a 

comparative.    Adverb,  magis 
most  {adj.),  plurimus,  -a,  -um  ;  superl. 

degree.  Adverb,  maxime  ;   plurimum 
mother,  mater,  matris,/ 
mountain,  mons,  montis,  m. 
move,  moveo,  2 
moved,  commotus,  -a,  -um 
much  (by),  multo 
multitude,  multitudo,  -inis,/ 
my,  meus,  -a,  -um 
myself,  me,  reflexive.    See  self 


once 
N 
name,  nomen,  -inis,  n. 
nation,  gens,  gentis,/ 
near,  propinquus,  -a,  -um 
nearest,  proximus,  -a,  -um 
nearly,  fere 

neighbor,  finitimus,  -T,  m. 
neighboring,  finitimus,  -a,  -um 
neither,  neque  or  nee ;  neither  .  .  .  notj 

neque  (nee)  .  .  .  neque  (nee) 
never,  numquam 
nevertheless,  tamen 
new,  novus,  -a,  -um 
next  day,  postrTdie  eius  diel 
next  to,  proximus,  -a,  -um 
night,  nox,  noctis,/ 
nine,  novem 
no,    minime;    or  repeat   verb   with   a 

negative  (§  210) 
no,  none,  nuUus,  -a,  -um  (§109) 
no  one,  nemo,  nullius 
nor,  neque  or  nee 
not,  non 

not  even,  ne  .  .  .  quidem 
not  only  .  .  .  but  also,  non  s5lum 

.  .  .  sed  etiam 
nothing,  nihil  or  nihilum,  -1,  n. 
now,  nunc 
number,  numerus,  -1,  m. 


obey,  pareo,  2,  with  dat.  (§  1 53) 

of,  sigfi  of  gen.;  de,  with  abl.;  out  of, 

e  or  ex,  with  abl. 
often,  saepe 
on  [of  place),  in,  with  abl.;  {of  time) 

abl.  without  prep. 
on  account  of,  propter,  with  ace.;  of 

abl.  of  cause 
on  all  sides,  undique 
once  {upon  a  time),  olim 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


339 


one,  finus,  -a,  -um  (§  io8) 

one  .  .  .  another,  ulius  .  .  .  alius 

(§  MO) 
only  {adv.)f  solum;  tantum 
opportune,  opportunus,  -a,  -um 
opposite,  adversus,  -a,  um 
oracle,  oraculum,  -T,  ». 
orator,  orator,  -oris,  m. 
order,  impero,  i  ;  iubeo,  2 
ornament,  ornamentum,  -1,  n. 
other,  alius,  -a,  -ud  (§  109) 
others  (the),  reliqui,  -drum,  m. plur. 
ought,  debeo,  2 
our,  noster,  -tra,  -trum 
ourselves,  nos,  as  reflexive  object.    See 

self 
overcome,  superd,  1  ;  vinco,  ^ 
own  (his,  her,  its,  their),  suu 


part,  pars,  partis,  /'. 
peace,  pax,  pacis,  /. 
people,  populus,  -I,  m. 
Perseus,  Perseus,  -I,  ///. 
persuade,    persuadeo. 

(§«53) 
pitch  camp,  castra  ponu 
place  {Mouft),  locus,  -i,  m. 
place,  arrange,  conloco,  i 
place,  put,  pono,  3 
place  in  command,  praeficio,  3,  7virA 

aci.  and  dai.  (§  426) 
plan  (a),  consilium,  c5nsi1I,  n. 
please,  placed,  2,  with  ''''/  '^  i  c  0 
pleasing,  gratus,  -a,  -uv 
plow,  aro,  I 

Pompeii,  Pompeii,  -drum,  m.  plur. 
possible  (as),  expressed  by  quam  and 

superl. 
powerful  (be),  valc5,  2 
praiM,  laudd,  i 


rest 

prefer,  malo,  malle,  malul, (§  497) 

prepare  for,  paro,  i,  with  ace. 

press  hard,  premo,  3 

protection,  fides,  fidci,  /. 

province,  provincia,  -ae,/. 

public,  publicus,  -a,  -um 

Publius,  Pablius,  Publi,  m. 

punishment,  poena,  ajic,  y".;  suppli- 
cium,  supplied,  n. 

purpose,  for  the  purpose  of,  ut,  qui, 
or  quo,  7vith  siibjv.;  ad,  with  i^er- 
und  or  gerundive;  causa,  following 
the  genitive  of  a  gerund  or  gerun- 
dive 

pursue,  Insequor,  3 

Q 

queen,  reglna,  -ae,/. 

quickly,  celeriter 

quite,  expressed  by  the  comp.  degree 

R 

rampart,  valium,  -I,  //. 

rear,  novissimum  agmen 

reason,  causa,  -ae,/. 

receive,  accipid,  3 ;  excipiS,  3 

recent,  recens,  -entis 

recently,  nuper 

redoubt,  castellum,  -i,  n. 

refuse,  recuse,  i 

remain,  maneo,  2 

remaining,  reliquus,  -a,  -um 

reply,  respondeo,  2 

report  (w"/*/^    fanii     nr.  /;  rumor, 

-oris,  /'. 
report  (:  •....-.  .^../..j-d 

(§498' 

tepublic,  res  puDiica 

require,  postuld,  i 

resist,  resists,  3,  with  dat.  (§  1 54) 

rest  (the),  reliqui,  -onmi,  m.  plur. 


340  ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 

restrain 


restrain,  contineo,  2 

retainer,  cliens,  -ends,  m. 

retreat,    pedem   refero;  terga  vert5 

return,  redeo,  4;  reverter,  3 

revolution,  res  novae 

Rhine,  Rhenus,  -T,  vi. 

right,  dexter,  -tra,  -trum 

river,  flumen,-uiis,  71. ;  fluvius,  fluvi,  7n. 

road,  via,  -ae,/. 

Roman,  Romanus,  -a,  -um 

Rome,  Roma,  -ae,/. 

row,  ordo,  -inis,  m. 

rule,  rego,  3 

rumor,  fama,  -ae,/". ;  rumor, -5ris,  m. 

run,  curro,  3 

S 

sacrifice,  sacrum,  -T,  n. 

safety,  salus,  -utis,/. 

sail,  navigo^ 

sailor,  nauta,  -ae,  m. 

sake,  for  the  sake  of,  c^wssi,  followtTtg 

a  gen. 
same,  idem,  eadem,  idem  {§  287) 
savages,  barbari,  -orum,  m.  phir. 
save,  serv'o,  i 
say,  dico,  3 

school,  ludus,  -1,  m.;  schola,  -ae,/ 
scout,  explorator,  -oris,  m. 
sea,  mare,  -is,  n. 
second,  secundus,  -a,  -um 
see,  video,  2 
seek,  pet5,  3 

seem,  videor,  2,  passive  <?/"  video 
seize,  occupd,  i ;  rapio,  3 
self,  ipse,  -a,  -um  (§  286);  sul  (§  281) 
send,  mitto,  3 
set  fire  to,  incendo,  3 
set  out,  proficlscor,  3 
seven,  septem 
Seztus,  Sextus,  -1,  m. 


stand 
she,  ea;  haec;  ista;  ilia  (§115);  or  not 

expressed  [navi'gl,  n. 

ship,  navis,  -is,/.  (§  243.  i);  navigium, 
short,  brevis,  -e 
shout,  clamor,  -oris,  m. 
show,  dem5nstr5,  i 
Sicily,  Sicilia,  -ae,/ 
sick,  aeger,  -gra,  -grum 
side,  latus,  -eris,  n. 
siege,  obsidio,  -onis,/ 
since,  cum,  with  subjv.  (§396);  the  abl. 

abs.{%^ZY) 
sing,  cano,  3 ;  cant5,  i 
sister,  soror,  -oris,/ 
sit,  sede5,  2 
size,  magnitude,  -inis,/ 
skillful,  peritus,  -a,  -um 
slave,  servus,  -I,  m. 
slavery,  servitus,  -utis,/ 
slow,  tardus,  -a,  -um 
small,  parvus,  -a,  -um 
snatch,  rapio,  3 
so,  ita;  sTc;  tarn 
so  great,  tantus,  -a,  -um 
so  that,  ut ;  so  that  not,  ut  non 
soldier,  miles,  -itis,  tu. 
some,  often  not  expressed;  quis  (qui), 

qua  (quae),  quid  (quod);  aliqul,  ali- 

qua,  aliquod 
some  one,  quis;  aliquis  (§  487) 
some  .  .  .  others,  alii  .  .  .  alii  (§110) 
something,  quid;  aliquid  (§487) 
son,  filius,  fili,  m. 
soon,  mox 

space,  spatium,  spati,  n. 
spear,  pllum,  -I,  n. 
spirited,    acer,    acris,    acre;   alacer, 

alacris,  alacre 
spring,  fons,  fontis,  m. 
spur,  calcar,  -aris,  n. 
stand,  sto,  i 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 

tree 


341 


state 

state,  clvitls,  -atis.  /. 
station,  conloco,  i 
steadiness,  constaniia,  -ae,/! 
stone,  lapis,  -idis,  m. 
storm,  oppugns,  i 
story,  fabula,  -ae,/. 
street,  via,  -ae,/. 
strength,  vis,  (vis),/, 
strong,  fortis,  -e ;  validus,  -a,  -um 
sturdy,  validus,  -a,  -um 
such,  talis,  -e 
suddenly,  subito 

suffer  punishment,  supplicium  do 
sufficiently,  satis 
suitable,  iddneus,  -a,  -um 
summer,  aestas,  -5tis,/. 
sun,  s*")!,  solis,  m. 
supplies,  commeatus,  -us,  m. 
surrender,  trado,  3 
suspect,  suspicor,  i 
swift,  celer,  -eris,  -ere;  velox,  -ocis 
•word,  gladius,  gladi,  m. 


take,  capture,  capi5,  3 

take  part   in,   intersun  li. 

-futurus,  -with  dat.  (§  426) 
take  possession  of,  occupo,  i 
tall,  altus,  -a,  -um 
task,  opus,  operis,  n. 
teach,  doceo,  2 
teacher,  magister,  -trt,  m. 
tear  («^««),  lacrima,  -ae,/. 
tell,  dico,  3 ;  nSrro,  i 
ten,  decem 

terrified,  pertcrritus,  -a,  -um 
terrify,  pcrterreS,  2 
than,  quam 
that  {conj.  after  verbs  of  saying  and  tht 

like),  not  expressed 
that  (/nni.),  is;  iste;  ille 


that,  in  order  that,  in  purpose  clauses, 

ut;  after  ■:>/,.  ,u  /-,/,;,/-.  „§  (§§  349, 

366,37- 
that  not,  Ittol,  in  j'li/jwic  clauses,  ne; 

after  verbs  of  fearing,  ut   (§§  349, 

366,  372)- 
the,  not  expressed 
their,  gen.  plur.  of  is;  reflexive,  suus, 

-a,  -um  (§  1 16) 
their  own,  suus,  -a,  -um  {§  1 16) 
then,  at  that  time,  turn 
then,  in  the  next  place,  deinde,  tum 
there,  as  expleti-,>e,  not  txpressed 
there,  in  that  place,  ibi 
therefore,  itaque 

they,  ii ;  hi ;  isti ;  ill! ;  or  not  expressed 
think,  arbitror,  i  ;  existimo,  i ;  puto,  i 
third,  tertius,  -a,  -um 
this,  hie,  haec,  hoc ;  is,  ea,  id 
though,  cum,  7iuth  subjv.  (§  396) 
thousand,  mlUe  (§479) 
three,  tres,  tria  (§  479) 
through,  per,  tc/M  ace. 
thy,  tuus,  -a,  -um 
time,  tempus.  -oris,  1: 
to,  sign  of  dat.  I  ad,  \\\. 
pressing  purpose,  ut,  qui,  xvtth  subjv. ; 

ad,  with  gerund  or  o  miuli-c- 
to  each  other,  inter  </  a 

reflexive  pron. 
to-day,  hodie 
toilsome,  d virus,  -a,  -um 
tooth,  dens,  dentis,  m. 
top  of,  summus,  -a,  -um 
tower,  turris,  -is,/.  (§  243.  2) 
town,  oppidum,  -I,  n. 
townsman,  oppidanus,  -I,  m. 
trace,  vestigium,  vcstrgi,  n. 
trader,  mercator,  -5ris,  m. 
train,  excrccS,  2 
tree,  arbor,  -oris,/. 


342 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


tribe 
tribe,  gens,  gentis,/. 
troops,  copiae,  -arum,/. plur. 
true,  verus,  -a,  -um 
trumpet,  tuba,  -ae,/ 
try,  Conor,  i ;  tempto,  i 
twelve,  duodecim 
two,  duo,  duae,  duo  (§  479) 


under,  sub,  witA  ace.  or  abl. 
undertake,  suscipio,  3 
unharmed,  incolumis,  -e 
unless,  nisi 
unlike,  dissimilis,  -e 
unwilling  (be),  nolo,  nolle,  nolul,- 

(§  497) 
up  to,  sub,  with  ace. 
US,  nos,  ace.  plur.  of  ego 


yeXYy  superl.  degree;  maxime;  ipse, -a, 

-um(§285) 
victor,  victor,  -oris,  m. 
victory,  victoria,  -ae,y. 
village,  vicus,  -1,  m. 
violence,  vis,  (vis),/. 
violently,  vehementer 
voice,  vox,  v6cis,y! 

W 

wage,  gero,  3 

wagon,  carrus,  -1,  m. 

wall,  mums,  -T,  m. 

want,  inopia,  -ae,/". 

war,  bellum,  -1,  n. 

watch,  vigilia,  -ae,/. 

water,  aqua,  -ae,/ 

wave,  fluctus,  -us,  m. 

way,  iter,  itineris,  «.  (§  468) ;  via,  -ae,/ 

way,  manner,  modus,  -1,  m. 

we,  nos,  plur.  of  ego ;  or  not  expressed 


woman 
weak,  inflrmus,  -a,  -um 
weapons,  arma,  -5rum,  n.plur.;  tela, 

-orum,  n.  plur. 
wear,  gero,  3 
weary,  defessus,  -a,  -um 
what,   quis  (qui),  quae,  quid  (quod) 

(§  483) 
when,ubi;  cum  (§  396) ;  often  expressed 

by  a  participle 
where,  ubi 
which,  qui,  quae,  quod  (§  482) ;  which 

of  two,  uter,  utra,  utrum  (§108) 
while,  expressed  by  a  participle 
whither,  quo 
who  {rel.),  qui,  quae  (§  482);  {interrog.) 

quis  (§  483) 
whole,  totus,  -a,  -um  (§108) 
whose,  cuius;  qu5rum,  quarum,  qu5- 

rum,  gen.  ^qui,  quae,  quod,  rel.;  or 

</quis,  quid,  interrog. 
why,  cur 

wicked,  malus,  -a,  -um 
wide,  latus,  -a,  -um 
width,  latitud5,  -inis,/ 
wild  beast,  fera,  -ae,/ 
willing  (be),  volo,  velle,  volui,  

(§497) 
win  [a  victory),  report5,  I 
wind,  ventus,  -i,  m. 
wine,  vinum,  -i,  n. 
wing,  cornu,  -us,  n. 
winter,  hiems,  -emis,/ 
wisdom,  consilium,  consi'li,  n. 
wish,  cupio,  3 ;  volo,  velle,  voluT, 

{§  497);  wish  not,  nolo,  nolle,  nolui, 

_ (§497) 

with,  cum,  with  abl.;  sometimes  abl. 

alone 
withdraw,  se  recipere 
without,  sine,  with  abl. 
woman,  femina,  -ae,/ ;  mulier,  -eris,/ 


ENGLISH-LATIN  VOCABULARY 


343 


wonderful 
wonderful,  minus,  -a,  -um 
word,  verbum,  -i,  «. 
work,  labor,  -Sris,  m. ;  opus,  -eris,  «. 
worse,  peior,  peius,  comp.  of  malus 
worst,  pessimus,  -a,  -um,  superl.  of 

malus 
wound  {noun)y  vulnus,  -eris,  n. 
wound  {verb)y  vulnero,  i 
wreath,  corona,  -ae,y*. 
wretched,  miser,  -era,  -erum 
wrong,  iniuria,  -ac,/. 


seal 


year,  annus,  -i,  m. 

yes,  certc;  ita;  vcro;  or^  more  usually^ 

repeat  the  verb  (§  210) 
yonder  (that),  ille,  -a,  -ud 
you,  iing.  tu ;  plur.  v6s  (§  480) ;  or  not 

expressed 
your,  sing,  tuus,  -a,  -um;  plur.  vcster, 

-tra,  -trum  (§  98.  b) 


seal,  studium,  studi,  n. 


INDEX 


The  numbers  in  all  cases  refer  to  sections. 


a-declension  of  nouns,  57,  461 
a-verbs,  conjugation  of,  488 
ablative  case,  48,  50 

absolute,  381 

after  a  comparative,  309 

of  accompaniment,  104 

of  agent,  181 

of  cause,  102 

of  description,  444,  445 

of  manner,  105 

of  means  or  instrument,  103 

of  measure  of  difference,  317 

of  place  from  which,  179,  264 

of  place  where,  265 

of  separation,  180 

of  specification^  398 

of  time,  275 
accent,  14-16 

accompaniment,  abl.  of,  104 
accusative  case,  33 

as  subject  of  the  infinitive,  214 

object,  37 

of  duration  and  extent,  336 

of  place  to  which,  263,  266 

predicate,  392 

with  prepositions,  340 
adjectives,  54,  55 

agreement,  65 

comparison,  regular,  301 ;  by  ad- 
verbs, 302;  irregular,  307,  311, 
312,315 

declension  of  comparatives,  303 

of  first  and  second  declensions,  83, 
93,  469 

of  third  declension,  250-257,  471 

with  the  dative,  143 
adverbs,  319 

comparison,  320,  323 


formation,  regular,  320,  321  ;  irreg- 
ular, 322,  323 
agent,  expressed  by  the  abl.  with  a  or 

ab,  181 
agreement 

of  adjectives,  65,  215.  a 

of  appositives,  Si 

of  predicate  nouns,  76 

of  relative  pronouns,  224 

of  verbs,  28 
aliquis,  487 
alius,  T08,  no,  470 
alphabet,  1-3 
alter,  108,  no 

antepenult,  9.  3  ;  accent  of,  1 5 
apposition,  80,  81 
article,  not  used  in  Latin,  22.  a 

base,  58 

cardinal  numerals,  327-329,  478 

case,  32.  2 

causal  clauses  with  cum,  395,  396 

cause,  expressed  by  the  abl.,  102 

characteristic,  subjv.  of,  389,  390 

comparative,  declension  of,  303 

comparison 

abl.  of,  309 

degrees  of,  300 

of   adjectives,   300-315;    irregular, 

31 1-3 1 5'  473'  475 
of  adverbs,  regular,  320,  476 ;  irreg- 
ular, 323,  477 
positive  wanting,  315 
six  adjectives  in  -lis,  307 
complementary  infinitive,  215 
compound  verbs,  with  the  dative,  425, 
426 


344 


INDEX 


345 


oonceMhre   cUnsM  with  cum,  395, 

396 
conjugation  stems,  184 
conjugations,  the  four  regular,  126. 

488-491 ;  irregular,  494-500 
consonants,  2 
copula,  21 

cum,  conjunction,  395 
cum,  preposition,  209 

dative  case,  43 

of  indirect  object,  44,  45 

of  purpose,  or  end  for  which,  437 

with  adjectives,  143 

with  compound  verbs,  426 

with  special  verbs,  1 53 

dea,  declension  of,  67 

declension,  23,  32 

degree  of  difference,  expressed  by  the 
abl.,  317 

demons^ative  adjectives  and  pronouns, 
1 1 2-1 1 5,  290-292,  481 

deponent  verbs,  338,  339,  493 

descriptive  ablative  and  genitive,  441- 

445 
descriptive  relative  clause,   with   the 

subjv.,  389,  390 
deus,  declension  of,  468 
difference,  measure  of,  316,  317 
diphthongs,  6 
direct  statements,  414 
distributive  numerals,  327. 3,  334 
domi,  locative,  267 
domus,  declension  of,  468 
duo,  declension  of,  479 
duration  of  time,  expressed  by  the 

ace,  336 

^-declension  of  nouns,  272,  273,  467 

§-verbs,  conjugation  of,  489 

ft-verbs,  conjugation  of,  490 

ego,  declension  of,  280,  480 

enclitics,  16 

ed,  conjugation  of,  49^) 

extent  of  space,  expressed  by  the  ace. 


fearing,  subjv.  after  verbs  of,  370- 

372 
fero,  conjugation  of,  498 
fifth  or  S-declension,  272,  273,  467 
fflia,  declension  of,  67 
fflius,  declension  of,  87-89 
finite  verb,  defined,  173 
fio,  conjugation  of,  500 
first  conjugation,  488 
first  or  a-declension,  57,  461 
fourth  conjugation,  491 
fourth  or  u-declension,  259,  260,  466 
from,  how  expressed,  178-181 
future  participle,  formation  of,  374.*: 
future  perfect,    formation   of,  active, 

187.  3  ;  passive,  202 
future  tense,  formation  of,  137,  156 

gender 

in  English  and  in  I^tin,  60 
in  the  first  declension,  61 
in  the  second  declension,  72 
in  the  third  declension,  247 
in  the  fourth  declension,  260 
in  the  fifth  declension,  272 

general  observations  on  declension,  74 

genitive  case 

English  equivalents  of,  33. 
of  description,  443,  445 
of  nouns  in  -ius  ?nd  -ium,  87 
partitive,  331 
possessive,  38,  409 

gerund,  a  verbal  noun,  402,  403 

gerundive,    a    verbal   adjective,   404 ; 
with  ad  to  express  purpose,  407 

hie,  declension  and  use  of,  290,  291 
how  to  read  Latin,  1 7 

i,  consonant,  j 

i-stems  of  nouns,  231,  241-244 
I-verbs,  conjugation  of,  491 
idem,  declension  of,  287,  481 
iins,  declension  of,  472 
ille,  declension  and  use  of,  290-293, 
481 


346 


INDEX 


imperative,  formation  of,  i6i,  175;  ir- 
regular, 161.2;  in  commands,  161 
imperfect  indicative,  formation  and  use 

oi,  133'  i34>  165.  I 
imperfect  subjunctive,  354 
indefinite  pronouns  and  adjectives,  296, 

297,  484-487 
independent  clauses,  219 
indirect  object,  44,  45 
indirect  questions,  430-432 
indirect  statements,  414-419 
infinitive 

as  object,  213 
as  subject,  216 
complementary,  215 
definition  of,  173 
does  not  express  purpose,  352 
formation  of,  126,  174,  205,  206 
in  indirect  statements,  415-419 
used  as  in  English,  213-216 
inflection,  defined,  23 
instrument,  abl.  of,  100./^,  103 
intensive  pronoun,  i^se,  declension  and 

use  of,  285,  286,  481 
interrogative  pronouns  and  adjectives, 

225-227,  483 
intransitive  verbs,  defined,  20.  a ;  with 

the  dative,  1 53 
io-verbs  of  the  third  conj.,  492 
ipse,  declension  and  use  of,  285,481 
irregular  adjectives,  108 
irregular  comparison,  of  adjectives,  307, 

311,  312  ;  of  adverbs,  323 
irregular  nouns,  67,  246,  468 
irregular  verbs,  494-500 
is,  declension  and  use  of,  113-116 
iste,  declension  and  use  of,  290,  292, 

481 
iter,  declension  of,  468 

Latin  word  order,  68 
locative  case,  267 

magis  and  maxime,  comparison  by,  302 
maid,  conjugation  of,  497 
manner,  abl.  of,  105 


means,  abl.  of,  103 

measure  of  difference,  abl.  of,  316,  317 

mflle,  declension  of,  479  ;  construction 

with,  2,31.  a,  d 
moods,  defined,  121 

-ne,  enclitic,  in  questions,  210 

ne,  conj.,  ^Aat  not.,  lest.,  with  negative 
clauses  of  purpose,  350.  II ;  with 
verbs  of  fearing,  370 

nine  irregular  adjectives,  108-110 

n615,  conjugation  of,  497 

nominative  case,  35,  36 

nonne,  in  questions,  210 

nos,  declension  of,  280,  480 

nouns,  19.  2 

first  declension,  57,  461 
second  declension,7 1-74, 87-92, 462 
third  declension,  230-247,  463-465 
fourth  declension,  259,  260,  466 
fifth  declension,  272,  273,  467 

num,  in  questions,  210 

number,  24 

numerals,  327-334,  478,  479 

o-declension  of  nouns,  71-74,  87-92, 

462 
object,  20 ;  direct,  37 ;  indirect,  44,  45 
order  of  words,  68 
ordinal  numerals,  327.  2,  478 

participial  stem,  201.  2 
participles,  defined,  203 

agreement  of,  204 

formation,    of   present,   374.  b ;   of 
perfect,  201 ;  of  future,  374.  c,  d 

of  deponent  verbs,  375 

tenses  of,  376 

translated  by  a  clause,  377 
partitive  genitive,  330,  331 
passive  voice,  defined,  163;  formation 

of,  164,  202 
penult,  9.  3  ;  accent  of,  1 5 
perfect  indicative 

formation,  in  the  active,  185,  186; 
in  the  passive,  202 


INDEX 


347 


meaning  of,  190 

definite,  190 

indefinite,  190 

distinguished  from  the  imperfect, 
190 
perfect  infinitive,  active,  195  ;  passive, 

205 
perfect  passive  participle,  201 
perfect  stem,  185 

perfect  subjunctive,  active,  361  ;  pas- 
sive, 362 
person,  122 
personal  endings,  active,  122;  passive, 

164 
personal  pronouns,  280,  4S0 
place,where,whiiher,whence,  263-265; 
names  of  towns  and  domus  and 
tiis,  266-268 
pluperfect    indicative,    active,    187.2; 

passive,  202 
pluperfect    subjunctive,    active,    361 ; 

passive,  363 
plus,  declension  of,  313 
possessive  pronouns,  97,  98 
possum,  conjugation  of,  495 
predicate,  defined,  19 
predicate  adjective,  defined,  55 
predicate  noun,  75,  76 
prepositions,  with  the  abl.,  209;  with 

the  ace,  340  • 

present  indicative,  128,  130,  147 
present  stem,  1 26.  a 
present  subjunctive,  344 
primary  tenses,  356 
principal  parts,  183 
pronouns 

classification  of,  278 

defined,  19.  2.  a 

demonstrative,  481 

indefinite,  297,  484-487 

intensive,  285,  286,  481 

interrogative,  483 

personal,  480 

possessive,  97,  98 

reflexive,  281 

relative,  220,  221 


pronunciation,  4-7 
prosum,  conjugation     '    . 
purpose 

dative  of,  436,  437 
expressed  by  the  gerund  or  gerun- 
dive with  ad,  407 
not    expressed    by    the    infinitive, 

352 
subjunctive  of,  348-350,  365-367 

quality,  gen.  or  abl.  of,  441-445 
quam,  with  a  comparative,  308 
quantity,  11-13 

question8,direct,2io;  indirect, 430-432 
qui, declension  and  use  of,  220,221, 482 
quidam,  declension  of,  485 
quis,  declension  and  use  of,  225-227, 

483 
quisquam,  declension  of,  486 
quisque,  declension  of,  484 

reflexive  pronouns,  281 

relative    clauses    of    characteristic    or 

description,  389,  390 
relative  clauses  of  purpose,  348,  349 
relative  pronouns,  220,  221 
result  clauses,  384-387 
reviews,  502-528 
rfls,  constructions  of,  266 

se,  distinguished  from  ipse,  285.  a 

second  conjugation,  489 

second  or  o-declension,  71-93,  462 

sentences,  simple,  complex,compound, 
219 

separation,  abl.  of,  180 

separative  ablative,  1 78-1 81 

sequence  of  tenses,  356-358 

space,  extent   of,   expressed   by   the 
ace,  336 

specification,  abl.  of,  398 

stems,  of  nouns,  230;  of  verbs,  184 

subject,  defined,   19.  2 ;  of  the  infini- 
tive, 213,  214 

subjunctive,  formation 
of  the  present,  344 


34^ 


INDEX 


of  the  imperfect,  354 
of  the  perfect,  361,  362 
of  the  pluperfect,  361.  c,  363 
subjunctive  constructions  ^ 

characteristic  or  description,  389, 

390 
indirect  questions,  430-432 
purpose,  349,  366,  372 
result,  385,  386 
time,  cause,  or  concession,  with  cum, 

395'  396 
subjunctive  ideas,  346 
subjunctive  tenses,  342,  343 
subordinate  clauses,  219 
sui,  declension  of,  281,  480 
sum,  conjugation  of,  494 
suus,  use  of,  98.  (T,  116 
syllables,  8 ;  division  of,  9 ;  quantity 

of,  13 
sjmtax,  rules  of,  501 

temporal  clauses  with  aim,  395,  396 
tense,  defined,  120 
tense  signs 

imperfect,  133 

future,  137,  156 

pluperfect  active,  187.  2 

future  perfect  active,  187.  3 
tenses,  primary  and  secondary,  356; 

sequence  of,  357,  358 
third  conjugation,  490,  492 
third  declension  of  nouns 

classes,  231,  463 

consonant  stems,  232-238,  464 

gender,  247 


i-stems,  241-244,  465 

irregular  nouns,  246 
time,  abl.  of,  275 
time,  ace.  of,  336 

towns,  rules  for  names  of,  266,  267,  268 
transitive  verb,  20.  a 
tres,  declension  of,  479 
tu,  declension  of,  280,  480 
tuus,  compared  with  vester,  98.  b 

u-declension  of  nouns,  259,  260,  466 
ultima,  9. 3 

verbs 

agreement  of,  28 

conjugation  of,  126,  488—491 

deponent,  338,  339,  493 

irregular,  494-500 

personal  endings  of,  122,  164 

principal  parts  of,  183 
vester,  compaied  with  tuus,  98.  b 
vis,  declension  of,  468 
vocabularies 

English- Latin,  pp.  332-343 

Latin-English,  pp.  299-331 

special,  pp.  283-298 
vocative  case,  56.  a 

of  nouns  in  rtis  of  the  second  de- 
clension, 73.  b 

\)i   proper   nouns    in    -ius    and    of 
ftlius,  88 
voice,  defined,  163 
V0I6,  conjugation  of,  497 
vos,  declension  of,  280,  480 
vowels,  sounds  of,  5,  6 ;  quantity  of,  12 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL 


LATIN    !  OR   BEGINNERS 


\AUN  L.  DOUGK 


MK  in(;AN  ^r.MK  normal 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL 


TO  ACCOMPANY 


LATIN   FOR   BEGINNERS 


BY 

BENJAMIN  L.  D'OOGE 

PROFESSOR    IN   THE   MICHIGAN   STATE  NORMAL  COLLBGB 


GINN  AND  COMPANY 

BOSTON  •  NEW  YORK  •  CHICAGO  •  LONDON 


Copyright,  191  i 
By  GINN  and  COMPANY 


ALL    RIGHTS    RESERVED 
Oil. 10 


tCfte   fltftenaeam   3Pre<< 

CINN  AND  COMPANY-  PRO- 
PRIETORS •  BOSTON  •  U.S.A. 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL 


INTRODUCTORY 

Note.  In  presenting  this  Manual  the  author  wishes  it  clearly  under- 
stood that  it  has  been  prepared  primarily  for  inexperienced  teachers 
of  first-year  Latin  and  that  even  for  them  its  contents  are  to  be  taken 
as  suggestive  merely.  Ultimately  every  strong  teacher  must  develop 
his  own  method,  and  the  stronger  he  is  the  less  he  will  feel  bound 
to  follow  the  methods  recommended  by  others. 

ENGLISH  GRAMMAR  AND  LATIN  GRAMMAR 

1.  As  a  rule  pupils  beginning  Latin  are  not  well  prepared  in 
English  grammar.  To  meet  this  defect  it  has  been  customary 
to  devote  some  pages  to  a  review  of  English  grammar  before 
the  Latin  grammar  is  begun.  It  has  seemed  a  wiser  plan  to 
combine  the  review  of  the  former  with  progress  in  the  latter. 
Accordingly,  in  this  beginners'  book  explanations  of  grammatical 
terms  and  concepts  are  introduced  at  the  points  where  the  study 
of  the  Latin  makes  a  knowledge  of  them  necessary.  Similarly 
the  Latin  syntax  is  compared  with  the  corresponding  English 
syntax.  Pupils  may,  therefore,  begin  the  Latin  lessons  at  once 
with  no  preceding  review  of  English  grammar. 

THE  INTRODUCTION 

2.  The  first  assignment  of  work  will  naturally  be  the  Intro- 
duction. Call  the  pupils'  attention  to  the  Review  Questions  on 
p.  4,  and  use  them  in  the  recitation.  Besides  locating  Latium 
and  Rome  on  the  map,  pronounce  the  names  and  have  the  pupils 
locate  the  other  districts  of  Italy  and  the  surrounding  seas.  Also 
the  Alps,  lUyricum,  Sicily,  and  Africa  should  be  pointed  out 


.     LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 


PRONUNCIATION 


3.  For  the  second  class  period,  read  over  with  the  pupils  the 
first  seven  sections  and  pronounce  the  Latin  examples  for  them 
to  imitate.  Go  over  the  examples  again  and  again,  for  an  incor- 
rect pronunciation  acquired  at  the  outset  is  apt  to  persist.  Assign 
the  pronunciation  of  the  examples  and  §§8-io  for  the  third 
class  period. 

Begin  the  third  class  period  with  the  pronunciation  of  the 
examples  in  §§  5-7.  Then  have  the  exercise  in  §  10  written  on 
the  board  and  the  words  divided  into  syllables  and  pronounced, 
being  careful  about  the  placing  of  the  accent.  You  will  notice 
that  the  rule  given  for  the  division  of  combinations  of  two  or 
more  consonants  differs  from  the  one  formerly  observed  and 
still  given  in  many  books.  The  old  rule  has  been  shown  to  be 
incorrect.  For  the  fourth  class  period  assign  the  following 
lesson:  Memorizing  of  the  Latin  in  the  exercise  in  §10  and 
the  study  of  §§  11-16. 

For  the  fourth  class  period  have  ready  on  the  board  a  list  of 
at  least  twenty  words  with  long  vowels  marked,  including,  for 
the  most  part,  words  used  before.  First  have  the  pupils  recite 
individually  and  then  in  concert  the  Latin  exercise  in  §  10. 
Then,  using  the  word  list,  let  the  pupils  divide  the  words  into 
syllables,  give  the  length  of  each  syllable,  and  pronounce  the 
words.  Pupils  always  confound  length  of  vowel  and  length  of 
syllable  (cf.  §  13.2,  note).  Dwell  on  this  point  until  the  distinction 
is  clear  to  all. 

Spend  the  fifth  class  period  in  reviewing  the  whole  subject 
of  pronunciation  and  on  the  reading  of  the  poem  (§  18).  One 
or  more  stanzas  may  be  assigned  for  memorizing.  The  recita- 
tion in  concert  of  stanzas  learned  is  sure  to  be  stimulating. 

As  outlined  above,  the  average  class  will  be  ready  to  begin 
Part  II  after  five  recitations.  This  does  not  mean  that  the 
subject  of  pronunciation  is  finished.  Much  patient  effort  for 
many  weeks  to  come  will  be  necessary  before  your  pupils  will 
pronounce  even  tolerably  well 


i 


I 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  3 

4.  Probably  lack  of  time  will  prevent  your  securing  during 
the  first  year  more  than  the  correct  pronunciation  of  the  in- 
dividual words  in  a  sentence.  If  you  have  the  opportunity, 
however,  and  wish  to  train  your  pupils  more  thoroughly,  the 
following  suggestions  are  offered  which  will  lead  to  musical, 
fluent,  and  effective  reading. 

a.  When  a  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word  is  followed  by  a  word 
beginning  with  a  vowel  or  ^,  the  final  vowel  is  only  slightly 
sounded  and  is  run  on  to  the  next  vowel.  Compare  English 
M'  all-important  day  has  come.    Thus,  atqu®  alia,  atqu®  haec.' 

If  the  two  vowels  are  the  same  they  sound  like  one  vowel 
only :  Galba  arat  like  Galbarat. 

b.  So,  too,  final  m  before  an  initial  vowel  or  h  is  sounded 
feebly  or  not  at  all,  and  the  two  vowels  are  run  together  as 
described  above.  Thus,  tubam  auream  is  pronounced  tub*(™) 
auream,  omnem  hominem  as  omii^(°^)  hominem.^ 

c.  The  words  es,  you  are^  and  est,  he  {she,  it)  is,  lose  their 
vowel  when  preceded  by  a  word  ending  in  a  vowel  or  m.  Com- 
pare English  you  're,  he  V,  she 's,  it  'j,  mum  V  the  word.  Thus,  tfl 
es,  ille  est,  meum  est,  are  pronounced  tiis,  illest,  meumst  (sound 
the  second  m  feebly  or  not  at  all). 

MARKING  OF  QUANTITIES 

5.  For  the  past  few  years  it  has  been  customary  to  print 
Latin  textbooks  with  marked  quantities,  to  assist  the  pupil  in 
giving  the  correct  pronunciation.  Pupils  have  sometimes  been 
required  to  mark  all  the  long  quantities  in  their  written  work. 
This,  in  my  judgment,  is  a  mistake,  especially  in  the  first  year, 
when  so  many  vital  matters  of  far  more  relative  importance 
are  demanding  attention.  For  the  beginner  the  quantity  of 
the  penult  and  that  of  the  ultima  are  of  more  importance  than 
the  quantity  of  the  other  syllables,  —  the  former  because  it  de- 
termines the  word  accent,  the  latter  because  it  often  differentiates 

1  Do  not  sound  the  h  at  all.  It  always  has  a  feeble  sound  and  is  not 
counted  as  a  consonant 


4  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

one  form  from  another.  For  this  reason  it  is  suggested  that 
the  marking  of  quantities  on  the  part  of  the  pupils  be  limited 
to  vowels  in  the  penult  when  long  by  nature  and  followed  by  a 
single  consonant,  as  in  dominarum,  and  to  long  vowels  in  the 
ultima.  When  a  long  vowel  in  the  penult  is  followed  by  two 
consonants,  as  in  infirmus,  the  quantity  mark  is  not  needed  to 
determine  the  accent  because  the  syllable  is  long  irrespective  of 
the  length  of  the  vowel  and  the  pupil  will  presumably  pronounce 
the  word  correctly  without  marking  the  vowel.  Some  go  so  far 
as  to  say  that  pupils  who  mark  all  the  quantities  pronounce  no 
better  than  those  who  mark  none.  This  is,  indeed,  an  exagger- 
ated statement;  but  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  importance  of 
marking  quantities  during  the  first  year  has  been  much  over- 
drawn and  has  led  to  the  neglect  of  weightier  matters.  The 
course  that  is  here  suggested  seems  to  me  reasonable  in  demand 
and  has  been  proved  practical  in  results. 

CONDUCT  OF  THE  LESSONS 

6.  The  Recitation  Period.  Always  devote  the  first  five  min- 
utes of  the  recitation  period  to  the  explanation  and  development 
of  the  work  for  the  next  day.  Make  the  assignment  definite 
and  do  not  give  more  than  the  class  can  learn  and  than  you 
are  sure  you  can  cover  in  the  time  allotted.  Explain  all  rules. 
Pronounce  paradigms  and  vocabularies  and  have  the  class  repeat 
them.  Do  not  allow  pupils  to  accent  the  final  syllables  when 
repeating  paradigms. 

After  the  lesson  for  the  next  day  has  been  assigned,  review 
rapidly  the  work  of  the  preceding  day.  Insist  on  quick  and 
accurate  replies  to  your  questions.  Blundering  and  hesitation 
are  to  be  expected  in  the  advance;  but  the  pupil  should  be 
made  to  understand  that  they  are  not  excusable  in  the  review. 

Allowing  that  one  third  of  the  recitation  period  has  been 
spent  as  outlined  above,  the  remaining  two  thirds  can  be  de- 
voted to  the  lesson  of  the  day.  Emphasize  its  proper  subject 
strongly  in  the  recitation  of  each  pupil.    Each  pupil  should  be 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  5 

called  on  at  least  once,  and  work  at  the  board  as  well  as  oral 
recitation  should  be  the  daily  rule. 

7.  Memorizing.  Insist  on  the  thorough  memorizing  of  para- 
digms, vocabularies,  and  rules.  The  importance  of  this  cannot 
be  overestimated.  Without  it  progress  is  impossible.  Forms 
must  be  known  so  well  that  they  are  recognized  at  once  and 
without  deliberation.  Pupils  should  be  able  to  give  instantly 
the  English  for  the  Latin  or  the  Latin  for  the  English  of  the 
words  in  a  vocabulary,  and  to  recite  rules  accurately  and  with- 
out hesitation. 

8.  Learning  the  Forms.  To  learn  the  forms  thoroughly  in- 
cessant drill  is  necessary,  both  orally  and  by  the  use  of  the 
blackboard.  The  inflectional  system  must  be  mastered  the  first 
year,  and  requires  far  more  practice  than  any  textbook  can 
provide. 

When  a  noun  is  to  be  declined  either  orally  or  at  the  board, 
train  pupils  always  to  give  the  meaning,  the  gender,  and  the  base 
before  giving  the  declension.  In  the  written  work  have  them 
put  a  hyphen  between  the  base  and  the  case  termination  and 
have  them  mark  the  long  vowels  in  the  terminations.  In  the 
third  declension  the  stem  should  be  given  as  well  as  the  base 
in  order  that  consonant  stems  and  i-stems  may  be  clearly 
distinguished. 

When  declining  an  adjective  follow  the  same  method  as  with 
nouns. 

When  a  verb  is  to  be  conjugated  either  in  full  or  in  part, 
always  have  its  meaning,  its  principal  parts,  and  its  stems  given 
first.  It  is  far  better  for  pupils  to  learn  the  verb  by  stems  than 
by  moods.  Knowing  the  stems,  tense  signs,  mood  signs,  and 
personal  endings,  and  what  stem  to  use  for  whatever  form,  the 
pupil  is  soon  able  to  recognize  any  form  at  sight  and  to  give 
instantly  any  form  of  any  verb  of  which  he  knows  the  principal 
parts.  He  should  be  made  to  understand  that  until  he  can  do 
this  he  does  not  know  the  verbs. 

It  is  a  good  plan  to  write  near  the  top  of  the  blackboard  be- 
fore the  recitation  a  number  of  nouns,  adjectives,  and  verbs,  one 


6  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

for  each  member  of  the  class,  choosing  such  words  as  occur  in 
the  lesson  of  the  day.  Send  the  pupils  to  the  board  and  let 
each  write  the  meaning  of  the  word  falling  to  him,  give  its 
inflection,  and  construct  a  sentence  which  shall  contain  the 
word  in  question.  This  exercise  may  be  varied  by  the  teacher 
writing  beforehand  English  instead  of  Latin  words.  The  pupils 
will  then,  first  of  all,  have  to  write  the  equivalent  Latin. 

The  rapid  recitation  of  paradigms  by  successive  pupils  is 
helpful ;  for  example,  one  giving  the  nominative,  another  the 
genitive,  and  so  on.  Daily  practice  with  the  blank  declension 
and  conjugation  schemes  to  be  explained  later  (see  pp.  12,  27) 
is  strongly  recommended.  It  all  comes  to  this,  —  that  drill  on 
forms  cannot  be  overdone.  Especially  after  the  class  has  been 
over  all  the  regular  declensions  and  conjugations  this  drill 
should  be  constant  and- merciless.  And  the  work  is  not  done 
until  every  pupil  knows  every  form. 

9.  Vocabulary.  The  learning  of  words  is  of  no  less  impor- 
tance than  the  learning  of  forms  and  cannot  be  emphasized  too 
much.  The  special  vocabularies  should  in  each  case  be  thor- 
oughly mastered  before  beginning  to  read  the  accompanying 
exercises.  Train  pupils  from  the  very  outset  to  give  nouns  with 
the  genitive  and  the  gender,  adjectives  with  their  different  gender 
terminations,  and  verbs  with  their  principal  parts.  For  example, 
in  reply  to  the  question  "What  is  the  word  for  master V  the 
pupil  should  answer,  "  dominus,  domini,  masculine  " ;  to  the  ques- 
tion "What  is  the  word  for  goodV  the  pupil  should  answer, 
"  bonus,  -a,  -um  " ;  and  to  the  question  "  What  is  the  word  for 
advise 'i  "  the  reply  should  be  "  moneo,  monere,  monui,  monitus." 

However  well  the  vocabularies  are  learned,  earnest  efforts  on 
the  part  of  both  pupil  and  teacher  will  be  found  necessary  to 
retain  them.  Much  reading  of  reviews  and  at  sight  will  be  of 
assistance.  Attention  should  also  be  called  to  the  kindred  Eng- 
lish words  that  are  given  in  the  vocabularies,  and  the  pupil 
should  be  encouraged  to  think  of  others.  In  the  textbook  pro- 
vision is  made  for  thorough  reviews  of  words  at  short  intervals. 
The  test  on  these  should  be  rigid.    Teachers  will  be  able  ta 


TEAc  Ill.KS-   MANUAL  / 

devise  various  interesting  methods  of  drilling  on  words.  The 
following,  which  may  be  called  the  vocabulary  roll  call,  has  been 
found  especially  useful.  When  the  class  enters  the  room  let  it 
remain  standing,  each  pupil  at  his  place.  Pronounce  words  to 
the  different  pupils,  English  words  to  be  translated  into  Latin 
or  vice  versa,  and  let  those  that  answer  correctly  take  their 
seats,  the  others  remaining  standing  until  they  have  done  the 
same.  Much  enthusiasm  can  be  aroused  by  letting  two  pupils 
choose  sides,  as  in  a  spelling  match,  for  a  vocabulary  contest. 

The  textbook  is  so  planned  that  all  the  words  to  be  mem- 
orized are  reviewed  three  times.  This  fact,  as  well  as  that  no 
new  vocabularies  are  assigned  after  Lesson  LX,  should  give 
ample  time  and  opportunity  for  drill  and  study. 

10.  Translation.  Suggestions  for  translating  from  Latin  into 
English  are  given  in  the  textbook,  p.  194.  Call  the  pupils'  at- 
tention to  these  early  in  the  year  and  emphasize  the  importance 
of  forming  correct  habits  from  the  beginning.  It  is  advisable  at 
intervals  to  call  for  a  written  translation  of  passages  of  connected 
Latin.  In  these  translations  demand  good  idiomatic  English. 
When  you  have  corrected  the  papers,  have  two  or  three  of  the 
best  ones  read  as  models  for  the  rest.  This  practice  will  do  much 
to  correct  the  translation  jargon  that  pupils  are  prone  to  employ. 

Pupils  always  find  it  much  harder  to  translate  from  English 
into  Latin  than  from  Latin  into  English.  For  this  reason  more 
help  should  be  given  them  for  this  work.  For  the  first  few  weeks 
go  over  the  English-Latin  exercise  with  the  class  when  you  assign 
it,  and  explain  all  difficult  points.  Do  not  fail  to  insist  upon  a 
correct  order  of  words.  It  is  a  good  plan  to  train  pupils  to 
arrange  the  English  sentence  mentally  in  the  proper  Latin  order 
before  turning  it  into  Latin. 

If  more  practice  seems  to  be  needed  in  turning  English  into 
Latin  than  the  book  provides,  invent  some  sentences  yourself, 
or  have  the  pupils,  with  closed  books,  translate  into  Latin  at 
your  dictation  the  English  of  the  preceding  Latin  exercise. 

Do  not  have  the  translation  of  the  English  sentences  written 
in  blank  books,  which  are  likely  to  be  handed  down  from  class 


8  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

to  class.  The  Latin  Composition  Tablet,  published  by  Ginn 
and  Company,  will  be  found  serviceable  for  this  purpose,  and 
the  system  suggested  there  of  marking  the  errors  will  save  you 
much  time. 

11.  Sight  Reading.  A  distinguishing  feature  of  the  textbook 
is  the  large  amount  of  simple  Latin  it  contains  in  the  form  of 
dialogues  and  stories.  This  material  will  be  found  well  adapted 
for  sight  translation,  since  the  selections  contain,  as  a  rule,  but 
few  words  not  previously  learned.  Nothing  develops  reading 
power  more  quickly  than  work  of  this  kind  and  it  should  be 
practiced  as  frequently  as  possible. 

12.  General  Vocabulary  and  Index.  Pupils  need  some  in- 
struction in  the  use  of  the  general  Latin- English  vocabulary  and 
the  index.  This  instruction  should  be  given  as  early  as  §  136, 
where  the  general  vocabulary  must  be  used  for  the  first  time. 

13.  Reviews  and  Formulas.  The  lesson  of  the  preceding  day 
should  always  be  reviewed  before  the  work  of  the  day  is  taken  up 
(see  above,  §  6).  In  addition  the  reviews  provided  for  by  the  text- 
book at  frequent  intervals  should  be  made  thorough.  You  will 
find  it  profitable  to  make  each  the  subject  of  a  written  test. 
The  last  three  Lessons  in  the  book  provide  for  a  review  of  all 
the  constructions  that  have  been  discussed.  An  unusually  care- 
ful Study  of  these  Lessons  is  advisable  just  before  taking  up 
Caesar.  It  would  be  a  good  plan,  therefore,  to  go  over  them  a 
second  time  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  year. 

To  insure  completeness  and  uniformity  in  the  answers  to 
certain  constantly  recurring  questions,  the  following  formulas 
are  suggested,  i .  For  describing  nouns :  dominam,  accusative 
singular  from  domina,  dominae,  feminine.  Follow  this  with  the 
rule  for  the  case.  2.  For  describing  adjectives  :  bonarum,  geni- 
tive plural  feminine  from  the  adjective  bonus,  -a,  -um  to  agree 

with  the  noun  .    Follow  with  the  rule  for  the  agreement 

of  adjectives.  3.  For  describing  relative  pronouns :  quos,  accu- 
sative plural  masculine  from  the  relative  qui,  quae,  quod.    It  is 

masculine  plural  to  agree  with  its  antecedent (give  the  rule 

for  the  agreement  of  the  relative);  it  is  in  the  accusative  case 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  .     9 

because  (give  the  reason),  according  to  the  rule  (give  the  rule 
for  the  case  of  the  relative).  4.  For  describing  verbs :  ament, 
active  subjunctive  present  from  amO,  amfire,  amivi,  amatus, 

third  person  plural  number  to  agree  with  its  subject .    It 

is  in  the  subjunctive  mood  because  (give  the  reason  for  the 
mood  and  the  rule). 

It  leads  to  better  results  for  the  teacher  to  designate  in 
advance  in  the  reading  lessons  such  words  as  are  to  be  inflected 
and  parsed. 

THE  LESSONS 

Part  1 1  contains  sixty  Lessons  and  Part  III  nineteen,  the  last 
three  of  which  are  reviews.  This  makes  a  total  of  seventy-sue 
advance  Lessons.  A  class  of  average  ability  should  have  no  diffi- 
culty in  completing  the  first  sixty  Lessons,  with  the  accompanying 
reading  selections,  by  the  Easter  recess.  This  will  leave  sufficient 
time  for  the  completion  of  the  book  by  the  end  of  the  year. 

The  first  six  Lessons  are  used  to  review  and  reestablish  cer- 
tain fundamental  grammatical  principles  and  to  develop  the  mean- 
ing and  value  of  the  case  forms.  American  boys  and  girls  have 
no  conception  of  an  inflected  language,  and  it  is  of  no  profit  to 
them  to  recite  paradigms,  be  it  ever  so  glibly,  unless  they  have 
some  comprehension  of  what  inflection  means.  The  different 
cases  have,  therefore,  been  introduced  one  at  a  time,  and  their 
fundamental  values  established  as  a  prime  essential  to  all  prog- 
ress. It  is  not  until  Lesson  VII,  after  all  the  cases  have  been 
gone  over  individually,  that  the  first  declension  is  given  in  full. 
These  first  Lessons  will  be  found  very  simple,  but  they  have 
a  peculiar  value  in  laying  the  foundation  for  all  that  is  to  follow. 

LESSON  I 

Note.  References  preceded  by  M.  are  to  sections  in  this  Manual. 
All  others  arc  to  the  textbook. 

The  object  of  this  Lesson  is  to  establish  the  simplest  gram- 
matical concepts.    When   assigning  it,  pronounce   and  have 


lO  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

repeated  by  the  class  all  the  Latin  sentences.    Ask  the  pupils 
to  prepare  and  be  ready  to  give  English  sentences  illustrating 
the  subject,  object,  predicate,  and  verb  or  copula. 
Place  special  emphasis  upon  §  22.  a. 

LESSON  II 

When  assigning  this  Lesson,  pronounce  and  have  the  class 
repeat  not  merely  the  Latin  words  in  §§26,30,  but  also  the 
Latin  sentences,  §  31. 11. 

There  are  three  rules  to  be  learned,  §§  25,28,29.  Always 
make  a  point  of  having  all  rules  memorized  verbatim. 

LESSON  III 

Pronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  the  Latin  sentences 
in  §§32.1,  34. 

Point  out  that  the  gist  of  §  32  is  contained  in  the  last  sentence 
in  §  32.^. 

In  teaching  %  2,2)  have  ready  on  the  board  the  left  half  of  the 
table  which  shows  the  English  cases.  Then  construct  the  other 
half  of  the  table  in  the  recitation  period  at  the  dictation  of  the 
pupils. 

LESSON  IV 

When  assigning  this  Lesson,  turn  to  p.  283  and  pronounce  and 
have  the  class  repeat  the  first  vocabulary,  and  emphasize  the 
importance  of  learning  this  thoroughly  before  beginning  work 
on  the  exercises,  §  39.  There  should  be  no  need  of  turning  back 
to  the  vocabulary  if  it  is  properly  learned.    (See  M.  9.) 

Pronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  the  Latin  sentences  in 

§§  39'  40- 

In  answering  such  questions  as  occur  in  the  Conversations, 
as  in  §  40,  train  the  class  to  answer  by  a  complete  sentence  and 
not  merely  by  a  single  word.  For  example,  the  answer  to  the 
first  question  is  not  merely  dea,  but  Diana  est  dea. 

In  the  English-Latin  exercise,  §  39.  II,  insist  upon  proper 
order  of  words.    Unless  emphasis  is  laid  upon  this  point  from 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  1 1 

the  very  outset,  pupils  quickly  get  the  idea  that  the  order  of 
words  is  of  little  consequence.  Have  the  sentences  written  on 
the  board  and  corrected.  Then  have  them  handed  in  for  further 
correction.    (See  M.  lo.) 

LESSON  V 

This  Lesson  is  especially  important  because  it  aims  to  give  the 
fundamental  concept  of  the  dative  case.  In  §  43  the  pupil  is 
warned  against  using  the  dative  to  express  motion  through 
space.  If  he  is  curious  to  know  how  such  a  relation  is  expressed, 
it  will  not  do  any  harm  to  tell  him  that  the  Latin  uses  the  accu- 
sative with  ad  or  in.  That  mere  statement  will  satisfy  him  with- 
out diverting  his  attention  from  the  dative,  the  chief  business  of 
the  hour.  It  will  be  well  to  have  the  class  memorize  the  last 
sentence  in  §  43,  beginning  "  But  the  dative  is  used,"  etc. 

After  the  class  has  pointed  out  the  dative  relations  in  §  43.  a^ 
ask  the  pupils  for  other  examples  in  English  and  give  some  of 
your  own. 

Treat  the  new  vocabulary  as  in  Lesson  IV  and  continue  the 
same  method  in  the  succeeding  Lessons.  Follow  the  suggestions 
in  M.  9. 

Pronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  the  Latin  sentences  in 

§47.1. 

On  the  review  it  is  often  well  for  the  teacher  to  read  the 
Latin  sentences  to  the  class  and  have  the  class  translate  with 
books  closed.  In  the  same  way,  let  the  review  English-Latin 
sentences  be  given  orally  from  dictation. 

LESSON  VI 

This  Lesson  does  for  the  ablative  what  Lesson  V  does  for 
the  dative  and  is  equally  important.  The  three  fundamental 
relations  expressed  by  the  ablative  (§  50.  i,  2,  3)  must  be  firmly 
fixed  in  mind. 

After  the  ablative  relations  in  §  50.  ^  have  been  pointed  out,  ask 
the  pupils  to  give  English  sentences  containing  other  examples. 


12  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

In  §  54  the  statement  is  made  that  the  ending  of  the  adjec- 
tive shows  to  which  noun  it  belongs.  This  is  true,  but  be  care- 
ful not  to  say  that  the  adjective  and  noun  must  have  the  same 
ending.    See  §  84. 

In  connection  with  §  55.  <3;,  have  the  class  give  additional  ex- 
amples in  English  of  predicate  and  attributive  adjectives. 

In  §  56  we  have  the  first  of  the  dialogues.  It  is  a  good  plan 
to  have  some  of  these  memorized  and  spoken  in  parts  on  the 
review. 

LESSON  VII 

In  the  written  declension  of  the  nouns  (§59)  insist  on  the 
correct  marking  of  the  quantities  in  terminations  (see  M.  5) 
and  have  the  translation  of  each  case  written  out  as  in  §  57. 

Effective  drill  on  declension  forms  may  be  secured  by  placing 
on  the  board  a  blank  declension  scheme  as  follows : 

NoM.  Sing. 

Base 

Declension 

Singular  Plural 

NOM.      

Gen.  

Dat.  

Ace.  

Abl.  

Using  a  variety  of  nouns,  point  to  the  blank  spaces  at  random 
calling  for  immediate  replies.  The  exercise  may  be  varied  by  your 
giving  the  English  and  calling  on  the  pupil  for  the  equivalent 
Latin  form  and  its  location  in  the  scheme.  Urge  the  students 
to  make  blank  schemes  of  their  own  and  drill  by  themselves. 

Pupils  will  take  an  interest  in  giving  the  Latin  names  for  the 
persons  and  objects  in  the  picture  (p.  27).  Doubtless  the  best 
in  the  class  will  want  to  know  the  Latin  for  other  objects  than 
those  covered  by  the  preceding  vocabularies.  It  will  do  no  harm 
to  satisfy  this  encouraging  curiosity,  though  the  pupils  should  not 
be  expected  to  remember  the  words.   Among  these  are  the  door 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  1 3 

(Unua)  and  window  (fenestra)  of  the  cottage ;  the  wall  (mttrus) 
at  the  left ;  the  water  jar  (uma)  at  the  right  of  the  door ;  the 
vine  (vitis)  growing  against  the  cottage ;  the  oil  flask  (guttus) 
on  the  window  sill ;  the  bowl  (patella)  from  which  the  farmer 
is  eating ;  the  basket  (canistrum)  from  which  the  girl  is  scatter- 
ing the  grain  (frfimentum);  and  the  villa  (villa)  on  the  hill  (collis) 
with  its  buildings  (aedificia)  and  trees  (arborfis). 

LESSON  VIII 

Begin  the  recitation  by  asking  the  questions  in  §  63.  The 
agreement  of  the  nouns  and  adjectives  will  naturally  lead  up  to 
drill  on  the  rule,  §  65. 

When  adjectives  and  nouns  are  declined  together,  either  orally 
or  at  the  board,  do  not  permit  pupils  to  give  first  the  noun  com- 
plete and  then  the  adjective  complete,  but  let  each  noun  form 
be  followed  at  once  by  its  corresponding  adjective,  as,  domina 
bona,  dominae  bonae,  dominae  bonae,  etc. 

Cultivate  in  your  pupils  from  the  very  outset  a  proper  regard 
for  the  order  of  words.  In  §  69  note  the  special  emphasis  resting 
on  Long^ae  in  i,  on  mei  in  2,  on  litA  in  3,  on  altas  in  4,  on  tui 
and  mea  in  6,  on  lata  and  Longft  in  7,  on  fUiabus  in  8,  and  on 
cUra  in  9. 

FIRST  REVIEW 

It  would  be  well  to  spend  two  days  on  this  review,  devoting 
the  first  to  a  review  of  the  vocabulary  and  the  second  to  a 
review  of  the  grammar.  A  good  way  to  handle  the  vocabulary 
review  is  to  allow  two  pupils  to  choose  sides,  and  engage  in  a 
vocabulary  contest,  conducting  it  like  a  spelling  match.  Go 
over  both  the  Latin- English  and  English-Latin  vocabularies. 

The  grammar  review  may  most  profitably  be  made  the  basis 
of  a  written  test.  Fill  out  the  summary,  §  505,  on  the  board, 
the  pupils  dictating ;  or  include  it  in  the  written  test. 


14  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

LESSON  IX 

Note  that  in  the  declension  of  nouns  in  -us  the  vocative  sin- 
gular should  be  given  because  it  is  different  from  the  nominative. 

Tell  the  pupils  that  in  Early  Latin  the  endings  -us  and  -um 
were  -os  and  -om.  That  will  make  clearer  to  them  the  reason 
for  calling  this  the  (9-Declension. 

Make  a  blank  scheme  of  the  Second  Declension  as  you  did 
of  the  First  and  drill  in  the  same  way. 

Be  sure  that  every  pupil  can  repeat  the  five  general  rules  for 
declension,  §  j^-.a-e. 

When  you  pronounce  the  vocabulary  (p.  285)  emphasize  the 
distinction  between  the  sound  of  long  and  short  0  in  such  words 
as  constantia  and  oppidum.  Note  that  equus  is  a  word  of  two 
syllables  (see  §  7,  sound  of  qu).  Explain  that  the  legatus, 
usually  translated  Izeu^enanf,  was,  in  the  Roman  army,  an  officer 
of  high  rank  and  second  in  command  to  the  general  himself. 

LESSON  X 

The  nouns  and  adjectives  assigned  for  declension  at  the  end 
of  §  79  should  be  declined  both  orally  and  at  the  board. 

Make  a  blank  scheme  of  noun  and  adjective  together  and 
use  it  for  drill. 

In  pronouncing  the  vocabulary  (p.  285)  the  word  populus 
.needs  special  care.  Pupils  are  prone  to  sound  the  0  long  or 
else  to  give  it  the  sound  of  English  short  0,  as  in  not. 

In  §  82. 1.  10,  be  sure  that  laborant  is  accented  on  the  penult 

In  §  82. 11.  I  and  3,  refer  the  pupils  to  §  77,  footnote  i,  for 
the  correct  translation  of  does  praise  and  does  love. 

LESSON  XI 

Place  on  the  board  a  blank  scheme  of  the  complete  adjective 
declension  and  drill  on  it  until  replies  are  immediate. 

§  84  will  need  careful  explanation  and  illustration. 

In  §  86. 1.  4,  drill  on  the  pronunciation  of  Populus  Romanus 
to  bring  out  the  distinction  between  long  and  short  0. 


TEAC'HKKS'   MANUAL  I  5 

LKSSON   XII 

Have  the  words  assigned  for  declension  at  the  end  of  §  89 
declined  both  orally  and  at  the  board.  Point  out  the  fact  that 
words  in  -lus  and  -ium  are  declined  exactly  like  words  in  -us 
and  -um  except  for  the  genitive  and  vocative  singular. 

In  §  90.  II  we  have  the  first  selection  of  connected  reading. 
Take  special  pains  with  the  pronunciation  and  try  to  secure 
effective  reading.    Have  the  class  review  §  17. 

LESSON  XIII 

When  taking  up  this  Lesson  refer  the  class  to  §71,  and  show 
that  the  nouns  in  -us  and  -um  being  disposed  of,  those  ending 
in  -er  and  -ir  remain  to  be  discussed.  Emphasize  the  fact 
mentioned  in  §  92.  ^. 

To  the  words  assigned  for  declension  in  §  94  add  servus 
pulchcr  and  equus  aeger  (sick)  to  afford  drill  on  a  -ue  noun 
with  an  -er  adjective. 

Use  blank  schemes  of  the  complete  adjective  and  of  adjective 
with  noun  for  thorough  drill  on  the  whole  subject  of  first-  and 
second-  declension  nouns  and  adjectives. 

When  selection  §  95  is  read,  the  introductory  map  of  Italy 
should  be  used  for  reference. 

When  the  dialogue  §  96  is  read,  have  the  pupils  find  in  the 
picture  the  offensive  and  defensive  weapons  of  the  legionary. 

LESSON  XIV 

The  table  of  possessives  in  §  98  should  be  memorized.  §  98. « 
is  exceedingly  important  and  will  need  careful  explanation  and 
full  illustration. 

In  the  vocabulary,  p.  286,  be  sure  that  magister  is  accented 
on  the  penult. 

§99.1.2.  'S.9X.  — there  is.  4.  Note  the  emphasis  on  tua  as 
shown  by  its  position.  7.  Tua  is  emphatic.  8.  Mea  is  emphatic. 
1 1 .  Translate,  Our  camp  is  yours.    1 2.  Cf.  2. 

§99.11.6.  The  camp  w  =  castra  sunt,  because  in  Latin 
castra  is  plural 


l6  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 


LESSON  XV 


The  important  point  to  emphasize  in  this  Lesson  is  that  the 
expression  of  cause,  means,  accompanimeiit,  and  manner  are  all 
included  in  the  with  relation  of  the  ablative  (cf.  Lesson  XXX, 
where  ih^from  relation  is  discussed). 

After  disposing  of  §  io6  the  pupils  should  be  asked  to  give 
other  examples  in  English  expressing  similar  relations. 

In  §  1 07. 1,  place  the  emphasis  upon  the  different  uses  of  the 
ablative. 

In  §  107.  II.  5,  point  out  that  not  only  with  but  also  because 
of  or  for  may  be  used  in  English  to  denote  cause.  Sometimes 
from  has  the  same  signification,  but  it  is  not  included  here  be- 
cause it  is  better  to  keep  this  preposition  free  for  the  expression 
of  the  separative  ablative  and  not  to  confuse  the  pupil's  mind 
by  using  it  in  other  relations. 

LESSON  XVI 

Be  sure  that  the  pupils  accent  the  genitives  in  -ius  on  the 
penult. 

Have  the  list  recited  several  times  and  have  it  put  on  the 
board  with  English  equivalents. 

§  1 1 1 . 1. 7.  Alterius  is  used  here  instead  of  alius.  (See  §  i  o^.a.) 
So  also  in  9. 

§  1 1 1.  II.  4.  /«  our  fort  =  in  castris  nostris.  6.  To  the  other 
town,  not  the  dative. 

LESSON  XVII 

§  1 1 4.  The  comparison  suggested  between  the  declension  of 
is  and  that  of  alius  shows  that  the  case  terminations  are  practi- 
cally the  same. 

§  1 15.  This  table  need  not  be  memorized,  but  should  be  care- 
fully read  and  used  for  reference. 

§  116.  The  distinction  between  suus  and  is  expressing  pos- 
session is  of  vital  importance,  and  pupils  are  usually  slow  to 
grasp  it.  In  the  examples  it  may  be  pointed  out  that  Galba  eius 
filium  vocat  may  mean  also  Galba  calls  her  son,  and  lulia  eius 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  1 7 

liberOs  vocat  may  mean  Julia  calls  his  children.  Ask  the  class 
to  translate  Viri  e&rum  puerOs  laudant. 

In  the  vocabulary  (j).  287)  point  out  that  the  English  word 
agriculture  is  regularly  written  in  Latin  as  two  words.  The  adverb 
qu6  is  often  translated  where,  but  qu6  is  always  used  with  verbs 
of  motion  and  is  thus  distinguished  from  ubi,  where,  used  in  ex- 
pressions of  rest.  For  example,  Ubi  est  Galba  ?  where  is  Galba  1 
but  Qu6  Galba  properat  ?  where  is  Galba  hastening  1 

§117.  The  point  should  be  made  that  while  other  adjec- 
tives, unless  emphatic,  usually  follow  their  nouns,  demonstrative 
adjectives  usually  precede  them.  We  therefore  say  is  carrus, 
ea  fftma,  etc. 

In  the  dialogue  (§  118)  departures  from  the  normal  order 
are  shown  by  Neutrius  filius  est  puer ;  ad  latSs  Sexti  agrOs ; 
Agricolaene  sunt  Galli ;  Bellum  amant  Galli,  nOn  agri  culturam  ; 
Apud  eds  ;  laudat  eds  ;  saepe ;  Mala  ;  saepe ;  miseri ;  multis. 

SECOND  REVIEW 

Conduct  this  review  like  the  first  one  (see  p.  13).  The  fol- 
lowing Lesson  should  not  be  taken  up  until  all  the  ground 
covered  thus  far  has  been  mastered. 

LESSON  XVIII 

It  will  be  well  to  make  sure  that  the  class  can  conjugate  the 
regular  English  verb  in  the  indicative  before  taking  up  the 
Latin  conjugation. 

§  120.  Compare  the  names  given  to  the  tenses  in  Latin  with 
those  used  in  English. 

§  123.  The  present  stem  of  sum  is  es-,  sometimes  weakened 
to  8-.  An  s  between  two  vowels  is  regularly  changed  to  r,  hence 
eram,  erO,  etc.  are  for  esam,  esO,  etc.  The  vowels  following  the  stem 
in  the  present  are  thematic  vowels,  those  following  it  in  the  im- 
perfect and  future  are  tense  signs.  These  facts  should  be  known 
to  the  teacher  to  meet  possible  inquiries  of  bright  pupils.  If  no 
questions  are  asked,  nothing  need  be  said  about  tln-m  at  this  stage. 


I8  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

Be  sure  that  your  pupils  give  the  correct  sound  of  S  in  these 
forms.    They  will  sound  it  lo7ig  if  not  warned. 

Make  a  blank  scheme  of  these  three  tenses  and  drill  on  them 
until  the  pupils  can  give  any  form  and  its  translation  instantly. 

In  writing  these  inflections,  instruct  the  class  to  separate  by 
a  hyphen  the  personal  ending  of  each  form  from  what  precedes. 

The  dialogue  in  §  124  brings  into  use  every  form  of  sum 
thus  far  learned.  Have  it  memorized,  or,  on  the  review,  have 
the  class,  with  books  closed,  translate  it  sentence  by  sentence 
as  you  read  it. 

In  §  125.  9,  explain  that  because  is  not  a  conjunction  but  a 
preposition,  and  that  because  of  industry  is  to  be  translated  by 
an  ablative  of  cause. 

LESSON  XIX 

§  126.  The  word  stem  is  here  used  for  the  first  time.  It  is 
explained  in  the  footnote,  but  will  need  additional  explanation 
from  the  teacher. 

Instill  from  the  outset  correct  methods  of  reciting  and  writing 
verb  forms.    (See  M.  8.) 

§  129.  Pronounce  each  verb  in  this  list  with  its  infinitive,  and 
have  the  class  repeat. 

§  130.  In  English  the  three  forms  of  expression  are  called 
respectively  the /r<?j-^;z/,  \h^  progressive  present ^  and  the  emphatic 
present. 

Vary  the  recitation  of  verbs  by  calling  for  the  active  indicative 
present  of  the  verbs  love  and  advise  in  English,  requiring  pupils 
to  translate  each  person  and  number  into  Latin. 

LESSON  XX 

Have  students  at  the  board  write  both  the  present  and  im- 
perfect of  the  verbs  in  §  129.  Require  them  to  separate  the 
component  parts  of  each  form  by  hyphens,  as,  ama-s,  ama-ba-s. 

In  the  oral  work  make  sure  that  the  accent  is  properly  placed. 

Lay  stress  on  §  134.  After  students  have  learned  the  perfect 
they  are  inclined  to  the  error  that  either  the  imperfect  or  perfect 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  I9 

may  be  used  indiscriminately  to  express  past  time.  The  dis- 
tinctive force  of  the  imperfect  should  be  made  clear  from  the 
outset. 

§  136.  Insist  on  the  correct  pronunciation  of  proper  names. 
Here,  for  example,  NCo-be  has  three  syllables  with  the  accent 
on  the  first. 

At  this  point  instruct  the  class  in  the  use  of  the  Latin-English 
vocabulary. 

LESSON  XXI 

Conduct  the  written  work  as  in  the  preceding  Lesson.  Stu- 
dents should  now  be  asked  to  write  the  first  three  tenses  of  the 
verbs  in  §  129. 

The  accent  of  the  future  will  give  no  trouble  if  pupils  are 
shown  that  it  rests  throughout  on  the  final  vowel  of  the  present 
stem. 

§  1 40.  Note  the  emphatic  order  of  Du5s  liberOs  habet  LStOna ; 
quattuordecim  habeO  ego,  and  the  emphatic  position  of  mea. 

After  completing  §  1 40  the  whole  story  should  be  read  through 
from  the  beginning. 

LESSON  XXII 

Before  taking  up  this  Lesson  read  to  the  class,  sentence  by 
sentence,  the  story  of  Niobe,  and  have  them  translate  it  with 
books  closed. 

§  141.  Put  on  the  board  a  blank  scheme  of  these  three  tenses 
and  use  it  for  drill. 

§  145. 1.  9.  Ask  why  ad  silvam  could  not  be  expressed  by 
the  dative. 

Vocabulary,  p.  288.  Gi-l-U8  is  a  word  of  three  syllables.  So 
Iso  an-ti'quu8.    See  §  7  for  sound  of  qu. 

§  146.  Let  the  class  try  to  translate  this  selection  at  sight. 
( 'all  attention  to  the  difference  between  the  Latin  and  English 
pronunciation  of  the  name  Cornelia.  Note  the  emphatic  posi- 
tion of  magnO. 


20  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 


LESSON  XXIII 


Be  sure  that  the  class  knows  the  first  three  tenses  of  the  first 
and  second  conjugations  before  taking  up  the  third  and  fourth. 

§  147.  Pronounce  these  paradigms  before  assigning  them. 
Note  that  the  e  in  rego  is  short. 

§  1 48.  Require  the  class  to  learn  the  meanings  of  these  verbs. 
Call  for  both  oral  and  board  work  on  these  inflections. 

After  completing  §  150  the  whole  story  should  be  read  from 
the  beginning. 

Ask  the  class  to  explain  the  different  positions  of  mei  and  mea. 

LESSON  XXIV 

§151.4.  Have  some  verbs  of  the  first  and  second  conjuga- 
tions inflected  along  with  those  of  the  third  and  fourth. 

§  153.  Make  prominent  the  fact  that  the  verbs  in  the  list 
are  intransitive  in  Latin,  and  that  their  meaning  is  such  as  to 
demand  an  indirect  object. 

§  155.  English-Latin  sentences  calling  for  the  use  of  the 
dative  with  intransitive  verbs  will  be  found  in  §  158.  II.  6-12. 

LESSON  XXV 

§  156.  Pupils  always  find  difficulty  in  mastering  this  tense 
because  of  the  new  tense  sign  and  this  Lesson  will  require  an 
unusual  amount  of  drill. 

Have  verbs  of  the  first  and  second  conjugations  inflected  in 
the  future  along  with  those  of  the  third  and  fourth. 

§158.11.6.  The  pronoun  /(ego)  needs  expression  here 
because  it  is  emphatic.  7.  The  possessive  our  (nostris)  should 
precede  its  noun  because  of  the  emphasis.  9.  They  is  emphatic ; 
express  by  ii. 

LESSON  XXVI 

%  160.  Write  on  the  board  in  parallel  columns  the  first  three 
tenses  of  audio  and  capiO.  Impress  upon  the  class  the  resem- 
blances and  differences. 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL 


21 


§  i6o.  2.  Require  the  pupils  to  learn  the  meanings  of  these 
four  verbs. 

§  1 6 1 .  The  imperative  mood  is  introduced  at  this  point  rather 
than  later  because  of  its  being  formed  on  the  present  stem,  thus 
completing  the  formation  of  the  active  tenses  on  this  stem  in 
the  indicative,  infinitive,  and  imperative. 


THIRD  REVIEW 

Conduct  the  vocabulary  review  like  the  first  one  (see  p.  13). 
I'he  number  of  words  is  less  than  usual  to  permit  of  more 
concentration  on  the  review  of  the  verb  forms. 

For  reviewing  the  verb,  place  upon  the  board  the  following 
blank  scheme  and  use  a  variety  of  verbs  for  drill  on  the  different 
conjugations : 

Verk      Present  Infinitive      Present  Stem 


Indicative 
Mood 


Imperative 


{■ 


Tense 


Present 

Imperfect 
Tense  sign  -ba- 

FUTURE  r 

ri,  ii,-bi-         i 
^•s"«liii.iv,-a..^  1 


Present 


{= 


I'LUR, 


Mood       j^ 

§511.   Make  the  review  questions  the  basis  of  a  written  lesson. 


LESSON  XXVII 


lie  sure  that  the  active  forms  are  thoroughly  learned  before 
taking  up  the  passive. 

§  164.  Require  the  pupils  to  write  side  by  side  the  active  and 
the  passive  personal  endings  for  the  purpose  of  comparison. 


22  LATIN   FOR  BEGINNERS 

§  165.  When  assigning  these  paradigms  pronounce  them 
and  have  the  class  repeat.  You  may  have  to  do  this  several 
times  before  they  are  given  correctly.  The  future  will  give  the 
most  trouble. 

In  written  work  require  the  pupils,  as  in  the  case  of  the  active 
forms,  to  separate  the  component  parts  —  stem,  tense  sign, 
personal  ending  —  of  each  form  by  hyphens. 

§166.  Intransitive  verbs  are  sometimes  used  impersonally 
in  the  passive,  as  maturatur,  it  is  hastened,  but  there  is  no  ad- 
vantage in  burdening  the  beginner's  mind  with  that  point  at 
this  time. 

§  167.  II.  3  and  5.  It  is  well  to  remember  that  the  verb  move 
is  always  transitive  in  Latin  and  in  a  sentence  would  have  an 
object.  Such  expressions,  therefore,  as  you  move  and  you  will 
move  are  inserted  simply  for  practice  on  the  paradigms. 

Vocabulary,  p.  288.  Have  the  declension  of  deus,  §  468, 
learned  at  this  time. 

LESSON  XXVIII 

§  169.    Treat  this  article  the  same  as  §  165. 

§  169.  c.  Assign  some  verbs  of  the  first  and  second  conjuga- 
tions for  inflection  along  with  those  of  the  third  and  fourth. 

Vocabulary,  p.  288.  In  connection  with  autem  teach  the 
class  the  meaning  of  the  word  postpositive. 

§  171.  Call  attention  to  the  emphatic  position  of  Mala  and 
the  emphatic  order  of  Earn  amabat  Cepheus  maxime. 

LESSON  XXIX 

§  172.  In  connection  with  work  on  the  -iO  verbs  assign  for 
inflection  some  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  for  comparison. 

Vocabulary,  p.  289.  The  word  locus  has  also  the  regular 
masculine  plural  loci ;  but  this  does  not  mean  localities,  but  places 
ox  passages  in  books. 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  23 

LESSON  XXX 

§  177.  In  synopses  give  first  the  active  voice  throughout  and 
then  the  passive.  This  exercise  may  be  varied  by  giving  an 
active  form  and  then  its  corresponding  passive.  Also  the  teacher 
may  give  the  synopsis  in  English  and  call  for  the  corresponding 
Latin.  The  emphasis  in  synopses  is  laid  on  the  third  person, 
singular  and  plural,  because  these  forms  occur  in  reading  much 
more  frequently  than  the  others. 

§  178.  The  constructions  flowing  from  ^t  from  relation  of 
the  ablative  are  as  important  as  those  based  on  the  with  relation. 
(See  Lesson  XV.)  They  are  all  embraced  under  the  separative 
ablative  so  called,  but  it  is  well  to  make  sparing  use  of  this  term 
to  avoid  confusion  in  the  beginner's  mind  between  it  and  the 
ablative  of  separation.  By  using  the  expression  the  ablative  denot- 
ing from  for  the  general  term  all  danger  of  confusion  is  avoided. 

§  181.  While  the  English  idiom  requires  the  use  of  by  in 
translating  ft  or  ab  with  the  ablative  of  the  personal  agent,  it  is 
important  for  the  pupil  to  remember  that  to  the  Roman  the 
preposition  always  meant  yrt/w. 

§  181.^.  Write  on  the  board  a  number  of  simple  Latin 
sentences  to  illustrate  this  point. 

§  181.  r.  This  point  will  require  clear  explanation  and  many 
illustrative  examples. 

Vocabulary,  p.  289.  In  absum  do  not  forget  that  b  before  s 
has  the  sound  of/.    (See  §  7.) 

§  182.  I .  Place,  in  the  dative.  3.  Island,  ad  with  the  accusative. 
5.   They  are  kept  from  the  land,  ft  terrft  prohibentur. 

LESSON  XXXI 

With  this  Lesson  we  take  up  the  perfect  stem  and  the  tenses 
formed  from  it 

§  185.  Require  the  class  to  inflect  some  regular  English  verbs 
in  the  present  perfect,  past  perfect,  and  future  perfect  active. 
Oftentimes  failure  to  translate  the  Latin  tenses  correctly  is  due 
to  ignorance  of  the  meaning  of  the  corresponding  English  tenses. 


24  LATIN   FOR  BEGINNERS 

§  1 86.  Observe  that  these  endings  are  not  called  personal 
endings  though  they  do  serve  to  point  out  person  and  number. 
Historically  they  are  made  up  of  personal  endings  and  other 
elements,  some  of  which  are  of  unknown  origin.  (See  Allen  and 
Greenough,  §  163.  a,  footnote  3.) 

§  187.  Pronounce  and  let  the  class  repeat  these  paradigms 
before  assigning  them  as  a  lesson.  The  perfect  is  the  tense  that 
will  make  the  most  trouble  owing  to  the  shifting  accent. 

§  188.  Note  the  emphatic  position  of  Alii,  multum,  Dubia, 
magno,  semper,  saepe. 

§  189.  7.  Observe  that  the  English  present  are  may  have 
the  force  of  the  future  perfect  and  must  then  be  so  translated. 

LESSON  XXXII 

§  190.  It  will  pay  to  spend  considerable  time  on  this  article. 
Use  a  variety  of  English  sentences  to  illustrate  the  difference 
between  the  perfect  definite,  the  perfect  indefinite,  and  the  im- 
perfect. Pupils  usually  fail  to  distinguish  between  the  perfect 
indefinite  and  the  imperfect. 

§  191.  The  perfects  of  all  four  conjugations  are  here  given 
together.  This  is  contrary  to  the  usual  custom,  but,  as  the  for- 
mation is  exactly  the  same  for  all,  nothing  would  be  gained  by 
separating  them,  and  there  would  be  a  loss  of  time  and  of  unity 
of  treatment.   Pronounce  the  paradigms  before  assigning  them. 

§191.  I.  It  is  obvious  that  the  perfect  is  apt  to  be  quite 
different  in  form  from  the  present.  It  is  generally  formed  in 
one  of  four  ways : 

1.  By  adding  a  suffix  to  the  root  or  to  the  present  stem,  as, 
amavi  (ama-vi),  monui  (mon-ui),  rexi  (rgg-si),  audivi  (audi-vi). 
To  this  we  may  compare  the  English  suffix  -ed^  as  in  love^  loved. 

2.  By  a  change  in  the  root  vowel,  as,  Pres.  capiS,  Perf.  cepi ; 
Pres.  veni5,  Perf.  vgni.    Cf.  English  teach^  taught. 

3.  By  repeating  the  first  letter  of  the  verb,  usually  with  a 
vowel,  as,  dO,  I  give,  dedi,  I  have  given  ;  reperiS,  I  find,  repperi, 
I  have  found  i^i^x^  only  the/  is  repeated  and  no  vowel  appears). 
Compare  English,  do^  did. 


TEACHERS*  MANUAL  25 

4.  Sometimes  the  perfect  stem  is  like  the  present  stem,as,  vertO, 
I  turn,  verti,  I  have  turned.  Cf.  English  mt  (pres.),  cut  (past). 

How  much  of  the  above  may  be  safely  given  to  a  class  of 
beginners  must  be  left  to  the  judgment  of  the  individual  teacher. 

§  192.  These  verbs  are  already  familiar  to  the  class  and  the 
perfects  are  the  only  new  forms. 

§  193.    Review  §§  168,  171,  before  reading  this  selection. 

Kequire  the  pupils  to  point  out  words  and  expressions  that 
are  emphatic. 

LESSON  XXXIII 

This  Lesson  completes  the  consideration  of  the  forms  based 
on  the  perfect  stem.  All  four  conjugations  are  treated  together 
as  in  the  preceding  Lesson.  Pronounce  the  paradigms  and  have 
the  class  repeat  before  assigning  them. 

LESSON  XXXIV 

§  197.  Pupils  should  be  able  to  reproduce  this  table  of  tense 
formations  from  memory. 

§  198.  Emphasize  the  importance  of  being  able  to  give 
synopses  rapidly  and  accurately,  and  make  the  drill  on  the 
verbs  in  §  198.  i   severe. 

§199.  The  verbs  in  this  list  together  with  those  in  §192 
include  all  the  verbs  studied  in  the  preceding  lessons  excepting 
the  regular  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation. 

§  200.  Ask  the  pupils  to  close  their  books,  and  read  to  them, 
sentence  by  sentence,  the  preceding  portion  of  the  story,  and 
call  on  individuals  for  the  translation. 

Ask  for  the  principal  parts  and  inflection  in  the  tense  used 
of  all  the  verbs  in  this  paragraph. 

LESSON  XXXV 

This  Lesson  is  of  unusual  importance  because  it  introdiirr*; 
the  participial  stem  and  the  tenses  and  forms  built  on  it. 

§  203.  Emphasize  the  point  that  a  participle  is  declined  like  an 
adjective  and  agrees  with  its  noun  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 


26  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

§  204.  A  compound  tense  is  one  made  up  of  a  participle  and 
an  auxiliary  verb. 

Write  on  the  board  a  number  of  simple  Latin  sentences  to 
illustrate  this  principle  of  agreement,  and,  leaving  off  the  termi- 
nation of  the  participle  in  each  case,  call  on  the  class  to  supply 
the  proper  terminations. 

§  206.  Call  attention  to  the  fact  that  the  future  active  parti- 
ciple and  its  allied  form,  the  future  active  infinitive,  are  the  only 
forms  in  the  active  voice  based  on  the  participial  stem.^ 

§  207.  The  point  to  emphasize  in  this  exercise  is  the  agree- 
ment of  the  participle. 

In  I.  7,  ask  what  vocati  sumus  would  have  meant. 

LESSON  XXXVI 

§  208.  See  to  it  that  the  principal  parts  and  meanings  of  these 
verbs  are  thoroughly  learned. 

Caution  against  mistakes  in  accent  and  pronunciation,  espe- 
cially in  the  following : 

ab'sum  abes'se  a'fui  afutu'rus 

resis'to  resis'tere  res'titi 

repe'rio  reperi're  rep'peri  reper'tus 

Point  out  the  changing  quantity  of  i  in  video  and  of  e  in  veniO, 
and  have  the  class  distinguish  between  such  forms  as  videre  and 
videre,  venit  and  v6nit. 

§  209. 1,  2.  These  articles  summarize  preceding  scattered  work 
on  prepositions.  Show  that  by  learning  what  prepositions  govern 
the  ablative  we  can  recognize  those  that  govern  the  accusative. 

The  complete  list  of  prepositions  governing  the  ablative  in- 
cludes also  absque,  cOram,  prae,  and  tenus.  They  are  omitted 
from  the  textbook  because  of  their  relatively  infrequent  use. 

§  210.^.  The  e  in  -ne  has  a  very  short,  quick  sound.  The 
enclitic  is  added  to  the  emphatic  word  in  the  question  and  that 
is  usually  the  verb. 

1  The  supine  is  not  discussed  in  this  book  and  hence  is  not  included. 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL 


27 


Vocabulary,  p.  290.    Caution  on  the  accent  of  sinis'ter. 
Note  that  the  word  ubl  is  never  used  in  the  sense  of  inter- 
rogative when.    For  that  the  Latin  uses  quandO. 


FOURTH   REVIEW 

This  review,  like  the  third,  contains  but  a  short  word  list, 
vocabularies  in  the  preceding  lessons  having  been  reduced  to  a 
minimum  to  permit  of  greater  concentration  on  the  verb.  To 
facilitate  verb  drill  place  on  the  board  the  following  scheme  and 
leave  it  there  for  daily  use  until  the  pupils  can  give  instantly  any 
form  of  any  verb  of  which  they  know  the  principal  parts. 

Verb 

Prin.  Parts  

Stems  


Active  Voice 

Passive  Voice 

Pres.  Stem  —        Perf.  Stem  — 

Pres.  Stem  —        Part. 

Sti 

Indicative 

Indicative 

Pres. 

2. Perf.. 

2. 

Pres.    h 

2. Perf.  ^ 

'  I. 

2. 

u- — 

.3- 

.3- 

.3- 

Inuf. 

Impf. 
(-ba-) 

2. Plup.  .< 

.3- 

2. 
.3- 

FuT. 

',. FUT. 

ri. 

FUT. 

{'- 

(-bi-or 

"2. Perf.- 

(-bi-or  . 

2. 

-i-.nd-»- 

[3. (^ri-) 

.3- 

-i-«.d-«-) 

.3- 

IMPERATIVE 

Imper 

ATIVE 

Pres. 

2. 

Infinitive 

Pres. 

Infinitive 

Pres. 

—           Perf.      — 

Pres. 

—           Perf. 

FUT. 

—           (Pari 

r.  Stem) 

LESSON  XXXVII 


§  212.  When  assigning  the  inflection  of  possum,  pronounce 
its  forms  and  have  the  pupils  repeat.  Caution  on  the  accent, 
especially  in  the  present  and  the  perfect  indicative. 


28  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

§  §  2 1 3-2 16.  Be  sure  that  the  pupils  understand  these  English 
infinitive  constructions  before  taking  up  the  corresponding  ones 
in  Latin.  To  this  end  write  on  the  board  a  number  of  simple 
English  sentences  illustrative  of  these  different  uses  of  the  in- 
finitive. After  discussing  them  from  the  English  standpoint, 
show  how  they  would  have  to  be  expressed  in  Latin  ;  and,  if  the 
sentences  are  simple  enough,  they  may  be  translated  into  Latin. 

§  214.  You  might  explain  that  the  subject  of  the  infinitive 
was  originally  thought  of  as  the  object  of  the  principal  verb 
and  for  that  reason  it  was  placed  in  the  accusative  case. 

§  215.  A  verb  of  incomplete  predication  is  one  that  requires 
another  action  of  the  same  subject  to  complete  its  meaning. 

Vocabulary,  p.  291.  Observe  that  veto  is  an  irregular  verb  of 
the  first  conjugation.   Look  out  for  the  accent  in  ve'tui,  ve'titus. 

§  217. 1.  2.  Cibo  et  vino,  ablative  of  separation  with  egere, 
which  is  the  subject  of  est.  11.  Id  .  .  .  occupari,  subject  of  erit. 
Romanis,  dative  with  gratum. 

LESSON  XXXVIII 

§221.  Pronounce  this  paradigm  when  assigning  it.  Note  the 
ending  -ius  in  the  genitive  and  -i  in  the  dative,  as  in  the  nine 
irregular  adjectives  (§  108). 

§  226.  Quis  is  not  infrequently  used  as  an  adjective,  but  it 
seems  better  not  to  mention  it  in  this  connection  in  order  that 
the  distinction  between  pronoun  and  adjective  may  be  left  as 
clear  as  possible. 

§  228. 1.  In  this  exercise  place  the  emphasis  upon  the  forms 
and  constructions  of  the  interrogatives  and  relatives.  With  the 
relative  dwell  especially  upon  the  point  that  its  case  is  determined 
by  the  way  it  is  used  in  its  own  clause. 

The  cut  on  p.  1 00  should  afford  material  for  a  brief  discussion 
of  the  life  and  customs  of  the  ancient  Germans.  Note  the 
return  home  of  the  warriors,  and  the  captive  Roman  with  fettered 
hands.  Perhaps  you  have  enough  ingenuity  to  construct  a  litde 
Latin  story  with  the  picture  as  a  text. 

§  229.  Let  the  class  try  to  read  this  passage  at  sight. 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  29 

LESSON  XXXIX 

Up  to  this  point,  in  discussing  declensions  we  have  worked 
from  the  base,  as  this  is  of  more  practical  value  to  the  student  in 
learning  the  forms.  In  the  third  declension,  however,  the  start- 
ing point  must  be  the  stem,  because  third-declension  nouns  are 
classified  according  to  their  stem  ending.  Take  time  to  make 
clear  to  the  pupils  the  difference  between  the  base  and  the  stem. 

Vocabulary,  p.  291.  Call  attention  to  the  difference  in  quan- 
tity between  pedes,  a  foot  soldier,  and  pedes,  feet,  the  plural 
of  p6s. 

§234.11.1.  The  word  to  be  used  for  ship  is  nivigium. 
4.  Translate y>v/w  by  d6  (see  §  179.  a). 

LESSON  XL 

§  235.  It  is  important  to  emphasize  the  point  that  nouns  of 
Class  II  are  exactly  like  those  of  Class  I  except  for  the  absence 
of  -s  in  the  nominative  singular.  The  multiplicity  of  paradigms 
is  apt  to  confuse  the  beginner  unless  their  practical  identity  is 
made  very  clear. 

Vocabulary,  p.  291.  Point  out  that  the  declension  of  homd, 
hominis  is  exactly  like  that  of  6rd6,  Ordinis. 

§  237.  II.  2.  To  your  dwelling,  why  not  render  by  the  dative } 
3.  From  wrong,  what  use  of  the  ablative  ?  6.  The  baggage,  etc., 
see  §  213. 

LESSON  XLI 

§  238.  Note  that  these  neuter  nouns  also  belong  to  Class  II 
of  consonant  stems. 

There  is  more  difference  here  between  the  base  and  the 
nominative.  This  increases  the  importance  of  always  learning 
the  genitive  with  the  nominative. 

§  238.  I.  The  most  important  of  these  rules  as  applied  to 
this  declension  is  §  74.  ^. 

§  239.  I.  9.  Bracchiis  suis,  in  his  arms,  in  Latin  by  his  armSf 
abl.  of  means.    10.  Virtute,  abl.  of  cause. 


30  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

For  saving  the  life  of  a  citizen  in  battle  the  reward  was  a 
crown  of  oak  leaves  known  as  the  corona  civica.  See  the  cut, 
p.  1 06,  of  a  coin  bearing  the  corona  civica  and  the  inscription 
ob  civis  servatos,  for  the  savmg  of  citizens. 

LESSON  XLII 

Dwell  on  this  Lesson  until  you  are  sure  that  consonant  stems 
of  the  third  declension  have  been  mastered. 

In  connection  with  the  translation  of  this  selection  read  to 
the  class  from  some  Roman  history  a  short  and  spirited  account 
of  the  invasion  of  the  Cimbri  and  Teutones  and  the  great  battle 
in  which  they  were  destroyed  by  Caius  Marius. 

§  240.  Dili  et  acriter  pugnatum  est,  the  battle  was  lo?ig  and 
fiercely  contested. 

LESSON  XLIII 

§  241.  Teach  the  class  that  the  first  thing  always  to  be 
done  with  a  noun  of  the  third  declension,  before  it  can  be 
declined,  is  to  determine  whether  or  not  it  is  an  i-stem.  To  do 
this,  mastery  of  the  rules  in  this  article  is  absolutely  essential. 
Call  on  each  pupil  to  repeat  them,  and  review  them  at  frequent 
intervals. 

§  243.  When  writing  declensions  of  i-stems,  require  pupils  to 
write  both  the  stem  and  the  base.,  as  shown  in  the  paradigms. 

§  243.  I.  Require  this  list  to  be  memorized. 

§  244.  2.  Animal  and  calcar  are  examples  of  the  dropping  of 
the  final  -i-  of  the  stem.    In  insigne  it  has  been  changed  to  -e. 

§  244.  3.  Note  the  shortening  of  a  in  the  nominatives  animal 
and  calcar. 

§  245. 1.  7.  In  connection  with  this  sentence  and  the  cut 
below,  refer  the  class  to  the  description  of  the  Roman  galley 
in  Wallace's  "  Ben  Hur." 

§  245.  II.  I.  Because  of  the  lack,  abl.  of  cause.  2.  Imperator 
should  be  placed  first  because  it  is  the  common  subject  of  the 
principal  and  subordinate  clauses.  This  rule  of  order  is  usually 
observed  in  careful  writers. 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  3 1 

LESSON  XLIV 

§  246.  Point  out  that  these  nouns  are  irregular  only  in  having 
two  bases.  Note  the  shortening  of  i  before  m  in  vim  (of.  §  1 2.  2). 
Pronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  the  forms  of  iter.  Show 
that  in  spite  of  irregularities  they  follow  §  74.^,^. 

§  249.  L  Refer  to  the  historical  fact  that  Caesar  built  the  first 
bridge  over  the  Rhine.  Imperfttor,  vir  clirus,  in  English  simply 
the  distingtiishcd  commander. 

§  249.  IL  7.  On  the  position  oi  foot  soldiers^  see  Manual  on 
§245.  IL  I. 

FIFTH   REVIEW 

Review  the  word  lists  in  the  usual  way.  Put  the  emphasis 
of  the  "Review  Questions"  on  the  third  declension.  Fill  out  the 
summary,  §  520,  on  the  board,  the  pupils  dictating;  or  include 
it  in  the  written  test.  In  this  review,  as  in  all  others,  include 
questions  on  the  conjugation  of  verbs.  Drill  on  verbs  cannot  be 
overdone, 

LESSON  XLV 

§  254.  Observe  that  in  the  declension  of  ftcer  the  masculine 
and  feminine  forms  are  alike  in  all  cases  except  in  the  nomi- 
native singular,  and  that  the  neuter  ficre  is  declined  just  like 
insigne. 

§  256.  I.  As  we  are  told  in  §  257,  there  are  some  adjectives 
of  one  ending  having  consonant  stems.  Many  of  these  have 
adopted  all  the  forms  of  i-stems,  but  frequently  we  find  both 
-i  and  -«  in  the  ablative  singular. 

Fjcplain  that  the  letters  S.  P.  Q.  R.  below  the  eagle  in  the 
cut  stand  for  Senfltus  Populusque  ROminus.  They  were  used 
with  great  frequency  on  all  sorts  of  objects  to  mark  the  power 
or  sanction  of  the  Roman  government.  By  an  interesting  sur- 
vival the  same  letters  may  still  be  seen  in  modem  Rome  on  fire 
engines,  public  wagons,  and  other  objects  belonging  to  the  dty 
government 


32  LATIN   FOR  BEGINNERS 

LESSON  XLVI 

Along  with  this  Lesson  conduct  a  brief  oral  review  of  the 
first,  second,  and  third  declensions. 

§  260.  Pronounce  the  paradigms  for  the  class  when  assign- 
ing them.  Also  write  on  the  board  the  declension  of  exercitus 
and  drill  the  class  on  the  pronunciation  and  accent  of  the  forms. 


LESSON  XLVII 

This  Lesson  may  be  simplified  by  pointing  out  that  the  differ- 
ent relations  of  place  are  regularly  expressed  by  prepositions 
with  their  objects  (cf.  §§  263-265),  but  that  names  of  towns, 
small  islands,  domus  and  rus  omit  the  preposition  (cf.  §  266).  The 
only  thing  that  remains  to  be  explained  is  the  use  of  the  locative 
case  (§§  267,  268).  Simple  as  this  whole  matter  is,  you  will 
find  it  necessary  to  do  a  good  deal  of  drilling  here. 

Vocabulary,  p.  294.  Explain  that  propter  with  the  accusative 
is  somewhat  more  frequently  used  to  express  cause  than  the 
ablative,  especially  of  a  cause  lying  outside  of  the  person 
affected. 

§271.  It  will  amuse  and  interest  the  pupils  if  you  will  read 
to  them,  in  connection  with  this  story,  the  travesty  "  Daedalus 
and  Icarus,"  in  the  poems  of  John  G.  Saxe. 


LESSON  XLVIII 

In  connection  with  this  Lesson  you  should  assign  for  inflec- 
tion nouns  from  all  five  declensions. 

§  273.  Pronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  these  paradigms. 
Be  especially  careful  about  the  sound  of  long  and  short  e. 

§  275.  Write  on  the  board  some  simple  English  sentences 
which,  if  rendered  into  Latin,  would  illustrate  this  construction. 
Pupils  will  understand  time  when  more  readily  than  time  within 
which. 

§  277.    Note  the  emphasis  on  minim,  1.  6. 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  33 

LESSON  XLIX 

With  this  Lesson  begins  an  intensive  study  of  pronouns, 
which  is  continued  through  the  next  three  Lessons.  Review 
the  possessive  (§  98),  relative  (§  220),  and  interrogative  (§  225) 
pronouns  by  way  of  preparation  for  the  consideration  of  the 
whole  subject. 

§  280.  I.  Remind  the  pupils  that  the  personal  endings  of 
the  verb  take  the  place  of  unetnphatic  personal  pronouns  used 
as  subjects. 

§  282.  In  connection  with  this  article  remind  the  class  that 
cum  is  similarly  placed  with  relatives  and  interrogatives.  (See 
j).  100,  footnote  I.) 

§283.  Li,  2.  Have  the  class  explain  the  position  of  the 
possessives.    5.  Why  are  tti  and  ego  expressed } 

II .  I .  Make  you  and  /emphatic  by  expressing  them.  4.  Make 
-.7-  emphatic.  6.  Make  /  emphatic.  7.  Us  and  you  are,  of 
ourse,  datives. 

§  284.    Have  the  story  read  through  from  the  beginning. 

LESSON  L 

§  285.   Explain  the  meaning  of  intensive. 

§  287.  Pronounce  the  forms  in  this  paradigm  and  have  the 
lass  repeat.  The  class  will  find  the  accent  troublesome.  Insist 
on  the  distinction  between  idem  and  idem. 

Vocabulary,  p.  295.  Caution  on  the  accent  of  corpus,  cor 'ports, 
etc.,  as  distinguished  from  labor,  labO'ris,  etc. 

LESSON  LI 

§  290.    Explain  that  demonstrative  mtzns  pointing  out. 

§  291.  Tell  the  pupils  that  the  c  of  hie  is  the  remnant  of -ce, 
an  enclitic  particle  added  for  emphasis.  Compare  the  colloquial 
t/iis  here.  Without  this  the  dative  singular  would  end  in  -I,  like 
the  dative  singular  of  is  or  ipse.  Call  attention  to  the  form  haec 
as  the  only  variation  in  the  plural  from  the  plural  of  bonus.   Call 


34  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

for  the  declension  of  hie  in  combination  with  nouns  that  have 
lately  occurred. 

§  292.    Caution  on  the  accent  of  isti'us  and  illi'us. 

§  293.  Observe  that  the  demonstrative  adjective  regularly 
precedes  its  noun. 

Vocabulary,  p.  295.  Caution  on  the  accent  of  liber 'tas  and 
pris'tinus. 

§  294.  I.  1.  5.    Silvas,  feras,  montes,  objects  of  timent. 

The  chief  drill  in  this  exercise  should  be  on  the  declension 
and  meaning  of  the  demonstratives. 

LESSON  LII 

You  will  probably  have  to  devote  three  recitation  periods  to 
this  Lesson.  Pupils  always  find  difficulty  with  indefinite  pro- 
nouns. 

§  297.  This  whole  article  needs  very  thorough  study.  Write 
on  the  board  all  the  indefinite  pronouns  given  and  drill  on  their 
meaning  and  use. 

§  298. 1.  10.  Observe  that  illius  follows  its  noun.  In  this 
position  ille  has  the  meaning  that  well-known^  that  famous. 

§  298.  II.  3.  Caution  on  the  position  of  Pompeii.  4.  Some- 
thing to  some  one,  alicui  aliquid.  6.  Some  one,  aliquem ;  any  one, 
quemquam.    7.  Unless  some  one,  nisi  quia. 

§  299.  Have  the  story  read  through  from  the  beginning. 
1.  5.    Ei,  indirect  object  of  dedit. 

SIXTH   REVIEW 

This  review  is  especially  important  and  may  well  occupy  the 
time  of  three  recitation  periods.  One  of  these  should  be  devoted 
to  the  vocabulary  ;  another  to  adjectives  of  the  third  declension, 
the  fourth  and  fifth  declensions,  the  expressions  of  place,  and 
the  ablative  of  time;  the  third  to  indefinite  pronouns.  Strong 
classes  may  combine  the  last  two  in  a  single  written  lesson. 


LALHLKb    MANUAL  35 


LESSON  LI  1 1 


§  302.  It  may  be  well  to  tell  the  class  that  comparison  by 
using  adverbs  is  mostly  poetic  and  that  it  is  usual  only  with 
adjectives  ending  in  -us  preceded  by  e  or  i. 

Vocabulary,  p.  296.    Caution  on  the  accent  of  a'quila. 

§306.  I.  5.  Longius,  quite  long.  12.  Quidam  usually  follows 
its  noun.    Cf.  quoddam  in  10. 

§  306.  IL  5.  Quite  ill,  aegrior.  6.  Some,  aliquOs  or  quOsdam 
according  as  the  word  is  considered  to  be  more  or  less  indefinite. 

"  The  Labors  of  Hercules  "  (p.  197),  which  may  be  begun  at 
this  point,  will  be  found  very  easy  to  translate.  It  is  recom- 
mended that  with  these  selections  translation  at  sight  be  prac- 
ticed as  much  as  possible.  No  exercise  will  be  found  more 
helpful  in  acquiring  reading  power.    (See  M.  11.) 

LESSON  LIV 

§  307.  Gracilis  and  humilis  are  not  as  common  as  the  other 
words,  but  it  is  about  as  easy  to  learn  the  complete  list  of  six 
as  to  learn  four,  and  the  knowledge  will  be  useful  later  on. 

Vocabulary,  p.  296.  Caution  on  the  accent  of  alacris.  The 
penult  is  short  because  it  does  not  end  in  a  consonant,  the  word 
being  divided  into  syllables  thus :  a-la-cris.  See§§9.2.«;  13.  i.<j. 

§3io.L  In  the  Latin- English  sentences,  have  the  pupils 
change  such  as  contain  the  ablative  after  a  comparative  without 
quam  into  sentences  using  the  alternative  construction. 

§  310.  II.  Require  the  pupils  to  write  the  sentences  contain- 
ing a  comparison  (i,  2,  3,  8)  both  with  and  without  quam. 

LESSON   LV 

The  adjectives  in  §§311,  312,  are  very  common  and  their 
comparison  should  be  thoroughly  learned. 

§313.  Observe  that  in  the  plural  plQs  is  declined  like  an 
i-stem,  excepting  the  form  plQra. 

§  3 1 4. 1.  9.  Maior  c(ipia,  translate,  quite  a  supply. 


36  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

LESSON  LVI 

§315.  The  meaning  and  comparison  of  these  adjectives 
should  be  memorized,  but  they  need  not  be  learned  as  a  list. 

§  316.  Review  §  50  to  make  clear  the  point  that  the  measure 
of  difference  is  an  ablative  relation. 

§317.^.  Require  the  pupils  to  learn  the  meaning  of  these 
words. 

Vocabulary,  p.  297.  Remind  the  class  that  b  in  obses  has  the 
sound  of  p. 

§  318.  L  I.  Call  attention  to  the  agreement  of  infirmi  with 
Romani  and  refer  to  §  2 15.  ^.  4.  Have  this  given  without  quam. 
7.  Note  the  emphatic  position  of  optimos. 

§318.  IL  2.  Have  this  sentence  given  both  with  and  with- 
out quam. 

LESSON  LVII 

§320.^.  Of  course  the  neuter  accusative  singular  will  be 
the  same  in  forn)  as  the  neuter  nominative  singular,  but  the 
comparative  adverb  is  the  accusative  case  of  the  adjective  used 
adverbially  (cf.  §  322). 

§  323.  Explain  that  magnopere  is  the  ablative  singular  of 
magnum  opus  used  adverbially. 

Vocabulary,  p.  297.  Caution  on  the  accent  of  cucur'ri.  Note 
the  change  of  quantity  of  e  in  gens,  gentis. 

§  326.  L  7.  Ask  what  aliquae  would  mean  instead  of  quaedam. 

Require  the  comparison  of  all  the  adjectives  and  adverbs  in 
this  exercise. 

LESSON  LVIII 

§  328.  Write  several  sets  of  Arabic  numbers  on  the  board 
before  the  recitation,  one  set  for  each  pupil,  and  send  the  class 
to  the  board  to  write  the  Latin  equivalents.  Mistakes  in  spell- 
ing are  sure  to  be  made.  Repeat  this  drill  for  several  days. 
Drill  orally  also. 

§  329.  3.  Observe  that  tres  is  declined  exactly  like  the  plural 
of  omnis  (§255),  and  that  the  plural  of  mille  is  like  that  of 
insigne  (§  244). 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  37 

§  330-  Warn  the  class  against  using  a  partitive  genitive  when 
the  numbers  and  words  of  quantity  include  the  whoUy  and  not 
merely  a  part.  We  must  then  use  a  case  in  agreement,  and  not 
the  partitive  genitive.  For  example,  all  of  us  would  not  be  ex- 
pressed in  Latin  by  omnSs  nostrum,  but  by  omnCs  nOs  {we  all). 

§  33 1 .  <^.  You  will  need  to  drill  on  the  construction  with  mille. 
Dictate  several  simple  examples  to  pupils  at  the  board. 

Vocabulary,  p.  297.  Caution  on  the  accent  of  merci'tor  and 
cog'nitus,  and  note  the  long  i  in  mOnitiO. 

§332.1.1.  Ask  the  pupils  to  give  the  Latin  for  Orsar 
burrud  all  of  the  buildings. 


LESSON  LIX 

§  333.    Conduct  the  work  on  the  ordinals  as  on  the  cardinals. 

§  334.  Only  the  first  three  of  these  are  given,  because  they 
are  the  most  frequently  used. 

§  336.  It  is  important  that  you  point  out  to  the  class  that 
the  accusative  expressions  of  time  and  space  are  adverbial  in 
character  and  hence  are  used  to  modify  verbs,  adjectives,  or 
adverbs.  In  Lesson  LXXVI  we  shall  see  that  adjective  expres- 
sions of  time  and  space  are  in  the  genitive,  as,  a  march  of  ten 
days,  a  7vall  of  ten  feet. 

Vocabulary,  p.  298.  Explain  that  novissimum  agmen  means 
literally  the  neivest  line,  and  that  it  signified  the  rear  because  that 
is  where  the  newly  enrolled  soldiers  marched.  They  could  not 
be  trusted  in  a  place  of  danger  or  responsibility. 

C'aution  on  the  accent  of  ce'cidi. 

Explain  that  a  Roman  pace  was  the  distance  from  where  the 
foot  left  the  ground  to  where  the  same  foot  touched  the  ground 
again.    It  is  therefore  not  a  single,  but  a  double,  step. 

§  337.  I.  Mention  here  that  Caesar's  seven  years  of  cam- 
paigning in  Gaul  are  the  subject  of  his  famous  Commentaries. 

§  337.  n.  Call  attention  to  the  phrase  For  tivo  hours  in  6 
and  In  three  hours  in  7.  The  former  expresses  extent  of  time, 
the  latter  time  within  which.   What  cases  must  be  used  ? 


38  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 


LESSON  LX 


§  339.  In  §  493  the  full  synopsis  of  deponents  is  given. 
Students  will,  of  course,  learn  the  synopsis  only  as  far  as  they  have 
gone  in  their  study  of  conjugation,  omitting  the  subjunctive,  etc. 

§  340.  There  is  no  profit  in  requiring  pupils  to  learn  this 
list.  Have  them  learn  simply  the  meanings.  The  case  is  differ- 
ent with  the  list  of  prepositions  governing  the  ablative. 

Vocabulary,  p.  298.  Caution  on  the  accent  of  e'gredi,  con'- 
sequor,  in'sequor,  sub'sequor. 

§341.1.  7-11.  It  may  be  well  to  tell  the  class  something 
about  Caesar's  invasion  of  Britain. 

SEVENTH   REVIEW 

This  review  covers  a  larger  vocabulary  than  any  of  the  others. 
Its  length,  however,  is  more  apparent  than  real.  It  will  not 
appear  so  formidable  to  the  pupils  if  you  will  point  out  to  them 
the  fact  that  irregular  adjectives  are  given  in  their  different 
degrees,  and  that  the  adverbs  are,  in  general,  known  by  the 
adjectives  from  which  they  are  derived. 

It  is  suggested  that  two  days  be  devoted  to  this  review,  — 
the  first,  on  the  vocabulary;  the  second,  a  written  lesson  on 
the  review  questions. 

PART  III 

Read  over  with  the  pupils  the  introductory  note  and  discuss 
with  them  what  remains  to  be  done.  Point  out  that  the  suc- 
ceeding Lessons  contain  no  special  vocabularies  and  that  the 
words  already  studied  are  to  be  gone  over  again. 

"  The  Story  of  a  Roman  Boy  "  contains  much  general  infor- 
mation pertaining  to  Roman  life  and  customs,  and  still  more  of 
special  information  dealing  with  the  Roman  art  of  war.  This 
is  found  especially  in  the  latter  part  and  is  designed  to  form  a 
suitable  introduction  to  the  reading  of  Caesar. 

It  is  suggested  in  the  note  that  the  story  may  be  read  either 
along  with  the  Lessons  or  after  the  Lessons  are  finished.  Ex- 
perience seems  to  show  that  the  former  is  the  better  plan.   The 


TEACHhRb    MANUAL  39 

successive  chapters  of  the  story  illustrate  the  constructions  dis- 
cussed in  the  Lesson  immediately  preceding,  and,  coming  as 
they  do  between  the  Lessons,  pupils  have  a  chance  to  digest 
what  they  have  just  learned  before  they  are  called  upon  to 
take  up  something  new. 

LESSON  LXI 

§  344.  Pronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  these  para- 
digms. Explain  the  formation  fully  in  each  conjugation  and 
emphasize  especially  the  importance  of  .the  mood  sign. 

§  346.  The  importance  of  a  thorough  mastery  of  this  article 
cannot  be  overestimated.  It  lays  the  foundation  for  all  future 
work  on  the  syntax  of  the  subjunctive.  It  would  be  well 
to  have  the  class  memorize ,  the  Latin  sentences  with  their 
translations. 

§  347-  Write  on  the  board  other  English  sentences,  some 
of  which  would  in  Latin  require  the  subjunctive  and  others  the 
indicative,  and  have  the  class  specify  in  each  case. 

LESSON  LXII 

§  350.  Require  the  class  to  memorize  this  article  and  the 
examples  in  §  351. 

§  352.  Dwell  on  the  point  that  Latin  prose  does  not  use  the 
infinitive  to  express  purpose. 

§  353.  Prepare  additional  simple  sentences  containing  pur- 
pose clauses,  which  the  class  tan  translate  orally  or  at  the  board 
from  dictation. 

LESSON  LXIII 

i^  354.   I'ronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  these  paradigms. 

§  356.  The  law  of  tense  sequence  is  of  great  importance. 
Write  the  table  in  §  357  on  the  board,  and  keep  it  there  until 
every  pupil  has  mastered  its  theory  and  its  practice. 

§  360.  I.  Change  the  principal  verbs  in  these  sentences  to  a 
primary  tense  and  have  the  class  make  the  necessary  changes 
in  the  tenses  of  the  dependent  subjunctives. 


40  LATIN   FOR  BEGINNERS 

§  360.  II.  After  these  sentences  have  been  correctly  written 
assign  them  again,  changing  the  tenses  of  the  verbs  from 
secondary  to  primary. 

LESSON  LXIV 

§§  361-364.  Pronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  these  para- 
digms. In  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  passive  subjunctive  call 
attention  to  the  similarity  in  formation  between  the  subjunctive 
and  indicative. 

§  366.  Require  the  class  to  memorize  these  examples,  and 
make  clear,  by  reference  to  §  348,  the  reason  for  the  use  of  the 
subjunctive  mood. 

§  368. 1.  7.  Explain  that  with  peto,  postulo,  and  quaero  the 
person  from  whom  something  is  asked  is  expressed  by  the 
ablative  with  a  preposition.  The  usual  preposition  with  peto 
and  postulo  is  a  or  ab,  with  quaero  it  may  be  a  or  ab,  de,  or  ex. 
When  a  subjunctive  clause  follows  these  verbs  the  person  asked 
may  be  omitted  after  the  verb  of  asking  and  expressed  merely 
as  the  subject  of  the  subjunctive  verb.    See  §  366,  example  3. 

§  368.  II.  3.  They  will  ask  him^  etc.,  cL  note  on  I.  7  above. 
5.  Cf.  §  366,  example  5. 

LESSON  LXV 

§  369.  Pronounce  and  have  the  class  repeat  the  paradigms  of 
the  subjunctive  of  possum.  For  the  formation  of  the  imperfect 
subjunctive,  cf.  §  354- 

§§370,371.  Dwell  on  the  point  that  the  reason  for  trans- 
lating ut  by  that  not  and  ne  by  that  or  lest  is  due  to  the  differ- 
ence between  the  English  and  Latin  idioms,  and  that  in  the  Latin 
itself  ut  and  ne  have  the  same  meaning  after  verbs  of  fearing 
as  after  other  verbs. 

LESSON  LXVI 

§  374.  Write  on  the  board  the  participles,  active  and  passive, 
of  the  English  verb  to  love,  and  emphasize  the  point  that  Latin 
has  no  present  passive  participle  {being  loved)  nor  any  perfect 
active  participle  {having  loved). 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  4I 

§374.^.  Require  the  pupils  to  give  the  meanings  of  the 
participles  as  well  as  the  forms. 

§375.  This  article  is  very  important,  especially  the  point 
made  in  a  that  the  perfect  participle  of  a  deponent  verb  is  pas- 
sive in  form  but  active  in  meaning. 

§  377.  Insist  on  a  careful  study  of  these  model  sentences,  and 
lay  stress  on  the  fact  that  as  a  rule  a  participle  should  be  trans- 
lated by  a  clause. 

LESSON  LXVII 

§  379.  The  tenses  of  these  verbs  which  will  give  most  dif- 
ficulty are  the  present  indicative  and  the  present  and  imperfect 
subjunctive.  Give  them  especial  attention.  Be  sure  that  the 
pupils  accent  the  penult  in  the  first  and  second  persons  plural 
of  the  present  and  imperfect  subjunctive,  and  compare  the  sim- 
ilar tenses  of  possum.  For  the  formation  of  the  imperfect  sub- 
junctive, cf.  §  354. 

§§  380,  381.  Possibly  no  Latin  construction  is  so  much  used 
as  the  ablative  absolute,  and  you  will  do  well  to  make  the  work 
on  these  articles  exceedingly  thorough.  Among  the  points  to 
be  emphasized  are: 

a.  The  ablative  absolute  must  not  be  used  when  a  noun  and 
participle  form  the  subject  or  object  of  a  sentence  (sec  §381, 
note  2). 

d.  The  ablative  absolute  should  not  as  a  rule  be  translated 
literally  (see  §  380.  If). 

c.  An  English  absolute  construction  containing  a  perfect  active 
participle  must  be  changed  to  the  passive  voice  unless  the  verb 
happens  to  be  deponent  (see  §  381,  note  3). 

§  382.  L  6.  Translate, C?«  hearing  the  shoutings  etc.  7.  Trans- 
late, After  Ccesar  had  encouraged  the  legions^  etc.  8.  Translate, 
When  this  was  kncnvn,  etc. 

§  382.  n.  4.  To  advance,  the  subjunctive  of  purpose.  5.  Since 
Casarwas  lecuUr,  see  §  381,  note  i. 


42  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

LESSON  LXVIII 

§  384.  The  reason  for  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  to  express 
result  is  not  discussed,  being  a  subject  too  difficult  for  the  aver- 
age beginner  to  understand.  It  is  better  for  him  to  accept  the 
fact  than  to  labor  with  the  theory.  (Teachers  are  referred  to 
Allen  and  Greenough's  Grammar,  §  534.) 

Emphasize  the  point  that  the  subjunctive  of  result  is  trans- 
lated like  an  indicative  (see  §  384.  c). 

§  388  L  5.  Note  the  object  clause  of  result.  There  is  another 
in  the  eighth  sentence.  12.  Note  the  negative  purpose.  Ask  how 
the  sentence  would  be  translated  if  ne  were  ut  non. 

§  388.  II.  Observe  that  sentences  4  and  6  contain  result 
clauses,  and  5  and  7  purpose  clauses. 

LESSON   LXIX 

§  389.  Have  these  model  sentences  memorized. 

§391.  This  construction  may  be  profitably  compared  with 
that  of  the  double  object  in  English. 

§  394. 1.  I.  Quae  .  .  .  non  visa  sint,  such  as  have  fiof  been  seen, 
a  relative  clause  of  characteristic.  4.  Quo  mortem  prohibere  pos- 
sent,  by  which  they  could  ward  off  death.  7.  Translate,  The  Ger- 
mans are  not  the  men  to,  etc. 

§  394.  II.  4.  Not  the  man  to,  cf.  I.  7. 

EIGHTH  REVIEW 

§  527.  We  here  begin  the  second  review  of  the  vocabularies, 
without  counting  the  work  done  on  each  special  vocabulary  in 
the  recitations  on  the  Lessons.  After  all  that  preceding  study  this 
final  review  should  not  be  difficult,  but  should  serve  to  fix  the 
words  in  the  pupils'  minds  beyond  fear  of  losing  them. 

§  528.  If  you  have  not  already  done  so,  add  the  subjunctive 
mood  and  the  participles  to  your  blank  scheme  of  the  verb  (see 
p.  27)  and  drill  on  all  moods  and  tenses  as  a  daily  exercise. 
To  the  question  '*  Why  is  the  ablative  absolute  of  such  frequent 
occurrence  in  Latin .? "  it  may  be  answered  that  the  absence  of 


TEACHERS'  MAM  UAL  43 

a  perfect  active  participle  is  an  important  reason  leading  to  tin- 
use  of  this  construction  (cf .  §381,  note  3). 

LESSON  LXX 

§  395.  Dwell  on  the  point  that  the  reason  for  the  use  of  the 
subjunctive  in  a  cum  clause  and  in  a  relative  clause  of  description 
is  the  same  (§  389.  a). 

It  will  help  the  student  to  tell  him  that  an  indicative  clause 
with  cum  fixing  the  time  of  the  main  action  is  very  often  pre- 
ceded by  tum  or  some  other  expression  of  time.  See  the  first 
example  under  §  395,  and  §  400.  L  10 ;  IL  i.  further,  cum  con- 
cessive is  often  followed  by  tamen,  nevertheUss. 

§  397.  <7.  The  ablative  of  specification  is  closely  akin  to  the 
ablative  of  manner  and  shows  some  resemblance  to  that  of 
means  and  of  cause.  It,  therefore,  comes  under  the  with  or  by 
ablative  relation. 

§  399.  The  idioms  included  in  this  and  the  following  lessons 
are  very  common  in  Caesar.  Require  the  class  to  memorize  them. 
The  labor  spent  will  be  well  rewarded  later. 

Explain  that  certior  in  certior  fieri  is  a  predicate  adjective 
and  must  agree  with  the  subject,  just  as  certiOrem  in  certiOrem 
facere  is  a  predicate  adjective  agreeing  with  the  object. 

LESSON  LXX  I 

§  404.  Remind  the  class  that  the  gerundive,  ending  as  it 
does  in  -us,  is  declined  like  bonuSf-a,  -um,  and  agrees  with  its 
noun  like  any  adjective. 

§405.  This  article  merits  very  careful  study.  Have  the  class 
memorize  the  examples  and  especially  the  observations  under 
a.  If  these  are  well  understood  the  pupils  will  have  no  trouble 
with  the  gerund  and  gerundive. 

Point  out  to  the  class  that  a  gerund  must  end  in  -i,  -«,  or  -um, 
and  that  any  other  ending  will  mark  the  form  in  question  as 
gerundive. 

§  406.  2.  Observe  that  the  presence  of  a  preposition  forbids 
the  use  of  a  gerund  -f  object 


44  LATIN  FOR  BEGINNERS 

§  411.  I.  In  teaching  this  exercise  require  the  pupil  in  every 
case  to  distinguish  between  the  gerund  and  the  gerundive.  If 
the  gerund  has  an  object,  ask  him  to  give  the  corresponding 
gerundive  construction.  In  the  case  of  a  gerundive,  ask  for  the 
corresponding  gerund  construction  and  whether  it  would  be 
good  Latin. 

LESSON  LXII 

§  412.  In  connection  with  the  study  of  eo,  have  the  class 
learn  the  declension  of  iens,  the  present  participle  (see  §  472). 

§  413.  Point  out  the  force  of  the  prepositional  prefix  in  each 
of  these  compound  verbs. 

§  414.  Be  sure  that  the  class  understands  indirect  statements 
in  English  before  taking  them  up  in  Latin. 

§  415.  To  make  the  comparison  more  easily,  write  the  Eng- 
lish and  Latin  direct  and  indirect  statements  upon  the  board 
side  by  side.  Dwell  especially  upon  a,  b,  and  c  in  this  and  the 
preceding  article.  Point  out  that  we  have  here  a  use  of  the 
infinitive  quite  foreign  to  the  English  uses  discussed  in  Les- 
son XXXVII. 

§  420.  Write  a  number  of  simple  English  sentences  contain- 
ing indirect  statements  introduced  by  verbs  of  saying,  tellifig, 
k?iowing,  thinking,  and  perceiving,  and  discuss  with  the  class 
their  Latin  translation.  If  you  make  the  sentences  easy  enough, 
the  class,  with  your  aid,  will  be  able  to  render  them  into  Latin. 

§  422.  I.  2.  Remember  that  in  a  form  like  iisse  the  two  i's 
are  usually  contracted  into  long  i.  5.  In  this  sentence  and  in 
those  that  follow  require  the  class  to  give  the  Latin  for  the 
direct  form  of  the  indirect  statements.  In  this  case,  for  exam- 
ple, the  direct  form  would  be  Galli  flumen  transigrunt. 

LESSON  LXXIII 

§  424.  Remind  the  class  of  the  rule  for  the  formation  of  the 
imperfect  subjunctive,  §  354. 

§  424.  I.  Caution  on  the  accent  of  these  compounds.  Call 
attention  to  the  force  of  the  prefix  in  each  verb. 


TEACHERS'  MANUAL  45 

§  425.  Emphasize  the  point  that  it  is  the  meaning  of  the 
compound  verb  that  calls  for  the  dative,  and  not  the  preposition 
with  which  the  verb  is  compounded. 

§  426,  note  I.   Caution  on  the  accent  of  these  verbs. 

§428.  II.  4.  We  have  been  informed,  in  Latin,  We  have  been 
made  more  certain. 

LESSON   LXXIV 

§  430.  Students  usually  have  trouble  in  distinguishing  be- 
tween direct  and  indirect  questions.  Give  a  number  of  English 
examples  of  each. 

§  43 1 .  These  examples  should  be  memorized.  Lay  great 
stress  on  </,  b,  and  c. 

§  434.  I.  Write  the  direct  form  of  the  indirect  questions  on 
the  board  and  have  the  pupils  compare  it  with  the  indirect  form. 

LESSON  LXXV 

§  439.  I.  2.  Ask  whether  ad  locum  dgligendum  is  a  gerund  or 
a  gerundive  construction.  The  form  would  be  the  same  for 
either,  but  the  presence  of  the  preposition  shows  that  it  must 
be  a  gerundive  (cf.  §  406).  3.  Translate  ipsum,  veryid.  §  285). 

LESSON  LXXVI 

§  442.  Have  these  examples  memorized.  Give  other  ex- 
amples in  English  calling  for  the  same  construction  if  rendered 
into  Latin. 

§  447.  I.  3.  Ask  why  qu5  is  preferred  here  to  ut  Cf.  §  350.  I. 
10.  Footnote  2  is  very  important.  Illustrate  the  point  by  fre- 
quent examples  if  necessary. 

§  447.  II.  Have  sentences  admitting  either  the  genitive  or 
the  ablative  written  in  both  ways. 

LESSONS  LXXVII-LXXIX 

These  Lessons,  embracing  as  they  do  a  review  of  all  the  con- 
siructions  used  in  the  book,  assume  an  unusual  importance. 
Make  the  review  as  searching  and  rigid  as  possible.  (See  M.  13.) 


.'\/v.Arf.;£  :f-^  'J,: 


,'Vt 


' '^J^Lii'^'t^-■<' -J -■'^  -''"'   -•.''«•-•      .,^*>*-''   >i--f'-     i-:.'^  *'*.■,■        •,       ^  .^-'^/r' 

"t?*--/^-  -.:■  .'c-':  ■*      <  •     "^    ■  ■•;-  'i^  ^  ^-^/^  i  -  ■ .  V^.-,  >:-:•-  ..'-■.^-  "  '  -  ■.  ;;■/•■  ■■.-]-^ 


•    '      iV^  i- 


f^"^^^::-g,... 


.■•»'  ■*. 


,r-> 


/.■r^.. 


?i3;v  fJ^;.^.j>f-"."^''-,'  ./-:V^^^-\-V'--  ■•-x^''^-&-?'-.';  ■>^^v'•^'ivV'■^•■• ",:',,  -'f'-V    ;-■'*:. --' 


^^g^:^:^^^.u,y 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 
University  of  California  Library 
or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 

(415)  642-6753 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days 

prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


JUL  3  1  1991 


YB  36240 


700948 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  UBRARY 


I 


P!  I 


liii'ii'iiiliiii 


